This is a modern-English version of The Art & Practice of Typography: A Manual of American Printing, Including a Brief History up to the Twentieth Century, with Reproductions of the Work of Early Masters of the Craft, and a Practical Discussion and an Extensive Demonstration of the Modern Use of Type-faces and Methods of Arrangement, originally written by Gress, Edmund G. (Edmund Geiger). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber's Note:

Transcriber's Note:

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is in the public domain.

The Art & Practice of
TYPOGRAPHY

THE FIRST PRINTED DECLARATION

Fac-simile in reduced size (original type form about twelve by seventeen inches) of the Declaration of Independence officially printed about July 5, 1776. It was this setting of the Declaration that was read before Washington’s army. Reproduced direct from the original in the Congressional minute book of July 4, 1776

THE FIRST PRINTED DECLARATION

A reduced-size facsimile (original size about twelve by seventeen inches) of the Declaration of Independence officially printed around July 5, 1776. This version of the Declaration was read to Washington’s army. Reproduced directly from the original in the Congressional minute book of July 4, 1776.

The Art & Practice of
TYPOGRAPHY
A Manual of American Printing
INCLUDING A SHORT HISTORY THROUGH THE TWENTIETH CENTURY, WITH REPRODUCTIONS OF THE WORK OF EARLY MASTERS OF THE CRAFT, ALONG WITH A PRACTICAL DISCUSSION AND A COMPREHENSIVE DEMONSTRATION OF MODERN TYPEFACE USE AND ARRANGEMENT METHODS.

Second Edition
By
EDMUND G. GRESS
Editor of The American Printer
AUTHOR THE AMERICAN HANDBOOK OF PRINTING
NEW YORK·OSWALD PUBLISHING COMPANY·1917
Copyright, 1917, by the
Oswald Publishing Company

TO THE TYPOGRAPHERS OF THE PAST WHO MADE THE ART HONORED AMONG MEN AND TO THE TYPOGRAPHERS OF THE PRESENT WHO ARE RESTORING TO PRINTING ITS ANCIENT DIGNITY THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE
 
Author's Foreword vii
 
Contents Summary ix
 
List of Replicas xvi
 
Designer List xx
 
 
WHEN BOOKS WERE WRITTEN 1
 
THE ORIGIN OF TYPOGRAPHY 7
 
THE SPREAD OF TYPOGRAPHY 13
 
TYPOGRAPHY IN COLONIAL DAYS 19
 
TYPOGRAPHY IN THE 19th CENTURY 27
 
THE “LAYOUT” MAN 35
 
HARMONY AND APPROPRIATENESS 41
 
TONE AND CONTRAST 47
 
PROPORTION, BALANCE AND SPACING 53
 
ORNAMENTATION 59
 
THE TYPOGRAPHY OF BOOKS 67
 
BOOKLETS, PAMPHLETS, BROCHURES, LEAFLETS 75
 
CATALOGS 83
 
PROGRAMS 91
 
ANNOUNCEMENTS 99
 
TICKETS 107
 
LETTERHEADS AND ENVELOPS 111
 
BILLHEADS AND STATEMENTS 119
 
PACKAGE LABELS 123
 
BUSINESS CARDS 127
 
THE BLOTTER 131
 
POSTERS, CAR CARDS, WINDOW CARDS 135
 
ADVERTISEMENTS 139
 
NEWSPAPERS 147
 
PERIODICALS 151
 
HOUSE-ORGANS 161
 
TYPE-FACES 169
 
IMPRINTS 195
 
 
AppendixGREETING CARDS  
vii

AUTHOR’S PREFACE

In the preface to the first edition of “The Art and Practice of Typography,” the author stated that he did not “anticipate again having the pleasure of producing a book as elaborate as this one,” but the favor with which the volume was received made another edition advisable, and in consequence he has had the additional pleasure of enlarging and revising it and of producing a volume even more elaborate and with a better selection of examples.

In the preface to the first edition of “The Art and Practice of Typography,” the author mentioned that he didn't expect to have the opportunity to create a book as detailed as this one again. However, because the book was so well received, a new edition was necessary. As a result, he has had the added pleasure of expanding and updating it, creating an even more detailed volume with a better selection of examples.

The task of rewriting and replanning the second edition was near completion when America entered the war against Germany, and now, a few months later, the book is presented to the public. The first edition was published in February, 1910. Work on the new edition was begun by the author in the latter part of 1913, and so great has been the task, in addition to his customary editorial labors, that almost four years have passed.

The process of rewriting and updating the second edition was nearly finished when America joined the war against Germany, and now, a few months later, the book is being released to the public. The first edition came out in February 1910. The author started working on the new edition in late 1913, and the effort has been so extensive, alongside his usual editorial duties, that almost four years have gone by.

The extent of the work will be comprehended when it is mentioned that there are twenty-eight chapters, in which the illustrations or typographic arrangements, numbering six hundred and fifteen, include forty full-page specially-printed inserts. Most of these illustrations or typographic arrangements are in color. The text matter, which makes direct reference to the examples, totals nearly one hundred thousand words.

The scope of the work is clear when you consider that there are twenty-eight chapters, featuring six hundred and fifteen illustrations or typography layouts, including forty full-page specially-printed inserts. Most of these illustrations or typography arrangements are in color. The text, which directly references the examples, adds up to nearly one hundred thousand words.

That these examples are mostly high-class and by many of the best typographers in America (Europe also being represented), is due to the fact that the author during his connection with The American Printer has received several thousand pieces of printing, from which selections were made for this work.

That these examples are mostly from top-tier sources and created by some of the best typographers in America (with some representation from Europe) is because the author, during his time with The American Printer, received thousands of printing pieces, from which selections were made for this work.

Great care was exercised in the choice of examples in order that the book would not become obsolete, and it is believed that most of the type arrangements shown will be considered good for a hundred years to come. That this is possible is proved by the Whittingham titles on page 32, one of which is sixty-eight and the other seventy-three years old at this writing. These titles were set up when most typography was poor, yet few other type arrangements of that time would meet approval today; which indicates that it is not when printing is done, but how it is done that makes it good or bad.

Great care was taken in choosing examples so that the book wouldn't become outdated, and it's believed that most of the type arrangements shown will still be considered good for the next hundred years. This is demonstrated by the Whittingham titles on page 32, one of which is sixty-eight years old and the other seventy-three at this time. These titles were created when most typography was subpar, yet few other type arrangements from that era would be approved today; indicating that it's not when printing is done, but how it is done that makes it good or bad.

Attention should be called to the plan of this volume. There are two parts, the first having to do with typography of the past and the second with typography of the present. Good printing of the present has a basic connection with that of the past, and for this reason one part is incomplete without the other.

Attention should be drawn to the layout of this book. There are two sections: the first focuses on the typography of the past, while the second addresses the typography of the present. Today's good printing is fundamentally linked to that of the past, which is why one section is incomplete without the other.

The entire first part should be studied before any of the ideas in the second part are applied to present-day problems, and especially should the chapter on Type-Faces be patiently read and studied. The printer should first know type-faces and then learn how to use them.

The whole first section should be learned before applying any of the ideas in the second section to today's issues, and especially the chapter on Type-Faces should be carefully read and studied. The printer should first understand type-faces and then learn how to use them.

In the chapters on Harmony, Tone, Proportion, Ornamentation and other art principles the author does not intend to advocate that his readers shall make pictures with type or build pages that are merely beautiful. The first requirement of typography is that it shall be easy to read; the second is that it shall be good to look at. The efficient typographer studies the copy and arranges it so that the reader’s task is an easy and pleasant one.

In the chapters on Harmony, Tone, Proportion, Ornamentation and other art principles, the author doesn't want to suggest that his readers should create images with text or design pages that are just pretty. The main goal of typography is that it should be easy to read; the second goal is that it should be visually appealing. A skilled typographer examines the content and organizes it in a way that makes reading a simple and enjoyable experience.


In planning the second edition the general style of the first edition was retained. However, an effort was made to change the style, especially of the binding, but so satisfactory was the original that it was again adopted.

In planning the second edition, the overall style of the first edition was kept. However, there was an attempt to change the style, particularly of the binding, but the original was so satisfying that it was used again.

The historical chapters in the first part have been revised and slightly altered, but they are practically as before. Extensive changes have been made in the second part. The text has been thoroly revised, and better typographic examples substituted in many cases. These chapters especially have been greatly altered: Booklets, Catalogs, Announcements, Letterheads, Billheads, Business Cards, Posters, Advertisements, Imprints.

The historical chapters in the first part have been updated and slightly changed, but they are mostly the same. Major revisions have taken place in the second part. The text has been thoroughly revised, and better typographic examples have been used in many instances. These chapters, in particular, have been significantly modified: Booklets, Catalogs, Announcements, Letterheads, Billheads, Business Cards, Posters, Advertisements, Imprints.

The chapter on Type-Faces is all new and has been enlarged from ten to twenty-four pages. New chapters on the following subjects have been added: Package Labels, Blotters, Newspapers, Periodicals, House-Organs. In place of the medley of contest specimens in the appendix of the first edition, there are halftone reproductions of more than one hundred attractive holiday greetings.

The chapter on Typefaces is completely new and has expanded from ten to twenty-four pages. New chapters on the following subjects have been added: Package Labels, Blotters, Newspapers, Periodicals, and House-Organs. Instead of the mix of contest samples in the appendix of the first edition, there are halftone reproductions of over one hundred appealing holiday greetings.

No one realizes more than does the author the minor defects in typography, presswork and other details that viiiare present in this volume, yet the effort of a Hercules and the patience of a Job have been expended in making everything as correct as possible. As the book now stands, it is a reaching after the ideal, with human inability to attain perfection. It is needless to point out imperfections; the reader will discover them.

No one understands better than the author the small flaws in the typography, printing, and other details in this book. Still, a Herculean effort and immense patience have been put into making everything as accurate as possible. As it is now, this book is an attempt to reach for the ideal, knowing that human limitations make perfection unattainable. There's no need to highlight the mistakes; the reader will find them.

In his selection of examples and recommendation of type-faces the author has been entirely free from pressure from any source. If certain type-faces are favored, it is because the author believes he is doing something for the cause of good printing by favoring them. What has been written has been written with sincerity.

In choosing examples and recommending typefaces, the author has been completely free from any outside influence. If some typefaces are preferred, it's because the author genuinely believes that supporting them contributes to the cause of good printing. Everything written has been done sincerely.


It is well to mention that the “Pilgrim’s Progress” title on page 21 is not genuine. Having seen the book on exhibition at the New York Public Library, the author arranged to have it photographed and included in this work. The sequel to this is interesting and rather humorous. When the chapter on Type-Faces was being written and Caslon types were being studied, the author was startled to find that the types used on the “Pilgrim’s Progress” page were the same as those William Caslon was supposed to have designed forty-four years later. Greatly puzzled, the author made a trip to the library and examined the original. He immediately saw that the type-face used on the body of the book differed from that on the title. Discovering a note on the fly-leaf signed by William Pickering, the explanation dawned on him. The book was probably owned by Pickering in the middle of the last century and the title-page being missing a new one was set up, printed and inserted when the book was rebound. It was Whittingham, Pickering’s printer, who revived the Caslon types about that time, and he naturally used these types as the nearest approach to the English types of the period, 1678, when “Pilgrim’s Progress” was first published.

It’s important to note that the title “Pilgrim’s Progress” on page 21 is not authentic. After seeing the book on display at the New York Public Library, the author arranged to have it photographed and included in this work. The sequel to this story is quite interesting and somewhat humorous. While writing the chapter on Type-Faces and studying Caslon types, the author was surprised to find that the types used on the “Pilgrim’s Progress” page were identical to those that William Caslon was thought to have designed forty-four years later. Confused, the author took a trip to the library to examine the original book. He quickly noticed that the type used for the body of the book was different from that on the title page. Upon discovering a note on the fly-leaf signed by William Pickering, the explanation became clear. The book likely belonged to Pickering in the middle of the last century, and since the title page was missing, a new one was created, printed, and inserted when the book was rebound. It was Whittingham, Pickering’s printer, who revived the Caslon types around that time, and he naturally used these types as they were the closest match to the English types from the period, 1678, when “Pilgrim’s Progress” was first published.


It is impossible to mention by name all of those who have in one way or another assisted and encouraged the author in the production of this volume. A list of acknowledgments would include typographers of international note and typographers-to-be whose prentice hands need guidance. It would include office associates and those of the workrooms whose interest and attention to technical details helped much in the effort to make the work worthy.

It’s not possible to name everyone who has helped and supported the author in putting this book together. A list of acknowledgments would include well-known typographers and aspiring typographers who still need guidance. It would also feature office colleagues and those in the workrooms whose interest in the technical details contributed significantly to making this work worthwhile.

There is one, however, were such a list printed, whose name would lead all the rest, the man who, back in 1903, conceived the idea of this book; without whose business support this elaborate and costly work would have been impossible; whose ideals have been an inspiration; whose confidence and encouragement generated the energy and enthusiasm that have attended the author during the fourteen years in which this work has been building. It is a privilege to pay this tribute to John Clyde Oswald.

There is one person, however, who would top such a list if it were printed—the man who, back in 1903, came up with the idea for this book; without whose business support this detailed and costly work would have been impossible; whose ideals have inspired us; whose confidence and encouragement created the energy and enthusiasm that have fueled the author over the fourteen years this work has been in development. It is a privilege to pay this tribute to John Clyde Oswald.

Edmund G. Gress.
New York, July, 1917.
ix

SYNOPSIS OF CONTENTS

PART ONE
WHEN BOOKS WERE WRITTEN
Page 1

The printer and typography—Definitions and derivations of trade words—Printing with separate types practiced between 1450–1455—Books previously written by hand or printed from wood—The Middle and Dark Ages—Latin in written books kept knowledge alive—Meaning of “manuscript”—Writing materials—Arrow-shaped writing of the Chaldeans—Papyrus rolls of the Egyptians—Ink, paper and block-printing supposedly invented by the Chinese—Dressed skins and palm leaves used by Hindoos—The Hebrews wrote upon stones and animal skins—We owe the present Roman alphabet to the Phœnicians—The word “alphabet” derived from the first two letters of the Greek alphabet, Alpha and Beta—The bards of Greece—Manuscripts written by slaves—Papyrus imported from Egypt—Development of parchment, and what it is—The great Alexandrian library—Length of rolls—Story of “Septuagint”—Destruction of the Alexandrian library—Rome supersedes Alexandria as an intellectual center—Cæsar credited as the founder of the first newspaper—“Short-hand” writing—The period of Emperor Augustus a memorable one in literature—Producing large editions of manuscript rolls—Books were plentiful and cheap—Elaborate parchment rolls—Origin of flat-sheet books—Hinged waxed tablets—Destruction of the library at Constantinople—Drift of literature toward the East—Transcribing and decorating holy writings in the monasteries of Europe—Monopoly of learning gave power to Church of Rome—Since the seventh century monastery manuscripts in Latin, the official language of that church—Translation of Bible into “Vulgar tongue” forbidden—William Tyndale’s English translation—Martin Luther’s German translation—Making of manuscript books in the Middle Ages—St. Benedict sets the monks to work copying manuscripts—Popularity of cloisters—The scriptorium and the rules governing scribe or copyist—Tools and materials—Rubrics—Illuminating—The copyist at work—A beautiful Irish book—Illuminators’ colors and binding of manuscript books—Missal, Psalter, Book of Hours—Donatus, books associated with the Middle Ages—First types were imitations of current Gothic lettering—Types cut in style of Roman lettering—Ancient Roman writing all capitals—Evolution of Roman capitals into small or lower-case letters—The uncial and half-uncial—Minuscule and majuscule—Development of writing toward both heavy pointed Gothic and the Roman style used by Nicholas Jenson—Cursive, a “script” letter.

The Printer and Typography—Definitions and Origins of Trade Words—Printing with Separate Types Practiced Between 1450-1455—Books Were Previously Written by Hand or Printed from Wood—The Middle and Dark Ages—Latin in Written Books Kept Knowledge Alive—Meaning of “Manuscript”—Writing Materials—Arrow-Shaped Writing of the Chaldeans—Papyrus Rolls of the Egyptians—Ink, Paper, and Block-Printing Likely Invented by the Chinese—Dressed Skins and Palm Leaves Used by Hindoos—The Hebrews Wrote on Stones and Animal Skins—We Owe the Present Roman Alphabet to the Phoenicians—The Word “Alphabet” Comes from the First Two Letters of the Greek Alphabet, Alpha and Beta—The Bards of Greece—Manuscripts Written by Slaves—Papyrus Imported from Egypt—Development of Parchment and What It Is—The Great Alexandrian Library—Length of Rolls—The Story of the “Septuagint”—Destruction of the Alexandrian Library—Rome Surpasses Alexandria as an Intellectual Center—Caesar Credited as the Founder of the First Newspaper—“Short-Hand” Writing—The Period of Emperor Augustus Was Memorable in Literature—Producing Large Editions of Manuscript Rolls—Books Were Plentiful and Cheap—Elaborate Parchment Rolls—Origin of Flat-Sheet Books—Hinged Waxed Tablets—Destruction of the Library at Constantinople—Drift of Literature Toward the East—Transcribing and Decorating Holy Writings in the Monasteries of Europe—Monopoly of Learning Gave Power to the Church of Rome—Since the Seventh Century, Monastery Manuscripts in Latin, the Official Language of That Church—Translation of the Bible into “Vulgar Tongue” Forbidden—William Tyndale's English Translation—Martin Luther's German Translation—Making of Manuscript Books in the Middle Ages—St. Benedict Assigns Monks to Work Copying Manuscripts—Popularity of Cloisters—The Scriptorium and the Rules Governing the Scribe or Copyist—Tools and Materials—Rubrics—Illuminating—The Copyist at Work—A Beautiful Irish Book—Illuminators' Colors and Binding of Manuscript Books—Missal, Psalter, Book of Hours—Donatus, Books Associated with the Middle Ages—The First Types Were Imitations of Current Gothic Lettering—Types Cut in the Style of Roman Lettering—Ancient Roman Writing Used All Capitals—Evolution of Roman Capitals into Small or Lower-Case Letters—The Uncial and Half-Uncial—Minuscule and Majuscule—Development of Writing Toward Both Heavy Pointed Gothic and the Roman Style Used by Nicholas Jenson—Cursive, a “Script” Letter.

THE ORIGIN OF TYPOGRAPHY
Page 7

The invention of typography marked the beginning of a new civilization—The beginning and end of the Middle Ages—Printing with separate metal types an evolution—Demand for playing cards and sacred pictures—Engraved wood blocks—Block books, and method of printing them—Coloring cards and pictures by means of stencils—The oldest dated specimen of printing—The first block books probably Latin grammars—The “Art of Dying,” the “Bible of the Poor,” and the “Mirror of Human Salvation”—When, where and by whom was typography invented?—The inventor failed to print his name on his product—Almost every European country claimed the honor—All claims disproved excepting those of Germany and Holland—Weight of evidence is with Germany—Typography was practiced by Gutenberg at Mainz some time during 1450–1455—Claims of priority for Coster of Haarlem—Story of the invention by Ulrich Zell the earliest testimony on the subject—Dierick Coornhert’s version—The unfaithful servant—Dignified gray heads point out the house of “the first printer”—Hadrian Junius and his “Coster Legend”—Fashioning the bark of a beech tree in the form of letters—Changing the letters to lead and then to tin—Old wine flagons melted into type—A workman, John Faust, steals the type-making instruments—Cornelis, an old book binder—The story dissected—Peter Scriverius has another version—A clap of thunder—Confusion of dates—A statue erected to Coster in Haarlem—“True and rational account” by one Leiz—Gerard Meerman’s story—The sheriff who printed with wooden types—Robbed by a brother of Johann Gutenberg—Jacob Koning awarded a prize for his essay on the invention—Makes researches in Haarlem archives—Corroborates some details in preceding stories—For many years Coster given equal honor with Gutenberg—Investigations by Dr. Anton Van der Linde—Forgeries and misrepresentations revealed—Haarlem practically surrenders its claim and alters its school books—Records of Louwerijs Janszoon and Laurens Janszoon Coster—Van der Linde goes to Germany, alters his name and writes a book—Hessels translates the book into English, and afterward becomes a Haarlem advocate—Coster proofs are weak—Haarlem claimants unable to agree as to Coster’s identity—Gutenberg a tangible human being, and probable inventor of the art—Parentage of Gutenberg—The family removes from Mainz presumably to Strassburg—Was the new art practiced at Strassburg?—Records of a lawsuit—Gutenberg agreed to teach Andrew Dritzehen certain trade secrets—Fust lends money to Gutenberg and takes a mortgage on his printing office—Fust seizes all types, presses and books—Records of this suit evidence of Gutenberg’s invention—The famous Forty-two Line Bible—Gutenberg again establishes himself as a printer—An appointment from the Bishop of Mainz—Dies about 1468—H. Noel Humphrey’s tribute—Peter Schœffer—Copies books at the University of Paris—Becomes Gutenberg’s assistant—Assumes charge after his master’s death—Marries Fust’s daughter—The new firm publishes a Psalter—First book with a printed date—Features of the book.

The invention of typography marked the start of a new civilization—the beginning and end of the Middle Ages—printing with separate metal types was an evolution. There was a demand for playing cards and religious images—engraved wood blocks—block books, and the method of printing them—coloring cards and pictures using stencils. The oldest dated example of printing—the first block books were probably Latin grammars—the “Art of Dying,” the “Bible of the Poor,” and the “Mirror of Human Salvation.” When, where, and by whom was typography invented? The inventor didn’t put his name on his work. Almost every European country claimed the credit—most claims were disproved except those from Germany and Holland—the evidence strongly supports Germany. Typography was practiced by Gutenberg in Mainz sometime between 1450 and 1455. There were claims of priority for Coster of Haarlem. The story of the invention by Ulrich Zell is the earliest testimony on the topic—Dierick Coornhert’s version—the unfaithful servant—dignified gray-haired individuals point out the house of “the first printer.” Hadrian Junius and his “Coster Legend”—shaping the bark of a beech tree into letters—changing the letters to lead and then to tin—old wine flagons melted down to create type. A worker named John Faust stole the type-making tools—Cornelis, an old bookbinder. The story was analyzed—Peter Scriverius has another version—a clap of thunder—confusion of dates—a statue was erected to Coster in Haarlem—“True and rational account” by someone named Leiz—Gerard Meerman’s story—the sheriff who printed with wooden types—robbed by a brother of Johann Gutenberg. Jacob Koning was awarded a prize for his essay on the invention—he researched in Haarlem archives—corroborating some details in earlier stories. For many years, Coster was given equal recognition with Gutenberg. Investigations by Dr. Anton Van der Linde uncovered forgeries and misrepresentations—Haarlem essentially gives up its claim and updates its textbooks—records of Louwerijs Janszoon and Laurens Janszoon Coster—Van der Linde went to Germany, changed his name, and wrote a book—Hessels translated the book into English and later became a Haarlem advocate. Coster's proof is weak—those claiming Coster’s legacy can’t agree on his identity—Gutenberg is a tangible person and likely the inventor of the art. Gutenberg's parentage—the family moved from Mainz, presumably to Strassburg—was this new art practiced in Strassburg? Records of a lawsuit show Gutenberg agreed to teach Andrew Dritzehen certain trade secrets—Fust lent money to Gutenberg and took a mortgage on his printing office—Fust seized all types, presses, and books. Records of this lawsuit are evidence of Gutenberg’s invention—the famous Forty-two Line Bible—Gutenberg reestablished himself as a printer—received an appointment from the Bishop of Mainz—he died around 1468. H. Noel Humphrey’s tribute—Peter Schœffer—copies books at the University of Paris—becomes Gutenberg’s assistant—takes charge after his master’s death—marries Fust’s daughter—the new firm published a Psalter—first book with a printed date—features of the book.

THE SPREAD OF TYPOGRAPHY
Page 13

The city of Mainz—A conflict between two archbishops—The city is set afire—Fust and Schœffer’s printing office burned—The workmen flee to various parts of Europe—A table of the spread of typography from Mainz—In Germany—John Mentel at Strassburg—Albrecht Pfister at Bamberg—Ulrich Zell at Cologne never printed a book in the German language—Arnold Ter Hoorne first to use Arabic numerals—Gunther Zainer at Augsburg first in Germany to print with Roman characters—Heinrich Keffer at Nuremberg—John Sensenschmidt at Nuremberg and Bamberg—The Bamberg Missal—Anthony Koburger at Nuremberg had twenty-four presses in operation—In Italy—First type printing done in the monastery at Subiaco—Conrad Schweinheim and Arnold Pannartz brought from Germany—Ulrich Hahn first printer in city of Rome proper—John de Spira first typographer at Venice and had exclusive right—Nicholas Jenson comes to Venice and uses a new Roman type-face—Story of his introduction to the art—The first page of displayed type composition—J, U and W not in books printed by Jenson—His office passes to Aldus Manutius—Italic introduced—Aldus reduces the size of books and suggests the printing of a polyglot Bible—Works of Peter Paul Porrus and Augustin Justinian—Aldus xassisted by scholar-refugees from Constantinople—His complete name—Venetian printing offices and their product—Bernardo Cennini at Florence—Johann Numeister at Foligno—In Switzerland—Bertold Ruppel at Basel—This city gave France its first typographers—John Froben at Basel—Erasmus has him print his books—In France—Ulrich Gering, Martin Crantz and Michel Friburger at Paris—Gering becomes rich—Sectional wood border on book printed by Philip Pigouchet for Simon Vostre—Henry Estienne at Paris—First of illustrious family of typographers—Robert Estienne best known and most scholarly—Flees to Geneva, Switzerland, for safety—Dies there after a labor of love—In the Netherlands—A press erected at Utrecht—Colard Mansion and William Caxton at Bruges produce the first book printed in English—Van der Goes at Antwerp—Christopher Plantin at Antwerp gave renown to that city—His printing office now a museum—A polyglot Bible his greatest work—Louis Elzevir, founder of a family of learned printers, at Leyden—The second Louis Elzevir at Amsterdam—Johannes Andriesson at Haarlem—In England—William Caxton the first to set type in that country—Apprenticed to a merchant and goes to Bruges—Becomes Governor—Enters the service of the Duchess of Burgundy—Translates a “Historie of Troye” and learns how to print it—Returns to England and sets up a press at Westminster Abbey—Peculiarities of Caxton’s work—Wynken de Worde succeeds to Caxton’s business—Introduced the Roman letter into England—Richard Pynson at London—Richard Grafton as a printer of English Bibles translated by William Tyndale and Miles Coverdale—Tyndale suffers death—Grafton imprisoned for printing the “Great Bible”—Edward Whitechurch his partner—John Daye also imprisoned—Fox’s “Acts and Monuments”—In Scotland—Androw Myllar and Walter Chepman at Edinburgh—In Ireland—Humphrey Powell at Dublin—In North America—John Cromberger at Mexico City—In the United States—Stephen Daye at Cambridge, Mass.

The city of Mainz—A conflict between two archbishops—The city is set on fire—Fust and Schœffer’s printing office burns down—The workers flee to different parts of Europe—A table showing the spread of typography from Mainz—In Germany—John Mentel in Strassburg—Albrecht Pfister in Bamberg—Ulrich Zell in Cologne never printed a book in German—Arnold Ter Hoorne was the first to use Arabic numerals—Gunther Zainer in Augsburg was the first in Germany to print with Roman characters—Heinrich Keffer in Nuremberg—John Sensenschmidt in Nuremberg and Bamberg—The Bamberg Missal—Anthony Koburger in Nuremberg had twenty-four presses in operation—In Italy—The first type printing was done in the monastery at Subiaco—Conrad Schweinheim and Arnold Pannartz brought techniques from Germany—Ulrich Hahn was the first printer in the city of Rome—John de Spira was the first typographer in Venice and had exclusive rights—Nicholas Jenson came to Venice and used a new Roman typeface—His story of entering the art—The first page of displayed type composition—J, U, and W were not in books printed by Jenson—His office passed to Aldus Manutius—Italic was introduced—Aldus reduced book sizes and suggested printing a polyglot Bible—Works of Peter Paul Porrus and Augustin Justinian—Aldus, assisted by scholar-refugees from Constantinople—His full name—Venetian printing offices and what they produced—Bernardo Cennini in Florence—Johann Numeister in Foligno—In Switzerland—Bertold Ruppel in Basel—This city produced France's first typographers—John Froben in Basel—Erasmus had him print his books—In France—Ulrich Gering, Martin Crantz, and Michel Friburger in Paris—Gering became wealthy—A sectional wood border on a book printed by Philip Pigouchet for Simon Vostre—Henry Estienne in Paris—The first of an illustrious family of typographers—Robert Estienne was the best known and most scholarly—He fled to Geneva, Switzerland, for safety—He died there after a labor of love—In the Netherlands—A press was set up in Utrecht—Colard Mansion and William Caxton in Bruges produced the first book printed in English—Van der Goes in Antwerp—Christopher Plantin in Antwerp brought fame to that city—His printing office is now a museum—A polyglot Bible was his greatest work—Louis Elzevir, founder of a family of learned printers, in Leyden—The second Louis Elzevir in Amsterdam—Johannes Andriesson in Haarlem—In England—William Caxton was the first to set type in that country—He was apprenticed to a merchant and went to Bruges—He became Governor—He entered the service of the Duchess of Burgundy—He translated a “History of Troy” and learned how to print it—He returned to England and set up a press at Westminster Abbey—Peculiarities of Caxton’s work—Wynken de Worde took over Caxton’s business—He introduced the Roman letter into England—Richard Pynson in London—Richard Grafton as a printer of English Bibles translated by William Tyndale and Miles Coverdale—Tyndale met with death—Grafton was imprisoned for printing the “Great Bible”—Edward Whitechurch was his partner—John Daye was also imprisoned—Fox’s “Acts and Monuments”—In Scotland—Androw Myllar and Walter Chepman in Edinburgh—In Ireland—Humphrey Powell in Dublin—In North America—John Cromberger in Mexico City—In the United States—Stephen Daye in Cambridge, Mass.

TYPOGRAPHY IN COLONIAL DAYS
Page 19

Martyrs in typographic history—Ecclesiastical and political conditions in Europe from the sixteenth to eighteenth centuries—A book of treaties on the intended marriage of Queen Elizabeth—Oliver Cromwell encourages printing and literature—First edition of Milton’s “Paradise Lost”—Thomas Roycroft prints Brian Walton’s Polyglot Bible—The first book published in England by subscription—Paper for the work allowed to come in duty free—Cardinal Mazarin discovers a copy of Gutenberg’s Forty-two Line Bible—Chap-books and something about them—Poor representatives of the art of typography—Woodcuts and type battered and worn—Peddled by chapmen—Dicey books—Broadsides—Puritans land at Charlestown and begin to settle Cambridge and Boston—Rev. Jesse Glover solicits money for press and types—Contracts with Stephen Daye to come to new country—Rev. Glover dies—Daye reaches Cambridge with outfit—Begins printing in 1639—The first work—The first book—Poorly printed—President Dunster of Harvard College appoints Samuel Green to succeed Daye—Another press and types added—An inventory—The printing office discontinued—Printing in the colonies of Massachusetts and Virginia—Pennsylvania second English colony to have typography—William Bradford prints an almanac—Bradford arrested in Philadelphia for printing an address—Type pages as evidence—“Pied” by a juryman—Bradford goes to New York—First printshop there—Official printer—Publishes the first New York newspaper—Benjamin Franklin—Indentured to his brother James—The New England “Courant”—James is imprisoned—Benjamin becomes the publisher—The brothers disagree—Benjamin ships to New York—Meets William Bradford and goes to Philadelphia—Secures employment with Samuel Keimer—Leaves for England to buy printing equipment—Goes to work in London—Returns to Philadelphia and starts a printing office—One of the first jobs—Publishes “Poor Richard’s Almanack”—Proverbs widely quoted—Sells his shop to David Hall—Quaintness of Colonial typography—Comments on reproductions—Page from a Caslon specimen book of 1764—The work of Bodoni.

Martyrs in the history of printing—The church and political situations in Europe from the 16th to 18th centuries—A book of treaties on the planned marriage of Queen Elizabeth—Oliver Cromwell promotes printing and literature—First edition of Milton’s “Paradise Lost”—Thomas Roycroft prints Brian Walton’s Polyglot Bible—The first book published in England via subscription—Paper for the project allowed to come in without customs duty—Cardinal Mazarin finds a copy of Gutenberg’s Forty-two Line Bible—Chapbooks and some details about them—Poor examples of printing—Woodcuts and type damaged and worn—Sold by peddlers—Dicey books—Broadsides—Puritans arrive at Charlestown and start settling in Cambridge and Boston—Rev. Jesse Glover raises funds for a press and types—Contracts with Stephen Daye to come to the new world—Rev. Glover passes away—Daye arrives in Cambridge with his equipment—Begins printing in 1639—The first work—The first book—Badly printed—President Dunster of Harvard College appoints Samuel Green to take over for Daye—Another press and types added—An inventory—The printing office shuts down—Printing in the colonies of Massachusetts and Virginia—Pennsylvania becomes the second English colony to have printing—William Bradford prints an almanac—Bradford gets arrested in Philadelphia for printing an address—Type pages used as evidence—“Pied” by a juror—Bradford moves to New York—First print shop established there—Official printer—Acts as the publisher of the first New York newspaper—Benjamin Franklin—Indentured to his brother James—The New England “Courant”—James is imprisoned—Benjamin takes over as publisher—The brothers have disagreements—Benjamin ships to New York—Meets William Bradford and heads to Philadelphia—Gets a job with Samuel Keimer—Leaves for England to buy printing equipment—Works in London—Returns to Philadelphia and starts a printing office—One of the first jobs—Publishes “Poor Richard’s Almanack”—Proverbs frequently quoted—Sells his shop to David Hall—Charm of Colonial typography—Comments on reproductions—Page from a Caslon specimen book of 1764—The work of Bodoni.

TYPOGRAPHY IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY
Page 27

William Morris’s declaration—The first printed book a testimony to genius—The first cylinder press and first linotype were crudely constructed—Typography at its highest point—Italian and German styles contrasted—These styles blended into the Colonial—Franklin as a typographer compared to Aldus and Plantin—Beginning of the nineteenth century—Utility and art—William Nicholson plans a cylinder press—Dr. Kinsley constructs a model—A new roman type-face designed—Ornaments and borders discarded—Style of typography becoming uninteresting—Transition illustrated by four title-pages—Charles Whittingham and William Pickering—Artistic qualities introduced—Punches of Caslon Oldstyle recovered—A page in Colonial style—Punctuation marks omitted—Fifty years ahead of their time—Job printing of modern development—Newspaper, book and job work—Typography should be based upon art foundations—A Book of Common Prayer—Title-pages without ornamentation—Job printers take to fancy typography—Imitations of copperplate engravers’ work—A business card and a bill of fare—Changing styles applied to commercial headings—MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan—A card with apologies—A longing for pictures, color and decoration—Brass rule and tint blocks—Remarkable skill exhibited—The “Modern Renaissance”—Machinery led typography away from art—Printers thought they were doing artistic work—Inspiration wrongly interpreted—Forming of a curious chain of events—The Kelmscott Press—William Morris, artist, poet, designer and craftsman—Franklin and the Franklin stove—Morris and the Morris chair—The influence of Morris on house furnishing and typography—His home—Learned to print and to make paper—Designs type-faces—“Golden”—“Troy”—Draws decorative initials and borders—Additional designs by Burne-Jones—Morris criticised—Revolutionizes typography—Aubrey Beardsley—Will Bradley—A country printer—Studies art in Chicago—The “Wayside Press”—“Bradley: His Book”—Inspired by both past and present—A new typography—Combines with the University Press—Becomes an interesting subject for discussion—An opinion by George French—Attempts another new style of typography—Profuse ornamentation—Works rapidly—Bradley and his clients—His personality—Influence upon the American style of typography—Other influences-Theodore L. De Vinne—Has a college degree—Apprentice in a country printshop—Job compositor with Francis Hart—Takes charge of the business—A writer on printing subjects—Exponent of the conservative and dignified in typography—Should be no conflict between the styles of Morris, De Vinne and Bradley—For different purposes—The compositor must decide—De Vinne a leader in perfecting modern methods—Designs a type-face—Persuades printers to group wording—Charles T. Jacobi—Has done much for typography in England—Responsibilities of the modern typographer—Underrating the value of history—All knowledge is valuable.

William Morris’s statement—The first printed book is proof of genius—The first cylinder press and linotype were roughly made—Typography at its peak—Italian and German styles compared—These styles merged into the Colonial—Franklin as a typesetter compared to Aldus and Plantin—Start of the nineteenth century—Functionality and art—William Nicholson designs a cylinder press—Dr. Kinsley builds a model—A new Roman typeface created—Ornaments and borders removed—Typography style becoming unexciting—Transition shown through four title pages—Charles Whittingham and William Pickering—Artistic elements added—Caslon Oldstyle punches rediscovered—A page in Colonial style—Punctuation marks left out—Fifty years ahead of their time—Modern job printing—Newspaper, book, and job production—Typography should rest on artistic foundations—A Book of Common Prayer—Title pages without embellishments—Job printers embrace decorative typography—Replicas of copperplate engravers’ work—A business card and a menu—Evolving styles used for commercial headings—MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan—A card with apologies—A desire for pictures, color, and design—Brass rules and tint blocks—Remarkable skill displayed—The “Modern Renaissance”—Machinery shifted typography away from art—Printers believed they were creating art—Inspiration misunderstood—Forming a strange series of events—The Kelmscott Press—William Morris, artist, poet, designer, and craftsman—Franklin and the Franklin stove—Morris and the Morris chair—Morris’s impact on home decor and typography—His residence—Learned to print and produce paper—Designs typefaces—“Golden”—“Troy”—Creates decorative initials and borders—More designs from Burne-Jones—Morris faced criticism—Transforms typography—Aubrey Beardsley—Will Bradley—A rural printer—Studies art in Chicago—The “Wayside Press”—“Bradley: His Book”—Inspired by both past and present—A new typography—Collaborates with the University Press—Becomes a fascinating topic—An opinion from George French—Tries another novel typography style—Excessive ornamentation—Works quickly—Bradley and his customers—His character—Influence on American typography style—Other influences—Theodore L. De Vinne—Holds a college degree—Apprentice at a local print shop—Job compositor with Francis Hart—Takes over the business—Writes about printing topics—Advocate of the conservative and dignified in typography—No conflict between the styles of Morris, De Vinne, and Bradley—For different purposes—The compositor must choose—De Vinne a pioneer in refining modern methods—Creates a typeface—Encourages printers to group text—Charles T. Jacobi—Has greatly contributed to typography in England—Responsibilities of the modern typographer—Undervaluing the importance of history—All knowledge is precious.

[The chapters following are devoted to the consideration of typography as practiced in the twentieth century.]

[The upcoming chapters focus on typography as it was practiced in the twentieth century.]

PART TWO
THE “LAYOUT” MAN
Page 35

Typography in the twentieth century—Compared with the past—Perfection not attainable—The spirit of the master craftsman—Inspired work—The necessity of careful preparation—Every printshop should have a layout man—When a building is erected—Quality printing is xinot accidental—Shop style—Layout men in large and small shops—Please the customer—Typography essentially a business vocation—Orders obtained thru “dummies” submitted—Selecting a layout man—Type equipment should be appropriate and sufficient—A working outfit for the layout man—Portfolio of sample sheets—Laying out a small booklet—Paper, margins, type page and size of type—Words to a square inch—Arrangement of title-page—Specimen pages in available body type—Use of crayon and pencil—Dummy submitted to customer—Duplicating it in the workrooms—Dummy sheets for periodicals and large catalogs—Incorporating illustrations in the text matter—Marking copy for machine composition—The average stationery job—A patchwork of typographic styles—Different results if handled by a layout man—Studying color harmony—Determining color combinations—The colder color should predominate—Indicating the finished result—Proofs in the colors and on the stock to be used—Blending paper stock—Laying out advertisements.

Typography in the twentieth century—Compared to the past—Perfection isn't achievable—The spirit of the master craftsman—Inspired work—The need for careful preparation—Every print shop should have a layout designer—When a building is constructed—Quality printing is xinot accidental—Shop style—Layout designers in both large and small shops—Satisfy the customer—Typography is fundamentally a business profession—Orders are taken through “dummies” submitted—Choosing a layout designer—Type equipment should be suitable and adequate—A complete setup for the layout designer—Portfolio of sample sheets—Designing a small booklet—Paper, margins, type area, and font size—Words per square inch—Arranging the title page—Sample pages using available body type—Using crayon and pencil—Dummy presented to the customer—Reproducing it in the workrooms—Dummy sheets for magazines and large catalogs—Including illustrations in the text—Marking copy for machine typesetting—The typical stationery job—A mix of typographic styles—Different outcomes if handled by a layout designer—Analyzing color harmony—Determining color combinations—The cooler color should dominate—Indicating the final result—Proofs in the colors and paper to be used—Blending paper stock—Designing advertisements.

HARMONY AND APPROPRIATENESS
Page 41

“Leit-motif”—The central idea in composition—Harmony and appropriateness—Undervaluing their importance—What is appropriate?—Discriminating judgment required—Discreet selection of type, ink and paper—It makes a difference—As to type-faces—As to inks—As to papers—Simplicity synonymous with good typography—The ideal printshop—Harmonious type-faces, ink colors and paper stock—Certain amount of contrast desirable—All capitals or all lower-case—Harmony of type-faces and borders illustrated—Typographic sins—In typography there should be a motive—“Is it appropriate?”—An architectural motive—In which strength is the motive—Design suggested by an old lock-plate—Typographic motive found in woodcut borders and initials of early printers—A millinery booklet cover—A page severely plain and non-sentimental—A program for a church service appropriate to the environment—A page in keeping with a festive spirit—Typographers should give support to artists—The Colonial arch and a title-page—The better the typographer, the more restraint will he exercise.

“Leit-motif”—The main idea in design—Balance and relevance—Underestimating their significance—What’s appropriate?—Requires careful judgment—Thoughtful choice of type, ink, and paper—It matters—Regarding typefaces—Regarding inks—Regarding papers—Simplicity equals good typography—The ideal print shop—Coordinated typefaces, ink colors, and paper types—A certain level of contrast is desirable—All caps or all lowercase—Harmony of typefaces and borders shown—Typographic mistakes—Typography should have a purpose—“Is it appropriate?”—An architectural purpose—Where strength is key—Design inspired by an old lock plate—Typographic inspiration found in woodcut borders and initials of early printers—A cover for a hat catalog—A page that’s stark and unbiased—A program for a church service that fits the setting—A page aligned with a celebratory mood—Typographers should support artists—The Colonial arch and a title page—The better the typographer, the more restraint he will use.

TONE AND CONTRAST
Page 47

A story of white and black—A combination popular with writers, printers and readers—Uniformity of tone or depth of color—A mixture of irregular gray and black tones inexcusable—Art principles too often ignored—Contrast necessary, but uniformity should not be sacrificed—Art makes concession to utility—A right way and a wrong way—Unjust blaming of the customer—A German example of uniform tone—Practical demonstration of uniform tone—Four ornaments, upon which four pages are constructed—Contrast, from the viewpoints of art and utility—Lessening the contrast between print and paper—A compromise—Impressing the print firmly on antique paper—Setting the print daintily upon glossy paper—Lack of artistic feeling responsible for unpleasant contrasts—Great contrast is eccentricity—Mark Twain and contrasts—Cover-page should be darker than title-page—The tone of a massed page—Controlled by spacing—Duplicating the tone of a pen-and-ink illustration—A spotted black tone—Equalizing the tone by using lighter ink—Spaced capitals and open-line illustration—A classic interpretation of uniform tone—Characteristics and tone superbly blended—Initial and headpiece should approach the tone of the type page—Uniform tone between display line and border—Catalog illustrations should stand out in relief—Outline type-faces to obtain gray tone on newspaper page—Letterspacing—All lines should be similarly spaced—An unusual heading.

A story of black and white—A combination popular with writers, printers, and readers—Uniformity of tone or depth of color—A mix of uneven gray and black tones is unacceptable—Art principles are often overlooked—Contrast is important, but uniformity shouldn't be compromised—Art should accommodate utility—There's a right way and a wrong way—Unfairly blaming the customer—A German example of uniform tone—Practical demonstration of uniform tone—Four ornaments, on which four pages are built—Contrast from both artistic and utility perspectives—Reducing the contrast between print and paper—A compromise—Impressing the print clearly on antique paper—Setting the print neatly on glossy paper—A lack of artistic sensitivity leads to unpleasant contrasts—Great contrast is seen as eccentric—Mark Twain and contrasts—The cover page should be darker than the title page—The tone of a densely filled page—Controlled by spacing—Matching the tone of a pen-and-ink illustration—A mottled black tone—Equalizing the tone by using lighter ink—Spaced capitals and open-line illustrations—A classic take on uniform tone—Characteristics and tone perfectly blended—Initials and headpieces should match the tone of the text page—Uniform tone between the display line and the border—Catalog illustrations should stand out—Outline typefaces to achieve gray tone on newspaper pages—Letter spacing—All lines should have consistent spacing—An unusual heading.

PORTION, BALANCE AND SPACING
Page 53

Symmetry is necessary to beauty—What has art to do with printing?—Two views—The book printer and the job printer—Pleasing the few or being all things to all men—Printing as a business and as an art—Art is essential to printing—Study of art arouses ambition—Unfolds a new world—Proportion—Book pages—The width and length of a page—Position of the page—Margins—The job printer and proportion—Relation of shape of type-face to page—Condensed types for narrow pages—Extended types for wide pages—Architecture as an example—Vertical and horizontal lines—The relation of lines to proportion—A page with ornament, type-face and page design in proportion—Irregularity and when it may be introduced—A type line large or small by contrast—The happy medium—Balance, an important subject—Type lines horizontally centered—Safety from blunders—Out-of-the-center balance—The point of vertical balance above center—Testing balance to the limit—Diagonal arrangements show lack of imagination—Spacing—Its proper apportionment—An important feature when letters are designed—The capital L—Emphasis by means of spacing—The effect of separate lines—Should be an even page tone—Distributing display lines over the entire page—Grouping them at the point of balance—Spaced words in narrow measures—A good sign when one recognizes imperfections.

Symmetry is key to beauty—What does art have to do with printing?—Two perspectives—The book printer and the job printer—Appeasing the few or being everything to everyone—Printing as a business and as an art—Art is crucial for printing—Studying art sparks ambition—Unveils a new world—Proportion—Book pages—The width and length of a page—Position on the page—Margins—The job printer and proportion—The relationship between the typeface shape and the page—Condensed types for narrow pages—Extended types for wide pages—Architecture as a model—Vertical and horizontal lines—The connection between lines and proportion—A page with ornamentation, typeface, and design in balance—Irregularity and when to introduce it—A type line large or small in contrast—Finding the happy medium—Balance is an important topic—Type lines centered horizontally—Avoiding mistakes—Off-center balance—The point of vertical balance above center—Testing balance to the max—Diagonal arrangements reveal a lack of creativity—Spacing—Its proper distribution—An essential aspect when designing letters—The capital L—Creating emphasis through spacing—The impact of separate lines—Should maintain an even tone on the page—Distributing display lines evenly across the entire page—Grouping them at the balance point—Spaced words in narrow measures—It's a good sign when one notices imperfections.

ORNAMENTATION
Page 59

The human race has a liking for ornamentation—Natural and artificial beauty—Nature furnishes motives for man’s work—The average man giving thought to art—Beautiful things all about—Privileges of museums and art galleries available to printers—Take less thought of food and raiment and these things shall be added—Is ornamentation necessary to art typography?—Paper as embellishment—Covering poor stock with decoration—Ornaments under lock and key—Revising ideas of art—Abstinence—Using ornaments with discrimination—Study of significance and appropriateness—Motive or reason in ornamentation—Italian and German influences—Harmony because of sympathy between arts and crafts—Inharmonious ideas of several persons—Relation of typography to architecture shown in alphabets—Roman and Gothic—Ornamentation both inventive and imitative—Conventionalized ornament—With or without perspective—Things which have inspired the decorator—Artists’ work full of meaning—Leaves, mythical beings, sacred animals—Architectural designs on title-pages—Egg-and-dart and bead ornaments—Results of observation—Designs thousands of years old—Typographic borders—Triple division of taste—The severely plain, Doric—The slightly ornamental, Ionic—The elaborately ornamental, Corinthian—Sturdiness and grace—Difference in ideals and preferences—Some delight in magnificence, others in plainness—The three divisions of taste applied to typography—The style of architecture and home furnishings influence typography—The “mission” style and straight lines—The frivolous rococo style and curved lines—Rococo type ornamentation not successful—A style to please those who like neither the severely plain nor the elaborately ornamental—Ornament secondary—Should not distract attention—Excess of embellishment—Chippendale first made furniture serviceable, then added ornament—Regularity and variety in repetition—Four classes of ornament—Based upon geometrical lines, upon foliage, upon the inanimate, and upon the animate—Initials as means of ornamentation—Corner ornaments—Decoration with a motive—Reversing half of a design—A page with but a single ornament—Present-day preferences are for Gothic rather than for Italian type ornaments—The reason—Ornamentation.

The human race loves decoration—both natural and man-made beauty—Nature provides inspiration for our creativity—The average person thinks about art—Beautiful things are everywhere—Museums and art galleries offer opportunities for printers—If we focus less on food and clothing, those needs will be met—Is decoration essential for typographic art?—Using paper as decoration—Dressing up poor-quality materials—Ornaments kept away—Rethinking ideas of art—Self-restraint—Using decorations wisely—Studying meaning and appropriateness—The purpose behind decoration—Influences from Italian and German styles—Harmony arises from the connection between arts and crafts—Conflicting ideas among individuals—The link between typography and architecture seen in fonts—Roman and Gothic styles—Decoration can be both creative and imitative—Stylized decorations—With or without perspective—Inspirations for decorators—Artists' works are rich in meaning—Leaves, mythological figures, sacred animals—Architectural designs on title pages—Egg-and-dart and bead patterns—Results from observation—Designs that date back thousands of years—Typographic borders—Three categories of taste—The plainly severe, Doric—The slightly decorative, Ionic—The highly decorative, Corinthian—Strength and elegance—Different ideals and preferences—Some enjoy grandeur, while others prefer simplicity—Applying the three taste categories to typography—Architectural style and home decor influences typography—The “mission” style with straight lines—The playful rococo style with curves—Rococo typographic decoration isn't effective—A style that appeals to those who don't like extreme simplicity or extravagance—Decoration is secondary—Should not draw attention away—Too much embellishment—Chippendale first made furniture functional, then added decoration—Balance and variety in repetition—Four types of decoration—Based on geometric shapes, foliage, inanimate objects, and living forms—Initials as a form of decoration—Corner embellishments—Decorating with a purpose—Flipping half of a design—A page with just one ornament—Today's preferences lean towards Gothic rather than Italian decorative styles—The reason—Decoration.

THE TYPOGRAPHY OF BOOKS
Page 67

Good taste important in production of books—Judgment perfect in one respect and erratic in others—Good taste and conservatism—Catering to fashion leaves unsalable stock—Conservatives are few—Printed xiithings that please for the moment—Art reasons in book typography applicable to job typography—The job compositor drawing closer to his book brother—The book typographer governed by precedent—The conservative man constructive—The radical destructive—Masterpieces discarded for frivolous things—Morris set out to change book typography—He offered the good things of the old masters—Age not proof of merit—Good typography always good—Book industry in America tremendous—Carnegie at first ridiculed, now acknowledged a benefactor—The need of good books well printed—Majority of books poorly printed—Rarely do reading pages, title-page and cover harmonize—Cover only part given artistic attention—Should be honestly what it seems—A book model in its way—Not a line in capitals—Only two sizes of type on title-page—Chapter headings cling to type page—Margins—Surface covered—Proportion—Bruce Rogers—Designs books for the Riverside Press—Regard for the appropriate—The literary motive the cue—Suggesting a product of the middle nineteenth century—Two pages with faults—Inharmonious typography—The cost of an appropriate title-page ridiculously small—Provide display faces to match machine letters—Artist and typographer and the literary motive—Composite Colonial and modern—Unfinished effect—Books that lend themselves to decoration—Serious books—Typographic results exceptionally good—General use of border—Title page an excellent example—Reading matter close to border—One margin—Style of the modern novel—Modern book composition set on the linotype—An unconventional page—Page from a book written and illustrated by Will Bradley—Harmony between type-face and decoration—Effectiveness of a plain initial—Title-page of classic design—Dignified beauty—Classic feeling in a modern title-page—A serious effort by the Roycrofters—Page from a book by De Vinne—An ecclesiastical book by Updike—Improving typography in America—A book with a French motive—Avoiding commonplace types—Fonts from old matrices—Specially designed faces—Arrangement of a book—Fly leaf, sub-title, title-page, copyright notice, imprint, table of contents and illustrations, preface, frontispiece, dedication, index—Numbering the pages—The space under running titles—Lowering of the chapter headings—The space around initials—Position of a book page—Em-quad or en-quad between sentences?

Good taste is important in book production—Judgment may be perfect in some areas and inconsistent in others—Good taste and traditionalism—Following trends leads to unsellable stock—Traditionals are few—Printed materials that only please for the moment—Art principles in book typography also apply to job typography—Job typesetters are becoming more like book typographers—Book typographers are guided by tradition—The traditional approach is constructive—The radical approach tends to be destructive—Gems are overlooked for trivial things—Morris aimed to revolutionize book typography—He highlighted the best aspects of old masters—Age doesn’t guarantee quality—Good typography is always good—The book industry in America is huge—Carnegie was initially mocked but is now recognized as a benefactor—There’s a demand for well-printed good books—Most books are poorly printed—Often, the reading pages, title page, and cover don’t match—The cover is the only part that gets artistic attention—It should honestly represent what it is—A book should be exemplary in its way—No uppercase letters in the design—Only two type sizes on the title page—Chapter headings stay close to the type page—Margins—Surface area usage—Proportions—Bruce Rogers—Designs books for the Riverside Press—Respect for what’s suitable—The literary intent is key—Suggests a product of the mid-nineteenth century—Two pages have faults—Mismatched typography—The cost of a fitting title page is ridiculously minimal—Provide display fonts that match machine-set letters—Artist, typographer, and the literary intent—A mix of Colonial and modern styles—An unfinished look—Books that can be decorated—Serious works—Typography outcomes are exceptionally good—Widespread use of borders—Title page is an excellent example—Reading text close to the border—One margin—Style of modern novels—Modern book composition created on the linotype—An unconventional page—Page from a book written and illustrated by Will Bradley—Balance between typeface and decoration—Effectiveness of a simple initial—Title-page with classic design—Composed beauty—Classic feeling in a modern title page—A serious attempt by the Roycrofters—Page from a book by De Vinne—An ecclesiastical book by Updike—Advancing typography in America—A book inspired by French design—Avoiding common typefaces—Fonts from old matrices—Specially crafted typefaces—Arrangement of a book—Flyleaf, subtitle, title page, copyright notice, imprint, table of contents, illustrations, preface, frontispiece, dedication, index—Numbering the pages—Space below running titles—Lowering of chapter headings—Space around initials—Positioning on a book page—Em quad or en quad between sentences?

BOOKLETS, PAMPHLETS, BROCHURES, LEAFLETS
Page 75

Misuse of the word “booklet”—Definitions of booklet, pamphlet, brochure, leaflet—Chap-books—The booklet’s mission educational—Users—Ideas of writer and artist should be blended—Harmonious and complete—Printers have many artists to select from—The connecting link between job typography and book typography—Blending the typography with a lettered title-page—Pure typographical effects—Approved faces—Three series only—A page one likes to read—Reluctance to explore the past—Understanding of typography—Type alone can be effective—Good typography to be preferred to poor art work—Distinctive features—Space between sentences—Dignity in lettering and decoration—Title labels—A small amount of reading matter—Placing an illustration that is out of proportion—Care in the details of typesetting—Results of careless typography—Buyers slaves to conventionality—Newness and bright coloring that gets attention—Lower-case letters for capitals—Interesting decorative headings—The initial furnishes a spot of black—No decoration of any kind—Depending on type-faces and paper for results—Swash italic capitals and letterspaced capitals—Chapter heading not sunk—Suggestions from lettered designs—A standard type for old-style effects—Lettering in Caslon style on blue-prints—A memorial volume—Strict typographic harmony—Suggesting such volumes-Japanese paper printed on one side—Simple typography—Living in an artistic atmosphere—Printing journals—Specimen booklets for study purposes—Printers depend too much on artists—Possibilities of type arrangement never exhausted—Working together.

Misuse of the term “booklet”—Definitions of booklet, pamphlet, brochure, leaflet—Chapbooks—The booklet’s mission is educational—Users—Writer and artist ideas should come together—Harmonious and complete—Printers have plenty of artists to choose from—The link between job typography and book typography—Combining typography with a lettered title page—Pure typographical effects—Approved typefaces—Only three series—A page that’s enjoyable to read—Hesitation to look back—Understanding typography—Type alone can be impactful—Good typography preferred over poor artwork—Distinct features—Space between sentences—Dignity in lettering and decoration—Title labels—A small amount of text—Placing an illustration that's out of proportion—Attention to detail in typesetting—Consequences of sloppy typography—Buyers are bound by convention—Freshness and bright colors grab attention—Lowercase letters for capitals—Interesting decorative headings—The initial provides a spot of black—No decoration of any type—Relying on typefaces and paper for results—Swash italic capitals and letterspaced capitals—Chapter headings not indented—Ideas from lettered designs—A standard type for old-style effects—Lettering in Caslon style on blueprints—A memorial volume—Strict typographic harmony—Suggesting such volumes—Japanese paper printed on one side—Simple typography—Living in an artistic environment—Printing journals—Specimen booklets for study—Printers lean too heavily on artists—The potential for type arrangement is never exhausted—Collaboration.

CATALOGS
Page 83

Three branches of architectural virtue applied to the catalog—Act well, speak well, look well—The days when the catalog was a heterogeneous collection of woodcuts and type-faces—Now care and taste shown—The catalog a portable show case—Proper display of goods makes selling easier—Playing up the ordinary—A block of marble, rough and carved—Standardizing the dimensions of catalogs—Engineers recommend standard sizes—Other suggestions—Overlapping covers—Titles on exposed backs—Date—Index card inclosed—Copy should be legible—A dummy should be passed on—Decoration supplemental—Expressing personality—The penalty of being an average typographer—The envy of master printers of old—Horizontal position of illustration—Brass rule well used—A design full of character—Description facing illustration—Small amount of reading matter—Red borders—Variety and interest by simple means—Cover-page built on an illustration—Modern German typographic ideas—Bold type desirable when color is to be shown—An art museum catalog—Securing value from background—Technical details kept orderly—A book-catalog page—Rule border adds decorative quality—Typography seldom receives the attention it deserves—An uncommon catalog page—Tabular treatment for a high-class wine list—The stone rejected by the builder—A dainty German page—A legible ornamental letter—Absence of roman lower-case—Appropriate woodcut—Marginal distribution—Realistic pictures—Gloves well shown—Usual method of selling—Tabular matter.

Three branches of architectural virtue applied to the catalog—Act well, speak well, look well—The days when the catalog was a mixed bag of woodcuts and typefaces—Now there’s care and taste shown—The catalog is a portable showcase—Properly displaying goods makes selling easier—Highlighting the ordinary—A block of marble, both rough and carved—Standardizing the dimensions of catalogs—Engineers recommend standard sizes—Other suggestions—Overlapping covers—Titles on exposed backs—Date—Index card included—Copy should be clear—A dummy should be presented—Decoration is supplemental—Expressing personality—The downside of being an average typographer—The envy of master printers from the past—Horizontal position of illustrations—Brass rules well used—A design full of character—Description next to the illustration—Limited reading material—Red borders—Variety and interest achieved through simple means—Cover-page based on an illustration—Modern German typographic ideas—Bold type desired when color is to be featured—An art museum catalog—Maximizing value with the background—Technical details kept neatly organized—A book catalog page—Rule border adds a decorative touch—Typography rarely gets the attention it deserves—An exceptional catalog page—Tabular layout for a high-end wine list—The stone that was rejected by the builder—A delicate German page—A clear ornamental letters—Lack of Roman lower-case—Suitable woodcut—Marginal distribution—Realistic images—Gloves displayed effectively—Common method of selling—Tabular matter.

PROGRAMS
Page 91

“Let all things be done decently and in order”—Four classes of programs—Programs of sacred services—Offer opportunity for artistic treatment—Significance an important element—The key to ecclesiastical printing—Rubrics—A modern interpretation of the historic—Pointed Gothic type-face—Uncial rubricated initials—Red lines—A significant device—Prejudices among clergymen—A churchly aspect by rubrication—Arranging numerous small titles—Economizing space—An almost perfect specimen of church program printing—A specialist on church typography—Program of lenten services—A small program, with a page for each event—Arranging a program with little matter—The dance program—Should be dainty—Stock folders—Must “look like a dance program”—A typographic dance card—Centered dots in place of periods—Uniform border treatment on an outing program—An unconventional dance program—Banquet programs and varied treatments possible—Value of the decorative border—Arrangement of type matter—A background in olive—The menu program in small booklet form—Menu dishes in the form of checks—“Hash” and “Rehash”—A bit of fun—A classic menu-page—A style appropriately humorous—Eating in a foreign language—Side hits—Artistic treatment simulating woodcut decoration—A simply constructed menu page—Unique arrangement—Titles at the left—Symmetrical arrangement—Programs for entertainments and exercises—The commonplace program a disappointment—Artistic programs—A refined page by Updike—Features of interest in a page by Rogers—Admirable treatment of a brief program—Appropriate decoration overprinted by type—A page dominated by the Gothic style—List of characters unusually displayed—A neat page in Caslon type—The program containing small advertisements—Theater programs exert influence on public taste.

“Let all things be done decently and in order”—Four types of programs—Programs for sacred services—Offer opportunities for artistic interpretation—Significance is an important element—The key to church printing—Rubrics—A modern take on the historic—Pointed Gothic typeface—Uncial rubricated initials—Red lines—A significant device—Prejudices among clergy—A church-like appearance through rubrication—Organizing numerous small titles—Saving space—An almost perfect example of church program printing—An expert on church typography—Program for Lenten services—A small program, with a page for each event—Organizing a program with minimal content—The dance program—Should be elegant—Pre-made folders—Must “look like a dance program”—A typographic dance card—Centered dots instead of periods—Consistent border treatment on an outing program—An unconventional dance program—Banquet programs and various treatments possible—The value of a decorative border—Arrangement of text—A background in olive—The menu program in a small booklet—Menu items in the form of checks—“Hash” and “Rehash”—A bit of humor—A classic menu page—A style that is appropriately humorous—Eating in a foreign language—Side notes—Artistic interpretation mimicking woodcut decoration—A simply designed menu page—Unique arrangement—Titles on the left—Symmetrical layout—Programs for events and activities—The standard program can be disappointing—Artistic programs—An elegant page by Updike—Interesting features on a page by Rogers—Excellent treatment of a brief program—Suitable decoration overprinted by type—A page dominated by the Gothic style—List of characters displayed unusually—A neat page in Caslon type—The program including small advertisements—Theater programs influence public taste.

ANNOUNCEMENTS
Page 99

Publicity essential to success—Announcements the modern representative of the public crier—Not confined to any xiiisize or shape—Often consists of only one page—The most personal of printed mediums of publicity—The printer depended on for suggestions and advice—Confidence of the customer an asset—Imitation engraved announcement the most common—Allows of no original or decorative treatment—The cobbler and tinker—Satisfaction from work well done—The uncommon typographer not governed by usual warnings—An announcement folder of a quality seldom attained—Points of interest in a Caslon page—Black text letter and a generous size of sheet—Sturdy masculine lettering—The human quality of imperfection—A cartoonist’s task—Broad strokes make a liberal showing of color possible—Classic dignity—Ornaments as eye-attractors—A postal-card announcement—One-tenth manual labor and nine-tenths brain exercise—Mistake to make type-face very large or very small—Obtaining variety and emphasis by use of italic and small capitals—Spacing of lower-case—One size of type only—Division into two type groups—A study in tone values—Harmony of type-face and decoration—A brief announcement—Colonial effects—Appropriate typography based on an early newspaper—Lack of margins and absence of print—Heavy- and light-faced rule—Greater legibility when lines are separated—A misplaced initial—A blotter announcement—Printers’ own announcements.

Publicity is essential for success—Announcements are the modern version of the public crier—not limited to any specific size or shape—Often just one page—It's the most personal printed medium of publicity—The printer relied on for suggestions and advice—Customer confidence is an asset—Imitation engraved announcements are the most common—They don’t allow for any original or decorative treatment—The cobbler and tinker—There's satisfaction in a job well done—The unusual typographer isn’t restricted by typical warnings—An announcement folder of a quality that's rarely achieved—Points of interest in a Caslon page—Bold text and a generous sheet size—Sturdy, masculine lettering—The human quality of imperfection—A cartoonist’s challenge—Broad strokes allow for a vibrant display of color—Classic dignity—Ornaments to attract the eye—A postcard announcement—One-tenth manual labor and nine-tenths brainpower—It's a mistake to make the typeface too large or too small—Achieve variety and emphasis using italics and small capitals—Spacing for lower-case letters—Only one size of type—Dividing into two type groups—A study in tone values—Harmony between typeface and decoration—A brief announcement—Colonial effects—Appropriate typography inspired by an early newspaper—Lack of margins and absence of print—Heavy and light-faced rules—Better legibility when lines are separated—A misplaced initial—A blotter announcement—Printers’ own announcements.

TICKETS
Page 107

Good results by accident—A good job of printing should be an everyday occurrence—Lack of interest reason for non-development—Any man not interested in his vocation to be pitied—Thought concentrated on typography—Efficiency a guarantee—Accept responsibilities—The first observations of a student—“None perfect, no not one”—Tickets afford practice of art printing—Many themes and styles in typography—Resourcefulness a valuable characteristic—Ticket forms especially designed—One based upon a classic motive—An idea from ancient Rome—Capitals slightly spaced—The historic Gothic or church style—Contrast by the use of color—A modern conception with a masculine motive—The margins of two styles—An odd and striking effect—Modern treatment based upon the Colonial—A bookish effect—An idea for a lecture course—White or colored stock?—A ticket of peculiar interest to women—The geometric or secession style—Enthusiasm over new styles—Building a house in the sands—Square-faced type and square ornaments—An adaptation of the missal style—Inspiration from William Morris and Italian printers—For educational and art functions—A motive from the art workers of the Middle Ages—A modern application of classic type effects—A purely Colonial effect—Dainty, refined treatment and symbolic decoration—Typography that is distinctly masculine—Orange is lighter than black in tone—An arrangement dictated by an ornament—A ticket not easily duplicated—Color background—Corner decoration in keeping with the subject—A motive from early French books—Typographers should go thru the world with eyes open.

Good results by chance—A good printing job should happen all the time—Lack of interest is a reason for not developing—Anyone not interested in their work deserves pity—Focus on typography—Efficiency is essential—Take on responsibilities—The first observations of a student—“None are perfect, not even one”—Tickets provide practice in art printing—Many themes and styles in typography—Resourcefulness is a valuable trait—Ticket templates are specially designed—One based on a classic idea—An inspiration from ancient Rome—Capitals slightly spaced—The historic Gothic or church style—Contrast through color—A modern concept with a masculine touch—The margins of two styles—A unique and striking effect—Modern design influenced by the Colonial style—A scholarly effect—An idea for a lecture series—White or colored paper?—A ticket of particular interest to women—The geometric or secession style—Excitement about new styles—Building on shaky ground—Square-faced type and square ornaments—Inspired by the missal style—Influenced by William Morris and Italian printers—For educational and artistic purposes—A theme from the art workers of the Middle Ages—A modern take on classic typography—A distinctly Colonial effect—Delicate, refined design and symbolic decorations—Typography that is clearly masculine—Orange has a lighter tone than black—An arrangement guided by an ornament—A ticket that is hard to replicate—Color background—Corner decorations that fit the theme—An inspiration from early French books—Typographers should navigate the world with open eyes.

LETTERHEADS AND ENVELOPS
Page 111

Standard sizes—Single leaves and the folded note sheet—Official envelops—Folding the sheets—Printing on fourth page—Society stationery—Ruled sheets seldom called for—Paper and typographical treatment of letterhead and envelops should have relation—Style of professional stationery seldom changes—Simple, neat, refined typography—Color seldom well used—Styles furnished by lithographers and steel-die printers—Work along standardized lines—A letterhead one form of advertising—Two tones of type-face for much copy—Elaborate treatment seldom advisable—All matter in one group—Blank space a factor—Brief copy—Use of a decorative device—A harmonizing border—A meeting announcement—Suggesting an architectural panel—Appropriate to the business—All lines of same length—For a general store—Resetting of a “brick” letterhead—Too literal—Injection of individuality—Something different—Attractive club stationery—Typographic neatness—A copperplate letterhead—Two distinct groups—Italic on a heading—Inclosing type matter in a panel—A line border finishing off the edges of a letter sheet—A spot of decorative color—The cross-line panel—German treatment—Notehead by a book typographer—Humor—Envelops a convenience—Its purpose and use—Advertising possibilities—“After five days return to”—Medieval character—Bringing out the business—An envelop corner that is artistic—Elaborate treatment.

Standard sizes—Single sheets and folded notes—Official envelopes—Folding the sheets—Printing on the fourth page—Society stationery—Ruled sheets are rarely requested—The paper and typography of letterheads and envelopes should relate—The style of professional stationery rarely changes—Simple, neat, refined typography—Color is rarely used effectively—Styles provided by lithographers and steel-plate printers—Work along standardized lines—A letterhead is a form of advertising—Two typefaces for longer text—Elaborate designs are usually not recommended—All content in one group—Blank space is important—Concise text—Use of decorative elements—A matching border—A meeting announcement—Suggesting an architectural panel—Appropriate for the business—All lines should be the same length—For a general store—Resetting a “brick” letterhead is too literal—Injecting individuality—Something unique—Attractive club stationery—Typographic neatness—A copperplate letterhead—Two distinct groups—Italic for a heading—Enclosing text in a panel—A line border finishing the edges of a letter sheet—A touch of decorative color—The cross-line panel—German design—Notehead created by a book typographer—Humor—Envelopes are convenient—Their purpose and use—Advertising potential—“Return after five days”—Medieval style—Highlighting the business—An artistic envelope corner—Elaborate design.

BILLHEADS AND STATEMENTS
Page 119

Suitable and dignified type composition—Should correspond in style to that of letterhead—Standard sizes—Allowance for head portion—Window envelops—Change in arrangement—Billheads of a quarter of a century ago—Features of the average billhead or invoice—Composition of a billhead—Transforming a letterhead into a billhead—Classic typography—Typographic art and good taste on a billhead—Stationery of a book dealer—Printing on colored stock—Lower part divided into columns—A decorator’s stationery—Business stated in firm name—Credit bills—Use of the statement—Other forms used in business.

Suitable and professional type design—Should match the style of the letterhead—Standard sizes—Allowance for the header—Window envelopes—Change in layout—Billheads from twenty-five years ago—Characteristics of the typical billhead or invoice—Design of a billhead—Turning a letterhead into a billhead—Classic typography—Typographic design and good taste on a billhead—Stationery for a book seller—Printing on colored paper—Lower section divided into columns—A decorator’s stationery—Business stated in company name—Credit invoices—Use of the statement—Other forms used in business.

PACKAGE LABELS
Page 123

Effectiveness of an attractive package label—Good clothes and the package—Selection of wrapping stock—Appreciation of neat wrapping—Druggists excel—The art of making a good impression—Twine, gummed-paper tape, corrugated board—The printed label as a spot of attraction—The wrapping paper as a background—Two labels of contrasting treatment—Stronger label striking—Labels not usually seen at close range—No standard size—Stock that pastes easily—Hand lettered labels as studies—Italic with a decorative quality—A label design with no border—Suggestion of Italian art—Closely-spaced black-toned lettering—Artistic quality and interest by means of typography—A study in black and white—The Aldine combination—Border, decorative device and lettering in the same key—A label design that could be improved—A Goudy type arrangement—Label with address printed in—Stock labels should be studied.

Effectiveness of an attractive package label—Good clothing and the packaging—Choosing the wrapping materials—Appreciation of neat packaging—Pharmacies excel—The art of making a good impression—Twine, gummed-paper tape, corrugated board—The printed label as a point of attraction—The wrapping paper as a background—Two labels with contrasting designs—Stronger label stands out—Labels not often seen up close—No standard size—Material that sticks easily—Hand written labels as examples—Italic with a decorative touch—A label design with no border—Suggestion of Italian art—Tightly spaced black-toned lettering—Artistic quality and interest through typography—A study in black and white—The Aldine combination—Border, decorative element and lettering in the same style—A label design that could use improvement—A Goudy type arrangement—Label with address printed on—Stock labels should be examined.

BUSINESS CARDS
Page 127

Courtesies of business—The business card as an introduction—Sizes of cards—White cards predominate—An attempt at standardization in arrangement—A model of dignity—Featuring the individual’s name—Contrast in tone—A specimen of hand lettering—A design of strength and interest—An attractive black monogram—Decorative device in color—An interesting contrast—High-hat and frock-coat treatment in French style—Arrangement in blocked Caslon capitals—Decorative device in tint—Roman capitals with italic—A representative German card—The word “decorators” furnishes the cue—Italic for dainty effects—A strong, simple arrangement—Classic arrangement in one size of type—Much information on a card—Decorative treatment that could be merged with the stock—Horizontal rule lines—A card in Bodoni—More than one right way—Styles available for all likes and dislikes—Character and personality expressed typographically—More individuality now permissible—Copperplate engravers set the style for much business-card printing—How to obtain results.

Courtesies of business—The business card as an introduction—Sizes of cards—White cards dominate—An effort to standardize the layout—A model of dignity—Featuring the individual’s name—Contrast in tone—A sample of hand lettering—A design that shows strength and interest—An attractive black monogram—Decorative element in color—An interesting contrast—Formal and tailored treatment in French style—Layout in blocked Caslon capitals—Decorative element in tint—Roman capitals with italic—A typical German card—The word “decorators” gives the hint—Italic for delicate effects—A strong, simple layout—Classic layout in one type size—A lot of information on a card—Decorative treatment that could be blended with the stock—Horizontal rule lines—A card in Bodoni—More than one correct way—Styles available for every taste—Character and personality expressed through typography—More individuality now allowed—Copperplate engravers set the style for much business card printing—How to achieve results.

THE BLOTTER
Page 131

Business cards and blotters—Less restraint and dignity—Coarseness should be avoided—No longer an experiment—Advertising values—The size—Enameled surfaces—A model typographic blotter with calendar—Treatment should be simple—One design of type-face—Blank space liberally distributed—Natural freedom—Most blotters contain too much xivtype matter—Relief from sledge-hammer advertising—Blotter for personal checkbook—Good taste—For a convention—Pleasing factors—Strong contrasts—Reading the message as the signature is blotted—Masculine treatment—The character of an architectural panel—Pleasure in using—Material that is used and material that is not used—A model of good taste in blotter typography—The test of time—A neat, refined arrangement—The use of large type—The narrow way—Gray features—A touch of appropriateness—Other features.

Business cards and blotters—Less restraint and dignity—Avoid coarseness—No longer an experiment—Advertising values—The size—Enameled surfaces—A sample typographic blotter with a calendar—The treatment should be simple—One typeface design—Blank space used generously—Natural freedom—Most blotters have too much type matter—Relief from heavy-handed advertising—Blotter for personal checkbook—Good taste—For a convention—Attractive elements—Strong contrasts—Reading the message as the signature is blotted—Masculine style—The character of an architectural panel—Enjoyable to use—Material that is used and material that is not used—A model of good taste in blotter typography—The test of time—A neat, refined arrangement—The use of large type—The narrow way—Gray features—A hint of appropriateness—Other features.

POSTERS, CAR CARDS, WINDOW CARDS
Page 135

Poster printing a specialty in large cities—Type equipment well selected, but not elaborate—Blend of type-faces—Standard job faces duplicated—Sizes of posters, car cards and window cards—Color and lettering—What the poster should be—Viewed at closer range—Typographic effects in poster printing—A poster that measures up—A study of composition—Contrast of color—Card in conversational style—Using types in a sane, simple manner—Strong simplicity—Refinement in theatrical printing—A strong poster in gothic and “secession” border—Making the typography appropriate-Shakespearean typography—Decoration reproduced from original sources—Usefulness of a library of books—A hanger in one size of type—The Colonial style of type arrangement—Why cardboard is used—Suggested arrangement for excursion card—Printers and poster printing—The best sale-bill compositor in the country—Work should be done profitably—Poster printing on a large scale.

Poster printing is a specialty in big cities—Type equipment is well chosen, but not extravagant—A mix of typefaces—Standard job faces duplicated—Sizes for posters, car cards, and window cards—Color and lettering—What a poster should be—Viewed up close—Typographic effects in poster printing—A poster that stands out—A focus on composition—Color contrast—Card in a conversational style—Using type in a clear, simple way—Strong simplicity—Refinement in theatrical printing—A bold poster in gothic style with a “secession” border—Making typography fit the theme—Shakespearean typography—Decoration taken from original sources—The value of having a library of books—A hanger in one size of type—The Colonial style of type arrangement—Reasons for using cardboard—Suggested layout for an excursion card—Printers and poster printing—The top sale-bill compositor in the country—Work should be done profitably—Poster printing on a large scale.

ADVERTISEMENTS
Page 139

Advertisements, business men and printers—Blame for ineffectiveness—Treating the advertisement typographically—Study of good type work, advice and judgment—Oratory—A good speaker and a good typographic advertisement—Print too small or too large—Bluntness and forcefulness—Decorative attractiveness—Emphasizing significant parts—The difference between setting type with a stick and setting it with the head—Assuming a new formation—A multiplication of small advertisements—Easily read, conversational style of advertisements—Not much to say—Popularizing zinc—A well-treated signature—One of many clever advertisements—A peculiar department-store advertisement—Problems of the country newspaper—Typography influenced by the article advertised—Text types in advertisements—Harmonious suggestion—A long list of cities and agents—Selling costly automobiles—Suggesting Roman architecture—Text group in upper right corner—Little display—Blank space well used—Interesting country-newspaper advertisement—Classified advertisements well displayed.

Advertisements, businesspeople, and printers—Critique of ineffectiveness—How to present advertisements typographically—Study of good typography, tips, and judgment—Public speaking—A skilled speaker and an effective typographic advertisement—Font sizes that are too small or too large—Directness and impact—Visual appeal—Highlighting key elements—The difference between setting type manually and with a computer—Adopting a new style—More small ads—Easy-to-read, conversational ad style—Not much to convey—Making zinc popular—A well-designed signature—One among many clever ads—A unique department store ad—Challenges of local newspapers—Typography influenced by the featured product—Typesetting in ads—Creating a cohesive suggestion—A long list of cities and agents—Selling high-end cars—Evoking Roman architecture—Text cluster in the upper right corner—Minimal display—Effective use of white space—Engaging local newspaper ad—Well-organized classified ads.

NEWSPAPERS
Page 147

Neutral gray—Building suitable and harmonious typographic form—Problem simpler in early days—The ideal newspaper—The title—Distinctive in design—Text letters—Using the ends of titles—Slogans and quotations—Date lines—The text—Small type—Narrow columns—Lengthy excerpts indented—The headings—First newspaper a letter and not set off by headings—Side headings—Wars developed display—Advertising the contents—Condensed type necessary—Harmonious type lines—Italic to overcome monotony—Paneled headings—A four-deck single-column heading—The make-up—A good-looking newspaper—Alternating large and small headings—No advertisements on front page—Position of article of most importance—Paneled news—Editorials—Usual position—The sporting page—Building advertisements from the lower right corner of the page.

Neutral gray—Creating a suitable and harmonious typographic style—This problem was easier in the early days—The ideal newspaper—The title—Distinctive in design—Text letters—Using the ends of titles—Slogans and quotes—Date lines—The text—Small type—Narrow columns—Lengthy excerpts indented—The headings—The first newspaper was a letter and not separated by headings—Side headings—Wars led to display changes—Advertising the contents—Condensed type is necessary—Harmonious type lines—Italic to break up monotony—Paneled headings—A four-deck single-column heading—The layout—A visually appealing newspaper—Alternating large and small headings—No ads on the front page—The placement of articles is most important—Paneled news—Editorials—Usual placement—The sports page—Building ads from the lower right corner of the page.

PERIODICALS
Page 151

Making publications attractive—Letterer and decorator—Circus poster type—The poor always with you—Many periodicals good to look at and easy to read—The dimensions—Nine by twelve inches a favorite with technical publications—Three groups for magazines—Growing larger—Pocket magazines—The front cover—Paintings—Decorative designs—Paid advertisements on the front cover—Appropriate views in halftone—Columns—Number decided by size of type—Wide columns strain the eyes—Gutenberg used two columns—Small type in very wide measures—The margins—Proportions as in good books—Good margins spoiled in bindings—Type-faces for the text—Chosen for legibility in small sizes—Separation with one-point leads because of lack of descenders—Difference in type-faces printed on coated and antique-finished paper—Lines need to be separated by leads—Should be well-formed as well as readable—Thin lines should be cut a trifle stronger—Type-faces for the headings—Same design as type for text matter—Desirable, but not always possible—An instance—Large, black headings should be avoided—Slightly decorative panels—Editorial headings and titles—Make-up of the illustrations—A background of gray—Well balanced—Text matter between illustrations—Same style on facing pages—Arrangement of headings—They sell the contents—A well-advertised story—The captions—Centered under illustrations—In two parts—Lines of same length—The editorial pages—No standard style—Unlike other reading pages—Features—Verse in italic—Restraint necessary—The advertisements—Bold types overshadow text pages—Good taste—Not to be mingled with text matter—Treatment need not be timid or blustering—When advertisers are best served.

Making publications attractive—Lettering and decoration—Circus poster style—The poor are always with us—Many periodicals are visually appealing and easy to read—The dimensions—Nine by twelve inches is a favorite size for technical publications—Three categories for magazines—Getting larger—Pocket magazines—The front cover—Artworks—Decorative designs—Paid ads on the front cover—Appropriate images in halftone—Columns—Number determined by type size—Wide columns strain the eyes—Gutenberg used two columns—Small type in very wide formats—The margins—Proportions like good books—Good margins ruined in bindings—Typefaces for the text—Chosen for readability in small sizes—Separation with one-point leads due to lack of descenders—Differences in typefaces printed on coated and uncoated paper—Lines need to be separated by leads—Should be well-formed and readable—Thin lines should be slightly thicker—Typefaces for headings—Same design as type for text—Desirable, but not always feasible—An example—Large, bold headings should be avoided—Slightly decorative panels—Editorial headings and titles—Makeup of illustrations—A gray background—Well balanced—Text positioned between illustrations—Same style on facing pages—Arrangement of headings—They sell the content—A well-promoted story—The captions—Centered under illustrations—In two parts—Lines of equal length—The editorial pages—No standard style—Unlike other reading pages—Features—Poetry in italics—Restraint is necessary—The advertisements—Bold types overshadow text pages—Good taste—Not to be mixed with the text—Treatment need not be timid or aggressive—That’s when advertisers are best served.

HOUSE-ORGANS
Page 161

Little brother of the periodical and newspaper—Smallest and largest dimensions—Favorite sizes—Self-covers and covers that are separate—Not many pages—Published regularly-Titles—Number of columns—Margins—Type-faces—Headings—House advertising—Illustrations, descriptions and prices—Mistake to use dark types with illustrations—Ideal typographic treatment—Useful and informative—Light matter to maintain interest—Features—Borders and initials—Almanacs—House-organs on blotter stock—In newspaper style—A western printer’s expression—Specimens of actual work—Too much copy—Loose inclosures should not prove a nuisance—Return post cards—Postal regulations.

Little brother of the magazine and newspaper—Smallest and largest sizes—Popular formats—Self-cover and separate cover—Not too many pages—Published regularly—Titles—Number of columns—Margins—Typefaces—Headings—In-house advertising—Illustrations, descriptions, and prices—It's a mistake to use dark type with illustrations—Ideal typography—Useful and informative—Light content to keep interest—Features—Borders and initials—Almanacs—House publications on blotter stock—In newspaper style—A phrase from a western printer—Samples of actual work—Too much text—Loose inserts shouldn't be a hassle—Return postcards—Postal regulations.

TYPE-FACES
Page 169

Type-faces not easily remembered—Naming and numbering—Six representative standard Roman type-faces—Legible and good-looking and possessing character—Caslon Oldstyle—Scotch Roman—Cheltenham Oldstyle—Cloister Oldstyle—Bodoni Book—French Oldstyle—Private type-faces not considered—Permanency and investment—Cloister Oldstyle based on Jenson’s Roman letter—Not the first Roman type—Caslon Oldstyle—A historic American type-face—Approved by good printers as the best and most useful Roman face available—Difficulties in machine composition—Not an entirely new Roman letter—Story of its designing—Ill-treated by modern founders—The revival—Bodoni Book—Refined and legible—Its history—Modern ideas of improvement—Scotch Roman—The link connecting the graceful old-style and the severe modern Roman—French Oldstyle—Capitals especially pleasing—Cadmus, the Mayeur letter—Cheltenham Oldstyle—Designed in America and developed into a numerous family—The space above the line emphasized by long ascenders—Used for narrow booklets—Capitals awkwardly large—Development of the Roman type-face—In the beginning Roman letters were in capitals only—Lower-case letters in formation—Black Letter and White Letter—Jenson fortunate in the selection of a model—Comparisons—A change in form—Moxon’s drawings of the alphabet—Made into type—Baskerville’s xvtypes rival Caslon’s in beauty—Bodoni threw typography out of gear—His types not so dressed up and finished as at the present time—Modernized Oldstyle—Characteristics of Roman type-faces—The serifs—Has a decorative quality—Oldstyles and Moderns distinguished by serifs—Thick and thin strokes—Makes lettering interesting—Their distribution—Characteristics of pen-made letters—Ascenders and descenders—Beauty in the strokes—False logic—Proportion of letters—Old Roman capitals as models—Uniformity in width revealed in typewriter type—Legibility of type-faces—Type matter should be easy to read—Tests for legibility—Printing on a hard-finished paper and a soft-finished paper—Decided contrasts tire the eye—Lower-case more legible than capitals—Space between lines necessary—Space between words—Advantage of close spacing—Possible in machine composition—Words more easily read than letters—Group of words almost as easily read as one word—Length of line—Recommendations—Size and kind of type should be considered—Measuring one and a half alphabet—Technical and optical reasons—Testing newspaper types—Approved type sizes and leading—Dr. Cohn’s measurements—Italic types—The mate of Roman types—Was first cut by Francia for Aldus—Not merely an inclined Roman—Moxon’s Italic letters, including Swash capitals—Text faces—Fashioned after Black Letter writing—Other names—Block types—An unfinished Roman letter—Poster rendering in black tones—Bold types—Many could be dispensed with—Ornamental types—Types for special purposes—The influence of Frederic W. Goudy on typography.

Typefaces that are hard to remember—Naming and numbering—Six key standard Roman typefaces—Readable and attractive with distinct character—Caslon Oldstyle—Scotch Roman—Cheltenham Oldstyle—Cloister Oldstyle—Bodoni Book—French Oldstyle—Private typefaces not included—Durability and investment—Cloister Oldstyle modeled after Jenson’s Roman letter—Not the first Roman type—Caslon Oldstyle—A historically significant American typeface—Recognized by quality printers as the best and most practical Roman face available—Challenges in machine typesetting—Not an entirely new Roman letter—The story of its design—Neglected by modern founders—The revival—Bodoni Book—Elegant and readable—Its history—Current ideas on enhancement—Scotch Roman—The connection between the graceful old-style and the stark modern Roman—French Oldstyle—Especially attractive capitals—Cadmus, the Mayeur letter—Cheltenham Oldstyle—Created in America and expanded into a large family—The space above the line highlighted by long ascenders—Used for narrow booklets—Capitals somewhat oversized—Development of the Roman typeface—Originally, Roman letters were all capitals—Lowercase letters were being developed—Black Letter and White Letter—Jenson successfully chose a model—Comparisons—A shift in form—Moxon’s sketches of the alphabet—Converted into type—Baskerville’s types compete with Caslon’s in beauty—Bodoni disrupted typography—His types weren’t as polished and refined as today’s—Modernized Oldstyle—Traits of Roman typefaces—The serifs—Offers a decorative touch—Oldstyles and Moderns differentiated by serifs—Thick and thin strokes—Make lettering engaging—Their arrangement—Attributes of hand-crafted letters—Ascenders and descenders—Beauty in the strokes—Misguided reasoning—Letter proportions—Old Roman capitals as templates—Uniform width seen in typewriter type—Readability of typefaces—Type matter should be easy to read—Legibility tests—Printing on both hard-finished and soft-finished paper—Strong contrasts strain the eye—Lowercase is clearer than capitals—Necessary spacing between lines—Spacing between words—Advantages of tight spacing—Feasible in machine typesetting—Words are easier to read than individual letters—A group of words is almost as easy to read as one word—Line length—Recommendations—Consider size and type—Measuring one and a half alphabets—For technical and visual reasons—Evaluating newspaper types—Approved type sizes and line spacing—Dr. Cohn’s measurements—Italic types—The counterpart of Roman types—First created by Francia for Aldus—Not just a slanted Roman—Moxon’s Italic letters, including decorative capitals—Text faces—Inspired by Black Letter writing—Other terms—Block types—An incomplete Roman letter—Poster design in black tones—Bold types—Many could be eliminated—Ornamental types—Types for specific uses—The impact of Frederic W. Goudy on typography.

IMPRINTS
Page 195

The printer should regularly use his name and device—Neglect and fear of customer’s condemnation—Should mark his product as other craftsmen and manufacturers do—A guarantee of quality—How the innovation could be introduced—A precaution—Imprint should be unassuming and inconspicuously placed—Various uses—First use of a printers’ decorative device—Historical uses of distinguishing marks—Emblems of hospitality—The sign of the Cross—Printers should select a device and attempt to live up to it—The Gutenberg Bible contained neither device nor printed name—Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter first book with imprint—The colophon-A decorative device—Its significance—Imitated—As used by a descendant—The classic Aldus device—Pickering uses it—Others adopt it—Bruce Rogers’s interpretation—The imprint-device of the Venetian Society of Printers—Its significance—Emblem of authority—The most popular of old imprints—Hubbard adopts it—Used on biscuit packages—Other adaptations—Caxton’s imprint device—Resembles a rug—Characters cause discussion—A trade device used by the merchants of Bruges—A merchant’s memorial plate—De Worde adapts the device—Morris’s device resembles De Worde’s—The device of the German master printers—Typothetæ—A modern adaptation—The British printer and the pun—Daye and Myllar—Froben’s imprint—Devices of Bebel, Plantin, the Elzevirs, Tory, Dolet and Estienne—Devices very large in the old days—Ancient motives in two modern devices—The winged Lion of St. Mark—Recent adaptations—Story of the device—A colophon-imprint—Designs with ancient motives—The unique mark of the De Vinne Press—Imprint-devices based upon architectural motives—Initials in monogram form—Representative devices used by commercial printers—Decorative imprints with typefounders’ material—Harmony of type, rule and ornament—Small type imprints—Where should an imprint be placed—On books—On small commercial work—A legitimate opportunity for publicity that should be.

The printer should routinely use his name and logo—Avoiding neglect and fear of customer backlash—Should label his product like other craftsmen and manufacturers do—A guarantee of quality—How the innovation could be introduced—A precaution—The imprint should be humble and discreetly placed—Various uses—The first use of a printer’s decorative logo—Historical uses of distinguishing marks—Symbols of hospitality—The sign of the Cross—Printers should choose a logo and strive to uphold it—The Gutenberg Bible had neither logo nor printed name—Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter was the first book with an imprint—The colophon—A decorative logo—Its significance—Imitated—As used by a descendant—The classic Aldus logo—Pickering uses it—Others adopt it—Bruce Rogers’s interpretation—The imprint logo of the Venetian Society of Printers—Its significance—Symbol of authority—The most popular of old imprints—Hubbard adopts it—Used on biscuit packages—Other adaptations—Caxton’s imprint logo—Resembles a rug—Characters spark conversation—A trade logo used by the merchants of Bruges—A merchant’s memorial plate—De Worde adapts the logo—Morris’s logo resembles De Worde’s—The logo of the German master printers—Typothetæ—A modern take—The British printer and the pun—Daye and Myllar—Froben’s imprint—Logos of Bebel, Plantin, the Elzevirs, Tory, Dolet, and Estienne—Logos were much larger in the olden days—Ancient motifs in two modern logos—The winged Lion of St. Mark—Recent adaptations—Story of the logo—A colophon imprint—Designs with ancient motifs—The distinctive mark of the De Vinne Press—Imprint logos based on architectural motifs—Initials in monogram form—Representative logos used by commercial printers—Decorative imprints with typefounders’ materials—Harmony of type, rule, and ornament—Small type imprints—Where should an imprint be placed—On books—On small commercial work—A valid opportunity for publicity that should be.

xvi

LIST OF REPRODUCTIONS

  • The first printed Declaration of Independence, frontispiece
PART ONE
WHEN BOOKS WERE WRITTEN
Page 1
  • The scribe at work, opp. p. 1
  • Assyrian clay tablet, p. 1
  • Ancient Roman reading manuscript, p. 2
  • Roman waxed tablet, p. 3
  • The Egyptian “Book of the Dead,” p. 3
  • Evolution of the alphabet, p. 4
  • Capital letters of the ancient Romans, p. 4
  • Uncial letters of the sixth century, p. 5
  • Half-uncial letters, p. 5
  • Gothic letters of the fifth century, p. 5
  • Page from the “Book of Kells,” p. 6
THE ORIGIN OF TYPOGRAPHY
Page 7
  • Portion from Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter of 1457, opp. p. 7
  • French playing card, a block print, p. 7
  • Image print of 1423, p. 7
  • Bible of the Poor, from block book, p. 8
  • Text page from the block book “Ars Moriendi,” p. 8
  • Page from an engraved wood block, p. 9
  • Page from separate metal types, p. 9
  • Two pages from the Huntington copy of Gutenberg’s Bible, p. 12
  • Decorated page from Gutenberg’s famous Bible of Forty-two Lines, opp. p. 12
THE SPREAD OF TYPOGRAPHY
Page 13
  • The Venetian style of typography and decoration, opp. p. 13
  • The spread of typography (table), p. 13
  • Page printed by Koburger, p. 14
  • The first displayed composition, p. 14
  • A page from the famous Bamberg Missal, opp. p. 14
  • The first italic, a page by Aldus, p. 15
  • Specimens from Plantin’s Polyglot Bible of 1569, pp. 16, 17
  • Gothic ornamental pieces, from a “Book of Hours,” p. 16
  • Page by England’s first printer, p. 17
  • Page in English by John Daye, p. 18
  • The first Psalter in English, p. 18
TYPOGRAPHY IN COLONIAL DAYS
Page 19
  • A title-page of 1655, with much type display, opp. p. 19
  • First book printed in English America, p. 19
  • Title-page of a Shakespeare book, p. 20
  • First edition of “Pilgrim’s Progress,” (reset by Whittingham), p. 21
  • First issue of the London “Times,” p. 21
  • Page from a chap-book, p. 22
  • Page from “Description of Trades,” p. 22
  • French specimen of 1742, p. 23
  • Caslon types and ornaments, p. 23
  • First edition of “Paradise Lost,” p. 24
  • Two pages from “Poor Richard’s Almanack,” p. 25
  • Italian specimen of 1776, p. 26
  • Pages from Bodoni books of 1789 and 1806, p. 26
TYPOGRAPHY IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY
Page 27
  • A Morris title-page and text page, opp. p. 27
  • Page from a “Book of Common Prayer,” p. 27
  • A design of the rule-curving period, p. 28
  • Title-page of 1810, p. 28
  • Title-page of 1847, p. 28
  • Title-page of 1872, p. 28
  • Title-page of MacKellar’s “American Printer,” p. 29
  • A banquet program of 1865, p. 29
  • From a type-foundry specimen book of 1885, p. 30
  • A business card of 1865, p. 30
  • A business card of 1889, p. 31
  • Stationery composition of 1870, p. 31
  • The panel as used in 1893, p. 31
  • A neat letterhead of 1897, p. 31
  • Title-pages by Charles Whittingham, p. 32
  • Bradley’s adaptation of the Colonial style, opp. p. 32
  • A Jacobi page of 1892, p. 33
  • A Bradley page in lower-case, p. 33
  • A Bradley page in Caslon capitals, p. 34
  • A De Vinne page, p. 34
PART TWO
(The index figures refer to the number of the example)
THE “LAYOUT” MAN
Page 35
  • Booklet cover-page laid out with pencil and crayon, 1
  • Anticipating the appearance of the printed page, 2, 3
  • Ascertaining color combination with crayons, 5, 6
  • Laying out copy for machine composition, 4-a, 4-b
  • Table for ascertaining the number of words to square inch, 7
  • Notehead set without instructions, 8
  • Business card set without instructions, 9
  • Label set without instructions, 10
  • Notehead laid out for compositor, 11
  • Business card laid out, 12
  • Label laid out, 13
  • Layout of a cover-page, 14
  • Cover-page as set from instructions, 15
  • Layout sketch for a cover, 16 (insert)
  • The cover printed as indicated, 17 (insert)
HARMONY AND APPROPRIATENESS
Page 41
  • Harmony by the use of lower-case, 18
  • Harmony of type-faces and borders, 19
  • An architectural subject treated appropriately, 20 (insert)
  • A booklet cover suggestive of the subject, 21 (insert)
  • Cover suggested by old lock-plate, 22
  • An old lock-plate, 23
  • Inscription on a Roman arch, 24
  • Cover-page for a catalog of books, 25
  • A plain page for a plain purpose, 26
  • Treatment appropriate for a church program, 27-a
  • Portion of a page of an old manuscript missal, 27-b
  • Cover-page for a catalog of decorative materials, 28
  • The Colonial arch, 29
  • Title-page in semi-Colonial style, 30
TONE AND CONTRAST
Page 47
  • Contrast in color and tone, 31
  • Uniform tone and contrast of black and white, 32
  • Four ornaments, each of a different depth of tone, used in the construction of four pages, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37
  • Extremes of tone on book pages, 38, 39
  • Blending of illustration and text, 40
  • Spotted black tone of border and text, 41
  • Blending of illustration and type-face, 42
  • Uniform tone in classic typography, 43 (insert)
  • A study in uniform tone, 44 (insert)
  • Tone-blending of initial, headpiece and text, 45
  • Emphasis of parts to be printed in light color, 46, 47
  • Display lines should match the border in tone, 48
  • Uniform tone by equal spacing, 49
PROPORTION, BALANCE AND SPACING
Page 53
  • One method of determining the page length, 50
  • Another method, 51
  • xviiThree widths of type-faces, 52
  • Type page in which vertical lines predominate, 53
  • An architectural comparison, 54
  • The conventional page shape, 55
  • Type page in which horizontal lines predominate, 56
  • An architectural comparison, 57
  • Page in which ornament, border and type-face are in proportion, 58 (insert)
  • Pages in which the type-face is not in proportion, 59, 60
  • Mismated type-faces and borders, 61
  • Vertical lines proper, 62 (insert)
  • Horizontal lines not suitable, 63
  • A display line surrounded by other type lines must be larger, 64, 65
  • Type proportionately too large, 66
  • Type proportionately too small, 67
  • A proportion that is about right, 68
  • Out-of-center balance on a card, 69
  • Type grouped unusually high, 70
  • Exact center is too low, 71
  • The point of vertical balance, 72
  • An architectural example of out-of-center balance, 73
  • A disorderly arrangement, 74
  • An ornament that balances with the design, 75
  • Out-of-center balance on an announcement, 76
  • The effect of horizontal lines in a type page, and how it is avoided, 77, 78
  • Spacing letters to obtain even tone, 79
  • Emphasis obtained by letterspacing, 80
  • The obsolete practice of spreading the lines over the page, 81
  • The modern practice of grouping the type lines, 82
ORNAMENTATION
Page 59
  • The egg-and-dart ornament, 83
  • The bead ornament, 84
  • The egg-and-dart ornament as a typographic border, 85
  • The bead ornament as a typographic border, 86
  • Conventionalized papyrus plant, 87
  • The winged ball, 88
  • The acanthus leaf, 89
  • Palm-like Greek ornament, 90
  • The Doric pillar, 91
  • The Ionic pillar, 92
  • The Corinthian pillar, 93
  • Ornamentation on an entablature, 94
  • Square-lined, ornamentless furniture, 95
  • Square-lined, ornamentless typography, 96
  • Dainty, elaborate rococo ornament applied to furniture, 97
  • Similar treatment of a program title-page, 98 (insert)
  • Slightly ornamental furniture, 99
  • Slightly ornamental typography, 100
  • Monotony and variety in strokes and shapes, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105
  • Roman architectural border and roman type-face, 106
  • Gothic pointed ornament and Gothic type-face, 107
  • Natural and conventionalized ornament, 108
  • Extravagant wall border ornamentation, 109
  • Roman scroll ornament cut in stone, 110
  • Type ornament based upon geometric lines, 111
  • Type ornament based upon foliage, 112
  • Ornament based upon the inanimate, 113
  • Ornament based upon the animate, 114
  • Ornamental hand-lettered effect, 115
  • Corner ornaments, from bolts on inscription plates, 116
  • Decoration from a manuscript book, 117
  • Filling blanks with ornamentation, 118
  • Semi-ornamental ecclesiastic style, 119
  • Initials of various kinds, 120
  • Simple ornamentation applied to letterhead, 121
  • Appropriate ornamentation on a modern booklet, 122
  • Effect of alternating colors, 123
  • An ornament based upon the animate, 124
  • The significance of ornamentation applied, 125 (insert)
THE TYPOGRAPHY OF BOOKS
Page 67
  • Two model specimens of book typography, 126, 127 (insert)
  • Title-page of a book of classic poems, 128
  • Title-page with a nineteenth-century motive, 129
  • Two book pages inharmoniously treated, 130, 131
  • Two pages, composite Colonial and modern, 132, 133
  • Two pages constructed with care for detail, 134, 135
  • A text-page in modern roman, 136
  • A text-page in old-style type-faces, 137
  • Title-page with an Italian motive, 138
  • Page from a children’s book, 139
  • Harmony in tone of type-face and decoration, 140
  • A title-page of classic design, 141
  • Classic feeling in a modern title-page, 142 (insert)
  • Text-page of a Roycroft volume, 143
  • Text-page from a book by De Vinne, 144
  • Two pages from a small ecclesiastical book, 145, 146
  • Gothic treatment of a book of poetry, 147
  • Title-page with a French motive, 148
BOOKLETS, PAMPHLETS, BROCHURES, LEAFLETS
Page 75
  • Title-page by Goudy, 149
  • Two pages from leaflet in simple typography, 150, 151
  • Three easily-read pages by Sherbow, 152, 153, 154
  • Two typographic leaflet pages, 155, 156
  • Three pages in which rules are factors, 157, 158, 159
  • Label on a brilliant cover, 160
  • Admirable treatment for small amount of matter, 161
  • Adopting a photograph of wrong proportions, 162
  • Two artistic pages from type and rule, 163, 164
  • Rear and front cover designs of unconventional booklet, 165, 166
  • A prospectus page by Bradley, 167
  • Dignified typographic beauty, 168, 169
  • Hand-lettered cover page, 170
  • Representative page from a commemoration book, 171
  • Unconventional arrangement of a booklet page, 172
CATALOGS
Page 83
  • Page from an automobile catalog by Cleland, 175
  • Unusual treatment of a page, 176
  • Architectural title treatment, 177
  • Effective results obtained in a simple way, 178, 179
  • Inside page and cover of a publication catalog, 180, 181
  • German poster type on a catalog, 182
  • Title-page and inside page of a museum catalog, 183, 184
  • Rules on a book catalog, 185
  • Type matter prominently treated, 186
  • Unusual automobile catalog page, 187
  • Tabular rules in a wine list, 188
  • German wine-list treatment, 189
  • Title-page of an exhibit catalog, 190
  • Capitals and italic for descriptions, 191
  • Page from a sewing-machine catalog, 192
  • An attractive background, 193
  • Artistic catalog treatment, 194
  • Tabular matter in a catalog page, 195
PROGRAMS
Page 91
  • Program cover-page in ecclesiastical style, 200 (insert)
  • Economizing space on a program, 201
  • Missal style of church program, 202
  • Classic treatment of a church program page, 203
  • Program page in semi-missal style, 204
  • Generous margins on a program, 205
  • A dance card, 206
  • Page from a booklet program, 207
  • Unconventional treatment of a dance program, 208
  • The decorative border on a banquet program, 209
  • A halftone decorative background on a program, 210
  • A booklet program, 211
  • The banquet program in the form of a check book, 212
  • Humorous treatment of titles and odd arrangement, 213
  • Suggestion for a menu page, introducing a bit of fun, 214 (insert)
  • A classic menu page, 215
  • Program used by master printers, 216
  • Dignified style for menu page, 217
  • Treatment simulating woodcut decoration, 218
  • xviiiThe missal style adapted to a menu program, 219
  • Unique arrangement of a menu page, 220
  • Excellent typographic treatment, 221
  • Refined entertainment program page, 222
  • Two pages from an entertainment program, 223, 224
  • Program page in lower-case, 225
  • The decoration was in color, 226
  • Program in Gothic style, 227
  • A well-arranged page, 228
ANNOUNCEMENTS
Page 99
  • Classic capitals combined with rules, 229 (insert)
  • Two pages from an announcement folder, 230, 231
  • Announcement in Colonial style, 232
  • Odd treatment of an announcement, 233
  • Announcement in poster art, 234, 235
  • Invitation based on inscription plate, 236
  • Ornaments as eye-attracters, 237
  • Postal-card announcement, 238
  • Good advertising typography, 239
  • An announcement, 240 (insert)
  • Announcement in two groups, 241
  • Study in tone values and margins, 242
  • Harmony of type and decoration, 243
  • A brief announcement, 244
  • Colonial style of treatment, 245
  • Literal treatment in Colonial style, 246
  • Two pages from an announcement circular, 247, 248.
  • From a convention announcement, 249
  • Liberal leading of type lines, 250
  • Harmony in gray tones, 251
  • Blotter in rugged style, 252
TICKETS
Page 107
  • Classic, refined treatment for art and literary purposes, 256
  • The historic Gothic, or pointed style, 257 (insert)
  • Strong treatment, the motive of modern origin, 258 (insert)
  • A striking effect for the college student, 259 (insert)
  • Modern treatment based upon the Colonial, 260
  • Suggestion for course tickets, 261
  • Daintily appropriate in type-face and illustration, 262
  • The mission style applied to ticket composition, 263
  • The ecclesiastical or missal style well adapted, 264
  • Perhaps Morris would have set a ticket this way, 265
  • The medieval art worker furnished this motive, 266
  • Modern application of classic type effects, 267
  • Patterned after Colonial treatment of title-pages, 268
  • A dainty, refined effect suited to many occasions, 269
  • Robust treatment of an outing ticket, 270
  • The cab ornament dictated the type formation, 271
  • Treatment that should prevent easy counterfeiting, 272
  • Decoration suitable for the subject, 273
  • Arrangement with French motive, 274
LETTERHEADS AND ENVELOPS
Page 111
  • A large amount of copy conventionally treated, 275 (insert)
  • Small type for professional stationery, 276 (insert)
  • Church stationery of the conventional kind, 277 (insert)
  • A change in style of professional stationery, 278 (insert)
  • Elaborate border around letter sheet, 279
  • Symmetrical arrangement, 280
  • Squared effects, 281
  • Simple treatment of little copy, 282
  • Character in letterhead design, 283
  • Colonial rule border panel, 284
  • Advertising a meeting, 285
  • A well-treated panel heading, 286
  • Suggestion of the ecclesiastic, 287
  • Three lines of equal length, 288
  • For the general store, 289
  • Treatment suggesting the business, 290
  • Novel and dignified treatment, 291
  • A distinctive heading, 292
  • Decorative initials in heading, 293
  • Just a neat typographic arrangement, 294
  • Dignity in letterhead designing, 295
  • A heading in two groups, 296
  • Uncommon distribution of color, 297
  • Double-panel treatment, 298
  • Distinction in letterhead design, 299
  • An ornament with a touch of color, 300
  • A cross-lined panel, 301
  • A German idea, 302
  • Note-sheet typography, 303
  • Humor in a notehead, 304
  • Conventional treatment of an envelop corner, 305
  • Artistic envelop treatment, 306
  • Envelop corner in text letter, 307
  • Harmony of device and typography treatment, 308
  • Elaborate envelop corner, 309
BILLHEADS AND STATEMENTS
Page 119
  • Features of the average invoice, 310
  • Converting letterhead into billhead, 311
  • The non-stock-ruled type of billhead, 312 (insert)
  • Italic lower-case and Roman capitals, 313 (insert)
  • Billhead suggesting early printing, 314
  • Good taste on billheads, 315
  • Interesting border treatment, 316
  • Large setting of a billhead, 317
  • Invoice with many columns, 318
  • Decorative type treatment that is suitable, 319
  • An uncommon arrangement, 320
  • Credit bill made from billhead, 321
  • Professional bills, 322
PACKAGE LABELS
Page 123
  • Catching attention at a distance, 323 (insert)
  • Emphasizing daintiness and delicacy, 324 (insert)
  • Lettering for typographic study, 325
  • A label rich in suggestion, 326
  • Ruled line for the address, 327
  • Black lettering with contrasts, 328
  • Artistic quality thru typography, 329
  • Study in black and white, 330
  • A Caslon specimen, 331
  • Harmony of border and lettering, 332
  • Possible of typographic improvement, 333
  • Freedom of treatment, 334
  • Label used for a special list, 335
BUSINESS CARDS
Page 127
  • Standardizing the arrangement, 336
  • Dignified treatment for a well-known house, 337
  • Forceful card treatment, 338 (insert)
  • An unconventional effect, 339 (insert)
  • A black monogram that is attractive, 340 (insert)
  • The monogram in color, 341
  • An uncommon typographic effect, 342
  • High-hat-and-frock-coat treatment, 343
  • Business card in blocked capitals, 344
  • An underprinting decorative device, 345
  • Roman capitals with italic lower-case, 346
  • Modern German card treatment, 347
  • Decorative style suited to business, 348
  • Italic is sometimes pleasing, 349
  • A strong design for special purposes, 350
  • Classic arrangement in one size, 351
  • A large amount of copy, 352
  • Highly decorative, 353
  • Horizontal lines well employed, 354
  • For general purposes, 355
THE BLOTTER
Page 131
  • A model blotter, 356 (insert)
  • Modest amount of copy, 357
  • A convention-hall blotter, 358
  • Strong but pleasing contrasts, 359
  • Suggestive of an architectural panel, 360
  • Treatment that survives the test, 361
  • Neat, refined arrangement, 362
  • Type matter that fills the blotter, 363
  • A blotter arranged the narrow way, 364
  • Harmonizing typography, 365
POSTERS, CAR CARDS, WINDOW CARDS
Page 135
  • Typographic poster in Roman capitals, 366 (insert)
  • Lettered poster worthy of study, 367
  • A car card that has suggestion, 368
  • Little copy and strong contrasts, 369
  • Unique insurance advertising, 370
  • Simplicity worthy of adaptation, 371
  • Refined theatrical printing, 372 (insert)
  • xixA strong poster on plain lines, 373 (insert)
  • Type treatment that suggests Franklin’s time, 374
  • Poster in Shakespearean typography, 375
  • Simple typographic treatment, 376
  • Colonial style on a window card, 377
  • Suggestion for an excursion card, 378
ADVERTISEMENTS
Page 130
  • Newspaper advertisement arranged without thought, 379
  • Easier to read and more pleasing to look at, 380
  • A city department-store advertisement, 381 (insert)
  • The conversational style, 382
  • Name and trademark sell the goods, 383
  • One word thoroly advertised, 384
  • Interesting use of white space, 385
  • A bordered advertisement, 386
  • Study in advertising values, 387
  • Pictorial store advertisement, 388
  • The store name does not appear, 389
  • Four country-newspaper advertisements, 390 (insert)
  • A good-looking advertisement, 391
  • Suggested by building architecture, 392
  • A long list of agents, 393
  • Planned to sell high-priced cars, 394
  • Roman lettering and architecture, 395
  • Uncommon placing of blank space, 396
  • Modest display of a magazine advertisement, 397
  • Blank space emphasizes illustration, 398
  • A country-newspaper advertisement, 399
  • Classified advertisements, 400
NEWSPAPERS
Page 147
  • First number of America’s first newspaper, 401
  • The first newspaper issued regularly, 402
  • Make-up of a suburban newspaper, 403 (insert)
  • Front-page make-up of a Hearst newspaper, 404
  • Same news story by the “Times,” 405
  • A four-deck heading, 406
  • Sporting-page make-up, 407
  • Pyramid make-up of advertisements, 408
PERIODICALS
Page 151
  • Decorative treatment of a Thanksgiving number, 409 (insert)
  • Dignity in make-up and typography, 410
  • Samples of actual type matter, 410-A, 422-A, 424-A
  • Typographical harmony of heading and text, 411
  • Advertising the story to the readers, 412
  • Inserted feature panel, 413
  • Illustration separated from heading, 414
  • Headings and text in same face, 415
  • Use of a small illustration, 416
  • Box headings on editorial pages, 417
  • Another way to feature editorials, 418
  • Excellent editorial typography, 419
  • Use of rules on editorial page, 420
  • News photograph on front page, 421
  • Fine typographic make-up, 422
  • Attractive first text page, 423
  • Running around illustration, 424
  • Feature page of a Christmas number, 425
  • Convention feature of a trade journal, 426
  • News headings and make-up, 427
  • Conservative, readable editorial page, 428
  • Caslon headings and old-style text, 429
  • Caslon typography on a magazine, 430
  • Typography of a pocket magazine, 431
HOUSE-ORGANS
Page 161
  • Two pages in Kennerley typography, 432 (insert)
  • Three pages from a quaintly-treated house-organ, 433, 434, 435
  • Distinctive lettering and typography, 436
  • Interpolated paragraphs in italic, 437
  • A house-organ in miniature, 438
  • Another on the same plan, 439
  • Attractive rule treatment of headings, 440
  • Contents outlined on cover, 441
  • Simple, effective typography, 442
  • Dark-toned typography, 443
  • Suitable treatment for silverware, 444
  • Rubricated typography on a house-organ, 445, 446
  • Easily read and pleasingly illustrated, 447
  • A typographic house-organ, 448
  • Editorial page typographically neat, 449
  • Attractive use of rules and italic, 450
  • Elaborate house-organ title-page, 451
  • A page in Cloister type, 452
  • Use of paragraph marks, 453
  • Good specimen of house-organ cover, 454
  • Blank space used to good advantage, 455
  • Cover of the “Philistine,” 456
  • An “almanack” feature, 457
  • Bodoni typography, 458
  • Cover of a small house-organ, 459
  • Suggestions for return post cards, 460, 461, 462
TYPE-FACES
Page 169
  • Comparison of the same type forms on two finishes of paper, 463 (insert)
  • Roman alphabet from Trajan column, 464-A
  • Proportions of Roman capitals, 464-B
  • Evolution of Roman lower-case, 465
  • Two standard legible type-faces, 466
  • Six standard representative Roman type-faces, 467
  • Types of Sweinheim and Pannartz, 468
  • Roman types of John and Wendelin of Spires, 469
  • Roman type-face of Nicholas Jenson, 470
  • Manuscript of the fifteenth century, 471
  • Type-face used by Paul Manutius, 472
  • Cloister Oldstyle as a Jenson title, 473
  • Type-face used by National Printing Office, 474
  • Comparison of old-styles, 475
  • Cheltenham Oldstyle in Plantin typography, 476
  • Type-faces used by Daniel Elzevir, 477
  • Roman types of Fournier, 478
  • Capital alphabet drawn by Moxon, 479
  • Moxon’s lower-case alphabet, 480
  • Moxon’s alphabets inked in and reduced, 479-A, 480-A
  • Earliest Caslon specimen sheet, 481
  • Two slightly different faces to Caslon fonts, 482
  • Baskerville types, 483
  • Possible descent of Scotch Roman, 484
  • A study in French Oldstyle, 485
  • Resetting in Bodoni Book, 486
  • Comparison of original Bodoni with present types, 487
  • Modern Roman of the nineteenth century in three tones, 488
  • Modern Roman as used on newspapers, 489
  • Optical changes by adding serifs, 491
  • Differences in serif construction, 492
  • Oldstyle changed to modern, 493
  • Modern changed to old-style, 494
  • Comparison of strokes, 495
  • Thick and thin strokes in the alphabet, 496
  • Serifs and stroke contrasts, 497
  • Vertical thick strokes, 498
  • Diagonal thick strokes, 499
  • Heavy strokes in the letter “O,” 500, 501
  • Letters with ascending and descending strokes, 502
  • Descending strokes long in lettering, 503
  • Cramped descenders and compressed ends, 504
  • Descending and ascending numerals, 505
  • The space between words in good lettering, 506
  • Lower-case letters grouped according to formation, 507
  • Legibility and other qualities, 508
  • Sizes of type set to proper lengths, 509
  • Ascertaining the proper optical length, 510
  • Moxon’s Italic capitals of 1676, 511
  • Italic lower-case of Moxon, 512
  • Resetting in Cloister types, 513
  • Decorated capitals or Swash letters, 514
  • Roman and Italic compared, 515
  • A few representative Italic type-faces, 516
  • Complete Roman and Italic Caslon alphabets, 517
  • Text capitals of Moxon, 518
  • Text lower-case of Moxon, 519
  • Two standard German type-faces, 520
  • A half-Gothic and half-Roman type, 521
  • Several representative Text types, 522
  • Block types, serifless and of one thickness of stroke, 523
  • Modern art poster type, 524
  • A bold-face from French Oldstyle, 525
  • A few representative bold types, 526
  • Eighteenth-century ornamental types of Fournier, 527-A
  • Early nineteenth-century ornamental types of English founders, 527-B
  • Recent American types of the ornamental kind, 527-C
IMPRINTS
Page 195
  • The first “imprint,” as found on Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter, 1457, 528-A (insert)
  • .pn=xx
  • Colophon and imprint by Peter Schœffer, 1476, 528-B (insert)
  • The first imprint-device, and three adaptations, 529
  • Aldus’s anchor and dolphin device, and adaptations by modern printers, 530
  • The most popular imprint-device as early used by printers, and modern interpretations, 531
  • Arms supposedly granted the Typothetæ, German master printers, 532
  • The imprint-device of England’s first printer, its probable derivation, and two notable devices evolved from it, 533
  • Two designs with ancient motifs, 534
  • The pun, as found in two ancient printers’ marks, 535
  • Devices used by notable printers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, 536
  • A printer’s device and imprint that monopolizes two-thirds of the title-page, 536-A
  • Colophon-imprint by D. B. Updike, 537
  • The Lion of St. Mark adapted to a book on Venetian life, 538
  • The Lion of St. Mark and its use by the Oswald Press, 539-A, 539-B
  • Robert Estienne’s mark and Bruce Rogers’s adaptation, 540
  • An appropriate mark for a printer, 541
  • Use of oval shape in the designing of printers’ marks, 542
  • Modern imprints suggested by ancient forms, 543
  • Printers’ marks based upon architectural motifs, 544
  • An imprint that has to do with mythology, 545
  • The monogram is an attractive form for printers’ devices, 546
  • Representative of the large variety of devices in use by printers, 547
  • Decorative imprints constructed with typefounders’ ornaments and suitable type-faces, 548
  • Type imprints and the various effects possible with them, 549
  • Quaint book-ending as used by Elbert Hubbard, 550
APPENDIX
HOLIDAY GREETINGS
  • Reproductions of more than a hundred greetings, in various forms, received by the editors of “The American Printer.”
xx

LIST OF DESIGNERS

PART ONE
  • Aldus Manutius, p. 15
  • Barker, Christopher, p. 18
  • Bodoni, John Baptist, p. 26
  • Bradley, Will, opp. p. 32, 33, 34
  • Caxton, William, p. 17
  • Daye, John, p. 18
  • Daye, Stephen, p. 19
  • De Vinne, Theodore L., p. 34
  • Franklin, Benjamin, p. 25
  • Fust and Schœffer, opp. p. 7
  • Gutenberg, Johann, p. 12, opp. p. 12
  • Jacobi, Charles T., p. 33
  • Jenson, Nicholas, p. 14
  • Koburger, Anthony, p. 14
  • MacKellar, Thomas, p. 29
  • Morris, William, opp. p. 27
  • Newcomb, Thomas, opp. p. 19
  • Parker, Peter, p. 24
  • Plantin, Christopher, p. 16, 17
  • Rand, George C., and Avery, p. 29, 30
  • Roberts, James, p. 20
  • Sensenschmidt, J., opp. p. 14
  • Thomas, Isaiah, p. 28
  • Whittingham, Charles, p. 21, 32
PART TWO
(Figures refer to the example numbers)

PART ONE

THE SCRIBE AT WORK

Representing a secretary to Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundy and patron of learning, copying manuscript books at the Hague about the time typography was invented

THE SCRIBE AT WORK

Representing a secretary to Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundy and supporter of education, copying manuscript books in The Hague around the time when typography was invented.

1

WHEN BOOKS WERE WRITTEN

To many persons the words “Printing” and “Typography” are synonymous. The Standard dictionary, in its leading definition of the word “Printer,” says: “One engaged in the trade of typographical printing; one who sets type or runs a printing press; specifically a compositor.”

To many people, the terms “Printing” and “Typography” mean the same thing. The Standard dictionary, in its primary definition of the word “Printer,” states: “One involved in the business of typographical printing; someone who sets type or operates a printing press; specifically a compositor.”

But in these days there are so many kinds of printers (lithographic printers, steel- and copper-plate printers, linotype printers, textile printers, etc.) that to define the sort of printer who does his work with type the use of the adjective “typographic” is necessary.

But nowadays there are so many types of printers (lithographic printers, steel and copper plate printers, linotype printers, textile printers, etc.) that to define the kind of printer who works with type, the adjective “typographic” is needed.

The word “typography” is derived from the Greek typos, or type; and graphe, or writing—type-writing. Typography, then, as I shall use it, means printing from movable, or separate, types.

The word “typography” comes from the Greek typos, meaning type, and graphe, meaning writing—type-writing. Typography, as I will use the term, refers to printing with movable or individual types.

The origin of typography may be open to dispute, but it is an undeniable fact that the art of printing with separate types was practiced at Mainz, Germany, during the years 1450–1455, and from there spread over Europe.

The origin of typography might be debated, but it's a fact that the art of printing with individual types was developed in Mainz, Germany, between 1450 and 1455, and from there, it spread throughout Europe.

Before that period books were written by hand or printed from crudely engraved blocks of wood.

Before that time, books were either hand-written or printed from rough wooden blocks.


The thousand years preceding the invention of printing (the fifth to the fifteenth century) are known in history as the Middle Ages, and the first six centuries of this period (the fifth to the eleventh) are called the Dark Ages, because during those years civilization in Europe relapsed into semi-barbarism, and scientific, artistic and literary pursuits were almost entirely abandoned.

The thousand years before the invention of printing (the fifth to the fifteenth century) are known in history as the Middle Ages, and the first six centuries of this period (the fifth to the eleventh) are referred to as the Dark Ages, because during those years, civilization in Europe fell back into a semi-barbaric state, and scientific, artistic, and literary pursuits were nearly entirely neglected.

Latin had been the language of intellectual Europe up to the time of the fall of Rome (476 A.D.) and one of the influences that led up to this benighted period was that Southern Europe was overrun by so-called barbarians from Germania in the north—the Angles and Saxons, who settled in Britain; the Franks, Burgundians and Goths, who settled in Gaul (now France) and Germany; the Vandals who settled in Spain, and the Lombards, who settled in Italy.

Latin had been the language of educated Europe until the fall of Rome in 476 A.D. One of the factors that contributed to this dark time was the invasion of Southern Europe by so-called barbarians from Germania in the north—the Angles and Saxons, who settled in Britain; the Franks, Burgundians, and Goths, who moved into what is now France and Germany; the Vandals who settled in Spain; and the Lombards, who settled in Italy.

In Italy, Spain and Gaul the Latin-speaking natives far outnumbered the invaders, and the Germanic conquerors were forced to learn something of Latin. The present languages of those countries are the result of that attempt. The language of the Germanic Angles and Saxons was used in Britain after their invasion of that country, but was modified by the French-speaking Normans who conquered England in the eleventh century. Thus Latin as a common language died.

In Italy, Spain, and Gaul, the Latin-speaking natives greatly outnumbered the invaders, and the Germanic conquerors had to pick up some Latin. The modern languages of those countries are the result of that effort. The language of the Germanic Angles and Saxons was spoken in Britain after their invasion, but it was changed by the French-speaking Normans who took over England in the eleventh century. As a result, Latin as a common language faded away.


Altho dead to most of the population of Europe, Latin was made the official language of the Christian church, and, during that period of the Middle Ages when French, Spanish, Italian and English were in a state of evolution, it afforded a means of keeping alive in written books the knowledge the world had gained before the dark curtain of ignorance was rung down.

Although it was dead to most of the population of Europe, Latin became the official language of the Christian church. During that time in the Middle Ages when French, Spanish, Italian, and English were evolving, it provided a way to preserve in written books the knowledge the world had acquired before the dark curtain of ignorance fell.

Manuscript books are so-called from the Latin words manu scripti, meaning “written by hand,” and the initials of these two Latin words are frequently used for the word manuscript, i.e., “MS.”

Manuscript books are named after the Latin words manuscript, which mean “written by hand.” The initials of these two Latin words are often used to refer to a manuscript, i.e., “MS.”

The materials upon which books were written have at various times been clay, stone, wood, lead, skin, papyrus and paper.

The materials that books have been written on have included clay, stone, wood, lead, skin, papyrus, and paper at different times.

ASSYRIAN CLAY TABLET

Showing the cuneiform (arrow-shaped) writing

ASSYRIAN CLAY TABLET

Displaying the cuneiform (wedge-shaped) writing

Looking back six thousand years to the beginning of recorded time we find the Chaldeans (Babylonians and Assyrians) writing arrow-shaped characters with a sharp tri-pointed instrument upon damp clay, which was then made permanent by baking. In 1845 a library of baked clay tablets was discovered among the ruins of Nineveh. Thousands of these tablets have been collected in the British Museum, the most interesting of which is one which had been broken in eighteen pieces, containing an account of the Flood.

Looking back six thousand years to the beginning of recorded history, we see the Chaldeans (Babylonians and Assyrians) creating arrow-shaped symbols with a sharp, three-pronged tool on moist clay, which was then permanently preserved by baking. In 1845, a library of baked clay tablets was found in the ruins of Nineveh. Thousands of these tablets are now housed in the British Museum, with the most intriguing one being a tablet that was broken into eighteen pieces, containing a story about the Flood.

Twenty-five hundred years before the Christian era, when the great pyramids were being built, the Egyptians wrote upon papyrus, a plant growing on the banks of the Nile. The inner portion of the plant was stripped, the strips laid across each other, pressed and dried. The squares of material thus made were then joined together to form a long strip which was rolled around a rod.

Two thousand five hundred years before the Christian era, when the great pyramids were being built, the Egyptians wrote on papyrus, a plant that grows along the banks of the Nile. The inner part of the plant was stripped, the strips were laid across each other, pressed, and dried. The squares of material created were then joined together to make a long strip that was rolled around a rod.

Upon papyrus is written one of the oldest “books” in the world, “The Book of the Dead,” now in the British Museum. This is a literary work of a semi-sacred character, and copies were placed in the tombs with deceased 2Egyptians, whence its name. A reproduction of a portion of this book is given on page three.

Upon papyrus is written one of the oldest "books" in the world, "The Book of the Dead," now in the British Museum. This is a literary work of a semi-sacred nature, and copies were placed in the tombs with deceased Egyptians, which is where it gets its name. A reproduction of a portion of this book is provided on page three.

Supposedly under the patronage of the Egyptian ruler, Rameses II., about thirteen hundred years before Christ, many books on religion, law, medicine and other subjects were written, and a great library was accumulated.

Supposedly under the patronage of the Egyptian ruler, Rameses II., around 1300 BC, many books on religion, law, medicine, and other subjects were written, and a great library was collected.

The Chinese wrote with a stylus or brush upon tablets of bamboo fiber. It is impossible accurately to determine the antiquity of Chinese methods, as the extravagant and often unsubstantiated claims of historians antedate those of modern discovery. Ink, paper, and printing from blocks were all supposedly invented by the Chinese early in the Christian era, and even the first use of separate types is credited to Pi-Shing, a Chinese blacksmith. It may be relevant to suggest that the old-time “blacksmith” joke and the printing-term “pi” are derived from this source.

The Chinese wrote with a stylus or brush on bamboo fiber tablets. It's hard to pinpoint exactly how old Chinese methods are, as the extravagant and often unproven claims of historians predate modern discoveries. Ink, paper, and printing from blocks were all supposedly invented by the Chinese early in the Christian era, and even the first use of separate types is attributed to Pi-Shing, a Chinese blacksmith. It might be interesting to note that the old “blacksmith” joke and the printing term “pi” come from this.

Dressed skins and palm leaves were used by the Hindoos, and writings in Sanscrit were probably done in the temples by the Brahmins, the priests and philosophers of early India. The Vedas, sacred writings as old as 2000 B.C., formed a big portion of the Hindoo literature.

Dressed animal hides and palm leaves were used by the Hindus, and writings in Sanskrit were likely created in the temples by the Brahmins, the priests and philosophers of early India. The Vedas, sacred texts that are as old as 2000 B.C., made up a significant part of Hindu literature.

The Hebrews wrote upon stones and animal skins. In this manner they preserved the Old Testament portion of the Bible, and gave to posterity one of the most wonderful books ever written.

The Hebrews wrote on stones and animal skins. This way, they preserved the Old Testament part of the Bible and passed down one of the most amazing books ever written.


The ancient Phœnicians were commercial people, and being such did very little in producing literature; yet it is to them that we owe the present Roman alphabet. The illustration on a following page shows how this transition probably came about. There is a slight resemblance between some of the twenty-one characters in the Phœnician alphabet and certain picture writings of the Egyptians, whose hieroglyphic alphabet consisted of several hundred characters and was as cumbersome as is the Chinese alphabet with its several thousand characters.

The ancient Phoenicians were merchants, and because of that, they contributed very little to literature. However, we owe the current Roman alphabet to them. The illustration on the next page shows how this transition likely occurred. There is a slight resemblance between some of the twenty-one characters in the Phoenician alphabet and certain pictographs from the Egyptians, whose hieroglyphic alphabet had several hundred characters and was as unwieldy as the Chinese alphabet with its thousands of characters.

The Greeks received their alphabet directly from the Phœnicians, there being a tradition that one Cadmus introduced it into Greece. Some writers claim that “Cadmus” merely signifies “the East” and does not refer to an individual. The names of the first two letters of the Greek alphabet, Alpha and Beta, are similar to those of many other languages, and the word “alphabet” is derived from these two words.

The Greeks got their alphabet directly from the Phoenicians, with a tradition suggesting that a figure named Cadmus brought it to Greece. Some writers argue that “Cadmus” simply means “the East” and doesn’t point to a specific person. The names of the first two letters of the Greek alphabet, Alpha and Beta, are similar to those in many other languages, and the term “alphabet” comes from these two words.


In Greece, especially at Athens, before manuscripts became numerous, lectures and public readings were important features of intellectual life.

In Greece, particularly in Athens, before manuscripts became widely available, lectures and public readings played a crucial role in intellectual life.

The poems of Homer, supposed to have been composed about 880 B.C., were not put into writing until 560 B.C., and during this period of more than three hundred years they were retained in the memory of bards, by whom they were sung or recited.

The poems of Homer, believed to have been created around 880 BCE, weren't written down until 560 BCE. During this time of over three hundred years, they were kept alive in the memory of bards, who sang or recited them.

“Plutarch’s Lives,” one of the best known Greek literary works, was written in the second century, A.D.

“Plutarch’s Lives,” one of the most recognized Greek literary works, was written in the second century, A.D.

The Greek nation is generally acknowledged to have been one of the most intellectual of ancient times, yet it is a peculiar fact that only the boys were given an education, the intellectual development of women being considered unnecessary.

The Greek nation is widely recognized as one of the most intellectual of ancient times, yet it's an interesting fact that only boys received an education, while the intellectual growth of women was seen as unnecessary.

Copying of manuscripts was often a labor of love. Demosthenes, the great philosopher, is said to have transcribed with his own hands the eight books of Thucydides on the history of the Peloponnesian War.

Copying manuscripts was often a labor of love. Demosthenes, the great philosopher, is said to have personally transcribed the eight books of Thucydides on the history of the Peloponnesian War.

Many of the Greek manuscripts were written by scribes and copyists who were slaves, and some of these slaves developed much talent of a literary kind.

Many of the Greek manuscripts were created by scribes and copyists who were slaves, and some of these slaves developed significant literary talent.

The Greeks imported papyrus as a writing material, until one of the Ptolemies, in the interests of the Alexandrian library, decreed that no papyrus should go out of Egypt. This led to the development of parchment, so named from the city of Pergamus, where it was first made. Parchment is the skin of calves, goats or sheep, cleaned and smoothed.

The Greeks brought in papyrus as a writing material until one of the Ptolemies, aiming to protect the Alexandrian library, decided that no papyrus could leave Egypt. This resulted in the creation of parchment, named after the city of Pergamus, where it was originally produced. Parchment is made from the skin of calves, goats, or sheep that has been cleaned and smoothed.

In the days of militant Greece, Alexander the Great conquered Egypt, and in the year 332 B.C. founded Alexandria. When at his death Alexander’s empire was divided among his generals, Egypt fell to the lot of Ptolemy, surnamed Soter. Thus began a dynasty of Egyptian kings known as Ptolemies, ending in 30 B.C. with the death of Cleopatra, the last of the line. The second Ptolemy, surnamed Philadelphus, founded the great Alexandrian library, which accumulated over five hundred thousand rolls of manuscript, mostly brought from Greece. The length of the rolls varied from small ones of two hundred lines to massive scrolls of one hundred and fifty feet when unwound.

In the days of militant Greece, Alexander the Great conquered Egypt, and in 332 BCE, he founded Alexandria. After Alexander's death, his empire was divided among his generals, and Egypt went to Ptolemy, known as Soter. This marked the start of a dynasty of Egyptian kings called the Ptolemies, which ended in 30 B.C. with the death of Cleopatra, the last of the line. The second Ptolemy, known as Philadelphus, established the great Alexandrian library, which gathered over five hundred thousand manuscript rolls, mostly brought from Greece. The rolls varied in size from small ones with two hundred lines to massive scrolls that measured one hundred and fifty feet when fully unrolled.

There is a legend that Ptolemy Philadelphus was so impressed with the appearance of a roll of parchment containing in gold letters the sacred scriptures of the Hebrews, that, about 270 B.C., he caused their translation to be made into Greek. This, it is said, was done in Alexandria in seventy-two days by seventy-two learned Jews from Jerusalem. Hence the name “Septuagint,” which has always been applied to that Greek version of the Old Testament.

There’s a legend that Ptolemy Philadelphus was so struck by a scroll of parchment written in gold letters containing the sacred scriptures of the Hebrews, that around 270 BCE, he ordered a translation into Greek. It’s said this was done in Alexandria in seventy-two days by seventy-two knowledgeable Jews from Jerusalem. That’s where the name “Septuagint” comes from, which has always been used for that Greek version of the Old Testament.

ANCIENT ROMAN READING A MANUSCRIPT ROLL

From a painting found at Pompeii

ANCIENT ROMAN READING A MANUSCRIPT ROLL

From a painting found at Pompeii

Julius Cæsar, the Roman conqueror, whom Shakespeare designated “the foremost man of all this world,” about the year 30 B.C. visited the city of Alexandria and became interested in Cleopatra, the Egyptian queen. This led to a war with King Ptolemy, and during a fierce battle Cæsar set fire to the Egyptian fleet. Unfortunately the flames extended to the Alexandrian library and destroyed the greater part of its magnificent collection of manuscripts.

Julius Caesar, the Roman conqueror, whom Shakespeare called “the foremost man of all this world,” around 30 BCE visited the city of Alexandria and became interested in Cleopatra, the Egyptian queen. This resulted in a war with King Ptolemy, and during a fierce battle, Caesar set fire to the Egyptian fleet. Unfortunately, the flames spread to the Alexandrian library and destroyed most of its magnificent collection of manuscripts.

Gradually after that, Rome superseded Alexandria as an intellectual center, as Alexandria had previously superseded Athens. The conquest of Greece, over a hundred years before, had been the cause of many Greek scholars and philosophers taking up their abode in Rome. This, with the fact that a great number of scribes and copyists had involuntarily come to the Eternal City because of the fortunes of war, helped to develop in the Romans an interest in literature.

Gradually, Rome became more prominent than Alexandria as an intellectual center, just as Alexandria had once surpassed Athens. The conquest of Greece over a century earlier had led many Greek scholars and philosophers to settle in Rome. Additionally, a significant number of scribes and copyists had unintentionally arrived in the Eternal City due to the consequences of war, which sparked an interest in literature among the Romans.

During the period of Roman history identified with Julius Cæsar there were customs in manuscript making that are interesting in their suggestion of modern newspaper methods. In fact, Cæsar is credited with having been the founder of the newspaper.

During the time of Roman history associated with Julius Cæsar, there were practices in manuscript creation that are interesting in their resemblance to modern newspaper techniques. In fact, Cæsar is recognized as having been the founder of the newspaper.

3He introduced the daily publication of the news of the Roman Senate and People, a radical change from the previous custom of issuing yearly news-letters known as the Annals. The acts of the senate were reported by trained writers known as tabularii, or inscribers of tablets, and were revised and edited before publication by a senator appointed to that duty. Abbreviated forms of writing were used in “reporting,” a sort of short-hand which enabled the scribe to write as rapidly as a man could speak. Cæsar himself wrote his letters in characters which prevented them being read by his enemies.

3He started the daily publication of news from the Roman Senate and People, which was a major shift from the previous practice of releasing yearly newsletters called the Annals. The activities of the senate were reported by trained writers known as tabularies, or inscribers of tablets, who had their work reviewed and edited before publication by a senator assigned to that task. They used shortened forms of writing in "reporting," a kind of shorthand that allowed the scribe to write as fast as a person could talk. Cæsar himself wrote his letters in a way that made them unreadable by his enemies.

ROMAN WAXED TABLET

The present method of binding flat books might have originated with these old tablets

ROMAN WAXED TABLET

The current way of binding flat books may have started with these ancient tablets.

The “Acts of the Senate” grew into a diary of general news, known as the “Acts of the City,” and it is likely that the educated slaves in the families of public men were called into service to duplicate copies for circulation.

The “Acts of the Senate” developed into a record of general news, called the “Acts of the City,” and it’s likely that the educated slaves in the households of public figures were used to make copies for distribution.

Altho the Emperor Augustus, who reigned in Rome at the beginning of the Christian era, discontinued publishing the Acts of the Senate, he encouraged the writing and copying of books to such extent that the period is a memorable one in literature. The classic authors, Virgil and Horace, wrote at that time, and many other important manuscripts were produced.

Although Emperor Augustus, who ruled in Rome at the start of the Christian era, stopped publishing the Acts of the Senate, he promoted the writing and copying of books to such a degree that this period is significant in literature. Renowned authors like Virgil and Horace wrote during this time, and many other important manuscripts were created.

Slave labor was utilized for copying, and large editions of manuscript rolls were produced with an ease that rivaled the later method of the printing press. In such instances it was the custom for a reader to read aloud, to, say, one hundred trained writers. The possibilities of this process may be imagined. Horace allowed his slaves rations which were so meager that the entire cost of production, including papyrus and binding, of a small book was equivalent to about twelve cents in United States coin.

Slave labor was used for copying, and large numbers of manuscript rolls were produced with an ease that competed with the later printing press. In these cases, it was common for a reader to read aloud to, say, one hundred trained writers. You can imagine the potential of this process. Horace provided his slaves with rations that were so minimal that the total cost of producing a small book, including papyrus and binding, was about twelve cents in U.S. currency.

Thus it will be seen that in the days of the Roman Empire books were plentiful and cheap because of slave labor, just as they are cheap in modern times because of machinery.

Thus, it will be clear that during the days of the Roman Empire, books were abundant and inexpensive due to slave labor, just as they are affordable in modern times because of machinery.

For most of their books the Romans, as had the Egyptians and Greeks before them, used rolls of papyrus wound about rods.

For most of their books, the Romans, like the Egyptians and Greeks before them, used rolls of papyrus wrapped around rods.

Ordinarily these rods were made of wood, but for highly-prized manuscripts, rods made of ivory with gold balls at the ends were used, and the writing in such cases was on purple-colored parchment, elaborately decorated with gold or red ink.

Ordinarily, these rods were made of wood, but for highly valued manuscripts, rods made of ivory with gold balls at the ends were used, and the writing in those cases was on purple parchment, elaborately decorated with gold or red ink.

The present style of flat sheet books might have originated with the use by the Romans of tablets of wood or metal, wax-coated, on which memoranda were scratched with the stylus. Several tablets were hinged together and the wax surface was protected by raised edges in the manner of the modern school slates (see illustration). This led to the use of several leaves of vellum fastened together and enclosed by richly carved ivory covers, a form that came into use about 300 A.D., shortly before Constantine removed the Roman capital to Constantinople. Constantinople naturally became the center of civilization, and the work of transcribing manuscripts was taken up in that city. In the eighth century the reigning emperor, in order to punish the transcribers for insubordination, caused the library at Constantinople to be “surrounded by vast piles of fagots, which being fired at a given signal, the whole building was totally destroyed, along with its twelve scribes and chief librarian and more than thirty thousand volumes of precious manuscripts.” It seems to have been a favorite method of punishment during the Middle Ages for those in authority to destroy valuable manuscripts.

The current style of flat sheet books may have started with the Romans using wooden or metal tablets coated in wax, where they would scratch notes with a stylus. Several tablets were hinged together, and the wax surface was protected by raised edges, similar to modern school slates (see illustration). This evolved into multiple sheets of vellum bound together and covered with intricately carved ivory covers, a format that became popular around 300 A.D., just before Constantine moved the Roman capital to Constantinople. Naturally, Constantinople became the center of civilization, and the work of copying manuscripts began in that city. In the eighth century, the reigning emperor, to punish the transcribers for their defiance, had the library at Constantinople “surrounded by vast piles of fagots, which being fired at a given signal, the whole building was totally destroyed, along with its twelve scribes and chief librarian and more than thirty thousand volumes of precious manuscripts.” It seems that during the Middle Ages, it was a common method of punishment for those in power to destroy valuable manuscripts.


While, as we have seen, with the fall of the Western Empire of Rome, the drift of literature was toward the East, there remained in the West a dim light that was kept burning thru the six hundred years so fittingly called the Dark Ages. This light came from the monasteries of Europe, in which little bands of devoted men were transcribing and decorating the holy writings used by the Christian church.

While, as we've seen, after the fall of the Western Roman Empire, literature started shifting toward the East, a faint light continued to shine in the West throughout the six hundred years aptly named the Dark Ages. This light originated from the monasteries of Europe, where small groups of dedicated men were copying and illustrating the sacred texts used by the Christian church.

THE FAMOUS “BOOK OF THE DEAD”

Part of the seventeenth chapter of the “Book of the Dead,” showing hieroglyphics and illustrations. This book was written upon papyrus, and copies were placed by ancient Egyptians in tombs with their dead

THE FAMOUS “BOOK OF THE DEAD”

Part of the seventeenth chapter of the “Book of the Dead,” showcasing hieroglyphics and illustrations. This book was written on papyrus, and copies were placed by ancient Egyptians in tombs with their deceased.

The Christian church as an organization became powerful after the Roman Empire declined, and the monopoly of learning which the church possessed during the Dark Ages gave it such a superior knowledge and power that the Church of Rome granted authority to kings, and took it away, at its pleasure. A memorable instance of this power took place in the eleventh century, when Hildebrand, who as head of the church was known as Pope Gregory VII., forced Henry IV. of Germany, who had 4offended him, to seek pardon in a most humiliating manner. Henry stood barefoot in the snow for three days, before Hildebrand would pardon him.

The Christian church became a powerful organization after the Roman Empire fell, and its monopoly on knowledge during the Dark Ages gave it such superior knowledge and authority that the Church of Rome could grant power to kings and take it away at will. A notable example of this power occurred in the eleventh century when Hildebrand, known as Pope Gregory VII, forced Henry IV of Germany, who had wronged him, to seek forgiveness in a very humiliating way. Henry stood barefoot in the snow for three days before Hildebrand would forgive him.

On one occasion previous to the event mentioned above, Charlemagne (Charles the Great), king of the Franks, who was crowned by Pope Leo III. and saluted as Emperor of the West, was so mistakenly zealous in extending along with his own kingdom that of the Lowly Nazarene, that he ordered the hanging of more than four thousand prisoners before the Saxons would consent to be baptized and conquered.

On one occasion before the event mentioned above, Charlemagne (Charles the Great), king of the Franks, who was crowned by Pope Leo III and recognized as Emperor of the West, was so misguided in his enthusiasm to expand his kingdom along with that of the Lowly Nazarene that he ordered the execution of over four thousand prisoners before the Saxons would agree to be baptized and conquered.

EVOLUTION OF THE ALPHABET

This table shows how the present-day Roman alphabet came to us from the ancient Phœnicians

EVOLUTION OF THE ALPHABET

This table illustrates how today's Roman alphabet originated from the ancient Phoenicians.

Latin as a language is dead, so far as the secular world is concerned, but since the seventh century it has been the official language of the Church of Rome. All manuscripts produced by monks after that time, whether written in Britain, Germany or Italy, are in Latin, and the services of the Roman Catholic Church are conducted in that language even today. In the year 1080, the King of Bohemia asked Hildebrand, the Papal head of the church, for permission to have the services performed in the language of the people. This request Hildebrand refused, saying: “It is the will of God that his word should be hidden, lest it should be despised if read by every one.”

Latin as a language is dead in the secular world, but since the seventh century, it has been the official language of the Church of Rome. All manuscripts created by monks after that point, whether in Britain, Germany, or Italy, are in Latin, and the services of the Roman Catholic Church are still conducted in that language today. In the year 1080, the King of Bohemia asked Hildebrand, the Pope, for permission to have the services performed in the language of the people. Hildebrand refused this request, saying: “It is the will of God that his word should be hidden, lest it should be despised if read by everyone.”

In 1229 a council of the church published a decree which not only strictly forbade the translation of the Bible into a “vulgar tongue,” but also forbade all but the clergy to have copies in their possession.

In 1229, a church council issued a decree that not only strictly prohibited translating the Bible into a "common language" but also barred everyone except clergy from having copies in their possession.

In spite of these mandates, translations of various portions of the Bible were made into common tongues, but at great risk. William Tyndale set about to translate the Bible into English, vowing that ere many years he would cause the plough-boy to know more of the Scriptures than did the priests. By 1526 he had completed the New Testament, but his books were burned in the public squares as soon as completed. Ten years later Tyndale was burned, as had been his books.

In spite of these rules, parts of the Bible were translated into everyday languages, but it was risky. William Tyndale started translating the Bible into English, promising that within a few years, he would make sure that the average farmer understood the Scriptures better than the priests did. By 1526, he had finished the New Testament, but his books were burned in public squares as soon as they were ready. Ten years later, Tyndale was executed by burning, just like his books.

In 1534 Martin Luther completed his wonderful translation into German of the entire Bible, and gave to the people what had previously been denied them.

In 1534, Martin Luther finished his remarkable translation of the entire Bible into German, giving the people access to what had previously been denied to them.


We will now consider the making of manuscript books in the Middle Ages. In the early days of the Christian church, persecution was so severe that Christians lived in hiding, or secluded themselves from the outer world to worship. This condition led to the existence of a class of men known as monks (from a Greek word monos, meaning “alone”). At the beginning of the sixth century, an earnest, conscientious Christian, now called Saint Benedict, set out to reform the evils then prevalent in monastic life. One of his theories was that the monks should spend their time, not in idleness, but in manual labor, in teaching the youth, and in copying manuscripts. The Benedictine monks, as the followers of Benedict are known, were the main agents in spreading Christianity and keeping learning alive during the Dark Ages. Their mode of living became so popular that, it is said, there were at one time thirty-seven thousand monasteries or cloisters in existence.

We will now look at how manuscript books were made in the Middle Ages. In the early days of the Christian church, persecution was so intense that Christians had to hide or isolate themselves from the outside world to worship. This situation led to the emergence of a group of men known as monks (from the Greek word monos, meaning “alone”). At the start of the sixth century, a dedicated and conscientious Christian, now known as Saint Benedict, aimed to reform the issues that were common in monastic life. One of his ideas was that monks should spend their time not in idleness, but in manual labor, teaching the youth, and copying manuscripts. The Benedictine monks, as Benedict's followers are known, were key in spreading Christianity and preserving knowledge during the Dark Ages. Their way of life became so popular that, according to reports, there were once thirty-seven thousand monasteries or cloisters in existence.

CAPITAL LETTERS OF THE ANCIENT ROMANS

From inscriptions carved in stone

CAPITAL LETTERS OF THE ANCIENT ROMANS

From inscriptions carved in stone

One of the occupations of the Benedictine monks was that of copying manuscripts, and in some monasteries a room known as the scriptorium was set apart for such work. The office of scribe or copyist was one of great importance, and stringent rules governed the work. No writing was done by artificial light, talking was prohibited, and none but the scribes was allowed in the room. The tools were quill pens, knives to cut the quills, pumice stone to smooth the surface of the parchment, awls and rulers with which to make guide-lines, and weights to keep down the pages. Parchment and vellum, the former made of the skins of calves, goats or sheep, the 5latter of the skins of unborn lambs and kids, were the materials written upon. Black ink was commonly used for the text of books; and vermilion, an orange-red ink made of red clay, was used for titles and important parts of the text. The portions in red were known as rubrics, from rubrica (red earth.)

One of the tasks of the Benedictine monks was copying manuscripts, and in some monasteries, a room called the scriptorium was specifically designated for this work. The role of scribe or copyist was very important, and strict rules were in place to regulate the work. No writing was allowed by artificial light, talking was forbidden, and only the scribes could enter the room. The tools included quill pens, knives to trim the quills, pumice stones to smooth out the surface of the parchment, awls and rulers for creating guide lines, and weights to hold down the pages. The materials used for writing were parchment and vellum, the former made from the skins of calves, goats, or sheep, and the latter from the skins of unborn lambs and kids. Black ink was typically used for the main text of the books, while vermilion, an orange-red ink made from red clay, was used for titles and significant sections of the text. The parts in red were known as rubrics, from rubric (red earth).

Illuminating was done to some extent in the monasteries, but illuminators other than monks were often called upon to assist in this work. This practice led to queer combinations, as sacred writings were frequently decorated with monkeys and other animals and birds, which might have afforded appropriate decoration for an account of the Flood.

Illumination occurred to some degree in the monasteries, but illuminators who weren’t monks were often brought in to help with this work. This approach resulted in strange combinations, as holy texts were often embellished with images of monkeys, other animals, and birds, which could have been fitting decoration for a story about the Flood.

UNCIAL LETTERS OF THE SIXTH CENTURY

These letters show the Roman capitals assuming the shape of the later Gothic, or text, letters

UNCIAL LETTERS OF THE SIXTH CENTURY

These letters demonstrate how Roman capitals began to take on the form of later Gothic or text letters.

After the parchment was prepared and before beginning to write the scribe would scratch his guide-lines upon it with an awl. The position of the page and the lines of lettering were thus indicated, the page guide-lines extending to the edge of the parchment. The scribe’s work was principally that of copying (setting reprint, printers would say) from a book on the reading desk at his side. He was supposed strictly to “follow copy,” and his work was compared occasionally by a person known as a corrector. The black writing finished, the skins were passed to the rubricator or illuminator, if the manuscript was to be elaborately treated.

After the parchment was prepared and before starting to write, the scribe would use an awl to scratch guidelines onto it. This indicated where the page and the lines of text would go, with the page guidelines reaching the edge of the parchment. The scribe primarily copied from a book on the reading desk beside him (as printers would say, setting reprint). He was expected to strictly “follow the copy,” and his work was occasionally checked by someone known as a corrector. Once the black writing was complete, the skins were handed over to the rubricator or illuminator if the manuscript was going to be elaborately decorated.

The colored plate shown as a frontispiece is from an old print and pictures a scribe at work. He is writing the text on a sheet of parchment held in place by a weight. The book from which he is copying is in front of him, above his writing desk, and his copy is indicated by a guide such as printers still use. Ink pots and pens are in place and an elaborate library is evidently at his disposal. The picture is defective in perspective but is withal rather interesting.

The colored plate shown as a frontispiece is from an old print and depicts a scribe at work. He’s writing on a sheet of parchment held down by a weight. The book he’s copying from is in front of him, above his writing desk, and his copy is guided by a tool that printers still use today. Ink pots and pens are set up, and a well-stocked library is clearly available to him. The picture isn’t perfect in perspective, but it's still quite interesting.

HALF-UNCIAL LETTERS

Demonstrating the transition of Roman capitals into small, or lower-case, letters

HALF-UNCIAL LETTERS

Showing how Roman capitals evolved into small, or lowercase, letters.

The most beautiful and elaborate specimen of the illuminator’s art now in existence is the famous “Book of Kells,” a copy of the Gospels written about the seventh century. It is notable because of the excellence of its decoration, the endless variety of initial letters it contains, and the careful lettering. The scribes and illuminators of Ireland have a lasting monument in this book, as it is supposed to have been produced in the monastery of Kells, founded by St. Colombo.

The most beautiful and intricate example of the illuminator's art that exists today is the famous “Book of Kells,” a version of the Gospels created around the seventh century. It stands out because of its stunning decorations, the countless unique initial letters throughout, and the meticulous lettering. The scribes and illuminators of Ireland have a lasting tribute in this book, as it is believed to have been made in the monastery of Kells, established by St. Colombo.

Gold, red and blue were favorites with the illuminators, the burnished gold leaf adding richness to the brilliancy of the effect.

Gold, red, and blue were the favorites among the illuminators, with the shiny gold leaf adding richness to the vivid effect.

Manuscript books were ordinarily bound in thick wooden boards, covered with leather, but there are books yet preserved the boards of which are of carved ivory, and others that are inlaid with precious stones.

Manuscript books were typically bound with thick wooden boards and covered in leather, but some books still exist that have boards made of carved ivory, and others that are inlaid with precious stones.

The books associated with the Middle Ages most familiar to us are the Missal (mass-book), containing the services of the celebration of the mass; the Psalter (book of psalms), containing the psalms used in church services; the Book of Hours, containing prayers and offices for the several hours of the day, and the Donatus, a short Latin grammar, the work of Ælius Donatus, a Roman grammarian of the fourth century.

The books from the Middle Ages that we're most familiar with today are the Missal (mass book), which includes the services for celebrating mass; the Psalter (book of psalms), which has the psalms used in church services; the Book of Hours, which contains prayers and services for different times of the day; and the Donatus, a brief Latin grammar written by Ælius Donatus, a Roman grammarian from the fourth century.


GOTHIC LETTERS OF THE FIFTH CENTURY

Also showing the decorative uncial-like initials used on manuscript Missals

GOTHIC LETTERS OF THE FIFTH CENTURY

Also displaying the decorative uncial-style initials used in manuscript Missals

When printing was invented the first types used were imitations of the current Gothic lettering, known to us as Black Letter, Old English, etc. A few years later, when typography was introduced into Italy, the types 6were cut in imitation of the lettering selected for use by the scribes of the Italian Renaissance, which lettering is familiarly known in our time as Roman. The capitals of this Roman lettering are fashioned after those used in ancient Rome, and the small or lower-case letters are after the Roman writing known as minuscule, of the twelfth century.

When printing was invented, the first typefaces used were copies of the existing Gothic lettering, commonly called Black Letter or Old English. A few years later, when typography made its way to Italy, the typefaces were designed to mimic the lettering chosen by the scribes of the Italian Renaissance, which we now refer to as Roman. The capital letters of this Roman type are modeled after those used in ancient Rome, while the lowercase letters are based on the Roman script known as minuscule from the twelfth century.

The ancient Roman writing was all capitals, and as found on stamps and coins was of the character of the modern so-called “gothic” (plain strokes, without the small cross strokes known as serifs). The more carefully made Roman capitals, as carved on monuments and buildings, are not unlike the present type-faces known as Caslon and French old style.

The writing in ancient Rome used all capital letters, and the style found on stamps and coins resembles what we now call "gothic" (which has plain strokes without the small cross strokes known as serifs). The more meticulously crafted Roman capitals, like those carved on monuments and buildings, are similar to today's typefaces called Caslon and French old style.

The evolution of Roman capitals into the small or lower-case letters of the present day is traced in the writing called uncial, in which the letters A, D, E, H, M, Q are rounded and altered in appearance. More changes developed the writing known as half-uncial, in which only the N and F retain the appearance of Roman capitals. The small (lower-case) letters became known as minuscule, as contrasted with majuscule, or capital letters. (See reproductions on preceding pages.)

The development of Roman capitals into the small or lower-case letters we use today can be seen in a style of writing called uncial, where the letters A, D, E, H, M, and Q are rounded and look different. More changes led to a style known as half-uncial, in which only the letters N and F still look like Roman capitals. The small (lower-case) letters came to be known as tiny, in contrast to uppercase, or capital letters. (See reproductions on preceding pages.)

From this point book writing developed in two directions: one toward the heavy pointed stroke of the churchly Gothic style, and the other, guided by Charlemagne in the eighth century, to the style of Roman letter used by Jenson and other printers of Venice, Italy, in their classic printing of the fifteenth century. Our old-style Roman types are from this source.

From this point on, book writing evolved in two ways: one leaned towards the bold, pointed strokes of the Gothic style used by the church, while the other, influenced by Charlemagne in the eighth century, moved towards the Roman lettering style that Jenson and other printers in Venice, Italy, used during their classic printing in the fifteenth century. Our old-style Roman fonts come from this source.

Another style, called cursive, was the carelessly executed handwriting used for ordinary purposes, and in that respect may be likened to our own business script.

Another style, called handwriting, was the casually written handwriting used for everyday purposes, which can be compared to our own business script.

Thus as the fifteenth century dawned upon Europe we find literature and learning locked in the cells of the monks, while outside, the hosts of people who for ten centuries wandered in semi-darkness had reached an elevation which showed them a new existence coming with the intellectual awakening that was then already upon them.

Thus, as the fifteenth century began in Europe, literature and learning were confined to the cells of the monks, while outside, the masses who had wandered in semi-darkness for ten centuries had reached a level that revealed a new existence emerging with the intellectual awakening that was already happening.

LETTERED PAGE FROM THE “BOOK OF KELLS”

Showing the beautiful writing of the Irish scribes of the seventh century

LETTERED PAGE FROM THE “BOOK OF KELLS”

Showing the stunning calligraphy of the Irish scribes from the seventh century

Portion of a page (full size) from Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter of 1457

The first book with a printed date: showing initials and decoration cut in wood

Portion of a page (full size) from Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter of 1457

The first book with a printed date: featuring initials and decorations carved in wood

7

THE ORIGIN OF TYPOGRAPHY

The invention of typography in the fifteenth century marked the beginning of a new civilization and the end of the medieval thousand years. The Middle Ages may be said to have begun with the capture of Rome by the Vandals in 455 A.D., and to have ended with the production of what is considered the first printed book in 1455.

The invention of typography in the fifteenth century marked the start of a new era and the conclusion of the medieval period. The Middle Ages can be said to have started with the capture of Rome by the Vandals in 455 A.D., and to have ended with the creation of what is regarded as the first printed book in 1455.

FRENCH PLAYING CARD

A block print of the fifteenth century

FRENCH PLAYING CARD

A block print from the fifteenth century

As has been shown, during most of the thousand years preceding the invention of typography, ignorance and superstition reigned thruout Europe, despite the efforts of Charlemagne and others to revive learning and encourage interest in books. The popular mind had become so perverted that ability to read and write and love for art were considered proofs of effeminacy.

As has been shown, for most of the thousand years before the invention of printing, ignorance and superstition dominated Europe, despite the efforts of Charlemagne and others to revive learning and promote interest in books. The general mindset had become so distorted that the ability to read and write, as well as a love for art, were seen as signs of weakness.

As the medieval period neared its close, the brain of man became more active; he began to reason and to understand much that before had been mystery. Interest was manifested in the problems of science and religion, and notable things were accomplished by artists and craftsmen. It seemed as if the intellect of mankind was awakening from a long sleep, and civilization was being born again.

As the medieval period came to an end, people's minds became more active; they started to reason and understand many things that had previously been a mystery. There was growing interest in the issues of science and religion, and impressive achievements were made by artists and craftsmen. It felt like humanity’s intellect was waking up from a long slumber, and civilization was being reborn.

As the light of the new intelligence shone upon the earth and Europe rubbed its dazzled eyes, Typography, the star that was to light the way to modern knowledge and achievement, appeared.

As the light of new knowledge illuminated the earth and Europe blinked in disbelief, Text Design, the guiding star that would lead to modern understanding and success, emerged.

Printing with separate metal types, while involving a new principle, was to some extent a development of other methods. The evolution from manuscript books to block books, and from block books to books printed from types occurred quietly in the natural course of events; so quietly, indeed, that there is mystery surrounding each change of method.

Printing with individual metal types, although based on a new concept, was somewhat an advancement of earlier techniques. The transition from handwritten books to block books, and from block books to books printed with types happened gradually as part of a natural progression; so gradually, in fact, that each shift in method remains somewhat mysterious.

In the early part of the fifteenth century, when writing was the only agency used for making books, the demand for playing cards and sacred pictures necessitated a method of reproduction more rapid than the old; and thus engraved wood blocks were introduced.

In the early 1400s, when writing was the only way to create books, the rise in demand for playing cards and religious images required a faster method of reproduction than what was previously used; thus, engraved wood blocks were introduced.

IMAGE PRINT OF 1423

The first block print with a date

IMAGE PRINT OF 1423

The first block print that has a date

As the desire for knowledge outgrew the productive resources of the russet-gowned scribes, men with a mechanical turn of mind began to engrave pages of books on wooden blocks, a process which, tho extremely tedious, afforded a means of partly satisfying the need, and which became the stepping stone to the invention of printing with separate types. The block books, as they were 8called, sometimes contained whole pages of reading matter, each letter cut in relief on the face of the wood, and frequently the page included a large illustration carelessly drawn and crudely engraved. The early method of printing block books was by placing the paper on the inked surface and rubbing the back. Only one side was printed and a brown distemper ink (a kind of watercolor) was used. Simply constructed presses, prototypes of the modern hand press, were employed by block-book makers in later years. Playing cards and image prints were popular products of the block-book period, and after being printed were colored by means of stencils. A French playing card of the fifteenth century is reproduced on the preceding page, as well as a print illustrating the old legend of St. Christopher carrying the infant Jesus across a river. This last-mentioned print is dated 1423, is 8⅛ × 11¼ inches in size, and is the oldest dated specimen of printing.

As the hunger for knowledge grew beyond what the scribes in their brown gowns could produce, inventive minds started carving pages of books onto wooden blocks. Although this process was very tedious, it provided a way to partially meet the demand and became a stepping stone towards the invention of printing with movable types. These block books, as they were called, often featured entire pages of text, with each letter cut in relief on the wood, and frequently included a large illustration that was drawn carelessly and engraved roughly. The early method of printing these block books involved placing paper on the inked surface and rubbing the back. Only one side was printed, using a brown distemper ink (a type of watercolor). Later on, simple presses, which were prototypes of the modern hand press, were used by block-book makers. Playing cards and image prints were popular products during the block-book era, and after printing, they were colored using stencils. A French playing card from the fifteenth century is shown on the previous page, along with a print depicting the old legend of St. Christopher carrying the infant Jesus across a river. This last print, dated 1423, measures 8⅛ × 11¼ inches, making it the oldest dated example of printing.

The invention of printing really dates from the time books were printed from wooden blocks, altho the more important invention, that of typography (printing with separate types), is also known by the general word “printing.” The first block books, probably Donatuses, may have been printed in Holland. The “Donatus” is a Latin grammar, and received its name from its author, Ælius Donatus, a Roman grammarian of the fourth century. It is a small book of not more than thirty-four pages printed on parchment, and had a large sale.

The invention of printing really goes back to the time when books were made using wooden blocks, although the more significant invention, that of typography (printing with individual letters), is also generally referred to as “printing.” The first block books, likely Donatuses, may have been printed in Holland. The “Donatus” is a Latin grammar book, named after its author, Ælius Donatus, a Roman grammarian from the fourth century. It’s a small book of no more than thirty-four pages printed on parchment, and it sold very well.

BIBLE OF THE POOR

Famous block book of the fifteenth century

BIBLE OF THE POOR

Well-known block book from the fifteenth century

There is a morbid side to human nature, and it has been with us since the beginning. Today it finds delight in perusing in the sensational newspapers detailed descriptions of murders, train wrecks, and other happenings in which blood is spilled. During the Middle Ages it prevailed, and is reflected in the pictures that have come down to us in the block books. A doleful atmosphere is present in the block book, “Ars Moriendi” (Art of Dying), whose illustrations show weeping angels and leering demons, weird settings that are magnified by the crudeness of the engravings.

There’s a dark side to human nature, and it’s been around since the start. Today, it takes pleasure in reading sensational newspapers that provide graphic details about murders, train wrecks, and other events where blood is shed. This fascination existed during the Middle Ages and is shown in the images that have been passed down to us in block books. A gloomy vibe is present in the block book “Ars Moriendi” (Art of Dying), whose illustrations depict crying angels and grinning demons, with bizarre scenes that are intensified by the roughness of the engravings.

TEXT PAGE FROM A BLOCK BOOK

“Ars Moriendi,” printed in the fifteenth century

TEXT PAGE FROM A BLOCK BOOK

“The Art of Dying,” printed in the 15th century

The “Biblia Pauperum” ( Bible of the Poor) is another block book very popular in the days preceding the invention of typography. It is a book of about forty pages, consisting principally of illustrations of the important happenings as told in the Scriptures. The book was for the use of illiterate monks and those that did not have access to the elaborate manuscript Bibles.

The “Poor Man's Bible” (Bible of the Poor) is another block book that was very popular before typography was invented. It contains around forty pages, mainly made up of illustrations of key events from the Scriptures. The book was intended for illiterate monks and people who didn't have access to the complex manuscript Bibles.

A book of similar purpose, but more complete than the Bible of the Poor, is called “Speculum Humanæ Salvationis” (Mirror of Human Salvation). This book literally presents the transition from block books to type-printed books, for of the sixty-three pages in one edition twenty are printed from wood blocks and forty-three from separate types (see reproductions herewith). The printed page of the “Mirror” is a trifle larger than the page that is now being read. Almost every monastery in Europe contained copies of the “Speculum.”

A book with a similar purpose, but more comprehensive than the Bible of the Poor, is called “Speculum of Human Salvation” (Mirror of Human Salvation). This book represents the shift from block printing to movable type, as out of the sixty-three pages in one edition, twenty are printed from wood blocks and forty-three from individual types (see reproductions attached). The printed page of the “Mirror” is slightly larger than the page currently being read. Almost every monastery in Europe had copies of the “Speculum.”


When, where and by whom was typography invented? It is surprising that there should be any real uncertainty about the facts connected with the invention of typography, but some uncertainty does exist, and various opinions and conclusions are set forth in books on the subject. The new method of printing was invented in the midst of indifference and ignorance, and for many years but few cared that it had come among them.

When, where, and by whom was typography invented? It's surprising that there is any real uncertainty about the facts related to the invention of typography, but some uncertainty does exist, and different opinions and conclusions are presented in books on the topic. The new printing method was invented amid indifference and ignorance, and for many years, only a few people cared that it had arrived.

The inventor of typography, whether Coster or Gutenberg, was too modest to claim the credit in a substantial way, as he failed to print his name on the first books done by the new method.

The inventor of typography, whether it was Coster or Gutenberg, was too humble to take significant credit, since he didn’t print his name on the first books produced by the new method.

This modesty, or whatever else it may have been, opened the way for almost every European country to claim the honor of having been the home of the invention. However, all claims have been disproved excepting those of Germany and Holland, and as the argument now stands the weight of the evidence is with Germany.

This modesty, or whatever it was, allowed almost every European country to claim the honor of being the birthplace of the invention. However, all claims have been disproven except for those of Germany and Holland, and as it currently stands, the evidence strongly favors Germany.

C. H. Timperley, in his “Dictionary of Printing” (1839) says that of those who had written on the subject up to his time, one hundred and nine favored Mainz and twenty-four favored Haarlem as the birthplace of typography.

C. H. Timperley, in his “Dictionary of Printing” (1839) says that of those who had written on the subject up to his time, one hundred and nine supported Mainz and twenty-four supported Haarlem as the birthplace of typography.

There is indisputable evidence to prove that typography was practiced by Gutenberg at Mainz, Germany, from 1450 to 1455, and that the art spread from that city to all parts of Europe. There is no doubt about that. The only thing which can lose to Gutenberg and Germany the credit of the invention is proof that another man printed from separate types in another country previous to 1450. Certain investigators have attempted to supply this proof, as we shall see.

There is undeniable evidence that Gutenberg practiced typography in Mainz, Germany, from 1450 to 1455, and that this art spread from that city to all parts of Europe. There's no doubt about it. The only thing that could challenge Gutenberg and Germany's claim to this invention is proof that someone else printed using separate types in another country before 1450. Some researchers have tried to provide this proof, as we will see.

9

PAGE PRINTED FROM AN ENGRAVED WOOD BLOCK

From the “Mirror of Human Salvation”

By an unknown Dutch printer

PAGE PRINTED FROM AN ENGRAVED WOOD BLOCK

From the “Mirror of Human Salvation”

By an unknown Dutch printer

PAGE PRINTED FROM SEPARATE METAL TYPES

From the “Mirror of Human Salvation”

By an unknown Dutch printer

PAGE PRINTED FROM SEPARATE METAL TYPES

From the “Mirror of Human Salvation”

By an unknown Dutch printer

10The pretensions of Holland are that one Laurens Janszoon Coster (Lawrence, son of John, the sexton or sheriff) printed with separate types about the year 1430 at Haarlem.

10The claims of Holland are that a man named Laurens Janszoon Coster (Lawrence, son of John, the sexton or sheriff) printed with individual types around the year 1430 in Haarlem.

The earliest testimony on the subject is a chapter in the “Chronicle of Cologne” (1499) wherein the author speaks of information about the invention of typography received by him from Ulrich Zell, who printed books at Cologne, Germany, as early as 1464. He states that the “art was discovered first of all in Germany, at Mainz on the Rhine,” and that the “first inventor of printing was a citizen . . . named Junker Johann Gutenberg.” This statement is added to by the assertion that the new art “found its first prefiguration in Holland in the Donatuses which were printed there before that time.” It has been argued that the last assertion refers to block books.

The earliest evidence on the topic comes from a chapter in the “Chronicle of Cologne” (1499), where the author shares information about the invention of typography that he obtained from Ulrich Zell, who had been printing books in Cologne, Germany, as early as 1464. He claims that the “art was first discovered in Germany, in Mainz on the Rhine,” and that the “first inventor of printing was a citizen . . . named Junker Johann Gutenberg.” He also adds that the new art “first appeared in Holland in the Donatuses that were printed there before that time.” Some have argued that this last claim refers to block books.

An extract from the Cologne-Chronicle account may be of interest:

An excerpt from the Cologne-Chronicle account might be worth noting:

This highly valuable art was discovered first of all in Germany, at Mainz on the Rhine. And it is a great honor to the German nation that such ingenious men are found among them. And it took place about the year of our Lord 1440, and from this time until the year 1450, the art, and what is connected with it, was being investigated. And in the year of our Lord 1450, it was a golden year, they began to print, and the first book they printed was the Bible in Latin; it was printed in a large letter resembling the letter with which at present missals are printed. Altho the art was discovered at Mainz, in the manner as it is now generally used, yet the prefiguration was found in Holland, in the Donatuses, which were printed there before that time. And from these, the beginning of the said art was taken, and it was invented in a manner much more masterly and subtle than this, and became more and more ingenious.... But the first inventor of printing was a citizen of Mainz, born at Strassburg, and named Junker Johann Gutenberg. From Mainz the art was introduced first of all into Cologne, then into Strassburg, and afterwards into Venice. The origin and progress of the art was told me verbally by the honorable master Ulrich Zell, of Hanan, still printer at Cologne, anno 1499, by whom the said art came to Cologne.

This highly valuable art was first discovered in Germany, at Mainz on the Rhine. It's a great honor for the German nation that such innovative individuals are among them. This happened around the year 1440, and from that time until 1450, the art and everything related to it was being explored. In 1450, which was a pivotal year, they began to print, and the first book they printed was the Bible in Latin; it was printed in a large type similar to what is used for missals today. While the art was discovered in Mainz as we know it now, early versions were seen in Holland with the Donatuses, which were printed before that time. The foundation of this art was derived from those early works, and it was developed in a way that was much more skillful and sophisticated, becoming increasingly inventive. The original inventor of printing was a citizen of Mainz, born in Strassburg, named Junker Johann Gutenberg. From Mainz, the art was introduced first to Cologne, then to Strassburg, and later to Venice. The origin and development of the art were recounted to me by the esteemed Master Ulrich Zell of Hanan, who was still printing in Cologne in 1499, and through whom the art came to Cologne.

There was printed in the year 1561 an address to the town officers at Haarlem by Dierick Coornhert, an engraver, in which he stated that he was

There was printed in the year 1561 an address to the town officers at Haarlem by Dierick Coornhert, an engraver, in which he stated that he was

often told in good faith that the useful art of printing books was invented, first of all, here in Haarlem, altho in a crude way, as it is easier to improve on an invention than to invent; which art having been brought to Mainz by an unfaithful servant, was very much improved there, whereby this town, on account of its first having spread it, gained such a reputation for the invention of the art, that our fellow-citizens find very little credence when they ascribe this honor to the true inventor. . . . And because I implicitly believe what I have said before, on account of the trustworthy evidence of very old, dignified and gray heads, who often told me not only the family of the inventor, but also his name and surname, and explained the first crude way of printing, and pointed with their finger the house of the first printer out to me.

I've often been told in good faith that the useful art of printing books was first invented here in Haarlem, although in a primitive form, as it's easier to enhance an invention than to create one. This art was later taken to Mainz by a treacherous servant, where it saw significant improvements. As a result, this town gained such a reputation for the invention of printing that our fellow citizens struggle to be believed when they attribute this honor to the true inventor. And because I wholly believe what I've mentioned before, based on the reliable accounts of very old, respected individuals with gray hair, who often told me not only the inventor's family details but also his name, and explained the initial basic method of printing, pointing out the house of the first printer to me.

It will be noticed that Coornhert fails to mention the name of the alleged inventor, the location of his house, or the date of the invention. The claim that “the useful art of printing books was invented, first of all, here at Haarlem, altho in a crude way,” may refer to the printing of block books and not to typography.

It will be noticed that Coornhert does not mention the name of the supposed inventor, the location of his home, or the date the invention took place. The claim that “the useful art of printing books was invented, first of all, here at Haarlem, although in a rudimentary way,” may refer to the printing of block books and not to typography.

The claims of Holland were first presented definitely about 1566 in a history of the Netherlands called “Batavia,” the author of which was known in his own tongue as Adrian de Jonghe; in English as Adrian the Younger, and in Latin as Hadrian Junius. The story as written by Junius has been dubbed the “Coster Legend” and it reads in part as follows:

The claims of Holland were first clearly presented around 1566 in a history of the Netherlands called “Batavia,” written by Adrian de Jonghe; known in English as Adrian the Younger, and in Latin as Hadrian Junius. The story written by Junius has been referred to as the “Coster Legend” and it reads in part as follows:

About one hundred and twenty-eight years ago there dwelt in a house of some magnificence (as may be verified by inspection, for it stands intact to this day) in Haarlem, near to the market, and opposite the royal palace, Laurentius Joannes, surnamed Æditus, or Custos, by reason of this lucrative and honorable office, which by hereditary right appertained to the distinguished family of that name. . . . When strolling in the woods near the city, as citizens who enjoyed ease were accustomed to do after dinner and on holidays, it happened that he undertook as an experiment to fashion the bark of a beech tree in the form of letters. The letters so made, he impressed the reverse way, consecutively, upon a leaf of paper, in little lines of one kind and another.... Thereupon he made, by the addition of letters, explanations for pictures on engraved wood. Of this kind of printing, I myself have seen some stamped block books, the first essays of the art, printed on one side only, with the printed pages facing each other, and not upon both sides of the leaf. Among them was a book in the vernacular written by an unknown author, bearing the title “Spieghel onzer Behoudenis” [Dutch edition of the “Mirror of Salvation,” two pages of the Latin edition of which are here shown].... He subsequently changed the beech-wood letters for those of lead, and these again for letters of tin, because tin was a less flexible material, harder and more durable. To this day may be seen in the very house itself ... some very old wine flagons, which were made from the melting down of the remnants of these very types. The new invention met with favor from the public and ... attracted purchasers from every direction.... He added assistants to his band of workmen, and here may be found the cause of his troubles. Among these workmen was a certain John. Whether or not, as suspicion alleges, he was Faust ... or another of the same name I shall not trouble myself to ascertain. This man, altho bound by oath to the typographic art, when he knew himself to be perfectly skilled in the operation of type setting, in the knowledge of type founding, and in every other detail appertaining to the work, seized the first favorable opportunity ... and flew into the closet of the types, and packed up the instruments used in making them that belonged to his master, and ... immediately after slunk away from the house with the thief. He went first to Amsterdam, thence to Cologne and finally regained Mainz.... Within the space of a year, or about 1442, it is well known that he published, by the aid of the same types which Laurentius had used in Haarlem, the “Doctrinal” of Alexander Gallus ... and also the “Treatises” of Peter, of Spain.... I remember that Nicholas Gallius, the preceptor of my boyhood, a man of tenacious memory, and venerable with gray hairs, narrated these circumstances to me. He, when a boy, had more than once heard Cornelis, an old bookbinder and an underworkman in the same printing office when not an octogenarian and bowed down with years, recite all these details as he had received them from his master.

About one hundred and twenty-eight years ago, there lived in a fairly impressive house in Haarlem—still standing intact to this day—near the market and across from the royal palace, Laurentius Joannes, known as Æditus or Custos, due to this lucrative and honorable position that had been passed down through his distinguished family. While taking a stroll in the woods near the city—something citizens of leisure often did after dinner and on holidays—he got the idea to carve letters into the bark of a beech tree as an experiment. He then pressed these letters in reverse onto a sheet of paper in various little lines. After that, he created explanations for pictures on engraved wood by adding more letters. I have seen some of these early print block books, printed only on one side with the pages facing each other, not double-sided. One of them was a book in the local language written by an unknown author, titled “Spiegel of Our Salvation” [Dutch edition of the “Mirror of Salvation,” two pages of the Latin edition of which are here shown]. He later replaced the beech-wood letters with lead letters, and then switched to tin letters, as tin was less flexible, harder, and more durable. You can still see in that very house some old wine flagons made from melting down the remnants of those letters. The new invention was well-received by the public, attracting buyers from all around. He added more workers to his team, and here begins the source of his troubles. Among these workers was a man named John. Whether he was the infamous Faust or another person with the same name, I won’t bother to figure out. This man, despite being bound by an oath to the printing trade, recognized his skill in typesetting, type founding, and all related tasks. Seizing the first opportunity, he snuck into the type closet, packed up the tools belonging to his master, and quietly left the house with the stolen goods. He first went to Amsterdam, then to Cologne, and finally made his way back to Mainz. Within a year, around 1442, it is well-known he published, using the same types Laurentius had used in Haarlem, the “Doctrinal” of Alexander Gallus and also the “Treatises” of Peter of Spain. I remember that Nicholas Gallius, my childhood mentor—an elderly man with a sharp memory—told me these details. As a boy, he had often heard Cornelis, an old bookbinder and a lower-level worker in the same printing office, recount all these events, which he had received from his master.

This is the strongest proof the friends of Coster can present, and it has been thoroughly dissected by investigators representing both sides of the controversy. The weak points of the document appear to be:

This is the strongest evidence that Coster's supporters can provide, and it has been thoroughly analyzed by researchers from both sides of the debate. The weaknesses of the document seem to be:

(1) The date of the experiment with wood letters in the garden (about 1440) does not leave enough time for completion of the invention of separate metal types and the equipment of a large printing office until the theft which Junius says occurred in 1441.

(1) The date of the experiment with wooden letters in the garden (around 1440) doesn't give enough time for the invention of individual metal types and the setup of a large printing press before the theft that Junius claims happened in 1441.

(2) The date of the theft of 1441 does not reconcile itself with the fact that Gutenberg in 1436 was probably experimenting with his invention at Strassburg.

(2) The date of the theft in 1441 doesn’t match up with the fact that Gutenberg was likely experimenting with his invention in Strassburg in 1436.

(3) The claim that a Dutch edition of the “Mirror of Salvation” was printed with separate types cut from wood seems doubtful, because even the best modern machinery has not demonstrated that wood type can be made as accurately as is necessary for arrangement of small types in a massed page. When it is considered that the size of types used on the edition mentioned was about fourteen point, and the lines were printed in alignment, the modern printer is sure to question the accuracy of the assertion.

(3) The idea that a Dutch version of the “Mirror of Salvation” was printed using separate wooden types seems questionable because even the best modern machinery has not shown that wooden type can be made with the precision needed for arranging small types on a crowded page. Considering that the size of the types used in that edition was about fourteen point and that the lines were printed in alignment, a modern printer is likely to doubt the accuracy of this claim.

Four editions, two in Latin and two in Dutch, of the “Mirror of Salvation,” are known to exist, all printed from types except twenty pages of the second edition, which are printed from engraved blocks. They are the work of some early printer of Holland; whether his name was Coster or whether the books were printed before or after 1450 will probably never be ascertained.

Four editions, two in Latin and two in Dutch, of the “Mirror of Salvation” are known to exist, all printed from movable type except for twenty pages of the second edition, which are printed from engraved blocks. They are the work of an early printer from Holland; whether his name was Coster and whether the books were printed before or after 1450 may never be determined.

One Peter Scriverius in 1628 wrote a new version of the invention in which he says that “In the year 1428, Laurens Coster, then a sheriff of Haarlem, strolled into the Haarlem woods. He took up the branch of an oak-tree, cut a few letters in relief on the wood, and after a while wrapped them up in paper. He then fell asleep, but while he slept, rain descended and soaked the paper. 11Awakened by a clap of thunder, he took up the sheet, and to his astonishment discovered that the rain had transferred to it the impress of the letters,” etc.

One Peter Scriverius in 1628 wrote a new version of the invention in which he says that “In the year 1428, Laurens Coster, who was the sheriff of Haarlem at the time, walked into the Haarlem woods. He picked up a branch from an oak tree, carved a few letters into the wood, and after a while wrapped it up in paper. He then fell asleep, but while he slept, rain fell and soaked the paper. 11 Woken up by a clap of thunder, he took the sheet and, to his surprise, found that the rain had transferred the impression of the letters onto it,” etc.

Junius had placed the date of Coster’s invention at about 1440; Scriverius put it at 1428. The date was again changed, this time to 1420, by Marcus Boxhorn, who wrote on the subject in 1640.

Junius dated Coster’s invention around 1440; Scriverius set it at 1428. Marcus Boxhorn later revised the date to 1420 in his writings on the topic in 1640.

In 1722 a statue of Coster was erected in Haarlem, but no date was placed upon it.

In 1722, a statue of Coster was put up in Haarlem, but it didn't have a date on it.

A “true and rational account of the invention” was published at Haarlem by one Leiz in 1742, which gives in detail the supposed events of Coster’s life as a printer, from the cutting of the wood letters on the tree bark in 1428 to his death in 1467, but does not reveal the source of information.

A “true and rational account of the invention” was published in Haarlem by someone named Leiz in 1742, which goes into detail about the supposed events of Coster’s life as a printer, from carving the wooden letters out of tree bark in 1428 to his death in 1467, but it does not disclose the source of its information.

Gerard Meerman, a learned but impractical writer of Rotterdam, in 1765 published a book, “Origines Typographical,” and comes to the conclusion that typography was invented by Louwerijs Janszoon, known as Laurens Coster, who was sheriff at various times between 1422 and 1434, and who died between 1434 and 1440; he used separate wooden types about 1428 or 1430, and did not (as Junius had claimed) use lead or tin types; he was robbed on Christmas night 1440 by Johann Gensfleisch (elder brother of Johann Gutenberg), who carried the art to Mainz; he printed one edition of the “Mirror” from wooden types.

Gerard Meerman, an educated but impractical writer from Rotterdam, published a book in 1765 titled “Typographic Origins.” He concludes that typography was invented by Louwerijs Janszoon, also known as Laurens Coster, who served as sheriff at various times between 1422 and 1434 and died sometime between 1434 and 1440. He used separate wooden types around 1428 or 1430, and did not use lead or tin types as Junius had claimed. On Christmas night in 1440, he was robbed by Johann Gensfleisch (the elder brother of Johann Gutenberg), who took the art to Mainz; he printed one edition of the “Mirror” using wooden types.

In the early part of the nineteenth century a scientific society of Holland offered a prize for the best treatise on the subject of the invention and in 1816 Jacob Koning was given the award for his essay, “The Origin, Invention and Development of Printing.” Koning was the first writer on the subject to make researches in the Haarlem archives and in his book he claimed to have carefully collected from the registers, account books, and other official data all the entries that could throw light on the subject, and to have got together all the documentary evidence to be found.

In the early 1800s, a scientific society in Holland offered a prize for the best essay on the invention of printing, and in 1816, Jacob Koning received the award for his work titled “The Origin, Invention and Development of Printing.” Koning was the first writer to explore the Haarlem archives, and in his book, he claimed to have thoroughly gathered all relevant entries from the registers, account books, and other official records that could shed light on the topic, compiling all available documentary evidence.

The investigations of Koning, as reported by himself, corroborated some of the details of the stories of those who preceded him, and he found that Louwerijs Janszoon lived at Haarlem from 1370 to 1439, when he died.

The investigations by Koning, as he reported himself, confirmed some of the details in the stories of those who came before him, and he discovered that Louwerijs Janszoon lived in Haarlem from 1370 to 1439, when he passed away.

For many years the discussion stood as Koning had left it and Coster was universally given equal honors with Gutenberg as the inventor of typography; but for several years previous to 1869 rumors of errors and defects in the Haarlem claim were in circulation in Holland.

For many years, the debate remained as Koning had left it, and Coster was widely regarded alongside Gutenberg as the inventor of typography. However, for several years leading up to 1869, rumors about mistakes and flaws in the Haarlem claim were circulating in Holland.

Dr. Anton Van der Linde took up the task of investigating these rumors and the results of his labors were given in a series of articles in the Dutch Spectator during 1870. These articles were revised and issued in book form under the title, “The Haarlem Legend of the Invention of Printing.”

Dr. Anton Van der Linde took on the job of looking into these rumors, and the results of his work were published in a series of articles in the Dutch Spectator in 1870. These articles were later revised and published as a book titled “The Haarlem Legend of the Invention of Printing.”

Van der Linde showed how Coster’s cause had been bolstered by Koning and others with misrepresentations, evasions and even forgeries, and Holland practically surrendered its claims and altered its school books to meet the new conditions.

Van der Linde demonstrated how Coster’s case had been supported by Koning and others through misrepresentations, evasions, and even forgery, leading Holland to practically give up its claims and change its textbooks to adapt to the new circumstances.

The town records revealed no mention of printing in connection with Louwerijs Janszoon, the sheriff, who died in 1439, or with Laurens Janszoon Coster.

The town records showed no mention of printing in connection with Louwerijs Janszoon, the sheriff, who died in 1439, or with Laurens Janszoon Coster.

Van der Linde went to Germany as librarian of the royal library at Wiesbaden, became Von der Linde and in 1878 published an enlarged edition of his former book under the title “Gutenberg,” in which he argued that Gutenberg was the inventor of typography.

Van der Linde went to Germany as the librarian of the royal library in Wiesbaden, became Von der Linde, and in 1878 published an expanded edition of his earlier book titled “Gutenberg,” in which he argued that Gutenberg was the inventor of typography.

In 1879 J. H. Hessels, who had translated into English Van der Linde’s first book, was asked to write a review of the new book, “Gutenberg,” and in doing this he became so interested in the subject that he began a careful investigation into the question. He afterward declared in the preface of his book, “Gutenberg” (1882). “Had I myself been able to realize beforehand the time, the trouble, and the expense that this Gutenberg study would cost me, I should have abandoned the subject at the outset.” But the work was so infatuating that in 1887 he published another book: “Haarlem, the Birthplace of Printing; not Mentz.”

In 1879, J. H. Hessels, who had translated Van der Linde’s first book into English, was asked to write a review of the new book titled “Gutenberg.” While doing this, he became so interested in the topic that he started a thorough investigation into the matter. Later, he stated in the preface of his book “Gutenberg” (1882), “If I had realized in advance the time, effort, and cost that this Gutenberg study would require, I would have given up on the subject right from the start.” However, the work was so captivating that in 1887, he published another book: “Haarlem, the Birthplace of Printing; not Mentz.”

To demonstrate the fickle workings of the human mind it may be interesting to note that in his book of 1882 Mr. Hessels wrote, “I have never made any thoro examination of the Haarlem question, but such inquiries as I have made have led me to believe that the Haarlem claim cannot be maintained.” Contrast this with the title of his book of 1887: “Haarlem, not Mentz,” and notice his change of base.

To show how unpredictable the human mind can be, it's worth noting that in his 1882 book, Mr. Hessels wrote, “I have never done a thorough examination of the Haarlem question, but the inquiries I’ve made have made me believe that the Haarlem claim can’t be maintained.” Now compare that to the title of his 1887 book: “Haarlem, not Mentz,” and see how his stance has shifted.

While Mr. Hessels had come to believe in Haarlem, Van der Linde’s faith in the cause of Gutenberg was so strong he forsook his native land, and in America Theodore L. De Vinne in his book “The Invention of Printing” (1876) had reasoned out the tangle in a way to satisfy himself and many others that Gutenberg, and not Coster, was the inventor of typography.

While Mr. Hessels had come to believe in Haarlem, Van der Linde’s faith in Gutenberg's cause was so strong that he left his home country. In America, Theodore L. De Vinne argued in his book "The Invention of Printing" (1876) in a way that convinced himself and many others that Gutenberg, not Coster, was the true inventor of typography.

It is impossible here to go into detailed discussion of the points at issue, and only because the burden of proof is upon the Holland advocates has so much space been given to Coster.

It’s not possible to discuss all the points in detail here, and the only reason so much attention has been given to Coster is that the Holland advocates carry the burden of proof.

While there may be some truth in the Coster story, the proofs are weak, and Haarlem claimants do not seem able to agree as to the identity of the man Coster.

While there might be some truth to the Coster story, the evidence is weak, and the people from Haarlem claiming it don't seem to agree on who Coster really was.

Gutenberg, on the contrary, is shown by records too numerous to here mention separately, to have been a real, tangible human being, one who printed with separate metal types, and the probable inventor of the art.

Gutenberg, on the other hand, is documented by countless records that are too many to mention here individually, proving that he was a real, physical person who printed using individual metal types, and is likely the inventor of the art.

It is believed that Gutenberg was born at Mainz, Germany, about the year 1399. His parents were Frielo Gensfleisch (goose-flesh) and Else Gutenberg (good-hill). The boy Johann took the last name of his mother, in accordance with the German custom of perpetuating a name.

It is believed that Gutenberg was born in Mainz, Germany, around the year 1399. His parents were Frielo Gensfleisch (goose-flesh) and Else Gutenberg (good-hill). The boy Johann took his mother's last name, following the German tradition of passing down names.

Because of civil strife in Mainz, the Gensfleisch family left that city about 1420 and took up residence presumably at Strassburg.

Because of civil unrest in Mainz, the Gensfleisch family left the city around 1420 and likely settled in Strassburg.

There is a possibility that typography spent its infant days at Strassburg. Gutenberg lived there in 1439 and was practicing a secret art, which resulted in a lawsuit. The records of the case had lain, with other records of the time, in an old tower, and were not found until about 1740. They were removed to the Library of Strassburg, remaining there until the Franco-Prussian War (1870), when they were destroyed by soldiers.

There’s a chance that typography started out in Strassburg. Gutenberg was living there in 1439 and was working on a secret technique, which led to a lawsuit. The documents related to the case sat, along with other records from that time, in an old tower, and weren’t discovered until around 1740. They were transferred to the Strassburg Library, where they stayed until the Franco-Prussian War (1870), when soldiers destroyed them.

This suit against Gutenberg was brought by the relatives of Andrew Dritzehen, one of his workmen, whom Gutenberg had agreed to teach certain things connected with the business in which he was engaged. The testimony of the several witnesses includes references to secrets which Gutenberg would not impart to his associates: four pieces lying in a press (which De Vinne claims was a type-mould); lead, melted forms, work connected with printing, etc.

This lawsuit against Gutenberg was filed by the relatives of Andrew Dritzehen, one of his workers, whom Gutenberg had promised to teach certain aspects of the business he was involved in. The testimonies from various witnesses mention secrets that Gutenberg refused to share with his associates: four items resting in a press (which De Vinne claims was a type-mould); lead, melted forms, work related to printing, and so on.

It is argued that Gutenberg could not have printed in such a perfect manner at Mainz in 1455 if he had not devoted many of the years before to perfecting the new art, and for this reason Strassburg may reasonably claim to be the birthplace of typography.

It’s argued that Gutenberg couldn’t have printed so perfectly in Mainz in 1455 if he hadn’t spent many of the years before perfecting the new art, and for this reason, Strassburg can reasonably claim to be the birthplace of typography.


Gutenberg’s greatest misfortune, the seizure by Fust of his printing office and the just completed edition of the famous Forty-Two-Line Bible, furnishes a strong link in the chain of evidence that goes to prove him the inventor of printing.

Gutenberg’s biggest setback, when Fust took over his printing shop and the recently completed edition of the famous Forty-Two-Line Bible, provides a solid piece of evidence that demonstrates he was the inventor of printing.

The story has been often told how Johann Gutenberg, in need of cash to finance his invention, went to Johann Fust, a citizen of Mainz, and obtained a sum of money for which he mortgaged his printing office. This was in 121450. Five years later we find Fust appearing before a public notary in the convent of the Bare-Footed Friars to enforce his claim. Fust evidently caught Gutenberg unawares, for the courts decided against the inventor, and all types, presses and books in the possession of Gutenberg were taken to the house of Johann Fust.

The story has often been told about how Johann Gutenberg, needing money to finance his invention, approached Johann Fust, a citizen of Mainz, and secured a loan by mortgaging his printing office. This happened in 121450. Five years later, we see Fust appearing before a public notary at the convent of the Bare-Footed Friars to enforce his claim. Fust clearly caught Gutenberg off guard, as the courts ruled against the inventor, and all types, presses, and books in Gutenberg's possession were taken to Johann Fust's house.

The records of the agreement and lawsuit just mentioned are proof that Johann Gutenberg printed with separate metal types at Mainz, Germany, during the years 1450–1455. While he did not print his name on any of the products of his printing office, there are specimens of Mainz printing such as Indulgences, Donatuses, etc., which corroborative evidence shows to have been done before 1455.

The documents related to the agreement and lawsuit mentioned earlier confirm that Johann Gutenberg used separate metal types for printing in Mainz, Germany, between 1450 and 1455. Although he didn't put his name on any of the items produced in his printing shop, there are examples of Mainz printing, like Indulgences and Donatuses, for which supporting evidence indicates they were created before 1455.

The greatest achievement of Gutenberg, the culmination of his efforts in the new art, was the famous Forty-Two-Line Bible. There are a number of copies of this book in existence, some printed on vellum, some on paper. It consists of almost thirteen hundred pages, about twelve by sixteen inches, two columns to the page, the columns containing for the most part forty-two lines, whence the name by which the book is known. The types in size are equivalent to the present-day twenty-point, and in style are a copy of the book-Gothic letters of the fifteenth century.

The greatest achievement of Gutenberg, the peak of his work in this new art, was the famous Forty-Two-Line Bible. Several copies of this book still exist, some printed on vellum and others on paper. It has almost thirteen hundred pages, measuring about twelve by sixteen inches, with two columns per page. The columns usually have forty-two lines each, which is how the book got its name. The type size is comparable to today’s twenty-point, and in style, it mimics the book-Gothic letters of the fifteenth century.

The reproduction of an illuminated page of the Bible herewith is less than one-half the size of the original, which is in the British Museum, but will give an idea of the style of treatment accorded what is probably the first type-printed book. The text portion was printed in black ink only. The illuminators put a dab of red on the initial beginning each sentence, and filled all blank spaces with decoration, with which the initials I and P are cleverly blended. The smaller reproduction shows two pages from the copy that was sold for fifty thousand dollars in 1911.

The reproduction of an illuminated page from the Bible here is less than half the size of the original, which is in the British Museum, but it gives an idea of the style used in what is likely the first type-printed book. The text was printed in black ink only. The illuminators added a splash of red to the initial letter at the start of each sentence and filled all the blank spaces with decorative elements, cleverly blending the initials I and P into the designs. The smaller reproduction displays two pages from the copy that sold for fifty thousand dollars in 1911.

Johann Gutenberg, after his printing outfit was taken by Fust, did not entirely lose heart, but again established himself as a printer, altho he never afterward produced the equal of his great work, the Forty-Two-Line Bible. In 1465 he was appointed a gentleman of the court of the Bishop of Mainz, as a reward either for his invention or for political activity.

Johann Gutenberg, after Fust took his printing setup, didn’t completely lose hope but started up as a printer again, although he never produced anything as impressive as his masterpiece, the Forty-Two-Line Bible. In 1465, he was appointed as a gentleman of the court of the Bishop of Mainz, either as a reward for his invention or for his political involvement.

Gutenberg died about 1468 and his printing material and equipment went to one Conrad Humery, who had some rights of ownership in them.

Gutenberg died around 1468, and his printing materials and equipment were passed on to Conrad Humery, who had some ownership rights to them.


Among Gutenberg’s workmen in 1455 was a young man about twenty-five years of age named Peter Schœffer, who previously had copied books while a student at the University of Paris. He was a valued assistant to Gutenberg, and when Fust took over the equipment forfeited by the inventor, Schœffer assumed charge, married Fust’s daughter and became a partner in the business.

Among Gutenberg’s workers in 1455 was a young man around twenty-five named Peter Schœffer, who had previously copied books while studying at the University of Paris. He was a valued assistant to Gutenberg, and when Fust took control of the equipment taken from the inventor, Schœffer took charge, married Fust’s daughter, and became a partner in the business.

Two years later the new firm published a Psalter, which has become, along with Gutenberg’s Bible, one of the great books of historic printerdom. Seven copies are known to exist. The Psalter consists of one hundred and seventy-five vellum leaves nearly square. The Psalms are in types of about forty-point body, twice the size of those used on Gutenberg’s Bible and of a similar style. The features of the Psalter are the large printed two-color initials, generally credited to Schœffer, altho some authorities have declared that they originated with Gutenberg.

Two years later, the new company published a Psalter, which has become one of the great books in the history of printing, alongside Gutenberg's Bible. Seven copies are known to exist. The Psalter is made up of one hundred and seventy-five nearly square vellum leaves. The Psalms are printed in type that's about forty-point size, which is twice the size of the type used in Gutenberg's Bible and similar in style. The standout features of the Psalter are the large printed initials in two colors, typically credited to Schœffer, although some experts claim they originated with Gutenberg.

This Psalter was the first book with a printed date, the colophon at the end containing “August 14, 1457.”

This Psalter was the first book with a printed date, the colophon at the end stating "August 14, 1457."

The portion of a page shown in this connection, being full size and in colors, should convey an idea of the appearance of the Psalter. The four cross lines are for the music notes, which were inserted by hand.

The part of the page shown here, in full size and color, is meant to give you a sense of what the Psalter looks like. The four cross lines are for the musical notes, which were added by hand.

Fust died about 1466 from the plague while at Paris arranging for the sale of books. Schœffer continued to print, and many books came from his presses. The last book he printed, just before his death (about 1502), was, a fourth edition of his Psalter.

Fust died around 1466 from the plague while in Paris, organizing the sale of books. Schœffer kept printing, and many books were produced by his presses. The last book he printed, shortly before his death (around 1502), was a fourth edition of his Psalter.

THE GUTENBERG BIBLE OF FORTY-TWO LINES

Photographed by Walter Gilliss from the copy for which Henry E. Huntington paid fifty thousand dollars at the sale of Robert Hoe’s library in 1911

THE GUTENBERG BIBLE OF FORTY-TWO LINES

Photographed by Walter Gilliss from the copy that Henry E. Huntington bought for fifty thousand dollars at the auction of Robert Hoe’s library in 1911

THE GUTENBERG BIBLE, ILLUMINATED

Less than half the size of the original which is in the British Museum. Not all pages in the book were decorated like this, and copies in other collections are illuminated in a different style. From Humphrey

THE GUTENBERG BIBLE, ILLUMINATED

Less than half the size of the original, which is in the British Museum. Not all pages in the book were decorated like this, and copies in other collections are illuminated in a different style. From Humphrey

The Venetian style of typography and decoration

The Venetian style of typography and decoration

13

THE SPREAD OF TYPOGRAPHY

The city of Mainz is in the western part of Germany, on the banks of the river Rhine, and even at the present time is heavily fortified. In the year 1462, seven years after Gutenberg’s first Bible was completed, it was the scene of a terrible conflict between two archbishops, Diether and Adolph II., who contended for the office of elector. The elector had a vote in the selection of the king or emperor, and Mainz was one of seven principalities entitled to such an officer.

The city of Mainz is in the western part of Germany, along the banks of the Rhine River, and is still heavily fortified today. In 1462, seven years after Gutenberg finished his first Bible, it was the site of a fierce conflict between two archbishops, Diether and Adolph II., who were competing for the position of elector. The elector had a vote in choosing the king or emperor, and Mainz was one of seven principalities that had this role.

Diether was the choice of a majority of the citizens of Mainz, but Adolph had the support of the pope in his claims and made war to establish himself in the office. One night in October, 1462, there was an uprising of the followers of Adolph within the city and hundreds of the inhabitants were murdered. The soldiers of Adolph then entered Mainz and set it afire. Most of the citizens fled, and industry and business were paralyzed.

Diether was the choice of most of the people in Mainz, but Adolph had the pope backing his claims and waged war to secure his position. One night in October 1462, Adolph's supporters rose up in the city, and hundreds of residents were killed. Adolph's soldiers then invaded Mainz and set it on fire. Most of the citizens fled, and businesses came to a standstill.

Gutenberg was not affected by these events, as his new shop was outside of the city proper, in the village of Eltville, a short distance away.

Gutenberg wasn't impacted by these events since his new shop was located outside the city itself, in the village of Eltville, not too far away.

The printing office of Fust and Schœffer, however, was burned, and the workmen, fleeing for safety from the distressed city, took up residence in various parts of Europe. Thus was the new art of typography spread and its secrets made common property.

The printing office of Fust and Schœffer was burned down, and the workers, escaping from the troubled city for their safety, settled in different parts of Europe. This is how the new art of typography spread, and its secrets became widely known.

As an introduction to the consideration of the spread of typography, the accompanying table may be of value. The information is as accurate as can be given after carefully consulting numerous authoritative books on the subject. Most writers disagree as to the years in which typography was introduced into many of the cities of Europe, and for that reason in cases where such doubt exists one of the later dates has been chosen for the purpose of this table.

As an introduction to the discussion of the spread of typography, the table provided might be useful. The information is as accurate as possible after thoroughly checking various authoritative books on the topic. Most writers disagree about the years typography was introduced in several European cities, and for that reason, in instances where uncertainty exists, one of the later dates has been selected for this table.

In Germany, before the capture of Mainz, John Mentel at Strassburg and Albrecht Pfister at Bamberg, were printing books by the new process. With this fact as a basis, both Mentel and Pfister were once proclaimed inventors of typography by over-enthusiastic students of printing history.

In Germany, before Mainz was captured, John Mentel in Strassburg and Albrecht Pfister in Bamberg were printing books using the new method. Based on this, both Mentel and Pfister were once hailed as inventors of typography by overly enthusiastic printing history students.

Of the printers driven from Mainz by the sacking of the city, Ulrich Zell is probably the best known, because of his connection with the Coster-Gutenberg controversy. Zell became rich as a printer and publisher at Cologne, conducting an office there for more than forty years. During all that time he never printed a book in the German language. He had as business competitors twenty-one other master printers, one of whom, Arnold Ter Hoorne, was the first to make use of Arabic numerals.

Of the printers forced out of Mainz by the city's destruction, Ulrich Zell is probably the most well-known because of his link to the Coster-Gutenberg debate. Zell became wealthy as a printer and publisher in Cologne, running his business there for over forty years. Throughout all that time, he never printed a book in German. He had twenty-one other master printers competing with him, one of whom, Arnold Ter Hoorne, was the first to use Arabic numerals.

Gunther Zainer began to practice typography at Augsburg in 1468 and was the first printer in Germany to print a book in Roman characters. He was also one of the first printers to encounter restrictions by labor unions. Zainer illustrated his books with woodcuts, and this the block-printers’ guild objected to. They induced the magistrates to pass a law against typographers using woodcuts, but this law was afterward modified to allow the use of woodcuts when made by regular engravers.

Gunther Zainer started practicing typography in Augsburg in 1468 and was the first printer in Germany to produce a book in Roman characters. He was also one of the first printers to face restrictions from labor unions. Zainer illustrated his books with woodcuts, which the block-printers' guild opposed. They urged the magistrates to create a law banning typographers from using woodcuts, but that law was later changed to permit the use of woodcuts created by official engravers.

Heinrich Keffer printed at Nuremberg about 1470 under the direction of John Sensenschmidt, who in 1481, at Bamberg, published his famous Missal, printed with large Gothic types of about sixty-point body. Keffer had been a witness for Gutenberg in his law suit of 1455.

Heinrich Keffer printed in Nuremberg around 1470 under the guidance of John Sensenschmidt, who in 1481, in Bamberg, released his well-known Missal, printed in large Gothic type of about sixty-point size. Keffer had testified for Gutenberg in his legal dispute in 1455.

Anthony Koburger opened a printing office at Nuremberg in 1473, and later also conducted offices at Basel in Switzerland, and at Lyons in France. Koburger was one of the most successful of the early printers; he had twenty-four presses in operation at Nuremberg alone and is said to have printed twelve editions of the Bible in Latin and one in German.

Anthony Koburger opened a printing shop in Nuremberg in 1473, and later also operated offices in Basel, Switzerland, and Lyons, France. Koburger was one of the most successful early printers; he had twenty-four presses running in Nuremberg alone and is said to have printed twelve editions of the Bible in Latin and one in German.

CITY AND COUNTRY YEAR THE ART WAS INTRODUCED BY WHOM
Mainz Germany 1450 Johann Gutenberg
       
Strassburg Germany 1460 John Mentel
Bamberg Germany 1461 Albrecht Pfister
Cologne Germany 1464 Ulrich Zell
Rome
[Subiaco]
Italy 1465 Conrad Schweinheim
Arnold Pannartz
Basel Switzerland 1468 Bertold Ruppel
Augsburg Germany 1468 Gunther Zainer
Venice Italy 1469 John de Spira
Nuremberg Germany 1470 Heinrich Keffer
John Sensenschmidt
Paris France 1470 Ulrich Gering
Martin Crantz
Michel Friburger
Florence Italy 1471 Bernardo Cennini
Utrecht Netherlands 1473 Nicholas Ketelaer
Gerard de Leempt
Bruges Netherlands 1474 Colard Mansion
London
[Westminster]
England 1477 William Caxton
Barcelona Spain 1478 Nicholas Spindeler
Oxford England 1478 Theodoric Rood
Leipzig Germany 1481 Marcus Brand
Vienna Austria 1482 John Winterberger
Stockholm Sweden 1483 John Snell
Haarlem Holland 1483 Johannes Andriesson
Heidelberg Germany 1485 Frederic Misch
Copenhagen Denmark 1493 Gothofridus de Ghemen
Munich Germany 1500 John Schobzer
Edinburgh Scotland 1507 Androw Myllar
Mexico City Mexico 1540 John Cromberger
Dublin Ireland 1551 Humphrey Powell
Cambridge, Mass. [U.S.] 1639 Stephen Daye
 
THE SPREAD OF TYPOGRAPHY FROM MAINZ
14

PAGE PRINTED BY KOBURGER

Combination of woodcuts and typography in a book of 1493

PAGE PRINTED BY KOBURGER

A mix of woodcuts and text in a book from 1493

In Italy the first printing done with separate types was in the year 1465 in the monastery at Subiaco, a village on the outskirts of Rome. The cardinal in charge of the monastery, impressed with the importance of the new art and anxious to have it introduced into Italy, persuaded Conrad Schweinheim and Arnold Pannartz to come from Germany for the purpose. In 1467 these two printers removed to the city proper and there printed more extensively. Many classical works were produced, but five years later they complained that a large portion of the product had not been sold and that they were in distress.

In Italy, the first printing done with separate types happened in 1465 at the monastery in Subiaco, a village on the outskirts of Rome. The cardinal in charge of the monastery, recognizing the significance of this new art and eager to have it introduced in Italy, convinced Conrad Schweinheim and Arnold Pannartz to come from Germany for this purpose. In 1467, these two printers moved to the city and printed on a larger scale. They produced many classical works, but five years later, they complained that a large portion of their output had not sold, and they were struggling financially.

Ulrich Hahn was the first printer in the city of Rome proper, having opened an office there soon after Schweinheim and Pannartz began work at Subiaco.

Ulrich Hahn was the first printer in the city of Rome, having set up shop there shortly after Schweinheim and Pannartz started working at Subiaco.

John de Spira (born in Spire, Germany) was the first typographer at Venice, the Italian city famous for the excellence of its printed books. Setting up a press in 1469, his work was of such quality as to obtain for him exclusive right to print by the new process at Venice. De Spira died in 1470 and the privilege was forfeited.

John de Spira (born in Spire, Germany) was the first typographer in Venice, the Italian city renowned for the quality of its printed books. He established a press in 1469, and his work was so exceptional that he gained exclusive rights to print using the new method in Venice. De Spira passed away in 1470, and the privilege was lost.

Nicholas Jenson, who came to Venice in 1470, is known as the originator of the Roman type-face. Schweinheim, Pannartz, Hahn and De Spira, all had used type-faces based upon the letters of Italian scribes, but the types had Gothic characteristics. Nearly all Roman type-faces of the present day trace lineage, as it were, to the types of Jenson.

Nicholas Jenson, who arrived in Venice in 1470, is recognized as the creator of the Roman typeface. Schweinheim, Pannartz, Hahn, and De Spira all used typefaces inspired by the letters of Italian scribes, but those types had Gothic features. Almost all Roman typefaces today can be traced back to Jenson's designs.

With the exception of Gutenberg, Fust and Schœffer, and perhaps Aldus, who succeeded him, Jenson is the most conspicuous figure among the early printers. The story of his introduction to the art is interesting: Charles VII., King of France, in the year 1458 decided to send an emissary to Mainz to learn the new art, which was supposed to be a secret, and Jenson, then an engraver and master of the royal mint at Tours, was selected for the mission. Three years later he returned to Paris with a full knowledge of typography, but found the king had died and that his successor was not interested in the matter. This condition of affairs seems to have discouraged Jenson, for he did not begin to print until 1470, and then at Venice, Italy. (A typographical error in a printed date of one of his books makes it read 1461 instead of 1471, and encourages some writers to claim that Jenson was the first Venetian printer.) The death of John de Spira opened the field for other printers in Venice, and Jenson was one of the first to take advantage of it.

With the exception of Gutenberg, Fust and Schœffer, and maybe Aldus, who came after him, Jenson stands out as the most notable figure among the early printers. His introduction to the art is quite interesting: Charles VII, King of France, decided in 1458 to send an emissary to Mainz to uncover the new art, which was thought to be a secret. Jenson, who was an engraver and the master of the royal mint in Tours at the time, was chosen for the mission. Three years later, he returned to Paris with a complete understanding of typography, only to find that the king had died and his successor wasn't interested in the subject. This situation seems to have discouraged Jenson, as he didn’t start printing until 1470, and then in Venice, Italy. (A typographical error in the date of one of his printed books shows it as 1461 instead of 1471, leading some writers to claim that Jenson was the first Venetian printer.) The death of John de Spira created opportunities for other printers in Venice, and Jenson was among the first to take advantage of it.

Jenson cut but one set of punches for his Roman type-face, the cutting being done so accurately that no changes were afterward necessary. The Roman types, being less decorative and more legible than the Gothic letters of the Germans, allowed the use of capitals for headings. A colophon, the forerunner of the modern title-page, was set by Jenson entirely in capitals with the lines opened up by liberal space. This colophon, which was probably the first page of displayed type composition, is reproduced below.

Jenson created only one set of punches for his Roman typeface, and he did the cutting so precisely that no adjustments were needed afterward. The Roman types, being simpler and easier to read than the decorative Gothic letters from Germany, made it possible to use capital letters for headings. A colophon, the predecessor of today’s title page, was set by Jenson entirely in capitals with the lines spaced generously. This colophon, likely the first example of displayed type composition, is shown below.

THE FIRST PAGE OF DISPLAYED TYPE COMPOSITION

Arranged by Jenson at Venice in 1471

THE FIRST PAGE OF DISPLAYED TYPE COMPOSITION

Set up by Jenson in Venice in 1471

It is an interesting fact that the books of Jenson do not contain the letters J, U and W, these characters not having been added to the alphabet until some years later. To satisfy a demand he also cut and used a round Gothic face. The product of Jenson’s presses represents the highest attainment in the art of printing. His types were perfect, the print clear and sharp, paper carefully selected, and margins nicely proportioned.

It’s interesting to note that Jenson's books don’t include the letters J, U, and W, as these letters were added to the alphabet several years later. To meet demand, he also created and used a round Gothic typeface. The works produced by Jenson’s presses are considered the peak of printing artistry. His type was flawless, the print was clear and sharp, the paper was carefully chosen, and the margins were well-proportioned.

Jenson died in 1481, honored and wealthy. His printing office passed first to an association and then to one whose fame as a printer perhaps surpasses that of Jenson.

Jenson died in 1481, esteemed and rich. His printing shop first went to a group and then to someone whose reputation as a printer might even exceed that of Jenson.

Aldus Manutius was a learned Roman, attracted to printing about 1489 by the pleasures it afforded in the publishing of books. He introduced the slanting style of type known as italic, so named in honor of Italy and fashioned after the careful handwriting of Petrarch, an Italian poet. Italic at first consisted only of lower-case 15letters, small upright Roman capitals being used with them. The reproduction below shows this combination and also the peculiar style of inserting a space after the capital letter beginning each line.

Aldus Manutius was a knowledgeable Roman who became interested in printing around 1489 because of the joy it brought in publishing books. He introduced the slanted type style known as italic, named in honor of Italy and inspired by the meticulous handwriting of Petrarch, an Italian poet. Initially, italic only included lower-case letters, while small upright Roman capitals were used alongside them. The reproduction below shows this combination and also the unique style of adding a space after the capital letter at the start of each line. 15

A page (actual size) from the famous Bamberg Missal

Printed by Sensenschmidt in 1481

A page (actual size) from the famous Bamberg Missal

Printed by Sensenschmidt in 1481

Aldus also introduced the innovation of considerably reducing the size of books from the large folio to the convenient octavo. The size of a folio page is about twice that of this one, which is known as a quarto, and an octavo page is half the size of a quarto.

Aldus also introduced the innovation of significantly reducing the size of books from the large folio to the more convenient octavo. A folio page is about twice the size of this one, which is known as a quarto, and an octavo page is half the size of a quarto.

Aldus was the first to suggest the printing of a polyglot Bible. The word polyglot means “many tongues” and here refers to a book giving versions of the same text or subject matter in several languages. The polyglot Bible of Aldus was to have been in Hebrew, Greek and Latin, but got no further than a few specimen pages.

Aldus was the first to propose printing a polyglot Bible. The term polyglot means “many languages” and here refers to a book that provides versions of the same text or topic in multiple languages. Aldus's polyglot Bible was meant to include Hebrew, Greek, and Latin, but it only progressed to a few sample pages.

The first polyglot work ever printed was a Psalter of eight columns, each a different translation, from the press of Peter Paul Porrus, at Genoa, Italy, in 1516. This Psalter was the literary work of Augustin Justinian, a Corsican bishop, who later also arranged an entire Bible on similar plans.

The first polyglot book ever printed was a Psalter with eight columns, each featuring a different translation, produced by Peter Paul Porrus in Genoa, Italy, in 1516. This Psalter was created by Augustin Justinian, a bishop from Corsica, who later organized an entire Bible using similar methods.

THE FIRST ITALIC TYPE-FACE

Page printed by Aldus at Venice in 1514

THE FIRST ITALIC TYPEFACE

Page printed by Aldus in Venice in 1514

Aldus is honored wherever books are known, not only on account of the excellence of his productions, but because of the sincerity of his purpose and his love of printing. In the first book printed by him at Venice he declares for himself and co-workers: “We have determined henceforth to devote all our lives to this good work, and call God to witness that our sincere desire is to do good to mankind.” In the production of classical works Aldus was assisted by many scholar-refugees from Constantinople, which city had been captured by the Turks. Aldus’s fame spread thruout Europe, and many visitors came to Venice to see him. This annoyed him to such an extent that he had a notice placed above the entrance to his printing office which in part read: “Whoever you are that wish to see Aldus, be brief; and when business is finished, go away.” It can thus be seen that the present-day motto cards popular in business offices are not a new idea.

Aldus is respected wherever books are known, not just because of the quality of his work, but also because of his genuine intentions and love for printing. In the first book he printed in Venice, he stated for himself and his team: “We have decided to dedicate our lives to this good work, and we call God to witness that our true desire is to benefit humanity.” Aldus was supported in producing classical works by many scholar-refugees from Constantinople, which had been captured by the Turks. Aldus’s reputation spread throughout Europe, attracting many visitors to Venice to meet him. This bothered him so much that he put up a notice above the entrance to his printing office that read in part: “Whoever you are that wish to see Aldus, be brief; and when business is finished, go away.” It’s clear that the motto cards we see in modern business offices are not a new concept.

Aldus’s complete name was Aldus Pius Manutius Romanus, the first word of which is abbreviated from Theobaldus.

Aldus’s full name was Aldus Pius Manutius Romanus, with the first part being a shortened version of Theobaldus.

There were more than two hundred printing offices in Venice before the year 1500 and two million volumes were produced. These figures may surprise the average modern reader, who is not inclined to concede extensive production to the past.

There were over two hundred printing presses in Venice before the year 1500, and they produced two million books. These numbers might surprise today's average reader, who might not readily recognize the extensive production of the past.

Bernardo Cennini, a goldsmith, introduced typography into Florence, Italy, in the year 1471. It is claimed that he made his tools, cast his types and printed without instruction from German typographers, depending upon verbal reports of the process and examination of printed books. Cennini produced only one book.

Bernardo Cennini, a goldsmith, brought typography to Florence, Italy, in 1471. It’s said that he made his tools, cast his types, and printed without guidance from German typographers, relying on verbal accounts of the process and looking at printed books. Cennini only produced one book.

Johann Numeister, who had been a pupil of Gutenberg, after the death of his master journeyed toward Rome, but for some reason stopped at the little Italian city of Foligno and began to print there in 1470. He used both Roman and Gothic types.

Johann Numeister, who had been a student of Gutenberg, traveled to Rome after his master's death but, for some reason, paused in the small Italian city of Foligno and started printing there in 1470. He used both Roman and Gothic typefaces.

In Switzerland the new art was first practiced at Basel about 1468 by Bertold Ruppel or Rodt, who had been one of Gutenberg’s workmen. Basel was an important printing center in the days when the art was young, and gave to France its first typographers.

In Switzerland, the new art was first practiced in Basel around 1468 by Bertold Ruppel or Rodt, who had been one of Gutenberg's workers. Basel was a key printing center during the early days of this art and provided France with its first typographers.

John Froben, who set up a press at Basel in 1491, is perhaps the best known of the printers of that city, and because of his use of the then new italic letters was called the “German Aldus.”

John Froben, who established a printing press in Basel in 1491, is probably the best known of the printers in that city, and because of his use of the then-new italic typefaces, he was referred to as the “German Aldus.”

In those days lived the famous Dutch philosopher and theologian Erasmus, one of the brightest minds of Europe. Erasmus, having heard of Froben, came to Basel to arrange for the printing of his books, and thus began a friendship which lasted many years. Erasmus became a guest at the house of Froben, and his presence was a big factor in that printer’s success. Erasmus once said of Froben that he benefited the public more than himself, and predicted that he would leave his heirs more fame than money. (A book of one of the works of Erasmus, printed by Hieronymus Froben, son of John, recently sold for fifteen hundred dollars at a sale in New York.)

In those days, the famous Dutch philosopher and theologian Erasmus was one of the brightest minds in Europe. After hearing about Froben, he traveled to Basel to arrange

In France typography might have been introduced as early as 1461 had not the death of Charles VII. interfered with the plans of Jenson and caused him to go to Venice. As it was, in the year 1470 Ulrich Gering, Martin Crantz and Michel Friburger, three German printers who had been working at Basel, Switzerland, settled at Paris and began to print under the patronage of two members of the University of Sorbonne. The early books of this press were printed from a Roman type-face. The quality of the work of these printers is said not to have been good. Types were defective and presswork deficient, many of the printed letters needing retouching by hand.

In France, typography might have started as early as 1461 if Charles VII hadn't died, which disrupted Jenson's plans and led him to Venice. Instead, in 1470, Ulrich Gering, Martin Crantz, and Michel Friburger, three German printers who had been working in Basel, Switzerland, moved to Paris and began printing with the support of two members of the University of Sorbonne. The early books from this press were produced using a Roman typeface. The quality of their work is said to have been poor. The type was flawed, the presswork was lacking, and many printed letters required manual retouching.

Gering became rich and upon his death left much of his fortune to the university within whose walls he had first printed upon coming to Paris.

Gering became wealthy and, upon his death, left much of his fortune to the university where he had first printed when he arrived in Paris.

In order to demonstrate the success of the early printers in decorating their books without the aid of illuminators, a page is reproduced, printed about 1486 by Philip Pigouchet for Simon Vostre, a bookseller of Paris. The decorations were printed from wood blocks, engraved 16in the style of the Gothic period, with stippled backgrounds, and are interesting to the printer because they show early use of the pieced border, a method now familiar.

To show how successful early printers were at decorating their books without illuminators, here is a page printed around 1486 by Philip Pigouchet for Simon Vostre, a bookseller in Paris. The decorations were printed from woodblocks, carved in the Gothic style, with dotted backgrounds, and are notable for printers because they illustrate an early use of the pieced border, a technique that is now well-known. 16

SPECIMENS FROM THE FIRST TWO PAGES OF THE POLYGLOT BIBLE IN HEBREW, LATIN AND GREEK. PRINTED BY PLANTIN AT ANTWERP. ABOUT 1569

SPECIMENS FROM THE FIRST TWO PAGES OF THE POLYGLOT BIBLE IN HEBREW, LATIN AND GREEK. PRINTED BY PLANTIN AT ANTWERP. ABOUT 1569

GOTHIC ORNAMENTAL PIECES

Book of Hours, printed for Simon Vostre at Paris in 1486

GOTHIC ORNAMENTAL PIECES

Book of Hours, printed for Simon Vostre in Paris in 1486

Henry Estienne settled in Paris in 1502 and was the first of an illustrious family of typographers. The Estiennes flourished until 1664, during that time printing many remarkable books. A grandson of Henry Estienne was the first to apply the system of numbered verses to the entire Bible.

Henry Estienne moved to Paris in 1502 and was the first in a notable family of printers. The Estienne family thrived until 1664, producing many outstanding books during that period. A grandson of Henry Estienne was the first to implement a system of numbered verses for the entire Bible.

Robert Estienne, a son of Henry, was the best known and most scholarly of the Estiennes. He was patronized and favored by the King of France, and his press may be said to have been the beginning of the celebrated Greek Press of Paris.

Robert Estienne, the son of Henry, was the most well-known and scholarly member of the Estienne family. He was supported and favored by the King of France, and his printing press can be considered the start of the famous Greek Press of Paris.

Robert Estienne’s ambition, the printing of de-luxe editions of the classics, was his undoing as well as his making. The priests of the Sorbonne, upon the appearance of a polyglot Bible in Hebrew and Greek from the Estienne press, became enraged and Robert had to flee to Geneva, Switzerland, for safety. There was little demand in that city for elaborate books, but Estienne patiently worked there until his death in 1559. His life had been spent in a labor of love, for he had scorned money as a reward for his work.

Robert Estienne's ambition to print deluxe editions of classic texts was both his downfall and his success. The priests at the Sorbonne were outraged when a polyglot Bible in Hebrew and Greek was released from the Estienne press, forcing Robert to escape to Geneva, Switzerland, for safety. Demand for fancy books in that city was low, but Estienne continued to work there until his death in 1559. He dedicated his life to this labor of love, having dismissed money as a reward for his efforts.

In the Netherlands typography was not practiced so far as is known until 1473, when a press was erected at Utrecht. While it is supposed that printing was done before that time at Bruges, there is no direct evidence to support the supposition. It is known, however, that Colard Mansion printed at Bruges in 1474, and that he taught typography to William Caxton, with him producing the first book printed in the English language.

In the Netherlands, typography wasn't practiced until 1473, when a press was set up in Utrecht. Although it's thought that printing may have taken place earlier in Bruges, there's no solid proof to back that up. However, it is known that Colard Mansion printed in Bruges in 1474, and he taught typography to William Caxton, who went on to produce the first book printed in the English language.

There is a book with the date 1472, printed at Antwerp by Van der Goes, but this date is supposed to be a misprint, as in the case of Jenson’s book of 1471.

There’s a book dated 1472, printed in Antwerp by Van der Goes, but this date is believed to be a typo, similar to Jenson’s book from 1471.

Christopher Plantin, a Frenchman, who began to print at Antwerp in 1555, gave to that city the renown which it enjoys in the printing world. Plantin printed on a magnificent scale, his luxurious notions extending to the casting of silver types. His printing office was considered one of the ornaments of the city and is today used as a museum for the display of paintings and typographical work. Plantin retained a number of learned men as correctors of his copy and proofs, and the story is told that his proof sheets, after undergoing every possible degree of correction, were hung in some conspicuous place and a reward offered for the detection of errors. Plantin’s greatest work was his polyglot Bible of 1569, a portion of which is reproduced above.

Christopher Plantin, a Frenchman who started printing in Antwerp in 1555, brought fame to that city in the printing world. Plantin printed on a grand scale, with his extravagant ideas even leading him to create silver type. His printing office was viewed as one of the city's highlights and is now a museum showcasing paintings and typographical works. Plantin employed several educated individuals to proofread his copies and proofs, and there’s a story that his proof sheets, after being corrected in every possible way, were displayed in a prominent location with a reward for anyone who found mistakes. Plantin's most significant achievement was his polyglot Bible published in 1569, a portion of which is reproduced above.

17Louis Elzevir, founder of the family of learned printers of that name, first printed in 1595 at Leyden. The second Louis Elzevir opened an office at Amsterdam in 1640. The product of the Elzevirs was of such quality as to make them famous thruout Europe as printers of the classics, and their books were extensively imitated and counterfeited.

17Louis Elzevir, the founder of the family of scholarly printers, first started printing in 1595 in Leyden. The second Louis Elzevir established a shop in Amsterdam in 1640. The work of the Elzevirs was so high in quality that they became famous across Europe for printing classic literature, and their books were widely imitated and counterfeited.

While Haarlem is claimed to have been the birthplace of typography, a book cannot be produced printed in that city with a date earlier than 1483, when Johannes Andriesson had an office there.

While Haarlem is said to be the birthplace of typography, no book printed in that city can be dated earlier than 1483, when Johannes Andriesson had a printing office there.

In England the name of William Caxton is one to conjure with among typographers, for Caxton was the first to set type in that country, the event taking place about the year 1477. Perhaps the thing that endears Caxton to the hearts of English printers is that he was born in England. The first printers of Italy, Switzerland and France were Germans, but Caxton was English; we have his own words to prove it: “I was born and lerned myn englissh in Kente in the weeld where I doubte not is spoken as brode and rude englissh as it is in ony place in englond.”

In England, the name William Caxton is significant among typographers because he was the first to set type in the country, an event that took place around 1477. What makes Caxton especially beloved by English printers is that he was born in England. The first printers from Italy, Switzerland, and France were Germans, but Caxton was English; he stated himself: “I was born and learned my English in Kent in the field where I doubt not is spoken as broad and simple English as it is in any place in England.”

Caxton had been apprenticed when a young man to a merchant, and after his master’s death took up residence at Bruges in the Netherlands, with which city England did considerable trading. There he prospered and as governor of the Merchant Adventurers had control over all English and Scotch traders in the Low Countries. The device later used by Caxton for his imprint is supposed to have been copied from some trading mark of the Bruges merchants.

Caxton had been an apprentice to a merchant when he was young, and after his master's death, he moved to Bruges in the Netherlands, a city that England traded with a lot. There, he thrived and, as governor of the Merchant Adventurers, had authority over all English and Scottish traders in the Low Countries. The symbol that Caxton later used for his imprint is believed to have been inspired by a trading mark from the Bruges merchants.

Caxton resigned as governor and entered the service of the Duchess of Burgundy, who encouraged him in literary work. Under her patronage he translated (1469–1471) a “Historie of Troye.” The demand for this work was an incentive for Caxton to learn how to print it. This he did with the assistance of Colard Mansion who had started a printing office at Bruges.

Caxton stepped down as governor and joined the service of the Duchess of Burgundy, who supported his literary efforts. With her backing, he translated a “Historie of Troye” between 1469 and 1471. The interest in this work motivated Caxton to learn how to print it. He accomplished this with help from Colard Mansion, who had opened a printing press in Bruges.

Shortly afterward, Caxton returned to England and set up a press in the vicinity of Westminster Abbey, then on the outskirts of London. The first book with a date printed by him is “The Dictes and Sayinges of the Philosophers,” completed in November, 1477. His type-faces are copies of those of Mansion, who in turn imitated the letters of Dutch copyists. A type-face based on Caxton’s letter is now made by an American foundry.

Shortly after, Caxton came back to England and set up a press near Westminster Abbey, which at the time was on the edge of London. The first book he printed with a date is “The Dictes and Sayinges of the Philosophers,” finished in November 1477. His typefaces are copied from those of Mansion, who had in turn imitated the letters of Dutch printers. A typeface based on Caxton’s letters is now produced by an American foundry.

PAGE BY ENGLAND’S FIRST PRINTER

How Caxton arranged a book title in 1483

PAGE BY ENGLAND’S FIRST PRINTER

How Caxton set up a book title in 1483

The product of Caxton’s press during his life is estimated at eighteen thousand pages, nearly all of folio size. Caxton did not print de-luxe editions as did other of the early printers of Europe, but his productions were no less interesting. On his first books the lines were 18not spaced to the full length. This gave to the right side of the page a ragged appearance, as in modern typewritten letters.

The output from Caxton’s press during his lifetime is estimated to be around eighteen thousand pages, almost all of folio size. Unlike other early European printers, Caxton didn't produce deluxe editions, but his works were still quite captivating. In his first books, the lines weren't spaced to the full length, giving the right side of the page a jagged look, similar to modern typewritten letters. 18

Caxton did not devote a separate page to a book title until late in his life, when he printed a title alone in the center of the first page. The reproduction (on the preceding page) of a part of Caxton’s “Fables of Esope” shows how the title was arranged at the page head.

Caxton didn't dedicate a separate page to a book title until later in his life, when he printed a title by itself in the center of the first page. The reproduction (on the previous page) of a section of Caxton’s “Fables of Esope” illustrates how the title was set at the top of the page.

Wynken de Worde, a native of western Germany, was a workman under Caxton and upon the latter’s death, about 1491, succeeded to the business of his master. He continued to print in Caxton’s house for several years, afterward removing to “Fleet-street at the sygn of the Sonne,” in London proper. Old English black-letter, which is now so popular, was used by De Worde to a great extent, and he was the first printer to introduce the Roman letter into England.

Wynken de Worde, originally from western Germany, worked under Caxton and took over his master’s business after Caxton died around 1491. He printed in Caxton’s shop for several years before moving to “Fleet-street at the sign of the Sonne” in central London. De Worde extensively used the old English black-letter, which is very popular today, and he was the first printer to bring Roman type to England.

Richard Pynson, another of Caxton’s workmen and friend of De Worde, set up a press in Temple Bar, London, about 1492, and printed many useful books.

Richard Pynson, another one of Caxton’s workers and a friend of De Worde, set up a printing press in Temple Bar, London, around 1492, and printed many helpful books.

PAGE IN ENGLISH BY JOHN DAYE

From Fox’s famous “Acts and Monuments,” London, 1560

PAGE IN ENGLISH BY JOHN DAYE

From Fox’s well-known “Acts and Monuments,” London, 1560

Richard Grafton is famous as a printer of English Bibles during the troublous times of the Reformation. The church authorities believed it was not good for the people in general to read the Sacred Scriptures, and the Bible, translated into English by William Tyndale and Miles Coverdale, and printed anonymously by Richard Grafton at Antwerp, was the object of much concern to the ecclesiastics. The Bishop of London complained that “Some sons of iniquity have craftily translated the Holy Gospel of God into our vulgar English.” After a long imprisonment Tyndale suffered death by strangulation and burning. Grafton was imprisoned in 1540 for printing a large folio Old and New Testament known as the “Great Bible.” This tremendous task of printing was accomplished by Grafton in partnership with Edward Whitechurch at Paris and London.

Richard Grafton is well-known for printing English Bibles during the turbulent times of the Reformation. Church authorities thought it was inappropriate for the general public to read the Sacred Scriptures, and the Bible, translated into English by William Tyndale and Miles Coverdale and printed anonymously by Richard Grafton in Antwerp, drew significant concern from church officials. The Bishop of London complained that “Some sons of iniquity have craftily translated the Holy Gospel of God into our vulgar English.” After being imprisoned for a long time, Tyndale was executed by strangulation and burning. Grafton was imprisoned in 1540 for printing a large folio Old and New Testament known as the “Great Bible.” This huge printing endeavor was completed by Grafton in collaboration with Edward Whitechurch in Paris and London.

Shortly after this the prejudice against an English translation was partly overcome, and in 1543 Parliament passed an act allowing the Bible to be read by certain classes, but forbidding women, apprentices, journeymen, husbandmen or laborers to read it privately or openly.

Shortly after this, the bias against an English translation was somewhat overcome, and in 1543, Parliament passed a law allowing certain groups to read the Bible, but forbidding women, apprentices, journeymen, farmers, or laborers from reading it either privately or publicly.

THE FIRST PSALTER IN ENGLISH

Printed at London about 1565 by Christopher Barker

THE FIRST PSALTER IN ENGLISH

Printed in London around 1565 by Christopher Barker

John Daye, who first printed about 1546, was another English typographer to suffer imprisonment on account of activity in the Protestant cause. Many important books were printed by Daye, and in character and accomplishments he has been likened to Plantin who printed during the same period at Antwerp.

John Daye, who began printing around 1546, was another English printer who faced imprisonment for his involvement in the Protestant cause. Daye printed many significant books, and in terms of his character and achievements, he has been compared to Plantin, who printed during the same time in Antwerp.

The best known of the books printed by Daye is Fox’s “Acts and Monuments,” on the subject of wrongs and persecutions in the days of the Reformation. Dibden says it was “a work of prodigious bulk, expense and labor.”

The most famous of the books printed by Daye is Fox’s “Acts and Monuments,” which discusses the injustices and persecutions during the Reformation. Dibden describes it as “a work of enormous size, cost, and effort.”

In Scotland printing was introduced in 1507 at Edinburgh by Androw Myllar, in partnership with Walter Chepman, under a patent granted by King James IV.

In Scotland printing was introduced in 1507 in Edinburgh by Androw Myllar, working with Walter Chepman, under a patent given by King James IV.

In Ireland a prayer book was printed by the new process in 1551 at Dublin by Humphrey Powell.

In Ireland, a prayer book was printed using the new process in 1551 in Dublin by Humphrey Powell.

In North America typography was first practiced in 1540 at Mexico City, Mexico, by John Cromberger.

In North America, typography was first done in 1540 in Mexico City, Mexico, by John Cromberger.

In the United States, or rather the territory now included under that name, typography was introduced in 1639 at Cambridge, Massachusetts, by Stephen Daye.

In the United States, or rather the area now known by that name, typography was introduced in 1639 at Cambridge, Massachusetts, by Stephen Daye.

A title-page of many words and much type-display

(Actual size and color treatment)

A title page with lots of words and bold typography

(Actual size and color treatment)

19

TYPOGRAPHY IN COLONIAL DAYS

Typography has been an important factor in the development of modern civilization. In the battle for civil and religious liberty, in both Europe and America, the man with the pen and he of the composing-stick have been together on the firing line. With Paul they could well boast that they had been “in perils of waters, in perils of mine own countrymen, in perils in the city, in perils in the wilderness, in weariness and painfulness, in hunger and thirst.” William Tyndale died at the stake, Richard Grafton and John Daye suffered imprisonment; Robert Estienne became an exile from his own country; Jesse Glover on his way to America found a grave in the waters of the Atlantic; Stephen Daye set type in a wilderness; James Franklin, William Bradford and John Peter Zenger were imprisoned, and Benjamin Franklin suffered hunger and privation.

Typography has played a crucial role in shaping modern civilization. In the fight for civil and religious freedom, both in Europe and America, the writer and the typesetter have stood side by side. They could proudly echo Paul’s words about facing dangers from water, threats from their own people, risks in the city, struggles in the wilderness, exhaustion, pain, hunger, and thirst. William Tyndale was executed by fire, Richard Grafton and John Daye were imprisoned; Robert Estienne became an exile from his homeland; Jesse Glover found a grave in the Atlantic while heading to America; Stephen Daye set type in a remote area; James Franklin, William Bradford, and John Peter Zenger faced imprisonment, while Benjamin Franklin endured hunger and hardship.

As ecclesiastical and political conditions in Europe strongly influenced the practice of typography during the days of the American colonies, I will briefly review the events of the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries that the reader may better understand and appreciate the subject.

As the church and political situations in Europe greatly affected typography during the time of the American colonies, I will provide a brief overview of the events from the sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth centuries so that the reader can better understand and appreciate the topic.

In the year 1521, when Luther appeared before the Diet of Worms in Germany, the English people were ardent Roman Catholics. Henry VIII. was King of England and the great Cardinal Wolsey was in high authority. Henry, in the early part of his reign, was exceedingly loyal to the Catholic Church; he published a book in answer to the attacks of Luther, for which the pope gave him the title “Defender of the Faith.” However, when Henry wished to divorce his wife that he could marry Anne Boleyn, the church authorities did not approve. This so angered the king that he took from Wolsey his office and possessions, denied the authority of the pope over the Church of England, and had himself declared the supreme head of that organization. The king was excommunicated by the pope and in return Catholics were persecuted and put to death, and their monasteries, colleges and hospitals broken up. Henry repeatedly changed his religious opinions, and for many years both Catholics and Protestants were put to death for differing with him.

In 1521, when Luther stood before the Diet of Worms in Germany, the English people were passionate Roman Catholics. Henry VIII was the King of England, and the influential Cardinal Wolsey held a prominent position. Early in his reign, Henry was extremely loyal to the Catholic Church; he published a book responding to Luther's criticisms, for which the pope granted him the title "Defender of the Faith." However, when Henry wanted to divorce his wife to marry Anne Boleyn, the church authorities disapproved. This infuriated the king, leading him to strip Wolsey of his office and possessions, reject the pope's authority over the Church of England, and declare himself the supreme head of that organization. The pope excommunicated the king, and in retaliation, Catholics were persecuted and executed, while their monasteries, colleges, and hospitals were dismantled. Henry frequently changed his religious beliefs, and for many years, both Catholics and Protestants were executed for disagreeing with him.

For six years after Henry’s death in 1547, during the reign of his son Edward VI., the Protestants were in power. Then for five years under Mary the Catholics controlled the religious affairs of the country, and the flesh of “heresy” was toasted at the stake.

For six years after Henry's death in 1547, during the reign of his son Edward VI, the Protestants were in power. Then for five years under Mary, the Catholics controlled the country's religious affairs, and the "heretics" were burned at the stake.

THE FIRST BOOK PRINTED IN ENGLISH AMERICA

By Stephen Daye at Cambridge, Mass., 1640. (Page slightly reduced)

THE FIRST BOOK PRINTED IN ENGLISH AMERICA

By Stephen Daye at Cambridge, Mass., 1640. (Page slightly reduced)

TITLE-PAGE OF A SHAKESPEARE BOOK

Printed in 1600, while Shakespeare was in the midst of his literary labors

TITLE-PAGE OF A SHAKESPEARE BOOK

Printed in 1600, when Shakespeare was deeply involved in his writing.

Elizabeth, who began to rule in 1558, was proud of the appellation “Virgin Queen” and gave the name “Virginia” to the English colony in America. She never quit spinsterhood, but about the year 1570 considerable correspondence was carried on between the English and French courts regarding her 20intended marriage. This resulted in the accumulation of over three hundred letters, which eighty-five years later were collected and printed as a 442-page quarto. (The title-page is reproduced full size as an insert in this chapter.) A poor Puritan named Stubbs and a poor bookseller named Page published a pamphlet against the marriage of Queen Elizabeth to the French king’s brother, and tho the queen herself had said she would never marry, these unfortunate subjects were punished for their audacity by having their right hands cut off.

Elizabeth, who started her reign in 1558, was proud of being called the “Virgin Queen” and named the English colony in America “Virginia.” She remained a single woman, but around 1570, there was a lot of communication between the English and French courts about her possible marriage. This led to over three hundred letters being exchanged, which were collected and published as a 442-page quarto eighty-five years later. (The title page is included full size as an insert in this chapter.) A poor Puritan named Stubbs and a struggling bookseller named Page published a pamphlet opposing Queen Elizabeth's marriage to the French king’s brother, and although the queen herself had declared she would never marry, these unfortunate men were punished for their boldness by having their right hands chopped off.

Under Elizabeth, the “Protestant” religion was permanently established in England, but the enactment of severe laws, such as prohibiting any one attending the ministry of clergymen who were not of the established religion, gave rise to dissenters derisively called Puritans because they wished to establish a form of worship based on the “pure” word of God. It was by these so-called Puritans that printing was introduced into English America. Elizabeth reigned until 1603 and was the last of the Tudor family of sovereigns. The first of the Stuart Kings, James I. (son of Mary Queen of Scots), then ruled until 1625, when he was succeeded by his son Charles I. Charles was a despot and claimed that the people had no right to any part of the government. A civil war resulted, Charles was beheaded (1649) and a form of government known as the Commonwealth was established. Oliver Cromwell shortly afterward became Lord Protector with more power than the king had possessed.

Under Elizabeth, the "Protestant" religion was permanently established in England. However, strict laws were enacted, such as banning anyone from attending the services of clergymen who were not part of the established religion. This led to dissidents mockingly called Puritans, who wanted to create a style of worship based on the "pure" word of God. It was these so-called Puritans who introduced printing to English America. Elizabeth reigned until 1603 and was the last of the Tudor family of rulers. The first of the Stuart Kings, James I (son of Mary Queen of Scots), then ruled until 1625, when he was succeeded by his son Charles I. Charles was a tyrant and claimed that the people had no rights regarding the government. This caused a civil war, and Charles was beheaded in 1649, leading to the establishment of a government known as the Commonwealth. Oliver Cromwell soon became Lord Protector, holding more power than the king had ever had.

Cromwell was a Puritan, but of the radical element known as Independents, differing from another element of Puritans known as Presbyterians. The Independents have come to be known as Congregationalists. Under Cromwell’s severe Puritanic rule, sculpture and painting were declared as savoring of idolatry and public amusements were sternly put down. However, Cromwell encouraged printing and literature. He was an intimate friend of John Milton, the blind author of “Paradise Lost” (see title-page reproduced on a following page), which book was published in 1667, the year following the Great Fire. Milton was Latin secretary to Cromwell, and published a book which argued against royalty, for which, on the accession of Charles II., he was arrested.

Cromwell was a Puritan, but part of the radical group known as Independents, which was different from another group of Puritans called Presbyterians. The Independents are now recognized as Congregationalists. Under Cromwell’s strict Puritan rule, sculpture and painting were considered to be reminiscent of idolatry, and public entertainment was strictly suppressed. However, Cromwell supported printing and literature. He was a close friend of John Milton, the blind author of “Paradise Lost” (see title-page reproduced on a following page), which was published in 1667, the year after the Great Fire. Milton served as Latin secretary to Cromwell and authored a book that argued against monarchy, for which he was arrested when Charles II came to power.

In 1657 (the year before Cromwell died) was published the sixth and last volume of the London Polyglot Bible, compiled by Brian Walton and printed by Thomas Roycroft. In this Bible there were used nine languages: Hebrew, Chaldee, Samaritan, Greek, Syriac, Arabic, Ethiopic, Persian and Latin. The work took four years in printing, and was the first book ever published in England by subscription. Cromwell encouraged the undertaking by allowing paper to be imported into England duty free, and by contributing a thousand pounds out of the public money to begin the work.

In 1657 (the year before Cromwell died), the sixth and final volume of the London Polyglot Bible was published, compiled by Brian Walton and printed by Thomas Roycroft. This Bible included nine languages: Hebrew, Chaldee, Samaritan, Greek, Syriac, Arabic, Ethiopic, Persian, and Latin. The printing process took four years, and it was the first book ever published in England through subscriptions. Cromwell supported the project by allowing paper to be imported into England without duty and by contributing a thousand pounds from public funds to start the work.

In those days the Puritans presented a curious contrast to the Royalists. The Puritan, or “Roundhead” as he was also called, wore a cloak of subdued brown or black, a plain wide linen collar, and a cone-shaped hat over closely-cut or long, straight hair. The Royalist, or “Cavalier,” wore clothes of silk or satin, a lace collar, a short cloak over one shoulder, short boots, and a broad-brimmed beaver hat adorned with a plume of feathers.

In those days, the Puritans were a striking contrast to the Royalists. The Puritan, also known as a “Roundhead,” wore a cloak in muted brown or black, a simple wide linen collar, and a cone-shaped hat over closely cropped or long, straight hair. The Royalist, or “Cavalier,” wore clothes made of silk or satin, a lace collar, a short cloak draped over one shoulder, short boots, and a wide-brimmed beaver hat decorated with a feather plume.

The period designated as the Restoration, long celebrated by the Church of England, began soon after Cromwell’s death, when in 1660 Charles II. ascended the throne. This period brought with it a reaction from 21the Puritanic conditions that previously existed and all sorts of excesses were practiced. Cromwell’s body was taken out of its grave in Westminster Abbey, hanged on a gallows and beheaded.

The time known as the Restoration, which the Church of England has long celebrated, started shortly after Cromwell’s death, when Charles II took the throne in 1660. This era marked a backlash against the Puritan conditions that had been in place, and various excesses were indulged in. Cromwell’s body was exhumed from its grave in Westminster Abbey, hanged on a gallows, and beheaded.

It was during the reign of Charles II. (1665) that the Great Plague killed one hundred thousand people in London, a terrible experience followed by one equally terrible the next year: the Great Fire, which consumed thirteen thousand houses.

It was during the reign of Charles II (1665) that the Great Plague killed one hundred thousand people in London, a horrific event followed by another equally devastating one the next year: the Great Fire, which destroyed thirteen thousand houses.

In 1688 there was another revolution; the people passed a Bill of Rights, and set a new King (William III.) on the throne.

In 1688, another revolution occurred; the people passed a Bill of Rights and placed a new King (William III) on the throne.

George I., the head of the dynasty now represented in England by King George V., came to the throne in 1714. He was a German, could not speak English, and was the grandfather of George III., the “villain” in the great drama of the American Revolution.

George I, the leader of the dynasty now represented in England by King George V, took the throne in 1714. He was German, couldn't speak English, and was the grandfather of George III, the "villain" in the great story of the American Revolution.

In France the Protestant Huguenots were persecuted by Cardinal Richelieu, whose strong personality dominated King Louis XIII. from 1622 to 1642, and many of them left for America. In 1643 Louis XIV. became King of France and his long reign of seventy-two years is renowned because of the magnificence which found expression in sumptuous buildings, costly libraries, splendidly-bound books, and gorgeous dress.

In France, the Protestant Huguenots faced persecution from Cardinal Richelieu, whose strong personality overshadowed King Louis XIII from 1622 to 1642, prompting many of them to flee to America. In 1643, Louis XIV ascended to the throne, and his lengthy reign of seventy-two years is famous for the opulence that was reflected in lavish buildings, expensive libraries, beautifully bound books, and extravagant clothing.

Cardinal Mazarin, in whose library was later discovered a copy of Gutenberg’s Forty-Two-Line Bible, acted as advisor while Louis XIV. was under age.

Cardinal Mazarin, whose library later contained a copy of Gutenberg’s Forty-Two-Line Bible, served as an advisor while Louis XIV was still a minor.


In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries many mechanics in England worked for a shilling a day; their chief food was rye, barley and oats; and one-fifth of the people were paupers. Teachers taught their scholars principally by means of the lash, masters beat their servants and husbands their wives. Superstition was strong and children and grown folks were frightened with lugubrious tales into being “good.” This spirit is especially noticeable in the chap-books that were sold during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. A title to one of these chap-books (dated 1721) reads:

In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, many workers in England earned a shilling a day; their main food consisted of rye, barley, and oats; and one-fifth of the population was living in poverty. Teachers mainly used corporal punishment on their students, employers hit their workers, and husbands abused their wives. Superstition was rampant, and both children and adults were scared into behaving “well” with grim stories. This mindset is particularly evident in the chap-books that were sold during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. The title of one of these chap-books (dated 1721) reads:

A Timely Warning to Rash and Disobedient Children; being a strange and wonderful Relation of a young Gentleman in the Parish of Stepheny in the Suburbs of London, that sold himself to the Devil for twelve years to have the Power to be revenged on his Father and Mother, and how his Time being expired, he lay in a sad and deplorable Condition to the Amazement of all Spectators.

A Timely Warning to Rash and Disobedient Children; being a strange and wonderful Story about a young man in the Parish of Stepheny in the suburbs of London, who sold his soul to the Devil for twelve years to gain the power to take revenge on his father and mother, and how once his time was up, he found himself in a sad and hopeless state, shocking all who saw him.

THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE LONDON “TIMES” UNDER THAT TITLE. 1788

The heading mentions that logotypes were used in the composition of this newspaper

THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE LONDON “TIMES” UNDER THAT TITLE. 1788

The heading notes that logos were used in creating this newspaper.

Children in those days were either devilishly bad or ridiculously good. Read this title-page:

Children back then were either incredibly mischievous or annoyingly perfect. Check out this title page:

The Children’s Example; shewing how one Mrs. Johnson’s Child of Barnet was tempted by the Devil to forsake God and follow the Ways of other Wicked Children, who us’d to Swear, tell lies, and disobey their Parents; How this pretty innocent Child resisting Satan, was Comforted by an Angel from Heaven who warned her of her approaching Death; Together with her dying Speeches desiring young Children not to forsake God, lest Satan should gain a Power over them.

The Children’s Example; showing how Mrs. Johnson’s child from Barnet was tempted by the Devil to abandon God and follow the paths of other naughty kids, who would swear, lie, and disobey their parents; how this sweet innocent child resisted Satan and was comforted by an angel from Heaven who warned her of her impending death; along with her final words urging young children not to turn away from God, so that Satan wouldn’t gain power over them.

FIRST EDITION OF “PILGRIM’S PROGRESS”

Title-page (actual size) of Bunyan’s well-known book, London, 1678

FIRST EDITION OF “PILGRIM’S PROGRESS”

Title page (actual size) of Bunyan’s famous book, London, 1678

Jack the Giant Killer, the hero of our childhood days, was a favorite subject for chap-book exploitation. There is shown on the following page the title of such a “history.”

Jack the Giant Killer, the hero of our childhood, was a popular topic for cheap book adaptations. The title of one such “history” is displayed on the following page.

Chap-books are poor representatives of the art of typography in Colonial days because they were to the book industry then what reprint books are to the trade in our time. Today it is customary for some publishing houses to buy up old electrotype plates of obsolete editions of dictionaries and other popular books. The plates having already been put to extensive use, are battered 22and worn, and impressions from them cannot be accepted as criterions for determining the quality of modern printing. Neither are the chap-books true printing representatives of their times. The woodcuts, crudely drawn in the first place, were also worn and battered by repeated use.

Chap-books are not good examples of typography from Colonial times because they were to the book industry back then what reprint books are to the trade today. Nowadays, it's common for some publishing houses to purchase old electrotype plates of outdated editions of dictionaries and other popular books. Since these plates have been used extensively, they are battered and worn, so impressions from them cannot be used as a standard for judging the quality of modern printing. Similarly, chap-books are not true representatives of printing during their time. The woodcuts, which were poorly drawn to begin with, were also worn out and damaged from repeated use. 22

PAGE FROM A “CHAP-BOOK”

Probably a Dicey product of the eighteenth century

PAGE FROM A “CHAP-BOOK”

Probably a Dicey product from the 1700s

In the early part of the seventeenth century chap-books were 8vos. (sixteen pages of about 5 × 8 inches), but later were reduced to 12mos. (twelve or twenty-four pages of about 4 × 6½ inches). The stories were condensed to fit these small penny books, which were peddled by chapmen. A chapman is described in a “Dictionarie” of 1611 as “A paultrie Pedlar, who in a long packe, which he carries for the most part open, and hanging from his necke before him hath Almanacks, Bookes of News, or other trifling ware to sell.”

In the early 1600s, chapbooks were typically 8vos (sixteen pages measuring about 5 × 8 inches), but they later got downsized to 12mos (twelve or twenty-four pages measuring about 4 × 6½ inches). The stories were shortened to fit these little penny books, which were sold by chapmen. A chapman is described in a 1611 dictionary as "A petty peddler, who carries a long pack, mostly open, hanging from his neck in front of him, filled with almanacs, newsbooks, or other trivial items for sale."

Many of the chap-books of the eighteenth century were printed and published at Aldermary-Church-Yard and Bow-Church-Yard, London, by William and Cluer Dicey, afterward C. Dicey only. The Dicey books were better productions than those of their imitators. It is not possible to determine the exact year in which the majority of chap-books were printed, as many title-pages merely read “Printed and sold in London,” etc., or “Newcastle; printed in this present year,” without the formality of the date.

Many of the chapbooks from the eighteenth century were printed and published in Aldermary Church Yard and Bow Church Yard, London, by William and Cluer Dicey, later just C. Dicey. The Dicey books were of higher quality than those of their competitors. It's hard to pinpoint the exact year most chapbooks were printed, as many title pages simply say “Printed and sold in London,” or “Newcastle; printed in this present year,” without including a date.

There were also other cheap productions known as broadsides, single sheets about 12 × 15 inches, in most cases printed broadwise of the paper and on one side only.

There were also other low-cost productions called broadsides, single sheets about 12 × 15 inches, usually printed across the paper and on just one side.

On December 21, 1620, there landed at Plymouth Rock, in what was afterward the colony of Massachusetts, a band of Puritans from England. These non-conformists, unable conscientiously to obey the laws of their native country, had come to America to worship God in their own manner. Ten years later Governor Winthrop with one thousand Puritans landed at Charlestown, and in the following year these immigrants began to settle Cambridge and Boston. A building for an academy (now Harvard University) was erected at Cambridge in 1638, and in 1639 Stephen Daye began to print there.

On December 21, 1620, a group of Puritans from England arrived at Plymouth Rock, in what would later become the colony of Massachusetts. These non-conformists, unable to follow the laws of their homeland in good conscience, came to America to worship God in their own way. Ten years later, Governor Winthrop and a thousand Puritans arrived in Charlestown, and the following year these immigrants started to settle in Cambridge and Boston. A building for an academy (now Harvard University) was built in Cambridge in 1638, and in 1639, Stephen Daye began printing there.

For the establishment of this, the first printing office in what is now the United States, Rev. Jesse Glover, a Puritan minister of some wealth, was chiefly responsible. Himself contributing liberally, he solicited in England and Holland sufficient money to purchase a press and types, and June 7, 1638, entered into a contract with Stephen Daye, a printer, to accompany him to the new country. Rev. Glover (with his family, Stephen Daye and the printing outfit) embarked on a vessel for New England, but on the voyage across the ocean he was taken ill and died.

For the establishment of this first printing office in what is now the United States, Rev. Jesse Glover, a wealthy Puritan minister, was primarily responsible. He contributed generously and raised enough money in England and Holland to buy a press and types. On June 7, 1638, he signed a contract with printer Stephen Daye to travel with him to the new country. Rev. Glover, along with his family, Stephen Daye, and the printing equipment, boarded a ship for New England, but during the journey across the ocean, he became ill and passed away.

PAGE FROM “DESCRIPTION OF TRADES.” LONDON, 1747

Showing use of decorative bands to separate subjects

PAGE FROM “DESCRIPTION OF TRADES.” LONDON, 1747

Demonstrating the use of decorative bands to separate topics

The press and types having reached Cambridge were finally placed in charge of Stephen Daye and printing was begun in 1639. The first work produced was “The Freeman’s Oath,” probably a single sheet, and the first book (1640) was the “Booke of Psalmes,” familiarly known as the “Bay Psalm Book.” (The reproduction on the first page of this chapter is from one of these books 23preserved in the public library, Forty-Second Street, New York.) This book of Psalms is a revision of Ainsworth’s version of 1612, and was in use in New England for upwards of a century, more than fifty editions having been published. The size of the type-page of the first edition is 3¼ × 6¼ inches.

The press and types that arrived in Cambridge were eventually put in the hands of Stephen Daye, and printing started in 1639. The first thing produced was “The Freeman’s Oath,” likely a single sheet, and the first book (1640) was the “Booke of Psalmes,” commonly known as the “Bay Psalm Book.” (The reproduction on the first page of this chapter is from one of these books 23 preserved in the public library on Forty-Second Street, New York.) This book of Psalms is a revision of Ainsworth’s version from 1612 and was used in New England for over a century, with more than fifty editions published. The size of the type-page of the first edition is 3¼ × 6¼ inches.

In quality of presswork this first book of Stephen Daye affords a decided contrast to the Bible of Gutenberg, near which it lies in the cases at the public library. The print on the pages of the Psalm Book is uneven in color and impression, while that on the pages of the Bible is dense-black and firmly and evenly impressed. The reproduction of the title-page of the Psalm Book does the original no injustice. It is difficult to determine whether the shoulders of the border printed the angular lines, or whether these are a part of the design. It is interesting to note how in the word “Whole,” Daye formed a W by combining two Vs, his font of types being one evidently intended for Latin work only.

In terms of print quality, this first book by Stephen Daye stands in stark contrast to Gutenberg's Bible, which is also housed in the public library. The print in the Psalm Book has uneven color and impression, while the Bible's pages are deep black and perfectly printed. The reproduction of the Psalm Book's title page does justice to the original. It’s hard to tell if the border's shoulders created the sharp lines, or if they’re part of the design. It’s interesting to see how in the word “Whole,” Daye formed a W by putting together two Vs, as his typeface seems to have been intended solely for Latin works.

FRENCH SPECIMEN OF 1742

(Actual size)

FRENCH SAMPLE FROM 1742

(Actual size)

Daye continued in charge of the printing office for about ten years. Jesse Glover’s widow had married Henry Dunster, the first president of Harvard College, and Dunster, for his wife and as president of the college, managed the printing office and received such profits as were made. For some reason Daye in 1649 ceased to be master printer and Dunster appointed Samuel Green to the position. Green had come from England in 1630 with Governor Winthrop, but was not a printer at that time.

Daye continued to run the printing office for about ten years. Jesse Glover’s widow had married Henry Dunster, the first president of Harvard College, and Dunster, for his wife and in his role as president, managed the printing office and collected any profits that were made. For some reason, Daye stopped being the master printer in 1649, and Dunster appointed Samuel Green to take over the position. Green had arrived from England in 1630 with Governor Winthrop, but he wasn't a printer at that time.

The commissioners of the united colonies, who had in charge the propagation of Christianity among the Indians, added another press to the one already at Cambridge, together with types, etc., for the purpose of printing the Bible and other books in the Indian language. In 1662 Green gave to the commissioners the following “account of utensils for Printing belonging to the Corporation:”

The commissioners of the united colonies, responsible for spreading Christianity among the Native Americans, added another printing press to the one already in Cambridge, along with types and other equipment, to print the Bible and other books in the Native language. In 1662, Green provided the commissioners with the following "account of printing supplies owned by the Corporation:"

The presse with what belongs to it with one tinn pann and two frisketts.

The press with its accessories, including one tin pan and two friskets.

Item two table of Cases of letters with one ode Case.

Item two table of Cases of letters with one ode Case.

Item the ffont of letters together with Imperfections that came since.

Item the font of letters along with the imperfections that followed.

Item one brasse bed, one Imposing Stone.

Item one brass bed, one impressive stone.

Item two barrells of Inke, 3 Chases, 2 composing stickes, one ley brush, 2 candlestickes one for the Case the other for the Presse.

Item two barrels of ink, 3 chases, 2 composing sticks, one lay brush, 2 candlesticks, one for the case and the other for the press.

Item the frame and box for the sesteren.

Item the frame and box for the sister.

Item the Riglet brasse rules and scabbard the Sponge 1 galley 1 mallett 1 sheeting sticke and furniture for the chases.

Item the Riglet brass rules and scabbard the Sponge 1 galley 1 mallet 1 sheeting stick and furniture for the chases.

Item the letters that came before that were mingled with the colledges.

Item, the letters that came before were mixed in with the collections.

CASLON TYPES AND ORNAMENTS

From the specimen book of W. Caslon and Son, London, 1764

CASLON TYPES AND ORNAMENTS

From the sample book of W. Caslon and Son, London, 1764

In 1670 the commissioners presented this equipment to Harvard College. Green continued to print until he was very old, and upon his death in 1702 the printing office was discontinued.

In 1670, the commissioners gave this equipment to Harvard College. Green kept printing until he was quite old, and when he passed away in 1702, the printing office was shut down.

Before 1740 more printing was done in Massachusetts than in all the other colonies. Printing was not introduced into the colony of Virginia until about 1727, principally because the authorities deemed it best to keep the people in ignorance.

Before 1740, Massachusetts had more printing activity than all the other colonies combined. Printing didn't start in Virginia until around 1727, mainly because the authorities thought it was better to keep the people uninformed.

Pennsylvania was the second English colony in America in which typography was practiced. The charter of this colony was granted to William Penn in 1681 and in 1687 William Bradford at his printing office “near Philadelphia” printed an almanac. This was a sheet containing the calendar of twelve months (beginning with March and ending with February, as was customary in the seventeenth century). In England, Bradford had worked for a printer who was intimately acquainted with George Fox, founder of the Society of Friends (Quakers). This influenced Bradford to adopt the principles of that sect and he was among the first to emigrate to Pennsylvania in 1682.

Pennsylvania was the second English colony in America where printing was established. William Penn was granted the charter for this colony in 1681, and in 1687, William Bradford printed an almanac at his printing office “near Philadelphia.” This almanac was a sheet that included a calendar for twelve months, starting in March and ending in February, as was common in the seventeenth century. In England, Bradford had worked for a printer who was closely connected to George Fox, the founder of the Society of Friends (Quakers). This connection led Bradford to adopt the beliefs of that group, and he was one of the first to move to Pennsylvania in 1682.

24

FIRST EDITION OF “PARADISE LOST”

Title-page (slightly reduced) of Milton’s famous book, London, 1667

FIRST EDITION OF “PARADISE LOST”

Title page (slightly reduced) of Milton’s famous book, London, 1667

Bradford became involved in a quarrel among the Quakers of Philadelphia and in 1692 was arrested for printing a pamphlet. The sheriff seized a form of type pages to be used as evidence, and it is said that Bradford later secured his release because one of the jurymen in examining the form pushed his cane against it and the types fell to the floor, “pied” as it is technically expressed. The trouble into which Bradford found himself in Philadelphia very likely influenced him in 1693 to leave that city and establish a printing office in New York “at the sign of the Bible” (the site at 81 Pearl Street is now marked by a tablet), his being the first printshop in New York and the only one for thirty years. He was appointed in 1693 official printer to the government. In 1725, when Bradford was sixty-one years old, he began the publication of the first newspaper in New York (the Gazette).

Bradford got caught up in a dispute among the Quakers in Philadelphia and in 1692 was arrested for printing a pamphlet. The sheriff took a form of type pages to use as evidence, and it's said that Bradford later managed to get released because one of the jurors, while examining the form, pushed his cane against it, causing the types to fall to the floor, known as “pied” in printing terms. The trouble Bradford experienced in Philadelphia likely pushed him to leave the city in 1693 and set up a printing office in New York “at the sign of the Bible” (the location at 81 Pearl Street is now marked by a plaque), making it the first print shop in New York and the only one for thirty years. In 1693, he was appointed as the official printer for the government. In 1725, at the age of sixty-one, Bradford started publishing the first newspaper in New York (the Gazette).

No review of Colonial printing would be complete without an account of Benjamin Franklin, whose birthday (January 17) is each year widely celebrated. Franklin’s father was an Englishman who came to New England about 1685, and Benjamin was born in Boston in 1706, the youngest but two of seventeen children. He came near being a minister, a seaman, a tallow-chandler or a cutler, but love of books caused him finally to be indentured to his brother, James Franklin, who had opened a printing office in Boston. Benjamin was twelve years of age when indentured and was to serve as apprentice until his twenty-first birthday. Making an arrangement with his brother to be allowed to furnish his own board, Franklin provided himself with meals “often no more than a biscuit or a slice of bread, a handful of raisins, or a tart from the pastry cook’s and a glass of water,” using the money thus saved for the purchase of books. In 1721 James Franklin began to print a newspaper (the New England Courant) and Benjamin tells how some of his brother’s friends tried to dissuade him from the undertaking, “one newspaper being, in their judgment, enough for America.” Some articles in this newspaper giving offense to the Assembly, James Franklin was imprisoned for a month, and on his discharge was forbidden to publish the Courant. To evade this order Benjamin’s name was substituted for that of James Franklin as publisher.

No review of Colonial printing would be complete without mentioning Benjamin Franklin, whose birthday (January 17) is celebrated each year. Franklin’s father was an Englishman who came to New England around 1685, and Benjamin was born in Boston in 1706, making him the youngest of seventeen children. He nearly became a minister, a sailor, a candle maker, or a cutler, but his love for books ultimately led him to become an apprentice to his brother, James Franklin, who had opened a printing office in Boston. Benjamin was just twelve when he began his apprenticeship and was supposed to serve until he turned twenty-one. He made a deal with his brother to provide his own meals, which often consisted of “no more than a biscuit or a slice of bread, a handful of raisins, or a tart from the pastry cook’s and a glass of water,” using the money he saved to buy books. In 1721, James Franklin started printing a newspaper (the New England Courant), and Benjamin recounts how some of his brother’s friends tried to talk him out of it, believing that “one newspaper is enough for America.” After some articles in this newspaper offended the Assembly, James Franklin was imprisoned for a month, and upon his release, he was banned from publishing the Courant. To get around this ban, Benjamin’s name was used instead of James Franklin's as the publisher.

A short time afterward (1723) the brothers disagreed, and Benjamin left Boston, coming by ship to New York. Here Franklin offered his services to William Bradford, then the only printer in the city, but he could give him no work. However, he suggested that Franklin go to Philadelphia where Andrew Bradford, his son, had a shop. Franklin did not succeed in getting work with Andrew Bradford, but was more fortunate with Samuel Keimer. The printing house of Keimer, as described by Franklin, consisted of an old damaged press, a small worn-out font of types, and one pair of cases. Here Franklin worked until he left for England to select an equipment for a new printing office to be established by him in Philadelphia. At that time there was no type foundry or press manufactory in the United States. Franklin had been encouraged by Governor Keith with promises of financial assistance, but the trip to London proved a fool’s errand and Franklin went to work in a printing office there as a journeyman, first at the press, later in the composing-room. (It is told that forty years afterward when Franklin was residing in Great Britain, he went into this printing office and with the men there drank “Success to printing.”) He returned to Philadelphia, worked as a foreman for Keimer, and then with a partner, Hugh Meredith, opened a printing office.

A short time later (1723), the brothers had a falling out, and Benjamin left Boston, traveling by ship to New York. There, Franklin offered to work for William Bradford, the only printer in the city at the time, but he had no jobs available. Instead, he recommended that Franklin head to Philadelphia, where his son Andrew Bradford had a shop. Franklin didn’t manage to secure a job with Andrew Bradford but had better luck with Samuel Keimer. According to Franklin, Keimer's printing shop had an old, damaged press, a small, worn-out set of type, and one pair of cases. Franklin worked there until he left for England to choose equipment for a new printing office he planned to set up in Philadelphia. At that time, there were no type foundries or press manufacturers in the United States. Franklin had been encouraged by Governor Keith with promises of financial help, but the trip to London turned out to be a wasted effort, and Franklin ended up working in a printing office there as a journeyman, first at the press and later in the composing room. (It’s said that forty years later, when Franklin was living in Great Britain, he visited that printing office and raised a toast with the staff, saying “Success to printing.”) He returned to Philadelphia, worked as a foreman for Keimer, and then, along with a partner named Hugh Meredith, opened his own printing office.

One of the first jobs done by the new firm was forty sheets of the history of the Quakers, set in pica and long primer. Franklin tells how he “composed a sheet a day and Meredith worked it off at press; it was often eleven at night, and sometimes later, before I had finished my distribution for the next day’s work. But so determined I was to continue doing a sheet a day that one night, when, having imposed my forms, I thought my day’s work over, one of them by accident was broken and two pages reduced to pi, I immediately distributed and composed it over again before I went to bed.”

One of the first tasks the new company took on was printing forty sheets of Quaker history, set in pica and long primer type. Franklin mentions that he “worked on a sheet each day while Meredith printed it; it was often around eleven at night, and sometimes later, before I finished preparing for the next day's work. But I was so determined to keep up my routine of a sheet a day that one night, when I thought I was done after setting my type, one of the forms accidentally broke and two pages were reduced to gibberish. I quickly reset and composed it again before heading to bed.”

In 1732 (for the year 1733) Franklin first published 25“Poor Richard’s Almanack.” For this purpose he used the name of Richard Saunders, an English astrologer. This almanac continued to be published by Franklin for twenty-five years, nearly ten thousand copies being sold annually. The two pages here reproduced are full size, and as it is likely that Franklin gave close attention to the typography it will be interesting to study their arrangement. They are good examples of title-page and tabular composition of Colonial days.

In 1732 (for the year 1733), Franklin first published 25“Poor Richard’s Almanack.” He used the name Richard Saunders, an English astrologer, for this purpose. Franklin published this almanac for twenty-five years, selling nearly ten thousand copies each year. The two pages shown here are at full size, and since it’s likely that Franklin paid careful attention to the typography, it will be interesting to examine their layout. They are good examples of title-page and tabular design from Colonial times.

Franklin considered this almanac a proper vehicle for spreading instruction among the common people, and filled the little spaces that occurred between the remarkable days in the calendar with proverbial sentences. These proverbs, which contained the wisdom of many ages and nations, were latter gathered together as a harangue of a wise old man under the title “The Way to Wealth,” and the familiar phrase “As Poor Richard says” is often repeated therein.

Franklin saw this almanac as a great way to share knowledge with everyday people and filled the small gaps between the significant days in the calendar with proverbs. These proverbs, which held the wisdom of many ages and cultures, were later compiled into a speech by a wise old man titled “The Way to Wealth,” and the well-known phrase “As Poor Richard says” is frequently found in it.

In 1748 Franklin took as a partner David Hall, the firm name being Franklin & Hall until 1766, when Hall became sole proprietor.

In 1748, Franklin partnered with David Hall, and the business was called Franklin & Hall until 1766, when Hall became the sole owner.


Quaintness is the chief characteristic of Colonial typography. While the treatment lacks the artistic quality, the refinement, and the dainty finish of the productions of Aldus, Froben and other printers of classics, it has natural simplicity, human interest, and an inexpressible something that makes it attractive to the average printer of today.

Quaintness is the main feature of Colonial typography. While it doesn't have the artistic quality, refinement, or delicate finish of works by Aldus, Froben, and other classic printers, it has a natural simplicity, human interest, and an indescribable quality that makes it appealing to today’s average printer.

TWO PAGES FROM “POOR RICHARD’S ALMANACK”’

Printed by Benjamin Franklin in 1732

TWO PAGES FROM “POOR RICHARD’S ALMANACK”’

Printed by Benjamin Franklin in 1732

The title-page of the “Compleat Ambassador,” showing the actual size of the original, is constructed in a severely plain manner, a style known as the “long and short line,” with catchwords.

The title page of the “Compleat Ambassador,” showing the actual size of the original, is designed in a very simple way, a style known as the “long and short line,” with catchwords.

The “Midsommer Nights Dreame” title-page is one of the most artistic of Colonial pages, printed when Shakespeare was in the midst of his famous literary labors (1600). To get contrast the compositor alternated lines of roman with lines of italic. The spacing material could not have been accurate, and two capital V’s were used for a W, as in the Daye title-page.

The "Midsummer Night's Dream" title page is one of the most artistic from the Colonial period, printed when Shakespeare was deep into his famous writing (1600). To create contrast, the compositor alternated lines of roman type with lines of italic. The spacing wasn't very precise, and two capital V’s were used for a W, just like on the Daye title page.

The “Paradise Lost” title-page is a poor specimen of composition and presswork. It was common in Colonial days to surround the type-page with a double rule border, and in this specimen the rules are bent and battered. Printed in 1667, it is a part of the first edition of Milton’s famous book.

The “Paradise Lost” title page is a poor example of layout and printing quality. Back in Colonial times, it was typical to frame the text with a double line border, and in this case, the lines are warped and damaged. Printed in 1667, it belongs to the first edition of Milton’s famous work.

The London Times heading is interesting, representing as it does the first number, under the new name, of a newspaper which has since become world-famous. The 26heading mentions that the Times was printed “logographically.” Logotypes (two or three letters cast together) were being experimented with to facilitate type composition, but did not prove successful.

The London Times headline is intriguing, as it marks the first issue, under the new name, of a newspaper that has since gained worldwide fame. The 26headline notes that the Times was printed “logographically.” Logotypes (two or three letters combined) were being tested to make type composition easier, but they were not successful.

ITALIAN SPECIMEN OF 1776

Showing use of decoration

ITALIAN SPECIMEN OF 1776

Demonstrating the use of decoration

The printers “At the Peacock in the Poultrey near Cornhil” surely were good workmen. The “Pilgrim’s Progress” title-page is a finished bit of printing.

The printers “At the Peacock in the Poultry near Cornhill” were definitely skilled craftsmen. The title page of “Pilgrim’s Progress” is a beautifully executed piece of printing.

The custom of using decorative border units to make printed books attractive was seemingly practiced thruout Europe. The Italian page of 1776 is an example of this, as is also the French specimen of 1742.

The tradition of using decorative border units to enhance the appeal of printed books was clearly practiced throughout Europe. The Italian page from 1776 is one example of this, as is the French specimen from 1742.

The page from the Colonial book, “Description of Trades,” exhibits the use of the decorative band for dividing subjects, which idea has possibilities in the direction of general job printing that make it worthy of experiment.

The page from the Colonial book, “Description of Trades,” shows the use of a decorative band to separate topics, an idea that has potential in the field of general job printing and is worth trying out.

Because Caslon types and ornaments were extensively used by Colonial printers I have reproduced on a previous page specimens of types and ornaments from the type-specimen book of W. Caslon & Son, printed in 1764. The Caslon type-face was original in the sense in which the type-face cut by Jenson was original; both had characteristics which identified them with their designers, but both also had a general resemblance to type-faces previously used. The Roman face cut by Caslon bears a marked similarity in its capitals to the type-faces used by Thomas Newcomb on the title-page of the “Compleat Ambassador” (see insert).

Because Caslon types and ornaments were widely used by Colonial printers, I’ve included examples of types and ornaments from the type specimen book of W. Caslon & Son, printed in 1764, on a previous page. The Caslon typeface was original in the same way that Jenson's typeface was original; both had features that linked them to their creators, but they also resembled typefaces that came before them. The Roman face created by Caslon shows a clear similarity in its capitals to the typefaces used by Thomas Newcomb on the title page of the “Compleat Ambassador” (see insert).

There are shown here two specimens of type-faces designed by Bodoni, which were the first of the so-called “modern” romans. The letters reveal a thinning of the lighter lines and a thickening of the heavier lines. The serifs are straight and sharp. The design of the letters was such as to afford the typefounders of the nineteenth century a model upon which to base their efforts at mechanical accuracy in the cutting of type-faces. As a result of the introduction of Bodoni’s new type-face there was not a type foundry in the world in 1805 making the old-style roman type-faces. Giovan Battista (John Baptist) Bodoni was a printer-typefounder of Parma, Italy.

Here are two examples of typefaces designed by Bodoni, which were the first of the so-called “modern” romans. The letters show thinner lighter lines and thicker heavier lines. The serifs are straight and sharp. The letter design provided 19th-century typefounders with a model to achieve mechanical accuracy in cutting typefaces. Because of Bodoni’s new typeface, by 1805 there was no type foundry in the world producing the old-style roman typefaces. Giovan Battista (John Baptist) Bodoni was a printer-typefounder from Parma, Italy.

The illustrations in this chapter were in most instances photographed from originals in the New York Public Library, the library of the New York Typothetæ, and the private library of The American Printer.

The illustrations in this chapter were mostly photographed from originals in the New York Public Library, the library of the New York Typothetæ, and the private library of The American Printer.

Pages from Bodoni books of 1789 and 1806, showing the first “modern” type-faces

Pages from Bodoni books of 1789 and 1806, showcasing the first “modern” typefaces.

Title-page of the “Historyes of Troye” designed by Morris and engraved on wood

Title page of the “Histories of Troy” designed by Morris and printed on wood

First text page of “The Story of the Glittering Plain” showing the “Golden” type

The Morris style of typography and decoration

First text page of “The Story of the Glittering Plain” showing the “Golden” type

The Morris style of typography and decoration

27

TYPOGRAPHY IN THE 19th CENTURY

It was near the close of the nineteenth century when William Morris, the distinguished exponent of strength and simplicity in art, declared that “no good printing has been done since 1550.” According to this statement one hundred years after its invention typography forfeited its place among the esthetic arts, and then for three hundred years remained below the standard set by its inventor. By setting his date at 1550 Morris overlooked the achievements of such eminent printers as Plantin and the Elzevirs, but his arraignment probably had some justification. Posterity had defaulted in its administration of the legacy left by Gutenberg.

It was almost the end of the nineteenth century when William Morris, the renowned advocate for strength and simplicity in art, stated that “no good printing has been done since 1550.” According to this claim, a hundred years after its invention, typography lost its status among the fine arts, and for three hundred years, it remained below the level set by its creator. By choosing 1550 as his benchmark, Morris ignored the accomplishments of great printers like Plantin and the Elzevirs, but his criticism likely had some merit. Future generations had failed to uphold the legacy left by Gutenberg.

The first book printed from separate types, as an example of artistic arrangement and careful workmanship, is a remarkable testimony to the genius of the inventor, especially when the completeness of the invention is compared with the initial productions of later inventors. The first cylinder press and the first linotype machine were both crudely constructed.

The first book printed from individual types, showcasing artistic design and careful craftsmanship, stands as an impressive testament to the inventor's genius, especially when you compare the overall quality of the invention to the early works of later inventors. The first cylinder press and the first linotype machine were both made quite roughly.

Typography attained its highest point toward perfection in Italy in the days of Jenson and Aldus. The Italian style of lettering and decoration differed greatly from the German. There were dignity, refinement, a dainty neatness, in the printed pages of the Venetians, and their type-faces were precise and of a dark-gray tone. The German page, with its bold Gothic letters arranged in masses of black, was characteristic of the religious fidelity and sturdiness of the dwellers on the banks of the Rhine.

Typography reached its peak of perfection in Italy during the times of Jenson and Aldus. The Italian style of lettering and decoration was very different from the German style. The printed pages of the Venetians displayed dignity, refinement, and a delicate neatness, with typefaces that were exact and in a dark-gray tone. In contrast, the German page, featuring bold Gothic letters arranged in heavy black masses, reflected the religious devotion and strength of the people living along the banks of the Rhine.

As the art of printing spread, the German and Italian styles became mingled, finally resulting during Colonial days in a style of typography which represented the Italian modified by the German just enough to make it interesting. But typography as an art was in a state of deterioration. Even Franklin, called by the printers of America their “Patron Saint,” as a typographer lacked the artistic perception of Aldus and Plantin, altho he was a superior mechanic and a shrewd business man.

As the printing process expanded, the German and Italian styles blended together, ultimately creating a typography style during Colonial times that reflected the Italian design, subtly adjusted by the German influence to make it engaging. However, typography as an art form was declining. Even Franklin, known to American printers as their “Patron Saint,” didn't have the artistic vision of Aldus and Plantin, although he excelled as a craftsman and was a savvy businessman.

The beginning of the nineteenth century found the practice of typography leaning more than ever toward utility and away from art. William Nicholson, an Englishman, had planned a cylinder printing press, and Dr. Kinsley, of Connecticut, had constructed a model of one. A roman type-face on severe, mechanical lines had been designed, and picturesque old romans such as the Caslon were going out of use. Ornaments and borders were being discarded, and the style of typography was getting uninteresting and losing the personal element.

The start of the nineteenth century saw typography focusing more on practicality than artistry. William Nicholson, an Englishman, had designed a cylinder printing press, and Dr. Kinsley from Connecticut had built a model of it. A roman typeface with strict, mechanical lines was created, while decorative old romans like the Caslon were becoming obsolete. Ornaments and borders were being eliminated, leading to a style of typography that was becoming dull and losing its personal touch.

PLEASING BORDER ARRANGEMENT

Letterpress imitation of the decoration of double-column pages on early books. From the “Book of Common Prayer,” London, 1814

PLEASING BORDER ARRANGEMENT

A printed look that mimics the layout of double-column pages in early books. From the “Book of Common Prayer,” London, 1814

To illustrate this transition there are reproduced four representative title-page arrangements. The first is that of a book on printing published in 1810, containing several lines of the then new roman type-face. In arrangement this page is similar to the 28“Queen Elizabeth” page inserted in the chapter on Colonial typography which is perhaps the source from which came the “long-and-short-line” and “catch-word” style of the average title-page of the nineteenth century. The second example of the group shows a displayed page of 1847 similarly treated, and the third is a reproduction of the title-page of a printer’s manual of 1872. This last-mentioned example is the product of a prominent type foundry of that time and very likely was arranged in the style then accepted as good typography. A more uninteresting page could hardly be conceived, especially in a book intended for printers.

To illustrate this transition, four representative title-page arrangements are shown. The first is from a book on printing published in 1810, featuring several lines of the then-new Roman typeface. In its layout, this page resembles the 28 “Queen Elizabeth” page included in the chapter on Colonial typography, which may have influenced the “long-and-short-line” and “catch-word” styles typical of 19th-century title pages. The second example from the group displays a page from 1847 treated in a similar way, while the third is a reproduction of the title page of a printer's manual from 1872. This last example is from a notable type foundry of the time and was likely designed in the style considered good typography then. A more mundane page could hardly be imagined, especially in a book meant for printers.

DESIGN MADE WITH BRASS RULE

Executed in 1879, it is one of the best specimens of the rule-curving period

DESIGN MADE WITH BRASS RULE

Created in 1879, it is one of the finest examples of the rule-curving era.

The fourth example is a reproduction of the title-page of MacKellar’s well-known manual, “The American Printer” (now out of print), and presents what to the head of the most prominent American type foundry was probably an ideal arrangement. While revealing the long-and-short-line characteristics of the previously mentioned pages, as a whole the effect is more interesting to printers. In this page may be noticed the trend toward delicate, characterless typography.

The fourth example shows the title page of MacKellar’s famous manual, “The American Printer” (now out of print), and it represents what the head of the leading American type foundry likely considered an ideal layout. While displaying the long-and-short-line features of the earlier mentioned pages, the overall impression is more engaging for printers. This page highlights the shift toward subtle, less distinctive typography.

A printer, Charles Whittingham, of the Chiswick Press, and a publisher, William Pickering, of London, England, furnish an example of effort made in the middle of the nineteenth century to raise the practice of typography to a more artistic standard. These men, both lovers of books, and artists in temperament, had become intimate friends, and together endeavored to introduce into their publications simplicity, appropriateness, and other artistic qualities.

A printer, Charles Whittingham, from the Chiswick Press, and a publisher, William Pickering, based in London, England, provide an example of the effort made in the mid-nineteenth century to elevate the art of typography to a more artistic level. Both of these men, who were passionate about books and had an artistic flair, became close friends and worked together to incorporate simplicity, relevance, and other artistic qualities into their publications.

Desiring to use an old-style face on one of their books, Whittingham inquired of the Caslon type foundry if any of the punches cut by the first William Caslon were in existence. The original punches being recovered after years of disuse, fonts of type were cast and used on a book, “The Diary of Lady Willoughby,” printed in 1844. The title-page of this book is reproduced on a following page, and it will be seen that Whittingham arranged the typography in the Colonial style to harmonize with the literary motive of the book. So well was this done that one has to look twice at the date to satisfy himself it is not 1644. Other typography from these men is not quite so radically different from that of their contemporaries, but is more refined, artistic and tasteful, as may be seen by the “Friends in Council” page further on in this chapter. An innovation by Whittingham was the omission of punctuation marks excepting where needed to make clear the significance of the wording.

Wanting to use a classic typeface for one of their books, Whittingham asked the Caslon type foundry if any of the original punches made by the first William Caslon still existed. The original punches were found after years of being stored away, and type was cast from them for a book, “The Diary of Lady Willoughby,” published in 1844. The title page of this book is shown on the next page, and you can see that Whittingham designed the typography in a Colonial style to match the book's literary theme. It was done so well that you have to look twice at the date to convince yourself it’s not 1644. Other typography from these creators isn’t dramatically different from that of their peers, but it is more refined, artistic, and tasteful, as you can see on the “Friends in Council” page later in this chapter. An innovation from Whittingham was leaving out punctuation marks except where necessary for clarity.

Whittingham and Pickering, in the field of artistic typography, were fifty years ahead of their time, as printers in general were not ready to accept the good things offered them. The modern renaissance came later.

Whittingham and Pickering, in the world of artistic typography, were fifty years ahead of their time, as printers in general were not ready to embrace the great innovations available to them. The modern renaissance came later.


Job printing as a distinct department is of modern development. Typographers of old were primarily book and pamphlet printers, and in many cases interest was chiefly centered in publishing newspapers or almanacs; job printing was incidental. This caused similarity in the typography of newspaper, book and job work, a condition 29that today exists only in a small degree. Now these three classes of work are generally separated into departments, each with its own rules, styles and practices, job composition being less restrained by customs and rules than any of the other departments.

Job printing as a separate department is a relatively recent development. In the past, typographers mainly focused on printing books and pamphlets, with much of their interest leaning towards publishing newspapers or almanacs; job printing was just an afterthought. This led to similarities in the typography of newspapers, books, and job work, a situation that now only occurs to a minor extent. Nowadays, these three types of work are typically divided into distinct departments, each with its own guidelines, styles, and practices, with job composition being less constrained by traditions and rules than the other departments. 29

TITLE-PAGE OF 1810

TITLE PAGE OF 1810

TITLE-PAGE OF 1847

TITLE PAGE OF 1847

TITLE-PAGE OF 1872

Showing the development during the nineteenth century of a severe and uninteresting style

TITLE-PAGE OF 1872

Showing the growth during the nineteenth century of a harsh and dull style

Attractiveness is as necessary to the typography of the general job of printing as dignity and legibility are to a law brief, but, endeavoring to get attractiveness into their work, job printers often go astray. They wrongly labor under the impression that to have a job distinctive it must be made freakish. Typography is not good unless based upon art foundations.

Attractiveness is just as important to the overall job of printing as dignity and readability are to a legal document. However, in trying to make their work more appealing, printers often miss the mark. They mistakenly believe that to create something unique, it has to be outlandish. Typography isn't effective unless it's grounded in artistic principles.

Ideas in plenty could have been plucked by the printer of the nineteenth century from old books, especially from those printed for religious organizations, such as the “Book of Common Prayer.” A handsome edition of a book of this kind was printed in London by John Murray in 1814. Each pair of pages is different in decoration and typography, the designs being by “Owen Jones, architect.” The decorative treatment of the page of Psalms reproduced from this book is worthy of study and adaptation.

Ideas in abundance could have been taken by the printer of the 1800s from old books, especially those published for religious groups, like the “Book of Common Prayer.” A beautiful edition of a book like this was printed in London by John Murray in 1814. Each pair of pages features different decorations and typography, designed by “Owen Jones, architect.” The decorative layout of the Psalms page reproduced from this book is worth examining and adapting.

THE TREND TOWARD DAINTINESS

Title-page of MacKellar’s manual, “The American Printer,” 1882

THE TREND TOWARD DAINTINESS

Title-page of MacKellar’s manual, “The American Printer,” 1882

About the time of the Civil War the job printer was less fettered than ever by the customs of the book printer. While title-pages of books were being composed without ornamentation in severe-looking modern romans, the job printer, influenced by the typefounder, took a liking to fancy typography, for the production of which there were shaded, outlined, rimmed and ornamental letters, in imitation of the work of the copperplate engraver. The business card on the next page, and the “bill of fare” here shown, are specimens of such work.

About the time of the Civil War, the job printer was freer than ever from the traditions of the book printer. While book titles were being crafted without decoration in simple, modern fonts, the job printer, inspired by the typefounder, embraced decorative typography, which included shaded, outlined, rimmed, and ornamental letters that mimicked the work of copperplate engravers. The business card on the next page and the “bill of fare” shown here are examples of such work.

BANQUET PROGRAM

As arranged in Boston in 1865

BANQUET PROGRAM

As organized in Boston in 1865

The changing styles of typography as applied to commercial headings are well set forth by the group on the fifth page of this chapter. The first specimen is a “plain” billhead of 1870. The second is a billhead of 1893, when the compositor was taught to corral all excess wording in an enclosure of rules at the left side of the heading proper. In this specimen there is a touch of ornamentation and a showing of seven different type-faces, one of which is the then conventional script for the date line. The third specimen of the group, a letterhead which won first prize in a contest held in 1897, reveals further development of simple typography. Only one face of type is used (Tudor black) and there is no ornamentation excepting a few periods on each side of the word “The.”

The changing styles of typography used for commercial headings are clearly illustrated by the group on the fifth page of this chapter. The first example is a "plain" billhead from 1870. The second is a billhead from 1893, when typesetters were trained to organize all extra wording within a border on the left side of the main heading. This example includes some decoration and features seven different typefaces, one of which is the then-standard script for the date line. The third example in the group, a letterhead that won first prize in a contest in 1897, shows further development in straightforward typography. It uses only one typeface (Tudor black) and has no decoration apart from a few periods on either side of the word "The."

During the nineteenth century no type foundry did more toward influencing the typography of the general job printer than the one known at the time of its absorption by the American Type Founders Company as MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, of Philadelphia. The reproduction of a few clippings from its specimen book of 1885 may recall memories to the printer now of middle age.

During the nineteenth century, no type foundry had a bigger impact on the typography of general job printers than the one known at the time of its merger with the American Type Founders Company as MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, based in Philadelphia. Sharing a few samples from its 1885 specimen book might jog the memories of printers who are now middle-aged.

The Free Press business card has peculiar interest to the author. It was set and printed by him during dull hours about the year 1889, when his thinking apparatus was controlled by influences from the underworld of typographic practice.

The Free Press business card holds a unique significance for the author. He designed and printed it during quiet moments around 1889, when his creative mind was shaped by influences from the underground world of printing.

There is another phase of late nineteenth-century typography which should be mentioned. It seems that printers had developed a longing for pictures, color and 30decoration. The process of photo-engraving not having been perfected, job printers shaped brass rule into representations of composing-sticks, printing presses, portraits and architectural designs, and cut tint blocks from patent leather and other material. The skill exhibited by many printers is remarkable; beautiful combinations of tints were produced. It will be difficult for many persons to believe that the “Boston Type Foundry” design (shown on a preceding page) was originally constructed with pieces of brass rule, but such is the fact. It was composed by C. W. L. Jungloew in 1879, and is truly a wonderful example of the work of the printer-architect. The perspective obtained by the designer is a feature. Black, gold, and several tints were used in the printing.

There’s another aspect of late 19th-century typography that should be noted. It seems that printers had developed a desire for images, color, and decoration. The technique of photo-engraving had not yet been perfected, so job printers shaped brass rules into representations of composing sticks, printing presses, portraits, and architectural designs, and cut tint blocks from patent leather and other materials. The skill shown by many printers is impressive; they created beautiful combinations of colors. It may be hard for many people to believe that the “Boston Type Foundry” design (shown on a previous page) was originally made with pieces of brass rule, but that’s the truth. It was created by C. W. L. Jungloew in 1879 and is truly a remarkable example of the work of a printer-architect. The perspective achieved by the designer is a standout feature. Black, gold, and several colors were used in the printing.

“IN THE GOOD OLD DAYS”

From a specimen book of 1885

“IN THE GOOD OLD DAYS”

From a specimen book of 1885

Interesting as are these wonders of the curved-rule period, they are not artistic in the true sense of the word; examples of skill indeed, but not art as it is today understood.

Interesting as these wonders of the curved-rule period are, they aren't artistic in the true sense of the word; they are examples of skill, but not art as we understand it today.


We now come to one of the most interesting periods in the history of printing, a period which may well be termed the “Modern Renaissance.” As was intimated earlier in this chapter, the invention of printing machinery served to lead typography away from art. The printers of that time thought they were doing artistic work when they set their jobs in fancy type-faces, twisted brass rule, or printed in many colors. They did not know that art-printing was simplicity—and something else. The apprentice was taught to set type as was his journeyman instructor before him. Any inspiration he received came from the typefounders, and even that was often interpreted wrongly.

We now come to one of the most interesting periods in the history of printing, a period that can definitely be called the “Modern Renaissance.” As mentioned earlier in this chapter, the invention of printing machinery shifted typography away from being an art form. The printers of that time believed they were creating art when they used fancy typefaces, elaborate brass rules, or printed in multiple colors. They didn’t realize that true art-printing was about simplicity—and more. The apprentice learned to set type just like his journeyman instructor did before him. Any inspiration he gained came from the typefounders, and even that was often misunderstood.

Ten years before the close of the nineteenth century display typography was in a chaotic state so far as art was concerned. Printers who before had not doubted the appropriateness and quality of their own typography, began to realize that it lacked something they were not able to supply, and were ready to follow a Moses who could lead them to better things. Then began to form a curious chain of events that was to have a revolutionary influence upon commercial typography as well as upon commercial art. The first link in this chain was the establishing of the Kelmscott Press in England by William Morris.

Ten years before the end of the nineteenth century, display typography was in a messy state in terms of art. Printers who had previously been confident about the suitability and quality of their typography started to recognize that it was missing something they couldn't provide, and they were eager to follow a leader who could guide them to better options. This marked the beginning of a series of events that would have a significant impact on both commercial typography and commercial art. The first step in this series was the founding of the Kelmscott Press in England by William Morris.

William Morris was an artist, a poet, a designer and a craftsman. Partiality for things medieval showed itself early in his life, and before he took up printing he manufactured artistic house furnishings in the ruins of an old abbey.

William Morris was an artist, a poet, a designer, and a craftsman. His love for medieval things became evident early in his life, and before he began printing, he created artistic home furnishings in the ruins of an old abbey.

Years ago if the average American citizen were asked what great thing Benjamin Franklin did, his answer might have been, “He invented the Franklin stove.” The average person of today would connect the name of Morris with the Morris chair. As the application of art principles to typography has caused the compositor to turn from rule curving, to set his lines straight, and to seek paper and ink without luster, so the influence of Morris led to a distaste for gilt and polish and trimmings, and created a demand for subdued colors and straight lines in home furnishings. He who can influence others to think and act in manner different and better than they have done before, is truly great.

Years ago, if you asked the average American what great thing Benjamin Franklin did, they might have said, “He invented the Franklin stove.” Today, most people would associate the name Morris with the Morris chair. Just as the use of art principles in typography has pushed typesetters to move from curving rules to setting their lines straight and seek out matte paper and ink, Morris’s influence created a dislike for shiny finishes and ornate details, leading to a preference for muted colors and clean lines in home decor. Someone who can inspire others to think and act in new and better ways is truly great.

Morris lived in a picturesque old manor-house in Kelmscott on the Thames in England, and it was there at the age of fifty-seven years that he began to print. He was not a printer by trade, but before a type was set he studied the art from the beginning. He even learned to make a sheet of paper himself. Kelmscott Press paper was made by hand of fine white linen rags untouched by chemicals. Morris as a handicraftsman had an abhorrence for machinery. It is doubtful if he would have used even a hand-press if results equally good could have been obtained without it.

Morris lived in a beautiful old manor house in Kelmscott on the Thames in England, and it was there, at the age of fifty-seven, that he started printing. He wasn't a printer by profession, but before setting any type, he learned the craft from the ground up. He even taught himself how to make paper. Kelmscott Press paper was handmade from fine white linen rags that hadn’t been treated with chemicals. As a craftsman, Morris had a strong dislike for machinery. It’s unlikely he would have used even a hand press if he could achieve equally good results without one.

Morris’s idea seems to have been to take up good typography where the early printers left off. When he wanted types for the new printshop he had enlarged photographs made of the type pages of Jenson, Koburger and other printers of the fifteenth century, and from these photographs designed his type-faces, arranging the details of the letters to conform to his own ideas.

Morris’s idea seems to have been to pick up on good typography where the early printers left off. When he needed types for the new print shop, he had enlarged photographs made of the type pages from Jenson, Koburger, and other fifteenth-century printers, and from these photographs, he designed his typefaces, adjusting the details of the letters to match his own vision.

His roman type-face he called “Golden,” probably because of its use on the “Golden Legend.” This type-face was afterward reproduced by foundries in America as Jenson, Kelmscott, and other type-names. Morris was wont to say that he considered the glory of the Roman alphabet was in its capitals, but the glory of the Gothic alphabet was in its lower-case letters. He also designed a type-face characteristic of the Gothic letters used by Koburger and other fifteenth-century printers, and, probably because of its use on the “Historyes of Troye,” called it Troy. This type also was reproduced by type foundries, and printers knew it as Satanick and Tell Text.

His Roman typeface was called “Golden,” likely because it was used in the “Golden Legend.” Later, type foundries in America reproduced this typeface under names like Jenson, Kelmscott, and others. Morris often said he thought the beauty of the Roman alphabet was in its capitals, while the beauty of the Gothic alphabet was in its lowercase letters. He also designed a typeface that was typical of the Gothic letters used by Koburger and other 15th-century printers, and, probably because it was featured in the “Historyes of Troye,” he named it Troy. This type was also reproduced by type foundries, and printers referred to it as Satanick and Tell Text.

The space ordinarily assigned to the page margins Morris covered with foliage decoration in the manner of the early Italian printers, large decorative initials blending with the borders. These initials and borders, with few exceptions, were drawn by himself and engraved upon wood by W. H. Hooper. Compare the right-hand page of the two pages here reproduced with the Venetian specimen in the chapter on “The Spread of Typography.”

The area usually reserved for page margins was decorated by Morris with foliage designs, similar to those used by early Italian printers, with large decorative initials blending into the borders. With few exceptions, he designed these initials and borders himself, and they were engraved on wood by W. H. Hooper. Compare the right-hand page of the two pages shown here with the Venetian example in the chapter on “The Spread of Typography.”

BUSINESS CARD

As displayed in 1865

BUSINESS CARD

As shown in 1865

One of Morris’s books, an edition of Chaucer, was additionally enriched by upward of a hundred illustrations by Burne-Jones, a noted British artist.

One of Morris’s books, an edition of Chaucer, was also enhanced with over a hundred illustrations by Burne-Jones, a well-known British artist.

In both England and America Morris was the subject 31of much criticism. Men who as art printers were not fit to touch the hem of his garment were loud in condemnation of his work. Others, more fair, pointed out the excellence of his printing, but claimed that neither his type-faces nor his style of typography would be used many years. This last prediction has proved partly true. The Jenson, or Kelmscott, type-face was used so frequently and so generally that despite its virtues it finally tired the public eye, and is now seldom seen. Satanick, the “Troy” type-face, as made by the American Type Founders Company, is not now displayed in that company’s specimen book.

In both England and America, Morris faced a lot of criticism. People who couldn't even hold a candle to his skills as art printers were quick to condemn his work. Others, being more reasonable, acknowledged the quality of his printing but claimed that neither his typefaces nor his typography style would last for many years. This last prediction has turned out to be partly correct. The Jenson, or Kelmscott, typeface was used so often and so widely that, despite its strengths, it eventually bored the public and is now rarely seen. The Satanick, the "Troy" typeface made by the American Type Founders Company, is no longer featured in that company’s specimen book. 31

A BUSINESS CARD OF 1889

One of the author’s early attempts at artistic (?) printing

A BUSINESS CARD OF 1889

One of the author’s early attempts at artistic printing

However, the work of William Morris, tho not accepted as the model for general use, was the cause of a revolution in modern typography. Instead of the delicate and inartistic type-faces and ornamentation of 1890, the contents of type-foundry specimen books revealed strong, handsome, artistic letters and common-sense art borders and ornaments. Morris’s experience as a printer did not cover five years, yet his name will always live because of the good he did typography in the nineteenth century.

However, the work of William Morris, though not widely accepted as the standard for general use, sparked a revolution in modern typography. Instead of the fragile and unattractive typefaces and decorations of 1890, the contents of type-foundry specimen books showcased strong, beautiful, artistic letters along with practical art borders and ornaments. Morris’s experience as a printer lasted less than five years, yet his name will always be remembered for the positive impact he had on typography in the nineteenth century.

Decorative artists were wielding a big influence in the revival taking place in the field of typography. Contemporary with Morris in England was a young artist, Aubrey Beardsley, prominent in a new school of art which saw merit in the flat masses of color as found in the seemingly grotesque designs of the Japanese.

Decorative artists were having a significant impact on the revival happening in typography. At the same time as Morris in England, there was a young artist, Aubrey Beardsley, who was a key figure in a new art movement that appreciated the flat color blocks found in the seemingly grotesque designs of Japanese art.

Here in America the work of Morris and Beardsley found favor in the eyes of Will Bradley, who was destined to lead the forces in the typographic revolution on American soil. Bradley had been a country printer; as apprentice, journeyman and foreman he had tasted both the joys and sorrows of practical work in the printshop. However, Bradley was more than printer; he had artistic tendencies which finally influenced him to go to Chicago to study art. There he frequented the art galleries and public libraries, and developed into a poster artist of exceptional merit. There were those who called him the “American Beardsley.”

Here in America, the work of Morris and Beardsley caught the attention of Will Bradley, who was set to lead the typographic revolution in the U.S. Bradley had been a country printer; as an apprentice, journeyman, and foreman, he experienced both the highs and lows of working in a print shop. However, Bradley was more than just a printer; he had artistic inclinations that eventually drove him to go to Chicago to study art. There, he visited art galleries and public libraries, becoming a poster artist of exceptional talent. Some even referred to him as the "American Beardsley."

The year 1896 found Bradley with a studio at Springfield, Mass., where his love of printing influenced him to open a printshop which he called the “Wayside Press.” In May of the same year he issued the first number of “Bradley: His Book,” a unique publication for artists and printers. The type-faces used were Jenson, Caslon and Bradley, and almost every page contained decoration. There were many odd color combinations and Bradley must have stood close to his presses when this first number was printed. Purple-brown and orange, olive-green and orange-brown, orange-yellow and chocolate-brown, purple-red and green-blue—these were some of the color harmonies.

The year 1896 found Bradley with a studio in Springfield, Mass., where his passion for printing led him to open a print shop he named the “Wayside Press.” In May of that same year, he released the first issue of “Bradley: His Book,” a one-of-a-kind publication for artists and printers. The typefaces used were Jenson, Caslon, and Bradley, and nearly every page featured decorations. There were many unusual color combinations, and Bradley must have been right by his presses when this first issue was printed. Purple-brown and orange, olive-green and orange-brown, orange-yellow and chocolate-brown, purple-red and green-blue—these were some of the color harmonies.

The Christmas number of “Bradley: His Book” was set entirely in Satanick, the American copy of Morris’s “Troy” type, and bright vermilion was nicely contrasted with dense black print.

The Christmas edition of “Bradley: His Book” was completely set in Satanick, the American version of Morris’s “Troy” type, with bright red nicely contrasting with bold black print.

While Morris was a medievalist, and received his inspiration from the printed books of the fifteenth century, Bradley was inspired by both past and present. Printers know him particularly because of his adaptations of the styles of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. He demonstrated how Colonial printers could have done their work better. In presenting the Colonial specimens which are here reproduced from the November, 1906, “Bradley: His Book,” Bradley wrote:

While Morris focused on medieval themes and drew his inspiration from 15th-century printed books, Bradley was influenced by both the past and the present. Printers recognize him especially for his adaptations of styles from the 17th and 18th centuries. He showed how Colonial printers could have improved their work. In showcasing the Colonial samples reproduced here from the November 1906 edition of “Bradley: His Book,” Bradley wrote:

Antique and deckle-edge papers enter so largely into the making of books today that printers cannot do better than to study the styles of type-composition that were in vogue when all books were printed upon hand-made papers. A knowledge thus gained should prove of great value, especially in the setting of title-pages.... The only face of Roman type which seems appropriate to antique paper is that which is known as Caslon. When types were fewer, and the craft of printing less abused than it is now, this was the only type used in bookwork; and some of the title-pages in our earlier books are extremely interesting and suggest motifs which may well be carried out today. Taking suggestions from these books we have set a few pages, using as subjects the titles of some modern works. There seems to be an unwritten law which we are supposed to follow in this class of composition; and yet one should be a little brave and daring, purely for the joy of getting out of the old beaten track.

Antique and deckle-edge papers play a significant role in book production today, so printers would benefit from studying the types of composition that were popular when all books were printed on handmade papers. This knowledge should be quite valuable, especially when designing title pages.... The only Roman type that seems to suit antique paper is known as Caslon. When there were fewer typefaces and the craft of printing was less misused than it is now, this was the primary type used for books; some title pages in our early books are very intriguing and inspire motifs that could be revived today. Drawing inspiration from these books, we’ve created a few pages featuring titles from some modern works. There seems to be an unwritten rule we’re expected to follow in this type of composition; however, one should also be a bit bold and adventurous, simply for the pleasure of stepping off the well-trodden path.

Stationery composition of 1870

Stationery set from 1870

The panel as used in 1893

The panel as used in 1893

A neat letterhead of 1897

THE CHANGING STYLES OF COMMERCIAL HEADINGS

A tidy letterhead from 1897

THE EVOLVING DESIGNS OF BUSINESS HEADINGS

The type foundries helped the spread of the new typography 32by supplying a series of Bradley’s decorations, known as “Wayside Ornaments.”

The type foundries contributed to the popularity of the new typography 32by提供 a collection of Bradley’s designs, called “Wayside Ornaments.”

Bradley discontinued the Wayside Press in 1898 and combined his printshop with that of the University Press at Cambridge, Mass. There a battery of presses was kept busy during the continuance of the extraordinary interest in Bradley booklets.

Bradley shut down the Wayside Press in 1898 and merged his printshop with the University Press in Cambridge, Mass. There, a group of presses was kept busy due to the ongoing interest in Bradley's booklets.

In 1905 Bradley impaired the strength of his following by attempting for the American Type Founders Company the introduction of a new style of typography, the prominent feature of which was profuse ornamentation. While this effort supplied job printers with many valuable ideas in type arrangement and color treatment, happily the style as a whole was not adopted by printers generally or typographic conditions might have become as unfortunate as they were previous to 1890.

In 1905, Bradley weakened his influence by trying to introduce a new typography style for the American Type Founders Company, which was heavily decorated. Although this effort gave job printers many useful ideas for type arrangement and color, fortunately, the style wasn’t widely adopted by printers. Otherwise, the situation might have become as bad as it was before 1890.

Frank B. Berry, associated with Bradley during his engagement with the American Type Founders Company, tells in these words of the construction of a thirty-two-page pamphlet of specimens entitled “The Green Book of Spring”: “Starting in on this about half-past ten one morning Bradley made up a dummy, prepared the copy and laid out the work—specifying the size and style of type to be used, the form of display and designating the exact position of each ornament with the required spacing. This was in effect practically furnishing reprint copy for the compositors. Then, to ‘give good measure,’ as he expressed it, copy was prepared for the cover, and the work was ready for the printers before half-past one.”

Frank B. Berry, who worked with Bradley during his time at the American Type Founders Company, describes the creation of a thirty-two-page specimen pamphlet called “The Green Book of Spring” like this: “Starting around 10:30 one morning, Bradley created a mock-up, prepared the text, and laid out the design—specifying the size and style of type to use, the layout, and the exact placement of each ornament with the needed spacing. This essentially provided ready-to-use copy for the typesetters. Then, to ‘give good measure,’ as he put it, additional text was prepared for the cover, and the materials were ready for the printers by 1:30.”

AN INTERESTING TITLE-PAGE

By Charles Whittingham, London, 1849

AN INTERESTING TITLE-PAGE

By Charles Whittingham, London, 1849

In the few years succeeding the establishment of the Wayside Press, Bradley’s style of typography was closely followed by many printers, and all the printshops of America were more or less influenced by it, but at this date his ideas and Morris’s ideas are merged more or less with those of De Vinne, Jacobi, Updike, Rogers, Cleland, Benton, Kimball, Goudy, Goodhue, Winchell and others. From Germany, too, have lately come suggestions in decoration that are visibly influencing general typography.

In the few years after the founding of the Wayside Press, Bradley’s typography style was closely followed by many printers, and all the print shops across America were somewhat influenced by it. However, at this point, his ideas and Morris’s ideas have more or less blended with those of De Vinne, Jacobi, Updike, Rogers, Cleland, Benton, Kimball, Goudy, Goodhue, Winchell, and others. Recently, suggestions in decoration from Germany have also started to visibly impact overall typography.

TITLE-PAGE IN THE COLONIAL STYLE

By Charles Whittingham, London, 1844. The first use in the nineteenth century of the Caslon type-face

TITLE-PAGE IN THE COLONIAL STYLE

By Charles Whittingham, London, 1844. The first use of the Caslon typeface in the nineteenth century.

In recent years Bradley devoted his talents to the make-up of magazine pages. His characteristic decoration has added interest to the text sections of several leading magazines. He dictated the make-up and drew the cover design and department headings for the twenty-fifth anniversary number of The American Printer issued July, 1910.

In recent years, Bradley focused his skills on designing magazine pages. His unique style has brought additional interest to the text sections of several major magazines. He created the layout and designed the cover art and section headings for the twenty-fifth anniversary issue of The American Printer published in July 1910.

This versatile artist-printer also accomplished the unique task of applying business and industrial methods to the making and selling of art work. He had a staff of working artists, one of whom acted as foreman. Bradley had a book in which he pasted his sketches of decorative borders, ornaments and illustrations. These were classified and numbered, and when a design was to be drawn he gave instructions to the working artist indicating which sketches were to be worked up. In this manner he eliminated the manual labor so far as he was concerned and was able to accomplish much more than if he had attempted to do everything himself. He also planned a series of decorative units and illustrations and offered a quick art-service to advertisers and printers.

This versatile artist and printer also managed the unique task of using business and industrial techniques to create and sell artwork. He had a team of working artists, one of whom served as the foreman. Bradley kept a book in which he pasted his sketches of decorative borders, ornaments, and illustrations. These were organized and numbered, and when a design needed to be created, he provided instructions to the working artist specifying which sketches to develop. This way, he minimized manual labor on his part and was able to achieve much more than if he had tried to do everything himself. He also planned a series of decorative units and illustrations and offered a fast art service to advertisers and printers.

Fred W. Goudy, who designed such type-faces as Pabst, Powell, Forum, Kennerley and Goudy Old Style, has influenced printing styles in the direction of classic effects. Goudy as a student of Roman architecture and letter-carving has dignified the printing industry and enriched typographic art.

Fred W. Goudy, who created typefaces like Pabst, Powell, Forum, Kennerley, and Goudy Old Style, has shaped printing styles toward classic aesthetics. As a student of Roman architecture and letter-carving, Goudy has elevated the printing industry and enhanced typographic art.

This lesson would not be complete without a tribute to the work of Theodore L. De Vinne, who had the distinction of being the only printer but one in America to receive a college degree for accomplishments as a printer.

This lesson wouldn’t be complete without acknowledging the work of Theodore L. De Vinne, who was one of the very few printers in America to earn a college degree for his achievements in printing.

Bradley’s adaptation of the Colonial style as produced by him at the Wayside Press in 1896

Bradley's version of the Colonial style created by him at the Wayside Press in 1896

De Vinne’s introduction to typography was as an 33apprentice in a country printshop. He went to New York in 1847 and worked at the case and press in several offices before accepting a position as job compositor with Francis Hart. Upon the death of Mr. Hart in 1877, Mr. De Vinne took charge of the business, which is now known as the De Vinne Press.

De Vinne’s introduction to typography was as an 33apprentice in a local print shop. He moved to New York in 1847 and worked at the case and press in several offices before taking a job as a compositor with Francis Hart. After Mr. Hart passed away in 1877, Mr. De Vinne took over the business, which is now called the De Vinne Press.

As a writer on printing subjects, perhaps his greatest work is “The Invention of Printing,” published in 1876. I have examined and read most of the books on the subject of the invention, and De Vinne’s book is the most reasonable, fair and understandable of all.

As a writer on printing topics, maybe his most significant work is “The Invention of Printing,” published in 1876. I've looked into and read many books about the invention, and De Vinne’s book is the most sensible, fair, and easy to understand of them all.

De Vinne had always been an exponent of the sane, conservative and dignified in typography. The work of his shop was precise, exact and thoro. While giving credit to Morris and Bradley for their accomplishments, he had little sympathy for the styles of either. De Vinne properly claimed that a writer’s words are of more importance than the decoration of a designer. Morris intended his books for the shelves of the book collector; De Vinne looked upon a book as something to be read. However, there need be no conflict between the styles of Morris, De Vinne and Bradley. The typographer should learn to discriminate, to choose wisely when selecting a style for a book or a piece of job work. For editions de luxe in limited numbers, and for booklets on art or literary subjects, the Morris style is appropriate. For books on scientific or legal subjects, and for booklets of conservative and dignified nature, there is nothing better than the De Vinne style. For booklets which are to attract attention and for job work that is to be distinctive, Bradley shows the way.

De Vinne had always been a supporter of sensible, conservative, and elegant typography. The work from his shop was precise, accurate, and thorough. While he acknowledged Morris and Bradley for their achievements, he had little appreciation for either of their styles. De Vinne rightly asserted that a writer’s words are more important than a designer’s decoration. Morris designed his books for collectors; De Vinne viewed a book as something to be read. However, there doesn't have to be a conflict between the styles of Morris, De Vinne, and Bradley. A typographer should learn to discern and choose wisely when selecting a style for a book or a project. For luxury editions in limited quantities, and for booklets on art or literary topics, the Morris style is fitting. For books on scientific or legal topics, and for booklets that are conservative and elegant, there’s nothing better than the De Vinne style. For booklets meant to grab attention and for projects that need to stand out, Bradley provides the best guidance.

A JACOBI PAGE OF 1892

Arranged in squared groups in the form of a letter Z

A JACOBI PAGE OF 1892

Arranged in square groups shaped like the letter Z

With De Vinne beckoning to us from the point of conservatism and Bradley from the point of radicalism, the typographer anxious to do work properly must decide for himself how to treat it. I have seen a jeweler’s booklet cover so filled with ornamentation by Bradley that it was almost impossible to read the wording, and I have also seen a children’s Bible typographically treated by the De Vinne company in a style as severe as if it were a book of legislative acts.

With De Vinne inviting us from a conservative angle and Bradley from a more radical one, the typographer who wants to do a good job has to figure out how to approach it themselves. I've seen a jeweler’s booklet cover overloaded with decorations by Bradley that made it nearly impossible to read the text, and I’ve also seen a children’s Bible designed by the De Vinne company that looked so formal it could have been a book of laws.

A BRADLEY PAGE

As produced at the Wayside Press, 1896

A BRADLEY PAGE

As created at the Wayside Press, 1896

De Vinne had always been a leader in the perfecting of modern methods. He was one of the pioneers in the use of dry paper and hard press-packing, and gave much thought to modern type-faces. The type-face known as Century was designed after his suggestions as a model roman letter.

De Vinne had always been a leader in perfecting modern methods. He was one of the pioneers in using dry paper and hard press-packing, and he put a lot of thought into modern typefaces. The typeface known as Century was designed based on his suggestions as a model for Roman lettering.

De Vinne did much in persuading printers to group the wording of title-pages instead of equally separating the type lines as was done in the middle of the nineteenth century.

De Vinne did a lot to convince printers to arrange the wording of title pages together instead of spreading the type lines out evenly like it was done in the middle of the 1800s.

Charles T. Jacobi, of the Chiswick Press, London, as an instructor and writer on printing subjects has done much for typography in England. He is not wedded to a particular style of typography, but advocates the adaptation of any style that is good when by so doing clients are pleased and the principles of art are not violated. The title-page reproduced in this connection is unusual in arrangement. The type groups and the device are all squared and their angularity is enhanced by the exclusive use of capitals. Realizing that a page or design is defective if it presents the appearance of disjointed sections, Mr. Jacobi has avoided such results in this instance by arranging the page in the form of a letter Z.

Charles T. Jacobi, from the Chiswick Press in London, has contributed greatly to typography in England as an instructor and writer on printing topics. He doesn't stick to one specific typography style but supports the idea of using any style that works well when it makes clients happy and maintains artistic principles. The title page shown here has an unusual layout. The type groups and the design are all squared off, and their sharp angles are emphasized by the exclusive use of capital letters. Understanding that a page or design can feel incomplete if it looks like separate parts, Mr. Jacobi has avoided that issue this time by arranging the page in the shape of a letter Z.

34With this chapter the history of typography is brought down to the twentieth century. The modern typographer has great responsibilities. Upon him depends the solution of the problem whether or not our beloved calling is to be ranked with the esthetic arts. Shall the product of the village printer be only of the standard of that of the village blacksmith? Every typographer, regardless of the nature of the work that is his to do, should cultivate a love for the artistic and enlarge his knowledge of the things that make for good printing. The chapters that follow will help to this end.

34With this chapter, the history of typography reaches the twentieth century. The modern typographer has significant responsibilities. The decision of whether our cherished profession is considered one of the artistic fields rests on his shoulders. Should the output of the local printer only match that of the local blacksmith? Every typographer, no matter what type of work they do, should foster a passion for artistry and expand their understanding of what contributes to quality printing. The following chapters will assist in achieving this goal.

Because printing as now practiced is in a great degree dependent upon principles and styles developed during the early days of the art, the student should not neglect carefully to read and digest the historical facts and reproductions that have been presented. Too many typographers underrate the value of a knowledge of history. “I do not care what printers of old did; I want to know what the printer of tomorrow is going to do.” This is almost a literal quotation of the remark of a printer who prides himself on his progressiveness, and he is only one of many who imagine that to be up-to-date it is sufficient to use new type-faces, ornaments and borders, caring little if the resulting jobs lack appropriateness, harmony, color, tone, and other elements that are essential to perfect typography.

Because modern printing is largely based on principles and styles developed in the early days of the craft, students should make sure to thoroughly read and understand the historical facts and examples that have been provided. Too many typographers underestimate the importance of knowing history. “I don’t care what printers of the past did; I want to know what the printer of tomorrow is going to do.” This is almost a direct quote from a printer who takes pride in being progressive, and he is just one of many who believe that to be current, it’s enough to use new typefaces, ornaments, and borders, paying little attention to whether the resulting designs lack appropriateness, harmony, color, tone, and other elements that are essential for perfect typography.

A BRADLEY PAGE

As produced at the Wayside Press, 1896

A BRADLEY PAGE

As produced at the Wayside Press, 1896

A DE VINNE PAGE

This probably presents De Vinne’s idea of title-page arrangement

A DE VINNE PAGE

This likely shows De Vinne’s concept of how to arrange a title page.

He who labors without a knowledge of history is much like the young man who started to work on a job press. He was allowed to make ready a form, and after a while the pressman went over and examined the work. On the back of the form he found something that looked like an underlay, but could discover no reason for its use. Mystified, he inquired what it was all about, and was told that the apprentice was doing only what he had seen the pressman often do before—cut out several pieces of paper and place them under the form. It had never occurred to the young man to ask why this was done. Thus it may be with the typographer. He arranges a job of type composition in the style of something good he has seen, but fails to get the quality of the original because he does not comprehend just what has served to produce that quality.

A person who works without understanding history is a lot like a young man who started operating a printing press. He was allowed to prepare a form, and after some time, the pressman checked his work. On the back of the form, he found something that looked like an underlay but couldn't figure out why it was there. Confused, he asked what it was for and learned that the apprentice was just copying what he had seen the pressman do before—cutting out several pieces of paper and placing them under the form. It never occurred to the young man to ask why this was done. The same can happen with a typographer. They might set up a type composition based on something good they've seen, but they miss out on the original's quality because they don't understand what exactly made that quality possible.

Morris was a student of ancient printing. His thoughts were back in the fifteenth century with Jenson, Aldus and Koburger, and when he began to print, he printed understandingly. There was a well-defined plan, and there was harmony in ornament, type, ink and paper. When the “up-to-date” printer began to imitate Morris he did it with the same degree of comprehension possessed by the young man who made the “underlay.”

Morris was a student of old-school printing. His mind wandered back to the fifteenth century with Jenson, Aldus, and Koburger, and when he started to print, he did it thoughtfully. There was a clear plan, and everything was in harmony—ornaments, type, ink, and paper. When the modern printer tried to copy Morris, they did so with the same level of understanding as a young man learning to make the "underlay."

Will Bradley would not today be as famous as he is in printing circles if he had labored under the false idea that it was useless to know history. Bradley knows printing history and loves old books, and this knowledge and affection are expressed in his work. The printer who succeeds is the one who looks upon all knowledge as valuable and has a good reason for everything he does.

Will Bradley wouldn’t be as well-known in printing circles today if he believed it was pointless to know history. Bradley understands printing history and loves old books, and this knowledge and passion come through in his work. The printer who succeeds is the one who views all knowledge as valuable and has a solid reason for everything he does.

PART TWO

EXAMPLE 16

Layout sketched with colored crayons for a catalog cover

EXAMPLE 16

Layout drawn with colored crayons for a catalog cover

EXAMPLE 17

The cover printed as indicated by layout sketch

EXAMPLE 17

The cover printed as shown in the layout sketch.

35

THE “LAYOUT” MAN

How does the work of the typographer of the twentieth century compare with productions of the past? In the belief of some the good typographer, like the good Indian, is dead. The truth is that much of the printing done during the first four hundred years was not well done. While the same proportionate result still prevails, the ancient did not have the excuse of the modern—lack of time; nor has the modern the excuse of the ancient—lack of facilities. However, while poor work in any century or any industry is explainable, it is not excusable.

How does the work of the twentieth-century typographer compare to past productions? Some believe that the skilled typographer, like the noble Indian, is a thing of the past. The reality is that much of the printing produced in the first four hundred years was poorly executed. While the same level of quality still exists today, the earlier typographers didn’t have the modern excuse of lack of time; nor do today’s typographers have the ancient excuse of lacking resources. However, while poor work in any century or industry can be explained, it can't be justified.

EXAMPLE 1

Booklet cover page laid out with pencil and crayon on gray stock

EXAMPLE 1

Booklet cover page designed with pencil and crayon on gray cardstock

Someone said, “The man who attained his ambition did not aim high enough.” Perfection is not attainable, but it should be the goal in our race. Many typographers are doing good work, altho each is doing it differently. No one is producing perfect typography; but when perfection is the pacemaker no result can be commonplace.

Someone said, “The man who achieved his ambition didn’t aim high enough.” Perfection isn’t attainable, but it should be our goal in this pursuit. Many typographers are doing great work, although each is going about it differently. No one is producing perfect typography; but when perfection is the benchmark, no outcome can be ordinary.

The good typographers of the past had the spirit of the master craftsman and their product was inspired. The modern printer to succeed needs only the inspiration that comes of study, hard work and love of his trade.

The great typographers of the past had the mindset of true artisans, and their work was truly inspired. Today, a successful printer only needs the motivation that comes from studying, putting in hard work, and having a passion for their craft.

Inspired work, however, is generally the result of preparation.

Inspired work, however, is usually the result of preparation.

Artists and advertising men realize the necessity of careful preparation for the process of printing, but typographers as a class evidently do not. If they did they would do even better work and make bigger profits possible. Every printshop should have a “layout” man.

Artists and ad executives understand the importance of thorough preparation for the printing process, but typographers, in general, do not seem to. If they did, they would produce even better work and increase their potential profits. Every print shop should have a "layout" person.

In spite of the fact that much good printing is done today, fully nine-tenths of the product is partially unsatisfactory because of lack of preparation. When a business man decides to erect an office building he does not immediately go to a building contractor and tell him to build it. He first consults an architectural engineer, examines drawings and exchanges opinions, and when the building contractor starts his work everything has been planned and specified.

In spite of the fact that a lot of good printing is done today, about ninety percent of the final product is still somewhat lacking due to insufficient preparation. When a businessperson decides to put up an office building, they don’t just go to a contractor and say to build it. They first consult with an architect, review designs, and share ideas, and by the time the contractor begins work, everything has been planned and detailed.

Should printing be done in a less thoro manner? Is not the making of a book, catalog or business card each proportionately as important and as well entitled to proper attention as the larger undertaking? Good typography cannot be produced if preparation is slighted.

Should printing be done in a less thorough manner? Isn’t creating a book, catalog, or business card just as important and deserving of proper attention as a larger project? Good typography can’t be achieved if preparation is ignored.

Quality printing is not accidental. Shops famed for the artistic excellence of their product have maintained their “shop style” despite changes in the force of workmen and executives, and this individuality, or “shop style,” as it is termed, has been obtained and retained only because the copy has been carefully prepared and the work has been intelligently laid out by some qualified person (artist, ad-writer or typographer) who understands shop preferences in the matter of style. It is the “institutional idea.”

Quality printing doesn't happen by chance. Shops known for the artistic excellence of their products have kept their unique “shop style” even with changes in their workforce and leadership. This individuality, or “shop style,” has been achieved and preserved only because the copy has been meticulously prepared and the work has been thoughtfully organized by someone skilled (like an artist, ad writer, or typographer) who understands the shop's style preferences. It's the “institutional idea.”

In printshops extensive enough to allow of the expense, one or more layout men should be employed, and in the smaller concerns the head job compositor or foreman could do the work. Solicitors, when artistically fitted, could in special cases lay out their own jobs of printing, as personal contact with the customer peculiarly fits them to do it satisfactorily. The important thing, anyway, is to please the customer. While the art side of the practice of typography is important, it is not all important. Typography is also a business.

In print shops big enough to afford it, one or more layout designers should be hired, while in smaller operations, the chief compositor or foreman can handle the layout. In certain cases, lawyers with artistic skills could design their own print jobs since their direct interaction with clients makes them especially capable of delivering satisfactory results. The key focus, ultimately, is to satisfy the customer. While the artistic aspect of typography is significant, it’s not the only factor. Typography is also a business.

If the customer’s tastes and prejudices were ascertained beforehand, many of the changes now made after jobs are in type, frequently causing inharmonious arrangements, could be avoided. The average printer rarely parallels the experiences of a few fortunate printing concerns which, 36when receiving an order for a booklet or catalog, are told the amount of the appropriation and given carte blanche.

If the customer's preferences and biases were identified beforehand, many of the adjustments that are now made to the typeset after completing jobs, often resulting in mismatched layouts, could be avoided. The typical printer seldom matches the experiences of a few lucky printing companies that, 36 when receiving an order for a booklet or catalog, are informed of the budget and given blank check.

EXAMPLE 3                                                   EXAMPLE 2

Anticipating the appearance of the printed page by utilizing old booklets or preparing specimen sheets of text matter which are cut to proper size and pasted in position. The headings are roughly sketched with pencil

EXAMPLE 3                                                   EXAMPLE 2

Expecting the printed page to show up by using old booklets or creating sample sheets of text that are cut to the right size and glued in place. The headings are roughly drawn with a pencil.

Orders for much of the better class of work are obtained thru “dummies” submitted by printers or solicitors. The customer advises a certain number of such persons that he is in the market for a booklet and would like to receive suggestions. Each competitor prepares a “dummy” on the stock and in the binding intended for the completed booklet. The cover design is roughly sketched or otherwise indicated and the inside pages prepared to represent the finished job.

Orders for a lot of the higher-quality work are secured through "dummies" submitted by printers or agents. The customer informs a number of these individuals that they’re looking for a booklet and would like to get some ideas. Each competitor creates a "dummy" using the paper and binding meant for the finished booklet. The cover design is roughly sketched or otherwise shown, and the interior pages are set up to resemble the final product.

Let us imagine ourselves in a printshop of medium size, which cannot afford the regular services of an artist. From the composing-room force take the most artistic and practical job compositor and install him at a desk. If there is not sufficient desk work to occupy his full time, arrange with him to fill in spare time at the case. In selecting a man for the position it should be remembered that few typographers have qualifications combining artistic perception and thoro workmanship. It is in a great measure true that a nervous, artistic temperament unfits a typographer for thoro, finished work at the case or stone, while on the contrary, a calm, precise, methodical disposition is often accompanied by lack of imagination. 37Each workman should have opportunity to do that which he can do best. He of the artistic temperament should lay out the jobs, and he of the mechanical turn of mind should construct them.

Let's picture ourselves in a mid-sized print shop that can't afford a full-time artist. Take the most talented and practical job compositor from the team and set him up at a desk. If there's not enough desk work to keep him busy all the time, arrange for him to fill in his free moments at the case. When choosing someone for this position, keep in mind that few typographers have the mix of artistic insight and thorough workmanship. It's often true that a nervous, artistic personality isn't suited for meticulous, detailed work at the case or stone, while a calm, precise, methodical temperament may lack imagination. 37 Every worker should have the chance to do what they do best. The artistic person should handle the job layouts, while the mechanically inclined individual should take care of the construction.

EXAMPLE 5

EXAMPLE 5

EXAMPLE 6

Ascertaining color combination by means of crayons. The colder color should predominate

EXAMPLE 6

Determining color combinations using crayons. The cooler color should be dominant.

EXAMPLE 4-a

After pasting in illustration and counting the lines for machine composition. Reduced from the original

EXAMPLE 4-a

After inserting the illustration and counting the lines for machine formatting. Reduced from the original

The proprietor or other person in authority should discuss with the layout man the subject of shop style in typographical arrangement. The matter of type equipment should also be gone over, as nothing hinders the layout man so much as to be compelled to use type-faces selected by another having ideas widely different. It is important that the type equipment be appropriate and sufficient for the class of work done. An equipment of a half dozen harmonizing faces of type is far better than one of two dozen ill-assorted faces. Good typography is to a large extent dependent upon the type-faces used.

The owner or anyone in charge should talk with the layout designer about the shop's style and how to arrange the text. They should also discuss the type equipment because nothing frustrates the layout designer more than having to use typefaces chosen by someone else who has a completely different vision. It's crucial that the type equipment is suitable and enough for the type of work being done. Having a set of six matching typefaces is much better than having twenty-four mismatched ones. Good typography largely relies on the typefaces used.

EXAMPLE 4-b

Instructions to operator

EXAMPLE 4-b

Operator instructions

The layout man should make a study of the personality and tastes of a customer. He should meet all such that come into the office, and arrange to call once upon each of the regular customers. He must keep in close touch with conditions in the composing-room, so that in the discharge of his duties he does not call for type-faces already set out of the cases, or not a part of the equipment.

The layout designer should study the personality and preferences of a customer. They should meet everyone who comes into the office and arrange to visit each of the regular customers at least once. It’s important to stay closely connected with what’s happening in the composing room, so that while carrying out their duties, they don’t request typefaces that are already set or not part of the available equipment.

The mechanic and the artist, to do satisfactory work, must have a certain working outfit. The layout man is no exception; while he could perhaps manage with only a lead pencil and foot rule, it would be foolish to do so. His work will be expedited if he has an assortment of good crayons; hard, medium and soft lead pencils; a pair of shears, a T-square, a gelatine triangle, a type-line gage, a table for giving the number of words to an inch in the various size type bodies; and a library of books and periodicals on printing, especially of those showing examples of type designs. To provide him also with a set of water colors, a jar of Chinese white, a bottle of gold paint, a bottle of india ink and several brushes would not be extravagance.

The mechanic and the artist, to produce quality work, need a specific set of tools. The layout designer is no different; while he might get by with just a pencil and ruler, that would be unwise. His work will go faster if he has a variety of good crayons; hard, medium, and soft lead pencils; a pair of scissors, a T-square, a drafting triangle, a type-line gauge, a chart showing the number of words per inch for various font sizes; and a collection of books and magazines on printing, especially those with examples of type designs. It wouldn’t be unreasonable to also equip him with a set of watercolors, a jar of Chinese white, a bottle of gold paint, a bottle of India ink, and several brushes.

It would be economical and wise if several sample sheets of each kind of stock were kept near his desk in a portfolio or convenient drawer. Book papers could be cut in quarters, cover papers in halves, and cardboard in various convenient sizes, all ready to be used at an instant’s notice. Several each of ruled headings, cut cards and other standard goods should also be included. In laying out jobs, especially large runs, he should make them of such size as will cut from the sheet with little or no waste. If an order is to be rushed, he should ascertain if the stock may be had without delay.

It would be cost-effective and smart to keep several sample sheets of each type of stock close to his desk in a portfolio or an easy-to-reach drawer. Book papers could be cut into quarters, cover papers in halves, and cardboard in various convenient sizes, all set to be used at a moment's notice. Several each of ruled headings, cut cards, and other standard items should also be included. When planning jobs, especially large batches, he should size them so they can be cut from the sheet with minimal waste. If an order needs to be rushed, he should check if the stock is available without any delays.

WORDS TO THE SQUARE INCH
 
Font SizesSOLID
SQUARE INCHES 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 POINT 8 POINT 9 POINT 10 POINT 11 POINT 12 POINT
1 69 47 38 32 28 21 17 14
2 138 94 76 64 56 42 34 28
4 276 188 152 128 112 84 68 56
6 414 282 228 192 168 126 102 84
8 552 376 304 256 224 168 136 112
10 690 470 380 320 280 210 170 140
12 828 564 456 384 336 252 204 168
14 966 658 532 448 392 294 238 196
16 1104 752 608 512 448 336 272 224
18 1242 846 684 576 504 378 306 252
20 1380 940 760 640 560 420 340 280
22 1518 1034 836 704 616 462 374 308
24 1656 1128 912 768 672 504 408 336
26 1794 1222 988 832 728 546 442 364
28 1932 1346 1064 896 784 588 476 392
30 2070 1410 1140 960 840 630 510 420
32 2208 1504 1216 1024 896 672 544 448
34 2346 1598 1292 1088 952 714 578 476
36 2484 1692 1368 1152 1008 756 612 504
 
Font SizesLEADED with 2-point leas
SQUARE INCHES 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 POINT 8 POINT 9 POINT 10 POINT 11 POINT 12 POINT
1 50 34 27 23 21 16 14 11
2 100 68 54 46 42 32 28 22
4 200 136 108 92 84 64 56 44
6 300 204 162 138 126 96 84 66
8 400 272 216 184 168 128 112 88
10 500 340 270 230 210 160 140 110
12 600 408 324 276 252 192 168 132
14 700 476 378 322 294 224 196 154
16 800 544 432 368 336 256 224 176
18 900 612 486 414 378 288 252 198
20 1000 680 540 460 420 320 280 220
22 1100 748 594 506 462 352 308 242
24 1200 816 648 552 504 384 336 264
26 1300 884 702 598 546 416 364 286
28 1400 952 756 644 588 448 392 308
30 1500 1020 810 690 630 480 420 330
32 1600 1088 864 736 672 512 448 352
34 1700 1156 918 782 714 544 476 374
36 1800 1224 972 828 756 576 504 396
 
EXAMPLE 7
 
Table for ascertaining the number of words to square inches. Use of this table in laying out booklets and catalogs will not only save time but will minimize the chance of a miscalculation
38

EXAMPLE 8

Notehead as set without instructions from layout man The three specimens on this page lack relation in design

EXAMPLE 8

Notehead set without guidance from the layout designer. The three samples on this page have no connection in their design.

For an example of the workings of the layout system we will suppose that the principal of a local business college has brought in typewritten copy of about a thousand words to be made into a small booklet. A little questioning brings out the information that the customer desires something attractive, refined, and of good quality. He does not want a cheap job, and neither has he money to spend upon expensive de luxe booklets.

For an example of how the layout system works, let's say that the principal of a local business college has submitted a typewritten document of about a thousand words to be turned into a small booklet. After asking a few questions, we find out that the client wants something appealing, classy, and high-quality. He doesn’t want a low-budget product, but he also doesn't have the funds for pricey deluxe booklets.

The layout man looks over his sample papers and finds that there is on hand a ten-cent white antique paper 25 × 38 inches in size. Taking a quarter sheet he folds it repeatedly until the leaf appears to be about the proper size. Measuring it he finds it to be 4¾ × 6¼ inches. The leaf is then trimmed to 4⅜ × 5⅞ inches (thus allowance should always be made for trimming the edges after binding).

The layout guy checks his sample papers and sees he has a ten-cent white antique paper that measures 25 × 38 inches. He takes a quarter sheet and folds it multiple times until it looks like the right size. After measuring, he finds it to be 4¾ × 6¼ inches. Then, he trims the leaf to 4⅜ × 5⅞ inches (so it's important to always account for trimming the edges after binding).

For the cover the layout man selects from his samples a medium gray antique stock of good quality. The cover stock should harmonize in finish with the paper on the inside. In this instance an antique finished stock is selected to cover the antique finished paper on the inside. Many are the booklets that would have been improved by attention to this rule of harmony. However, a rough finished cover stock and a smooth inside paper is not as inartistic a combination as a smooth cover stock and a rough inside paper.

For the cover, the designer chooses from his samples a medium gray antique paper of good quality. The cover paper should match the finish of the paper inside. In this case, an antique-finished paper is chosen to go with the antique-finished paper used inside. Many booklets would have been better if this rule of harmony had been followed. However, a rough-finished cover paper and a smooth inside paper isn’t as unartistic a pair as a smooth cover paper and a rough inside paper.

The cover stock selected in this instance is 20 × 25 inches in size, and an eighth of this sheet folded once gives a leaf 5 × 6¼ inches. Deciding to have the cover lap three-sixteenths of an inch over the edges of the inside leaves, it is trimmed to 4916 × 6¼ inches.

The cover stock chosen here measures 20 × 25 inches, and when you fold one-eighth of this sheet, it creates a page of 5 × 6¼ inches. Since the cover will overlap the edges of the inside pages by three-sixteenths of an inch, it is trimmed to 4916 × 6¼ inches.

EXAMPLE 10

Label as set without instructions

EXAMPLE 10

Label as set without instructions

On one of the inside leaves a page is penciled off, the layout man judging how much of the paper should be covered by print. For cheap work it is generally necessary to crowd the matter into the least possible number of pages, and in such case narrow margins are allowed. For the better quality of work, liberal margins are necessary to proper results. A page should set toward the top and binding edges, the margins at these places being each about the same. The margin at the right edge should be a little more than at the top and back, and the margin at the bottom should be a little more than at the right edge. For the booklet now supposed to be in course of preparation, 2¾ × 4 inches has been determined as the proper size of the type-page. Each page thus requires eleven square inches of type-matter. The layout man refers to the table (Example 7) which gives the number of words to a square inch and ascertains that eleven square inches of ten-point type, the lines separated by two-point leads, should accommodate one hundred and seventy-six words. Multiplying this number by six, allowing two pages at the front of the booklet for the title, etc., he finds the booklet will take 1,056 words, about the number of words in the copy supplied.

On one of the inside pages, a section is marked off in pencil by the layout designer to determine how much of the page should be printed. For budget projects, it's usually necessary to fit the content into the smallest number of pages possible, so narrower margins are accepted. For higher-quality work, wider margins are essential for good results. A page should be aligned towards the top and the binding edges, with the margins in these areas being roughly the same. The margin on the right side should be slightly wider than the top and back margins, while the bottom margin should be a bit wider than the right side. For the booklet that is currently being prepared, a size of 2¾ × 4 inches has been decided for the type area. Each page thus needs eleven square inches of text. The layout designer looks at the table (Example 7) that shows the number of words per square inch and figures out that eleven square inches of ten-point type, with lines separated by two-point leads, can hold one hundred and seventy-six words. Multiplying this by six, while allowing for two pages at the front of the booklet for the title and such, he calculates the booklet will need 1,056 words, which is about the word count of the provided copy.

EXAMPLE 9

Business card as set without instructions

EXAMPLE 9

Business card set without instructions

For a booklet of this kind the type should be no smaller than ten-point. Instead of stinting margins and sacrificing legibility, as is often done in endeavoring to force copy into a limited number of pages, additional leaves should be added.

For a booklet like this, the font size should be at least ten-point. Instead of cutting down on margins and compromising readability, which is often done in an effort to fit content into a limited number of pages, extra pages should be added.

The cover and inside papers having been prepared in the proper size and number of leaves, the dummy is stitched with wire or sewed with silk floss as may be desired. The arrangements of the title-page, the first text-page and a page entirely text matter are indicated in proper position by means of pencil and crayon; or for booklets of a large number of pages it is well to set the first text-page in type and paste a proof of it in the dummy, getting by this means the customer’s approval of both type-face and general effect.

The cover and inside pages have been prepared to the correct size and number of sheets, and the dummy is stitched with wire or sewn with silk thread as preferred. The layout of the title page, the first text page, and a completely text-only page are marked in the right spots with pencil and crayon; or for booklets with lots of pages, it's a good idea to set the first text page in type and paste a proof of it into the dummy, ensuring the customer's approval of both the typeface and overall look.

The appearance of the printed page may be anticipated by pasting in position a type-page cut from another booklet already printed. (Examples 2 and 3.) In a shop where much booklet work is done, it would be a convenience to the layout man if a number of specimen pages, set in the available body type (both solid and leaded), were printed for use in preparing dummies. These specimen pages should be about 5½ × 7 inches, a size that would make them usable for most purposes.

The look of the printed page can be anticipated by pasting a type-page cut from another already printed booklet into place. (Examples 2 and 3.) In a shop where a lot of booklet work is done, it would be helpful for the layout designer if several sample pages, set in the available body type (both solid and leaded), were printed for use in creating dummies. These sample pages should be around 5½ × 7 inches, a size that would make them suitable for most needs.

The cover arrangement was sketched on the gray stock 39(Example 1), the border being represented by the gray lines of a hard lead pencil. The type line was indicated by means of a soft black lead pencil and an orange crayon. Ornaments are not specified because they are better omitted on booklets where dignity is the principal feature.

The cover design was drawn on the gray paper 39(Example 1), with the border shown by gray lines from a hard pencil. The text line was marked using a soft black pencil and an orange crayon. Decorations aren’t included because it’s best to keep them off booklets where dignity is the main focus.

The dummy booklet thus completed is submitted to the customer and when approved goes to the workrooms with the copy. The compositor, make-up man, stockman, pressman and binder have no excuse for any misunderstanding, as, generally speaking, they have merely to duplicate the dummy. The labor of the estimate man, too, is lessened, as the dummy booklet affords a substantial basis upon which to figure the cost.

The dummy booklet is now complete and sent to the customer for approval. Once approved, it goes to the workrooms along with the copy. The compositor, make-up artist, stockman, press operator, and binder have no reason for misunderstanding, since they mostly just need to replicate the dummy. The workload for the estimator is also reduced because the dummy booklet provides a solid foundation for calculating costs.

The plan of making a dummy booklet, just explained, can be adapted to many jobs, but of course it should be varied to suit special requirements.

The idea of creating a mock booklet, as described, can be adjusted for various projects, but it should definitely be modified to meet specific needs.

EXAMPLE 12

Business card as laid out

EXAMPLE 12

Business card as planned

In cases of periodicals and voluminous catalogs, dummy sheets should be printed with the outlines of the page indicated by light-faced rule. With such sheets the layout man is enabled quickly to paste in position prints of the illustrations and text matter from the galley proofs. Getting his instructions in such methodical manner the make-up man can do his work without confusion of orders, and the proofreader’s task is made easy.

In cases of magazines and large catalogs, sample pages should be printed with the layout indicated by light lines. With these sheets, the layout designer can quickly place the illustrations and text from the draft proofs in the right spots. By receiving instructions in this organized way, the makeup artist can work without mixing up the orders, making it easier for the proofreader as well.

When illustrations are provided to be incorporated in the text matter there is more or less trouble in making up the pages. To center all illustrations so as to avoid changing the width of the type lines is easy but not always artistic. It is economical to have plates made the full width of type matter, but the printer is seldom consulted until after the plates are made. However, various sizes of illustrations may be attractively grouped on facing pages and the type-matter filled in around them. This method may appear difficult because the text matter is often composed on machines; but it is not difficult if prepared in this manner: Take the prepared body-type sheets, cut them to the required page size, paste them to the dummy sheets, and upon the pages of text matter thus presented fasten the prints of the illustrations in proper positions. The body-type sheets need not be used on pages for which there are no illustrations; in such instances merely the number of lines to a page is ascertained. Example 4-a demonstrates how the print of the illustration is placed over the body-type page, and the “step” shape of the pencil lines shows how the boundaries of the type lines are made to fit the outline of the illustration. The length of type lines should always be ascertained with the pica (twelve points) as the unit of measurement.

When illustrations are included in the text, it can be somewhat tricky to layout the pages. Centering all illustrations to prevent changing the width of the type lines is easy, but it’s not always the most artistic approach. While it’s cost-effective to have plates made to the full width of the text, the printer is usually not consulted until after the plates are made. However, different sizes of illustrations can be attractively arranged on facing pages with the text filled in around them. This method might seem challenging since the text is often composed on machines, but it’s not difficult if prepared in this way: Take the prepared body-type sheets, cut them to the required page size, glue them to the dummy sheets, and then attach the prints of the illustrations in their proper positions on the text pages. The body-type sheets don’t need to be used on pages without illustrations; for those pages, you only need to determine the number of lines per page. Example 4-a shows how the print of the illustration is placed over the body-type page, and the “step” shape of the pencil lines indicates how the boundaries of the type lines fit the outline of the illustration. The length of the type lines should always be measured using pica (twelve points) as the unit.

EXAMPLE 11

Notehead as laid out for compositor. The three specimens on this page are related in design

EXAMPLE 11

Notehead arranged for the typesetter. The three samples on this page share a similar design.

Supposing Examples 2, 3 and 4 to be dummies of pages, the composition of which is to be done on the linotype or monotype machine, the layout man with his pica measure starts at the initial letter T and measures and counts the lines, noting the results in the margins. (See Example 4-a. The page as shown is slightly reduced, hence the lines do not measure as set forth.) The figures are copied from the margins onto a slip and will then appear as shown in Example 4-b.

Suppose Examples 2, 3, and 4 are templates of pages that will be created using a linotype or monotype machine. The layout designer, using a pica measure, starts at the first letter T, measuring and counting the lines, and takes note of the results in the margins. (See Example 4-a. The page shown is slightly reduced, so the lines do not measure as indicated.) The numbers are copied from the margins onto a slip and will then appear as shown in Example 4-b.

This plan emphasizes the necessity of a layout man as a member of the executive staff in the modern printshop. It may be a simple procedure to reset run-around matter at the moment it is needed by the make-up man, but it is an expensive habit.

This plan highlights the importance of having a layout designer as part of the executive team in today's print shop. While it might seem straightforward to rearrange text when the makeup artist needs it, it's actually a costly habit.


EXAMPLE 13

Label as laid out

Label as specified

The average stationery job is sometimes given scant attention in the larger printshops where long runs on cylinder presses overshadow it in importance. This condition leads to unsatisfactory results and the customer is the sufferer; his stationery as a whole is likely to be not only inartistic but a patchwork of typographic styles and arrangements. To illustrate this: A dealer in artists’ materials orders at various times letterheads, business cards and package labels, and the copy is sent to the workrooms with no instructions about style. Assuming that a different compositor gets each order, the jobs are composed as shown in Examples 8, 9 and 10. These specimens 40are above the average in arrangement, but are faulty in that they have no relation to each other in appearance; have nothing distinctive in their typography that identifies the business card with the letterhead or the label.

The typical stationery job often gets overlooked in larger print shops where long runs on cylinder presses take priority. This situation results in poor outcomes, leaving the customer dissatisfied; their stationery tends to be not just unappealing but also a mix of different type styles and layouts. For example, a supplier of art materials orders letterheads, business cards, and package labels at different times, sending the copy to the production team without any style guidelines. If each order is handled by a different compositor, the jobs turn out like those shown in Examples 8, 9, and 10. These samples 40 have an above-average arrangement, but they lack a cohesive look; there's nothing unique in their typography to connect the business card with the letterhead or the label.

EXAMPLE 14

Layout of a cover-page, with instructions in detail as to material to be used. Reduced from original

EXAMPLE 14

Design of a cover page, with detailed instructions on the materials to be used. Reduced from original

EXAMPLE 15

Cover-page as set from the instructions. Reduced from original

EXAMPLE 15

Cover page formatted as per the instructions. Shrunk from the original

How different the results had an artistic layout man prepared each order before it was given to the compositor. Examples 11, 12 and 13, roughly sketched with pencil and crayon, demonstrate what could have been done. With stationery thus harmoniously treated a business house would be given credit for individuality and progressiveness.

How different the results were when an artistic layout designer prepared each order before it was sent to the typesetter. Examples 11, 12, and 13, roughly sketched with pencil and crayon, show what could have been achieved. With stationery treated in this harmonious way, a business would gain recognition for its individuality and forward-thinking approach.

In a printshop doing a good class of work (every printshop should endeavor to do that) the layout man ought to make a study of color harmony. Not that it is necessary for him to attend an art school or devote most of his time and attention to experimenting with prisms and light rays; charts and tables which help to solve the color problem are easily obtainable. After a little study and practice he will learn that while red, yellow and blue (the primary colors) harmonize with each other, mixtures of two or all three give shades that are more pleasing. Olive-green (an art shade) substituted for blue, in combination with orange, produces an artistic blend in place of the gaudiness which otherwise would prevail. This because olive-green is a mixture of blue and orange; a relationship in color composition is established and contrast lessened.

In a print shop that does high-quality work (every print shop should aim for that), the layout designer should study color harmony. It's not necessary for them to attend art school or spend all their time experimenting with prisms and light rays; there are plenty of charts and tables available that make solving color issues easier. With a bit of study and practice, they'll discover that while red, yellow, and blue (the primary colors) work well together, mixing two or all three creates shades that are more visually appealing. Replacing blue with olive-green (an artistic shade) combined with orange creates a sophisticated blend instead of the overwhelming brightness that might otherwise dominate. This works because olive-green is a mix of blue and orange, establishing a relationship in color composition and reducing contrast.

A black page increases in interest with the addition of a touch of red, and for this purpose vermilion is recommended. The vermilion shade of red is approximated by mixing white with orange-red.

A black page becomes more interesting with a splash of red, and for this, vermilion is suggested. The vermilion shade of red can be created by mixing white with orange-red.

The colored crayons with which the layout man should be supplied are exceedingly useful in determining color combinations. The eye is a reliable guide in this matter, if it is carefully trained to recognize color harmonies. It should be easy to distinguish the right from the wrong color treatment in Examples 5 and 6. The colder color should always predominate; backgrounds of bright red and bright yellow are difficult to harmonize with any color of ink excepting black.

The colored crayons that the layout artist should use are really helpful for figuring out color combinations. The eye is a trustworthy guide in this, as long as it’s trained to identify color harmonies. It should be straightforward to tell the right color treatment from the wrong one in Examples 5 and 6. The cooler color should always dominate; backgrounds of bright red and bright yellow are tough to harmonize with any ink color except black.

From the insert (Examples 16 and 17) will be seen how a color combination may be roughly sketched on the actual stock to be used and the finished result indicated without setting a line of type or inking a roller.

From the insert (Examples 16 and 17) you can see how a color combination can be roughly sketched on the actual stock that will be used, and the final result shown without having to set a line of type or roll on any ink.

When the page is set in type it is well to have the proofs in the colors and on the stock to be used, but it is unnecessary to separate the design into several forms to do so. For a job such as Example 15, for instance, two proofs may be pulled, one in black and one in orange, and the initial cut out of the sheet printed in orange and pasted in position on the sheet printed in black. Another and a more satisfactory way is to ink the entire page with black, then clean the black from the initials, and ink them with orange by means of a finger. It may be relevant to suggest that the human skin is ideal for inking purposes, and that a printer’s composition roller is an imitation of its qualities.

When the page is set in type, it’s best to get proofs in the colors and on the paper that will be used, but there's no need to separate the design into different forms to do so. For a job like Example 15, for instance, you could pull two proofs: one in black and one in orange. Then, cut out the initial section printed in orange and paste it onto the sheet printed in black. A more effective method is to ink the entire page in black, then clean the black off the initials and ink them with orange using your finger. It’s worth mentioning that human skin is great for inking, and a printer’s composition roller mimics its qualities.

The layout man, in addition to the study of ink harmony, should learn to blend colors and tints of paper stock. He should know that a buff or cream inside paper reflects the color of a yellow-brown cover stock, and hence makes a prettier combination than white inside paper and brown cover stock. Another important point is the color blending of a tipped-on illustration and the stock acting as a background. The prevailing shade in a color illustration should be matched by the background or by a surrounding border, or by both.

The layout designer, along with understanding ink harmony, should learn how to mix colors and paper tints. They should be aware that using a buff or cream-colored interior paper enhances the look of a yellow-brown cover stock, creating a more attractive combination than using white interior paper with brown cover stock. Another key consideration is how a tipped-on illustration blends with the background paper. The dominant color in a color illustration should be coordinated with the background or a surrounding border, or both.

When laying out advertisements or other display pages the size of the type-face should be written in the margin (Example 14). Practice will enable the layout man intuitively to approximate the size needed.

When creating ads or other display pages, the font size should be noted in the margin (Example 14). With practice, the designer will instinctively get a sense of the size required.

EXAMPLE 20

An architectural subject appropriately treated

A well-designed architecture topic

41

HARMONY AND APPROPRIATENESS

In music there is that which the Germans call “Leit-motif”—the guiding theme in the construction or interpretation of musical compositions. The “Leit-motif” finds a parallel in the central idea or motive governing the composition of a building, a painting, a book or a job of printing. If Gothic is selected as the style of architecture for a building, every detail from the arches to the smallest bit of ornamentation is kept in harmony with the central idea of construction. If the building is to be Colonial, every detail is made appropriate to the Colonial motive.

In music, there's something the Germans refer to as “Leit-motif”—the main theme that guides the creation or interpretation of musical pieces. The “Leit-motif” can be compared to the central idea or theme that directs the design of a building, a painting, a book, or a printing job. If Gothic is chosen as the architectural style for a building, every aspect, from the arches to the tiniest decorative element, is aligned with the main idea of the design. If the building is intended to be Colonial, every detail is designed to fit the Colonial theme.

EXAMPLE 18

To obtain Harmony it is frequently necessary to use but one series of type, and either all capitals or all lower-case

EXAMPLE 18

To achieve Harmony, it’s often necessary to use just one typeface, and either all uppercase or all lowercase letters.

The person is legion who undervalues the importance of harmony and appropriateness. Houses are furnished without regard to a general plan and furniture is added because it strikes the fancy at the moment of purchase. A Morris chair in dull-finished wood, a Louis XV table with dainty curves and gilt luster, and a mahogany or ebony piano case are gathered in motley discord on an oriental rug. And when this same person has printing done, or does it himself, there is again revealed an utter disregard for the things that make for harmony.

Many people underestimate the importance of harmony and suitability. Homes are decorated without considering a cohesive design, and furniture is added simply because it seems appealing at the time of purchase. A Morris chair in matte wood, a Louis XV table with delicate curves and gold accents, and a mahogany or ebony piano are all haphazardly placed together on an Oriental rug. And when the same person gets printed materials done, or does it themselves, it shows a complete disregard for the elements that create harmony.

What is appropriate? There are times when it is difficult to give an unprejudiced answer, especially when an idealistic art interpretation of the appropriate is combatted by the homely reasoning of a tiller of the soil. As a finishing touch to the classic architecture of the agricultural building at Washington the words Fructus, Cereales, Forestes and Flores were carved in suitable places on the structure. The secretary of agriculture noticed the Latin words and forthwith ordered the architect to have them recarved in the English—Fruits, Grains, Woods and Flowers. Now there are those who say the words as modified suggest a sign on a country store. The architect probably reasons that the words as originally carved were purely decorative, and in their English form are not only unnecessary but are about as poetic as a page of stock quotations in a newspaper or a package of little pig sausages.

What is appropriate? There are times when it’s hard to give an unbiased answer, especially when an idealistic view of what’s appropriate clashes with the practical reasoning of a farmer. As a finishing touch to the classic design of the agricultural building in Washington, the words Fructus, Cereales, Forestes, and Flores were carved in fitting places on the structure. The secretary of agriculture noticed the Latin words and immediately ordered the architect to have them recarved in English—Fruits, Grains, Woods, and Flowers. Some people say that the modified words make it sound like a sign at a country store. The architect probably believes that the original words were purely decorative, and in their English form are not only unnecessary but are about as poetic as a page of stock quotes in a newspaper or a package of little pig sausages.

It requires a discriminating judgment to distinguish between the appropriate and inappropriate. The plain people of one of the new sections of New York City were astounded recently to find the street signs bearing such names as Socrates, Horatius, Poseidon, Aphrodite, Pericles and Seleucus. Names such as Wall Street, Broadway, Bowery and Fifth Avenue are unobjectionable, but Seleucus Street and Pericles Street—!

It takes careful judgment to tell the difference between what’s suitable and what’s not. The everyday folks in one of the new areas of New York City were shocked recently to see street signs with names like Socrates, Horatius, Poseidon, Aphrodite, Pericles, and Seleucus. Names like Wall Street, Broadway, Bowery, and Fifth Avenue are fine, but Seleucus Street and Pericles Street—!

Typographers frequently go wrong in the use of the old Roman V. The V as part of the words PVBLIC LIBRARY on a stone building excites no comment; it seems appropriate and in good taste; but as part of the words PVRE MILK on a grocer’s letterhead it tempts the risibility in our natures. After all, good judgment is one of the most valuable assets a man can possess.

Typographers often make mistakes with the old Roman V. The V in the words PVBLIC LIBRARY on a stone building doesn’t raise any eyebrows; it feels appropriate and tasteful. But when it appears in the phrase PVRE MILK on a grocer’s letterhead, it invites laughter. After all, good judgment is one of the most valuable traits a person can have.


Harmonious and appropriate results in printing are brought about by discreet selection and use of these three elements: type, ink, paper. It is one thing to ink the type and pull an impression on paper, and it is another thing to do it properly. It makes a difference what type is used, what ink is used, and what paper is used. There are hundreds of type-faces, many colors and qualities of inks, and a variety of finishes and qualities of papers.

Harmonious and appropriate results in printing come from carefully selecting and using these three elements: type, ink, and paper. Inking the type and making an impression on paper is one thing, but doing it properly is another. The type, ink, and paper you choose really matter. There are hundreds of typefaces, many colors and qualities of inks, and a variety of finishes and grades of papers.

As to type-faces: Printers of law briefs and legal blanks need the formal, legible modern romans. Printers making a specialty of commercial stationery, wedding invitations and calling cards need scripts and engravers’ romans. Printers whose chief product is high-class announcements and booklets cannot do without old-style romans, italics and text faces. When everything in printing from the diminutive calling card to the massive 42catalog is solicited many styles of type-faces are needed.

As for typefaces: Printers of legal documents and forms need formal, easy-to-read modern Roman fonts. Printers who specialize in commercial stationery, wedding invitations, and business cards require script and engraved Roman fonts. Printers whose main products are high-quality announcements and booklets can't do without old-style Romans, italics, and text faces. With everything in printing, from small business cards to large catalogs, a variety of typeface styles is necessary.

A

Harmony. The heavy line and the light line are found in the construction of both border and type-face.

A

Harmony. The bold line and the thin line are present in both the design of the border and the typeface.

B

Harmony. The black, pointed characteristic is a peculiarity of both type-face and border.

B

Harmony. The sharp, pointed feature is a distinctive trait of both the font and the border.

C

Harmony. Type-face is made of strokes of one width; border is composed of one line of similar width.

C

Harmony. The typeface consists of strokes that are all the same width; the border is made of a single line that matches this width.

D

Harmony. The two type faces are of the same design; one is stronger in tone.

D

Harmony. The two typefaces are the same design; one has a bolder tone.

E

Harmony. The two type faces are of similar design; one is slanted and slightly altered to obtain contrast.

E

Harmony. The two typefaces have a similar design; one is italicized and slightly modified to create contrast.

F

Near-harmony. Type faces are sufficiently similar in design to blend if contrasting sizes are used.

F

Almost harmony. Fonts are similar enough in design to work well together if different sizes are used.

G

Incongruous. Border has no characteristics that can be found in the italic type-face.

G

Inconsistent. The border lacks any features that are present in the italic typeface.

H

Incongruous. There is no relation in the style of these two type-faces; one has serifs, the other none.

H

Incongruous. There's no connection in the style of these two typefaces; one has serifs, while the other doesn’t.

I

Incongruous. Letters not related in design: one is condensed, the other extended.

EXAMPLE 19—Harmonious combinations, and combinations that are incongruous

I

Not fitting together. The letters don’t match in style: one is narrow, while the other is wide.

EXAMPLE 19—Matching combinations, and combinations that don’t fit together

EXAMPLE 21

A booklet cover, the coloring and typography of which is suggestive of the subject

EXAMPLE 21

A booklet cover, the colors and fonts of which hint at the subject

As to inks: There are inks ground in strong varnish for bond papers, inks ground in soft varnish for coated papers, and heavy opaque inks for dark cover papers, and it makes a deal of difference if they are not used appropriately. And then, in the matter of harmony of colors there is a subject for much study. The wise printer will use good black inks and enliven his jobs with mere touches of orange or vermilion. Black and orange are always pleasing in combination and look well on most papers. There are pitfalls in the use of numerous colors, and until the subject of color harmony is understood by the printer he will wisely adhere to black and orange.

As for inks: There are inks mixed with strong varnish for bond papers, inks mixed with soft varnish for coated papers, and heavy opaque inks for dark cover papers, and it really makes a big difference if they're not used correctly. Then, when it comes to color harmony, there’s a lot to learn. A smart printer will use good black inks and enhance their work with just a few touches of orange or vermilion. Black and orange always look good together and work well on most papers. There are challenges with using too many colors, and until the printer understands color harmony, it's best to stick with black and orange.

As to papers: Wove and laid antique papers, white and buff tinted, are appropriate for announcements and booklets in combination with old-style type-faces and black and orange inks. Dainty papers of linen finish in combination with delicate engravers’ type-faces, are appropriate for milliners, florists, jewelers and others catering to the esthetic tastes of women. Dull-finished coated papers are considered more artistic than highly enameled ones, and there are those who prefer it as being more restful to the eyes.

As for papers: Wove and laid antique papers, white and buff toned, are suitable for announcements and booklets when paired with classic typefaces and black and orange inks. Elegant linen-finish papers combined with fine engravers’ typefaces are perfect for milliners, florists, jewelers, and others appealing to women's aesthetic preferences. Dull-finished coated papers are seen as more artistic than glossy ones, and some people prefer them because they are easier on the eyes.

EXAMPLE 23

An old lock-plate

An old lock plate

It is a stupendous undertaking, in face of the multitudinous elements that are part of the production of printed work to point out a path that will lead to good typography. There are many printers doing good work and each of them has probably arrived at his point of attainment by a different route. There is no royal road to learning. The student may be assisted, but whether he succeeds depends to a great degree upon himself. He must have an open mind, good judgment, and a liking for simplicity.

It’s a huge task, considering all the various factors involved in producing printed work, to find a way to achieve good typography. Many printers are doing great work, and each of them probably got to where they are through a different journey. There’s no easy path to learning. The student can get help, but their success largely depends on themselves. They need to have an open mind, good judgment, and an appreciation for simplicity.

Simplicity is synonymous with good typography and its path is a straight and narrow one. He who would do worth-while typography must decide wisely when accepting the good things offered by his friends, the paper man, type man and ink man. They are generous in their offerings and willingly assist the doubting one in deciding; but confidence in his own judgment is a necessary qualification for the typographer who would attain success.

Simplicity is equivalent to good typography, and its approach is straightforward and focused. Anyone aiming to create meaningful typography needs to think carefully when accepting the valuable options provided by paper suppliers, type vendors, and ink distributors. They generously offer help and are eager to assist those uncertain about their choices; however, having confidence in one's own judgment is essential for a typographer who wants to succeed.

EXAMPLE 24

Inscription on a Roman arch

EXAMPLE 24

Inscription on a Roman arch

The ideal printshop is that one which contains only harmonious type-faces, ink colors and paper stock. This ideal condition being impossible except in a small shop, the best alternative is to have all type-faces as nearly harmonious as possible. It would be wise to build upon the body type as a foundation. Choose a body face that will be suitable for most purposes, and then select a series or family of display types that harmonize with it. If Caslon Old Style is chosen as the body letter, Caslon bold, Caslon italic and Caslon text will afford variety in display while retaining harmony. (Of course the large display sizes of the Caslon Old Style should be included.) The Cheltenham family probably provides the greatest variety of harmonizing faces. Scotch Roman is a dignified and legible letter, and supplemented by its italic and the larger display sizes is a satisfactory face for many purposes. Old Style Antique is a useful letter where a black tone is desired and is pleasing in its original form. There are many artistic letters now to be had that give the effect of hand-lettering, which are admirable for distinctive advertising literature.

The ideal print shop is one that only uses harmonious typefaces, ink colors, and paper stocks. Since this perfect scenario is only possible in a small shop, the best alternative is to choose typefaces that are as harmonious as possible. It's a good idea to base everything on the body type. Select a body type that works well for most purposes, and then pick a series or family of display types that match it. If you choose Caslon Old Style as the body letter, using Caslon bold, Caslon italic, and Caslon text will provide variety in display while keeping everything in harmony. (Of course, the larger display sizes of Caslon Old Style should also be included.) The Cheltenham family likely offers the greatest variety of harmonizing options. Scotch Roman is a dignified and readable typeface, and when combined with its italic and larger display sizes, it serves many purposes effectively. Old Style Antique is useful when a darker tone is needed and looks good in its original form. There are also many artistic typefaces available that replicate hand-lettering, which are great for creating distinctive advertising materials.

EXAMPLE 22

Type-design for catalog cover suggested by the old lock-plate

EXAMPLE 22

Type design for catalog cover inspired by the old lock plate

While harmony of type-faces is essential, yet a certain amount of contrast is desirable. At one time it was customary to alternate a line of capitals with one of lower-case. This arrangement gave contrast, but not harmony. The best results are obtained by the use of either all capitals or all lower-case. As explained in the chapter “When Books Were Written,” our alphabet in its original Roman form consisted of capital letters only. Lower-case letters, also known as minuscules, are the result of evolution, and in form differ materially from the capitals. Custom decrees that a capital letter be used to begin an important word otherwise in lower-case, but with this exception either kind is better used alone.

While it's important to have a consistent style, a bit of contrast is also good. In the past, it was common to alternate a line of capital letters with a line of lowercase letters. This created contrast, but it didn't have harmony. The best results come from using either all capital letters or all lowercase letters. As mentioned in the chapter "When Books Were Written," our alphabet in its original Roman form only had capital letters. Lowercase letters, also known as minuscules, evolved from this and look quite different from the capitals. It's generally accepted to start an important word with a capital letter when the rest is in lowercase, but aside from that exception, it's better to stick to one style or the other.


Example 19 illustrates harmonious combinations of type-faces and borders and also presents several incongruous features.

Example 19 shows how well different fonts and borders can work together while also highlighting some mismatched elements.

Section A is an all-capital scheme enclosed in a border of heavy and light rule. A border such as this owes its origin to the panels used by the Romans to surround inscriptions on stone, and as these inscriptions were in capital letters only, the appropriateness of the treatment is manifest. As the letter is also formed of heavy and light strokes the harmony is enhanced.

Section A features an all-caps design surrounded by a bold and light border. This type of border comes from the panels the Romans used to frame stone inscriptions, which were written only in capital letters, making this style fitting. Since the letters are also made up of bold and light strokes, the overall look is even more cohesive.

In section B there is harmony from both the historic 44and artistic viewpoints. The black text face, representing as it does the direct result of the evolution from capital letters, is appropriately used only in its lower-case form. The use together of text capitals is objected to on the ground of illegibility. This black text face (correctly called Gothic) is historically associated with ecclesiastical printing, and the border, consisting of pointed crosses of black tone, blends with the pointed black letters of the type-face.

In section B, there's a balance from both historical and artistic perspectives. The black typeface, which is a direct evolution from capital letters, is rightly used only in lowercase. The combination of capital letters is criticized for being hard to read. This black typeface (properly known as Gothic) has historical ties to church printing, and the border, made up of pointed black crosses, complements the pointed black letters of the typeface.

EXAMPLE 25

Cover-page for a catalog of books, using type imitations of woodcut initials and borders

EXAMPLE 25

Cover page for a book catalog, featuring type designs that mimic woodcut initials and borders

Section C shows a plain letter of modern cut known erroneously as gothic. Containing no serifs, it lacks a feature which has always been considered necessary to beauty in type-faces. As a harmonious border for this face there is nothing better than a plain rule of the width of the type strokes.

Section C shows a simple, modern letter style that’s mistakenly called gothic. It has no serifs, missing a characteristic that has always been seen as essential for beauty in typefaces. As a matching border for this style, there’s nothing better than a plain line that matches the width of the type strokes.

The next three panels demonstrate such harmony as may exist between type-faces of different series:

The next three panels show the kind of harmony that can exist between typefaces from different families:

D.—This panel shows Caslon bold in combination with Caslon roman, and demonstrates the close harmony existing between type-faces of the same family.

D.—This panel displays Caslon bold alongside Caslon roman, highlighting the strong harmony that exists between typefaces from the same family.

E.—Another demonstration of the harmony of the family types.

E.—Another example of how different family types work well together.

F.—Harmonious, to a certain extent.

F.—Somewhat harmonious.

The type and rule in the next panel do not harmonize for these reasons:

The type and layout in the next panel don't match for these reasons:

G.—The border is too black and square in form. Italic, because of the slant of its letters, looks better not surrounded by a border, but when one is used it should be light and contain some of the characteristics of the italic.

G.—The border is too dark and boxy. Italic, due to the slant of its letters, looks better without a border, but if one is used, it should be light and reflect some of the features of the italic style.

In all cases where ornamental borders are used more finished results are obtained if a rule separates the border from the type, as in Section B.

In all cases where decorative borders are used, more polished results are achieved if a line separates the border from the text, as in Section B.

The next two panels present the “horrible examples,” which are defective for these reasons:

The next two panels show the “horrible examples,” which are flawed for these reasons:

H.—The type-face of the upper group has nothing in common with that of the lower group. That of the upper group is a distinctive old-style roman, with serifs, and is set in lower-case, while that of the lower group is a plain black modern letter, without serifs, and is set in capitals. The main display should never be lighter in tone than the less important type matter.

H.—The typeface of the upper group is completely different from that of the lower group. The upper group's typeface is a unique old-style roman with serifs and is presented in lowercase, while the lower group's typeface is a simple modern sans-serif in all caps. The main display should never be lighter in tone than the less important text.

EXAMPLE 26

A plain page without ornament or decorative types, for a plain purpose

EXAMPLE 26

A simple page without embellishments or fancy fonts, for a straightforward purpose.

I fails to harmonize because the type-face of the lower group is slightly extended and the one of the upper group is condensed. The shape of the letters of a type-face should conform to the shape of the page, and so far as possible to the shape of the companion letter, when one is used. Condensed letters should be avoided except for pages that are long and narrow, and an extended letter should not be used except on a wide page.

I can’t find balance because the font of the lower group is slightly wider, while the font of the upper group is narrower. The shape of the letters in a font should match the shape of the page and, as much as possible, the shape of the accompanying letter when one is used. Narrow fonts should be avoided unless the page is long and narrow, and a wide font shouldn’t be used unless the page is wide.


There are more typographic sins committed thru violation of the laws of appropriateness than in any other way. In this regard it would not be difficult to make out cases against the best of typographers, whose sins are washed away by good work in other respects. As in architecture, where one part of a building bears relation to all other parts, so in typography there should be a motive that blends all elements in serving one well-defined purpose. The phrase “Is it appropriate?” prominently displayed above the type cabinets, over the presses, in the stock-room, and over the layout man’s desk, would help to keep in mind this important requirement.

There are more typographic mistakes made by breaking the rules of appropriateness than in any other way. In this regard, it wouldn’t be hard to find fault with even the best typographers, whose errors are overshadowed by their good work in other areas. Just like in architecture, where one part of a building relates to all other parts, typography should also have a purpose that ties all elements together in service of a clear objective. The question “Is it appropriate?” prominently displayed above the type cabinets, over the presses, in the stockroom, and above the layout designer’s desk would serve as a reminder of this important requirement.

An architectural motive was suggested by the copy for Example 20, and type-face and decorative border were selected that the motive should be emphasized. The architecture of the Romans was frequently embellished with inscriptions (see Example 24), and in modern architecture the panel of Roman lettering is a feature; the lettering is generally all capitals of the same size, of a style near that of the ancient lettering; and the panel 45is outlined with molding, plain or decorative. Serving a purpose equivalent to the architect’s panel molding, the type or rule border is a valuable addition to a page of type. A page of display type or a halftone not surrounded by a border is like an oil painting without a frame. The egg-and-dart border around Example 20 is historically associated with architecture. The type-face is a Roman capital letter designed by Fred. W. Goudy from an inscription found in the ancient Forum at Rome.

An architectural theme was suggested by the copy for Example 20, and the typeface and decorative border were chosen to highlight that theme. Roman architecture was often decorated with inscriptions (see Example 24), and in modern architecture, a panel of Roman lettering is a common feature. The lettering is typically all capitals of the same size and resembles the style of ancient lettering; the panel 45 is framed with molding, which can be plain or decorative. Similar to the architect's panel molding, a type or rule border is a valuable addition to a page of text. A page with display type or a halftone that lacks a border is like an oil painting without a frame. The egg-and-dart border around Example 20 is historically linked to architecture. The typeface is a Roman capital letter designed by Fred. W. Goudy, based on an inscription found in the ancient Forum in Rome.

EXAMPLE 27-a

Treatment appropriate for a church program, in style based upon old ecclesiastical manuscript books. (See specimen below.)

EXAMPLE 27-a

A treatment suitable for a church program, styled after traditional ecclesiastical manuscript books. (See sample below.)

EXAMPLE 27-b

Portion of a page of an old manuscript missal

EXAMPLE 27-b

Part of a page from an old manuscript missal

Bismarck was called the “Iron Chancellor” because of his great strength of character and unbending will. Strength instantly associates itself with the mention of iron or steel, hence the motive for the construction of Example 22. It may be interesting to know that the design of this page was further suggested by the old lock-plate (Example 23). A printer with imagination can absorb ideas from many sources. The lock-plate is not literally reproduced in type, but a few of its features, including the key-hole, were borrowed and conventionalized. An artist-designer does not copy his models closely; they serve the purpose of suggesting shape and treatment and his imagination does the rest.

Bismarck was nicknamed the "Iron Chancellor" because of his strong character and determination. Strength is often linked with iron or steel, which is why the design of Example 22 was created. It's interesting to note that the concept for this page was also inspired by the old lock-plate (Example 23). A creative printer can draw ideas from various sources. The lock-plate isn't exactly replicated in text, but some of its elements, like the keyhole, were adapted and stylized. An artist-designer doesn't copy their models exactly; they use them to inspire shape and design, letting their imagination take over.

EXAMPLE 28

Cover-page for a catalog of decorative materials, suggesting festive gatherings, music and waving flags

EXAMPLE 28

Cover page for a catalog of decorative supplies, evoking celebrations, music, and fluttering flags

For the cover of a small catalog listing rare books, a typographic motive is found in the woodcut borders and initials of the early printers. Example 25 shows what may be done with type-foundry material on such a cover. The border is of black tone and the type and initials are given the strength that harmonizes with it.

For the cover of a small catalog featuring rare books, a typographic design is inspired by the woodcut borders and initials of early printers. Example 25 demonstrates what can be achieved with type-foundry materials on such a cover. The border is in black, and the type and initials have a thickness that complements it.

Old books suggest discolored leather, dusty shelves and plain men, and it is an abrupt change to the subject of millinery, with its bright colored feathers, ribbons and delicate finery. The milliner ornaments his salesroom with vines and flowers and dainty colors, and the printer gets his typographic motive from such sources. Example 21 illustrates a booklet cover treated thus appropriately. The page size is unconventional, the coloring is dainty, and the type lines are neatly diminutive.

Old books evoke images of faded leather, dusty shelves, and plain men, so it's quite a shift when we talk about hats, with their bright feathers, ribbons, and delicate details. The hat maker decorates his shop with vines, flowers, and soft colors, and the printer draws inspiration for his designs from such sources. Example 21 shows a booklet cover that captures this beautifully. The page size is unique, the colors are soft, and the text is neatly small.

As a millinery store is unlike an office in which are maps and blue prints and legal documents, so typography for these two purposes should be unlike. Example 26 is a page severely plain and non-sentimental. The types are merely to tell something in a blunt manner. There is needed no touch of decoration or color to interest the reader, because those who read it would do so whatever the treatment. This is the only example in the present chapter in which the advertising element is unimportant. The page may be commonplace because it need not be anything else, altho it is well to do good work even here.

As a hat store is different from an office filled with maps, blueprints, and legal documents, typography for these two purposes should also be different. Example 26 is a page that is very plain and straightforward. The types are just meant to convey information directly. There's no need for any decoration or color to grab the reader's attention because those who read it would do so regardless of how it's presented. This is the only example in this chapter where the advertising aspect is not important. The page can be ordinary because it doesn't need to be anything more, although it's still good to put in quality work even here.

From the surveyor’s office our journey of instruction takes us into a church during an elaborate Easter service. Light filtered of its brightness by stained glass windows; high-placed Gothic arches pointing toward the sky; soft organ-music—all these create an atmosphere 46of solemnity and harmony. A program or pamphlet for use during a church service should be as appropriate to the environment as a Book of Common Prayer or Bible. Typographic treatment good as shown in Examples 22, 26 or 28 would be ridiculous for a church program. Example 27-a shows a page historically appropriate. The type-face is peculiarly fitting because of its pointed form, and also for the reason that a letter of similar design was used by medieval scribes on ecclesiastical books (see Example 27-b). The crossed rules, which should be printed in orange-red, are adapted from the guide lines as made by the scribes for marking the position of a page on the sheet.

From the surveyor’s office, our learning journey takes us into a church during a detailed Easter service. Light, softened by stained glass windows; tall Gothic arches reaching toward the sky; gentle organ music—all of these create a vibe of seriousness and harmony. A program or pamphlet for use during a church service should be just as fitting for the setting as a Book of Common Prayer or Bible. Typography as good as shown in Examples 22, 26 or 28 would be ridiculous for a church program. Example 27-a shows a page that fits historically. The typeface is especially suitable because of its pointed shape, and also because a similar style was used by medieval scribes in ecclesiastical books (see Example 27-b). The crossed rules, which should be printed in orange-red, are inspired by the guidelines made by the scribes for marking the page position on the sheet. 46

EXAMPLE 30

Title-page in semi-Colonial style, appropriate for use with a cover design such as Example 29

EXAMPLE 30

Title page in semi-colonial style, suitable for a cover design like Example 29

When a holiday crowd is gathered, dignity is put aside and all enter into the festive spirit of the occasion. Here is the motive for the typographic treatment of a booklet or catalog of decorative materials as presented by Example 28. It would be excessive emphasis of appropriateness to print such a page in a combination of bright red and blue. The colors should be softened. The page would look well printed in a deep blue with a flat blue tint overprinting the star border.

When a holiday crowd comes together, dignity takes a backseat and everyone embraces the festive vibe of the occasion. This is the reason for the typographic design of a booklet or catalog of decorative materials, as shown in Example 28. It would be over the top to print such a page in a mix of bright red and blue. The colors should be toned down. The page would look great printed in a deep blue with a flat blue tint overlay on the star border.

There is room for improvement in the support typographers give artists in the production of booklets and catalogs. In many cases title-pages are constructed with no regard to the motive suggested by the design on the cover. Bibliophiles judge a book not only by the excellence of its execution, but by the harmonious unity that may be expressed in every detail, from the literary contents to the last bit of tooling worked on the cover. The type, ornamentation, paper, ink, margins, leather, the arrangement of the title-page and the cover treatment, all must be selected and utilized in expression of a dominant central motive. The same rule presents the key to good typography in job work. Example 29 shows the Colonial arch adapted as the border of a booklet cover. The artist gives this treatment to the cover because of the motive suggested by the name “Colonial Trust Company,” and when the title-page is set it would be a mistake not to use some Colonial arrangement. Example 30 blends with Example 29 and is modified from the old Colonial title-page treatment just enough to give it a modern appearance without sacrificing the old-time atmosphere. The border suggests both the widely-spaced rules of the Colonial printers and the architectural pillars of Example 29. No letter spacing is used, despite the temptation offered.

There’s definitely room for improvement in the support typographers provide artists when creating booklets and catalogs. Often, title pages are designed without considering the theme suggested by the cover design. Bibliophiles evaluate a book not just by how well it’s made but by the cohesive unity expressed in every detail, from the literary content to the last bit of tooling on the cover. The type, decoration, paper, ink, margins, leather, arrangement of the title page, and cover treatment all need to be chosen and used to express a central theme. This same principle is crucial for good typography in printed materials. Example 29 shows the Colonial arch used as the border for a booklet cover. The artist applies this design to the cover because it relates to the theme suggested by the name “Colonial Trust Company,” and it would be a mistake not to incorporate a Colonial design when setting the title page. Example 30 works well with Example 29 and is slightly adapted from the old Colonial title page style, just enough to give it a modern look without losing the vintage feel. The border hints at both the widely spaced rules of Colonial printers and the architectural pillars of Example 29. No letter spacing is used, despite the temptation to do so.

EXAMPLE 29

The Colonial arch

The Colonial arch


Discussion of the subject of harmony and appropriateness could be extended much further than is allowed by these limits. Pages could be filled with descriptions of instances in which the compositor had erred in treating typography and ornamentation inharmoniously or with an unimaginative appropriateness. The use of angelic ornaments on Y. M. C. A. printing, where something more substantial is desirable; the double-meaning that may be read into the use of a horseshoe ornament on a printer’s letterhead; the placing of illustrations of live fish, lobsters and animal food on banquet programs—these are a few of the things that might be mentioned.

Discussion of the topic of harmony and appropriateness could be explored much more than the space we have allows. We could fill pages with examples of times when the compositor made mistakes in treating typography and decoration in ways that lacked harmony or imagination. Using angelic decorations on Y. M. C. A. printing when something more substantial is needed; the double meaning that can be interpreted from using a horseshoe ornament on a printer’s letterhead; placing images of live fish, lobsters, and animal food on banquet programs—these are just a few examples that could be noted.

High-class catalogs have been marred by the use of stock decorative initials which were at variance with the other decoration. In order to save a few cents both printer and customer are inclined to use stock decoration that happens to be on hand at the moment. Hundreds of dollars are spent on the work and then for the sake of saving thirty cents (the cost of a harmonious initial or ornament) many dollars in effectiveness are sacrificed. Another way of injuring the appearance of a book is to use a type-face on the title-page that does not harmonize with that used for the body matter and the sub-headings. In order to secure complete harmony even the lettering on the cover should blend in style with that used for the title-page, sub-headings and text pages.

High-end catalogs have been spoiled by the use of generic decorative initials that clash with the other design elements. To save a few cents, both printers and customers tend to go for whatever stock decorations are available at the time. Hundreds of dollars are spent on the project, and then, for the sake of saving thirty cents (the cost of a matching initial or ornament), countless dollars in overall quality are sacrificed. Another way to ruin the look of a book is to use a font on the title page that doesn’t match the one used for the main text and subheadings. To achieve complete harmony, the lettering on the cover should also align in style with the title page, subheadings, and text pages.

Altho strict adherence to the laws of harmony and appropriateness is necessary in the production of good work in any field of endeavor, Americans seem to be really proud when they violate such laws. We all know the person who dresses in a slouchy manner because he read somewhere that Horace Greeley dressed that way. And there is the modern politician who wears a slouch hat and constantly carries a quid of tobacco in his mouth because Henry Clay did so. There are also house-organ publishers who use inharmonious and inappropriate type-faces and decoration because Elbert Hubbard thus treats the cover of the Philistine.

Although sticking to the rules of harmony and appropriateness is important for creating good work in any field, Americans often take pride in breaking these rules. We all know someone who dresses carelessly because they read that Horace Greeley did. Then there's the modern politician who wears a slouch hat and constantly has a chew of tobacco in his mouth because Henry Clay did. There are also publishers of house organs who use mismatched and inappropriate fonts and designs because Elbert Hubbard treated the cover of the Philistine that way.

It is not a question of the sort of clothes a person actually needs to go from one end of a street to another—Lady Godiva reached her destination with no clothes at all—yet we often admire a person dressed harmoniously and in good taste without knowing the reasons for our admiration. As there is art in tailoring and in the selection of clothes, there is also art in printing, and he who investigates will find that the great natural laws of beauty apply even to typography, which some by their work seem to think requires no more thought than ditch-digging.

It's not about the kind of clothes someone really needs to walk across the street—Lady Godiva made it to her destination completely nude—yet we often find ourselves admiring someone who's dressed in a way that looks harmonious and stylish without really understanding why we feel that way. Just as there's an art to tailoring and choosing clothes, there's also an art to printing. If you look closely, you'll realize that the fundamental principles of beauty apply to typography too, even though some people treat it like it requires no more thought than digging a ditch.

EXAMPLE 43

Uniform tone in classic typography. Page by Bruce Rogers

EXAMPLE 43

Consistent tone in classic typography. Page by Bruce Rogers

47

TONE AND CONTRAST

This chapter is a story of the alpha and omega of color—white and black. Since the creation of the world, when light first illumined the darkness, these two colors (if I may call them colors) have been emblematic of extremes—white, the symbol of purity and goodness, black of impurity and evil. White and black represent extremes in color. Mixing of all the color rays of the solar spectrum produces white, and mixing of all the colors in the solid form of printing ink produces black. From this contrast of white and black maybe drawn a lesson in color. (Example 31.) Light represents warmth, darkness cold. As the colors are toward light they are warm; as they are toward darkness they are cold. Red becomes warmer as it takes on an orange hue, and colder as it takes on a purple hue. A warm color should be contrasted with a cold color—as orange with black. The further in tone the color is from black the more it contrasts with the black. As an illustration: Orange is more pleasing than a deeper shade of red as a companion color for black. Blue, purple or green, selected to be used with black, must be lightened with white ink to get the desired contrast.

This chapter explores the full spectrum of color—white and black. Since the dawn of time, when light first pierced the darkness, these two colors (if we can call them that) have symbolized opposites—white representing purity and goodness, and black embodying impurity and evil. White and black illustrate extremes in color. When you mix all the rays of the solar spectrum, you get white, and when you combine all the colors in printing ink, you get black. From this contrast of white and black, we can learn about color. (Example 31.) Light signifies warmth, while darkness indicates cold. Colors closer to light are warm, and those nearer to darkness are cold. Red feels warmer as it shifts to an orange hue and cooler as it shifts to a purple hue. A warm color should be paired with a cool color—like orange with black. The further a color is from black in tone, the more it stands out against it. For instance, orange works better than a deeper shade of red as a companion color for black. Any blue, purple, or green chosen to pair with black should be lightened with white ink to achieve the desired contrast.

EXAMPLE 31

Contrast in color and tone

EXAMPLE 31

Contrast in color and tone

White and black as a combination are and ever have been popular with writers, printers and readers. Fully nine-tenths of the newspapers, books, catalogs and other forms of reading matter are printed with black ink on white stock. It is coincident that optical necessities require for best results in reading a black-and-white combination, and black ink and white paper are more cheaply and easily produced than other colors of ink and paper.

White and black as a combination have always been popular with writers, printers, and readers. Almost ninety percent of newspapers, books, catalogs, and other printed materials use black ink on white paper. It’s coincidental that, for optimal reading, a black-and-white combination is required, and black ink and white paper are cheaper and easier to produce than other colors of ink and paper.

EXAMPLE 32

An example of uniform tone and contrast of black and white. Page by F. W. Kleukens, Darmstadt

EXAMPLE 32

An example of consistent tone and contrast between black and white. Page by F. W. Kleukens, Darmstadt

This chapter is also an illustrated sermon on uniformity of tone or depth of color, in which is pointed out the necessity of bringing many spots of black or gray into harmonious relation. The esthetic importance of uniformity of tone is universally recognized. Choirs are robed in white and black; fashion has its uniform clothing for the hours and functions of the day and night; theater choruses and the soldiery are living masses of uniform tone and color. As uniformity is important in these things, so is uniformity important in the tone of a page of printing. A type-page exhibiting a variegated mass of black and gray tones is not unlike a squad of recruits in different styles of clothing marching irregularly; while on the contrary a type-page of uniform tone and arrangement maybe likened to a uniformly equipped regiment of soldiers marching with rhythmic tread.

This chapter is also an illustrated talk about having a consistent tone or color depth, highlighting the need to harmonize various shades of black or gray. The aesthetic significance of uniform tone is widely acknowledged. Choirs wear white and black robes; fashion has its standard clothing for different times of day and night; theater choruses and soldiers are seen as cohesive groups in uniform colors. Just as uniformity matters in these areas, it’s also crucial for the tone of a printed page. A page with a mix of black and gray tones resembles a group of recruits dressed in different styles marching out of sync; on the other hand, a page with uniform tone and layout can be compared to a well-equipped regiment of soldiers marching in time.

A page of display typography composed of a mixture of irregular gray and black tones is inexcusable in the sight of the art-loving reader. As combinations of inharmonious type-faces are wrong, equally so are combinations of incongruous tones. For the sake of contrast and variety in typography, art principles are too often ignored, the printer confessing to ignorance or lack of ingenuity. Contrast is necessary, but it may be had without sacrificing uniformity. Again making use of a military simile: soldiers are marched in platoons, companies, battalions and regiments that the monotony of solid formation may be broken; type is arranged in groups and paragraphs for similar reasons. While an absolutely solid page of type may present a pleasing tone, a slight break in the regularity is desirable for reading purposes. Thus art makes concession to utility, but such concession should always be granted reluctantly. There is classic authority for the arrangement of the type lines in Example 20 of the preceding chapter, but on the majority of printing jobs it is necessary to compromise with utility and emphasize important words, as in Example 19-a of the same chapter. The secret of producing artistic typography in these practical times is to pilot the ideas of the customer into artistic channels; emphasize the words he wants emphasized, but do it in a way that will result in creditable typography. There is a right way and there is a wrong way 48of arranging type, and too many typographers arrange type the wrong way and unjustly blame the customer for the result.

A page with display typography made up of a mix of uneven gray and black tones is unacceptable to an art-loving reader. Just like mismatched typefaces are wrong, so are mismatched tones. For the sake of contrast and variety in typography, artistic principles are often overlooked, with printers admitting to ignorance or a lack of creativity. Contrast is essential, but it can be achieved without losing uniformity. Using a military analogy: soldiers are organized in platoons, companies, battalions, and regiments to break the monotony of solid formations; similarly, type is grouped into paragraphs for the same reasons. While a completely solid page of type might look good, a slight break in regularity is better for reading. So, art should make compromises for utility, but those compromises should be made hesitantly. There is classic guidance for arranging the type lines in Example 20 from the previous chapter, but for most print jobs, it's necessary to balance utility and highlight important words, as shown in Example 19-a from the same chapter. The key to producing artistic typography in today’s practical world is to guide the customer’s ideas into artistic directions; emphasize the words they want highlighted, but do it in a way that results in commendable typography. There’s a right way and a wrong way to arrange type, and too many typographers do it the wrong way and unfairly blame the customer for the outcome. 48

EXAMPLE 34

EXAMPLE 34


The effectiveness of uniformly black tone on a background of white is well illustrated on the beautiful book title shown as Example 32, in which even depth of color is consistently maintained. There is not a weak spot on the page; border, ornament and lettering are of equal tone, and the white background is reflected thru the black print in agreeable contrast. The Germans are masters in their treatment of contrast and uniform tone, and he who bewails the limitations of black and white printing should ponder over the results shown by this specimen from over the sea.

The effectiveness of a solid black tone on a white background is clearly demonstrated in the stunning book title shown as Example 32, where the color depth is consistently maintained. There are no weak areas on the page; the borders, decorations, and lettering share the same tone, and the white background creates a pleasing contrast with the black print. The Germans excel in their use of contrast and uniform tone, and anyone who complains about the limitations of black and white printing should take a moment to consider the results presented by this example from overseas.

Here is a practical demonstration of the workings of the theory of uniform tone in typography. Example 33 displays four ornaments, each of a different tone or depth of color. One of the customs when constructing a booklet cover-page to be ornamented, is first to select an ornament that is appropriate in design and of proper proportions. Upon this ornament the page is constructed, and it dictates the characteristics of the border and of the type-face; its tone determines the tone of the entire page. This is also true of a trademark furnished by the customer, altho such plates are frequently so inartistic that a compromise is necessary.

Here is a practical demonstration of how the theory of uniform tone works in typography. Example 33 shows four decorative elements, each with a different tone or color depth. One common practice when creating a decorative booklet cover is to first choose an ornament that fits well in terms of design and proportions. This ornament serves as the foundation for the page design, influencing the style of the border and the typeface; its tone sets the overall tone for the entire page. This also applies to a trademark provided by the client, although these images are often so poorly designed that some compromises are required.

EXAMPLE 35

EXAMPLE 35

Assuming that a cover-page is to be designed and that ornament A has been selected for use on the page, a rule border is chosen with triple lines approximating the strength of those in the ornament. (Example 34.) The lines are very thin, and white space is a large factor in producing a tone that is light and dainty, in keeping with the subject of the illustration. A perfect result would be obtained with a type-face of very thin strokes, yet Caslon capitals, slightly separated to let in white space, give good results.

Assuming a cover page needs to be designed and ornament A is chosen for use, a ruled border is selected with triple lines that match the thickness of those in the ornament. (Example 34.) The lines are quite thin, and having plenty of white space is important to create a tone that is light and delicate, in line with the theme of the illustration. An ideal outcome could be achieved with a typeface featuring very thin strokes; however, Caslon capitals, slightly spaced apart to allow for white space, work well too.

EXAMPLE 33

Four ornaments, each of a different depth of tone, used in the construction of the four pages shown as examples 34, 35, 36 and 37

EXAMPLE 33

Four decorations, each with a different tone, used in creating the four pages shown as examples 34, 35, 36 and 37

49

EXAMPLE 36

EXAMPLE 36

The ornament shown as B has been formed of lines darker than those used in the first ornament, and a mass of white forms a spot of contrast. Rules of the proper tone are selected and a border unit adopted that reflects the spot of white in the ornament. (Example 35.) Cheltenham capitals maintain the tone scheme. In this case, as in others, the type-face is a trifle stronger in tone than ornament and border. This is well. Type-lines on a cover are usually of more importance than the decoration.

The ornament shown as B is made up of darker lines than those in the first ornament, and a mass of white creates a contrasting spot. Proper tone rules are chosen, and a border unit is used that echoes the white spot in the ornament. (Example 35.) Cheltenham capitals keep the tone consistent. In this case, as in others, the typeface is slightly bolder in tone than the ornament and border. This is a good choice. Type lines on a cover are typically more significant than the decoration.

EXAMPLE 37

EXAMPLE 37

EXAMPLE 38. Dark tone—solid

Dark tone—solid

EXAMPLE 39. Light tone—spaced

Two extremes of tone on book pages. The same type-face is used on both pages; the spacing between words and lines alters the tone

EXAMPLE 39. Light tone—spaced

Two extremes of tone on book pages. The same typeface is used on both pages; the spacing between words and lines changes the tone.

50

EXAMPLE 40

A page by J. H. Kehler, in which illustration and text are blended in uniform tone

EXAMPLE 40

A page by J. H. Kehler, where illustration and text are combined in a consistent style.

Ornament C differs from ornament A in that it is composed of light lines contrasted with solid blacks. A border is made of a light line and a dark one, and the Bodoni type-face, containing light and heavy strokes in contrast with a white background, assists in producing a decidedly pleasing medium black tone (Example 36).

Ornament C is different from ornament A because it consists of thin lines contrasted with solid blacks. The border features a light line alongside a dark one, and the Bodoni typeface, which combines light and thick strokes against a white background, helps create a distinctly attractive medium black tone (Example 36).

This combination of ornament, type and rule demonstrates there is considerable tone beauty in a well-selected contrast of light and dark lines when set off by liberal white space between lines and in the background.

This mix of decoration, type, and layout shows that there’s a lot of visual appeal in a thoughtfully chosen contrast of light and dark lines, especially when highlighted by plenty of white space between lines and in the background.

The dense black tone of ornament D is duplicated in the dark-line border filled with black decorative units (Example 37). The black-printing Chaucer Text reflects not only the tone but the decorative characteristics of ornament and border. The tone of this example approximates that of the German page (Example 32).

The deep black color of ornament D is echoed in the dark-line border filled with black decorative elements (Example 37). The black printing of the Chaucer Text showcases not just the color but also the decorative features of the ornament and border. The tone in this example is similar to that of the German page (Example 32).

These four examples afford an interesting study in uniform tone.

These four examples provide an interesting study in consistent tone.

As the tone or depth of color increases from the light gray of Example 34 to the dense black of Example 37, it will be observed that the contrast between the print and the paper background also increases. This leads to the subject of contrast. What amount of contrast is needed on the ideal job of printing? There is conflict between art and utility on this question, but there need be none. Art demands that the print be a part of the paper upon which it is impressed, much as the plant is a part of the earth in which its roots are buried, and utility demands that the print shall be strong and clear that reading may be made easy. The artist-printer lessens the contrast between print and paper by printing with gray ink on gray stock, brown ink on light brown stock, and so forth. The utility printer gets the maximum of contrast by printing with black ink on white stock. As printing is both art and business some compromise must be made, and it is this: On two-color printing have all reading matter in the stronger color and subdue the color of the decoration so that the contrast between the paper and the print of the reading portion of the page is softened by this intermediate tone. Black print on white paper is made artistic by impressing the print firmly on antique paper. This roots the print to the paper, and the result is more idealistic than that presented by the print daintily set upon the surface of glossy, enameled papers.

As the tone or depth of color shifts from the light gray of Example 34 to the deep black of Example 37, you'll notice that the contrast between the print and the paper background also increases. This brings us to the topic of contrast. How much contrast is ideal for a great print job? There’s a tension between art and practicality on this issue, but it doesn’t have to be a conflict. Art requires that the print blend with the paper it’s on, similar to how a plant is part of the earth that anchors its roots, while practicality demands that the print be strong and clear for easy reading. The artist-printer reduces contrast by using gray ink on gray paper, brown ink on light brown paper, and so on. In contrast, the practical printer maximizes contrast by using black ink on white paper. Since printing involves both art and business, a compromise is necessary, and this is it: in two-color printing, make all the text in the stronger color and tone down the color of the decorative elements so that the contrast between the paper and the text is softened by this middle tone. Black print on white paper becomes more artistic when it’s printed firmly on antique paper. This connects the print to the paper, creating a more idealistic look than when the print is delicately placed on glossy, enameled sheets.

EXAMPLE 41

The spotted black tone of the border is reflected in the treatment of the text. The tone is made uniform by printing the border in a light color. Page by University Press, Cambridge

EXAMPLE 41

The black speckled border is echoed in the way the text is styled. The color is made consistent by printing the border in a lighter shade. Page by University Press, Cambridge

Lack of artistic feeling among typographers and customers is responsible for unpleasant contrasts in tone. A dense black illustration or initial will be set in a page of light gray reading matter, or type of black tone will be used on a page with an illustration of light lines. Great contrast in any detail of typography is not art but eccentricity; this statement may be made plain by a comparison. One winter’s day when the conventional folk of New York were wearing clothing of a somber hue, they were startled by the appearance among them of Mark Twain in a suit of white. Six months later the humorist’s garb would have excited no comment, but the black clothed mass of humanity around him emphasized the whiteness of his attire, and the conspicuousness thus produced separated him from his surroundings and made him an object of curiosity. Such things are done by great men to show their disregard for custom and by others because they are foolish or are advertising something; but it is common-sense right from Cervantes to do when in Rome as the Romans do (meaning that printed work which both attracts and repels by its gaudy, unconventional appearance is not nearly so good or desirable as the more conventional printed work which 51tastefully and quietly presents its message in subdued tones). One man will become widely known because he has dived from a big bridge or gone over Niagara Falls; another because he has painted a great picture or modeled a great statue. The one thrills, the other impresses. It may be easier to produce typography which attracts attention by contrast, but such results do not bring the lasting satisfaction that comes from typography thoughtfully and artistically designed.

Lack of artistic sensibility among typographers and clients leads to jarring tonal contrasts. A bold black illustration or initial might be placed against a page of light gray text, or black type might appear on a page with a light line illustration. Extreme contrast in typography isn’t artistic; it’s eccentric. This can be illustrated with an example. One winter day, as the conventional people of New York dressed in dark colors, they were taken aback by the sight of Mark Twain in a white suit. Six months later, his outfit wouldn’t have raised an eyebrow, but the sea of black-clad people around him highlighted the brightness of his clothing, making him stand out and piquing curiosity. Great figures do this to show their disregard for norms, while others do it out of foolishness or to promote something; but common sense, dating back to Cervantes, suggests that when in Rome, one should follow the Romans (meaning that printed work that is both eye-catching and offbeat isn't as good or desirable as conventional printed work that tastefully and quietly conveys its message in subtle tones). One person may gain fame for jumping from a high bridge or going over Niagara Falls; another for painting a remarkable picture or sculpting a great statue. The former excites, the latter inspires. Creating typography that grabs attention through contrast may be easier, but such an approach lacks the lasting satisfaction that comes from typography that is carefully and artistically crafted.

EXAMPLE 44

A study in uniformity of tone as found in combinations of type and decoration

EXAMPLE 44

A study in consistent tone achieved through combinations of typography and design.

EXAMPLE 42

The tone of the illustration and type-face is here blended. Card by School of Printing, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 42

The style of the illustration and font is combined here. Card by School of Printing, Boston, Mass.

Several other points are suggested by Examples 34 to 37. A page for a cover should be of darker tone than a page to be used as a title inside the book; this where the body-type of the inside pages is of the customary gray tone. A cover placed upon a book to protect it suggests strength, and the typography of the cover should conform to this suggestion. The reason for the uniform tone presented by each of the four examples above mentioned is another important point. Were the border darker than the ornament and type lines, the ornament darker than the border and type lines, or the type lines darker than the ornament and border, there would not be uniformity of tone, and a consequent loss in the effectiveness that comes from tone harmony.

Several other points are suggested by Examples 34 to 37. A cover page should have a darker tone than the page used as a title inside the book; this is where the body text of the inside pages typically has a standard gray tone. A cover placed on a book for protection conveys strength, and the typography on the cover should reflect this idea. The reason for the consistent tone presented by each of the four examples mentioned above is another important point. If the border were darker than the ornament and type lines, the ornament darker than the border and type lines, or the type lines darker than the ornament and border, there would be a lack of tone uniformity, which would lead to a loss of effectiveness that comes from tone harmony.


The tone of a massed page is of vital importance in the typography of a book, and a happy medium is somewhere between the under-spaced black type-page of Morris and the over-spaced hair-line type-page against which the Morris page was a protest. Examples 38 and 39 show the manner in which the tone of a page may be controlled by spacing. In Example 38 the page is moderately spaced between words and lines and in Example 39 the page is liberally spaced, presenting two extremes and vividly picturing the manner in which spacing influences the page tone.

The overall look of a page is really important in a book's typography, and a good balance is found between the cramped black type pages of Morris and the overly spaced hairline type pages that opposed them. Examples 38 and 39 demonstrate how the tone of a page can be adjusted through spacing. In Example 38, the spacing between words and lines is moderate, while in Example 39, the spacing is generous, showcasing two extremes and clearly illustrating how spacing affects the tone of a page.

The tone of the pen-and-ink outline illustration in Example 40 is admirably duplicated in the typographical treatment accorded the page. The result would not have been so satisfactory if there had been no quad lines to break the solidity of the page.

The style of the pen-and-ink outline illustration in Example 40 is beautifully matched by the typography used on the page. The outcome wouldn’t have been as pleasing if there weren’t quad lines to break up the heaviness of the page.

The spotted black tone of the decorative border in Example 41 is reflected in the typography of the page, a result obtained by using a bold-faced body-type and separating the words with a liberal amount of space. However, the tone would not be equal printed in one color, but by printing the border in a lighter color the tones are equalized. Here is a suggestion for obtaining even tones. Where one portion of the page is bolder than the other, print it in a lighter shade of ink, or if any part of a type-page must be printed in a lighter color, set that part in a type-face of darker tone (Example 47).

The spotted black color of the decorative border in Example 41 is reflected in the typography of the page, achieved by using bold body text and spacing the words out generously. However, the tone wouldn’t appear the same if printed in one color; printing the border in a lighter shade balances the tones. Here’s a tip for achieving even tones: if one part of the page is bolder than another, print it in a lighter ink shade, or if any section of the text must be in a lighter color, use a typeface in a darker tone (Example 47).

Job printers should be interested in Example 42, as it is a good presentation of the theory of uniform tone. The effect of the open-line illustration is duplicated in the spaced Jenson capitals and cross lines. The result would have been even better had the small groups on both sides of the illustration been slightly letterspaced and the line at the bottom spaced less.

Job printers should pay attention to Example 42, as it effectively demonstrates the theory of uniform tone. The impact of the open-line illustration is mirrored in the spaced Jenson capitals and cross lines. The outcome would have been even better if the small groups on both sides of the illustration had been slightly letterspaced and the line at the bottom had less spacing.

Example 43, on the insert, is a classic interpretation of uniform tone. The architectural design is formed of lines about the same strength as the strokes of the type-face and the massed capital letters admit sufficient light to give them a tone near to that of the open-spaced border.

Example 43, on the insert, is a classic interpretation of uniform tone. The architectural design consists of lines that are about the same strength as the strokes of the typeface, and the clustered capital letters let in enough light to give them a tone close to that of the open-spaced border.

Example 44 (insert) is a pleasing blend of tone and characteristics. The delicate light-gray tone of the Camelot type-face is closely matched in the decoration and border, and altogether this is an almost perfect exemplification of the subject of this chapter. It is seldom that an artist so carefully considers the characteristics of a type-face and reproduces these characteristics in so admirable a manner as was done in this instance.

Example 44 (insert) is a nice combination of tone and features. The soft light-gray tone of the Camelot typeface closely matches the decoration and border, making it nearly a perfect example of the topic of this chapter. It's rare for an artist to pay such careful attention to the qualities of a typeface and replicate those qualities as well as it was done here.

EXAMPLE 45

In which the tone of the initial and headpiece is lightened to near that of the text portion. Page by Heintzemann Press, Boston

EXAMPLE 45

In which the tone of the initial and headpiece is lightened to almost that of the text portion. Page by Heintzemann Press, Boston

Initials and headpieces should approach closely the tone of the type-page of which they are parts. Example 45 shows such a combination, with the tone of the decoration just a trifle darker than that of the text portion. An initial has other duties to perform than merely to look pretty; it must direct the eye to the beginning of the reading matter. In the manuscript books of the Middle Ages, written without paragraphs, the starting point of a new thought was denoted by an initial more or less elaborate. The utilitarian purpose thus served by the initial 52is reason for making it a trifle darker than the remainder of the page. However, if there is great contrast in tone, the page will be difficult to read because of the initial claiming too much attention. The effect would be much like attempting to listen to one speaker while another is calling and beckoning.

Initials and decorative elements should closely match the tone of the text they are part of. Example 45 demonstrates this combination, where the decoration is slightly darker than the text. An initial has more to do than just look nice; it needs to draw the reader's eye to the start of the content. In the manuscript books of the Middle Ages, which were written without paragraphs, a more or less elaborate initial indicated the beginning of a new idea. This practical function is why the initial is made slightly darker than the rest of the page. However, if there is too much contrast in tone, the page can become difficult to read since the initial may attract too much attention. It would be similar to trying to focus on one speaker while another is calling out and waving. 52

EXAMPLE 46

EXAMPLE 46

EXAMPLE 48

Display lines in tone should match the border

EXAMPLE 48

The display lines should match the border in tone.

Every rule has its exception and I wish to record one in the matter of uniform tone. On a page composed of display lines and a large amount of reading matter it is an offense against legibility to set the reading matter in a type-face of black tone to correspond with the display lines, considerable contrast being necessary in such cases to make reading easy. (Example 48.) Notwithstanding this exception in the case of reading matter, uniform tone should be retained between display lines and border.

Every rule has its exceptions, and I want to point one out regarding uniform tone. When a page includes both display lines and a lot of text, using a black typeface for the text to match the display lines makes it hard to read. It's important to create enough contrast in these cases to ensure reading is easy. (Example 48.) Despite this exception for the text, uniform tone should still be maintained between display lines and the border.

EXAMPLE 47

EXAMPLE 47

If a catalog is illustrated (and the majority are) it is important to have the illustrations prominent on the page, sacrificing tone to utility if necessary. Sometimes the illustrations are printed in dense black and the remainder of the page in gray or brown. While this causes the illustrations to stand out in relief—an important point when machinery is depicted—it should not be forgotten that the type matter must be read.

If a catalog includes illustrations (which most do), it's crucial to make the illustrations stand out on the page, even if that means compromising on aesthetics for practicality. Sometimes the illustrations are printed in solid black while the rest of the page is in gray or brown. While this makes the illustrations pop—especially when showing machinery—it’s important to remember that the text still needs to be readable.

In advertising composition it is seldom possible to have an even tone on the entire page. The New York Herald advertising pages are unique in this respect. Outline type-faces are used, and all illustrations are redrawn in outline before they are published. This serves to give a uniformly gray tone to the pages, but the advertisers are not enthusiastic over the effects. While other newspapers may not be able to maintain uniform page tone, it is possible at least to have each advertisement present a tone uniform in its displayed parts and border, and the good typographer will secure such effects. The gray shaded type-faces now available should enable printers and publishers to obtain tone uniformity where gray effects are desired and large type sizes used.

In advertising design, it’s rarely possible to achieve a consistent tone across the entire page. The New York Herald advertising pages stand out in this regard. They use outline typefaces, and all illustrations are redrawn in outline before publication. This creates a consistent gray tone across the pages, but advertisers aren’t thrilled with the results. While other newspapers might struggle to maintain a uniform page tone, it's still possible for each ad to have a consistent tone in its main parts and border, and a skilled typographer can achieve that. The gray shaded typefaces now available should help printers and publishers achieve tone consistency when gray effects are desired and large type sizes are used.

EXAMPLE 49

Equal spacing is necessary to obtain uniform tone

EXAMPLE 49

Even spacing is essential to achieve a consistent tone

Irregular letterspacing has been the cause of many pages of unsatisfactory tone. In a displayed page where one line is spaced between letters, all lines should be similarly spaced. Example 49 presents a decidedly unconventional letterhead by reason of the letterspacing, and it illustrates the point that all lines should be spaced equally. It may be well to warn job compositors inclined to imitate the style of this heading that there are few customers who would concede any merit to such an arrangement, and it should be used sparingly. Unconventional treatment, even tho good along the lines of the style chosen, is not always appreciated.

Irregular letter spacing has caused many pages to have an unsatisfactory tone. On a displayed page where one line has letter spacing, all lines should be spaced the same way. Example 49 shows a very unconventional letterhead because of the letter spacing, and it emphasizes that all lines should be spaced equally. It’s important to caution job compositors who are tempted to copy this heading style that few customers would see any value in such an arrangement, so it should be used sparingly. Unconventional treatment, even if done well within the chosen style, isn’t always appreciated.

EXAMPLE 58

In which the ornament, the border and the type-face are in proportion

EXAMPLE 58

In which the decoration, the border, and the font are in proportion

53

PROPORTION, BALANCE AND SPACING

Symmetry is necessary to beauty. This law of esthetics is as applicable to typography as to sculpture and architecture. Proportion and balance—the things that make for symmetry in typography—are obtained only by giving the work more attention than seems necessary to the average producer and buyer of printing.

Symmetry is essential to beauty. This rule of aesthetics applies to typography just as it does to sculpture and architecture. Proportion and balance—the elements that create symmetry in typography—can only be achieved by paying more attention to the work than what seems necessary to the typical producer and buyer of printing.

Why should the printer worry about esthetics—about symmetry? What has art to do with printing, anyway? Questions such as these find too frequent voice in the printing trade, coming from the employee whose interest and ambitions end when he “gets the scale,” and the employer who is satisfied merely to deliver so many pounds of paper and ounces of ink for so much money. Pity the man whose work is drudgery and who denies that art and beauty are meant for him. He has his antithesis in the man who, appreciating the higher blessings, neglects to give value to the more common and practical things.

Why should the printer care about aesthetics or symmetry? What does art have to do with printing, anyway? Questions like these are often heard in the printing industry, coming from employees whose interest and ambitions end when they "get the scale," and from employers who are simply satisfied to supply a certain number of pounds of paper and ounces of ink for a set price. It’s unfortunate for the person whose work feels like a chore and who believes that art and beauty aren’t for them. They are the opposite of the person who, recognizing the value of higher ideals, fails to appreciate the importance of the more everyday and practical aspects.

EXAMPLE 50

One method of determining the page length. The page should measure diagonally twice its width

EXAMPLE 50

One way to figure out the page length is that the diagonal measurement should be twice the width.

There have always been two opposing classes—in religion, politics, art, music, business. On all questions one portion of humanity is “for” and the other “against,” mostly because of the influence of environment upon tastes and interests. Mozart’s and Beethoven’s music charms and enthuses and also lulls to sleep. One class should try to understand the other. Each has good reasons for its preferences, but none at all for its prejudices. The painter Rubens, gathering inspiration in the courts of royalty, portrayed luxury and magnificence. Millet, painting in a barn, pictured poverty, sorrow and dulled minds. What pleased one found little sympathy in the other. During the Middle Ages learned men talked, wrote and thought in Latin, and when it was proposed to translate the Scriptures into the language of the masses these men held up their hands in horror.

There have always been two opposing classes—in religion, politics, art, music, and business. On every issue, one part of humanity is “for” and the other is “against,” mostly due to how the environment shapes tastes and interests. Mozart’s and Beethoven’s music enchants, excites, and also puts you to sleep. One class should try to understand the other. Each has valid reasons for its preferences, but none for its biases. The painter Rubens, finding inspiration in royal courts, portrayed luxury and grandeur. Millet, painting in a barn, depicted poverty, sorrow, and dull minds. What one enjoyed found little empathy from the other. During the Middle Ages, educated people spoke, wrote, and thought in Latin, and when it was suggested to translate the Scriptures into the language of the common people, these individuals raised their hands in shock.

Not so many years ago the book printer looked upon the job printer as the Roman patrician looked upon the plebeian, but the job printer has absorbed dignity and typographic taste from the book printer. While the book printer’s highest ideal is a volume with uncut leaves ornamenting the book shelves of the collector, the job printer’s mission is to be all things to all men. He prints the refined announcements of art schools one day and another day finds him placing wood type to tell the story of a rural sale of articles “too numerous to mention.”

Not that long ago, the book printer viewed the job printer much like a Roman patrician viewed a plebeian, but the job printer has gained respect and design skills from the book printer. While the book printer's ultimate goal is to create a volume with untrimmed pages that beautify the shelves of collectors, the job printer's mission is to cater to everyone's needs. One day, he prints elegant announcements for art schools, and the next day, he uses wooden type to advertise a rural sale of items "too many to list."

There should be more sympathy between the book printer and the job printer, and also between the printer who regards his calling as a business and the printer who regards it as an art. The employer and employee who consider printing only a means to an end and that end money, are as near right and as near wrong as they who produce art printing for art’s sake and forget the pay envelop and the customer’s check. The first starve their souls, the last their bodies.

There should be more understanding between the book printer and the job printer, as well as between the printer who sees their work as a business and the printer who views it as an art. Both employers and employees who see printing just as a way to make money are just as right and just as wrong as those who create art prints solely for the sake of art and ignore the paycheck and the customer’s payment. The first group neglects their souls, while the second group neglects their livelihoods.

EXAMPLE 51

Another method of determining the page length. The length of the page should measure fifty per cent more than its width. These examples also present proportionate margins, the foot margin in each instance being the largest

EXAMPLE 51

Another way to determine the page length. The page length should be fifty percent greater than its width. These examples also show proportional margins, with the bottom margin in each case being the largest.

The printer who does things artistically in an economical manner “strikes twelve” (in the slang of Elbert Hubbard). Printing need not be shorn of beauty to be profitable to both printer and customer, tho beauty too conspicuous turns attention from the real purpose of the printed job—which, in the case of a booklet, is the message the words convey. An equestrian statue of Napoleon should feature the great conqueror, not the horse, but would be impossible with the horse left out.

The printer who operates in a creative yet cost-effective way “hits the nail on the head” (in the slang of Elbert Hubbard). Printing doesn’t have to lack beauty to be beneficial for both the printer and the customer, although beauty that stands out too much can distract from the actual purpose of the printed piece—which, in the case of a booklet, is the message conveyed by the words. An equestrian statue of Napoleon should highlight the great conqueror, not the horse, but it wouldn’t be possible without the horse included.

Art is essential to printing; so are Uncle Sam’s specimens of steel engraving. The more art the printer absorbs the larger should grow his collection of these engravings. Study of art arouses ambition; ambition brings better and harder work. It reveals in the typographer the difference between mere lead-lifting and the artistic selection and arrangement of types. The boy who sweeps the floor and does his best is nearer art-heaven than he who sets type and cares not how he does it.

Art is crucial to printing, just like Uncle Sam’s steel engravings. The more art a printer takes in, the bigger their collection of these engravings should become. Studying art sparks ambition; ambition leads to improved and more diligent work. It shows the typographer the difference between just moving lead and making thoughtful choices in type selection and arrangement. The boy who sweeps the floor and gives it his all is closer to artistic fulfillment than the one who sets type without caring about the process.

The printer who determines to learn about art—who 54makes continued effort to find the reason why one man’s work is good and another’s is not, will be surprised and gratified at the new world that unfolds itself as he studies. He will find that altho having eyes, he has really seen only as he has appreciated. There is no easy road to the appreciation of the beautiful. Art does not consist merely of a set of rules to be observed; there are few beacon lights placed by those who have trod the road. Beyond a certain point the novice must depend upon intuition or “feeling.” Great painters have been asked their method of producing masterpieces, and have been unable to explain.

The printer who decides to learn about art—who keeps putting in the effort to understand why one person's work is good and another's isn't—will be amazed and pleased by the new world that opens up as they study. They'll realize that even though they have eyes, they've really only seen as much as they've appreciated. There's no easy path to appreciating beauty. Art isn't just a list of rules to follow; there are few guiding lights left by those who've walked this path. After a certain point, beginners have to rely on their intuition or “feeling.” Great painters have been asked how they create masterpieces but often can't explain it.


EXAMPLE 53

In which vertical lines predominate

EXAMPLE 53

In which vertical lines dominate

In introducing the subject of “Proportion” it is well first to dispose of book pages. In olden times the sizes of books were known by the number of folds to a sheet of paper about 18 × 24 inches. A book made from such sheets, folded once into two leaves, was known as a folio volume and measured about 12 × 18 inches. Folded twice into four leaves, a quarto, measuring 9 × 12 inches. Folded three times into eight leaves, an octavo, measuring 6 × 9 inches. Paper is now made in a variety of sizes, which allow of individual preferences being satisfied. For the sizes of catalogs 9 × 12 and 6 × 9 are becoming standard. The sizes do not depart far from the rule of proportion which holds that the width of the page should be two-thirds its length.

In discussing the topic of “Proportion,” it's a good idea to start by talking about book pages. In the past, book sizes were determined by how many times a sheet of paper, about 18 × 24 inches, was folded. A book from such sheets, folded once into two leaves, was called a folio and measured about 12 × 18 inches. When folded twice into four leaves, it was a quarto, measuring 9 × 12 inches. Folded three times into eight leaves, it became an octavo, measuring 6 × 9 inches. Today, paper comes in various sizes that cater to personal preferences. Sizes like 9 × 12 and 6 × 9 are becoming common for catalogs. These dimensions generally follow the principle of proportion that states the width of the page should be two-thirds of its length.

Examples 50 and 51 illustrate two widely-used methods of determining page lengths. By the first method (Example 50) the page should measure diagonally twice its width. In this instance the width being eight picas, the diagonal measurement is sixteen picas. By the second method the length of the page should measure fifty per cent more than its width. Here the width being eight picas, the length is twelve picas. These measurements may or may not include the running titles or folios.

Examples 50 and 51 show two common ways to determine page lengths. In the first method (Example 50), the page should measure diagonally twice its width. In this case, with the width being eight picas, the diagonal measurement is sixteen picas. In the second method, the page length should be fifty percent longer than its width. Here, with the width being eight picas, the length is twelve picas. These measurements might or might not include the running titles or folios.

EXAMPLE 54

Compare with Example 53

EXAMPLE 54

Compare with Example __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

If only small margins are possible, the page (exclusive of running title) should be about centered, with a slight inclination toward the head and back. But when margins are reasonably ample the page should set liberally toward the head and back; the margins of the head and back (exclusive of the running title) should be about the same, the outer side margin should be fifty per cent more than the back margin, and the foot margin one hundred per cent more than the back margin. Various explanations of this rule have been put forward, a few of which are: The old book-owner making marginal notations as he read, needed wide margins for the purpose. Early manuscript books were bound on wood, and this wood was extended at the foot and used to hold the book when reading. Two pages being exposed to view were treated as one page, much as double columns are now treated. As book illuminators required room for their handiwork the margins may have thus originated. The principal reason why we should observe such margins is that the arrangement has the sanction of long usage and the approval of the best bookmakers since books were written.

If only small margins are possible, the page (excluding the running title) should be centered, with a slight tilt towards the top and back. But when margins are reasonably wide, the page should be set generously towards the top and back; the top and back margins (excluding the running title) should be about the same, the outer margin should be fifty percent wider than the back margin, and the bottom margin should be one hundred percent wider than the back margin. Various explanations for this rule have been suggested, some of which are: The old book owner making marginal notes as they read needed wide margins for that purpose. Early manuscript books were bound in wood, and this wood extended at the bottom to hold the book when reading. Two pages being visible were treated as one page, much like how double columns are considered now. Since book illuminators needed space for their artwork, the margins may have originated from that. The main reason we should stick to these margins is that this arrangement has been endorsed by long-standing tradition and the approval of the best bookmakers throughout history.


The job printer, it is reasonable to suppose, is more interested in proportion as it refers to display typography. He asks: What relation has type, in the shape of its face, to the page of which it is a part? And the answer is: A type-face should conform in the proportion of its letters to the proportion of the page. Let us thoroly understand this. In Example 52 there are shown three widths of type—condensed, medium and extended. The type of medium width is more used than the condensed or extended kind, and most pages have a proportion such as Example 55. From viewpoints of both economy and art, the type-face of medium width should be given preference when selecting type equipment. Condensed types are properly proportioned for use as headings in the narrow columns of newspapers and for narrow folders and booklets.

The job printer is likely more concerned with proportions in display typography. He asks: What relationship does the typeface have to the page it's part of? The answer is: A typeface should match the proportions of its letters to the proportions of the page. Let’s thoroughly understand this. In Example 52, there are three widths of type shown—condensed, medium, and extended. The medium-width type is used more frequently than the condensed or extended types, and most pages have a proportion like that in Example 55. From both an economic and artistic perspective, medium-width type should be favored when choosing type equipment. Condensed types are properly proportioned for use as headings in narrow newspaper columns and for slim folders and booklets.

EXAMPLE 55

The conventional page shape, with type and ornament in proportion

EXAMPLE 55

The traditional page layout, with text and design elements balanced

EXAMPLE 52

Three widths of type-faces

Three font widths

EXAMPLE 57

Compare with Example 56

Compare with Example __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Many of the laws that are necessary to good typography also govern the other arts. As an instance, in architecture it is requisite that a tall and narrow building contain a preponderance of vertical lines, a feature most noticeable in church buildings of Gothic style (Example 54). Because the extent of vertical lines is greater than that of horizontal ones in a condensed type-face, such a face is proper for a long and narrow page (Example 53). The proportion of page shown by Example 55 is about that met with most frequently in printing production. Here the vertical lines are in a slight majority, but it is interesting to observe that in Example 56 where the page is more wide than long, horizontal lines are more numerous than vertical ones.

Many of the rules necessary for good typography also apply to other forms of art. For example, in architecture, a tall and narrow building should have more vertical lines, a characteristic most evident in Gothic-style churches (Example 54). Since vertical lines are more prominent than horizontal ones in a condensed typeface, that typeface works well for a long and narrow page (Example 53). The proportion of the page shown in Example 55 is about the most commonly found in print production. Here, vertical lines slightly outnumber horizontal ones, but it’s noteworthy that in Example 56, where the page is wider than it is long, horizontal lines are more common than vertical ones.

55

EXAMPLE 56

In which horizontal lines predominate

Where horizontal lines are prominent

It is not always possible to follow out in every detail the requirements of proportion. Architects must sacrifice much in the interests of utility and in deference to the wishes of their clients. Printers must do likewise, but as a rule they travel farther from true art principles than do architects. Consider the contrasting proportions of the structures in Examples 54 and 57. In Example 54 notice that the openings have been made to conform to the general proportions, and that vertical lines have been multiplied to emphasize narrowness and hight. As a contrast, in Example 57 observe the width of the openings; how it blends with the general proportion of this structure. Now to ascertain that typography parallels architecture compare Example 53 with 54, and 56 with 57.

It’s not always possible to follow the rules of proportion in every detail. Architects often have to compromise for practicality and to meet their clients' preferences. Printers face similar challenges, but generally, they stray further from true artistic principles than architects do. Look at the different proportions of the buildings in Examples 54 and 57. In Example 54, you’ll see that the openings fit the overall proportions, and vertical lines have been added to highlight narrowness and height. In contrast, in Example 57, notice the width of the openings and how it matches the overall proportion of the building. To see how typography resembles architecture, compare Example 53 with 54, and 56 with 57.

EXAMPLE 59

EXAMPLE 59

EXAMPLE 60

The type-faces of these two examples are not in proportion with the pages

EXAMPLE 60

The fonts of these two examples don't match the page proportions.

An exaggerated idea of the relation of lines to proportion is furnished by Examples 62 (see insert) and 63. The vertical lines of Example 62 run with the length of the page as smoothly as a canoe floating down stream. The horizontal lines of Example 63 are irritating in their disregard of proportion. For the eye to take in at a glance both the page lines running vertically and the rules running horizontally is as difficult as watching a three-ring circus. Examples 59 and 60 also illustrate this point.

An exaggerated view of how lines relate to proportion is shown in Examples 62 (see insert) and 63. The vertical lines of Example 62 flow with the length of the page as smoothly as a canoe drifting downstream. The horizontal lines of Example 63 are frustrating because they ignore proportion. For the eye to quickly take in both the vertical lines and the horizontal rules is as challenging as trying to focus on a three-ring circus. Examples 59 and 60 also demonstrate this point.

I have prepared in Example 58 (see insert) a page in which not only are ornament, type-face and page-design in proportion, but the characteristics of the ornament are reflected in the border, and the tone is uniform.

I have prepared in Example 58 (see insert) a page where the ornament, typeface, and page design are well proportioned, the details of the ornament are echoed in the border, and the overall tone is consistent.

Irregularity of form is valuable in breaking monotony, and in some forms of art may be essential, but as contained in Example 61 this feature is inharmonious. Before experimenting with variety or becoming agitated about monotony the typographer should perfect himself in the things that make for regularity. When he learns to set a page that is harmonious and in proportion then it may be well to introduce irregularity—in homeopathic doses.

Irregular shapes can be useful for breaking up monotony, and in some art forms, they might even be crucial, but as shown in Example 61, this aspect is out of harmony. Before trying out different styles or getting anxious about sameness, a typographer should master the elements that create consistency. Once he knows how to design a page that is balanced and proportional, it might be appropriate to incorporate irregularity—in small amounts.


There is much uncertainty manifested among typographers as to the proportionate strength of display lines on a page. A type line is proportionately large or small as it contrasts with its environment. Gulliver was a giant when among pigmies. The foremost citizen of a country town is considerably reduced in importance when he rubs elbows with the big men of the cities. The homely adage that “a big frog in a small puddle is a small frog in a big puddle,” is applicable to typography. A display line surrounded by other type lines (Example 64) must be made larger or by strengthened strokes made bolder than when alone on the page (Example 65). The old City Hall in New York is claimed to be the most beautiful work of architecture in the city, but is ridiculously out of proportion with the towering office buildings surrounding it.

There’s a lot of uncertainty among typographers about how strong display lines should be on a page. A type line is seen as either large or small depending on what’s around it. Gulliver stood out as a giant among tiny people. The leading figure in a small town seems much less important when compared to the big shots in the cities. The saying “a big frog in a small pond is just a small frog in a big pond” applies to typography. A display line surrounded by other type lines (Example 64) needs to be larger or bolder than when it’s alone on the page (Example 65). The old City Hall in New York is said to be the most beautiful architectural work in the city, but it looks ridiculously small next to the towering office buildings around it.

EXAMPLE 63

Horizontal lines are not suitable for a vertically narrow page (See Example 62, insert)

EXAMPLE 63

Horizontal lines don't work well on a vertically narrow page (See Example 62, insert)

EXAMPLE 61

Type-faces and borders are mismated

EXAMPLE 61

The fonts and borders don’t match.

Examples 66, 67 and 68 are studies in the proportion of a type-face to the page of which it is a part. In Example 66 the page is largely covered with type, treatment that is necessary on poster, dodger and other printed matter that must force its presence upon the public. In Example 67 the page consists mostly of blank space, the type standing modestly 56and apologetically in the midst of that space. This treatment is proper on dainty works of poetry or when the demands of extreme refinement are to be satisfied. Example 68 is the “happy medium,” the compromise—a strength of display that will be satisfactory in almost every case. This method of arriving at correct treatment emphasizes the need in the typographer of a judicial as well as an artistic temperament. The wise judge knows that truth is about midway between the claims of opposing counsel.

Examples 66, 67 and 68 are studies of how typeface proportion relates to the page it's on. In Example 66, the page is mostly filled with text, which is necessary for posters, flyers, and other printed materials that need to capture people's attention. In Example 67, the page is mostly blank, with the type appearing modestly 56 in the middle of that space. This approach is suitable for delicate poetry or when there's a need for extreme refinement. Example 68 represents the "happy medium," the compromise—a balanced display that works well in almost every situation. This way of determining the right treatment highlights that a typographer needs both a fair and an artistic mindset. A wise judge understands that truth lies somewhere in between the arguments of both sides.

EXAMPLE 64

EXAMPLE 64

EXAMPLE 65

A display line surrounded by other type lines must be made larger than when alone on the page, to obtain proportionate emphasis

EXAMPLE 65

A display line that is surrounded by other text lines must be made larger than when it's alone on the page to achieve proportional emphasis.


Balance is another important subject, as it has a big share in making typography good or bad. The builder works with plumb-line and spirit-level that his walls may be in perfect balance, tho sometimes he is tempted, as the printer is tempted, to work away from the center of gravity. In Italy there is a building, an architectural curiosity—the leaning tower of Pisa (Example 73) in the construction of which gravity has been defied to the limit, and in Canada only recently a bridge in course of construction on this gravity-defying principle, fell in a mass into the river. In typography, safety from blunder lies in type lines horizontally centered. Typographic experts experimenting with out-of-the-center balance, both succeed and fail. Compositors imitating them generally fail. Example 76 is an out-of-the-center arrangement that is fairly successful. Balance is saved by the type-lines in the upper left corner and by the border surrounding the page. Examples 69 and 75 show out-of-center balance adapted to a business card and a booklet cover.

Balance is another crucial topic, as it plays a huge role in whether typography looks good or bad. Just like builders use plumb lines and spirit levels to ensure their walls are perfectly balanced, printers can sometimes be tempted to stray from the center of gravity. In Italy, there's a famous architectural oddity—the Leaning Tower of Pisa (Example 73), where gravity has been challenged to the extreme. Recently, in Canada, a bridge under construction based on this gravity-defying concept collapsed into the river. In typography, avoiding mistakes relies on having type lines centered horizontally. Typographic experts who experiment with off-center balance can both succeed and fail. Compositors trying to mimic them generally fail. Example 76 is an off-center design that works reasonably well. Balance is achieved through the type lines in the upper left corner and the border surrounding the page. Examples 69 and 75 illustrate off-center balance applied to a business card and a booklet cover.

EXAMPLE 69

Out-of-center balance, adapted to a business card

EXAMPLE 69

Off-center balance, modified for a business card

While horizontally the center is the point of perfect balance, vertically it is not. Stick a pin thru the very center of an oblong piece of cardboard and twirl the card; when movement ceases the card may not hang uprightly. Mark off the card in three equal sections and stick the pin thru the horizontal center of the line separating the upper two thirds. After being twirled the card will cease to move in a perfectly upright position. Example 71 shows a word placed in exact center, yet it appears to be low. Example 72 shows a line above center at the point of vertical balance. On a title-page, business card, and on most jobs of printing 57the weight should come at this point. The principal line, or group, should provide strength necessary to give balance. Example 70 presents a page with type group and ornament placed unusually high. The typographer responsible was undoubtedly testing balance to the limit.

While horizontally, the center is the point of perfect balance, vertically, it isn't. If you stick a pin through the very center of an oblong piece of cardboard and spin the card, when it stops moving, it may not hang straight up. Divide the card into three equal sections and stick the pin through the horizontal center of the line separating the upper two-thirds. After spinning, the card will come to rest in a perfectly upright position. Example 71 shows a word placed exactly in the center, yet it appears to be low. Example 72 shows a line above the center at the point of vertical balance. On a title page, business card, and most printing jobs, 57 the weight should be at this point. The main line or group should provide the strength necessary for balance. Example 70 presents a page with a type group and ornament placed unusually high. The typographer responsible was undoubtedly pushing the limits of balance.

EXAMPLE 66

Type proportionately too large for the average page

EXAMPLE 66

Type size is too large for the average page

EXAMPLE 67

Type proportionately too small for the average page

EXAMPLE 67

Text size is proportionately too small for the average page

EXAMPLE 68

This proportion is about right for the average page

EXAMPLE 68

This ratio is about right for the typical page.

EXAMPLE 62

In which the lines of the design run in the proper direction. Arranged by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 62

In which the lines of the design run in the right direction. Arranged by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 70

In which the upper type group is unusually high. Page by D. B. Updike

EXAMPLE 70

In which the upper type group is exceptionally high. Page by D. B. Updike

Sometimes the customer gets a notion he wants a type-line placed diagonally across the page in a manner like Example 74. Such arrangements generally show lack of imagination and are crudely freakish. There are so many orderly ways of arranging type that such poorly balanced specimens are deplorable.

Sometimes the customer gets an idea that he wants a type line placed diagonally across the page like Example 74. Such arrangements usually show a lack of creativity and come off as awkward. There are so many organized ways to arrange text that these poorly balanced examples are unfortunate.

EXAMPLE 74

A disorderly arrangement

A messy arrangement

Spacing is seemingly one of the little things—merely incidental to the mechanical practice of typography. When the apprentice compositor is told to divide his spaces evenly among all the words in a line; not to thin space one line and double-thick space another; to transpose a two-point lead, or make some other what to him may appear to be trivial alteration in spacing, he judges his instructor to be over-particular. Yet the proper apportionment of space on a page determines the tone and the balance and aids in giving proportion and emphasis.

Spacing might seem like one of the minor details—just a small part of the technical side of typography. When a trainee typesetter is instructed to evenly distribute spaces between all the words in a line, not to use a thin space for one line and a double space for another, or to adjust a two-point lead, he may think his teacher is being overly picky. However, the correct distribution of space on a page shapes the tone, creates balance, and helps provide proportion and emphasis.

In type-making, when a font of type is designed, not only is each letter considered separately, but in combination with every other letter of the alphabet, that when the letters are assembled into words space may be evenly distributed. The designers of the best type-faces have given attention to this feature and have demonstrated that legibility is increased with proper space distribution. Because of the excessive open space it contains, the capital L gives the most trouble of any letter used as an initial. As part of the word “Millinery” the irregularity of spacing is particularly prominent (Example 79-a). Partly to overcome this irregularity the companion letters should be spaced as shown in 79-b. When the letters A T occur together, and the space between them should be decreased, it is necessary to file the metal in the upper right of the type A and the metal in the lower left of the type T.

In type-making, when a font is designed, not only is each letter considered individually, but it's also looked at in combination with every other letter in the alphabet, so that when the letters come together to form words, the spacing is even. The designers of the best typefaces pay attention to this detail and have shown that good spacing improves legibility. Because of the excessive open space it has, the capital L is the most problematic letter when used as an initial. In the word “Millinery,” the irregular spacing is especially noticeable (Example 79-a). To address this irregularity, the accompanying letters should be spaced as shown in 79-b. When the letters A and T appear together, and the space between them needs to be decreased, it’s necessary to adjust the metal in the upper right of the type A and the metal in the lower left of the type T.

EXAMPLE 71

A word placed in exact center appears to be low

EXAMPLE 71

A word positioned in the exact center seems to be low.

EXAMPLE 72

Showing the point of vertical balance

EXAMPLE 72

Demonstrating the point of vertical balance

With roman type-faces, important words are usually emphasized by italics or small capitals. The Germans, using for body purposes a text letter which has no italic or small capitals, space the letters to get emphasis (Example 80-a). Letter-spaced words thus used are perhaps as neat as italic, and the idea may well be adapted to roman types (Example 80-b).

With standard fonts, important words are usually highlighted using italics or small caps. The Germans, using a typeface for body text that doesn’t have italics or small caps, space the letters to create emphasis (Example 80-a). Letter-spaced words used in this way are just as neat as italics, and this idea could easily be adapted to standard fonts (Example 80-b).

EXAMPLE 73

Balance out of center

Unbalanced

EXAMPLE 75

The ornament balances the design. Page by School of Printing, Boston

EXAMPLE 75

The decoration balances the design. Page by School of Printing, Boston

EXAMPLE 76

Out-of-center balance. Page by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 76

Off-center balance. Page by Will Bradley

The relation of lines to proportion, 58as illustrated by Examples 62 and 63, is also to be considered in the composition of plain reading pages. Example 77 shows how the effect of horizontal lines is given by narrow spacing between the words and wide spacing between the lines. This gives a result, like that of Example 63, contrary to the principles of proportion. How this may be overcome is illustrated in Example 78, which contains the same amount of space between the words as is between the lines. This treatment not only gives better proportion, but improves the tone of the page.

The relationship between lines and proportion, 58 as shown by Examples 62 and 63, should also be taken into account when designing simple reading pages. Example 77 demonstrates how horizontal lines are enhanced by narrow spacing between words and wider spacing between lines. This creates an effect, similar to that in Example 63, that goes against the principles of proportion. How to resolve this issue is shown in Example 78, which maintains the same amount of space between words as between lines. This approach not only achieves better proportion but also enhances the overall tone of the page.

EXAMPLE 77

The effect of horizontal lines is given by narrow spacing between the words and wide spacing between the lines

EXAMPLE 77

The impact of horizontal lines comes from the tight spacing between words and the wide spacing between lines.

EXAMPLE 79

Other letters must be spaced because of the open appearance of the letter “L”

EXAMPLE 79

Other letters need to be spaced out due to the open look of the letter “L.”

EXAMPLE 81

The erroneous and obsolete practice of spreading the lines over the page

EXAMPLE 81

The outdated and incorrect practice of spreading the lines across the page

Adapting this principle to display composition, Examples 81 and 82 are enlightening. Example 81 shows the manner in which some years ago display lines were erroneously distributed over the entire page, presenting in effect the faults of Example 77. The manner of rectifying these faults is demonstrated in Example 82, where main lines are grouped at the point of balance in the upper part of the page.

Adapting this principle to display composition, Examples 81 and 82 are insightful. Example 81 illustrates how, years ago, display lines were incorrectly spread across the whole page, effectively showcasing the issues of Example 77. The way to fix these issues is shown in Example 82, where the main lines are organized at the balance point in the upper part of the page.

The narrow measure to which these words are set necessitates letterspacing. The resulting appearance is far from satisfactory yet it enables illustrations to be grouped pleasingly and makes possible a squaring of the pages which could not be done otherwise.

The tight spacing of these words requires letterspacing. The overall look isn't great, but it allows illustrations to be organized nicely and helps align the pages in a way that wouldn’t be possible otherwise.

EXAMPLE 78

The effect of horizontal lines is avoided by having the space between the words approximate that between the lines

EXAMPLE 78

The impact of horizontal lines is minimized by keeping the space between the words similar to the space between the lines.

EXAMPLE 80

Emphasis obtained by letterspacing, in lieu of italics and small capitals

EXAMPLE 80

Emphasis achieved through letter spacing instead of italics and small caps.

EXAMPLE 82

The correct modern practice of grouping the lines at the point of balance

EXAMPLE 82

The right way to group the lines at the balance point

It is not always that results are as perfect as we desire them. In New England there is a printer who, in the opinion of those fortunate to have viewed his work, is producing typography classically perfect; yet this man goes from his work at the close of the day almost discouraged because of the faults that are evident to his trained eye. The artist’s ideal always eludes him and the chase seems a hopeless one, yet he continues on lest he lose sight of it altogether. It is a good sign when one recognizes imperfections; it means that he is gaining ground on success.

It isn't always the case that results come out as perfect as we'd like. In New England, there’s a printer who, according to those lucky enough to see his work, creates typography that’s classically perfect; yet this man leaves his work at the end of the day feeling almost discouraged because of the mistakes that are clear to his trained eye. The artist's ideal always seems just out of reach, and the pursuit feels hopeless, but he keeps going so he doesn't lose sight of it completely. Recognizing imperfections is a good sign; it means he’s making progress towards success.

EXAMPLE 125

Illustrating the significance of ornamentation, as applied to a booklet. Design by the Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, N. Y.

EXAMPLE 125

Showing the importance of decoration, as used in a booklet. Design by the Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, N. Y.

59

ORNAMENTATION

Offer a child the choice of two toys, alike excepting that one has a flower painted upon it, and he will doubtlessly select the ornamented one; proving that the human race has a natural liking for ornamentation. When the old-time trader visited savage countries, he took with him colored glass and brought back gold. The glass soon after ornamented the somber bodies of the savages, and the gold became rings and bracelets worn by the whites. There are those in this day who love the trees and the flowers and hear music in the brooks, but more find pleasure in artificially ornamented ball-rooms with music blown and sawn and hammered from brass and catgut and sheepskin.

Give a child the choice between two toys that are similar, except one has a flower painted on it, and they'll likely pick the one with the decoration. This shows that humans naturally enjoy ornamentation. When old-time traders went to remote places, they brought along colored glass and returned with gold. The glass quickly decorated the plain bodies of the locals, while the gold was turned into rings and bracelets for white people. Nowadays, some people love trees and flowers and can hear music in the brooks, but more find joy in artificially decorated ballrooms filled with music played from brass, strings, and leather.

EXAMPLE 83

The egg-and-dart ornament

The egg-and-dart design

EXAMPLE 84

The bead ornament

The bead decoration

Man was created in a garden of flowers and trees pleasant to the sight, yet he has ever been yearning for a new Eden of pure gold, garnished with precious stones, forgetting that Solomon in all his glory was not arrayed like the lily of the field. Nature is the great artist, and man’s ornamentation at best is a poor imitation of natural things. The trees of the forest gave the motive for the stone columns and ornamental capitals of architecture, and the plant and animal world furnished themes for talented calligraphers in the days when books were literally written. The blue vault of the skies inspired Michelangelo to plan the great dome of St. Peter’s at Rome, as the sun furnished a model for the Indian while decorating his tepee, and the flowers of the field have provided inexhaustible color harmonies.

Man was created in a garden filled with beautiful flowers and trees, yet he has always longed for a new Eden made of pure gold and adorned with precious stones, forgetting that even Solomon in all his glory wasn't dressed as beautifully as the lilies in the field. Nature is the ultimate artist, and man's decorations are merely poor imitations of what is natural. The trees in the forest inspired the stone columns and decorative capitals of architecture, and the plant and animal worlds provided themes for skilled calligraphers in the days when books were actually handwritten. The blue sky inspired Michelangelo to design the grand dome of St. Peter’s in Rome, just as the sun inspired Native Americans decorating their tepees, and the flowers in the fields have offered endless color combinations.

EXAMPLE 85

The egg-and-dart ornament as a typographic border

EXAMPLE 85

The egg-and-dart design as a font border

In the early days of this country most of the inhabitants devoted their working hours to the struggle for existence, and it has been only within recent years that the average man has given thought to art. Many a one has thrown off his lethargy to discover beautiful things all about which he had never before noticed.

In the early days of this country, most people spent their working hours just trying to survive, and it’s only in recent years that the average person has started to think about art. Many have shaken off their apathy to realize there are beautiful things all around them that they had never noticed before.

Art galleries and libraries all over the United States are aiding greatly in the cultivation of taste for art, and the printer to whom these privileges are accessible, yet who does not avail himself of their advantages, is much like the man who was lost in the Adirondacks, not knowing he was but a half-mile from a railroad. China, who could conquer the world if she only knew her power, has been sleeping for centuries, while a little handful of intelligent people on a small island of Europe wields an influence that is felt wherever the sun shines.

Art galleries and libraries across the United States are greatly helping to develop an appreciation for art. A printer who has access to these resources but doesn’t take advantage of them is like a guy who got lost in the Adirondacks without realizing he was only half a mile from a railroad. China, which could conquer the world if it recognized its own strength, has been in a deep slumber for centuries, while a small group of intelligent individuals on a small island in Europe holds influence that is felt all around the globe.

EXAMPLE 86

The bead ornament as a typographic border

EXAMPLE 86

The bead decoration as a typographic border

The printer and he of an allied vocation should take less thought of food and raiment and devote more thought to learning the things of today and yesterday with which he may be but little acquainted. If one knows just enough to “make a living” he will never make more than a living. A study of art, of history, of the larger things in the printing business, will result in the good things of the earth being added.

The printer and someone in a similar field should focus less on food and clothing and spend more time learning about the important topics of today and yesterday that they might not know much about. If someone only knows enough to "get by," they'll never achieve more than just getting by. Studying art, history, and the broader aspects of the printing industry will lead to greater rewards in life.


Is ornamentation necessary to art-typography? Ask one good printer and he will answer, yes. Ask another and he will answer, no. One of the meanings of ornament as given by the Standard dictionary is: “A part or an addition that contributes to the beauty or elegance of a thing.” A paper may be so pleasing in texture as to give beauty or elegance to an otherwise plain page of 60printing; in fact, it is sometimes a mistake to use type ornaments or other embellishment on a richly finished hand-made paper. On the contrary, a stock poor in quality or color had better be covered with decoration to divert attention from the paper.

Is ornamentation necessary for art-typography? Ask one good printer, and they'll say yes. Ask another, and they'll say no. One definition of ornament from the Standard dictionary is: “A part or an addition that contributes to the beauty or elegance of a thing.” A paper can be so nice in texture that it brings beauty or elegance to an otherwise plain page of 60 printing; in fact, it can sometimes be a mistake to use type ornaments or other embellishments on a beautifully finished handmade paper. On the other hand, low-quality or poorly colored stock is better off covered with decoration to take attention away from the paper.

EXAMPLE 87

Conventionalized papyrus plant (Egyptian)

Papyrus plant (Egyptian)

EXAMPLE 88

The winged ball, an ornament much used by the Egyptians

EXAMPLE 88

The winged ball, a decorative item commonly used by the Egyptians

EXAMPLE 89

The acanthus leaf, much used by the Greeks and Romans in ornamentation

EXAMPLE 89

The acanthus leaf, widely used by the Greeks and Romans in decoration

EXAMPLE 90

Palm-like ornament, used by Greeks and Romans

EXAMPLE 90

Palm-shaped decoration, used by Greeks and Romans

EXAMPLE 91

Plain and dignified. The Doric pillar

EXAMPLE 91

Simple and elegant. The Doric column

EXAMPLE 92

Slightly ornamental. The Ionic pillar

EXAMPLE 92

Somewhat decorative. The Ionic column

EXAMPLE 93

Elaborately ornamental. The Corinthian pillar

EXAMPLE 93

Highly decorative. The Corinthian column

There are printshops in which all ornaments are kept under lock and key; a compositor wishing to use decoration must present good reasons before he gets it. Customers have become suspicious of type ornamentation because of the peculiar use to which printers sometimes put it. A young man some years ago became possessed of a desire to do artistic printing and had a number of type ornaments purchased with which to express his ideas. When one proof after another came from the customer with ominous blue marks upon the cherished ornaments, he realized the necessity of revising his ideas of art. For fully a year after that he worked without voluntarily using an ornament, meanwhile developing all the possibilities of good type-faces and appropriate paper stocks and color combinations. It has been claimed that fasting has a beneficial effect on the body; be that as it may, our friend certainly improved his artistic taste by his abstinence. When he again began using ornaments it was with discrimination and after study of their significance and appropriateness.

There are print shops where all the decorations are kept under lock and key; a typesetter wanting to use any decorations must provide good reasons before getting them. Customers have grown suspicious of type decorations because of the strange ways printers sometimes use them. A young man a few years ago became determined to do artistic printing and had a bunch of type ornaments bought so he could express his ideas. When one proof after another came back from the client with ominous blue marks on the cherished ornaments, he realized he needed to rethink his ideas about art. For a whole year after that, he worked without voluntarily using any ornaments, meanwhile exploring all the possibilities of good typefaces, suitable paper stocks, and color combinations. It's been said that fasting has a positive effect on the body; whether that’s true or not, our friend definitely improved his artistic taste by his restraint. When he finally started using ornaments again, it was with care and only after studying their meaning and suitability.


This leads to the subject of motive or reason in ornamentation. The styles of typography may be generally divided into two classes, one dominated by Roman or Italian influence and the other by Gothic or German influence. During the Middle Ages the Gothic influence was felt chiefly because the pointed style of architecture and embellishment was sanctioned by the Christian church. As art was practically dead outside the church, the art-workers absorbed the Gothic style.

This leads us to the topic of motive or reason in decoration. Typography styles can generally be split into two categories: one influenced by Roman or Italian styles and the other by Gothic or German styles. During the Middle Ages, the Gothic influence was primarily significant because the pointed architectural style and decoration were endorsed by the Christian church. Since art was almost non-existent outside of the church, artists embraced the Gothic style.

EXAMPLE 94

Ornamentation as used by the Romans on an entablature and a Corinthian pillar, showing egg-and-dart, bead, and acanthus ornaments

EXAMPLE 94

Decoration used by the Romans on an entablature and a Corinthian column, featuring egg-and-dart, bead, and acanthus designs.

When typography was invented Gutenberg’s first book was based upon the Gothic style—the type-face a pointed black letter, such as was then used on manuscript books, and the ornamentation pointed foliage (done by hand). It was some years after this that typography came under the influence of the Italian Renaissance, and both type-faces and decoration assumed the Roman style. In the old days there was sympathy between the various arts and crafts, and it worked for harmony in effects. Building-decoration, metal-carving and wood-engraving were governed by the same artistic motive, and were often done by the same man, much as the printer at one time was compositor, pressman, binder, typefounder, ink-maker and paper-maker, all in one. Now, many a piece of printing goes wrong because the ideas of several people, inharmonious from lack of relation, are injected into the work during the several stages necessary for its production.

When typography was invented, Gutenberg’s first book was designed using the Gothic style—the font featured pointed black letters, similar to what was used in manuscript books, with hand-done ornamental foliage. Years later, typography began to be influenced by the Italian Renaissance, leading to both fonts and decorations taking on a Roman style. In the past, there was a strong connection between the various arts and crafts, which created a harmonious effect. Building decoration, metalwork, and wood engraving were all driven by the same artistic vision and were often performed by the same person, just as the printer used to also be the typesetter, pressman, binder, type founder, ink maker, and paper maker, all at once. Nowadays, many printing projects go awry because conflicting ideas from different people, lacking cohesion, are introduced at various stages of production.

The relation of typography to architecture is plainly shown in the formation of the Roman and Gothic alphabets. The letters of the Roman alphabet, dignified in their straight strokes and symmetrical in their rounded lines, suggest features of Roman architecture (Example 106; also see Example 43 of a previous article). In the interesting picturesqueness of the pointed black Gothic letter may be seen reflections of the graceful arches of the cathedral pointing upward like hands in prayer—and of the pointed leaf ornamentation of the Gothic period. (Example 107.)

The connection between typography and architecture is clearly illustrated in the development of the Roman and Gothic alphabets. The letters of the Roman alphabet, elegant in their straight lines and balanced in their curves, reflect aspects of Roman architecture (Example 106; also see Example 43 from a previous article). In the captivating design of the pointed black Gothic letter, you can see echoes of the graceful arches of cathedrals reaching up like hands in prayer, as well as the pointed leaf decorations of the Gothic era. (Example 107.)

EXAMPLE 98

Dainty, elaborate rococo ornament, as applied to a program title-page. Compare with the chair, Example 97

EXAMPLE 98

Delicate, detailed rococo decoration, as used on a program title page. Compare with the chair, Example 97

61Ornamentation is both inventive and imitative. An ornament purely inventive or one purely imitative is seldom artistic. A child may make a jumble of lines that altho original means nothing; when it is older it may draw a flower so realistic and imitative that little is left to the imagination. When a flower or plant is used as a model in designing an ornament it is “conventionalized,” that is, it is blended with its environment. A flower in a garden surrounded by other vegetation should be as the other flowers, but as an ornament on the flat surface of paper it should be without perspective. Example 108-a shows how commonplace an ornament looks when its details are carefully shaded in perspective. Examples 108-b and 108-c show how more decorative an ornament is when either outlined or filled in. Sometimes shadows are merely suggested, as on the fruit basket and book ornaments in Example 113.

61Ornamentation is both creative and imitative. An ornament that is completely original or entirely imitative is rarely considered artistic. A child might create a chaotic mix of lines that, while original, doesn't convey anything; as they grow older, they might draw a flower so realistically that there's little left to the imagination. When a flower or plant is used as a reference for designing an ornament, it is "conventionalized," meaning it blends with its surroundings. A flower in a garden, surrounded by other plants, should resemble the other flowers, but as an ornament on a flat piece of paper, it should lack perspective. Example 108-a demonstrates how ordinary an ornament appears when its details are carefully shaded to show perspective. Examples 108-b and 108-c illustrate how much more decorative an ornament can be when it is either outlined or filled in. Sometimes shadows are only suggested, like in the fruit basket and book ornaments in Example 113.

EXAMPLE 95

Square-lined, ornamentless furniture

Modern, minimalist furniture

EXAMPLE 97

Dainty and elaborate rococo ornament, as applied to furniture. Compare Example 98

EXAMPLE 97

Delicate and intricate rococo decorations, as used in furniture. Compare Example 98

EXAMPLE 100

Slightly ornamental typography. Compare with chair opposite. Design by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 100

Slightly decorative typography. Compare with chair opposite. Design by Will Bradley

In the conventionalized decorative art of all ages may be found traces of the things which have inspired the decorator. The lotus leaf, and the papyrus plant (which once gave writing material to the world) thousands of years ago influenced Egyptian design (Example 87). Religion dictated many of the decorative forms in ancient art. The winged-ball-and-asps (Example 88) was a favorite device in Egyptian decoration and has come to us by way of Roman mythology as the winged staff of the herald Mercury, the ribbons on the staff supplanting the Egyptian asps, but later evolving into serpents as in the decorative border of Example 125. The work of the best artists is full of meaning. The Egyptians considered certain animals sacred, and they were reproduced numerously in the picture-writing and ornamentation of the time. The sacred beetle as conventionalized was much used. In Example 125 the cog-wheel of commerce is conventionalized as the rim of the ball, which also contains a seal. The anchor and rope, hour glass, wreath, torch, acanthus leaves, all are conventionalized and blended pleasingly in outline drawing. The tone of the border approximates that of the type matter it surrounds.

In the decorative art of all ages, you can see hints of the things that inspired the artists. The lotus leaf and the papyrus plant (which once provided writing material to the world) influenced Egyptian design thousands of years ago (Example 87). Religion shaped many of the decorative styles in ancient art. The winged ball and asps (Example 88) were popular motifs in Egyptian decoration and have come down to us through Roman mythology as the winged staff of the messenger Mercury, with the ribbons on the staff replacing the Egyptian asps, later evolving into serpents as seen in the decorative border of Example 125. The work of the finest artists is rich in meaning. The Egyptians viewed certain animals as sacred, and these were often depicted in their writing and ornamentation. The sacred beetle was frequently stylized and used. In Example 125, the cog-wheel of commerce is stylized as the rim of the ball, which also features a seal. The anchor and rope, hourglass, wreath, torch, and acanthus leaves are all stylized and harmoniously blended in the outline drawing. The tone of the border is similar to that of the text it surrounds.

EXAMPLE 96

Square-lined, ornamentless typography. Compare with chair opposite. Design by Fleming & Carnrick, New York

EXAMPLE 96

Square-edged, simple typography. Compare with chair opposite. Designed by Fleming & Carnrick, New York

EXAMPLE 99

Slightly ornamental furniture

Slightly decorative furniture

The acanthus leaf (Example 89) is the model for much of the elaborate leaf decoration found on the capitals of Corinthian columns and wherever rich imposing leaf ornament is desired. The anthemion (Example 90) is a palm-like ornament used by the Greeks and Romans, now frequently found in decorative work of an architectural nature.

The acanthus leaf (Example 89) is the inspiration for a lot of the intricate leaf designs seen on the tops of Corinthian columns and in any place where luxurious leaf decorations are wanted. The anthemion (Example 90) is a palm-like decoration used by the Greeks and Romans, and it's now commonly found in architectural decorative work.


It may not occur to the average printer that architecture is in any way allied with typography—that there is any connection between the ornamentation of a building and a job of printing. Fred W. Goudy, Bruce 62Rogers and D. B. Updike employ conventionalized architectural columns and arches to ornament title-pages of classic motives. The average typographer, tho, finds more inspiration in the ornamentation that is only an embellishment to architecture. There are several ornamental units that are used more frequently than others, and these are the egg-and-dart (Example 83) and the bead (Example 84). You, who are reading this, are invited to verify by observation this last statement. A printer who did so was astonished at the eggs, darts, and beads that were to be seen wherever he looked. Cut into the stone of buildings, carved into the wood of furniture, used on molding about doors and windows, on office partitions, on library lamps, in the ceiling panels of restaurants, about the prosceniums in theaters, around the mirror in the barber shop—wherever he looked there were the ornaments. It is remarkable how non-observant the average printer is. The hands of artists—Greeks and Romans—who lived thousands of years ago made similar designs, and yet a knowledge of history is counted non-essential by printers and others!

It might not cross the mind of the typical printer that architecture is in any way connected to typography—that there’s a link between the decoration of a building and a printing job. Fred W. Goudy, Bruce Rogers, and D. B. Updike use stylized architectural columns and arches to decorate title pages of classic designs. However, the average typographer draws more inspiration from the decorations that simply embellish architecture. There are several decorative elements that are used more often than others, such as the egg-and-dart (Example 83) and the bead (Example 84). If you’re reading this, you are invited to observe this claim for yourself. A printer who did so was amazed at how many eggs, darts, and beads were everywhere he looked. Cut into the stone of buildings, carved into furniture, used on moldings around doors and windows, on office partitions, on library lamps, in the ceiling panels of restaurants, around the prosceniums in theaters, and around mirrors in barbershops—everywhere he looked, there were the ornaments. It’s astounding how little attention the average printer pays to their surroundings. The hands of artists—Greeks and Romans—who lived thousands of years ago created similar designs, and yet printers and others consider knowledge of history non-essential!

EXAMPLE 101

Regularity of repeat

Consistency of repetition

EXAMPLE 102

Variety of repeat

Variety of repeats

EXAMPLE 103

Monotony

Boredom

EXAMPLE 104

Less monotony

Less boredom

EXAMPLE 105

Contrasted shapes prevent monotony

Contrasting shapes prevent boredom

EXAMPLE 106

Type border of Roman architectural ornament. Compare the straight and curved lines with the Roman type-face

EXAMPLE 106

Type border of Roman architectural decoration. Compare the straight and curved lines with the Roman typeface.

Let us apply the egg-and-dart and bead ornaments as borders in typography, and notice how admirably they serve the purpose. Example 85 shows the egg-and-dart ornament perhaps too carefully drawn as to detail; and Example 86 demonstrates how the bead ornament may be adapted to panel work.

Let’s use the egg-and-dart and bead designs as borders in typography and see how well they work. Example 85 illustrates the egg-and-dart design, which might be overly detailed; and Example 86 shows how the bead design can be used in panel work.

From early times there seems to have been a triple division of taste regarding ornament. In the days of Rome these divisions were given expression in the treatment of supporting columns, the three styles being known respectively as Doric, Ionic and Corinthian. The Doric column is severely plain, the Ionic slightly ornamental, and the Corinthian elaborately ornamental.

From ancient times, there has been a threefold division of taste in decoration. During the Roman era, these divisions were reflected in how supporting columns were designed, with the three styles being called Doric, Ionic, and Corinthian. The Doric column is very simple, the Ionic has a bit of decoration, and the Corinthian is richly adorned.

The Doric style (Example 91) is emblematic of dignity, simplicity and strength, and appeals to the man preferring these qualities in printing.

The Doric style (Example 91) represents dignity, simplicity, and strength, appealing to those who value these qualities in design.

The Ionic style (Example 92) represents refinement in ornament, and pleases the man able to discriminate between the severely plain and the over-ornamented—a quality of judgment worth cultivating by every typographer.

The Ionic style (Example 92) represents a level of sophistication in decoration and appeals to those who can distinguish between the starkly simple and the excessively decorated—a skill in judgment that every typographer should strive to develop.

Outlined                   Filled in
Illustration, not ornament     Ornaments without perspective

EXAMPLE 108                                    

Outlined                   Filled in
Illustration, not decoration     Decorations without depth

EXAMPLE 108

The Corinthian style (Example 93) expresses the preference of many who delight in ostentation and elaboration in ornament. The elaborate, showy acanthus leaf usually forms the chief decoration for the capital surmounting the column, and the entablature (Example 94) is particularly rich in ornamentation.

The Corinthian style (Example 93) reflects the taste of many who enjoy extravagance and intricate details in decoration. The detailed, ornate acanthus leaf typically serves as the main ornament for the capital on top of the column, and the entablature (Example 94) is especially lavish in its design.

The Doric pillar has been called masculine and the Ionic feminine, the sturdiness of the one and the grace of the other also being likened to the warlike Spartans who emphasized the development of the body and the artistic Athenians who especially developed the intellect.

The Doric column is often referred to as masculine, while the Ionic is seen as feminine, with the strength of the former and the elegance of the latter comparing to the tough Spartans, who focused on physical prowess, and the artistic Athenians, who prioritized intellectual development.

This difference in ideals and preferences has come down the centuries to our time. A few years after Cromwell, plain, blunt, and even disapproving of sculpture and painting, was ruling England, across the channel Louis XIV. strutted in corsets and on high red heels amid gilt and glamour in the courts of France.

This difference in ideals and preferences has been passed down through the centuries to our time. A few years after Cromwell, plain, straightforward, and even critical of sculpture and painting, was ruling England, while across the channel Louis XIV strutted in corsets and high red heels amidst gold and glamour in the courts of France.

EXAMPLE 107

Type-border of English-Gothic pointed ornament.

Compare the black pointed effects with the Gothic type-face

EXAMPLE 107

Type-border of English-Gothic pointed ornament.

Compare the black pointed effects with the Gothic typeface.

Monks and nuns lived plainly in the company of bare walls and squarely cut chairs, and dressed in subdued browns and blacks, while at Rome surrounded by the art works of Michelangelo and Raphael the higher dignitaries 63were clothed in brilliant reds, and gold and white.

Monks and nuns lived simply among bare walls and square chairs, dressed in muted browns and blacks, while in Rome, surrounded by the artworks of Michelangelo and Raphael, the higher officials were dressed in vibrant reds, golds, and whites. 63

EXAMPLE 109

Extravagant wall border ornamentation, designed during the Renaissance in Italy

EXAMPLE 109

Fancy wall border decorations, created during the Renaissance in Italy

Morris loved an old worn-out house, squarely-cut furniture, burlap, and subdued colors; while the Newly-riches boast of the magnificence of their mansions, Louis Quinze ball-rooms and imported tapestry.

Morris loved an old, shabby house, straightforward furniture, burlap, and muted colors; while the newly rich brag about the grandeur of their mansions, Louis XV ballrooms, and imported tapestries.

Only recently two church buildings were remodeled. In one were placed ornamental brass railings, lectern, pulpit and candelabra, and stained-glass pictorial windows; the walls were covered with gilt fleurs-de-lis on maroon backgrounds, and the entire effect was one of cheap magnificence. The other church had been an old Colonial structure of square proportions. Dignified mahogany furnishings were selected, the walls were ornamented in pure geometric designs, pale gold on tinted backgrounds, and the windows were made of small panes of glass subdued in color, in harmony with the architecture of the building, with a result that spoke good taste and refinement.

Only recently, two church buildings were remodeled. One had ornamental brass railings, a lectern, a pulpit, and candelabra, along with stained-glass windows featuring pictures; the walls were decorated with gold fleurs-de-lis on maroon backgrounds, creating an effect of cheap grandeur. The other church was an old Colonial structure with square proportions. Elegant mahogany furnishings were chosen, the walls were decorated with pure geometric designs in pale gold on tinted backgrounds, and the windows consisted of small glass panes in muted colors, matching the building's architecture and resulting in a feeling of good taste and sophistication.

Examples 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, present the three divisions of taste—the plain, ornamentless; the slightly ornamental, and the elaborately ornamental—applied to typography and reflected in furniture. The typographer should learn that the arts are related, that the styles of home-furnishings and architecture influence the styles of typography. A few years ago mission furniture was introduced and along with it came architecture that called for exposed roof supports, squarely-cut moldings, coarse fabric wall coverings, subdued green and brown tapestries. And before they knew the reason, printers were using heavy brass rules, rugged type-faces and printing on dark-hued antique papers. Example 96 is a program page produced under these influences. Compare it with the so-called “mission” chair (Example 95) and note the resemblance of motive. Both are rugged, angular and plain.

Examples 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, showcase the three types of taste—the simple and unadorned; the somewhat decorative; and the highly decorative—applied to typography and reflected in furniture design. The typographer should understand that the arts are interconnected, and that the styles of home furnishings and architecture affect typography styles. Not too long ago, mission furniture became popular, bringing with it architectural styles that featured exposed roof supports, square-cut moldings, coarse fabric wall coverings, and muted green and brown tapestries. Before they realized it, printers were using heavy brass rules, robust typefaces, and printing on dark antique papers. Example 96 is a program page created under these influences. Compare it with the so-called “mission” chair (Example 95) and observe the similarity in design. Both are rugged, angular, and simple.

EXAMPLE 110

Roman scroll ornament cut in stone

EXAMPLE 110

Roman scroll design carved in stone

EXAMPLE 111

Type ornament based upon geometric lines

EXAMPLE 111

Type ornament based on geometric lines

EXAMPLE 112

Type ornament based upon foliage

EXAMPLE 112

Type of ornament inspired by leaves

EXAMPLE 113

Type ornament based upon the inanimate

EXAMPLE 113

Type ornament inspired by non-living things

EXAMPLE 114

Type ornament based upon the animate

EXAMPLE 114

Type ornament based on living forms

EXAMPLE 115. Ornamental hand-lettered effect; obtained by initials, text letter and rule

EXAMPLE 115. Decorative hand-lettered effect; achieved using initials, text letters, and a line.

Now for contrast, compare them with 64the dainty, elaborately ornamental chair (Example 97) and the title-page (Example 98). Both chair and title-page designs are based upon the frivolous rococo style of the period known as Louis XV. (or Louis Quinze). In that period, shells and leaves conventionalized into graceful, golden curves were blended with a profusion of roses and other flowers. Straight lines were avoided, and furniture and architecture took on curves even to the extent of causing structural weakness.

Now for contrast, compare them with the delicate, intricately decorative chair (Example 97) and the title page (Example 98). Both the chair and title page designs are inspired by the whimsical rococo style of the Louis XV period. During this time, shells and leaves were stylized into elegant, flowing curves, combined with an abundance of roses and other flowers. Straight lines were avoided, leading to furniture and architecture that featured curves, sometimes to the point of compromising structural integrity.

EXAMPLE 116

Corner ornaments may have been suggested by the bolts on inscription plates or by the cross lines on books

EXAMPLE 116

Corner decorations might have been inspired by the bolts on inscription plates or by the cross lines in books.

EXAMPLE 117

Ivy-leaf ornamentation, and spaces filled in by decoration. From an old manuscript book

EXAMPLE 117

Ivy-leaf designs, and areas filled with decoration. From an old manuscript book

Because a majority of type-faces are built upon horizontal and vertical lines, rococo type ornamentation is seldom successful in typography. The pen-and-ink border design (Example 98) is a clever adaptation of the Louis XV. rococo style. There is not an absolutely straight vertical or horizontal line in the border, and with the curves and flowers, ribbons, lattice-work and cupids it makes an appeal to women. The type-face combined with the border has similar characteristics—a freedom of line and an abundance of curves.

Because most typefaces are based on horizontal and vertical lines, rococo type ornamentation isn't usually effective in typography. The pen-and-ink border design (Example 98) is a smart adaptation of the Louis XV rococo style. There isn’t a single perfectly straight vertical or horizontal line in the border, and the curves, flowers, ribbons, lattice work, and cupids make it appealing to women. The typeface combined with the border shares similar traits—an ease of line and plenty of curves.

Examples 99 and 100 show a chair and an announcement page, both slightly ornamented to please those folks who like neither the severely plain nor the elaborately ornamental.

Examples 99 and 100 show a chair and an announcement page, both decorated just enough to satisfy those who prefer something not too simple and not too flashy.


Ornament is secondary to the real purpose of the thing it embellishes; it should not be so lavish as to distract attention from the more important object. A booklet is issued to convey a message, and should the reading matter be overshadowed by ornamentation, this purpose may not be accomplished. A “flowery” oration may entertain and please an audience, but it may not convince. In 1896 Bryan stampeded a convention by his extemporaneous eloquence and metaphor, but when he came to the “enemy’s country” and faced an audience which wanted facts, he read his address from carefully prepared manuscript.

Ornament is secondary to the main purpose of what it enhances; it shouldn't be so extravagant that it distracts from the more important object. A booklet is designed to convey a message, and if the content is overshadowed by decorative elements, this goal may not be achieved. A "flowery" speech might entertain and please the audience, but it may not persuade them. In 1896, Bryan stirred up a convention with his spontaneous eloquence and metaphors, but when he went into the "enemy's territory" and faced an audience that sought facts, he read his speech from a carefully prepared manuscript.

EXAMPLE 118

Filling blank spaces with ornamentation, as was done on manuscript books. Page by Government Printshop, Berlin, Germany

EXAMPLE 118

Decorating blank spaces, similar to what was done in manuscript books. Page by Government Printshop, Berlin, Germany

During the Middle Ages, when nations were fighting for existence and necessities of life were barely obtainable, there was little ornamentation except in isolated instances, but when, about the fifteenth century, the Renaissance came, art received an enthusiastic reception. Ornamentation was indulged in to excess, the artists using all the classic forms and inventing new ones. Example 109, showing wall border decoration, 65looks to the printer like a specimen sheet of type borders. This brings to mind that there is always the temptation to over-ornament when an artistic job is desired, and the necessity of advising printers to restrain themselves and save a few ornaments for other work. Our brethren of the cloth like to repeat the story of the theological student preaching his first sermon before the Seminary authorities. He began at Genesis and took his hearers thru the entire Bible to Revelation. When he had finished an old professor gravely asked what he would preach about the next Sunday.

During the Middle Ages, when nations were struggling just to survive and basic necessities were hard to come by, there was little decoration except in rare cases. However, when the Renaissance hit around the fifteenth century, art was embraced with great enthusiasm. Decoration became excessive, with artists utilizing all the classic styles and creating new ones. Example 109, showing wall border decoration, 65 looks to the printer like a sample sheet of type borders. This reminds us that there's always a temptation to over-decorate when an artistic project is wanted, highlighting the need to advise printers to hold back and save some ornaments for future work. Our fellow colleagues like to recount the tale of the theology student who preached his first sermon before the Seminary authorities. He started at Genesis and took his audience through the entire Bible to Revelation. When he finished, an older professor seriously asked what he planned to preach about the following Sunday.

The famous designer Chippendale, first made his furniture serviceable and then added ornament, from which fact the printer should profit. Have a printed job serve its purpose, and ornament it only so far as is consistent to this end. It is frequently advisable to omit decoration and let the type talk without interruption.

The well-known designer Chippendale first made his furniture functional and then added decoration, which is a lesson for printers. A printed piece should serve its purpose well, and only be decorated as much as necessary to achieve that. Often, it’s better to skip the embellishments and let the text speak for itself without distractions.


Ornamentation when used for border purposes has two features which may not be apparent to the superficial glance—regularity in repetition and variety in repetition. Example 101 shows repeated strokes of the same length. In Example 102 by alternating the length of the strokes the design is made more interesting. Examples 103, 104 and 105 illustrate this principle in rounded forms. In the first there is monotonous repetition, in the second there is less monotony because the oval form is less regular than the circle, and in Example 105, by contrasting the forms in both size and shape the design acquires new decorative interest. This principle of contrast and variety is exemplified in most border designs. In Example 107 the light scroll lines contrast with the black leaves, and in Example 106 curves are contrasted with angles. Contrast is sometimes obtained with color, as shown in Example 123.

Ornamentation used for borders has two features that might not be obvious at first glance—regularity in repetition and variety in repetition. Example 101 shows repeated strokes of the same length. In Example 102, the design becomes more interesting by alternating the lengths of the strokes. Examples 103, 104, and 105 illustrate this principle in rounded forms. The first has monotonous repetition, the second is less monotonous because the oval shape is less regular than the circle, and in Example 105, contrasting the forms in size and shape gives the design new decorative interest. This principle of contrast and variety is evident in most border designs. In Example 107, the light scroll lines contrast with the black leaves, and in Example 106, curves are contrasted with angles. Contrast is sometimes achieved through color, as shown in Example 123.


EXAMPLE 119

Semi-ornamental ecclesiastic style

Semi-decorative church style

Ornament as used by the printer may be divided into four classes: Ornament based upon geometric lines (Example 111), ornament based upon foliage (Example 112), ornament based upon the inanimate (Example 113) and ornament based upon the animate (Example 114). The center ornament in Example 111 contains the cross and circle, ecclesiastic devices, and its conventionalized pointed leaves would also admit it to the group shown as Example 112—ornament based upon foliage. Leaves and flowers from the beginning have been a prolific source of inspiration to artists. Before the invention of typography the decorator of manuscript books reveled in foliage, as will be seen by Example 117, and today when decoration is added by the process of printing the same liberal use of foliage is evidenced (Example 118). In both examples should be noticed the custom of filling blank spaces with decoration.

Ornament used by printers can be split into four categories: ornament based on geometric shapes (Example 111), ornament inspired by leaves (Example 112), ornament representing inanimate objects (Example 113), and ornament depicting living things (Example 114). The central ornament in Example 111 features a cross and circle, ecclesiastic symbols, and its stylized pointed leaves also place it in the group illustrated as Example 112—ornament based on leaves. From the very beginning, leaves and flowers have served as a rich source of inspiration for artists. Before typography was invented, manuscript book decorators thrived on foliage, as shown in Example 117, and even today, when prints are decorated, the same generous use of foliage is evident (Example 118). In both examples, you can see the practice of filling empty spaces with decorative elements.

            EXAMPLE 120. INITIALS

a—Foliage decoration based on the acanthus leaf
b—Imitation of mortised woodcut initials
c—Simple geometric treatment
d—Rugged Colonial style
e—Suggesting literary use
f—Italian ornamentation
g—Plain black and white effect
h—Modern adaptation of Roman torch
i—German scroll decoration
j—Based upon the uncial character
k—Woodcut effect as used by Morris

EXAMPLE 120. INITIALS

a—Foliage decoration inspired by the acanthus leaf
b—Imitation of mortised woodcut initials
c—Simple geometric design
d—Rugged Colonial style
e—Suggesting literary use
f—Italian ornamentation
g—Plain black and white design
h—Modern take on the Roman torch
i—German scroll decoration
j—Based on the uncial character
k—Woodcut effect as used by Morris

The inanimate (Example 113) lends itself better for ornamental purposes than does the animate (Example 114), and the less familiar the subject the better ornament 66it makes. An ornament based upon the animate is shown in Example 124, and as will be seen it is not as pleasing as the one in Example 121, which is based upon the inanimate.

The inanimate (Example 113) is better suited for decorative purposes than the animate (Example 114), and the less familiar the subject, the better it looks as an ornament. An ornament based on the animate is shown in Example 124, and as you can see, it isn't as attractive as the one in Example 121, which is based on the inanimate. 66

EXAMPLE 121

Simple ornamentation applied to letterhead. Design by Harry A. Anger, Seattle, Wash.

EXAMPLE 121

Basic decoration used on letterhead. Design by Harry A. Anger, Seattle, WA.

Initials afford a convenient means of ornamentation (Example 120). An initial well chosen as to tone and appropriateness often satisfies all demands in this line. The mortised Colonial initial indicated by b looks well with Caslon roman and printed on antique paper. The acanthus design a looks well with Washington Text; the Italian design f, with a letter such as Bodoni. Initials are used in a highly decorative manner in Example 115, after the style found in ecclesiastical manuscripts. The possibilities of type and rule are here well set forth.

Initials provide a stylish way to add decoration (Example 120). A well-chosen initial that fits the tone and context usually meets all expectations. The mortised Colonial initial represented by b pairs nicely with Caslon roman and looks great on antique paper. The acanthus design a matches well with Washington Text, while the Italian design f complements a font like Bodoni. In Example 115, initials are used in a very decorative way, inspired by the style of ecclesiastical manuscripts. This showcases the potential of different types and rules effectively.

EXAMPLE 122

Appropriate ornamentation applied to the modern booklet. Page by the Munder-Thomsen Company, Baltimore, Md.

EXAMPLE 122

Suitably designed decoration used for the modern booklet. Published by the Munder-Thomsen Company, Baltimore, Md.

Sometimes ornaments in the corners of a plain rule border (Example 116) are sufficient decoration. These effects may have been suggested by the corner bolts with which brass plates are fastened to walls.

Sometimes, decorations in the corners of a simple border (Example 116) are enough. These effects might have been inspired by the corner bolts used to attach brass plates to walls.

In the booklet decoration (Example 122) the artist has taken his motive from the word “Washington” making the capitol dome and its supports the central figure in the design, which is Colonial in character. Drawing a line down thru the center of the design it will be found that with a few minor exceptions the right half is a duplicate in reverse of the left half. The effect is frequently found in decorative work, as it gives balance and differentiates between illustration and decoration. An illustrative design, showing an actual scene, would not be effective.

In the booklet decoration (Example 122) the artist has taken his inspiration from the word “Washington” making the Capitol dome and its supports the central figure in the design, which is Colonial in style. If you draw a line down the center of the design, you’ll see that with a few minor exceptions, the right half is a mirror image of the left half. This effect is commonly found in decorative work, as it provides balance and distinguishes between illustration and decoration. An illustrative design, depicting an actual scene, wouldn’t be effective.

EXAMPLE 123

Effect of alternating colors, for covers and end-leaves of booklets and catalogs

EXAMPLE 123

Impact of alternating colors for the covers and endpapers of booklets and catalogs.

Wall paper and linoleum designs are made in patterns that repeat at intervals and for this reason answer the purpose of decoration.

Wallpaper and linoleum designs have patterns that repeat at regular intervals, making them suitable for decoration.

Example 119 presents a program page, which, while attractive, has but one ornament, an ecclesiastic design. The arrangement of bands above and below the main display assists in forming a decorative effect.

Example 119 presents a program page that, although visually appealing, features only one decorative element, which is an ecclesiastical design. The layout of bands above and below the main display helps create a decorative effect.

Type decoration in use today shows a preference for forms from Italian sources. Several years ago the Colonial spirit had influenced a preference for Gothic-English forms. The work of Goudy, Cleland and others has had a part in developing taste for the Italian.

Type decoration in use today shows a preference for forms from Italian sources. Several years ago, the Colonial spirit influenced a preference for Gothic-English forms. The work of Goudy, Cleland, and others has played a role in shaping the taste for the Italian.

In closing this chapter it may be well again to warn the printer not to over-ornament. The relation of ornament to typography is well covered in the caution of an experienced architect to a novice: “Ornament construction, but do not construct ornament.”

In closing this chapter, it’s worth reminding the printer not to overdo the decorations. The relationship between decoration and typography is well summed up by the advice of an experienced architect to a beginner: “Decorate construction, but don’t construct decoration.”

The best art is that which is concealed, and which unobtrusively adds effectiveness to a piece of printing.

The best art is the kind that's hidden and subtly enhances a print.

EXAMPLE 124

This ornament, based upon the animate, not well suited for business purposes

EXAMPLE 124

This decoration, inspired by living things, isn't really suitable for business use.

EXAMPLE 126

EXAMPLE 126

EXAMPLE 127

These pages are model specimens of book typography. Shown here in the actual size of the originals, from zinc etchings

EXAMPLE 127

These pages are prime examples of book typography. Displayed here at the original size, from zinc etchings.

67

THE TYPOGRAPHY OF BOOKS

Good taste, a quality essential to the successful production of all kinds of printing, is of great importance in the typography of books. In the matter of good taste most of us are specialists—we perfect our judgment in some one respect and let it remain erratic in others. A musician or other artist may stand high in his class and yet, perhaps, show poor taste in dress and manners.

Good taste, a quality crucial for successfully producing all types of print, is very important in book typography. When it comes to good taste, most of us have our specialties—we refine our judgment in one area and let it fluctuate in others. A musician or another artist may excel in their field but might still demonstrate poor taste in their clothing and behavior.

EXAMPLE 128

Appropriate title-page of a book of classic poems. By Bruce Rogers

EXAMPLE 128

Suitable title page for a collection of classic poems. By Bruce Rogers

A person of good taste is usually conservative. He weighs all new things in the balance of judgment, and allows enthusiastic faddists to push him off the sidewalk rather than join the crowd and shout with it. He knows the fickleness of mobs and remembers that in a week hosannas have been changed to shouts of bitter invective. The merchant catering to the whims of fashion ever has unsalable stock on his shelves. In the days of militant Rome the crowd which one day cheered Sulla, the next day crowned Marius with laurel.

A person with good taste is usually conservative. They evaluate everything new with careful judgment and prefer to let enthusiastic trendsetters push them aside rather than jump on the bandwagon and shout along. They understand how unpredictable crowds can be and remember that in just a week, cheers can turn into harsh criticism. Merchants who chase after the latest fashions often end up with unsold items on their shelves. Back in the days of aggressive Rome, the same crowd that cheered for Sulla one day would crown Marius with laurel the next.

EXAMPLE 129

Title-page with a nineteenth century motive. By Bruce Rogers

EXAMPLE 129

Title page with a 19th-century design. By Bruce Rogers

The natural tendency of humanity is radical. The conservatives are in the minority, yet their influence is great because their opinions are generally based upon sure foundations. Of course a person can be progressive and possess a present-day mind without being either radical or conservative. The natural tendency of job printers is radical. Left much to their own whims and fancies they produce printed things which may please only for the moment. The test of gold is not in its appearance when purchased, but in years of wear. Because a job of printing is made for short service is no reason why it should not be as well done as book composition is required to be. All the art-reasons in book typography 68are equally applicable to job typography. The two methods should not be judged by separate standards—a thing is good, or it is not. At the present time educational work is elevating the standard of job typography, and the designer of job composition, drawing closer to his book brother, is beginning to notice the faults and flaws in the latter’s work.

The natural tendency of people is radical. Conservatives are in the minority, but their impact is significant because their views are usually based on solid foundations. Of course, someone can be progressive and have a contemporary mindset without being either radical or conservative. The natural tendency of job printers is radical. When left to their own devices, they create printed materials that may only be appealing for a moment. The true test of gold isn’t how it looks when bought, but how it holds up over the years. Just because a print job is meant for short-term use doesn’t mean it shouldn’t be done as well as book printing needs to be. All the artistic considerations in book typography are equally relevant to job typography. The two methods shouldn’t be assessed by different standards—a piece is either good or it isn’t. Right now, educational initiatives are raising the standards of job typography, and designers of job compositions, becoming more aligned with their book colleagues, are starting to see the faults and flaws in the latter’s work.

EXAMPLE 130

EXAMPLE 130

EXAMPLE 131

Poor examples of book typography. Two pages which set forth the common practice of inharmonious type treatment, the title-page containing old-style type-faces and the text-page modern type-faces. The type-face should be of the same design

EXAMPLE 131

Poor examples of book typography. Two pages that show the typical practice of mismatched type styles, with the title page using old-style typefaces and the text page using modern typefaces. The typefaces should be of the same design.


The book typographer, like the lawyer, is governed by precedent. When the legal man presents an argument he cites Doe v. Doe, and Smith v. Jones, and with each new discovery of precedent is increasingly happy. The common law under which we in America are governed originated in England centuries ago, and the radicals who would dispense with this law catalog themselves as anarchists. The right-thinking man is constructive. When a new thing has been proved good he believes in adding it to what has already been constructed. The radical is destructive in that he would destroy what has been constructed and without always setting some new thing in its place. Attics have been known to hold masterpieces which have been discarded for new, frivolous things that from an art viewpoint are worthless.

The book typographer, like the lawyer, follows precedent. When a lawyer makes an argument, they reference cases like Doe v. Doe and Smith v. Jones, and with every new precedent found, they become more pleased. The common law that governs us in America originated in England centuries ago, and those who want to do away with this law call themselves anarchists. A sensible person is constructive. When something new is proven to be good, they believe in adding it to what already exists. The radical, however, tends to be destructive, wanting to tear down what's been built without always providing something new to replace it. Attics have been known to contain masterpieces that were thrown away for new, trivial items that have little artistic value.

William Morris set out to change book typography, and in contrast to the typography of the day his ideas may have seemed radical. What he really offered was the good things found in the works of the old masters of Venice and Nuremberg—typography and decoration that had well stood the test of centuries. Book pages produced fifty years ago by Pickering and Whittingham look well today; not because they are old, but because they were in good taste then, and are in good taste now. Pages set by their contemporaries in condensed roman look abominable now, because they were contrary to true art principles then.

William Morris aimed to change book typography, and his ideas might have seemed radical compared to the typography of his time. What he really brought to the table were the great elements found in the works of the old masters from Venice and Nuremberg—typography and decoration that have really stood the test of time. Book pages produced fifty years ago by Pickering and Whittingham still look good today; not because they are old, but because they were stylish then and remain stylish now. Pages set by their contemporaries in condensed roman look terrible now because they went against true artistic principles at the time.


The book industry in America is tremendous—so much so that because of its magnitude quality in typography is likely to be lost sight of. In New York City in one year eight million books are read or consulted thru its public library system! Could the monk, with his mere score of books chained to shelves, have had a vision of this, what would have been his thoughts? Or, Benjamin Franklin, as he founded the first circulating library? Andrew Carnegie, ridiculed when announcing his intention to use his wealth in providing buildings for public libraries, lived to see himself acknowledged a benefactor of mankind.

The book industry in America is huge—so much so that its size likely overshadows the importance of quality typography. In New York City, eight million books are read or consulted through its public library system in just one year! If a monk, with his limited number of books chained to shelves, could have seen this, what would he have thought? Or Benjamin Franklin, when he started the first circulating library? Andrew Carnegie, who faced mockery when he announced his plan to use his wealth to build public libraries, lived to see himself recognized as a benefactor of humanity.

Next to providing books is the necessity of providing good books and of printing them according to the laws of art and good taste. Continual association develops a taste for the things associated with. If the majority of books are poorly composed or poorly printed, they will unconsciously be taken as standards of book style by the reading public. The style of book typography, averaged in this way, is today far from flattering. It is rarely that the reading pages, title-page and cover harmonize in style and motive. On the average volume the text-pages seem to have been set in any face that chanced to be on the composing machine at the time; the title-page is in some type foreign in style and design to the face used 69on the body of the book, and the cover (usually the only part of the work given artistic attention) is designed without regard to what is on the inside. The whole effect reminds one of a box of berries with only the healthy members of the family in view. Many a time I have picked up a book in artistic binding, only to lay it down disappointed at the typographical treatment of the inside pages. Even a book should be honestly what it seems, and not a wooden nutmeg.

Next to providing books is the need to offer good books and to print them according to the principles of art and good taste. Continuous exposure builds a preference for what it's associated with. If most books are poorly designed or badly printed, readers will unconsciously adopt them as the standard for book style. The overall quality of book typography today is not flattering. It's rare for the reading pages, title page, and cover to match in style and theme. On the average book, the text pages seem to be set in whatever typeface happened to be available at the time; the title page uses a typeface that looks completely different from the one used in the body of the book, and the cover (usually the only part designed with any artistic consideration) is made without any regard to the content inside. The entire effect is like a box of berries with only the healthy ones visible. Many times, I’ve picked up a beautifully bound book, only to be let down by the poor typography of the inner pages. Even a book should genuinely reflect what it is, and not be a wooden nutmeg.

EXAMPLE 132

EXAMPLE 132

EXAMPLE 133

Two pages of composite Colonial and modern typography. Relation is established between the title-page and text-page thru use of the same kind of decoration

EXAMPLE 133

Two pages of a mix of Colonial and modern typography. A connection is made between the title page and text page through the use of the same type of decoration.


The book-page reproductions used in connection with this chapter may prove more valuable if each is considered separately in the order of its appearance.

The book page reproductions used in this chapter might be more valuable if each one is looked at individually in the order they appear.

Examples 126 and 127 (Insert).—The title-page and an inside page of a book which in its way is a model. From the viewpoints of art, legibility, good taste, typography, printing, and binding, the book is very satisfactory. The classic restraint of the Italian school and the human interest of the Gothic are here blended harmoniously. These pages will please the lover of lower-case letters, as from the label-title on the cover to the last paragraph of this volume not a line has been set in capitals. The type-face is a handsome old-style roman based upon the Caslon model, and in the book itself is printed upon a hard hand-made paper in a dense and clear black ink. The only decoration used in the book is found in the chapter initials, altho decoration is suggested in the use of brackets on each side of the page numbers. Only two sizes of type are on the title-page, and the chapter headings cling to the type-page in a manner that helps the tone effect of the whole. The reproduced pages are shown in the actual positions of the originals. The margins of a full reading page measure five picas at the fold, six picas at the head, seven-and-a-half picas at the outer edge, and eleven picas at the foot. The type-page covers slightly more than one-third of the surface of the leaf upon which it is printed. The type-page in proportion measures diagonally twice its width, a point illustrated in Example 50 of a previous article.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization. (Insert).—The title page and an inside page of a book that serves as a model. From the perspectives of art, readability, good taste, typography, printing, and binding, the book is very satisfying. The classic simplicity of the Italian style and the human touch of the Gothic are blended perfectly here. These pages will delight fans of lower-case letters, as every line from the label title on the cover to the last paragraph of this volume is set in small letters. The typeface is a beautiful old-style roman based on the Caslon design, printed on high-quality hand-made paper in dense, clear black ink. The only decoration in the book appears in the chapter initials, although some decoration is hinted at with the use of brackets beside the page numbers. There are only two type sizes on the title page, and the chapter headings are positioned in a way that enhances the overall tone. The reproduced pages are displayed in their original positions. The margins of a full reading page measure five picas at the fold, six picas at the top, seven-and-a-half picas at the outer edge, and eleven picas at the bottom. The type area occupies slightly more than one-third of the page it is printed on. The type area is proportionately double its width diagonally, a point illustrated in Example 50 of a previous article.

Example 128.—A reduced facsimile of the title-page of a limited edition of classic poems, produced at the Riverside Press under the supervision of Bruce Rogers. This typographer stands among those in America who are giving themselves to the work of steering the printing craft back to the waters in which it sailed in the days of Aldus Manutius. Bruce Rogers came from Indiana with no technical knowledge of typography, but artistic talent soon enabled him to gather the details, and for a number of years he designed books for the Riverside Press that brought him fame and helped to raise the standard of printing in America.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A scaled-down version of the title page of a limited edition of classic poems, created at the Riverside Press under the guidance of Bruce Rogers. This typographer is among those in America who are dedicated to steering the printing craft back to the traditions it followed in the days of Aldus Manutius. Bruce Rogers came from Indiana with no background in typography, but his artistic talent quickly allowed him to master the details, and for several years he designed books for the Riverside Press that earned him recognition and helped elevate the standards of printing in America.

Example 129.—There is one feature of Bruce Rogers’ work which stands out prominently, and that is his regard for the appropriate. The literary motive of a book gives the cue for its typographic treatment, and he prints as if he were living in the period so presented, and influenced by its tastes. The “John Greenleaf Whittier” title-page suggests a product of the middle nineteenth century, when Whittier lived, and Example 128 is imbued with the spirit of the Greek Theocritus. But two sizes of type are used in the Whittier page, and these are apportioned according to the importance of the wording.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—One aspect of Bruce Rogers’ work that really stands out is his sense of appropriateness. The literary intent of a book informs its typographic design, and he prints as if he were part of the era being depicted, influenced by its aesthetics. The “John Greenleaf Whittier” title page looks like it’s from the mid-nineteenth century, the time when Whittier was alive, and Example 128 captures the essence of the Greek poet Theocritus. However, on the Whittier page, two sizes of type are used, and these are allocated based on the significance of the text.

70

EXAMPLE 134

EXAMPLE 134

EXAMPLE 135

Two pages, the typography of which shows unusual care and consideration for detail. Typography by J. H. Nash

EXAMPLE 135

Two pages with typography that reflects exceptional attention to detail. Typography by J. H. Nash

EXAMPLE 136

A text-page in modern roman. By Colonial Press

EXAMPLE 136

A text page in modern Roman type. By Colonial Press

EXAMPLE 137

A text-page in old-style type-faces. By Colonial Press

EXAMPLE 137

A text page in old-style fonts. By Colonial Press

Examples 130 and 131.—Two pages from a book issued by a prominent publishing house and printed by a prominent press. They are reproduced for the purpose of pointing 71out a fault common to a majority of books of the present day—inharmonious typography. While the text pages are consistent in the use of plain modern roman, the title-page with no regard for the face used on the text pages is composed in Caslon roman and modernized old-style. It would seem that, true to the title, the printer had aimed to present three representative type-faces used during a hundred years. And, to make matters worse, the cover contains an elaborate twentieth century design. Why do not publishers realize that these things are wrong? Why do not printers realize it? After the six hundred pages of this book had been set in modern roman, the cost of setting a title-page also in modern roman would have been ridiculously small. Printers doing work for publishers should provide display faces to match their machine letters, or else when buying matrices of a body face, assure themselves that display faces may also be had. Artists, too, should be cautioned to make their design not only after the motive suggested by the literary contents of the book, but also after the typography (which should of course be based upon the literary motive).

Understood! Please provide the text that you would like me to modernize.—Two pages from a book published by a well-known publishing house and printed by a reputable press. They are included to highlight a common issue in many contemporary books—poor typography. While the text pages consistently use plain modern Roman, the title page, ignoring the typeface on the text pages, is crafted in Caslon Roman and outdated old-style. It seems that, true to the title, the printer intended to showcase three representative typefaces used over the past hundred years. To make things worse, the cover features an elaborate twentieth-century design. Why don’t publishers recognize that these choices are wrong? Why don’t printers notice? After setting six hundred pages of this book in modern Roman, the cost to set a title page in the same modern Roman would have been trivial. Printers working for publishers should provide display typefaces that match their machine letters, or when purchasing matrices for a body typeface, they should ensure that matching display faces are available. Artists should also be advised to design not only based on the themes suggested by the book's content but also in consideration of the typography (which should naturally reflect the literary themes).

EXAMPLE 138

Title-page with an Italian motive. By Oswald Press, New York

EXAMPLE 138

Title page with an Italian theme. By Oswald Press, New York

Examples 132 and 133.—Two pages in style composite Colonial and modern. Relation between the reading pages and the title-page is established thru use of type of the same series and also by adapting the flower decoration to the running head. Certain books lend themselves to decoration; this is one of them, because it is of the entertaining sort. Serious books, such as those on the subjects of law, medicine and science, should have no decoration. The wise book typographer will not use decoration unless he comprehends just what he is doing.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Two pages combining Colonial and modern styles. The connection between the reading pages and the title page is created through the use of the same type series and by adapting the floral decoration to the running head. Some books are suitable for decoration; this is one of them because it is entertaining. Serious books, like those on law, medicine, and science, should not have any decoration. A smart book typographer won’t use decoration unless they fully understand the purpose behind it.

EXAMPLE 139

Page from a children’s book, designed and written by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 139

Page from a children’s book, designed and written by Will Bradley

Examples 134 and 135.—J. H. Nash, who designed the typography of the book of which these two pages are a part, produced results that are exceptionally good from a typographic point of view. The border as seen in Example 134 was used on the title, introduction and contents pages, and the border in Example 135 was used thruout the text pages. The crossed-line border effect was even adapted to the frontispiece. The title-page is an excellent example of consistent typography; not a line of lower-case is to be found on the page, and prominence is proportionately given the title of the book and the names of author and publishers. The reading matter is set within six points of the rule border, that the page should have but one margin. If the space between type and border were larger it would give the appearance of another margin. The initial letters assist the reader in locating the beginning of each story.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—J. H. Nash, who designed the typography for the book that includes these two pages, created results that are exceptionally good from a typographic perspective. The border shown in Example 134 was used on the title, introduction, and contents pages, while the border in Example 135 was used throughout the text pages. The crossed-line border effect was even adapted for the frontispiece. The title page is a great example of consistent typography; there isn’t a single line of lowercase text on the page, and the title of the book, along with the names of the author and publishers, is given appropriate emphasis. The text is set within six points of the rule border to ensure that the page has only one margin. If the space between the text and border were larger, it would create the illusion of another margin. The initial letters help the reader find the start of each story.

Example 136.—This page is in a style associated with the modern novel and was set on the linotype in eleven-point Scotch Roman; the lines twenty picas wide, leaded with two-point leads. The running head is in capitals of the body letter, separated from the reading page by a half-point rule, and the page number is centered at the foot.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This page follows a style typical of modern novels and was printed using linotype in eleven-point Scotch Roman; the lines are twenty picas wide, with a two-point lead between them. The running head is in capital letters matching the body text, separated from the main text by a half-point rule, and the page number is centered at the bottom.

Example 137.—A good example of modern book composition, set on the linotype in twelve-point Caslon Old Style, the lines twenty picas wide, separated by four points. The running head is in a black text letter suited to a book of this kind. An amount of space equal to a line of type and the leading following it, has been placed between the running head and the reading page.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A great example of modern book design, printed on the linotype in twelve-point Caslon Old Style, with the lines set at twenty picas wide and separated by four points. The heading at the top is in a bold typeface that fits this type of book. There is a space equal to one line of type plus the leading below it, placed between the heading and the main text.

Example 138.—No style of typography is in such good taste as that which is based on the old Italian, in which but one 72style of type-face, usually the Caslon, is used, and the capitals letterspaced a trifle. This style has been worked into a symmetrical page and an ornament included that because of its Italian treatment blends neatly with the typography. It might be interesting to note that the illustrations in this book were in line, and where emphasis was needed in side headings small capitals were used and the letters separated by slight spacing.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—There’s no type style as elegant as the old Italian style, which typically uses just one typeface, usually Caslon, with slightly spaced capitals. This style creates a balanced page layout, accompanied by an ornament that fits perfectly with the typography due to its Italian design. It’s worth mentioning that the illustrations in this book are aligned, and for emphasis in side headings, small capitals are utilized with a bit of spacing between the letters.

Example 139.—A page from a book for children, written and illustrated by Will Bradley. The type-face is a wide, legible letter and was specially designed by Mr. Bradley. Each chapter is begun with a line of old English black letter, followed by several lines of highly decorative italic. The illustrations are interpreted in the grotesque decorative style that Bradley does so well. The running heads and page numbers are in the italic.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A page from a children's book, created by Will Bradley. The font is bold and easy to read, specifically designed by Mr. Bradley. Each chapter starts with a line of old English black letter, followed by several lines of ornate italic. The illustrations are done in the whimsical decorative style that Bradley excels at. The running headers and page numbers are in italic.

EXAMPLE 140

Harmony in tone of type-face and decoration. Typography by the Trow Press, New York

EXAMPLE 140

Consistent style in font and design. Typography by the Trow Press, New York

Example 140.—A page notable for the harmony between the tone of the type-face and decoration. The illustration has been treated by Beatrice Stevens in a decorative spirit, and is very effective. The capitals of the body matter are used for the “Chapter III” line, and smaller capitals for the descriptive line under it. The plain initial is more effective than an ornamental one would have been.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A page notable for the harmony between the font style and decoration. The illustration has been approached by Beatrice Stevens with a decorative touch, and it works really well. The capital letters of the main text are used for the “Chapter III” line, and smaller capitals for the descriptive line below it. The plain initial stands out more than an ornate one would have.

Example 141.—A title-page of classic design in Scotch Roman type. The anchor and dolphin, originally the device of Aldus, as enlarged in outline has much to do with the effectiveness of the page. The dignified beauty of this page makes it worthy of close study.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A title page with a classic design in Scotch Roman type. The anchor and dolphin, originally the emblem of Aldus, have a significant impact on the overall look of the page. The elegant beauty of this page deserves careful examination.

Example 142.—A further demonstration of the beauty of classic typography. Fred. W. Goudy has done many things worth while, but none better than this. He not only designed the smaller type-faces and lettered the large lines in harmony, but arranged the page and, in its original form, printed it. American typography owes much to Mr. Goudy and it is a pleasure to include this page here.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Another example of the beauty of classic typography. Fred W. Goudy achieved a lot of great things, but none better than this. He not only designed the smaller typefaces and created the large lettering in harmony but also arranged the page and printed it in its original form. American typography owes a lot to Mr. Goudy, and it's a pleasure to feature this page here.

EXAMPLE 141

A title-page of classic design, with an Aldine anchor device. By William Aspenwall Bradley

EXAMPLE 141

A title page with a classic design, featuring an Aldine anchor symbol. By William Aspenwall Bradley

Example 143.—This is a page from one of the Roycrofters’ serious efforts in bookmaking. It was printed in dense black ink on white stock, the large text initials standing forth in pleasing contrast.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.—This is a page from one of the Roycrofters’ dedicated efforts in bookmaking. It was printed in bold black ink on white paper, with the large text initials standing out in a nice contrast.

Example 144.—This is a page from a book by Theodore L. De Vinne, and probably presented his personal ideas in book typography. Notice the spacing around the subheading, and the treatment of footnotes. The first line under the subheading is not indented.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This is a page from a book by Theodore L. De Vinne, likely sharing his personal views on book typography. Check out the spacing around the subheading and how the footnotes are styled. The first line under the subheading isn’t indented.

Examples 145 and 146.—D. B. Updike, of the Merrymount Press, is responsible for the typography of these pages, which are a portion of a book containing the ceremony of marriage as performed in the Protestant Episcopal Church. The type is a special letter based upon early forms. The book was printed in black and vermilion. Mr. Updike, with Rogers, Goudy and others, believes that the way to improve typography in America is to do typography as well as it can be done. He established the Merrymount Press in 1898, and has arranged and printed many fine volumes, in addition to much high-grade small work.

Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—D. B. Updike, from the Merrymount Press, is in charge of the typography for these pages, which are part of a book detailing the marriage ceremony as performed in the Protestant Episcopal Church. The type is a unique font based on early designs. The book was printed in black and red. Mr. Updike, along with Rogers, Goudy, and others, believes that the way to enhance typography in America is to execute it as well as possible. He founded the Merrymount Press in 1898 and has produced many fine books, along with a lot of high-quality small projects.

EXAMPLE 142

Classic feeling expressed in a modern title-page. Designed by Fred. W. Goudy

EXAMPLE 142

Classic vibe shown in a contemporary title page. Designed by Fred. W. Goudy

Example 147.—Books of poetry are usually treated in a typographic style that is light and dainty. The typographer 73who has the spirit of the artist in him puts more into a book than is required by the traditions of the craft and endeavors to express with type and decoration the spirit of the poet’s message. The verses of Edgar Allan Poe, with their suggestion of dark shadows and pathos, make the book designer’s task difficult, but in this example Mr. Nash has given the work a decorative treatment that in its dark tone helps to beautify the sad spirit of the great American poet. Washington Text shows forth admirably as a type for these pages and the decorative panel harmonizes with it in both tone and design. In its original form the book was printed in dull black and dull red inks on a toned hand-made paper. The liberal margins assisted in giving that touch of exclusiveness and taste that is essential in good book-printing.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Poetry books are often designed with a light and delicate typographic style. A typographer with an artistic flair invests more into a book than what tradition demands, trying to convey the essence of the poet's message through type and decoration. The verses of Edgar Allan Poe, with their themes of dark shadows and deep emotions, make the designer's job challenging. However, in this case, Mr. Nash has provided a decorative approach that, with its dark tone, enhances the melancholy spirit of the great American poet. Washington Text works perfectly as the type for these pages, and the decorative panel complements it in both tone and style. Originally, the book was printed in muted black and red inks on textured handmade paper. The generous margins contributed to an air of exclusivity and sophistication that is vital in quality book printing.

EXAMPLE 143

Text-page of a de luxe volume. By the Roycrofters, East Aurora, N. Y.

EXAMPLE 143

Text page of a luxury edition. By the Roycrofters, East Aurora, NY.

EXAMPLE 144

Text-page from a book by De Vinne. Note treatment of running titles, sub-headings and footnotes

EXAMPLE 144

Text page from a book by De Vinne. Notice how running titles, subheadings, and footnotes are handled.

EXAMPLE 145

EXAMPLE 145

EXAMPLE 146

Two pages from a small ecclesiastical book. By D. B. Updike

EXAMPLE 146

Two pages from a small religious book. By D. B. Updike

Example 148.—French title-pages of the eighteenth century are furnishing motives for the designing of cover and title-pages for the uses of 74publishing and advertising, and to many this page by Bruce Rogers will have considerable interest. The design carries the spirit of an age when decoration was rampant and when architecture and books were festooned and adorned with cupids. The decorative lettering used in the main title shows such influence. This book in its first edition was printed in 1789, and when recently reprinted the typographic spirit of the old volume was incorporated in it. It does not measure up to the recently accepted ideas of tone-harmony and shape-harmony, yet the element of appropriateness is so strong that those shortcomings are not to be held against it.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—French title pages from the eighteenth century are serving as inspiration for creating cover and title pages for publishing and advertising, and many will find this page by Bruce Rogers quite interesting. The design reflects a time when decoration was abundant and both architecture and books were embellished with cupids. The decorative lettering in the main title demonstrates this influence. This book was originally printed in 1789, and when it was reprinted recently, the typographic style of the original was preserved. It may not align with the modern standards of tone harmony and shape harmony, but the level of appropriateness is so strong that these shortcomings can be overlooked.

EXAMPLE 147

Gothic treatment of a book of poetry. Typography designed by J. H. Nash for Paul Elder & Company

EXAMPLE 147

Gothic design of a poetry book. Typography created by J. H. Nash for Paul Elder & Company

Custom has developed a law for the arrangement of the several parts of a book. There is first a blank leaf known as the fly-leaf, followed by a leaf with the title of the volume in small type slightly above center or placed toward the upper right corner. The frontispiece, if one is used, is then inserted. The next leaf contains the title-page, which usually gives the title of the work, name of author or editor, place of origin, name of publisher and date of issue. On the back of this leaf, slightly above center, is the copyright notice, and in the lower center or right corner the imprint of the printer. The table of contents and the table of illustrations follow, taking as many pages as are necessary. The preface, or author’s introduction, is next, after which another half-title may be inserted ahead of the first chapter. The dedication, at one time occupying a page in the fore part of the book, is occasionally used. The index is inserted in the rear of the book. This rear-index is not found in novels, but in books on technical subjects and those used for reference purposes.

Custom has created a structure for organizing the different parts of a book. First, there’s a blank page called the fly-leaf, followed by a page with the book’s title in small print, slightly above the center or positioned in the upper right corner. If there's a frontispiece, it comes next. The following page contains the title page, which usually includes the title of the work, the name of the author or editor, the place of publication, the publisher's name, and the publication date. On the back of this page, slightly above the center, is the copyright notice, and at the bottom center or right corner is the printer's imprint. After that, the table of contents and the table of illustrations follow, taking as many pages as needed. Next is the preface or author's introduction, and then another half-title may be added before the first chapter. The dedication, which used to take up a page at the beginning of the book, is sometimes included. The index is placed at the back of the book. This back index is typically not found in novels but is included in technical books and those meant for reference.

It is customary to number book pages with Arabic numerals beginning with the first chapter, all pages in advance of the first chapter being numbered with lower-case Roman numerals. The page numbers, when at the foot, should be separated from the type-page by the same amount of space used between the lines. There is tendency among inexperienced printers to place the numbers too far from the type-page.

It’s standard to number book pages with Arabic numerals starting from the first chapter, while all pages before the first chapter are numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. When page numbers are at the bottom, they should be spaced the same as the distance between the lines. Inexperienced printers often have a habit of placing the numbers too far away from the type-page.

EXAMPLE 148

Where a French style of treatment is appropriate. Designed by Bruce Rogers

EXAMPLE 148

Where a French style of treatment is suitable. Designed by Bruce Rogers

There is a rule that the running title should be separated from the type-page by space equivalent to a quad line of the size of body-type used, altho the best typographers prefer only about half that amount of space.

There’s a rule that the running title should be separated from the type page by a space equal to a quad line of the body type size used, although the best typographers prefer only about half that amount of space.

Pages containing chapter headings are lowered at the head below the regular page hight. Example 127 shows a lowering of five picas space. Other books show more or less than this amount of space, but the space allowed in this example is pleasing.

Pages with chapter headings are positioned lower than the usual page height. For example, 127 shows a drop of five picas. Other books may have more or less space than this, but the space used in this example looks good.

When an initial is used the space between it and the type should be the same, both at the right side and foot of the initial.

When an initial is used, the space between it and the text should be the same on both the right side and the bottom of the initial.

The position of a book page should be toward the binding and the head. In elaborate books of wide margins this inclination should be great, but in the conventional book of narrower margins it should be less noticeable—say six points toward the binding and eighteen points toward the head.

The position of a book page should be towards the binding and the top. In detailed books with wide margins, this tilt should be significant, but in standard books with narrower margins, it should be less obvious—around six points towards the binding and eighteen points towards the top.

The use of an em-quad between sentences on a book page is encouraged by many printers, but the new-thought compositor uses two three-to-em spaces or less. By referring to example 127 it will be found that the same amount of space separates all words in one line. The capital letter seems sufficient indication of the beginning of a sentence. In the first book printed from separate types (see reproduction of page from Gutenberg’s Bible in the chapter on “The Origin of Typography”) there was no space used between sentences, the period in the judgment of the printer separating the words sufficiently.

The use of an em-quad between sentences on a book page is encouraged by many printers, but the modern compositor uses two three-to-em spaces or fewer. By looking at example 127, you'll see that the same amount of space separates all words in one line. The capital letter is a clear indication of the start of a sentence. In the first book printed from separate types (see the reproduction of a page from Gutenberg’s Bible in the chapter on “The Origin of Typography”), no space was used between sentences; the period was seen by the printer as enough to separate the words.

EXAMPLE 149

Title-page lettering and decoration by F. W. Goudy, for the Caxton Co., Cleveland, O.

EXAMPLE 149

Title-page lettering and decoration by F. W. Goudy, for the Caxton Co., Cleveland, OH.

75

BOOKLETS, PAMPHLETS, BROCHURES, LEAFLETS

Did I wish to be flippant I would open this chapter by asking, “When is a booklet not a booklet?” and might even be pardoned for doing so, for no other word has been so misused as has “booklet.”

Did I want to be casual, I would start this chapter by asking, “When is a booklet not a booklet?” and I might even be forgiven for saying that, because no other word has been misused as much as “booklet.”

A booklet, the dictionaries tell us, is just a little book, as is indicated by the suffix “-let,” which termination forms diminutives from French and English nouns. Yet “booklet” has been used to designate not only little books, but big books, and has led to the rather tautological description, “a little booklet.” When does a booklet cease to be little, and is its littleness in its dimensions, in the number of printed sheets, or in some other feature not recognized in a hurried consideration of the subject?

A booklet, as the dictionaries define it, is simply a small book, which is suggested by the suffix “-let,” a diminutive ending from French and English nouns. However, “booklet” has been used to refer to not just small books, but also larger ones, resulting in the somewhat redundant phrase “a little booklet.” When does a booklet stop being small, and is its smallness determined by its size, the number of printed pages, or some other aspect that might not be noticed in a quick overview of the topic?

Going back to the lexicons—

Returning to the vocabularies—

A booklet, as has been said, is a little book.

A booklet, as mentioned, is a small book.

A leaflet, according to the Standard Dictionary, is “a little leaf; also a tract.” Webster says it is “a sheet of small pages which are folded, but not stitched; a folder.”

A leaflet, according to the Standard Dictionary, is “a small leaf; also a tract.” Webster says it is “a sheet of small pages that are folded, but not stitched; a folder.”

A pamphlet, we understand from the Standard, is “a printed work stitched or pasted, but not permanently bound; a brief treatise or essay.” Webster says it is “A book of a few sheets of printed matter, or formerly of manuscript, commonly with a paper cover; specifically, sometimes, any such work not in excess of eighty pages, and not bound.” The word “pamphlet” was derived from a popular Latin poem, “Pamphilus,” of the twelfth century.

A pamphlet, as reported by the Standard, is “a printed work that’s stitched or pasted, but not permanently bound; a short treatise or essay.” Webster defines it as “a book made up of a few sheets of printed material, or previously of manuscript, usually with a paper cover; specifically, sometimes, any such work that is no more than eighty pages and not bound.” The term “pamphlet” comes from a well-known Latin poem, “Pamphilus,” from the twelfth century.

“Brochure” is a French word often used for “pamphlet.” Webster gives its meaning as “a printed and stitched book containing only a few leaves; a pamphlet; a treatise or article published in such form.”

“Brochure” is a French word often used for “pamphlet.” Webster defines it as “a printed and stitched book containing only a few pages; a pamphlet; a treatise or article published in that format.”

A circular is a letter or a note, usually printed.

A circular is a letter or note that is typically printed.

However, for the purposes of this chapter, while I shall endeavor so far as possible to use one of the above approved terms in designating the various examples of printing, the word “booklet” in some instances may have a wider application than “a little book.”

However, for this chapter, I will try to use one of the previously mentioned terms to describe the different examples of printing, but the word “booklet” may sometimes refer to more than just “a little book.”


EXAMPLE 150

EXAMPLE 150

EXAMPLE 151

Two pages from a leaflet designed without decoration or color, a noteworthy exponent of simplicity in typography. By the Marchbanks Press, New York

EXAMPLE 151

Two pages from a leaflet designed without any decoration or color, showcasing a remarkable example of simplicity in typography. By the Marchbanks Press, New York

The chap-books sold in the seventeenth century, containing abbreviated stories, were, perhaps, prototypes of the booklet; but as now used the booklet is a modern conception. It is a result of development in æsthetical knowledge among advertisers and the buying public, who have learned to discriminate and to demand artistic, tasteful workmanship. When the “dodger” or handbill ceased to be effective as a publicity auxiliary to the newspaper, the booklet was born. State laws consider a few placards or publication in one or two obscure newspapers sufficient notification to the public, but the advertiser knows the futility of such obsolete methods and gets his message to the public in numerous ways—traveling salesmen, newspapers and magazines, trade, technical and class publications, house-organs, catalogs, booklets, circulars, posters, novelties, car cards, electric signs, etc. To an extent the booklet’s mission is educational; it introduces the business house, gives authoritative answers to questions that the prospective buyer would naturally ask, explains advantages and gives reasons for superiority. The booklet is best if written 76in a style that is non-technical, and should be treated by the artist and printer in a manner that will interest the recipient.

The chapbooks sold in the seventeenth century, which featured shortened stories, were probably early versions of the modern booklet. However, today’s booklet is a contemporary idea. It has evolved due to a greater appreciation for aesthetics among advertisers and consumers, who have learned to be discerning and to demand high-quality, tasteful design. When flyers or handbills stopped being effective as promotional tools for newspapers, the booklet emerged. While state laws consider a few posters or ads in one or two little-known newspapers enough to inform the public, advertisers recognize the ineffectiveness of these outdated strategies and convey their messages through various channels—traveling salespeople, newspapers and magazines, trade, technical and specialty publications, company newsletters, catalogs, booklets, circulars, posters, promotional items, transit cards, electric signs, etc. To some extent, the purpose of the booklet is educational; it introduces the business, provides reliable answers to questions prospective buyers might have, highlights benefits, and explains reasons for its superiority. The best booklets are written in a simple, non-technical style and should be crafted by the designer and printer in a way that captivates the reader. 76

EXAMPLE 152

EXAMPLE 152

EXAMPLE 153

EXAMPLE 153

EXAMPLE 154

Three pages from an easily read booklet in Scotch Roman, showing the typographic style of Benjamin Sherbow, New York

EXAMPLE 154

Three pages from a simple-to-read booklet in Scotch Roman, showcasing the typography style of Benjamin Sherbow, New York.

EXAMPLE 155

EXAMPLE 155

EXAMPLE 156

Two pages from an eight-page leaflet, in which the typography was relied upon for results. The rule borders were printed close to the edges of the paper. By William Henry Baker, Cleveland, O.

EXAMPLE 156

Two pages from an eight-page leaflet, where the typography was used to achieve the desired results. The rule borders were printed near the edges of the paper. By William Henry Baker, Cleveland, O.

Among the users of the booklet as a publicity medium are railroads, cities, hotels, real-estate companies, banks, clothiers, educational institutions, printers, and manufacturers of automobiles, musical instruments, cameras, and tools and equipment of many kinds. If one wishes to purchase intelligently a piano or other expensive article he obtains a booklet on the subject, and whether he buys or not depends largely upon the impression obtained from the booklet; if it is well written, informative, carefully illustrated and handsomely printed, it will be likely to exert an influence in favor of a sale. The printer’s share in producing such a booklet is large, altho he is called upon to work in conjunction with the writer, the artist and the engraver.

Among the users of the booklet as a marketing tool are railroads, cities, hotels, real estate companies, banks, clothing stores, educational institutions, printers, and manufacturers of cars, musical instruments, cameras, and various tools and equipment. If someone wants to buy a piano or another expensive item, they often get a booklet on the topic, and whether they make a purchase largely depends on the impression they get from the booklet; if it's well-written, informative, carefully illustrated, and beautifully printed, it’s likely to sway their decision in favor of a purchase. The printer plays a significant role in producing such a booklet, even though they need to collaborate with the writer, artist, and engraver.

Much of the booklet printing is planned by advertising writers and commercial artists. The best results are obtained when artist and writer blend their ideas harmoniously; this is possible only when the writer has artistic tastes and a definite understanding of typography. In many booklets the text matter does not fit the decoration. I have in mind an instance in which the artist laid out sixteen pages of marginal illustrative decoration, and the writer supplied only about half the copy necessary to fill the sixteen pages. To overcome the deficiency the printer set the text matter in an excessively large size of type, but even then the space left for the reading matter was only partly filled. If the writer was unable to fill the space, the artist should have decreased the number of decorative pages or else planned his decoration to cover more surface.

Much of the booklet printing is planned by advertising writers and graphic designers. The best results come when the artist and writer combine their ideas seamlessly; this is only achievable when the writer has an appreciation for art and a solid understanding of typography. In many booklets, the text doesn’t match the graphics. I’m thinking of an example where the artist created sixteen pages of decorative margins, but the writer provided only about half the text needed to fill those pages. To address the shortfall, the printer used an overly large font size, but even then, the space for the text was only partially filled. If the writer couldn’t fill the space, the artist should have reduced the number of decorative pages or designed the decorations to cover more area.

EXAMPLE 157

EXAMPLE 157

EXAMPLE 158

EXAMPLE 158

EXAMPLE 159

Three pages that demonstrate the possibilities of type and rule in obtaining effective results. By Barnard J. Lewis, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 159

Three pages that show the potential of typography and layout in achieving impactful results. By Barnard J. Lewis, Boston, Mass.

Those houses that have made a success of booklet printing produce a job that is harmonious 77and complete. Reading matter, illustrations, decoration, paper, ink and color treatment, all blend on their booklets. There is a central motive around which all concerned in the make-up of the booklet weave their ideas.

Those houses that have succeeded in booklet printing create a product that is cohesive and complete. The text, illustrations, design, paper, ink, and color all come together in their booklets. There's a central theme that everyone involved in the booklet's creation contributes their ideas around. 77

Altho such a condition is ideal, it is not absolutely necessary, and it is not always profitable, for a printshop to have under its roof a complete equipment for producing every detail of a booklet. One of the successful producers of booklets—an artist with associates able to interpret his ideas—had in his artistic suite of offices a palm which he enjoyed showing to visitors who asked to see the “plant.” On the other hand, there is the head of a large printing concern producing high-class booklets who has artistic ideas but who depends upon the open field of artists and engravers to develop and perfect his plans. He manages to meet a prospective customer and from conversation with him learns something of his tastes and preferences. This printer then selects an artist whose style of work will most likely appeal to the customer and be best for the purposes of the booklet. He assumes that the most successful artists are those who have specialized on some one kind of work—classic Roman lettering and decoration; seventeenth-century French decoration; Old English or American colonial effects; modern German coloring and decoration; art-nouveau creations, the serious and the humorous; illustrations of child life, or of the Civil War period. While there are versatile artists like Will Bradley who can do good work in many styles, they are not numerous.

Although having a complete setup for producing every aspect of a booklet is ideal, it’s not strictly necessary and not always the most profitable for a print shop. One successful booklet producer—an artist who works with associates who can bring his ideas to life—had a palm tree in his artistic office that he liked to show visitors who asked to see the "plant." On the other hand, there's the head of a large printing company that specializes in high-quality booklets. He has artistic ideas but relies on a network of artists and engravers to bring his concepts to fruition. He manages to meet with potential customers and learns about their tastes and preferences through conversation. Then, he picks an artist whose style will likely resonate with the customer and suit the booklet’s goals. He believes that the most successful artists specialize in specific types of work—classic Roman lettering and decoration; seventeenth-century French designs; Old English or American colonial styles; modern German coloring and decoration; art nouveau creations, whether serious or humorous; illustrations of childhood or from the Civil War era. While there are versatile artists like Will Bradley who excel in many styles, they are few and far between.

Some printers retain typographic artists who serve clients by the hour. These artists sometimes are advertising writers who have studied the art side of printing and know that much depends upon the type-face used.

Some printers hire graphic designers who work with clients by the hour. These designers are often marketing writers who have learned about the artistic side of printing and understand that a lot relies on the typeface used.

To plan a booklet properly the commercial printer must know something of the principles of art and advertising and of good book typography. Booklet printing is really the connecting link between job printing and book printing. The unconventionality of job typography and the dignity and conservatism of book typography can successfully be blended in the booklet.

To plan a booklet effectively, the commercial printer needs to understand the basics of design, advertising, and good book typography. Booklet printing serves as a bridge between job printing and book printing. The creativity of job typography and the formality and tradition of book typography can be successfully combined in the booklet.


Example 149 (Insert).—This style of title-page is appropriate for a booklet or brochure in which the typography plays an important part in the production. The printer having plates of this kind delivered to him should for the remaining pages endeavor to use a type-face which has some relation in style to the lettering found in this example. The page having been drawn by Frederick W. Goudy, one of his type-faces would, of course, be most harmonious, but other old-style letters such as Cloister Oldstyle, Caslon Oldstyle and Old-Style Antique would also be suitable. Some of the pages would possibly include initial letters drawn in the same style as the decoration, and thruout the work the motif established by the title-page should be maintained. An antique-finished paper blends best with the general decorative plan, but if coated stock must be used it should be of a dull finish. Art work of the quality of this example cannot be procured from every artist. This example is expressive of the personal taste and talent of Goudy.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization. (Insert).—This style of title page is suitable for a booklet or brochure where the typography plays a significant role in the overall design. The printer receiving plates like this should aim to use a typeface that has a similar style to the lettering shown in this example for the remaining pages. Since the page was created by Frederick W. Goudy, using one of his typefaces would be the most fitting choice, but other old-style fonts like Cloister Oldstyle, Caslon Oldstyle, and Old-Style Antique would also work well. Some pages might feature initial letters designed in the same style as the decorations, and throughout the work, the theme established by the title page should be consistently maintained. An antique-finished paper complements the overall decorative scheme best, but if coated stock is necessary, it should have a matte finish. Artwork of the quality seen in this example is not something every artist can create. This example reflects Goudy's personal taste and talent.

EXAMPLE 160

A label pasted on a brilliant cover stock is striking. Designed by Thomas Maitland Cleland for the Oswald Press, New York

EXAMPLE 160

A label pasted on a shiny cover stock is eye-catching. Designed by Thomas Maitland Cleland for the Oswald Press, New York

Examples 150 and 151.—The printer in the main must be his own artist, and he can best serve himself and his customers on such occasions by providing pure typographical effects. This is difficult. The printer must have studied good typography—he must know typography not only as a worker at the trade but as a student of the art. He must be thoroly acquainted with type-faces. His type equipment usually shows his knowledge in this regard; if it consists of odds and ends of type-faces aimlessly selected, he is not in a position to give his customer the proper service, but if his 78equipment mainly consists of those type-faces that have been approved by the leading typographers and type designers of the country, he will not only render good service to his customer but will confer a benefit on every one who receives a copy of the printed matter. The public learns to like whatever is served to it most frequently, and if it is provided with good printing and especially good typography, the tone of printing generally will be elevated and further dignity given to the business. The examples under consideration are from a nationally known printing office which confines its type equipment to three series and at one time practically used but one series on all its work. The leaflet was made to fit a business envelop. The stock was Japan vellum and there was no decoration—only a standard approved type-face of a readable size (fourteen-point). Such a leaflet attracts attention above most advertising matter because of its simplicity. It is good more because of what is left off than for what is put on.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.—The printer really needs to be his own artist, and he can best support himself and his customers by focusing on pure typographical effects. This isn’t easy. The printer must have a solid understanding of good typography—he needs to grasp typography not just as a worker in the field but as a student of the art. He must be thoroughly familiar with typefaces. His type selection usually reflects his expertise; if it consists of random pieces of typefaces chosen without thought, he won’t be able to offer his customer the right service. However, if his 78equipment mostly includes typefaces that have been endorsed by the top typographers and type designers in the industry, he won’t just provide good service to his customers, but he will also benefit everyone who receives a copy of the printed material. The public tends to gravitate towards whatever it sees most often, and if it’s presented with high-quality printing and especially good typography, the overall quality of printing will improve and give more respectability to the business. The examples we’re looking at come from a well-known printing company that limits its type selection to three series and often used just one series for all its work. The leaflet was designed to fit a business envelope. The paper was Japan vellum and there was no decoration—only a standard approved typeface in a readable size (fourteen-point). Such a leaflet stands out more than most advertising materials because of its simplicity. It impresses more for what it leaves out than for what it includes.

EXAMPLE 161

Admirable treatment for a small amount of reading matter. Both pages by Edward Everett Winchell, New York

EXAMPLE 161

Great handling for a brief piece of writing. Both pages by Edward Everett Winchell, New York

Examples 152, 153 and 154.—These are the cover-page and first and second text pages of a booklet which is purely a typographical product. There was also a title-page similarly treated. The first two words of the title, “Getting into Print,” were on each of the four pages set in italic lower-case, and the word “Print” was in roman capitals. Scotch Roman was used, and Mr. Sherbow has produced other effective booklets with this type-face. He has a preference for the eleven- and twelve-point sizes and frequently separates his lines with a two-point lead. The result, especially in the narrow measure made necessary by the smallness of the booklet, is a page that one likes to read. There is a freshness, an individuality, about his type arrangement, which quality is probably due to the fact that he never was a practical printer. He began as an advertising writer and studied typography and its use for advertising purposes unrestrained by the traditions of the craft as handed down from compositor to apprentice. His work, however, is influenced by the study he has made of the work of typographers and calligraphers of the past five or six centuries. By this study he has obtained a knowledge that most printers lack because of their reluctance to explore the past. The borders surrounding these pages are made from typefounders’ brass rule, and otherwise the only ornamentation is a floret on the cover and a smaller one on the first text page. Perhaps no new note is struck in the arrangement of the cover-page, but the treatment of the upper part of the first text page is different from that which would be given by the average good compositor.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—These are the cover page and the first two text pages of a booklet that is purely a typographical creation. There was also a title page that was designed similarly. The first two words of the title, “Getting into Print,” appeared on each of the four pages in italic lowercase, while the word “Print” was in Roman capitals. Scotch Roman was used, and Mr. Sherbow has created other effective booklets using this typeface. He prefers the eleven- and twelve-point sizes and often separates his lines with a two-point lead. The outcome, especially considering the narrow measure required by the booklet's small size, is a page that's pleasant to read. There’s a freshness and uniqueness to his type arrangement, likely due to the fact that he was never a traditional printer. He started as an advertising writer and studied typography and its applications for advertising without being bound by the craft's age-old traditions passed down from compositor to apprentice. However, his work is influenced by his study of the work of typographers and calligraphers from the last five or six centuries. This study has provided him with knowledge that most printers lack because they're hesitant to delve into the past. The borders surrounding these pages are made from typefounders’ brass rule, and the only other decoration is a floret on the cover and a smaller one on the first text page. No new approach is introduced in the cover page layout, but the design of the upper part of the first text page stands out from what a typical skilled compositor would provide.

EXAMPLE 162

A good way to arrange a page when the photograph is of proportions different from those of the booklet page. Note treatment of caption

EXAMPLE 162

A good way to lay out a page when the photo has different proportions than the booklet page. Check out how the caption is handled.

EXAMPLE 163

EXAMPLE 163

EXAMPLE 164

Two booklet pages in which typography was the chief dependence in securing artistic results. The borders were made with brass rule and the illustration was tipped on. By Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco, Cal.

EXAMPLE 164

Two booklet pages where typography was the main focus for achieving artistic outcomes. The borders were created with brass rule and the illustration was added on. By Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco, Cal.

Examples 155 and 156.—These are from an eight-page leaflet, and, like the previous examples, 79they give evidence of an understanding of typography that comes from study of the subject. Mr. Baker in these pages provides practically no margins outside or inside the rule border. This border is merely a one-point rule which serves a good purpose without forcing itself upon the attention. The type-face is Old-Style Antique, which as the years go by does not seem to lose its “flavor.” It is a readable type-face and one that is at its best when used on antique-finished paper, as in this case. The leaflet was printed in black ink on a greenish cream-tinted paper. Mr. Baker’s personal device adds decorative value to the title-page. It will be noticed that the headings are set in a larger size of the body type and lined at the left. There is no indention excepting for the reprinted letters, which are set in a small size of the same type. These letters treated in this manner are only incidentally made a part of the advertising argument.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—These are from an eight-page leaflet, and, like the previous examples, 79 they show an understanding of typography that comes from studying the subject. Mr. Baker provides almost no margins outside or inside the rule border. This border is just a simple one-point rule that serves its purpose well without being distracting. The typeface is Old-Style Antique, which seems to retain its "flavor" over the years. It's a readable typeface that looks best on antique-finished paper, as seen here. The leaflet was printed in black ink on a greenish cream-tinted paper. Mr. Baker's personal design adds decorative value to the title page. It’s noticeable that the headings are set in a larger size of the body text and aligned to the left. There’s no indentation except for the reprinted letters, which are in a smaller size of the same type. These letters, presented this way, are only incidentally part of the advertising message.

Examples 157, 158 and 159.—Caslon Oldstyle and Caslon Text are factors in the effectiveness of the booklet of which these three pages are representative. These three examples are additional evidence that type alone when properly used is almost as effective from an advertising point of view as if supported by the best decoration and illustration. It might be said that good typography is to be preferred at all times to poor art work, altho really good art work properly subordinated will undoubtedly add attractiveness and interest to a booklet otherwise well treated typographically. The border of contrasted heavy and light rule adds typographic value to the booklet under consideration, and the use of the light rule in other ways on the title-page and under the headings in Examples 158 and 159 also has an influence for good. A two-line initial in color at the beginning of each paragraph and the setting off of one paragraph from another by blank space are distinctive features in the make-up of the pages. Ornaments are used in the running headings, and they are the same design as that used on the title-page. The size of this booklet was 3½ × 5½ inches. It should be noticed that Mr. Lewis in these pages places no more space between sentences than between the various words of the line, altho Mr. Sherbow and Mr. Baker on the preceding examples use more. There is difference of opinion among good printers as to the amount of space between sentences. Some of them prefer the em-quad, which has been used by the average printer for a great many years. Others believe with the ancient printers that the period and the capital are sufficient indication of the beginning of a new sentence without the insertion of a square of white space that affects the tone of the page. It should be noted in Mr. Lewis’s pages that while he has allowed fair margins around the outside of the rule border, he has arranged for very little margin inside, and to this is due a certain compactness that is agreeable.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.—Caslon Oldstyle and Caslon Text play a crucial role in the effectiveness of the booklet that these three pages represent. These examples further demonstrate that when used correctly, typography alone can be nearly as effective for advertising as when paired with top-notch decoration and illustration. It's often said that good typography should be preferred over poor artwork, although high-quality artwork, when used appropriately, can certainly enhance the appeal and interest of a booklet that is already well-designed typographically. The contrasting heavy and light border adds typographic value to the booklet in question, and the use of light rules in other parts, like the title page and under the headings in Examples 158 and 159, also has a positive effect. A two-line initial in color at the start of each paragraph and the spacing between paragraphs are distinctive elements of the pages. Ornaments are applied to the running headings, matching the design used on the title page. The booklet measures 3½ × 5½ inches. It's noteworthy that Mr. Lewis maintains the same amount of space between sentences as between words in a line, while Mr. Sherbow and Mr. Baker in the previous examples used more spacing. There is some debate among skilled printers regarding the space between sentences; some prefer the em-quad, which has been a standard choice for many years, while others, following traditional printing principles, believe that the period and capital letter are sufficient cues for starting a new sentence without adding extra white space that changes the page's tone. In Mr. Lewis’s pages, although he has allowed for decent margins outside the rule border, he has opted for minimal internal margins, which contributes to a certain compactness that is pleasing.

Example 160.—This is the cover of a small book of information. The cover stock was deep red in color and the title was printed on Japan vellum stock and pasted as a label on the cover. The label design is by Thomas Maitland Cleland, whose carefully formed lettering offers suggestions to good printers who know the value of dignity in lettering and decoration. A title label, especially when dark cover stock is used, makes it possible to include a typographic effect on the cover, thus insuring harmony 80consistent with the type-face that may be used on the inside of a booklet. The title-page that was a part of this small book was shown as Example 138 of the chapter on books.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is the cover of a small information book. The cover was a deep red color, and the title was printed on Japan vellum stock and attached as a label on the cover. The label design is by Thomas Maitland Cleland, whose carefully crafted lettering provides guidance to skilled printers who understand the importance of dignity in lettering and decoration. A title label, especially on a dark cover, allows for a typographic effect that ensures harmony with the typeface used inside the booklet. The title page that was part of this small book was shown as Example 138 of the chapter on books. 80

EXAMPLE 165

EXAMPLE 165

EXAMPLE 166

Attractive rear and front cover designs of an unconventional booklet. The arrowheads in the original were in emerald-green ink. By E. G. Jacobson, New York

EXAMPLE 166

Eye-catching front and back cover designs of an unusual booklet. The arrowheads in the original were in emerald-green ink. By E. G. Jacobson, New York

EXAMPLE 167

One of the eight pages of a prospectus for “The American Printer.” The initial “A” was in color. By Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 167

One of the eight pages of a brochure for “The American Printer.” The first “A” was in color. By Will Bradley

Examples 161 and 162.—Two facing pages from a booklet designed by Edward Everett Winchell and presenting the attractive features of a large New York hotel. There is but a small amount of descriptive matter, confined mostly to two pages in the front of the book, yet the treatment is such that more words would have spoiled it. The plain rule border gives uniform shape to the pages and pleasingly contrasts with the liberal white space inside. In Example 161 the descriptive matter is grouped at the head of the page in Avil, an interesting old-style roman type-face. The fading of the vignetted edges of the halftone into the surrounding white space is effective. Example 162 demonstrates how an illustration which is out of proportion to the page may be placed to get good results. The caption, set in capital letters slightly spaced, is in keeping with the squared style of the page. Compositors should study the position of this caption. Many would be inclined to center it directly under the illustration; this would cause the lower part of the page to seem empty and unfinished. By moving the caption down, so as to break into the white space and divide it, the sense of vacancy is not experienced.

Understood! Please provide the short piece of text you'd like me to modernize.—Two facing pages from a booklet designed by Edward Everett Winchell that highlight the appealing features of a large New York hotel. There’s just a bit of descriptive content, mostly limited to two pages at the front of the booklet, yet the design is such that adding more words would have detracted from it. The simple rule border gives a consistent shape to the pages and contrasts nicely with the ample white space inside. In Example 161, the descriptive text is positioned at the top of the page in Avil, an interesting vintage roman typeface. The gradient fading of the vignetted edges of the halftone into the surrounding white space is effective. Example 162 shows how an illustration that doesn’t fit the page can be arranged for good results. The caption, set in slightly spaced capital letters, aligns with the squared design of the page. Compositors should take note of the caption’s placement. Many might want to center it directly under the illustration, which would make the bottom of the page feel empty and incomplete. By lowering the caption to break into the white space and divide it, the sense of emptiness is avoided.

Examples 163 and 164.—These are two pages from a booklet in which typography was the chief dependence of the printer in securing artistic effects. The border is made of brass rules and four small ornaments; a decorative initial is introduced at frequent intervals thruout the booklet; otherwise, the effect is due to care in the details of typesetting. The space between sentences is the same as that between the words of a line, and widely spaced lines are not to be found. It should be kept in mind that the best typography is that in which the spacing between words is not excessive. Carelessness in typesetting and in the operation of composing machines is responsible for unpleasant effects produced by wide spacing and by “rivers” running thru the page. In Example 164 the illustration was tipped on. The paper used in this book was a buff antique, the tipped-on prints being on dull-coated stock. The dark-brown ink used for the text pages was also used for the prints, making a pleasing color harmony.

Understood! Please provide the short phrases you'd like me to modernize or keep unchanged.—These are two pages from a booklet where typography was the key focus for the printer to achieve artistic effects. The border consists of brass rules and four small decorative elements; a decorative initial appears frequently throughout the booklet; otherwise, the visual impact comes from careful attention to typesetting details. The space between sentences matches the space between words in a line, and widely spaced lines are avoided. It's important to remember that the best typography features balanced spacing between words. Poor typesetting and careless operation of composing machines can lead to unpleasant results from excessive spacing and “rivers” of white space running through the page. In Example 164, the illustration was tipped in. The paper used for this book was a buff antique, while the tipped-in prints were on dull-coated stock. The dark brown ink used for the text pages was also used for the prints, creating a pleasing color harmony.

EXAMPLE 168

EXAMPLE 168

EXAMPLE 169

Two pages from a booklet in which no decoration was used, the decorative quality of the type-face impressed on hand-made paper having been depended on to provide a dignified beauty. By the Oswald Press, New York

EXAMPLE 169

Two pages from a booklet that had no decorations, relying on the elegant quality of the typeface printed on handmade paper to create a dignified beauty. By the Oswald Press, New York

Examples 165 and 166.—These are rear and front booklet covers, the design of which is striking because of the disregard for conventionality. No capital letters are used, an idea that should be adopted with reluctance by printers unless their customers approve of the innovation. Most buyers of printing are slaves to conventionality and hesitate to accept typography or especially drawn work which is bizarre or in any way a departure from the usual methods of treating printed work. The activity of German, 81Austrian and French artists in this country, however, has caused some business and advertising men to be more tolerant in these things, as the bright coloring, dashing decoration and the newness of it all seem to get attention where conventional effects fail. It might be said in reference to the lettering on these examples that the designer has not produced anything really new so far as the use of the so-called lower-case letters instead of capitals is concerned. There was a period in the development of the modern alphabet when its characters were neither “capitals” nor “lower-case” as we know them—a period in which the minuscules were being evolved from the ancient Roman capitals or majuscules. Altho modernized, the lettering here used can be traced historically to the uncial lettering of the days of manuscript books. The arrowheads were in emerald green.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—These are the back and front booklet covers, and their design stands out because it breaks away from traditional styles. There are no capital letters used, which printers should only consider if their clients approve of this change. Most buyers of print tend to stick to conventional methods and are often reluctant to embrace typography or artwork that is unusual or strays from typical printing practices. However, the work of German, Austrian, and French artists in this country has led some business and advertising professionals to be more open-minded, as the vibrant colors, bold decorations, and overall freshness draw attention where traditional designs might not. It's worth noting that regarding the lettering in these examples, the designer hasn't really created something entirely new by using so-called lower-case letters instead of capitals. There was a time in the evolution of the modern alphabet when characters were neither “capitals” nor “lower-case” as we recognize them today—a time when minuscules were being developed from ancient Roman capitals or majuscules. Although modernized, the lettering used here can be historically traced back to the uncial lettering from the manuscript days. The arrowheads were in emerald green.

EXAMPLE 170

A hand-lettered cover-page. By the Blanchard Press, New York

EXAMPLE 170

A hand-written cover page. By the Blanchard Press, New York

Example 167.—This page, designed for the prospectus of the twenty-fifth anniversary number of The American Printer, in my opinion is among the best things that Will Bradley has done. There were eight pages and on all the decorative headings were similar, altho each had sufficient change in the treatment to give special interest to the page. The fine line decorative borders were in pleasing contrast to the dark-toned illustrations and the liberal apportionment of blank space. Fourteen-point Caslon Oldstyle, the kind with the long descenders, was used for the text matter. The large Caslon initial added another interesting spot of black. The decoration and type matter were printed in black ink on buff-tinted dull-coated paper, and the large drawn initial on each page was in sepia brown. The original size of this pamphlet was 6¾ × 9½ inches.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This page, created for the prospectus of the twenty-fifth anniversary issue of The American Printer, is, in my opinion, one of the best things Will Bradley has done. There were eight pages, and all the decorative headings were similar, though each had enough variation in their design to keep the pages interesting. The fine line decorative borders contrasted nicely with the dark-toned illustrations and the generous use of blank space. Fourteen-point Caslon Oldstyle, the version with the long descenders, was used for the text. The large Caslon initial added another interesting touch of black. The decoration and text were printed in black ink on buff-tinted dull-coated paper, and the large drawn initial on each page was in sepia brown. The original size of this pamphlet was 6¾ × 9½ inches.

Examples 168 and 169.—No decoration of any kind was used in this booklet, unless the period groups may be counted as such. The purpose was to produce artistic printing in good taste by depending upon the type-face and the paper for results. Decorative interest (usually welcome in a mild way) was supplied by the swash capitals of the italic and by letterspacing capitals and small capitals wherever they appeared. The chapter headings of all the pages in this book were aligned with one another and not “sunk” as is sometimes done. The pages are made interesting by the varied use of italic lower-case and roman capitals. The size of this booklet 82in the original was five by eight inches, and the margins were made to conform to those used on good book composition, each margin increasing in this order: Head, inner side, outer side, foot.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—No decoration of any kind was used in this booklet, except for the period groups which may be considered as such. The aim was to create artistic printing with good taste by relying on the typeface and paper for the overall effect. Decorative interest (usually welcome in a subtle way) was provided by the swash capitals in the italic and the letterspacing of capitals and small capitals wherever they occurred. The chapter headings on all the pages of this book were aligned with each other and not “sunk” as is sometimes done. The pages are made interesting through the varied use of italic lower-case and roman capitals. The size of this booklet 82 in the original was five by eight inches, and the margins were designed to match those used in quality book composition, with each margin increasing in this order: Head, inner side, outer side, foot.

EXAMPLE 171

Page from a typographically treated commemoration book

EXAMPLE 171

Page from a stylized commemorative book

EXAMPLE 172

Unconventional arrangement of a booklet page. By Corday & Gross, Cleveland, O.

EXAMPLE 172

Unconventional layout of a booklet page. By Corday & Gross, Cleveland, O.

Example 170.—Lettering, as has been pointed out, has an important place in booklet designing along with decoration, illustration and typography, and from well-lettered designs the printer can obtain valuable suggestions. This example was printed on hand-made paper, and the deckle edges and rough surface of the paper blended with the freehand drawing of letters and border. There was a further blend of the hand-lettering and the Caslon type-face used on the inside pages. The lettering was based upon the same model as the Caslon, which is standard for old-style effects. Here is a hint for printers: Distinction will be added to booklets otherwise printed from Caslon or similar type-faces if the cover and the display headings are hand-lettered. This may be done with fair results by setting them first in Caslon type. After the type has been arranged satisfactorily, take a print in blue tint on paper suitable for drawing with ink. The letters may then be traced freehand with black india ink over the blue print and any desired ruggedness or variation introduced. As light-blue ink will not reproduce when a zinc etching is made, the blue proof need not be carefully adhered to. Italic and small capitals should be introduced in such lettered designs.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Lettering plays a key role in designing booklets, alongside decoration, illustration, and typography. From well-crafted designs, printers can gain valuable insights. This example was printed on handmade paper, with deckle edges and a rough surface that complemented the freehand drawing of the letters and borders. There was also a blend of hand-lettering and the Caslon typeface used on the inside pages. The lettering was inspired by the same model as Caslon, which is typical for old-style effects. Here’s a tip for printers: Booklets printed with Caslon or similar typefaces can stand out more if the cover and display headings are hand-lettered. You can achieve decent results by first setting them in Caslon type. Once the type is arranged to your liking, take a print in blue tint on drawing paper. You can then trace the letters freehand with black India ink over the blue print, adding any desired roughness or variation. Since light-blue ink won’t show up when making a zinc etching, the blue proof doesn’t need to be followed too closely. Italic and small capitals should also be included in these lettered designs.

Example 171.—This is a page from a souvenir booklet containing an account of the exercises held in commemoration of the fiftieth anniversary of the New York Typothetæ. Almost the entire book was set in fourteen-point Cloister Oldstyle and Italic and printed in black and orange ink on a white antique-finished paper of good quality. The cover was a domestic vellum-like paper which contained the words, “Golden Anniversary of the Typothetæ,” set in Cloister Italic with swash initials, the two lines being deeply stamped into the paper on gold leaf. In this manner strict typographic harmony was maintained thruout the booklet. Large decorative initials were introduced in several instances and two-line initials of Cloister capitals were used in a minor way. This page should offer suggestions to printers who are called upon to print souvenir volumes; in fact, much work of this kind can be created by the printer suggesting the publishing of such volumes after historic or memorial meetings are held in his city.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This is a page from a souvenir booklet featuring a record of the events held to celebrate the fiftieth anniversary of the New York Typothetæ. Almost the entire book was set in fourteen-point Cloister Oldstyle and Italic, printed in black and orange ink on high-quality white antique-finished paper. The cover was made of a domestic vellum-like paper that displayed the words, “Golden Anniversary of the Typothetæ,” set in Cloister Italic with swash initials, and the two lines were deeply stamped into the paper with gold leaf. This way, a strict typographic harmony was maintained throughout the booklet. Large decorative initials were used in several cases, along with two-line initials of Cloister capitals in a minor role. This page should provide ideas for printers who are tasked with creating souvenir volumes; in fact, much of this type of work can come from printers suggesting the publication of such volumes after historic or memorial meetings take place in their city.

Example 172.—This is the first inside page of a booklet, the stock of which consisted of a thin straw-colored Japanese paper, printed on one side only. The cover, a heavy, rough dark-green paper, contained only the wastebasket illustration printed on both front and rear in gold ink set into the stock by a heavy impression. The simplicity of the typography accords with the treatment as a whole.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is the first inside page of a booklet, made from thin straw-colored Japanese paper that's printed on one side only. The cover is made of thick, coarse dark-green paper and only features a wastebasket illustration printed in gold ink on both the front and back, with a deep impression into the paper. The straightforward typography matches the overall design.


Printers will accomplish the most in booklet printing, as in other branches of the craft, if they live in an artistic atmosphere. Sir Joshua Reynolds, the great English painter, said: “The more extensive your acquaintance is with the works of those who have excelled, the more extensive will be your powers of invention.” That is the reason painters haunt Italy and other art centers where the works of the old masters are accessible. The printer should take journals such as The American Printer, devoted to the art of typography; for these journals bring to the great army of craftsmen specimens of the work of famous printers and of those who are contributing their mite to the cause of good typography.

Printers will achieve the best results in booklet printing, just like in other areas of their craft, if they immerse themselves in an artistic environment. Sir Joshua Reynolds, the renowned English painter, said: “The broader your familiarity with the works of those who excel, the broader your creative abilities will be.” This is why artists often visit Italy and other art hubs where they can see the works of the old masters. Printers should subscribe to magazines like The American Printer, which focus on the art of typography; these publications provide the vast community of craftsmen with examples of the work from famous printers and those who are making their contributions to the art of good typography.

The helpful atmosphere of the trade papers can be supplemented by specimen booklets for study purposes. These booklets can be obtained by writing to the printers producing them, or to the advertiser; and many can be had from retail houses selling the articles advertised in the booklets.

The supportive environment of the trade papers can be enhanced by sample booklets for study purposes. These booklets can be acquired by contacting the printers who produce them or the advertisers; many are also available at retail stores that sell the items advertised in the booklets.

The printer must learn more than he now knows about art or he will become only a caddie in the game of booklet printing, with the artist and ad.-writer making all the puts. The printer is depending too much upon the artist and too little upon himself. The possibilities of type arrangement have not been exhausted and never will be, yet many workers at the printing trade act upon the assumption that good printing is impossible without the artist’s initiative and co-operation. Many a good job of printing has been spoiled by inferior lettering or decoration, the work of a poor artist.

The printer needs to learn a lot more about art, or he’ll just end up being a sidekick in the booklet printing process, with the artist and copywriter calling all the shots. The printer is relying too much on the artist and not enough on his own skills. The potential for arranging type hasn’t been fully explored and never will be, yet many people in the printing industry seem to think that good printing can’t happen without the artist’s input and collaboration. Many great printing jobs have been ruined by subpar lettering or decoration, often because of a weak artist.

Withal, there is nothing more ideal than a good printer and a good artist working together to produce perfect printing.

With that said, there's nothing better than a skilled printer and a talented artist collaborating to create flawless prints.

EXAMPLE 175

Page from an automobile catalog designed by Thomas Maitland Cleland. The caption is grouped in spaced capitals of Bodoni Book. The illustration is from a pen-and-ink drawing

EXAMPLE 175

Page from a car catalog designed by Thomas Maitland Cleland. The caption is arranged in spaced capital letters in Bodoni Book. The illustration comes from a pen-and-ink drawing.

EXAMPLE 176

Unusual treatment of a specifications page. Words in capitals are letterspaced. Rules are used to add character to the page. These reproductions are one-half the size of the originals

EXAMPLE 176

Unique design of a specifications page. Words in all caps are spaced out. Lines are used to enhance the page's style. These reproductions are half the size of the originals.

83

CATALOGS

Ruskin, enumerating three branches of architectural virtue, requires of a building (1) that it act well, and do the things it was intended to do, in the best way; (2) that it speak well, and say the things it was intended to say, in the best words; (3) that it look well, and please us by its presence, whatever it has to do or say.

Ruskin, listing three aspects of architectural excellence, demands that a building (1) functions effectively and performs its intended tasks in the best possible manner; (2) communicates clearly and conveys its intended messages using the best language; (3) is aesthetically pleasing and delights us with its appearance, regardless of what it has to do or say.

These three requirements, like many others that are important in the eyes of the architect, can be applied to the illustrated catalog, which most printers at one time or another are called upon to produce:

These three requirements, like many others that are important to the architect, can be applied to the illustrated catalog, which most printers are expected to produce at some point:

(1) The catalog should act well; it should be constructed in a manner fitting the purpose for which it is issued. If, say, it contains a list of plumbers’ supplies, it should be bound in strong stock of a color that will not easily soil. If it contains a list of jewelry and is for retail purposes, it could be bound delicately in light stock.

(1) The catalog should function properly; it should be designed in a way that suits its intended purpose. For example, if it includes a list of plumbing supplies, it should be made from durable material in a color that won’t easily get dirty. If it features jewelry and is intended for retail, it could be bound more delicately with lighter materials.

(2) The catalog should speak well; the illustrations should be faithful presentations of the articles to be sold, and the descriptive matter should be well written, accurate and informative.

(2) The catalog should communicate effectively; the illustrations should accurately represent the items for sale, and the descriptions should be well-written, accurate, and informative.

(3) The catalog should look well; the type-faces, paper, ink, binding and other elements should be harmonious; the illustrations and descriptive matter should be arranged with regard to balance and proportion, and the treatment as a whole should be pleasing and interesting.

(3) The catalog should look good; the fonts, paper, ink, binding, and other elements should work well together; the illustrations and descriptions should be organized with balance and proportion in mind, and the overall presentation should be attractive and engaging.

There was a time when catalogs were printed without attention to these things, or if the first two requirements were complied with the third was ignored. It will necessitate no effort for the reader to recall the days when merchants had no orderly plans for displaying their wares—when the average storeroom and window looked like a curiosity shop. Those were the days when the catalog was a heterogeneous collection of woodcuts and type-faces, packed on the pages to the very edge of the paper.

There was a time when catalogs were printed without much thought to these details, or if the first two requirements were met, the third was overlooked. It won’t take much for the reader to remember when merchants had no organized way to show their products—when the typical storeroom and window looked like a curiosity shop. Those were the days when the catalog was a mixed bag of woodcuts and typefaces, crammed onto the pages right to the edge of the paper.

Now many show windows and salesrooms are delights to the eye, and similar care and taste are shown in the printing of the catalog.

Now, many display windows and showrooms are a feast for the eyes, and the same level of care and taste is evident in the printing of the catalog.

EXAMPLE 177

Architectural title treatment by Will Dwiggins. The lettering contains typographical suggestions

EXAMPLE 177

Architectural title design by Will Dwiggins. The lettering includes typographical recommendations.

The catalog is a portable showcase and from it the customer makes selection, often without seeing the article itself. These facts make it essential that goods be displayed invitingly and in good taste. An article well displayed requires few words to sell it.

The catalog is a portable showcase, and customers often make their selections from it without actually seeing the item. Because of this, it's crucial that products are displayed attractively and tastefully. A well-displayed item needs very few words to sell itself.

Place a girl of plain features, but handsomely dressed, in the midst of beautiful colors and lights, and a dozen millionaires will want to marry her—an extreme illustration of the power of attractive display, emphasizing the necessity of “playing up” the ordinary to create the desire of possession. It is possible, also, to accomplish this purpose by different methods. It is told of Josephine that, wishing to gain the admiration of Napoleon, she appeared at a reception in a gown of pure white, without ornament. The contrast of her simple dress with the elaborate costumes of the other women and with the elegant furnishings of the room was such as to draw compliments from the emperor. It should be remembered, however, especially by the typographer, that mere plainness of dress did not win Josephine her triumph, but that artistic simplicity did. A block of marble rough-hewn from the quarry is plain, but, carved into statuary by a Rodin, is far more than that.

Put a girl with ordinary looks, but dressed nicely, in a setting filled with beautiful colors and lights, and a dozen millionaires will want to marry her—this highlights the powerful impact of attractive presentation and the need to elevate the ordinary to spark desire. There are different ways to achieve this effect. It's said that Josephine, wanting to impress Napoleon, showed up at a gathering in a simple white gown with no embellishments. The stark difference between her modest outfit and the elaborate dresses of the other women, along with the sophisticated décor of the room, caught the emperor's eye and earned her compliments. However, it’s important to note, especially for designers, that it wasn’t just plain clothing that earned Josephine her success, but rather an artistic simplicity. A rough block of marble from the quarry is plain, but when sculpted into art by a Rodin, it becomes much more.

This point is worthy of meditation by all who wish to produce the effective and attractive catalog.

This point deserves reflection by everyone who wants to create an effective and appealing catalog.

Efforts have been made to standardize the dimensions of catalogs; it would be well for printers and others to assist in accomplishing this purpose. A committee of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, after investigating the sizes of catalogs in common use, recommended that the standard size of catalogs be six by nine inches. The recommendation was also made that the size of bulletins and large catalogs be eight and a half by eleven inches.

Efforts have been made to standardize the sizes of catalogs; it would be helpful for printers and others to support this goal. A committee from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, after looking into the sizes of catalogs that are commonly used, recommended that the standard size for catalogs be six by nine inches. They also suggested that the size for bulletins and large catalogs be eight and a half by eleven inches.

Other suggestions by the committee were: Paper-covered catalogs intended to be permanently filed should be trimmed to exact size, cover and all, barring deckle edges. Overlapping covers are favored only when the covers are stiff enough to support the catalog’s weight when standing on edge. Titles should be printed on the exposed backs of the catalogs, reading from top downward. The date of publication should appear on the title-page. 84An index card of standard size (three by five inches), containing the title and character of the contents, should be inclosed in every catalog.

Other recommendations from the committee included: Paper-covered catalogs meant for permanent filing should be cut to the exact size, including the cover, except for deckle edges. Overlapping covers are only acceptable if they are stiff enough to hold the catalog's weight when standing upright. Titles should be printed on the visible backs of the catalogs, reading from top to bottom. The publication date should be included on the title page. 84 A standard-sized index card (three by five inches) that includes the title and a description of the contents should be included in every catalog.

EXAMPLE 178

EXAMPLE 178

EXAMPLE 179

Facing pages that show effective results obtained in a simple way. The plain, legible typography ably supports the strong illustration and attractive border treatment. By the Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, N. Y.

EXAMPLE 179

Facing pages showcase effective results achieved in an easy way. The simple, clear typography effectively complements the bold illustrations and appealing border design. By the Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, N. Y.

Before proceeding with the composition of a catalog the printer should insist that the copy be legible, orderly prepared, and all points settled as to type-face, headings and position of illustrations. A dummy page should be planned and set up, and it should be studied and discussed by customer and printer before work is begun on the catalog as a whole.

Before moving forward with creating a catalog, the printer should make sure that the text is clear, well-organized, and that all details like font, headings, and placement of images are finalized. A sample page should be designed and reviewed, and both the customer and printer should discuss it thoroughly before starting work on the entire catalog.

If the catalog is to be elaborately treated, all drawings should be approved and plates made before the type work is commenced. If the printer is assisting in the general preparation of the catalog, he should keep before the customer the fact that decoration is merely supplemental, and should urge first attention to the type matter and illustrations.

If the catalog is going to be detailed, all drawings should be approved, and plates should be created before starting the type work. If the printer is involved in preparing the catalog, they should remind the customer that decoration is just an addition, and should prioritize the type matter and illustrations instead.

Example 175.—This catalog is one of those productions which in style so closely express the personality of an individual that they are not a direct help in teaching typography or catalog planning to others. Most typographers must proceed according to defined requirements and plan their work with regard to set styles. Mr. Cleland and a few other typographic artists in this country carry out their ideas without the assistance of an advisory board. The average typographer or artist, on the other hand, must not only incorporate the suggestions of half a dozen persons, but must submit to the deletion of most of the little things that to his way of thinking give his work character and make it worth while—the penalty of being merely an average typographer. Mr. Cleland is a student of the best printing of past centuries, and his refined taste and wonderful skill with the pen enable him to produce effects that would be envied by the master printers of old.

Understood! Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—This catalog is one of those creations that so accurately reflect an individual's personality in style that it doesn't really help others learn about typography or catalog planning. Most typographers have to follow defined guidelines and plan their work according to established styles. Mr. Cleland and a few other typographic artists in this country execute their concepts without the input of an advisory board. On the other hand, the average typographer or artist has to not only consider the suggestions of several people but also has to let go of most of the small details that they believe give their work character and make it valuable—the price of being just an average typographer. Mr. Cleland studies the best printing from past centuries, and his refined taste and incredible skill with the pen allow him to create effects that would make even the master printers of the past envious.

On this page he has used Bodoni Book, slightly spacing the capital letters and grouping the matter so that it dominates the blank space in the lower portion of the page.

On this page, he has used Bodoni Book, slightly adjusting the spacing of the capital letters and organizing the content so that it stands out in the empty space at the bottom of the page.

The cartouche, or panel, as here used for the car name was in favor in Bodoni’s day, a hundred or more years ago. The horizontal position of the illustration adds to the pleasure in examining the catalog, for when an illustration runs the long way of such a page the necessary turning of the book is an annoyance.

The cartouche, or panel, used here for the car name was popular during Bodoni’s time, over a hundred years ago. The horizontal layout of the illustration makes it more enjoyable to look through the catalog, because when an illustration runs lengthwise across the page, having to turn the book can be frustrating.

Example 176.—Brass rules are seldom well applied in typographic work, but when they are, as in this instance, the results are pleasing. This page, because of its tabular nature, was doubtlessly difficult to arrange, and every compositor, appreciating that fact, will admire what Mr. Cleland has accomplished. It should be noticed that words of roman capitals have in every instance been letterspaced, while those in lower-case have not. This treatment gives effects that are unusual and well liked by persons of good taste.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Brass rules are rarely used correctly in typography, but when they are, as in this case, the results are attractive. This page, due to its tabular layout, must have been challenging to organize, and every typesetter, understanding that, will appreciate what Mr. Cleland has achieved. It’s worth noting that words in capital letters have been letterspaced in every instance, while those in lower-case have not. This approach creates effects that are unique and favored by people with good taste.

Example 177.—This shows the cover of a catalog of plays. Will Dwiggins in his usual clever manner has made a design full of character, human in the absence of the mechanical. The lettering contains suggestions for effects that could be approximated with some well-designed type-face. It will probably be well to warn against 85the careless use of typographic ornaments in any attempts that may be made to imitate the effect of this decorative border. Architectural designs formed with the average printshop material seldom look well. Simple rule effects would be better.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This displays the cover of a play catalog. Will Dwiggins, as always, has created a design brimming with character, human rather than mechanical. The lettering suggests effects that could be achieved with some thoughtfully designed typefaces. It’s advisable to caution against the careless use of typographic decorations if anyone tries to replicate the effect of this decorative border. Architectural designs made with standard printshop materials rarely look good. Simple rule effects would work better.

EXAMPLE 180

EXAMPLE 180

EXAMPLE 181

Inside page and cover of a publication catalog designed by D. B. Updike. The typographic treatment of these two pages is suitable and pleasing. The cover stock was green-gray of a rough antique finish

EXAMPLE 181

Inside page and cover of a publication catalog designed by D. B. Updike. The typography on these two pages is appropriate and visually appealing. The cover material was a green-gray with a textured, vintage finish.

Examples 178 and 179.—In many catalogs a page illustration is faced with a page of reading matter describing it. In this instance the descriptive matter is small in amount and for that reason presented a problem in typography. The printer, however, solved the difficulty by using a type-face fairly large in size, but of good design, and placing the group in the upper part of the page aligned with the top of the illustration. It is well to keep in mind that in booklets, catalogs and similar work good results are frequently obtained by aligning all pages at the head. The effectiveness of these two pages is helped also by the fact that a red border surrounds each page and the halftone has a dark background.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—In many catalogs, an illustration is paired with a page of text describing it. In this case, the amount of descriptive text is small, which created a problem in typography. However, the printer solved this issue by using a fairly large, well-designed typeface and placing the text group at the top of the page, aligned with the top of the illustration. It's important to remember that in booklets, catalogs, and similar materials, aligning all pages at the head often leads to good results. The effectiveness of these two pages is also enhanced by the fact that each page has a red border and the halftone has a dark background.

Example 180.—There is evidence in this specimen that it is possible to obtain variety and interest by simple means. The italic, especially with the decorative quality found in swash letters, is a factor, and the rule at the head, with bits of decoration at the ends, also helps. It will be noticed that no leaders have been used; their omission is sometimes advisable, at other times not. An antique-finished white paper is best for old-style effects such as this.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This specimen shows that you can create variety and interest with straightforward methods. The italic type, especially with the decorative touch in swash letters, plays a role, and the rule at the top, along with some decorative accents at the ends, contributes as well. You'll notice that there are no leaders; leaving them out can be a good choice sometimes, and other times it’s not. An antique-finished white paper works best for classic looks like this.

Example 181.—This cover-page has been built on the small illustration. From the old fireplace the view of the room fades into the paper stock. After the border line is extended from the drawing, there remains a large amount 86of blank space, on which the title, in a well-balanced position, is arranged in type. The address neatly fitted in the space at the foot finishes the design at that point.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This cover page is based on the small illustration. The view of the room fades into the paper stock from the old fireplace. Once the border line extends from the drawing, a large blank area remains, where the title is placed in a balanced position using type. The address is neatly fitted into the space at the bottom, completing the design at that point. 86

EXAMPLE 182

German poster type on a grocery catalog with characteristic block grouping

EXAMPLE 182

German poster style on a grocery catalog with typical block arrangement

EXAMPLE 183

EXAMPLE 183

EXAMPLE 184

Typographic arrangement of the title-page and one of the inside pages of a museum catalog. The proportions of this type-face blend harmoniously with the dimensions of the page. Example 184 shows some details of catalog composition

EXAMPLE 184

The layout of the title page and one of the interior pages of a museum catalog. The proportions of this typeface work well with the size of the page. Example 184 highlights some details of the catalog design.

EXAMPLE 185

Rules add a decorative quality to this book catalog. By J. H. Nash

EXAMPLE 185

Rules give a stylish touch to this book catalog. By J. H. Nash

Example 182.—Modern German typographical ideas have found expression in this grocery-catalog page. The lettering is type, the black tone and decorative form of which were probably inspired by strong lettering designed for poster purposes. Rules seem to have a place in the building of modern German art effects, as will be seen by this design. Bold type as used here is possibly unnecessarily forceful, but when color is to be shown in its true values it is desirable. Color never shows to advantage in thin lines, while broad lines bring out the color qualities of the ink. This is why colored inks printed from light-faced types seem to lack the brilliancy of the prints from flat-surfaced plates in ink-makers’ sample books.

Understood. Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—Modern German typographical ideas have been reflected in this grocery catalog page. The lettering is type, and the bold style and decorative form were likely inspired by strong lettering made for posters. Lines seem to play a role in creating modern German art effects, as this design demonstrates. The bold type used here might be a bit too strong, but when showing color at its best, it’s necessary. Color never looks good with thin lines, while wider lines enhance the color qualities of the ink. That's why colored inks printed from light-faced types tend to lack the brightness of prints from flat-surfaced plates in ink manufacturers’ sample books.

Examples 183 and 184.—Every printer at some time is called on to produce catalogs in which books or other published articles are listed and priced, and on such occasions wishes to see what “the other fellow” has done in this line. For this reason the two pages are of interest. They show a title-page and a representative inside page from a catalog issued by the Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York. The type-face is of the class usually designated as French Oldstyle, and its proportions blend harmoniously with the dimensions of the page. The distribution of blank space on the title is pleasing; the type lines are so grouped as to secure value from the background of white. In Example 184 the heads and subheads are pleasingly contrasted by the use of capitals in some cases and small 87capitals in others. Each item is grouped, and the technical details are kept orderly by being placed in a line with the price. No period is used after the item number.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Every printer at some point is asked to create catalogs listing and pricing books or other published materials, and during these times, they want to see what “the other guy” has produced. This is why the two pages are interesting. They display a title page and a sample inside page from a catalog put out by the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York. The typeface is typically referred to as French Oldstyle, and its proportions blend well with the page size. The layout of blank space on the title is appealing; the type lines are arranged so they stand out against the white background. In Example 184, the headings and subheadings are attractively contrasted by using capitals in some places and small capitals in others. Each item is organized, and the technical details are systematically aligned with the price. There is no period used after the item number.

EXAMPLE 186

An automobile catalog page in which the type matter was prominently treated. The original page (about twice this size) was printed in dark-gray and orange inks on white antique paper. By the Robert L. Stillson Company, New York

EXAMPLE 186

A car catalog page where the text was prominently displayed. The original page (about twice this size) was printed in dark gray and orange inks on white vintage paper. By the Robert L. Stillson Company, New York

EXAMPLE 187

Unusual treatment of an automobile catalog page. The original was more than twice this size. The matter is liberally supplied with headings, the arrangement in the panel at the left taking care of most of them. By the Cadillac Printing Company, Detroit, Mich.

EXAMPLE 187

Unique approach to an auto catalog page. The original was more than twice this size. The content includes plenty of headings, with most of them organized in the panel on the left. By the Cadillac Printing Company, Detroit, Mich.

EXAMPLE 188

Page in reduced size from a wine list designed by T. M. Cleland for the Oswald Press. Interesting use of rules in tabular style

EXAMPLE 188

This is a smaller version of a page from a wine list created by T. M. Cleland for the Oswald Press. It features an interesting use of rules in a table format.

Example 185.—Scotch Roman type is used to excellent advantage in this book-catalog page. The title in each case is in large capitals, the sub-title and the name of the author are in smaller capitals, the explanatory matter in roman lower-case and the technical details in small italic. It will be seen that the advertising points have been carefully considered. A rule border and two ornaments add decorative quality. The closeness of the border to the type matter merges it with the page in an attractive manner. As in this case, decorative treatment should be a part of the general design and not something separate.

Understood! Please provide the text to modernize.—Scotch Roman type is effectively used in this book catalog page. The title is presented in large capitals, the subtitle and the author's name are in smaller capitals, the explanatory text is in standard lowercase, and the technical details are in small italics. It's clear that the advertising points have been thoughtfully considered. A rule border and two decorative elements enhance the overall look. The closeness of the border to the text makes it blend nicely with the page. As shown here, decorative design should be integrated into the overall layout rather than treated as something separate.

Example 186.—On automobile catalogs typography seldom receives the attention it deserves. Illustration and decoration are given great attention, and what type matter is used seems to be like a guest invited at the eleventh hour. However, this example is from a catalog in which type acts an important part. In its original form this page was about twice the size of the reproduction and was printed in dark gray and orange on white antique paper. It will be seen that beginning with a colored initial the reader can without effort or eyestrain read the descriptive matter, which is followed by technical details in smaller type and a line illustration of the car. Scotch Roman was used, and it was not found necessary to introduce italic.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—In car catalogs, the typography often doesn’t get the attention it deserves. Illustrations and decorations are prioritized, while the choice of type seems to be an afterthought. However, this example comes from a catalog where the typography plays a significant role. In its original form, this page was about twice the size of the reproduction and was printed in dark gray and orange on white antique paper. You’ll notice that starting with a colored initial allows the reader to easily read the descriptions without straining their eyes, followed by smaller technical details and a line illustration of the car. Scotch Roman was used, and there was no need to add italics.

Example 187.—The treatment of this page is uncommon for catalog purposes. A Goudy type-face was printed in dark brown (border rules in light brown) on an Italian hand-made paper. The size was more than twice that shown here. Sub-headings have all been grouped in the panel at the left, each so placed as to be opposite the paragraph to which it belongs. The effect was one of richness and suggestive of quality. Illustrations of the cars were of page size printed by the gravure process.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The way this page is designed is unusual for a catalog. A Goudy typeface was printed in dark brown (with border rules in light brown) on Italian handmade paper. The size was more than twice what you see here. Subheadings are all grouped in the panel on the left, each positioned right across from the paragraph it relates to. The overall effect was one of richness and suggested quality. The illustrations of the cars were full-page size printed using the gravure process.

Example 188.—Few printers would use rules in tabular form for a high-class wine list; tabular work is supposed to offer no opportunity for art expression. We know of the stone rejected by the builder which became the headstone of the corner. We have also heard of Michelangelo carving a masterpiece from an ill-shaped block of stone that had been discarded by other sculptors. Mr. Cleland did an equally interesting thing when he selected rules to give decorative quality to this wine list, supplementing characteristically drawn head- and tail-pieces. Caslon Oldstyle was used and the paper was hand-made. A pleasing effect was obtained by letterspacing the capitals in the headings.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—Few printers would use rules in table format for a high-end wine list; tables are seen as lacking opportunities for artistic expression. We know about the stone that the builder rejected, which became the cornerstone. We've also heard of Michelangelo creating a masterpiece from a poorly shaped block of stone that other sculptors had discarded. Mr. Cleland did something equally intriguing when he chose rules to add a decorative touch to this wine list, complementing it with uniquely designed head and tail pieces. Caslon Oldstyle was used, and the paper was handmade. A nice effect was achieved by letterspacing the capital letters in the headings.

EXAMPLE 189

German treatment of a wine list, showing neat typography and attractive decoration

EXAMPLE 189

German design of a wine list, featuring clean typography and appealing decoration

Example 189.—We usually expect strong, masculine effects from German typographers and decorators, and when we come across a wine list as dainty as this one we are surprised and pleased. There is remarkable harmony of type-face, decoration and illustration. The type-face is uncommonly legible for so ornamental a letter, and the light decorative lines of the illustration and border reflect the qualities of the type-face. In the original there was an additional border around the one here shown, and it was printed in a very light gray-brown tint. The tint also appeared in parts of the illustration.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—We often expect bold, masculine designs from German typographers and decorators, so we're surprised and delighted to find a wine list as delicate as this one. There’s a remarkable balance of typeface, decoration, and illustration. The typeface is surprisingly easy to read for such an ornate style, and the light decorative lines in the illustration and border complement the characteristics of the typeface. In the original version, there was an extra border around the one shown here, printed in a very light gray-brown shade. This shade also appeared in parts of the illustration.

EXAMPLE 190

EXAMPLE 190

EXAMPLE 191

Title-page of a catalog of exhibits, and a page showing the use of capitals and italic for the descriptions. By D. B. Updike

EXAMPLE 191

Title page of a catalog of exhibits and a page demonstrating the use of capital letters and italics for the descriptions. By D. B. Updike

Examples 190 and 191.—These pages are from an exhibition catalog. D. B. Updike is responsible for the typography, hence the pages afford an interesting study. The catalog is printed in four sizes of type, altho a cursory view of the pages would lead to the impression that a less number is used. There are three sizes of capitals and one 88size of italic. A fact that makes the catalog unique is the absence of roman lower-case. It is difficult to visualize an eighty-two-page book without roman lower-case, but here is one. The title-page (Example 190) is composed in three closely related sizes of capitals, corresponding to the sizes used on the inner pages. The important words, “Catalogue,” “Memorial Exhibition” and “Augustus Saint-Gaudens,” are set a size larger than the minor words “of a” and “of the works of,” altho the difference is but a point. The small woodcut is an appropriate accompaniment of the classic style of the type composition, and the harmony is further enhanced by printing in a clear black ink on thin white antique paper. Example 191 shows a page from the body of the catalog, the features of which are worth noting. All lines excepting the exhibit number are set flush at the left, and the paragraphs or groups are separated by space. The title of the exhibit is set in the larger capitals, the descriptive matter in italic lower-case, and quoted words in the smaller capitals. Punctuation at the ends of lines is sometimes omitted and sometimes used. The rule adopted by modern typographers—to omit punctuation points at the ends of display lines—leads to nice distinctions when a page such as this one is to be treated. As a help in deciding on proper marginal distribution on work of this sort, it is well to mention that the size of the leaf of this catalog was 4¾ × 7¾ inches, the type pages measuring 2⅝ × 5½ inches or less, the type pages not being of regular length. The margin at the head was ⅝ inch; at the binding edge, ⅞ inch; at the outer edge, 1¼ inches; at the foot, 1⅝ inches or more.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like modernized.—These pages are from an exhibition catalog. D. B. Updike designed the typography, making these pages an interesting study. The catalog is printed in four type sizes, although a quick glance might give the impression that fewer sizes are used. There are three sizes of capital letters and one size of italic. What's unique about this catalog is the lack of roman lower-case letters. It’s hard to picture an eighty-two-page book without them, but here it is. The title page (Example 190) features three closely related sizes of capitals, matching the sizes on the inner pages. The key words “Catalogue,” “Memorial Exhibition,” and “Augustus Saint-Gaudens” are set in a size larger than the smaller phrases “of a” and “of the works of,” though the difference is just a point. The small woodcut fits well with the classic style of the type composition, and the overall harmony is enhanced by the use of clear black ink on thin white antique paper. Example 191 shows a page from the body of the catalog, which has some notable features. All lines, except for the exhibit number, are flush left, and the paragraphs or groups are separated by space. The title of the exhibit is displayed in the larger capitals, the descriptive text in italic lower-case, and quoted words in the smaller capitals. Punctuation at the end of lines is sometimes omitted and other times included. The modern typographic rule—to omit punctuation at the end of display lines—creates nice distinctions in pages like this. When determining proper margins for this kind of work, it’s helpful to note that the catalog's leaf size was 4¾ × 7¾ inches, with the type pages measuring 2⅝ × 5½ inches or less, and the type pages not being of uniform length. The margin at the top was ⅝ inch; at the binding edge, ⅞ inch; at the outer edge, 1¼ inches; and at the bottom, 1⅝ inches or more.

EXAMPLE 192

Interesting page from a sewing-machine catalog. By Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, N. Y.

EXAMPLE 192

Cool page from a sewing machine catalog. By Matthews-Northrup Works, Buffalo, NY.

Example 192.—This shows a page from a catalog of sewing machines and sewing-machine parts. The workings of the machine were pictured in such a realistic manner that the effect was almost equivalent to a demonstration on the machine itself. The border did not force itself on the attention, yet furnished the decorative element to the page. The type matter, in Caslon roman, was stylishly arranged in harmony with 90illustration and border, and was notable because it was probably given as much consideration as the designing and plate-making.

Understood! Please provide the text for me to modernize.—This shows a page from a catalog of sewing machines and parts. The design of the machine was illustrated so realistically that it felt almost like a live demonstration. The border was subtle yet added a nice decorative touch to the page. The text, in Caslon Roman, was stylishly arranged to complement the illustration and border, and it stood out because it probably received as much care as the design and print.

EXAMPLE 193

Neat typography on an attractive background. Glove catalog by the Hall-Taylor Company, Milwaukee, Wis.

EXAMPLE 193

Clean typography on a visually appealing background. Glove catalog from the Hall-Taylor Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

EXAMPLE 195

Clever treatment of tabular matter in a catalog page. By the Chasmar-Winchell Press

EXAMPLE 195

Smart presentation of tables in a catalog page. By the Chasmar-Winchell Press

EXAMPLE 194

An artistic treatment of a commercial catalog showing what is possible in typography. By Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco, Cal.

EXAMPLE 194

A creative approach to a commercial catalog that showcases the possibilities in typography. By Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco, CA.

Example 193.—This firm has gloves to sell and in a particularly pleasing and artistic manner catalogs them for the information of the buying public. By means of the four-color process the gloves are shown in their natural colors, and placed in the “spotlight,” as it were, by the gradual fading away of the dark background about them. A general talk on the subject of gloves is carried from page to page, while the number and description are placed in smaller type directly beneath the articles.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This company sells gloves and presents them in a very attractive and creative way for potential buyers. Using a four-color printing process, the gloves are displayed in their true colors, highlighted by a gradual darkening of the background around them. A general discussion about gloves is woven throughout the pages, while the quantity and description appear in smaller text directly below the items.

Example 194.—In commercial catalog work the illustration of the article to be sold is of the same importance as the article on the counter in the salesroom. The usual method of selling is to show the customer the article and then by giving information about it and telling of its good qualities to persuade the customer to buy. The illustration, then, is important, and by looking on Example 194, we can see how one printer recognized this fact. The roll of yarn is prominent in the page and the name of the yarn is second in seeking attention. The goods are displayed attractively in surroundings that are interesting. The decorative border (made of rule) has merged with it the name of the manufacturer.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.—In commercial catalog work, the illustration of the item being sold is just as important as the item itself displayed in the sales area. The typical selling method involves showing the customer the item and then sharing information about it while highlighting its benefits to persuade them to buy. Therefore, the illustration plays a crucial role, and by looking at Example 194, we can see how one printer understood this principle. The roll of yarn is prominently featured on the page, and the name of the yarn follows closely in capturing attention. The products are presented in an appealing way within an engaging setting. The decorative border (made of rule) seamlessly integrates the name of the manufacturer.

Example 195.—It requires the skill of a typographer and the talent of an artist to make a good-looking page from tabular matter. Where this combination is lacking the result is commonplace and unsatisfactory. It was not lacking on this example, for one seldom sees a tabular page so attractively arranged.

Understood! Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—It takes the skill of a designer and the talent of an artist to create an appealing page from tables. When this combination is absent, the result is ordinary and disappointing. This example stands out because you rarely see a table page so beautifully organized.

EXAMPLE 200

Program cover page in ecclesiastical style

EXAMPLE 200

Program cover page in church style

91

PROGRAMS

“Let all things be done decently and in order.” These words of Paul, while possible of wide application, have peculiar significance applied to the program. The program exists because of recognition of the necessity of orderly procedure “where two or three are gathered together.” Historically, the program has come to us from the early times, when all knowledge was transmitted by word of mouth. Church services are the result of evolution from ancient ceremonies, and other exercises for which programs are used originated in the far past.

“Let everything be done properly and in order.” These words from Paul, while applicable in many situations, hold special meaning when related to the program. The program exists because we recognize the need for organized procedures “where two or three are gathered together.” Historically, the program has been passed down from early times, when all knowledge was shared verbally. Church services have evolved from ancient rituals, and other activities that use programs originated long ago.

Programs familiar to printers could be divided into four classes: Programs of sacred services, dance programs, banquet programs, and programs for various entertainments. In this order they will be considered.

Programs that printers know well can be grouped into four categories: programs for religious services, dance programs, banquet programs, and programs for different kinds of entertainment. We'll discuss them in this order.

EXAMPLE 201

Excellent arrangement for economizing space on a program containing numerous small titles

EXAMPLE 201

Great setup for saving space on a program that has a lot of small titles.

The historical side of the program of sacred services should not be overlooked. It is a mistake for printers to produce church programs in the same style of typography employed on secular forms. Church programs, more than any other line of printing, offer opportunity for artistic treatment, and their production is pleasure to the artist-printer who believes significance is an important element in good typography.

The historical aspect of the church service program shouldn't be ignored. It's a mistake for printers to create church programs with the same typography used for regular forms. Church programs, more than any other type of printing, provide an opportunity for artistic design, and creating them is enjoyable for the artist-printer who values significance as a key element of good typography.

EXAMPLE 202

An almost perfect specimen of church-program printing, showing the missal style

EXAMPLE 202

An almost perfect example of church program printing, showcasing the missal style.

The key to the proper treatment of ecclesiastical printing lies in the old manuscript books written in the monasteries. Black ink was commonly used for the main portion of books, and vermilion, a red earth (rubrica), for titles and important parts of the text. In the writing of Missals (containing services of the celebration of mass), of Psalters (containing the psalms), and of Books of Hours (containing prayers and offices for the several hours of the day), maltese crosses and uncial capitals were written in vermilion. Uncial capitals are now made by several type foundries as Missal initials, Caxton initials, Sylph initials, etc., and maltese crosses are easily procured. As black text letters were also used on these missals and psalters, the type-faces now known as Caslon Text, 92Cloister Black, Flemish Black, etc., being copies of these early text letters, are appropriate faces for display portions of church programs. Text letters were long ago discontinued for body purposes in English printing, hence they have become unfamiliar to the general reader and it is not desirable to use them for such purposes. A roman letter such as Caslon is the best companion for these black text letters.

The key to properly handling ecclesiastical printing is rooted in the old manuscript books created in monasteries. Black ink was typically used for the main text of books, while vermilion, a red earth (rubrica), was used for titles and important sections. In the writing of Missals (which include mass services), Psalters (which contain the psalms), and Books of Hours (which feature prayers and offices for various times of the day), Maltese crosses and uncial capitals were written in vermilion. Uncial capitals are now produced by various type foundries as Missal initials, Caxton initials, Sylph initials, etc., and Maltese crosses are easy to find. Since black text letters were also used in these missals and psalters, typefaces known as Caslon Text, 92Cloister Black, Flemish Black, etc., which are replicas of these early text letters, are suitable for display portions of church programs. Text letters have long been phased out for body text in English printing, making them unfamiliar to the average reader, so it's not advisable to use them for such purposes. A roman letter like Caslon is the best match for these black text letters.

EXAMPLE 203

Classic treatment of church-program page. By D. B. Updike, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 203

Standard layout for a church program page. By D. B. Updike, Boston, Mass.

The Church of England, the American branch of which is known as the Protestant Episcopal Church, deserves much credit for the modern development of an ecclesiastical style of printing. Because of the custom of using red ink in forms of service, for the parts giving direction as to the conduct of the services, these parts have become known as “rubrics.” It is necessary to mention to printers generally that when colors are used on programs or books of service the “rubrics” should be in red. This treatment is illustrated in the page from the marriage service shown as Example 146 in the chapter on “Books” which also shows an uncial initial. When only black is used it is customary to set the rubrics in italic.

The Church of England, the American branch of which is known as the Protestant Episcopal Church, deserves a lot of credit for the modern development of an ecclesiastical style of printing. Because of the tradition of using red ink in service forms for the sections directing how the services should be conducted, these sections have come to be called “rubrics.” It's important to inform printers in general that when colors are used in programs or service books, the “rubrics” should be in red. This approach is illustrated in the page from the marriage service shown as Example 146 in the chapter on “Books,” which also features an uncial initial. When only black is used, it’s typical to set the rubrics in italic.

EXAMPLE 205

Generous margins on a church program are pleasing

EXAMPLE 205

Wide margins on a church program look nice

Example 200 (Insert).—This title-page presents a modern interpretation of the historic ecclesiastical treatment. The black type-face is Caslon Text, and is a copy of one of the early manuscript letters, as before mentioned. As pointed Gothic is usually accepted as the style of church architecture, so pointed Gothic type-faces have been adopted for church printing by typographers who know. Uncial rubricated initials as used on this title-page are known commercially as Caxton initials. The red lines which are a prominent part of the page have historic significance. Now grown to possess decorative value, they originated thru the necessities of writers of manuscript books, and were originally guide lines for writing. They designated the position of the page and the lines of letters. With the ancient churchmen the maltese cross was the symbol of Christ, and today also these crosses have that significance, altho to a great extent they are now considered merely as ecclesiastical decoration. The square device in the center is in the Celtic style of ornament. The significance of the design lies in the decorative cross and the letters I. H. S. (Iesus Hominum Salvator, Latin, meaning “Jesus Saviour of Men”). It may be well to suggest that treatment of church printing should be varied sometimes with the denomination for which the work is done. The majority of clergymen will be pleased with printing treated in the accepted ecclesiastical style, yet there are some, prejudiced against “high church” liturgies and emblems, and others with individual ideas of what is appropriate, who must be considered. The writer recalls an instance in which the customer, an Episcopal clergyman, objected to what he called a “Latin” cross, used as an ornament on a title-page, and was satisfied when a maltese cross was substituted for the purpose. Many church programs which now appear commonplace would take on a churchly aspect if rubricated, even tho that be possible only on the title-page.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—This title page offers a modern take on traditional church design. The black type used is Caslon Text, a reproduction of one of the early manuscript letters mentioned earlier. Just as pointed Gothic is recognized as the style of church architecture, pointed Gothic typefaces have been chosen for church printing by knowledgeable typographers. The uncial rubricated initials featured on this title page are known as Caxton initials in commercial terms. The red lines that are a significant part of the page are historically meaningful. Initially necessary for manuscript writers, they were originally guide lines for writing, indicating the page layout and the lines of text. For early church leaders, the Maltese cross symbolized Christ, and this meaning continues today, although they are often seen merely as artistic decoration. The square design in the center is styled after Celtic ornamentation. The design's significance lies in the decorative cross and the letters I. H. S. (Jesus, Savior of Humanity, Latin, meaning “Jesus Saviour of Men”). It's worth mentioning that church printing should sometimes be adjusted based on the denomination for which it is created. Most clergy will appreciate printing done in the standard ecclesiastical style, but some may have biases against “high church” liturgies and symbols or hold individual views on what is suitable, and these factors should be taken into account. The writer remembers a case where a customer, an Episcopal clergyman, objected to what he referred to as a “Latin” cross displayed as a decoration on a title page, and he was satisfied when a Maltese cross was used instead. Many church programs that now seem ordinary would take on a more ecclesiastical feel if they were rubricated, even if that is only possible on the title page.

The example under consideration (No. 200), it will be noticed, is constructed on squared lines, a shape dictated by the large decorative device. While the page as arranged is interesting and fairly harmonious, the pointed letters in the type lines would blend better with a device of the pointed Gothic kind; or, again, the squared device would be in closer harmony with a squared type effect such as could be obtained with roman capitals.

The example we are looking at (No. 200) is designed with squared lines, a shape determined by the large decorative element. While the page layout is interesting and fairly balanced, the pointed letters in the text would work better with a pointed Gothic style; alternatively, the squared design would match more closely with a squared typeface, like you would get with Roman capitals.

EXAMPLE 204

Program cover-page in semi-missal style. By Lee Crittenden, New York

EXAMPLE 204

Program cover page in semi-missal style. By Lee Crittenden, New York

Example 201.—This page 93presents an excellent suggestion for the arrangement of a program in which numerous small titles appear. If each title were set in a measure the full width of the type page, as is frequently done, the matter would not come into one page. The arrangement as shown not only economizes space but gives symmetry and tone, which otherwise would not be had. The portions in red are well selected for printing in that color. There is artistic value in the shape formed by the vertical dividing rule and the page heading.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This page 93provides a great idea for organizing a program that includes several small titles. If each title were placed to fill the entire width of the type page, as is commonly done, the content wouldn't fit on one page. The arrangement shown here not only saves space but also adds symmetry and style that would otherwise be missing. The parts in red are well chosen for printing in that color. There is artistic value in the shape created by the vertical dividing line and the page heading.

EXAMPLE 206

A dance card by Edward W. Stutes, Spokane, Wash.

EXAMPLE 206

A dance card by Edward W. Stutes, Spokane, WA.

EXAMPLE 208

Unconventional treatment of a dance program

EXAMPLE 208

Alternative approach to a dance program

Example 202.—This page has not the compactness of the preceding one, yet esthetically it is more pleasing. It is an almost perfect specimen of church-program printing. As already mentioned, the horizontal red lines and the black text letter used for titles have an ecclesiastical motive. Careful disposition of blank space has given a pleasing tone to the page, which is also helped by the position of the second stanza of the hymn at the foot. The type-faces are harmonious, the use of black text, old-style roman and italic affording a pleasing variety. By including in the color the initial letters and the title “Holy Communion,” all parts of the page are blended and related.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This page isn't as compact as the previous one, but it's more visually appealing. It showcases an almost perfect example of church program printing. As mentioned earlier, the horizontal red lines and the black text used for the titles have a religious theme. The careful arrangement of blank space has enhanced the page's aesthetic, further supported by the placement of the second stanza of the hymn at the bottom. The fonts complement each other well, with the use of black text, old-style roman, and italics providing a nice variety. By incorporating color into the initial letters and the title "Holy Communion," all elements of the page are unified and interconnected.

Example 203.—The printer may be naturally curious to know how a typographer such as D. B. Updike, who is known to specialize on ecclesiastical typography, treats church programs. Here is an Updike page, from a program of Lenten services, arranged in the simple, classic style of typographic treatment that he always renders so well. As will be noticed, the main portion of the type page is aligned at the left. The manner of using capitals, small capitals, lower-case and italic is an interesting study. While examining the page it is enlightening to note that A.M. and P.M. are in small capitals, and that no space other than furnished by the period is placed between these abbreviations or the degrees D.D., Ph.D., etc.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—The printer might naturally be curious to see how a typographer like D. B. Updike, who is known for his focus on church typography, designs church programs. Here’s a page by Updike, from a program for Lenten services, laid out in the simple, classic style of typography that he always executes so well. As you’ll notice, the main part of the text is aligned to the left. The way he uses capital letters, small capitals, lowercase, and italics is a fascinating study. While looking at the page, it is enlightening to see that A.M. and P.M. are in small capitals, and that no space other than provided by the period exists between these abbreviations or the degrees D.D., Ph.D., etc.

EXAMPLE 207

Page from a booklet program. By C. R. Beran, Denver, Colo.

EXAMPLE 207

Page from a program booklet. By C. R. Beran, Denver, Colo.

Example 204.—This is the title-page of a small program which was in booklet form, a page being devoted to each event on the program. The title-page is in missal style, with cross rules and uncial initials. The spaced Pabst capitals at the foot are not sufficiently strong in tone to balance the upper part of the page. Perhaps the effect would be better had the missal style of treatment been extended to the lower portion of the page.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is the title page of a small program that was printed as a booklet, with each event getting its own page. The title page is designed in a missal style, featuring cross rules and large initial letters. The spaced Pabst capitals at the bottom aren’t bold enough to match the strength of the upper part of the page. Maybe it would look better if the missal style had been applied to the bottom part of the page as well.

Example 205.—This is the second page of a small program used at the laying of the corner-stone of a new church building. It would have been possible to get all the type matter on one page, but crowding into small space is often done at the sacrifice of beauty, and this program profits by the liberal margins. The rule lines at the head were used to obtain uniformity of page width and hight. The outline type ornament gives ecclesiastic dignity to the program. The two-line initial at the beginning of each hymn adds style and finish to the typography.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like to modernize.—This is the second page of a small program used for the laying of the cornerstone of a new church building. It would have been possible to fit all the text on one page, but cramming into a small space often sacrifices beauty, and this program benefits from the generous margins. The rule lines at the top were used to ensure uniformity in page width and height. The outline type ornament adds a dignified touch to the program. The two-line initial at the start of each hymn enhances the style and quality of the typography.


The dance program is a far step from the church program. The contrast between the subdued and reverent atmosphere of the house of worship and the gayety and frivolity of the brilliantly lighted ball-room emphasizes the necessity of printers using their best powers of discrimination in treating the various programs that come to their shops.

The dance program is a significant departure from the church program. The difference between the quiet and respectful atmosphere of the place of worship and the joy and lightheartedness of the brightly lit ballroom highlights the need for printers to use their best judgment when handling the different programs that arrive at their shops.

94The dance program should be dainty. White seems to be more acceptable than colored stock on which to print the order of dancing. The type and ink treatment should be neat and delicate. If a bold type-face be used, it should be printed in a light tint of ink, such as gray, pale blue, pale green, and the like. It is possible for printers to produce attractive dance programs with the material generally found in the shop, yet stock folders may save wear of the thought machinery and probably be more satisfactory to the customer. Young people are imitative and may be suspicious of a dance program which does not resemble those they have seen before; it has got to “look like a dance program.” For fifty years or more dance programs have consisted of folded cardboard with tassel and pencil dangling therefrom. The stock folder is to be had in a variety of designs printed or embossed on the first page, appropriate for many occasions. However, there are shown three typographic dance programs.

94The dance program should be elegant. White is more suitable than colored paper for printing the order of dancing. The font and ink choices should be tidy and refined. If a bold typeface is used, it should be printed in a light ink color, like gray, pale blue, pale green, or similar shades. Printers can create appealing dance programs with the materials typically available in the shop, but using stock folders might reduce mental effort and likely be more pleasing to the customer. Young people tend to mimic trends and may be skeptical of a dance program that doesn't look like ones they've seen before; it must “look like a dance program.” For over fifty years, dance programs have featured folded cardboard with a tassel and pencil hanging from it. Stock folders come in a variety of designs printed or embossed on the first page, suitable for many occasions. However, three examples of typographic dance programs are shown.

EXAMPLE 209

The decorative border on a banquet program. By Edward Everett Winchell, New York

EXAMPLE 209

The decorative border on a dinner program. By Edward Everett Winchell, New York

EXAMPLE 211

Page from a booklet program. By Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 211

Page from a booklet program. By Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 212

The banquet program in the form of a checkbook

EXAMPLE 212

The banquet program designed like a checkbook

Example 206.—An Indian border was used around this dance card, but its strong lines were softened by printing in gray and red. White stock was used. In the headline, instead of the customary periods, dots are centered decoratively. Artists often place a dot or small ornament between words of a lettered design for the purpose of benefiting the tone. More often practically no space at all is placed between words if in lower-case beginning with capital letters.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—An Indian border was used around this dance card, but its bold lines were softened by printing in gray and red. White cardstock was used. In the headline, instead of the usual periods, decorative dots are centered. Artists often put a dot or small ornament between words in a lettered design to enhance the overall look. More often, there's hardly any space at all between words if they start with lowercase letters and include capital letters.

Example 207.—A part of an outing program, this page carries the style of all the other pages as regards border and head panel. It illustrates the effectiveness and economy of uniform border treatment on a program. There are very few programs that would not be benefited by decorative borders in color. But one border need be set in type, duplicates being obtained by electrotyping. If there are to be only a few hundred programs, two borders may be set in type and printed on all the sheets, running only two pages on. If desired, a hand-drawn decorative border could be engraved and afterward duplicated by electrotyping.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—As part of an event program, this page reflects the design of all the other pages in terms of borders and header panel. It shows the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of consistent border design on a program. Very few programs would not benefit from decorative borders in color. However, only one border needs to be set in type, with duplicates made through electrotyping. If there are only a few hundred programs, two borders can be set in type and printed on all the sheets, extending only two pages on. If preferred, a hand-drawn decorative border could be engraved and then reproduced by electrotyping.

Example 208.—There is nothing conventional in the design of this dance program. It is different from most others. The rule lines extend to the border, and the heading “Dances” sets slightly to the right of center, supported underneath by the graceful flower ornament. Punctuation is omitted. This page is recommended for dance cards, when the printer desires to have the job exclusively typographic.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This dance program has a unique design that stands out from the rest. The lines extend all the way to the edge, and the title “Dances” is positioned just right of center, accented by an elegant flower decoration below it. There’s no punctuation. This page is ideal for dance cards when the printer wants a purely typographic layout.


EXAMPLE 210

A halftone decorative background on a program. Design by Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 210

A halftone decorative background on a program. Designed by Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston, MA.

EXAMPLE 213

Humorous treatment of titles and odd menu arrangement. Design by the Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 213

Funny approach to titles and quirky menu layout. Designed by the Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston, Mass.

The banquet program not so many years ago here in America and in England was commonly called a bill of fare. Now only the cross-roads hotel and the cheap city eating house have bills of fare. The polite title is now “menu,” pronounced men-yu or meh-noo. Some writers claim the word came to us from “Manu,” a mythical sage said to have sprung from the god Brahma. Yet the dictionary would seem to indicate that the word is French, meaning small, and was derived from the Latin minutus, little. It is possible that the small portions now served in many restaurants suggested the use of “menu” because of the contrast with the generous “helpings” of the old-fashioned meal. In 1512 a 95“shore dinner” for an individual consisted of “a quart of beer, a quart of wine, salt fish, red herring, white herrings and a dish of sprats.”

The banquet program not too many years ago in America and England was commonly called a bill of fare. Now only roadside motels and cheap city diners have bills of fare. The polite term is now "menu," pronounced men-yoo or meh-noo. Some writers say the word came from "Manu," a mythical sage said to have descended from the god Brahma. However, the dictionary suggests that the word is French, meaning small, and was derived from the Latin minuscule, meaning little. It's possible that the small portions now served in many restaurants led to the use of "menu" because of the contrast with the generous "helpings" of the old-fashioned meal. In 1512, a 95 "shore dinner" for one person consisted of "a quart of beer, a quart of wine, salt fish, red herring, white herrings, and a dish of sprats."

EXAMPLE 214

Suggestion for a menu page, introducing a bit of fun

EXAMPLE 214

Idea for a menu page, adding a touch of fun

EXAMPLE 215

A classic menu page. Designed by D. B. Updike, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 215

A classic menu page. Designed by D. B. Updike, Boston, MA.

In the banquet program the printer has great opportunity to make use of his inventive faculties. No other kind of program allows of such varied treatment. There is no limit to the shapes, the type arrangements and the color treatments that are suitable for banquet programs. An association of leather merchants holds a dinner and the members may find beside their plates a program bound in a miniature hide, the sheets of the program attached by a leather thong.

In the banquet program, the printer has a great opportunity to unleash his creativity. No other type of program allows for such diverse designs. There's no limit to the shapes, the font arrangements, and the color treatments that can be used for banquet programs. For example, an association of leather merchants might host a dinner, and the members could find a program next to their plates that's bound in a small piece of leather, with the pages attached by a leather strap.

Bankers meet and the program may be in the form of a checkbook.

Bankers get together, and the program might look like a checkbook.

For an athletic association an oval-shaped program suggesting a football will “score.”

For a sports organization, an oval-shaped design that resembles a football will be a hit.

Newspaper publishers will appreciate the menu list presented as a papier-mache matrix of the type form.

Newspaper publishers will appreciate the menu list shown as a papier-mâché matrix in the form style.

Commercial travelers would be pleased were their banquet programs designed in imitation of a mileage book.

Commercial travelers would appreciate it if their banquet programs were designed to look like a mileage book.

A literary society dinner would be appropriately graced were the program printed on parchment and wound around a wooden or ivory rod, as “books” were bound in ancient times.

A literary society dinner would be suitably enhanced if the program were printed on parchment and wrapped around a wooden or ivory stick, just like "books" were bound in ancient times.

EXAMPLE 217

Dignified style for menu page. By the De Vinne Press, New York

EXAMPLE 217

Stylish design for the menu page. By the De Vinne Press, New York

Pyrography could be blended with typography in producing odd effects in banquet programs. One way of getting results by this method is to print the menu page on a piece of soft wood, say a quarter of an inch thick, and then, by means of the pyrographic writing tool, burn a decorative border around it. Type ornaments and borders could be printed on the wood as a guide for burning the designs.

Pyrography can be combined with typography to create unique effects in banquet programs. One way to achieve this is by printing the menu page on a piece of soft wood, about a quarter of an inch thick, and then using a pyrographic writing tool to burn a decorative border around it. Type ornaments and borders can be printed on the wood as a guide for burning the designs.

Many effective menu forms could also be evolved with the assistance of the bookbinder. Pulp board covered with an artistic cover paper makes a handsome background for mounting the menu page, which should be printed on a harmonizing stock. Italian and Japanese hand-made papers are particularly suitable for such work, and when the style of typography is made to blend with the stock the effect is rich. Domestic manufacturers, too, make a large line of artistic papers applicable to the purpose.

Many effective menu forms could also be developed with the help of the bookbinder. Pulp board covered with artistic cover paper creates a beautiful background for showcasing the menu page, which should be printed on a matching paper. Italian and Japanese hand-made papers are especially suitable for this work, and when the typography style complements the paper, the result is impressive. Domestic manufacturers also offer a wide range of artistic papers that are ideal for this purpose.

Example 209.—This page is from a booklet program, and is companion to Example 125 inserted in a preceding chapter. It sets forth the value of the decorative border on programs. The arrangement of the type matter is the customary one. The minor dishes are set in small type, while the damp stuff from the wine cellar is represented at the left in rubricated text letters.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This page is from a program booklet and goes along with Example 125 found in a previous chapter. It highlights the importance of having a decorative border on programs. The layout of the text follows the usual format. The minor dishes are in small font, while the drinks from the wine cellar are shown on the left in bold, colored lettering.

Example 210.—A halftoned decorative background in olive was a feature that lent value to this page, which is one of a number of similarly treated pages in a booklet program. The classic panel design makes a good background for a menu page. The idea is applicable in many other ways.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A halftoned decorative background in olive added value to this page, which is one of several similarly styled pages in a booklet program. The classic panel design serves as a great background for a menu page. This concept can be used in many other ways.

EXAMPLE 216

A menu program used by master printers. By Charles Edward Peabody, Toronto, Ont.

EXAMPLE 216

A menu program used by professional printers. By Charles Edward Peabody, Toronto, Ont.

EXAMPLE 218

Treatment simulating woodcut decoration

Woodcut decoration simulation

Example 211.—This chapter would be incomplete without one or two Bradley specimens. Here is an 96idea in menu printing born while he was with the American Type Founders Company in 1905. It took the form of a small booklet 2¾ by 4¾ inches, eight pages and cover, and each page was devoted to one of the dishes on the menu. Below the name of the dish was a chap-book ornament. Altho the small booklet has been little used as a form for menu purposes, it has possibilities for development that should not be overlooked by the printer.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—This chapter would feel incomplete without one or two Bradley examples. Here’s an 96idea in menu design that originated while he was with the American Type Founders Company in 1905. It was a small booklet 2¾ by 4¾ inches, eight pages and cover, with each page dedicated to one of the dishes on the menu. Beneath the name of the dish was a decorative ornament. Although the small booklet has been rarely used as a format for menus, it has potential for development that should not be overlooked by printers.

EXAMPLE 219

The missal style adapted to a menu program. By Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 219

The missal style adapted for a menu program. By Will Bradley

Example 212.—Here is a novel banquet program. Each dish on the menu was presented in the form of a check on the “Printers’ Bank of Dyspepsia,” and the “bank” was ordered to pay to the order of the guest a portion of food or drink, in this instance oysters on the half-shell. The checks were signed by appropriate names, “A. Shellgame” in this instance. The entire lot of checks was bound in the customary checkbook style.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Here’s a new banquet program. Every dish on the menu was displayed as a check from the “Printers’ Bank of Dyspepsia,” and the “bank” was instructed to pay the guest a portion of food or drink, in this case, oysters on the half-shell. The checks were signed with fitting names, like “A. Shellgame” in this case. The whole set of checks was arranged in the usual checkbook format.

Example 213.—In this program the menu is termed “Hash” and the toasts “Rehash.” The treatment is unique, especially in the arrangement of the list of palate ticklers.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—In this program, the menu is called “Hash” and the toasts are referred to as “Rehash.” The treatment is distinctive, particularly in how the list of palate pleasers is organized.

EXAMPLE 220

Unique treatment of a menu page in which the minor dishes are arranged at the right

EXAMPLE 220

A distinct layout for a menu page where the smaller dishes are placed on the right.

Example 214 (Insert).—Suggested for a menu page in two colors. Banquets are occasions of gayety and enjoyment, and humor is appreciated. Displaying choice drinks prominently, and then in a note at the foot calling attention to the fact that they can be had at the bar at regular rates, is a bit of fun that has not been widely perpetrated. Typographically the page is refined, yet is sufficiently decorative to appeal to a large class of customers.

214 (Insert).—Recommended for a menu page in two colors. Banquets are times of celebration and fun, and humor is valued. Highlighting select drinks prominently, and then adding a note at the bottom to point out that they are available at the bar at standard prices, is a lighthearted touch that hasn’t been widely used. The typography on the page is elegant, yet is decorative enough to attract a broad range of customers.

Example 215.—A classic menu page by Updike. Roman capitals and italic lower-case only are used. Perhaps this is the way Aldus would set the page were he alive today. The page as a mass is symmetrical.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—A classic menu page by Updike. It uses Roman capitals and italic lowercase letters only. This might be how Aldus would design the page if he were around today. Overall, the page is symmetrical.

Example 216.—This page is from a program used at a master printers’ banquet, all pages being treated in a style appropriately humorous. The word “Stock” tops the page instead of the usual “Menu.” “Make-up” heads the list of officers, and in this manner were the guests’ funny-bones agitated.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This page is from a program used at a master printers’ banquet, with all pages presented in a humorously appropriate style. The word “Stock” is at the top of the page instead of the normal “Menu.” “Make-up” is at the top of the list of officers, and in this way, the guests’ funny bones were tickled.

Example 217.—Here is a program for those accustomed to eat in a foreign language. The typographic treatment is refined and dignified, the roman capitals and the italic blending classically. Little side hits such as those to the right are always appreciated, especially when carefully selected.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Here’s a guide for those used to dining in a foreign language. The typography is elegant and sophisticated, with classic roman capitals and italics working together. Small side notes like the ones on the right are always welcomed, especially when chosen thoughtfully.

EXAMPLE 222

Refined entertainment program page. Design by D. B. Updike, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 222

Sleek entertainment program page. Design by D. B. Updike, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 221

Excellent typographic treatment. By Harry Haime, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 221

Great typography by Harry Haime, Boston, MA.

Example 218.—An artistic treatment simulating woodcut decoration suitable for many occasions is presented by this page. The four initial letters give the appearance of a decorative heading and blend well with the border. It is appropriate that capitals should be used thruout 97the page and that the type-face should be Old-Style Antique. The florets dividing the dishes distribute the color pleasingly. The fact that this program was used by an organization of mechanical engineers explains the queer wording of the list of good things to be eaten.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—This page features an artistic design that mimics woodcut decoration, making it suitable for various occasions. The four initial letters create the look of a decorative heading and blend nicely with the border. It’s fitting to use capital letters throughout 97 the page, and the typeface should be Old-Style Antique. The decorative florets between the dishes add a pleasing touch of color. The fact that this program was used by a group of mechanical engineers explains the unusual wording of the list of good things to eat.

EXAMPLE 223

EXAMPLE 223

EXAMPLE 224

These two pages are from an entertainment program by Bruce Rogers, Cambridge, Mass., and furnish interesting material for study

EXAMPLE 224

These two pages are from an entertainment program by Bruce Rogers, Cambridge, Mass., and provide interesting material for study.

Example 219.—Bradley suggests another good arrangement in this page. It is simply constructed, yet possesses interest and style. The original was in black and light-brown inks on buff antique stock.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—Bradley proposes another solid layout on this page. It’s straightforward, yet it has a lot of character and flair. The original used black and light brown inks on a cream antique paper.

EXAMPLE 225

A program page in lower-case. By Stetson Press, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 225

A program page in lowercase. By Stetson Press, Boston, MA.

Example 220.—This page has the merit of being unique while containing elements of the artistic. The important dishes are set forth prominently, the minor dishes appearing in small type grouped at the right. Uncial initials blend with the Old-Style Antique type. The horizontal rule and the large flower ornament play necessary parts in obtaining a balance.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—This page is unique and also has artistic elements. The main dishes are highlighted, while the less important ones are shown in smaller text on the right. Uncial initials mix with the Old-Style Antique font. The horizontal line and the large flower decoration help create balance.

EXAMPLE 226

The decoration was in color. By Fred S. Lang, Los Angeles, Cal.

EXAMPLE 226

The decoration was colorful. By Fred S. Lang, Los Angeles, California.

98Example 221.—The treatment of the titles at the left side and the symmetrical arrangement at the foot of this example are highly commendable. The details of the entire page denote the finished typographer. The combination of capitals and small capitals is pleasing, and the manner in which variety has been secured in a design of orderly arrangement is commendable.

98Understood. Please provide the text.—The way the titles are positioned on the left and the balanced layout at the bottom of this example is impressive. The overall details of the page show a skilled typographer. The mix of uppercase and small caps is attractive, and the way variety has been achieved in an organized design is praiseworthy.

EXAMPLE 227

Program in the Gothic style. Designed by Merrymount Press, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 227

Program in the Gothic style. Created by Merrymount Press, Boston, Mass.


Programs for entertainments and exercises, while not allowing the unrestrained workings of the fancy that those for banquets do, are yet proper vehicles for carrying artistic ideas. The program should be artistic. The commonplace program is a disappointment to the intelligent auditor and an evil in that it influences the public taste towards mediocrity. The printer who cannot produce a good entertainment program has need to study art principles and observe the artistic programs being produced by others.

Programs for entertainment and exercises, while not allowing the free expression of creativity that banquet programs do, are still suitable for conveying artistic ideas. The program should be artistic. A basic program disappoints the discerning audience and is detrimental as it shapes public taste towards mediocrity. A printer who cannot create a good entertainment program needs to study artistic principles and observe the artistic programs produced by others.

Example 222.—A refined program page by Updike. In the original the border was printed from a copper intaglio plate on smooth-surfaced hand-made paper, the reading portion being printed clearly and sharply from type. Updike’s work is noted for the clearness of the print. Just enough ink is carried to prevent the print being called gray. Of course the type must be clean and unaffected by wear, the ink well ground and the impression firm. This specimen is almost entirely in italic, with “swash” or decorative capitals that add interest to a page of dignified typography. Swash italic capitals properly used are valuable aids in securing attractive yet refined typographic effects.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like to have modernized.—A polished program page by Updike. In the original, the border was printed from a copper intaglio plate on smooth handmade paper, with the text printed clearly and sharply from type. Updike’s work is known for its clarity in printing. Just enough ink is applied to avoid the print looking gray. Naturally, the type needs to be clean and free from wear, the ink well-ground, and the impression firm. This piece is mostly in italic, featuring “swash” or decorative capitals that enhance the visual appeal of a page with elegant typography. When used correctly, swash italic capitals are valuable tools for achieving attractive yet sophisticated typographic effects.

Examples 223 and 224.—These two pages by Bruce Rogers should have interest for every printer who loves good typography. The zinc reproductions of these pages, also that of the preceding example, fail to present the sharp print of the originals. Roman lower-case is absent from this program. Rogers and Updike, with Aldus, have demonstrated that roman lower-case is not essential to typography. Perhaps that is why their work has distinction—other printers set most of their type from the roman lower case.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—These two pages by Bruce Rogers should interest every printer who appreciates good typography. The zinc reproductions of these pages, as well as the previous example, don’t capture the crispness of the originals. Roman lower-case is missing from this design. Rogers and Updike, along with Aldus, have shown that roman lower-case is not crucial to typography. Perhaps that’s why their work stands out—other printers base most of their type on the roman lower-case.

On the title-page the features of particular interest are the long s in the word “music,” the swash italic capitals and the woodcut ornament.

On the title page, the details of particular interest are the long 's' in the word "music," the swash italic capitals, and the woodcut ornament.

The program page is interesting in its construction and its details should be studied closely. Unless suitable ornamentation is available, program pages had better be treated plainly as here, with such attention to the details of the type arrangement as will obtain finished results. It is a test of typographic ability in the production of a program page to compose work that, without the friendly aid of decoration, is pleasing to look upon.

The program page is engaging in its design, and its details should be examined carefully. Unless appropriate decorations are available, program pages are better off being kept simple, as shown here, with a focus on the arrangement of the text that achieves polished results. It’s a test of typographic skill to create a program page that looks attractive without the help of decoration.

Example 225.—This page shows admirable treatment of a brief program. The various sizes of type are well distributed, and the consistent use of roman lower-case is pleasing.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This page demonstrates excellent handling of a short program. The different font sizes are balanced nicely, and the consistent use of lowercase roman letters is appealing.

Example 226.—The type in this page overprinted the decoration which was in pale orange and pale green. The decoration was appropriate in that the program was for a meeting held on the fruit-growing Pacific Coast.

Understood, ready for the text.—The text on this page overlapped with the decoration, which was in light orange and light green. The decoration was fitting since the event was for a meeting held on the fruit-growing Pacific Coast.

Example 227.—The Gothic style dominates this page. Excepting the two uncial initials, only one size of type has been used. That fact alone is interesting, as the result is remarkably finished. Decoration of quality for similar effects can be obtained by having historic decorative borders from old books photographed and redrawn upon the photograph with such alterations as are desired. The face of the photograph can then be washed away, leaving only the drawing, from which the plate is made.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The Gothic style stands out on this page. Apart from the two uncial initials, only one font size has been used. That's noteworthy because it makes the result look exceptionally polished. High-quality decoration for similar effects can be achieved by photographing historic decorative borders from old books and then redrawing on the photo with any desired changes. The image can then be erased, leaving just the drawing, which is used to create the plate.

EXAMPLE 228

A well-arranged page. By Stetson Press, Boston, Mass.

EXAMPLE 228

A well-organized page. By Stetson Press, Boston, Mass.

Example 228.—The list of characters in a dramatic entertainment is here displayed in an unusual manner. It is so easy for compositors to set copy such as this in the conventional type-leader-type method, but this compositor has arranged it to conform to the proportion of the page.

Understood! Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—The list of characters in a play is presented here in a unique way. It's easy for typesetters to format text like this using the usual method, but this typesetter has organized it to fit the proportions of the page.

The program containing small advertisements, especially the theater program, is possible of much improvement. Such typography should be given better attention, as theater programs exert large influence in forming public taste.

The program containing small ads, especially the theater program, can be greatly improved. The typography should be given more attention since theater programs have a significant impact on shaping public taste.

EXAMPLE 229

Classic capitals combined with rules. Suitable for announcements having to do with art, architecture, literature and music

EXAMPLE 229

Classic capitals paired with rules. Perfect for announcements related to art, architecture, literature, and music.

99

ANNOUNCEMENTS

Publicity is doubtlessly essential to success in every business and profession. The public is interested in the man who does things, but this interest is obviously confined to the man who it knows does things. The great men are advertised men. The great deeds of history are those advertised by poets and historians. Shakespeare made famous many ancient characters, as did Plutarch before him, and the most famous acts of the American Revolution are those performed near the homes of poets and writers. We would not be familiar with the rides of Paul Revere and “Phil” Sheridan had they not been advertised by means of printers’ ink.

Publicity is definitely crucial for success in every business and profession. People are interested in those who take action, but this interest is clearly limited to those they know are doing things. The great figures are the ones who are publicized. The significant events in history are those highlighted by poets and historians. Shakespeare popularized many ancient figures, just as Plutarch did before him, and the most well-known events of the American Revolution occurred near the homes of poets and writers. We wouldn’t know about the rides of Paul Revere and "Phil" Sheridan if they hadn’t been promoted through printed media.

Several years ago in New York an influential art society recognized the work of a mural painter by awarding him a medal. In accepting it the artist sadly remarked that the recognition came too late in life for him to “use it as a help to live with,” which proves that in the heart of the most proud and sensitive artist or professional man there is a feeling that he needs publicity—recognition, if that word is less offensive—in order that his life work may be successful.

Several years ago in New York, a prominent art society honored a mural painter by giving him a medal. When he accepted it, the artist sadly noted that the recognition came too late in life for him to "use it to live with," which shows that even in the hearts of the proudest and most sensitive artists or professionals, there's a need for publicity—recognition, if that word feels less harsh—so that their life's work can be successful.

It is fashionable for prominent persons to employ press agents, and goings and comings and doings are told to the public at every opportunity. In the days before the development of newspapers and other typographical mediums for advertising, the people depended upon the public crier to make all sorts of announcements. He would attract a crowd by sounding blasts with a horn or by ringing a bell, and then make known his message.

It’s common for well-known individuals to hire publicists, and their arrivals, departures, and activities are shared with the public at every chance. In the times before newspapers and other printed forms of advertising were developed, people relied on town criers to make various announcements. They would gather a crowd by blowing a horn or ringing a bell, and then deliver their message.

The modern representative of the crier is the printed announcement. It is not confined to any definite size or shape, often consisting of one page only, printed on card or paper stock.

The modern equivalent of the crier is the printed announcement. It's not limited to any specific size or shape, often just being a single page, printed on cardstock or regular paper.

EXAMPLE 230

EXAMPLE 230

EXAMPLE 231

Two pages from a dignified, refined and artistic announcement folder, printed in black ink on brown-tinted hand-made paper

EXAMPLE 231

Two pages from an elegant, sophisticated, and artistic announcement folder, printed in black ink on brown-tinted handmade paper

The announcement form may be considered the most 100personal of the printed mediums of publicity. It presents a direct, individual appeal or invitation, and the recipient, influenced by this fact, is likely to give it more consideration than some other form of advertising. Recognition is flattering to all of us, and upon receipt of an announcement we are apt to feel pleased that our patronage or personality is thus recognized.

The announcement form might be seen as the most personal of all printed advertising mediums. It offers a direct, individual appeal or invitation, and because of this, the recipient is more likely to give it serious thought compared to other types of advertising. Being recognized is appealing to everyone, and when we receive an announcement, we often feel happy that our support or identity is acknowledged.

EXAMPLE 232

Announcement in Colonial style. By A. F. Mackay

EXAMPLE 232

Announcement in Colonial style. By A. F. Mackay

The printer is depended upon by most customers to furnish suggestions for the physical make-up of the announcement, and he is also frequently asked for advice in regard to the phraseology. This places a responsibility upon him that he cannot well ignore, and he should be able to respond with proper suggestions. Being thus qualified to assist the customer has many times led to further and profitable business. The printer possessing the confidence of his customers has an asset of great value.

Most customers rely on the printer for suggestions on the layout of their announcements, and they often seek advice about the wording as well. This puts a responsibility on him that he can't easily avoid, and he should be prepared to offer appropriate suggestions. Being qualified to help the customer has frequently resulted in additional and profitable business. A printer who earns the trust of his customers has a valuable asset.

The most common form of typographic announcement is that printed from roman, text, gothic or script type-faces in imitation of engraved intaglio printing. The styles of this form of announcement change slightly with the fashions in copperplate effects. Printers desiring to do such work would do well to obtain samples from one of the leading society stationers and follow them closely in arrangement, spacing of words and lines, and size and kind of stock. This class of work allows of little original or decorative treatment. If other forms or treatments are desired a standard type-face, such as Caslon or Cloister, should be used. Many compositors err in combining copperplate-engravers’ faces with rules and borders, or in other ways misusing them; for such results are “neither flesh, fish nor fowl,” as the saying goes.

The most common type of typographic announcement is printed using roman, text, gothic, or script typefaces that mimic engraved intaglio printing. The styles of this type of announcement change slightly with trends in copperplate effects. Printers who want to do this kind of work should consider getting samples from one of the top society stationers and closely follow them in terms of arrangement, spacing of words and lines, and the size and type of paper. This type of work leaves little room for original or decorative treatment. If other styles or treatments are desired, a standard typeface, like Caslon or Cloister, should be used. Many compositors make the mistake of combining copperplate engravers' typefaces with rules and borders, or misusing them in other ways; such results are "neither flesh, fish nor fowl," as the saying goes.

If the customer requests an imitation copperplate effect, give it to him as closely as you can; that is good business policy, and is in accordance with the sound advice to “Do your best, no matter what the circumstances,” reminding one of the old rhyme:

If the customer wants a fake copperplate effect, deliver it as closely as you can; that's good business practice and aligns with the wise saying, "Do your best, no matter the situation," which brings to mind the old rhyme:

If I were a cobbler, it would be my pride
The best of all cobblers to be;
If I were a tinker, no tinker beside
Should mend an old kettle like me.

But, whenever possible, get on higher ground. If you must be a tinker, be a good one, but rather be a producer of new things than a builder of patches and something that is “as good as new.” Printers should test their earnestness with tasks that develop their art instincts and, accompanied by proper financial return, bring that satisfaction which comes from work well done.

But whenever you can, rise above the situation. If you need to be a fixer, be a good one, but it’s better to create new things than just to patch up what already exists and make it “as good as new.” Printers should challenge themselves with projects that hone their creative skills and, with the right financial rewards, provide the fulfillment that comes from a job well done.


EXAMPLE 233

Odd treatment of an announcement. By T. M. Cleland

EXAMPLE 233

Strange handling of an announcement. By T. M. Cleland

Example 229 (Insert).—Usually the printer should not set an advertising page all in capitals, nor should he use many rules in its composition; 101but when the typographic designer has skill and artistic taste in addition to a developed sense of fitness and refinement, the warnings and “thou-shalt-nots” that apply to most printers are not for him. Mr. Nash, with the use of Fred W. Goudy’s Forum type-face and rules that suggest the guide lines of old manuscript books, has produced an announcement that is classic in composition, pleasant to look upon, and a page that carries the message in an especially effective and appropriate manner. The original was printed on hand-made paper. This type-face has been modeled on ancient Roman lettering and for that reason has a classic character that makes it suitable for announcements and other printing having to do with art, architecture, literature and music.

Sure! Please provide the text you'd like to modernize. (Insert).—Typically, a printer shouldn't make an entire advertising page in all caps or use too many lines in its layout; 101 however, when the typographic designer has skill and artistic taste, along with a strong sense of appropriateness and refinement, the usual rules and "no-nos" that apply to most printers don't apply to him. Mr. Nash, using Fred W. Goudy’s Forum typeface and lines that resemble the guide lines of old manuscript books, has created an announcement that is classic in design, visually appealing, and conveys the message in a particularly effective and fitting way. The original was printed on handmade paper. This typeface is inspired by ancient Roman lettering, which gives it a classic quality that makes it ideal for announcements and other print related to art, architecture, literature, and music.

Examples 230 and 231.—These are the first and third pages of an announcement originally printed in black ink on brown-tinted hand-made paper. The type-face, Caslon, was sharply impressed into the stock. It may be advisable to state here that all Caslon romans are not alike. The face usually sold by typefounders has the descenders shortened, that the letters may conform to the system of alignment adopted some years ago in America. This shortening of descenders, seemingly a trivial matter, affects the general appearance of the type-face. Attempts to “improve” the Caslon face are apt to end disastrously to the effectiveness of the letter. It has characteristics that are essential to its beauty, and shorn of any of those characteristics it loses attractiveness proportionately. This announcement folder is of a quality seldom attained in printing, depending as it does upon detail in typesetting and presswork. The reproduction cannot present these points, because the finish of the paper, the clearness of the print, the spacing, the apportionment of margins, the tone, all counted in the finished result.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—These are the first and third pages of an announcement that was originally printed in black ink on brown-tinted handmade paper. The typeface, Caslon, was sharply pressed into the stock. It might be helpful to note here that not all Caslon romans are the same. The version typically sold by type foundries has shorter descenders, so the letters can fit the alignment system adopted a few years ago in America. This shortening of descenders, though it seems minor, affects the overall look of the typeface. Efforts to “improve” the Caslon face often end up ruining the letter's effectiveness. It has features that are essential to its beauty, and without any of those features, it loses attractiveness in proportion. This announcement folder is of a quality rarely achieved in printing, as it relies on detail in typesetting and presswork. The reproduction cannot capture these details, because the finish of the paper, the clarity of the print, the spacing, the arrangement of margins, the tone—all of these aspects contributed to the final result.

Example 232.—This circular announcement in its original form was 9½ × 12½ inches in size, the paper upon which it was printed being gray-green laid hand-made. The positions of the groups of type matter and the sizes of margins are features worthy of study. Other points of interest are: the treatment of heading and initial, the use of florets at the beginning of each paragraph, and the committee signatures. The last-named lines are set in italic lower-case with roman capitals, Aldus style. The border was printed in dull red, close to the edge of the paper.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This circular announcement originally measured 9½ × 12½ inches, printed on gray-green laid hand-made paper. The arrangement of the text and the size of the margins are features worth examining. Other points of interest include: the design of the heading and initial, the use of decorative flourishes at the start of each paragraph, and the committee signatures. The signatures are in italic lowercase with roman capitals, in the Aldus style. The border was printed in a dull red, near the edge of the paper.

Example 233.—This meeting announcement is of the same series as the preceding example, but, set all in black text letter without border, the effect is totally different. The peculiar black and gray tones of the Caslon ornaments blend well with similar characteristics presented in the massed black letter. The page was printed in vermilion and black on buff laid hand-made stock. The effectiveness of this style of announcement is due not alone to the typography and stock, but to the generous size of the sheet used—good paper and plenty of it. This announcement was mailed without envelops, the double sheet being folded into thirds and the lower end inserted into the upper end.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—This meeting announcement is from the same series as the previous example, but it's all in black type without a border, which makes it look completely different. The unique black and gray tones of the Caslon designs blend nicely with the similar features of the bold black text. The page was printed in bright red and black on handmade buff paper. The effectiveness of this announcement style comes not just from the typography and paper but also from the large size of the sheet used—good quality paper in ample quantity. This announcement was sent out without envelopes, with the double sheet folded into thirds and the bottom end tucked into the top end.

EXAMPLE 234

EXAMPLE 234

EXAMPLE 235

These specimens are lettered in a style that suggests the sturdy masculine character of the lettering developed with the new German decorative poster art. Designed by Oswald Cooper, Chicago

EXAMPLE 235

These examples are labeled in a way that reflects the strong, masculine quality of the lettering created alongside the new German decorative poster art. Designed by Oswald Cooper, Chicago

EXAMPLE 236

A classic arrangement based upon the architectural inscription plate. By Benjamin Sherbow, New York

EXAMPLE 236

A classic design inspired by the architectural inscription plate. By Benjamin Sherbow, New York

102

EXAMPLE 237

Ornaments as eye-attracters. An idea that could be adapted to many jobs of printing. Designed by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 237

Decorative elements as attention grabbers. A concept that could be applied to various printing tasks. Designed by Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 238

Postal-card announcement, the typography of which is attractive, not because of what is put on, but because of what is left off

EXAMPLE 238

This postal card announcement looks appealing, not because of what is included, but because of what is left out.

EXAMPLE 239

Good advertising typography. Type groups and blank space well proportioned, and an interesting decorative spot of color

EXAMPLE 239

Effective advertising typography. Typefaces are well balanced with whitespace, and there’s a captivating touch of color.

Example 234.—This announcement page is lettered in a style that suggests the sturdy masculine character of the lettering that has been developed with the new German decorative art. Typographers should not make the mistake of assuming that a page set in the so-called gothic types of the typefounders would give this effect. While the letters are without serifs, as are the gothic types, yet they have not the mechanical perfection of those types. Type-faces, lettering and drawing of any kind seem to be better liked when they possess the human quality of imperfection. I once called on Boardman Robinson, then cartoonist of the New York Tribune, and found him at work on a cartoon for the day. I noticed that he had considerably altered the picture on which he was working, and I asked him about it. With a smile, he stated that he had been working on the cartoon for several hours in order to make it look as if it had been drawn in fifteen minutes. German typefounders have made type-faces that carry the qualities of this poster style of lettering. The young printer should not infer from this that careless and unfinished typographic work is preferable to a careful, finished product. It will be found that the artist or printer who can best give this little touch of human nature to designs is one who first learned to do the work as perfectly as possible.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This announcement page is styled in a way that highlights the strong masculine character of the lettering developed through the new German decorative art. Typographers shouldn't think that using the so-called gothic types from typefounders will achieve this effect. Although the letters lack serifs like gothic types, they don't have the mechanical precision of those types. Typefaces, lettering, and all forms of drawing seem to be more appreciated when they show a human quality of imperfection. I once visited Boardman Robinson, then a cartoonist for the New York Tribune, and found him working on a cartoon for the day. I noticed that he had significantly changed the picture he was working on, and I asked him about it. With a smile, he said that he had been working on the cartoon for several hours to make it look like it was drawn in just fifteen minutes. German typefounders have created typefaces that embody the qualities of this poster-style lettering. The young printer shouldn't conclude that sloppy or unfinished typographic work is better than a careful, polished product. It's been found that the artist or printer who best adds this touch of humanity to designs is the one who first mastered doing the work as perfectly as possible.

Example 235.—This design was the first page of a folder of which Example 234 was the third page. Oswald Cooper, who lettered this announcement, used the figure of a dog that had been drawn by the German poster artist Hohlwein, but gave him due credit in the upper left corner. This style of lettering, as has already been mentioned, is appropriate to the subject of German posters and in harmony with the poster illustration used. Heavy treatment of this kind offers a rich opportunity for the use of strong and harmonious colors. Light-faced type is very unsatisfactory as a carrier of color, but the broad strokes of this style of lettering make possible a liberal showing of color on the page. An extra color has been introduced, altho the original announcement was entirely in brown on a brown-tinted card.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This design was the first page of a folder, and Example 234 was the third page. Oswald Cooper, who created the lettering for this announcement, used a drawing of a dog by the German poster artist Hohlwein, giving him proper credit in the upper left corner. This lettering style, as mentioned before, fits well with the theme of German posters and complements the illustration used. This heavy treatment offers a great opportunity for using strong and harmonious colors. Light-faced type doesn’t convey color well, but the bold strokes of this lettering style allow for an abundant display of color on the page. An additional color has been added, even though the original announcement was completely in brown on a brown-tinted card.

Example 236.—From the viewpoints of art and dignity an announcement card such as this one is always in good taste. Its style is classic, being arranged along the lines of an architectural inscription plate. The border is the reliable egg-and-dart pattern and the type-face is Caslon. Capitals are essential to best results in this sort of design.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—From the perspectives of art and dignity, an announcement card like this is always stylish. Its design is timeless, resembling an architectural plaque. The border features the classic egg-and-dart pattern and the font used is Caslon. Using capital letters is crucial for achieving the best results in this type of design.

Example 237.—The idea suggested in this page, of using ornaments as eye-attracters, is a good one. While the design as a whole is decorative in character, the advertising element is not overlooked. The several articles of merchandise are prominently displayed, as is also the name of the store. In the series of type designs of which this was a part, the designer strongly emphasized ornamentation. There was a reason for his doing this, as he was engaged in introducing new typographic decorative material, but printers working for the commercial public are engaged in a different vocation. In attempting such designs as this, compositors should decrease the prominence of the ornaments and border and increase that of the reading portion of the page.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like to be modernized.—The idea presented on this page, of using decorations to catch the eye, is a solid one. While the overall design is decorative, it doesn’t ignore the advertising aspect. The various products are prominently showcased, along with the store's name. In the series of type designs to which this belongs, the designer put a strong focus on ornamentation. He had a reason for this, as he was introducing new typographic decorative elements, but printers working for commercial clients have a different job. When attempting designs like this, typesetters should reduce the emphasis on decorations and borders and enhance the focus on the text itself.

EXAMPLE 240

Showing the use of roman, italic and spaced small capitals on an organization announcement

EXAMPLE 240

Demonstrating the use of bold, italic, and spaced small caps in an organization announcement

103

EXAMPLE 241

Unusual division into two groups, providing for fold. By the Calumet Press, New York

EXAMPLE 241

Rare split into two categories, allowing for flexibility. By the Calumet Press, New York

Example 238.—This announcement was printed in black ink on a Government postal card. The young compositor will, no doubt, recognize the small amount of actual typesetting necessary for this page; however, he should not overlook the fact that the results were really secured by one-tenth manual labor and nine-tenths brain exercise. A specimen such as this is good not because of what is put on but because of what is left off. There are only a rule border, a small silhouette illustration and four lines of type exclusive of the signature, yet the busy man gets the message and experiences pleasure in getting it. The type in the original was no larger than was necessary to be easily read. Compositors frequently forget that announcements of this kind are read at a distance of only a foot from the eyes, and that twelve-point type is really large enough for the purpose. It is usually a mistake to make the type-face very large or very small. One is an unnecessary size and the other is an illegible size.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.—This announcement was printed in black ink on a government postcard. The young typesetter will, no doubt, recognize the small amount of actual typesetting needed for this page; however, they should not overlook the fact that the results were really achieved by one-tenth manual labor and nine-tenths brain work. A specimen like this is valuable not because of what is included but because of what is excluded. There are only a border, a small silhouette illustration, and four lines of text excluding the signature, yet the busy person gets the message and finds satisfaction in receiving it. The type in the original was no larger than necessary for easy reading. Typesetters often forget that announcements of this kind are read from just a foot away, and that twelve-point type is actually large enough for this. It's usually a mistake to make the type size very large or very small. One is an unnecessary size and the other is an illegible size.

Example 239.—This is another announcement set in twelve-point type, with a liberal distribution of blank space. The personal mark of Mr. Baker adds a decorative touch of color that attracts attention and helps to make the page distinctive.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is another announcement in twelve-point font, featuring plenty of white space. Mr. Baker's personal signature adds a nice pop of color that catches the eye and gives the page a unique flair.

EXAMPLE 243

Harmony of type-face and decoration

EXAMPLE 243

Balance of font and design

Example 240 (Insert).—This announcement has typographic interest in that it shows how variety and advertising emphasis can be obtained by the proper use of italic and small capitals with lower-case roman, especially with a type-face such as Cloister Oldstyle. The small capitals are letterspaced; they usually respond pleasingly to such treatment. Typographers who have studied the matter of spacing have found that capitals and small capitals can be letterspaced with good results, and that roman and italic lower-case seldom look well if the letters are separated by spacing. It is probably an exaggeration to say that lower-case should never be spaced, as typographic artists such as Will Bradley have produced very effective results with letterspaced lower-case; but the average compositor had better adhere to the rule of never letterspacing lower-case letters. It will be noticed that on this announcement the name of the organization, the words “Dinner” and “Exhibit” and the name of the guest, are set in capitals and small capitals with letterspacing. The names of the books, the title of the talk, and the request to return a card, are in italic. Only one size of type has been used, excepting for the committee group at the foot. In order that the words “Program Committee” should not look exactly like the other lines in this group, they were letterspaced.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. (Insert).—This announcement is interesting from a design perspective because it shows how variety and emphasis in advertising can be achieved by using italic and small caps alongside lower-case roman letters, especially with a typeface like Cloister Oldstyle. The small capitals are spaced out, and they typically respond well to this treatment. Typographers who have looked into spacing have found that both capitals and small capitals can be effectively letterspaced, while roman and italic lower-case letters often don’t look good when spaced apart. It might be an overstatement to say that lower-case letters should never be spaced, as typographic artists like Will Bradley have produced very effective designs using letterspaced lower-case; however, it's best for the average compositor to stick to the rule of not letterspacing lower-case letters. You'll notice that in this announcement, the organization's name, the words “Dinner” and “Exhibit,” and the guest's name are all set in capitals and small capitals with letterspacing. The names of the books, the title of the talk, and the request to return a card are in italic. Only one type size has been used, except for the committee group at the bottom. To ensure that the words “Program Committee” don’t look exactly like the other lines in this group, they were letterspaced.

EXAMPLE 242

A study in tone values and margins

EXAMPLE 242

A study of tone values and margins

EXAMPLE 244

Artistic form for brief announcement. By A. F. Mackay, New York

EXAMPLE 244

Artistic format for a short announcement. By A. F. Mackay, New York

Example 241.—This announcement form, like No. 240, 104is conventional in size, the paper upon which the original was printed measuring 5½ × 7 inches. The arrangement of the type page was designed to provide for the fold which horizontally crossed the center of the page. The division into two groups, each in a different type-face, is unusual, and the manner in which this has been accomplished is instructive to the student of typography. The use of a large initial gives distinction to the upper group, and spacing of the Caslon capitals in the lower group maintains a distinction there. This page illustrates two points recognized by good typographers—that the printed effect of old-style roman capitals is usually improved by a slight increase of space between letters, and that, on the other hand, the printed effect of text letters would be impaired by increased space between them. There is danger of too great contrast of tone in a page, and had this example been executed less skilfully, it would have failed in effect.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This announcement form, like No. 240, 104 is a standard size, with the original printed on paper measuring 5½ × 7 inches. The layout of the type page was created to accommodate the fold that horizontally runs through the middle of the page. The separation into two groups, each using a different typeface, is uncommon, and the way this is done is enlightening for typography students. The large initial letter gives prominence to the upper group, and the spacing of the Caslon capitals in the lower group keeps it distinct as well. This page demonstrates two principles recognized by skilled typographers—that the appearance of old-style roman capitals is typically enhanced with a slight increase in space between the letters, while, conversely, increasing space between text letters can detract from their appearance. There is a risk of excessive contrast in tone on a page, and if this example had been executed less skillfully, it would not have had the same impact.

EXAMPLE 245

Colonial treatment of an announcement page. By the Calumet Press, New York

EXAMPLE 245

Colonial treatment of an announcement page. By the Calumet Press, New York

Example 242.—This announcement circular affords a study in tone values, especially in the original size, which was 9 × 12½ inches. The type, Old Style Antique, was twelve-point, with six-point slugs between lines. The black tone of the type-face and the liberal spacing found relationship in the black tone and open lines of the initial letter at the head. This harmony was carried out in the entire page, the black and white tones contrasting thruout. No gray lines were used; even the monogram at the foot was constructed of strong lines. In obtaining an effect like this it is necessary that the type-face be of medium black tone somewhere between the gray tone of the Caslon face and the heavy black tone of the John Hancock or other extra-black faces. It may be well to call attention to the margins inside the rule border. The artist avoids monotony in margins. In old books the four margins surrounding a type page differed. The foot margin was the largest, the others being smaller in this order: outer side, head, inner side. In this announcement page the foot margin is larger than the others, and the head presents the smallest amount of marginal space. The side margins were made equal because, unlike the paired book page, this page stands alone.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This announcement circular offers a study in tone values, especially in its original size of 9 × 12½ inches. The type, Old Style Antique, was twelve-point with six-point slugs between the lines. The bold tone of the type and the generous spacing created a relationship with the dark tone and open lines of the initial letter at the top. This harmony was maintained throughout the entire page, with the black and white tones contrasting throughout. No gray lines were used; even the monogram at the bottom was made of strong lines. To achieve an effect like this, it’s essential for the typeface to have a medium black tone that falls between the gray tone of the Caslon type and the heavy black tone of the John Hancock or other extra-black faces. It’s worth noting the margins inside the ruled border. The artist avoids monotony in the margins. In older books, the four margins around a text page were different sizes. The bottom margin was the largest, followed by the outer side, the top, and then the inner side. In this announcement page, the bottom margin is larger than the others, while the top has the least amount of marginal space. The side margins are equal because, unlike a paired book page, this page stands alone.

Example 243.—Harmony of type-face and decoration is the chief attraction of this announcement card. Some of the characteristics of Washington Text in tone and stroke are also found in the initial letter and border, and to this the harmony is due. Placing of the initial letter so low on the page was a bit of daring, yet balance is retained, due to the heading.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The combination of font and design is the main appeal of this announcement card. Some features of Washington Text in tone and stroke are also present in the initial letter and border, which contributes to the overall harmony. Positioning the initial letter so low on the page was quite bold, yet balance is maintained because of the heading.

Example 244.—While only a little folder, 3½ × 4½ inches in size, this job was exceedingly effective. It was printed in black on white antique stock. Such a form could well be adapted to many brief announcements.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Though it was just a small folder, measuring 3½ × 4½ inches, this piece was surprisingly effective. It was printed in black on white vintage paper. This format could easily be adapted for various short announcements.

Example 245.—This form was set in type during the Colonial revival that interested good printers about the year 1900. Caslon type and Colonial decoration give an individual character to the page. Colonial effects are not so common just at this time, which fact is quietly digested by the wise typesetter as he recognizes his opportunity.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This type was created during the Colonial revival that caught the attention of skilled printers around 1900. Caslon type and Colonial design add a unique flair to the page. Colonial aesthetics aren't as popular right now, a fact that the savvy typesetter notes as he sees his chance.

EXAMPLE 246

An announcement literally treated in Colonial typography, even to the use of the long “ſ”

EXAMPLE 246

An announcement presented in Colonial typography, including the use of the long “s”

105

EXAMPLE 247

EXAMPLE 247

EXAMPLE 248

First and second page of an artistic, unembellished announcement circular. Designed by Benjamin Sherbow, New York

EXAMPLE 248

First and second page of a straightforward artistic announcement flyer. Designed by Benjamin Sherbow, New York

Example 246.-This announcement demonstrates the possibilities of typography along the lines of appropriateness. A Colonial organization wished to announce a meeting at which would be celebrated the founding of the first American newspaper, and desired something in Colonial style. The printer looked up a reproduction of an early newspaper and set the heading in a style such as was given the headings of newspapers in the early days. The society had an emblem or seal engraved in the serifless and characterless style of lettering that the average engraver will give an organization. The printer had the emblem redrawn, giving instructions to the artist to draw the entire design in freehand and to be careful that the lines and lettering be not too regular. Instructions were also issued to have serifs on the lettering and to have it contain the contrasted light and heavy strokes of the roman type-face of the Colonial period. As will be seen by the example herewith, the idea was well carried out by the artist. The society had appropriately phrased the announcement. The printer carried the idea along by using a small size of “e” in the word “ye,” and a long “s,” made by cutting a part of the cross from the “f.” A suitable hand-made paper was selected and the paper was dampened before printing it. The announcement was then folded up and sealed in the style of Colonial times, without an envelop.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.-This announcement showcases the potential of typography in a way that's fitting. A Colonial organization wanted to announce a meeting to celebrate the founding of the first American newspaper and sought a design in Colonial style. The printer found a reproduction of an early newspaper and set the heading in a style typical of newspapers in those early days. The society had an emblem or seal created using a bland, characterless font that is common with engravers. The printer had the emblem redrawn, instructing the artist to create the entire design freehand and to ensure the lines and lettering weren’t too uniform. The instructions also specified adding serifs to the lettering and capturing the contrasting thick and thin strokes of the Roman typeface from the Colonial period. As shown in the example, the artist executed the idea beautifully. The society had worded the announcement appropriately. The printer enhanced the design by using a small "e" in the word "ye," and a long "s," which was made by trimming part of the cross from the "f." A suitable handmade paper was chosen, and it was dampened before printing. The announcement was then folded and sealed in the Colonial style, without an envelope.

Examples 247 and 248.—These are the first and second pages of a large circular announcement printed in black and light olive-brown on buff-tinted laid antique paper. No embellishment is used, nor is any needed, the treatment being sufficiently artistic. The arrangement of the first page is uncommon. The lack of margins around the type group and the absence of print on three-fifths of the page would be counted by some printers as mere eccentricities, yet to others these things spell art. Compositors interested in this arrangement should notice how the type lines fit the phraseology. The advertising element has been considered by the designer along with æsthetic requirements. The double line of capitals at the head of the second page was duplicated on the third. The second page shows simplicity and legibility that are admirable, the liberal margins and the three-line initial being noteworthy features.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like to modernize.—These are the first and second pages of a large circular announcement printed in black and light olive-brown on buff-tinted laid antique paper. There are no embellishments, and none are necessary, as the design is artistic enough. The layout of the first page is unusual. The absence of margins around the type and the blank space on three-fifths of the page might be seen by some printers as quirks, but for others, these elements represent art. Typesetters interested in this layout should take note of how the lines of type match the wording. The designer has considered both the advertising aspect and aesthetic requirements. The double line of capital letters at the top of the second page was repeated on the third. The second page features a simplicity and readability that are impressive, with generous margins and a three-line initial being notable features.

EXAMPLE 249

One of four pages of a convention announcement, showing the attractiveness of rules when properly used with headings

EXAMPLE 249

One of four pages of a convention announcement, demonstrating how appealing rules can be when effectively used with headings.

Example 249.—This is the second page of a convention announcement and is evidence of the success that is possible with the proper use of a well-designed type-face, an 106appropriate initial, and rules to separate the headings. A combination of a heavy- and light-faced rule has always looked well with the Caslon style of type-face.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—This is the second page of a convention announcement and shows how successful design can be using a well-crafted typeface, an 106appropriate initial, and guidelines to distinguish the headings. A mix of bold and light lines has always looked great with the Caslon typeface.

EXAMPLE 250

Announcement designed by an artist who believes in the liberal leading of type lines

EXAMPLE 250

Announcement created by an artist who believes in the free flow of typography.

EXAMPLE 252

Blotter announcement in rugged Colonial style

EXAMPLE 252

Blotter announcement in sturdy Colonial style

Example 250.—This announcement, originally printed on hand-made paper, all in black ink, was designed by a famous New York artist-typographer, who believes that there is greater legibility when the lines are separated by a liberal use of leads than when they are “set solid.” The arrangement is unusual in several respects—the placing of the name in the far-off upper corner, the use of the initial “A” in the midst of a sentence, the setting of the names of the officers in italic and their titles in roman, and the liberal leading previously referred to.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize or leave unchanged.—This announcement, originally printed on handmade paper with all black ink, was created by a well-known artist-typographer from New York. They believe that the text is easier to read when the lines are spaced out with a generous amount of leading rather than being “set solid.” The layout is unique in several ways: the name is placed in the distant upper corner, the initial “A” appears in the middle of a sentence, the names of the officers are in italics while their titles are in regular font, and there’s a significant use of leading as mentioned earlier.

EXAMPLE 251

Announcement in black and gray on gray fabric-finished stock, illustrating harmony of type-face and decoration

EXAMPLE 251

Announcement in black and gray on gray textured paper, showcasing the balance between the typeface and decoration

Example 251.—This specimen also has the feature of an initial in the midst of a sentence, and it may be well to suggest to young compositors that it is better not to use an initial in this manner. This page would probably be even more effective if the entire word “announces” were in lower-case. The announcement was printed in black and gray on a light-gray stock. The foundry that made this series of type also made ornaments that would harmonize with it and thus enabled the printer to produce an artistically pleasing page. This letter is one of a few that closely suggest good hand-lettering. The selection of type sizes and the arrangement and apportionment of margins help to make a result that reflects credit on the printer’s art.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—This sample also features an initial in the middle of a sentence, and it might be a good idea to advise young typesetters not to use an initial this way. This page would likely look even better if the entire word “announces” were in lowercase. The announcement was printed in black and gray on a light-gray background. The foundry that produced this typeface also created ornaments that matched it, allowing the printer to create an aesthetically pleasing page. This letter is one of the few that closely resembles good hand-lettering. The choice of type sizes and the arrangement and distribution of margins contribute to a result that reflects well on the printer’s skill.

Example 252.—A blotter was the vehicle that carried this announcement, which is in the rugged Colonial style of typography of the year in which this piece of work was produced. The tone is pleasing, as is also the contrast of white and black. The ornament blends in shape and style with the accompanying typographical treatment.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A blotter was the medium that conveyed this announcement, crafted in a strong Colonial typography style from the year this work was created. The tone is appealing, and the contrast of white and black is striking. The decorative elements match in shape and style with the accompanying text layout.

In the production of his own announcement forms the printer is not hampered by the requirements of customers. He works with the unrestricted freedom of a Michelangelo and there is little reason why his work should not be of the best, if he will read and study books and trade magazines.

In creating his own announcement forms, the printer isn't restricted by customer demands. He has the same kind of freedom as Michelangelo, and there's no reason his work shouldn't be top-notch if he takes the time to read and learn from books and industry magazines.

EXAMPLE 257

The historic Gothic, or pointed style

EXAMPLE 257

The historic Gothic, or pointed style

EXAMPLE 258

Strong treatment, the motive of modern origin

EXAMPLE 258

Powerful treatment, a motive of contemporary origin

EXAMPLE 259

A striking effect that should please the college student

EXAMPLE 259

An impressive effect that should appeal to the college student

107

TICKETS

It is said of printers who make no attempt to learn the principles governing art typography, that once or so in a lifetime they produce an artistic job of printing. They become much elated at the phenomenon, not realizing that it was brought on by the unconscious introduction into their product of art principles. The experience may be likened to that of a child who accidentally touches an electric button, causing the room suddenly to be illuminated. The child knows the light is there, but does not comprehend how it got there.

It’s said that printers who don’t bother to understand the rules of good typography might accidentally create something artistic once in a while. They get really excited about this rare occurrence, not realizing it happened because they unknowingly included some artistic principles in their work. It’s kind of like a kid who accidentally presses an electric button and suddenly fills the room with light. The kid sees the light but doesn’t understand how it happened.

Now instead of being the cause of an oriental handshake, a good job of printing ought to be an everyday occurrence, and the stirring of the waters should be left for the bad job of printing when, unfortunately, it happens along.

Now instead of being the reason for a formal handshake, good printing should be a regular thing, and the disruption should be reserved for the bad printing jobs that, unfortunately, happen from time to time.

Lack of interest is the reason for the non-development of many printers in the art side of typography. Because, to many compositors, printing is merely a means of making a living, only enough knowledge is acquired to enable them to “hold their jobs,” or, in the cases of employers, to retain their customers. Time spent in the printshop is considered drudgery and the pleasures of life come after the whistle has blown. There are young printers who know comparatively nothing about good typography, yet are authorities on the rules of pinocle, baseball, or other pastimes. And there are older printers, too, who could write a book about chicken-raising, yet do not know when type-faces harmonize.

Lack of interest is why many printers don’t develop their skills in the artistic side of typography. For a lot of compositors, printing is just a way to earn a living; they only learn enough to “keep their jobs,” or in the case of employers, to maintain their customers. Time spent in the print shop feels like a chore, and the joys of life come only after the workday ends. There are young printers who know very little about good typography but can talk endlessly about the rules of pinochle, baseball, or other hobbies. And there are older printers as well who could easily write a book about raising chickens but don’t recognize when typefaces go well together.

Any man who is not interested in his vocation is to be pitied. Unless his heart is in his work, a lawyer, preacher, editor, ad-writer, artist or printer will not be successful.

Any man who isn't interested in his career deserves sympathy. Unless he's passionate about his work, a lawyer, preacher, editor, ad writer, artist, or printer won't achieve success.

Interest may be developed. If the typographer will devote a portion of the time now spent on outside matters to the study of his craft, and especially the art side of printing, his work will become lighter and the hands on the clock will chase each other. The same concentration of thought now devoted to unimportant side interests would bring large dividends if invested in the study of typography. Efficiency is a guarantee of steady work and good pay to the employee, and an assurance of steady customers and better prices to the employer.

Interest can be cultivated. If the typographer dedicates some of the time spent on outside matters to studying their craft, especially the artistic side of printing, their work will feel lighter and time will fly. The same focus currently given to trivial interests could yield significant rewards if invested in learning typography. Being efficient ensures consistent work and good pay for the employee, as well as reliable customers and better prices for the employer.

EXAMPLE 256

Classic, refined treatment, for art and literary purposes

EXAMPLE 256

Sophisticated, elegant approach for artistic and literary purposes

The typographer who prefers freedom from care, and the blissfulness of ignorance, is a poor member of society. He should line up among the world’s workers and accept some of the responsibilities. The first things he observes, should he become a student, are the imperfections of his own product. Work that before looked good to him, now, viewed in a new light, is defective, and finally the old verdict is reached, “There is none perfect, no, not one.” While to the experienced art-printer expectations of absolutely perfect results are known to be futile, he tries for one hundred per cent just the same. A man lacks something in his make-up when he is satisfied to be rated as a twenty-five or fifty per cent printer.

The typographer who wants to avoid responsibilities and the comfort of ignorance is not contributing to society. He should join the ranks of workers and take on some responsibilities. When he starts learning, the first things he notices are the flaws in his own work. What once seemed good now looks defective when viewed from a fresh perspective, leading to the realization, “There is none perfect, no, not one.” While the experienced art printer knows that aiming for perfect results is often unrealistic, he still strives for 100% quality anyway. A person is lacking something essential when he feels okay being considered a twenty-five or fifty percent printer.


Tickets, altho only a minute part of the printing-office product, afford opportunity for the practice and development of art printing. In typography there are many themes and styles and their incorporation into type-designs is an interesting and instructive study. The compositor or layout man should know and understand these various styles, that he may be able to adapt himself to any demand made for “something different.” Resourcefulness is a valuable characteristic for any printer to possess, and close examination of the nineteen ticket forms, and careful reading of what follows, should serve to develop that quality. These forms were designed by the author especially for this chapter.

Tickets, although just a small part of the printing-office output, provide opportunities for practicing and developing art printing. In typography, there are many themes and styles, and incorporating them into type designs is an interesting and educational study. The compositor or layout artist should know and understand these various styles so they can adapt to any request for “something different.” Resourcefulness is an important trait for any printer to have, and a close examination of the nineteen ticket forms, along with a careful reading of what follows, should help develop that quality. These forms were designed by the author specifically for this chapter.

Example 256.—It is fitting, in commencing a series of type arrangements, first to show one based upon a classic motive. The design is old to students of art, yet may be new to printers in general. The arrangement has been used for many years by leading architects on inscription tablets, and the idea itself comes from ancient Rome. The egg-and-dart border is a standard embellishment in architectural designing. The roman type-face is historically proper, especially the adherence to capitals, as originally there was none but what we call capitals, the small “lower-case” or minuscule letters having been evolved during the Middle Ages. The letters of roman type-faces usually set very close together and to get certain results the capitals should be slightly spaced. One-point spaces have been used in this example. White cardboard is preferable to a colored one on which to print this design.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like modernized.—It makes sense, when starting a series of type arrangements, to first showcase one based on a classic design. This motif is familiar to art students, but it may be new to many printers. Leading architects have used this arrangement for years on inscription tablets, and the inspiration comes from ancient Rome. The egg-and-dart border is a common decorative element in architectural design. The roman typeface is historically accurate, especially with the use of capital letters since originally there were only what we now call capitals; the lowercase letters developed during the Middle Ages. Roman typefaces typically have letters set very close together, and to achieve certain effects, the capitals should be spaced slightly apart. One-point spaces have been used in this example. White cardboard is preferred over colored paper for printing this design.

Example 257 (Insert).—The historic Gothic or church style furnished the motive for the treatment of this ticket. Both border and type-face possess characteristics peculiarly Gothic—notably the pointed form of the letters and floret. There is also blend of tone, and similar contrast of heavy and light strokes in letter and border. 108Ancient features are consistently carried out in the arrangement. The lines are set close to the border and made full length. Contrast is obtained by the use of color and the emphasis in type size of two important phrases. This style of treatment is appropriate for tickets used by churches or kindred organizations.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—The classic Gothic or church style inspired the design of this ticket. Both the border and typeface have distinctly Gothic features—especially the pointed shape of the letters and floral designs. There's also a mix of tones and a similar contrast of thick and thin strokes in both the letters and the border. 108Traditional elements are consistently incorporated in the layout. The lines are positioned close to the border and extended to full length. Contrast is achieved through the use of color and the differing sizes of two key phrases. This design style is well-suited for tickets used by churches or similar organizations.

EXAMPLE 260

Modern treatment based upon the Colonial

EXAMPLE 260

Modern treatment based on the Colonial

Example 258 (insert).—The style of this ticket is a modern conception and originated in the art revival of the latter part of the last century. The motive is masculine and its features are contrast of tone, massing of lettering, and liberal blank space. It will be noticed that while in this specimen the margin inside of border is wide, on the previous specimen (Example 257) there is practically no space inside of the border. These features are necessary in the correct interpretation of the respective styles. The motive of the specimen under consideration is particularly applicable to tickets for minstrel performances, smokers, club outings, and other affairs in which men are interested.

Understood. Please provide the text to be modernized. (insert).—The design of this ticket is a modern idea that came from the art revival in the late part of the last century. The theme is masculine, featuring a contrast of tones, dense lettering, and ample blank space. You'll notice that while this example has a wide margin inside the border, the previous example (Example 257) has almost no space inside the border. These characteristics are important for properly understanding the different styles. The theme of this particular example is especially suitable for tickets to minstrel shows, casual gatherings, club outings, and other events that interest men.

Example 259 (Insert).—The color border on this specimen suggests a means of varying the treatment of tickets, the extension of the border into two of the corners adding distinction. Such a design as this is likely to meet approval among college students, as they welcome odd and striking effects. The strong italic lower-case is a relief from the many more familiar roman faces used on such tickets. Emphasis of important parts is obtained by increasing the type sizes until proper contrast is obtained.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—The colored border on this example suggests a way to change up how tickets are designed, with the border extending into two corners for added flair. This kind of design is probably going to be popular with college students, as they enjoy unique and eye-catching styles. The bold italic lowercase provides a refreshing contrast to the more common serif fonts typically found on tickets. Key parts are made more noticeable by increasing the font sizes until there's a proper contrast.

EXAMPLE 262

Daintily appropriate in type-face and illustration

EXAMPLE 262

Elegantly suitable in font and imagery

EXAMPLE 263

The secession or mission style applied to ticket composition

EXAMPLE 263

The secession or mission style used in ticket design

Example 260.—The treatment of this example may be described as modern based upon the Colonial. The Caslon type-face furnishes a Colonial atmosphere, and the border treatment of color inside surrounding rules blends with the type-face. Only two sizes of type are used and lower-case is consistently adhered to. The shape of the main group gives a pleasing symmetry to the arrangement, the floret serving well to complete this result. The effect as a whole is bookish, and may be adapted to various literary and art purposes. White or buff stock would be suitable, antique finish preferred.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The way this example is presented can be considered modern based on the Colonial style. The Caslon typeface creates a Colonial feel, and the color border around the surrounding rules complements the typeface. Only two sizes of type are used, and lower-case letters are consistently applied. The shape of the main group adds a nice symmetry to the layout, with the floret effectively enhancing this outcome. The overall effect feels bookish and could be used for various literary and artistic purposes. White or buff paper would work well, with an antique finish being preferred.

EXAMPLE 261

Suggested for course tickets. Coupons should be attached

EXAMPLE 261

Recommended for course tickets. Coupons must be attached.

Example 261.—There may be an idea here for course tickets in which a number of lectures are listed. The form as shown is not complete, the idea including the attachment at one side of coupons containing the names and dates of the lectures. Only capitals are used and the three main lines are aligned at each end of the measure. The narrow border gives a finish to the general design, which is well suited for printing in black ink on white stock.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—There might be a concept here for course tickets that list several lectures. The current layout isn’t finished; the idea includes attaching coupons on one side with the names and dates of the lectures. Only capital letters are used, and the three main lines are aligned at both ends of the layout. The thin border adds a nice touch to the overall design, which is perfect for printing in black ink on white paper.

EXAMPLE 264

The ecclesiastical or missal style well adapted

EXAMPLE 264

The church or missal style is well suited

Example 262.—Here we have a ticket of peculiar interest to women and the treatment is daintily appropriate. Caslon italic is an admirable letter for the purpose, as it is graceful and neat. Bold treatment and large type have been avoided, the main portion of the copy being grouped in the center and surrounded by liberal blank space. The outline illustration underprinting the type group gives added interest to the ticket and may have 109advertising value in the suggestion it presents of the evening’s pleasure. White card would be proper, and a buff or gray-blue stock might also look well.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This ticket is especially interesting to women, and the design is elegantly suitable. Caslon italic is a great font for this, as it looks stylish and clean. We avoided bold text and large fonts, focusing instead on centering the main content with plenty of white space around it. The outline illustration beneath the text adds extra appeal to the ticket and could even serve an advertising purpose by suggesting a fun evening. A white cardstock would be ideal, but a buff or gray-blue material could also look nice.

EXAMPLE 265

Perhaps Morris would have set a ticket this way

EXAMPLE 265

Maybe Morris would have made a ticket like this

Example 263.—This ticket presents the geometric, or so-called secession style; a mild example, tho. Because straight lines form its motive, some call it the mission style. There are possibilities in it for the typographer looking for fresh ideas with which to vary his work. Right here it may be well to warn compositors against becoming enthusiastic over every new style of type arrangement that may come to his notice. There are men who in their endeavors to do something to win fame—something astonishing and entirely original—set out on unknown seas without rudder or compass. The result usually is shipwreck. The printer who starts out to produce typography not founded on some proved and tried base builds a house in the sands that may come tumbling down at the first test of endurance. A type-face of squared shape such as the capitals of lining gothic is best fitted to accompany the squares and angular ornaments of the mission or secession style. A gray stock on which to print this example would be a wise selection.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This ticket showcases the geometric, or secession style; it's a mild example, though. Because it features straight lines as its main design element, some people refer to it as the mission style. For typographers seeking new ideas to diversify their work, this style offers some interesting possibilities. However, it's important to caution compositors not to get overly excited about every new style of type arrangement that comes their way. There are individuals who, in their quest for recognition—trying to create something astonishing and completely original—embark on uncharted territory without any direction. The outcome often leads to failure. A printer who aims to create typography without a solid foundation is essentially building a house on sand, which is likely to collapse under the slightest pressure. A squared typeface, like the capitals of lining gothic, pairs well with the squares and angular decorations of the mission or secession style. Printing this example on gray stock would be a smart choice.

EXAMPLE 267

Modern application of classic type effects

EXAMPLE 267

Contemporary use of classic type effects

EXAMPLE 268

Patterned after Colonial treatment of title-pages

EXAMPLE 268

Inspired by the Colonial approach to title pages

Example 264.—This specimen will be recognized as an adaptation of the missal or mass-book style of treatment, mentioned in a previous chapter. It is an accepted ecclesiastical arrangement, and proves as pleasing on a ticket as on a title-page. Uncial initials (as are here shown in color) may be had of typefounders in slight variations. White or buff card admirably supports missal treatment.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This example will be recognized as an adaptation of the missal or mass-book style of treatment mentioned in a previous chapter. It is an accepted church arrangement and looks just as good on a ticket as it does on a title page. You can get uncial initials (like the ones shown here in color) from typefounders with slight variations. White or buff card works really well for missal treatment.

Example 265.—Inspiration for ticket designs may even be drawn from the work of William Morris and the Italian printers who used the black-toned decorative border, altho this style should not be undertaken unless the proper border is available. The one here adapted carries out the idea fairly well. Old Style Antique set snugly to fill the panel gives the proper results, the capital lines also being necessary to this style. Tickets for educational and art functions especially lend themselves to this treatment and white card should be used.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like modernized.—Inspiration for ticket designs can even come from the work of William Morris and the Italian printers who used a black decorative border, although this style should only be used if the right border is available. The one shown here works quite well. The Old Style Antique font fills the panel perfectly, and the capital letters are also essential for this style. Tickets for educational and art events, in particular, are well-suited for this design, and white card stock should be used.

EXAMPLE 266

The medieval art worker furnished a motive for this ticket

EXAMPLE 266

The medieval artist provided a reason for this ticket.

Example 266.—The motive for this ticket form came from observing that art workers during the Middle Ages frequently engraved inscriptions around the margins or borders of plates, slabs, doors, and like objects. This suggested the adoption of the idea to carry a few pertinent words on an entertainment ticket. Cardboard of almost any color could be used.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The reason for this ticket design came from noticing that artists in the Middle Ages often carved inscriptions around the edges of plates, slabs, doors, and similar objects. This inspired the idea of including a few relevant words on an entertainment ticket. Cardboard of nearly any color could be used.

Example 267.—Perhaps this arrangement could be described as a modern application of classic type effects. The display lines are in Cheltenham, a face that approximates some of the ancient Roman lettering, and the treatment of the ticket as a whole is chaste. The ornaments, surrounded as they are by blank space, emphasize the classic simplicity of the ticket. The type group is tapered to give proper symmetry.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This setup might be seen as a modern twist on classic type effects. The text is set in Cheltenham, which closely resembles some ancient Roman lettering, and the overall design of the ticket is straightforward. The embellishments, framed by empty space, highlight the timeless simplicity of the ticket. The typography is tapered to create balanced symmetry.

EXAMPLE 269

A dainty, refined effect suited to many occasions

EXAMPLE 269

A delicate, elegant look perfect for various events

Example 268.—This is purely a Colonial effect and 110closely follows the arrangements found on title-pages of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Hair-line rules well separated by space were common in those days. The type here used is Caslon, a letter cut in the eighteenth century, and one especially suited to Colonial typography. Antique-finished card in white and buff is appropriate.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is purely a Colonial style and 110closely follows the layouts seen on title pages from the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Hairline rules with good spacing were typical back then. The typeface used here is Caslon, a font created in the eighteenth century, which is particularly well-suited for Colonial typography. Antique-finished card in white and buff is fitting.

Example 269.—Dainty, refined effects are demanded by certain customers. This specimen demonstrates the effectiveness of such treatment on a ticket. Two sizes of type (Pabst), all capitals and slightly spaced, give the proper results. The ornaments are used as symbolic decoration.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Certain customers expect delicate, sophisticated designs. This example shows how effective this approach can be on a ticket. Using two sizes of type (Pabst), all in capitals and with a bit of spacing, achieves the desired results. The decorations serve as symbolic embellishments.

EXAMPLE 270

Robust treatment of an outing ticket

EXAMPLE 270

Thorough handling of an outing ticket

Example 270.—The typography of this ticket is distinctly masculine. This result has been obtained by the use of capitals of a robust type-face, so distributed in size as strongly to emphasize the important phrases. Had this form been printed in one color, the two type lines now in color should have been reduced a size. It is well for compositors to keep in mind that when orange is used in combination with black, the portion printed in orange will be lighter in tone than that in black, unless the difference is provided for by bolder or larger type-faces. Any color of stock excepting dainty tints would do for this ticket.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The typography of this ticket has a distinctly masculine feel. This effect comes from using bold capital letters arranged in a way that strongly highlights the key phrases. If this design were printed in just one color, the two lines of type currently in color would need to be smaller. It's important for compositors to remember that when orange is used with black, the orange text will appear lighter than the black text, unless a larger or bolder typeface is used to create contrast. Any stock color except for delicate shades would work for this ticket.

EXAMPLE 272

Treatment that should prevent easy counterfeiting

EXAMPLE 272

Measures that should stop easy counterfeiting

EXAMPLE 273

Corner decoration suitable to the subject

EXAMPLE 273

Corner decoration that fits the theme

Example 271.—This unusual arrangement was dictated by the nature of the cab ornament. The shapes of the type groups are built about it. Were the cab ornament not used, another arrangement would be necessary. There are social clubs of all kinds in every city, and balls are frequently held for which tickets are needed. An element of interest such as is given by the cab ornament would surely be appreciated by such customers.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This unique setup was determined by the design of the cab ornament. The shapes of the type groups are organized around it. If the cab ornament weren't included, we would need a different arrangement. There are all kinds of social clubs in every city, and they often host events that require tickets. A point of interest like the cab ornament would definitely be appreciated by these customers.

EXAMPLE 271

The cab ornament dictated the type formation

EXAMPLE 271

The taxi decoration determined the type of formation.

Example 272.—Occasionally there comes to the printshop a customer wanting a ticket which cannot easily be duplicated by any one with a press and a few fonts of type. Instead of referring the customer to a lithographer the printer should ascertain if he is not in a position to produce such a ticket. The style of the one here shown is suggested for such emergencies. A type border printed in color forms the background. Over this print the reading matter, and for the display lines use a type-face that happens not to be possessed by other printers in the same city. In providing a border for this ticket a rule with double lines has been used, thus blending it with the double lines of the type-face. White stock should be selected for this ticket.

Understood! Please provide the short phrases you'd like me to modernize.—Sometimes a customer comes into the print shop looking for a ticket that can't be easily duplicated by anyone with a press and a few fonts of type. Instead of sending the customer to a lithographer, the printer should check if they can produce such a ticket themselves. The style shown here is recommended for these situations. A colored type border serves as the background. On top of this, print the text, and for the display lines, use a typeface that other printers in the same city don’t have. When creating a border for this ticket, a double-lined rule has been used, blending it with the double lines of the typeface. Choose white stock for this ticket.

Example 273.—The corner decoration is in keeping with the subject of this ticket, and the arrangement as a whole is suggested for similar purposes. Any color of cardboard is suitable.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The corner decoration fits the theme of this ticket, and the overall design is meant for similar uses. Any color of cardstock works.

EXAMPLE 274

This arrangement has an old French motive

EXAMPLE 274

This arrangement features an old French theme.

Example 274.—The decoration of early French books furnished the motive for the typographical treatment of this ticket. It is submitted simply to demonstrate that ideas for arrangement can be picked up in many quarters, and as a suggestion that typographers go thru the world with eyes open.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The design of early French books inspired the layout of this ticket. It's presented just to show that inspiration for arrangements can come from various sources, and as a reminder for typographers to pay attention to the world around them.

EXAMPLE 275

Neat, conventional treatment of a letterhead containing a large amount of copy. The bold-face type lends variety to the heading and brings out important points

EXAMPLE 275

Clean, standard layout for a letterhead with a lot of text. The bold type adds variety to the heading and highlights key points.

EXAMPLE 276

Professional stationery must be treated with dignity and refinement. The type should be small

EXAMPLE 276

Professional stationery should be handled with respect and elegance. The font size should be small

EXAMPLE 277

Suggested treatment for church stationery of the conventional kind. A text letter is appropriate and is usually satisfying

EXAMPLE 277

Recommended treatment for traditional church stationery. A text letter works well and is generally pleasing.

EXAMPLE 278

As a change from the style shown in Example 276, professional stationery could be treated in this manner in one body size of a modern job type

EXAMPLE 278

As a variation from the style shown in Example 276, professional stationery could be designed this way in one size of a modern font.

111

LETTERHEADS & ENVELOPS

Is there a standard size of letter sheet and envelop for commercial correspondence? A look thru the letter files of any business house will reveal the interesting fact that most of the letters are on sheets measuring 8½ × 11 inches. Letter sheets of about this size have been in use for many years. From De Vinne’s Price List of 1871 we learn that 10 × 16 inches (8 × 10 folded) was the favorite size of letter sheet, and that for commercial letters the size 10¾ × 17 inches (8½ × 10¾ folded) was sometimes required.

Is there a standard size for letterhead and envelopes used in business correspondence? A glance through the letter files of any company will show that most letters are on paper measuring 8½ × 11 inches. Letter sheets of this size have been used for many years. According to De Vinne’s Price List from 1871, the preferred letter sheet size was 10 × 16 inches (8 × 10 when folded), and for commercial letters, the size 10¾ × 17 inches (8½ × 10¾ when folded) was sometimes needed.

Note sheets were then in two sizes: Commercial note, 8 × 10 inches (5 × 8 folded); and packet note, 9 × 11¼ inches (5⅝ × 9 folded).

Note sheets were then available in two sizes: Commercial note, 8 × 10 inches (5 × 8 folded); and packet note, 9 × 11¼ inches (5⅝ × 9 folded).

The typewriter and modern commercial requirements have since developed use of the single leaf, altho for personal correspondence and certain refined business purposes the folded note sheet is proper.

The typewriter and modern business needs have led to the use of single sheets, although for personal letters and some formal business purposes, folded note sheets are appropriate.

In passing it might be noted that in the price list above mentioned the printer is urged to charge an increased price when “brass or French flourishes are used in excess.” The composition of “one plain heading, of not more than four straight lines,” was to be charged at seventy-five cents; “one ornamental heading with curved lines,” twenty-five or fifty cents additional.

In passing, it’s worth mentioning that in the price list mentioned above, the printer is advised to charge a higher price when “brass or French flourishes are used excessively.” The cost for “one plain heading, of no more than four straight lines” was set at seventy-five cents; “one ornamental heading with curved lines” would be an extra twenty-five or fifty cents.

EXAMPLE 279

This elaborate border continued around the entire sheet. In the original the colors were subdued and harmonious and on a brown-gray hand-made paper

EXAMPLE 279

This intricate border went all the way around the whole sheet. In the original, the colors were muted and harmonious on a handmade brown-gray paper.

EXAMPLE 280

A suitable type-face symmetrically arranged, with a harmonious decorative device

EXAMPLE 280

An appropriate typeface arranged symmetrically, along with a balanced decorative element.

As has been stated, the standard size of the present-day commercial letterhead is 8½ × 11 inches. Strange to say, the standard size of envelop (known as No. 6¾ Government) used for the carrying of these letter sheets measures 6½ × 3⅝, tho if a snug fit were required the envelop would be about 5¾ × 3 inches. The standard size, however, should usually be selected, as all sorts of enclosures are made to fit it.

As mentioned, the standard size of today's commercial letterhead is 8½ × 11 inches. Interestingly, the standard size of the envelope (known as No. 6¾ Government) used to hold these letter sheets measures 6½ × 3⅝ inches. However, if a snug fit is needed, the envelope would be about 5¾ × 3 inches. The standard size should usually be chosen, as all kinds of enclosures are designed to fit it.

The large “official” envelop is also used extensively for business purposes, the most common size (No. 10 Government) measuring 9½ × 4⅛ inches. It takes a letter sheet of two parallel folds, and also provides for business and advertising enclosures larger than those planned for the standard envelop of smaller dimensions.

The large "official" envelope is also widely used for business purposes, with the most common size (No. 10 Government) measuring 9½ × 4⅛ inches. It fits a letter sheet that has two parallel folds and allows for business and advertising inserts that are larger than those intended for the standard envelope of smaller sizes.

Distinction is given business stationery by folding the standard letter sheet twice so that, folded, it measures 5½ × 4¼ inches, and by using an envelop (Baronial) that measures an eighth or a quarter of an inch larger each way. For private or semi-private purposes this kind of envelop is preferred, especially if the letter sheet is used as a double note sheet. The heading is frequently printed on the fourth page of the double note sheet, so that when the message is written on the fourth and first pages and the sheet is opened, the letter appears as two pages in a book.

Distinction is given to business stationery by folding the standard letter sheet twice, so that when folded, it measures 5½ × 4¼ inches. Additionally, a Baronial envelope that is an eighth or a quarter of an inch larger in each direction is used. For private or semi-private purposes, this type of envelope is preferred, especially when the letter sheet is used as a double note sheet. The heading is often printed on the fourth page of the double note sheet, so that when the message is written on the fourth and first pages and the sheet is opened, the letter appears as two pages in a book.

Another size of men’s personal correspondence sheet measures 5 × 8 inches folded once. After being written upon the sheet is again folded, and it then measures 5 × 4 inches. When the customer is willing to pay a price for which the best quality of stationery may be furnished, the printer should secure from houses specializing in society stationery envelops that are made with a more stylish flap than those commonly used for business purposes.

Another size of men’s personal correspondence sheet measures 5 × 8 inches when folded once. After writing on the sheet, it is folded again, reducing it to 5 × 4 inches. When customers are prepared to pay for high-quality stationery, printers should obtain envelopes from companies that specialize in social stationery, which feature a more stylish flap than those typically used for business.

Another size of letter sheet, used for men’s personal correspondence and for giving an exclusive appearance to commercial stationery, measures about 7¼ × 10½ inches. The paper is given two parallel folds and fits in an envelop that measures about 7½ × 4 inches.

Another size of letter sheet, used for men’s personal correspondence and for giving a more exclusive look to commercial stationery, measures about 7¼ × 10½ inches. The paper is folded in two parallel folds and fits in an envelope that measures about 7½ × 4 inches.

112

EXAMPLE 281

Artistic treatment in squared effects

EXAMPLE 281

Artistic treatment in squared effects

EXAMPLE 282

A simple treatment of a heading with little copy. Capitals have been letterspaced a trifle

EXAMPLE 282

A straightforward treatment of a heading with minimal text. The capital letters have been slightly spaced out.

Since the typewriter is in such general use, ruled letter sheets are seldom called for; in fact, ruled correspondence sheets of any kind are now in poor taste.

Since typewriters are so commonly used now, ruled letter sheets are rarely needed; in fact, ruled correspondence sheets of any kind are considered out of style.

The old-time notehead is also little used, the half-letter sheet (8½ × 5½ inches), and the two-thirds letter sheet (8½ × 7⅓ inches), printed the broad way, taking its place for brief business messages.

The old-fashioned notehead is rarely used now, along with the half-letter sheet (8½ × 5½ inches) and the two-thirds letter sheet (8½ × 7⅓ inches), which are printed sideways and have taken over for short business messages.

EXAMPLE 284

The heavy border effect of the Colonial style of typography gives character to this heading. By Arthur Nelson

EXAMPLE 284

The bold border effect of Colonial-style typography adds personality to this heading. By Arthur Nelson

The typographical treatment of letterheads and envelops should have some relation, and it is now generally conceded that the paper should be the same in both cases. A good grade of paper is now considered essential for bona-fide correspondence, a cheaper grade being allowed for form letters. A light-weight paper of a high grade is preferable over a heavy-weight paper of a low grade. Quality isn’t a matter of weight, altho if it can be afforded the heavier weight is not in the least objectionable. Twenty-pound folio (17 × 22) seems to be most easily obtained in the various papers.

The design of letterheads and envelopes should be related, and it’s now widely accepted that the paper used for both should match. High-quality paper is considered essential for genuine correspondence, while a cheaper option is acceptable for form letters. Lightweight, high-quality paper is preferred over heavy, low-quality paper. Quality isn't just about weight, though if budget allows, using a heavier weight isn't an issue at all. Twenty-pound folio (17 × 22) is usually the easiest to find in various types of paper.

As to the style of typographic treatment, the printer must in all cases consider the tastes of his customers, and especially the business or profession for which the stationery is to be used. As an instance, the style of typographic treatment of doctors’ and lawyers’ stationery seldom changes.

As for the style of printing, the printer should always keep in mind the preferences of their clients, especially the business or profession for which the stationery will be used. For example, the design of stationery for doctors and lawyers rarely changes.

It should be kept in mind that simple, neat, refined typography is appropriate for almost every order of stationery, while elaborate typography in many cases is inappropriate.

It’s important to remember that clean, simple, and refined typography works well for nearly all types of stationery, whereas fancy typography is often unsuitable.

Color is seldom well used on stationery. Most letterheads that the writer has seen which have been treated in three or four colors would have been more pleasing if given but one printing. A test of typographic skill is to design a letterhead that in one printing will look attractive and distinctive. The heading should usually be printed in black or some darkened color, and if another impression is desired a very small part of the design printed in orange or vermilion will add a touch of bright color.

Color is rarely used effectively on stationery. Most letterheads I've seen that use three or four colors would look better with just one print. A real test of design skill is creating a letterhead that looks nice and unique with just one color. The heading should typically be printed in black or a dark shade, and if an additional color is wanted, a small part of the design in orange or bright red can add a nice pop.

All the reproductions shown are reduced in size, those on the inserts being only slightly smaller.

All the reproductions displayed are scaled down, with those on the inserts being only a bit smaller.

EXAMPLE 283

There is a great deal of character in this simple letterhead design. The lantern is really a monogram. By Charles R. Capon

EXAMPLE 283

There’s a lot of personality in this straightforward letterhead design. The lantern actually serves as a monogram. By Charles R. Capon

Example 275 (Insert).—Lithographers and steel-die printers really furnish the styles for the conventional arrangement of letterheads. They work along standardized lines and usually produce well-balanced, appropriate headings. Typographical printers should study stationery produced by these processes and observe how the parts of headings are grouped and the advertising points emphasized; for a letterhead is one form of advertising. There are limitations, however, in the copying of such letterhead arrangements. Only plain designs should be studied for this purpose. Imitations of shaded and ornamental lettering are seldom successful. Example 275 demonstrates how a good letterhead can be designed along lithographic lines. The effectiveness of this heading depends a great deal upon the use of both light- and dark-faced type. Where there is a great deal of matter, as in this instance, the heading 113would likely appear flat and uninteresting and would lose some of the advertising qualities it possesses if the light-faced type were used thruout. This is no argument for bold-faced type on stationery headings as a usual thing, but refers to the kind of heading here shown. The parts in the dark-faced type include the firm name, the nature of its business and the city in which the firm is located. The names of the officers are arranged in the upper part of the heading, and this position of the names seems to be satisfactory in most instances. The telephone number and cable address are in the center near the date line. The type used in this heading is Card Litho and Card Light Litho.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. (Insert).—Lithographers and steel-die printers truly set the standards for how letterheads are typically designed. They follow established guidelines and generally create well-balanced, appropriate headings. Typographic printers should examine stationery made through these methods and pay attention to how the sections of headings are organized and the advertising elements highlighted; after all, a letterhead is a type of advertisement. However, there are limitations when it comes to copying these letterhead layouts. Only simple designs should be studied for this purpose. Replicating shaded and decorative lettering rarely works out. Example 275 illustrates how an effective letterhead can be crafted using lithographic principles. The impact of this heading largely relies on the combination of both light and dark typefaces. When there’s a lot of text, as in this case, the heading 113 might look flat and boring, losing some of its advertising appeal if only light type were used throughout. This isn’t an endorsement for bold type on all stationery headings, but specifically refers to the style shown here. The sections in dark type include the company name, the nature of its business, and the city where it’s located. The names of the officers are positioned at the top of the heading, and this arrangement is usually satisfactory. The phone number and cable address are centered near the date line. The type used in this heading is Card Litho and Card Light Litho.

Example 276 (Insert).—Professional stationery must be treated with dignity and refinement, and the type should be small. Treatment such as this would undoubtedly meet with approval from the professional customer. It would be a mistake to apply to professional stationery the variety of attractive and interesting arrangements that are applicable to stationery used for many business and advertising purposes. The printer would save resetting of the work and more surely please his customers if, in filling orders for doctors, lawyers, architects, engineers and other professional men, he attempted nothing but the conventional dignified treatment illustrated by this example. The type is an imitation engravers’ gothic slightly letterspaced to give the effect usually found on steel-die work.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. (Insert).—Professional stationery should be handled with respect and elegance, and the font should be small. This approach would likely be appreciated by professional clients. It would be unwise to apply the same variety of appealing and engaging designs used for other business and advertising stationery to professional stationery. The printer would avoid redoing work and better satisfy clients if, when fulfilling orders for doctors, lawyers, architects, engineers, and other professionals, he focused solely on the conventional elegant style shown in this example. The font is a slightly letterspaced imitation of engravers’ gothic, creating a look typically seen in steel-die work.

Example 277 (Insert).—Ministers, included as they are in the professional class, like to have their stationery dignified and neat. At the same time they do not object to the use of text type, as it has a churchly suggestion. This type, too, must be small, that used here being eight-point in size.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—Ministers, being part of the professional class, prefer their stationery to be dignified and tidy. However, they are also fine with using text type since it carries a church-like feel. This type should be small, with the one used here being eight-point in size.

EXAMPLE 287

Suggestion of the ecclesiastic in the design of a letterhead for a church printer

EXAMPLE 287

Recommendation from the church official regarding a letterhead design for a church printer

Example 278 (Insert).—Stationery for a lawyer, like that for a doctor, should be dignified and refined. It is well to give him the professional customer’s style of typography such as that of the doctor’s heading, but if a departure is to be made from the imitation steel-engraved lettering, it is possibly well to use a modern style of type such as the Bodoni, and letterspace the capitals, as was done in this example. But one size of type-face has been used here (eight-point), capitals, italic, and small capitals being utilized.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—Stationery for a lawyer, like that for a doctor, should be sophisticated and elegant. It’s a good idea to use a professional typography style similar to a doctor's letterhead, but if you decide to move away from the imitation steel-engraved lettering, it might be better to go for a modern font like Bodoni, and space out the capital letters, as shown in this example. However, only one type size has been used here (eight-point), with capitals, italics, and small capitals included.

Example 279.—Practically never should a letterhead be treated with the elaborateness of this one unless the customer expressly desires such treatment and is willing to pay for it, or the letterhead is the printer’s own, as in this instance. The reproduction, unfortunately, does not present the rich qualities of the original, which was printed in green-gray and red-gray on a gray hand-made paper. The typography was merged with the paper stock, and there was not the contrast found in the reproduced specimen.

Understood! Please provide the short phrases for modernization.—A letterhead should almost never be treated as elaborately as this one unless the client specifically wants that level of detail and is willing to pay for it, or if the letterhead belongs to the printer, as it does in this case. Unfortunately, the reproduction fails to capture the rich qualities of the original, which was printed in green-gray and red-gray on handmade gray paper. The typography blended with the paper stock, lacking the contrast found in the reproduced version.

EXAMPLE 285

On which a meeting is advertised

EXAMPLE 285

About which a meeting is announced

EXAMPLE 286

A panel, when well treated, gives distinction to stationery. By Arthur Nelson

EXAMPLE 286

A well-designed panel adds a touch of elegance to stationery. By Arthur Nelson

EXAMPLE 288

Artistic yet simple arrangement, the feature of which are the three lines of equal length. By Leon I. Leader

EXAMPLE 288

An artistic yet simple arrangement, highlighted by three lines of equal length. By Leon I. Leader

Example 280.—Old-Style Antique, as this heading shows, is a good type-face for the letterhead of an art publication company. Capitals have been used thruout and grouped so as to form a symmetrical arrangement that harmonizes well with the decorative device placed 114under it. A feature of this heading is that all matter is included in the one group, excepting the name of the city, which is placed to receive the date line.

Understood. Please provide the text you’d like modernized.—Old-Style Antique, as this heading shows, is a great font for the letterhead of an art publication company. Capitals have been used throughout and arranged to create a balanced layout that complements the decorative element placed 114under it. A notable aspect of this heading is that everything is included in one group, except for the name of the city, which is positioned to accommodate the date line.

EXAMPLE 289

Letterhead for a storekeeper selling a general line of goods

EXAMPLE 289

Letterhead for a shopkeeper selling a variety of products

EXAMPLE 290

Panel treatment that suggests the business. By Arthur Nelson

EXAMPLE 290

Panel treatment that represents the business. By Arthur Nelson

EXAMPLE 292

Unique arrangement of a distinctive heading. By Harry A. Anger

EXAMPLE 292

Special layout of a unique heading. By Harry A. Anger

Example 281.—Successful treatment of a heading like this depends upon the typographer’s ability so to arrange the copy, without resorting to letterspacing, that all lines are the same length. It is necessary also to use all capitals of an old-style face of dark tones in which the letters set fairly close together, a result such as can be had with Old-Style Antique or Cloister Oldstyle. The decorative device in its shape harmonizes with the formation of the group of type lines above it. The liberal blank space that surrounds this heading is an important factor in its attractiveness. The original was on brown paper.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Successfully treating a heading like this relies on the typographer's skill in arranging the text so that all lines are the same length without using letter spacing. It’s also essential to use all caps in an old-style font that has dark tones and tightly set letters, which can be achieved with Old-Style Antique or Cloister Oldstyle. The decorative element’s shape complements the alignment of the type lines above it. The ample white space around this heading is crucial to its visual appeal. The original was printed on brown paper.

Example 282.—When the printer receives copy as brief as that used for this letterhead he experiences difficulty in producing an effect that will be attractive. With the customary engravers’ type-faces nothing very satisfactory is possible, but by using a type-face of character, such as Caslon Oldstyle in its original form, as was done here, artistic interest can be added. Two sizes of capitals, spaced, were used for the firm name. Italic was selected for the word “Grocers,” with a swash or decorated capital that accompanies the old Caslon type-face. Capitals and small capitals were utilized for the date line. A touch of decorative interest was added to the heading by the use of a rule, on each end of which was placed a dagger, such as is usually a part of book fonts. This treatment could be made even more effective by printing the letterhead on a white bond paper of good quality.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—When the printer gets copy as brief as what's used for this letterhead, he struggles to create an appealing effect. With the usual engravers’ typefaces, nothing very satisfying can be achieved, but by using a character-rich typeface, like Caslon Oldstyle in its original form, as done here, artistic interest can be added. Two sizes of spaced capitals were used for the firm name. Italic was chosen for the word “Grocers,” along with a swash or decorated capital that complements the old Caslon typeface. Capitals and small capitals were used for the date line. A nice decorative touch was added to the heading by using a rule, at each end of which was placed a dagger, similar to what’s usually found in book fonts. This design could be even more effective by printing the letterhead on high-quality white bond paper.

Example 283.—This letterhead is offered as a suggestion for artistic treatment when not much copy is furnished and it is possible to use a small decorative device. The type-face should have old-style qualities of an artistic nature and should be slightly letterspaced. The lantern device on this heading is really a monogram, cleverly designed. The original was in black and orange on buff-tinted paper, and as shown by the reproduction, the heading was placed very high on the sheet.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This letterhead is suggested as an artistic option when there isn’t much text and it’s possible to include a small decorative element. The typeface should have an artistic, old-school vibe and should be slightly spaced out. The lantern design on this heading is essentially a cleverly crafted monogram. The original used black and orange on buff-colored paper, and as shown in the reproduction, the heading was positioned very high on the sheet.

EXAMPLE 291

Dignified yet novel treatment

Respectful yet innovative approach

Example 284.—For some reason a border made of a heavy line and a light one harmonizes with the type matter in Caslon Oldstyle, especially when liberal blank space separates the type and the border, as in this instance. It is well usually not to have the border darker in tone than the type matter, but on this heading it would be a mistake to lighten the border, which, however, would look well printed in vermilion or orange ink. A buff-tinted paper of an antique finish would blend with the Caslon typography. It is a departure from conventional methods to place the names of the firm members in the lower part of the panel. This was probably done so that the name of the bindery would stand out without interference from type matter above it, but as a concession to conventionality it would probably be well to place the names in the upper part of the panel.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—For some reason, a border made up of a thick line and a thin one works well with the text in Caslon Oldstyle, especially when there is plenty of blank space between the text and the border, like in this case. It's generally a good idea not to have the border darker than the text, but in this heading, it would be a mistake to lighten the border, which would look nice printed in vermilion or orange ink. A buff-tinted paper with an antique finish would blend nicely with the Caslon typography. It’s unusual to place the names of the firm members at the bottom of the panel. This was probably done so the name of the bindery stands out without any text above it getting in the way, but to stick with traditional design, it might be better to put the names at the top of the panel.

115Example 285.—The printer is frequently called upon to arrange for an organization a letterhead which contains an announcement of the next meeting of the society. The example under consideration shows how this may be done; the meeting announcement is presented plainly, yet a letterhead appearance is retained. The name of the society crosses the letter sheet and is joined on each end by a group of officers. The reference to the meeting occupies the space directly under the name of the society. In the original the main part of the heading, which now stands out so strongly, was subdued by the use of gray ink.

115Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—The printer is often asked to create a letterhead for an organization that includes an announcement for the next meeting of the society. The example we're looking at shows how this can be done; the meeting announcement is clear, but the letterhead still looks professional. The name of the society spans across the letter, flanked at each end by a group of officers. The meeting information is placed directly below the society’s name. In the original design, the main part of the heading, which now stands out prominently, was made less noticeable by using gray ink.

Example 286.—There is suggestion of the architectural panel about the arrangement of this heading. The suggestion is continued by the use of a classic Roman type-face mainly in capitals. Panels are not as successful on letterheads as they would be if more judgment were used in forming them. This heading should prove helpful in working out the panel idea. Its proportions could be smaller with good results. The original was printed with green-black ink on a primrose color of bond paper, but would also look well on white stock.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—There’s a hint of the architectural panel in how this heading is set up. The hint continues with the use of a classic Roman typeface mostly in all caps. Panels aren’t as effective on letterheads as they could be if more careful thought went into their design. This heading should help in developing the panel concept. Its proportions could be reduced for better results. The original was printed with green-black ink on primrose-colored bond paper, but it would also look good on white paper.

Example 287.—A letterhead is successful if by its treatment it suggests the line of business for which it is used. This one measures up in that respect. By the use of the old text type and Maltese crosses an ecclesiastical touch is given. The old church missal books of the manuscript days were brilliant in rubrication, a feature of which were ruled lines, crosses and initials in vermilion. The arrangement of this heading is also one that could be used for many purposes. Some of the facts about the business are blended with rules in a decorative band that gives breadth to the heading.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A letterhead is effective if its design suggests the type of business it represents. This one does just that. The use of the classic text style and Maltese crosses adds an ecclesiastical feel. The old church missal books from the manuscript era were vibrant with rubrics, featuring ruled lines, crosses, and initials in bright red. The layout of this heading could also work for various purposes. Some details about the business are integrated with decorative lines in a band that adds visual depth to the heading.

EXAMPLE 295

Neatness and dignity in letterhead designing

EXAMPLE 295

Cleanliness and professionalism in letterhead design

Example 288.—Letterheads arranged so that all lines are the same length, especially if such arrangement allows proper emphasis of the firm name, usually look well and have artistic interest. This heading is one such as almost any printer with a good old-style type-face could produce. Like Example 281, this treatment requires the use of capitals. Lower-case in square or block formation does not shape up harmoniously. Capitals exclusively should be used when such effects are planned.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—Letterheads designed so that all lines are the same length, particularly if this arrangement highlights the firm name, typically look good and have artistic appeal. This heading is one that nearly any printer with a decent traditional typeface could create. Like Example 281, this style requires the use of capital letters. Using lowercase in a square or block format does not create a harmonious appearance. Capitals should be used exclusively when planning such effects.

Example 289.—A letterhead for a general store invariably presents a problem to the printer who wishes to produce a harmonious and well-balanced heading. It is difficult properly to display copy which includes such a variety of articles as furniture, jewelry, stoves and coffins. The typographer responsible for this letterhead set it in Caslon Oldstyle, grouped it as well as he could, and introduced decorative value by means of florets printed in color. The name of the merchant was given the most prominence, and “Furniture” was featured for the reason that it seemed to constitute the principal part of the business. The printer who objects to this arrangement should try his hand at resetting it. As copy, this heading is in strong contrast to that supplied for Example 282.

Understood! Please provide the text you want modernized.—Creating a letterhead for a general store always poses a challenge for the printer aiming to craft a harmonious and balanced heading. It's tough to effectively showcase a variety of items like furniture, jewelry, stoves, and coffins all in one layout. The typographer who worked on this letterhead used Caslon Oldstyle, arranged it as well as he could, and added decorative elements with colorful florets. The merchant's name was made the most prominent, and “Furniture” was emphasized since it represented the main focus of the business. Any printer who disagrees with this layout should try redoing it themselves. In terms of content, this heading sharply contrasts with that provided for Example 282.

EXAMPLE 293

Individuality obtained by means of decorative initials

EXAMPLE 293

Individuality achieved through decorative initials

EXAMPLE 294

Just a neat typographical arrangement

EXAMPLE 294

Just a clean layout of text

EXAMPLE 296

A heading in two groups. By Harry A. Anger

EXAMPLE 296

A heading in two parts. By Harry A. Anger

Example 290.—This example is a resetting of a letterhead on which the printer had imitated bricks by using oblong border units printed in 116red. His effort was too literal, and in rearranging the heading the purpose was merely to suggest bricks and tiles in a light-printing border. Spaced Caslon capitals completed an effect that is unusual and distinctive. The line “Brick and Tile” could be printed in color.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like modernized.—This example showcases a letterhead where the printer tried to replicate bricks by using long border units printed in 116red. His approach was too on-the-nose, so when rearranging the heading, the goal was just to hint at bricks and tiles with a lighter printing border. Spaced Caslon capitals added to an effect that is unique and memorable. The phrase “Brick and Tile” could be printed in color.

EXAMPLE 297

A neat letterhead and uncommon distribution of color. By Leon I. Leader

EXAMPLE 297

A clean letterhead and unusual color scheme. By Leon I. Leader

EXAMPLE 298

Double-panel treatment that is unusual

Unusual double-panel treatment

Example 291.—There is a dignified yet novel attractiveness about this heading. The light cross-rules give shape, and individuality is injected by slightly spacing the letters and confining the color to three small initials. Gothic (sans-serif) type looks well treated in this manner. As will be seen, liberal blank space is necessary for a right effect. The original was printed in black and vermilion ink on gray bond paper.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This heading has a classy yet fresh appeal. The thin lines create structure, and the uniqueness comes from slightly spacing out the letters and using just three small initials for color. Gothic (without-serif) type appears to be nicely enhanced this way. As will be shown, having plenty of empty space is essential for the best effect. The original was printed in black and red ink on gray bond paper.

EXAMPLE 300

A letterhead in Caslon roman capitals and italic lower-case, with touch of color in the distinctive shop mark

EXAMPLE 300

A letterhead in Caslon Roman capitals and italic lowercase, with a splash of color in the unique shop logo.

Example 292.—The designer of this letterhead planned to get something different and succeeded. He did it, too, with the good old Caslon type-face. This type has proved its worth in commercial job work, and there seems to be no limit to its usefulness. By spacing the letters in this heading a peculiar tone has been obtained which gives the letterhead much of its character. The position of the lamp ornament is odd. Black and orange ink and white paper were used.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—The designer of this letterhead wanted something unique and actually achieved it. He accomplished this using the classic Caslon typeface. This typeface has shown its value in commercial printing, and its versatility is seemingly limitless. The spacing of the letters in this heading creates a distinctive tone that contributes significantly to the letterhead's character. The placement of the lamp ornament is unusual. Black and orange ink was used on white paper.

Example 293.—While it is safer to print club stationery in the conventional style of professional stationery, there are clubs which will appreciate any individuality and attractiveness the printer may introduce on the letter sheet. This heading is a suggestion of what might be done in this direction. Washington Text has been combined with decorative initials.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Although it's safer to print club stationery using standard professional styles, some clubs will value any uniqueness and appeal the printer brings to the letterhead. This heading is a suggestion for what could be done in this area. Washington Text has been paired with decorative initials.

Example 294.—The problem here was to produce a letterhead for men who appreciate typographic neatness, and the problem was met by setting the heading in Caslon lower-case and introducing italic in several places where it would be of the most value. As will be seen, the names of the officers were grouped on the left, and balanced on the right by a group that tells of the things the store has to sell. It is likely that copy such as this would meet with different treatment from the average compositor, who would be inclined to distribute the copy over all parts of the letterhead. The lesson to be learned is that the several parts of copy should be orderly apportioned to positions on the letter sheet, as in this instance.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—The challenge here was to create a letterhead for men who value clean typography, and this was achieved by using Caslon lower-case for the heading and adding italics in several key places. As you can see, the officers' names are grouped on the left, balanced on the right by a section that highlights the products the store offers. It's likely that someone else might approach this differently, wanting to spread the text all over the letterhead. The takeaway is that the different elements of text should be thoughtfully arranged on the letterhead, as demonstrated here.

Example 295.—This is an excellent example of a good letterhead, originally produced by the incised copperplate method. Study of its details would benefit the typographic printer for the reason that, as mentioned in the beginning of this chapter, designers of letterheads produced by lithographic and intaglio processes have given much thought to letterhead arrangement. The main part of the heading is symmetrically arranged in a group in which attention has been given to spacing. The illustration is disposed of at the left, and an added line has been placed in the upper right corner and printed in red. The neatness and dignity of this letterhead are an inspiration.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is a great example of an effective letterhead, originally created using the incised copperplate technique. Analyzing its details would be beneficial for a typographic printer because, as noted at the beginning of this chapter, letterhead designers using lithographic and intaglio methods have put a lot of thought into their layouts. The main part of the heading is symmetrically organized in a grouping that pays attention to spacing. The illustration is positioned on the left, and an additional line has been added in the upper right corner printed in red. The neatness and elegance of this letterhead are truly inspiring.

EXAMPLE 299

Distinction in letterhead design. The rule border, which extended around the entire sheet, was in a shade of ink lighter than that used for the type

EXAMPLE 299

Quality in letterhead design. The border surrounding the entire sheet was in a shade of ink lighter than the one used for the text.

Example 296.—The copy of this letterhead presented a problem which was solved by making two distinct groups of the type matter. In the main group were placed the matters of national 117importance, and in the upper group in smaller type such copy as refers to the state organization. Compositors should observe how the “Y” at the end of the main line has been extended into the margin so that the group alignment might be retained. The printing combination was black ink and white paper.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The design of this letterhead created a challenge that was addressed by organizing the text into two separate groups. The main group included topics of national significance, while the upper group featured smaller text related to state matters. Typesetters should note how the "Y" at the end of the main line extends into the margin to maintain the alignment of the groups. The printing combo was black ink on white paper. 117

Example 297.—Perhaps the use of italic capitals exclusively would have been more consistent, yet the one line of roman capitals does not detract from the pleasure the neatness of this heading affords the admirer of good printing. The distribution of color is uncommon. The italic short-and (&) adds a touch of decoration to the heading. Typographers will find that these old-style italic short-ands look well in display lines substituted for the spelled-out “and.” The roman short-and (&) is severe in character and is not so pleasing.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Using all italic capitals might have been more consistent, but the one line of regular capitals doesn't take away from the enjoyment that the neatness of this heading brings to fans of good printing. The color distribution is interesting. The italic short-and (&) adds a decorative element to the heading. Typographers will notice that these old-style italic short-ands look great in display lines instead of the spelled-out “and.” The regular short-and (&) is more formal and not as appealing.

Example 298.—Occasionally it is advisable to inclose type matter in a panel, altho in most instances the typographer will find that a letterhead is neater if no rule panel is used. However, there is something attractive and different about the panel treatment of this letterhead. Without the rules the heading would be neat, but would lose a distinction that is now given it by the rules. The type-face, Packard Oldstyle, possesses a quality found in hand-lettering and looks well on this heading.

Understood! Please provide the text for me to modernize.—Sometimes it's a good idea to enclose text in a panel, although in most cases, a typographer will find that a letterhead looks cleaner without a rule panel. Still, there’s something appealing and unique about the panel design of this letterhead. Without the rules, the heading would be tidy, but it would lose the distinctive look that the rules provide. The font, Packard Oldstyle, has a quality reminiscent of hand-lettering and looks great on this heading.

Example 299.—A line border finishing off the edges of the letter sheet adds a quality to the appearance of the stationery that makes it worth while when the printer uses the idea on his own stationery or a customer is willing to pay the increased cost necessary for such an effect. On the Fell letterhead the border was in a shade of ink lighter than that used for the type. The arrangement of the heading is worthy of study, especially the disposition of the officers’ names, which are placed one under another instead of being conventionally arranged in a line at the top of the sheet. While this heading is hand-lettered, it is suggestive of similar effects that could be produced with good type-faces of an old-style design.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A line border around the edges of the letterhead gives the stationery a quality that makes it worthwhile when the printer adopts this idea for their own stationery or when a customer is ready to pay the extra cost for such an effect. On the Fell letterhead, the border was made in a shade of ink lighter than the type. The layout of the heading is interesting to examine, especially how the names of the officers are listed one under another instead of following the traditional format of being in a line at the top of the sheet. Although this heading is hand-lettered, it hints at similar effects that could be achieved with good old-style typefaces.

Example 300.—Another letterhead in the Caslon type-face, roman capitals and italic lower-case being used. Much of the attractiveness of the heading is due to the spot of decorative color made by the shop device, which in design blends well with the type-face and because of its position brings the eye to the title of the press. The names of the officers are placed above the center, and the service rendered by the press is outlined in the end groups.

Understood! Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—Another letterhead in the Caslon typeface, using Roman capitals and italic lowercase. A lot of the appeal of the heading comes from the splash of decorative color made by the shop logo, which complements the typeface in design and draws attention to the title of the press because of its placement. The names of the officers are positioned above the center, and the services provided by the press are summarized in the end groups.

EXAMPLE 303

Type arrangement as used by a noted typographer. Printed on the fourth page of a folded note sheet

EXAMPLE 303

Type layout as utilized by a famous typographer. Printed on the fourth page of a folded note sheet.

Example 301.—The cross-line panel is here adapted to letterhead purposes with some success. The decorative border is a suitable one for such arrangement and affords relief from the plain brass rule. However, it only departs from the plain rule sufficiently to add an interesting touch of irregularity to the lines. Text type has been used for the center, and where Caslon capitals are found in the panel they are letterspaced.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The cross-line panel has been adapted for letterhead use with some success. The decorative border is fitting for this setup and provides a nice contrast to the simple brass rule. However, it only strays from the plain rule enough to add an interesting touch of irregularity to the lines. Text type has been applied in the center, and where Caslon capitals appear in the panel, they are letterspaced.

EXAMPLE 301

The crossed-line panel successfully adapted to letterhead purposes. By Adams-Brander Company

EXAMPLE 301

The crossed-line panel was effectively adapted for use on letterhead. By Adams-Brander Company

EXAMPLE 302

A German idea in letterhead treatment

EXAMPLE 302

A German concept in letterhead design

Example 302.—While German treatment in advertising design and typography is usually thought to be strong and forceful, yet certain classes of work are produced in a dainty yet characteristic style. This letterhead is presented because of the interest it will doubtless have to American printers.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—While German design and typography in advertising are generally seen as bold and powerful, there are some types of work created in a delicate yet distinctive style. This letterhead is shared because it will certainly interest American printers.

EXAMPLE 304

Humor in a notehead is exceptional

EXAMPLE 304

Humor in a notehead is unique

Example 303.—This notehead printed in two sizes of capitals is interesting in that it is the work of a noted book typographer. The larger capitals are not letterspaced, but the smaller ones are. A triangular formation of periods 118adds a touch of decoration between groups. This notehead was printed on the fourth page of a folded sheet in dull-finished black ink on white bond paper.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This notehead printed in two sizes of capitals is interesting because it’s created by a well-known book typographer. The larger capitals aren’t spaced apart, but the smaller ones are. A triangular arrangement of periods 118adds a decorative touch between groups. This notehead was printed on the fourth page of a folded sheet in dull-finished black ink on white bond paper.

EXAMPLE 305

Conventional treatment of an envelop corner

EXAMPLE 305

Standard treatment of an envelope corner

Example 304.—Humor in a notehead is questionable and should be used only in exceptional cases. Mr. Glover, however, has used it to good advantage. Printing has always been such a serious business that customers may welcome a printer who can smile even on his note sheets.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.—Humor in a notehead is debatable and should only be used in rare situations. Mr. Glover, however, has successfully made it work. Printing has always been a serious industry, so customers might appreciate a printer who can bring a smile, even in his note sheets.


EXAMPLE 307

Envelop corner prominently treated in a decorative letter

EXAMPLE 307

Envelope corner highlighted with a decorative font

EXAMPLE 308

Harmony of device and type treatment. By Ray Greenleaf

EXAMPLE 308

Harmony of device and type treatment. By Ray Greenleaf

The envelop is an acknowledged convenience in correspondence. It not only protects the letter from being soiled or tampered with, but is a convenience to the post-office and a means of advertising. The first use that the printed part of an envelop has is to inform the postal authorities of the name and address of the sender so that if a letter cannot be delivered it can be returned. On government-printed envelops this information is given in the briefest and plainest possible way. However, the greater number of business men recognize the advertising possibilities of the envelop, and not only have the paper match that used for letterheads, but see to it that the typographic treatment is also in accord with that on the letter sheet. The treatment of the face of the envelop should be neat. It is not only in poor taste to cover the envelop with printing, but is against the post-office regulations. There are those who prefer to print the type matter on the flap of the envelop, and others who print the type matter in the usual corner and the trademark on the flap.

The envelope is a well-known convenience in communication. It not only keeps the letter safe from dirt or tampering but also helps the postal service and serves as a way to promote a business. The printed part of an envelope is mainly for informing postal workers of the sender's name and address so that if a letter can't be delivered, it can be sent back. On government-issued envelopes, this info is presented in the simplest and most straightforward way. However, most businesspeople recognize the advertising potential of the envelope, ensuring that the paper matches the letterhead and that the design aligns with the letter itself. The appearance of the envelope should be neat; it's not just in bad taste to cover it with excessive printing, but it also violates postal regulations. Some prefer to print the text on the flap of the envelope, while others print it in the usual corner and place their logo on the flap.

Example 305.—This is a specimen of a conventionally treated envelop corner in imitation steel-engraved lettering. The old-fashioned “After five days return to” as here used is not much in vogue, and printers would do well to omit it unless the customer insists upon its inclusion. This envelop corner is in the same style of typography as the letterhead that accompanied it.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is an example of a traditionally designed envelope corner using imitation steel-engraved lettering. The old-fashioned phrase “After five days return to,” as shown here, is not very popular nowadays, and printers should probably leave it out unless the customer specifically asks for it. This envelope corner matches the typography style of the letterhead that came with it.

EXAMPLE 306

Distinctive and artistic treatment

Unique and creative approach

Example 306.—Artistic interest of a medieval character has been given this envelop corner by the use of Old-Style Antique, and especially by the decorative device in color. The design of this envelop is distinctive, and mail from this source would easily be recognized after one or two letters had been received.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The artistic style of this medieval envelope has been enhanced through the use of Old-Style Antique and especially the colorful decorative elements. The design of this envelope is unique, and mail from this source would be easily identifiable after receiving just one or two letters.

Example 307.—Occasionally it is good policy to bring out the name of the business in a prominent way, especially if it can be treated in a decorative letter such as the one used in this instance. Not every business will allow of such prominent treatment, and in this matter the printer needs to use judgment. The type has been aligned at the left.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Sometimes it's a good idea to feature the business name prominently, especially if it can be displayed in a decorative font like in this example. Not every business will permit such prominent styling, so the printer must use discretion. The text has been aligned to the left.

Example 308.—It is seldom that an envelop corner is treated so harmoniously and artistically as the one under consideration. The general character of the decorative device is matched by the style of the type-faces used. The squaring of the type group also adds shape harmony. This corner card, designed some years ago, is proof of the fact that good work is always good.

Understood. Please provide the text to modernize.—It's rare to see a corner of an envelope designed so beautifully and artistically as this one. The overall look of the decorative element matches the font styles used. The way the type is arranged also contributes to the overall harmony. This corner card, created several years ago, shows that quality work always stands the test of time.

EXAMPLE 309

An elaborate envelop corner

An elaborate envelope corner

Example 309.—Seldom should an envelop corner card be as elaborate as this one, but when such an arrangement is allowable, as in this case, the design shown is worthy of consideration. The type-face is Caslon with Caslon Text, and the bands are made by using square ornaments with alternating blank space inside of rules.

Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—It’s rare for a corner card on an envelope to be this detailed, but when it can be, as it is here, this design is worth looking at. The typeface used is Caslon with Caslon Text, and the bands are created using square ornaments with alternating blank spaces inside of rules.

EXAMPLE 312

The non-stock-ruled type of billhead, with a panel in which name, date and other items are recorded. Showing use of roman lower-case

EXAMPLE 312

The non-stock-ruled type of billhead, with a section where the name, date, and other details are recorded. Showing the use of lowercase Roman letters.

EXAMPLE 313

Remove the words “Sold to” and the rule work, and this could be used as a letterhead. Showing use of italic lower-case with spaced roman capitals

EXAMPLE 313

Take out the words “Sold to” and the rule work, and this could serve as a letterhead. Demonstrating the use of italic lowercase with spaced Roman capitals.

119

BILLHEADS & STATEMENTS

The printer called on to produce a billhead has a responsibility seldom fully realized. He has a duty to himself, to his customer and to those who come after, which is best carried out by suitable and dignified type composition. A business house has been known to use the same design of billhead for fifty years, and it is a fact that many merchants cannot be persuaded to change the style of the billhead, no matter how homely it may be.

The printer tasked with creating a billhead has a responsibility that is often underestimated. He has an obligation to himself, his client, and future users, which is best fulfilled through appropriate and respectable type composition. Some businesses have used the same billhead design for fifty years, and many merchants are reluctant to change their billhead style, regardless of how outdated it may look.

Billheads and statements should correspond in style to that of letterheads and other forms of stationery, and in changing the design it must not be forgotten that these other forms should also be altered to harmonize. The paper should be of the same finish and color, and the main features of type arrangement similar. The type-face must be the same on all.

Billheads and statements should match the style of letterheads and other types of stationery. When changing the design, it’s important to remember that these other items should also be updated to create a cohesive look. The paper should have the same finish and color, and the main elements of type arrangement should be similar. The typeface must be consistent across all.

The standard sizes of billheads for commercial purposes are:

The standard sizes of billheads for business purposes are:

8½ ×  5½ inches, 8 out of a sheet 17 × 22.
8½ ×  7  inches, 8 out of a sheet 17 × 28.
8½ ×  9⅓ inches, 6 out of a sheet 17 × 28.
8½ × 14  inches, 4 out of a sheet 17 × 28.

Professional billheads are usually an inch or two smaller than the smallest size of commercial billheads.

Professional billheads are usually an inch or two smaller than the smallest size of commercial billheads.

There is a variety of sizes in statements. Popular sizes are those cut out of folio (17 × 22 inches), which then measure 5½ × 5⅝ inches, and 5½ × 8½ inches.

There are different sizes in statements. Common sizes are those cut from folio (17 × 22 inches), which then measure 5½ × 5⅝ inches and 5½ × 8½ inches.

EXAMPLE 310

In which are presented the principal features of the average commercial invoice, or billhead. The customer’s name is placed in the lower left corner

EXAMPLE 310

This section showcases the main features of a typical commercial invoice, or billhead. The customer's name is positioned in the lower left corner.

EXAMPLE 311

How a letterhead may be converted into a billhead. The upper portion is also shown as Example 283 in the chapter on letterheads

EXAMPLE 311

How a letterhead can be turned into a billhead. The upper section is also displayed as Example 283 in the chapter on letterheads.

Whether ruled or not, it is customary to allow about 2¾ inches for the printed heading on both billhead and statement.

Whether ruled or not, it’s standard to allow about 2¾ inches for the printed heading on both the billhead and statement.

Because of the extensive use of “window” envelops, the heading should be so arranged that the name and address of the customer can be placed in the lower left part of the billhead. The exact position can be ascertained by placing a billhead over such an envelop and jogging the two at the head and left side. When held to the light the opening in the face of the envelop can be traced on the billhead. The billhead is folded to fit the envelop and inserted so that the name and address can be seen.

Because of the widespread use of “window” envelopes, the heading should be arranged so that the name and address of the customer can be placed in the lower left part of the billhead. You can find the exact position by placing a billhead over the envelope and aligning the two at the top and left side. When held up to the light, you can see the opening in the face of the envelope traced on the billhead. The billhead is then folded to fit the envelope and inserted so that the name and address are visible.

Use of the typewriter and window envelops has brought a change in the arrangement of billheads, and printers, whenever they have opportunity, should alter the old billhead arrangement to conform to the new requirements.

Use of the typewriter and window envelopes has changed how billheads are arranged, and printers, whenever they have the chance, should update the old billhead layout to meet the new standards.

Most billheads a quarter of a century ago contained in the upper right corner in script (usually) a date line, and under it at the left was a dotted line beginning with a large script M. Immediately following came the firm name (usually rather large) flanked on the left by the word “To,” and on the right by the abbreviation of debtor, “Dr.” So the apprentice boy was taught, and he would then be further instructed to place the words “Dealers in” (or their equivalent) in small type, centered; then to display the words indicating the line of goods carried. In a small line at the lower right corner was the street address, and aligned opposite were the mystic words “Terms Cash.”

Most billheads a quarter of a century ago had a date line in script, usually located in the upper right corner. Below that, on the left, was a dotted line that started with a large script M. Right after that was the firm name, which was usually quite large, with the word “To” on the left and the abbreviation for debtor, “Dr.”, on the right. That's how the apprentice boy was taught, and he would then be instructed to center the words “Dealers in” (or something similar) in smaller type, followed by the description of the goods offered. In a small line at the bottom right corner was the street address, and aligned opposite that were the significant words “Terms Cash.”

120Sometimes the words “Bought of” were substituted for “To” and “Dr.” The older printers will remember the logotypes in various fancy designs of the phrase “Bought of” that the typefounders furnished in those days, which logotypes were set against type lines of double great primer caps. Now “Bought of” has been supplanted on billheads by “Sold to,” which directs attention to the fact that John Smith has sold goods to Thomas Brown, rather than that Thomas Brown has bought goods of John Smith—a distinction without a difference, one might say, yet there is interest in noting the change.

120Sometimes the words “Bought of” were replaced by “To” and “Dr.” The older printers will remember the decorative designs of the phrase “Bought of” that the typefounders provided back then, which were displayed alongside double great primer capital letters. Now “Bought of” has been replaced on invoices by “Sold to,” which highlights that John Smith has sold goods to Thomas Brown, rather than that Thomas Brown has bought goods from John Smith—a distinction that seems trivial, yet it’s interesting to note the change.

EXAMPLE 314

A billhead, or statement, in a classic non-display style of typography that suggests early printing. By D. B. Updike

EXAMPLE 314

A billhead or statement, featuring a traditional non-display typography style that evokes the feel of early printing. By D. B. Updike

The probable reason for the “M” being discarded in recent years on commercial billheads is that many business houses are now corporations, which fact makes “Mr.” and “Messrs.” no longer suitable as forms of address.

The likely reason for the “M” being dropped in recent years on commercial letterheads is that many businesses are now corporations, which means “Mr.” and “Messrs.” are no longer appropriate forms of address.

EXAMPLE 316

A suitable billhead with interesting border treatment. No guide lines have been used

EXAMPLE 316

An attractive letterhead with a creative border design. No guidelines have been applied.

Example 310.—This specimen presents the main features of the average commercial invoice, or billhead. Usually there are conditions of sale which can be placed at the top of the heading with a rule underneath, altho they are sometimes arranged at the side or at the foot of the invoice. The name of the company is given most prominence, followed by mention of the commodity or product. The number, street and city naturally should be displayed so that the customer’s location can be referred to quickly in correspondence. “Sold to” precedes the space left blank for the customer’s name, and this, as has been explained, should be in the lower left corner. Blanks for the date, terms, invoice number, ledger number, customer’s order number and other notations of record may be grouped in convenient open spaces.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This example shows the key elements of a typical commercial invoice or billhead. Often, the terms of sale are placed at the top with a line underneath, although they can sometimes be arranged on the side or at the bottom of the invoice. The company's name is the most prominent feature, followed by the product or service being sold. The address, including the number, street, and city, should be clearly displayed so the customer's location can be quickly referenced in communications. “Sold to” appears before a blank space for the customer’s name, which, as mentioned earlier, should be positioned in the lower left corner. Blanks for the date, terms, invoice number, ledger number, customer order number, and other record notations can be grouped in convenient open areas.

Example 311.—The composition of a billhead really begins with the composition of a letterhead. It should be possible to take any letterhead and by adding a few lines convert it into a billhead. The specimen under consideration shows how this is done. The original of this billhead was exhibited as Example 283 in the preceding chapter. The conventional phrase “Sold to” is placed in its customary position and the other phrases added at suitable spots. Printers should keep this suggestion in mind and, when laying out a billhead, design the upper part as they would a letterhead.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Creating a billhead really starts with designing a letterhead. You should be able to take any letterhead and, by adding a few lines, transform it into a billhead. The example we’re looking at shows how this is done. The original of this billhead was shown as Example 283 in the previous chapter. The common phrase “Sold to” is placed in its usual spot, and the other phrases are added in appropriate locations. Printers should keep this advice in mind and, when setting up a billhead, design the top part as they would a letterhead.

EXAMPLE 315

Typographic art and good taste, as demonstrated by this specimen, have a place on billheads as well as on books

EXAMPLE 315

Typographic art and good taste, as shown by this example, belong on invoices just as much as they do in books.

Example 312 (Insert).—This is an interesting representative of the non-stock-ruled heading, and it also illustrates the changes the typewriter has wrought in billhead printing. When bills were written in by hand, script type and dotted rule prevailed, but because of the use of typewriters, script and horizontal guide lines are gradually disappearing from the face of billheads. The example under consideration also demonstrates the effectiveness of Caslon lower-case for billhead purposes. When every line is in roman lower-case there is harmony, but sometimes there is also monotony. In this instance, however, the introduction of italic and small caps would alter the plan of the heading and detract from its distinction. The rule border and the panel for the insertion of customer’s name and address give distinction.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—This is an interesting example of a non-stock-ruled heading, and it shows the changes that the typewriter has caused in billhead printing. When bills were written by hand, script type and dotted rules were common, but thanks to typewriters, script and horizontal guide lines are slowly fading from billheads. The example we're looking at also highlights the effectiveness of Caslon lower-case for billhead purposes. When every line is in roman lower-case, it creates harmony, but it can sometimes also feel monotonous. In this case, however, adding italics and small caps would disrupt the design of the heading and take away from its uniqueness. The rule border and the space for the customer’s name and address add distinction.

121Example 313 (Insert).—There is here another demonstration of the transformation of a letterhead into a billhead. Remove the words “Sold to” and the ruling at the foot and the form is ready for the letter sheet. Kennerley type, altho primarily a book face, is also usable on stationery where neat, distinctive effects are desired. Capitals are spaced (as in the old books of Aldus), and italic is used with the capital lines, this use of italic also being suggested by the work of the Aldine Press. However, the specimen is not intended to be in the classic spirit of Aldus; it is merely a modern commercial suggestion.

121Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—Here’s another example of how to change a letterhead into a billhead. Just remove the words “Sold to” and the line at the bottom, and the form is ready for the letter sheet. Kennerley type, although primarily designed for books, can also work well on stationery where a clean, unique look is desired. The capitals are spaced (similar to the old books of Aldus), and italics are used with the capital lines, reflecting the style of the Aldine Press. However, this example isn’t meant to capture the classic essence of Aldus; it’s just a modern commercial idea.

Example 314.—Here is a billhead, or statement, in classic typography that suggests the style of the fifteenth century. The heading is practically in one size of type. Advertising distinction is obtained by using capitals for the name, capitals and small capitals for the business name and address, and italic for “In account with.” There is not much that is striking about this billhead, yet, printed on a fine quality of writing paper, it would make one really glad to receive a bill of this kind.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Here’s a billhead or statement, designed in a classic style reminiscent of the fifteenth century. The heading is nearly all in one font size. The unique touch comes from using all caps for the name, a mix of all caps and small caps for the business name and address, and italic for “In account with.” While there isn’t anything particularly eye-catching about this billhead, if it were printed on high-quality writing paper, it would definitely be a pleasure to receive a bill like this.

EXAMPLE 318

Invoice with lower portion divided into columns, as sometimes used in business

EXAMPLE 318

Invoice with the bottom section divided into columns, as is sometimes used in business

Example 315.—D. B. Updike makes plain by this specimen, as well as by the preceding one, that typographic art and good taste can be used in the designing of a billhead as well as in the designing of a book. The woodcut device has the same good quality as the typography. The old-fashioned “M” and “Dr.” are used, and blend well with the old dignity of the heading. The ruling on the lower part of both of these headings was printed from rules. There are other good printers who prefer brass rule to the ruling machine for billhead purposes. Machine ruling is convenient, but is not in good taste for billheads, statements and letterheads of really fine quality.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—D. B. Updike clearly demonstrates with this example, as well as the previous one, that typography and good taste can be applied to the design of a billhead just as effectively as they can in book design. The woodcut design matches the quality of the typography. The old-fashioned “M” and “Dr.” are used and harmonize well with the classic dignity of the heading. The lines in the lower part of both headings were printed using rules. Some other skilled printers prefer brass rules over machine ruling for billheads. While machine ruling is convenient, it doesn't suit the refined taste needed for high-quality billheads, statements, and letterheads.

Example 316.—The stationery of a book dealer should have a bookish character—that is, the typography should be inspired by the same skill and taste evinced in the treatment of a good book. A well-designed type-face should be selected, and there should not be a great contrast in the sizes used. When it is possible to have two printings, the extra impression could take the form of a simple rule border in color, as on this specimen. The first type line runs almost from border to border at the head, and another portion of the copy is arranged directly under it in three even lines. The “Sold to” occupies its approved position. No guide lines are provided for the accountant’s part of the bill, as with a typewriter the various items can better be filled in without them, and a billhead really looks neater without the rules.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The stationery of a book dealer should have a literary style—that is, the typography should reflect the same skill and taste shown in a well-crafted book. A well-chosen typeface should be used, and the sizes shouldn’t differ too much. If two printings are possible, the extra impression could feature a simple colored rule border, like in this example. The first line of text stretches almost from edge to edge at the top, and another part of the text is arranged directly beneath it in three equal lines. The “Sold to” is in its usual spot. No guide lines are provided for the accountant’s section of the bill since various items can be filled in more neatly without them with a typewriter, and a billhead looks tidier without the rules.

Example 317.—For printing on colored stock strong treatment is sometimes advisable—treatment such as has been given this heading. On white paper the type sizes should be kept small, as the light background illuminates the print. White and black form the greatest contrast. There is not much contrast between blue ink and blue paper, for instance, and it is necessary to strengthen the print by the use of a larger or bolder type-face. The arrangement shown is unconventional. A full line has been made of the business title, the name itself being slightly emphasized by printing it in color and giving an initial effect to the first letter. Other parts of the copy are grouped at suitable points, “Sold to” occupying the usual lower left corner.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—When printing on colored paper, a strong treatment is sometimes recommended—like the one used for this heading. On white paper, type sizes should be kept small since the light background enhances the print. White and black create the highest contrast. There isn’t much contrast between blue ink and blue paper, for example, so it’s necessary to make the print stronger by using a larger or bolder typeface. The layout shown is unconventional. A full line has been created for the business title, with the name itself slightly emphasized by printing it in color and giving a standout effect to the first letter. Other parts of the text are grouped at appropriate points, with “Sold to” typically placed in the lower left corner.

EXAMPLE 317

Large treatment that would look well in harmonious colors on colored paper

EXAMPLE 317

A large design that would look great in matching colors on colored paper

EXAMPLE 319

Decorative type treatment suitable for the business of painting and decorating

EXAMPLE 319

Decorative type treatment appropriate for the painting and decorating industry

122Example 318.—Many invoices and billheads now have the lower part divided into columns for taking care of the various items peculiar to the business, as in this instance. The customer usually decides when he wishes to depart from the conventional ruled effect, and it is just as well for the printer not to suggest a change of this sort, as it means extra composition for which the customer may be disinclined to pay. The type-face on this well-arranged example is a good one for plain commercial headings. It would be well, for convenience, to place the “M” in the lower left corner and move the building address to the right corner, over the street address.

122Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Many invoices and bill headers now have the bottom part divided into columns to handle the different items specific to the business, as seen here. The customer usually decides when they want to stray from the standard lined layout, and it's better for the printer not to propose such changes, as it results in extra work that the customer might not want to pay for. The typeface in this well-organized example is suitable for simple commercial headings. For convenience, it would be a good idea to place the “M” in the lower left corner and move the building address to the right corner, above the street address.

Example 319.—A decorator’s stationery seems to offer opportunity for effects away from the customary plain treatment of the average heading. This statement, in the same style as a letterhead that accompanied it, shows a decorative type-face and an arrangement that could possibly be called decorative. The upper two type groups are joined by the uncial initial, and the two groups at the left are connected by the flower ornament.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A decorator’s stationery seems to provide a chance for effects that stray from the usual simple style of an average heading. This statement, in the same style as the letterhead it came with, features a decorative typeface and a layout that might be considered decorative. The top two groups of text are linked by the uncial initial, and the two groups on the left are connected by a flower ornament.

EXAMPLE 320

An uncommon arrangement. The main type line tells the story, as the company’s title describes the business

EXAMPLE 320

A unique setup. The primary text conveys the message, while the company’s name defines the business.

EXAMPLE 321

Credit bill made from the preceding billhead by adding a line at the head and changing “Sold to” to “Credit”

EXAMPLE 321

Credit bill created from the previous billhead by adding a line at the top and changing “Sold to” to “Credit”

Example 320.—This is an unusual arrangement for a billhead. As the business is stated in the firm name, there is not the usual necessity for a second display line. While this arrangement could be carried out in some other type-face, the serifless “block” letter as here used is not displeasing. The grouping of the branch houses is good, and other groups are also well placed.

Understood, please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This is an uncommon layout for a billhead. Since the business is included in the firm name, there’s no need for an additional display line. While this layout could work in a different typeface, the sans-serif “block” letter used here is appealing. The organization of the branch locations is effective, and the arrangement of other groups is also well done.

Example 321.—Most business houses find need for credit bills, to be used when goods are returned or some error has been made in billing. Such forms are easily provided by using the billhead, adding the words “Credit Memorandum” at the head and changing “Sold to” to “Credit.” In order that credit bills may look unlike regular bills, they should be printed in color as is here shown.

Understood. Please provide the text you want me to modernize.—Most businesses need credit memos to handle returns or billing errors. These forms are simple to create by taking the billhead, adding the words “Credit Memorandum” at the top, and changing “Sold to” to “Credit.” To make sure credit memos look different from regular bills, they should be printed in color, as shown here.

Example 322.—All professional stationery should be refined. The sizes of paper and type should be small and the whole effect restrained and polite. Such work seldom changes in style, and consequently there is little variety. The form shown here would probably prove acceptable for many years to men of the medical and similar professions.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—All professional stationery should be elegant. The sizes of paper and text should be modest, creating a polished and respectful overall look. This kind of design rarely changes in style, which results in limited variety. The format displayed here would likely be suitable for many years for professionals in the medical field and similar areas.

It may not be out of place to remind the reader that an invoice (or bill) is a list sent to a purchaser or consignee, containing the items and charges of merchandise that have been forwarded to him.

It might be helpful to remind the reader that an invoice (or bill) is a document sent to a buyer or consignee, listing the items and charges for the goods that have been delivered to them.

As to the statement: It is a common practice to send each customer at the first of the month a statement showing the debit balance of his account to date, whether it is due or not, enabling him to compare the statement with the ledger account. In order to call the attention of customers to the fact that payment is desired, many business houses send a statement whenever a bill is due (when goods are purchased on January 10, as an instance, at ten days, a statement is sent January 20).

As for the statement: It's standard practice to send each customer a statement at the beginning of the month showing the current debit balance of their account, regardless of whether it's due or not, so they can compare it with their ledger account. To remind customers that payment is expected, many businesses send a statement whenever a bill is due (for example, if goods are purchased on January 10, a statement is sent on January 20, after ten days).

There are numerous other forms used in business, such as checks, deposit slips, drafts, promissory notes, bills of lading and the like, but there is not space to show them here.

There are many other types used in business, like checks, deposit slips, drafts, promissory notes, bills of lading, and similar documents, but there isn’t enough space to display them here.

Such forms, if possible, should be in harmony with the style of the letterheads, billheads and other stationery. The same type-face should be used and the arrangement of display parts should have similarity.

Such forms, if feasible, should match the style of the letterheads, billheads, and other stationery. The same font should be used, and the layout of the display elements should be similar.

EXAMPLE 322

On professional bills the paper and type should be small and the treatment restrained and polite

EXAMPLE 322

On professional invoices, the paper and font should be small, and the tone should be formal and courteous.

EXAMPLE 323

A label that catches the attention at a distance and looks well on the background of wrapping paper

EXAMPLE 323

A label that grabs attention from afar and looks great against the wrapping paper background.

EXAMPLE 324

A label of classic simplicity for small packages and a business that emphasizes daintiness and delicacy

EXAMPLE 324

A label of timeless simplicity for small packages and a business that highlights elegance and delicacy

123

PACKAGE LABELS

The effect of an attractive package is recognized to be of such importance that a widely known manufacturing concern recently sued a competitor for imitating the appearance of its packages and labels. However, not all business men feel this way about it.

The impact of an appealing package is acknowledged to be so significant that a well-known manufacturing company recently took legal action against a competitor for copying the look of its packages and labels. However, not all business people share this opinion.

After spending time and money in the production of merchandise of high quality, it is more than foolish to economize on the packing.

After spending time and money to produce high-quality merchandise, it’s not just foolish to cut corners on the packing.

It is possible, with good clothes well selected, to make an unattractive person attractive, and it is also possible to make an attractive person unattractive by poor clothes ill selected. Apply this.

It is possible, with well-chosen clothes, to make an unattractive person attractive, and it is also possible to make an attractive person unattractive with poorly chosen clothes. Apply this.

The wrapping paper should be strong, and of color and finish suited to the article to be wrapped. Some stylish city dry-goods houses use paper with distinctive stripes or small monograms printed over its surface. A well-known haberdasher wraps his hats in soft black paper.

The wrapping paper should be durable and in a color and finish that match the item being wrapped. Some trendy urban shops use paper with unique stripes or small logos printed on it. A famous hat store wraps its hats in soft black paper.

The selection of the wrapping stock should of course be governed by the character of the business and the class of customers, but as in similar instances, it is dangerous to underestimate the taste of one’s customers. The persons who lack appreciation of a neatly wrapped and attractive package are very few indeed.

The choice of wrapping paper should be guided by the nature of the business and the type of customers, but like in similar situations, it's risky to underestimate what customers like. There are very few people who don't appreciate a well-wrapped and attractive package.

Among merchants, druggists are known to wrap the neatest packages. This seems to be due in part to their professional training. Not many printers give their product a similar attractiveness at the time of delivery.

Among merchants, druggists are known to wrap the most neatly packaged products. This appears to be partly due to their professional training. Not many printers make their product look as appealing at the time of delivery.

EXAMPLE 325

A hand-lettered design for typographic study

EXAMPLE 325

A hand-drawn design for typography analysis

EXAMPLE 326

Another label rich in suggestion

EXAMPLE 326

Another label full of meaning

The art of making a good impression also includes the fastening of the wrapper. Cord and twine are commonly used, and interest is sometimes added by selecting appropriate colors. Linen tape for a business of an exclusive nature gives distinction.

The art of making a good impression also includes tying up the gift. Cord and twine are commonly used, and sometimes people add interest by choosing the right colors. Linen tape for a high-end business adds a touch of elegance.

Gummed-paper tape, while convenient, seldom looks well, and when printed on looks worse.

Gummed-paper tape, though handy, rarely looks good, and it looks even worse when printed on.

Corrugated board when properly used adds both neatness and protection to the package. Some printers have cartons made from this board, in which their product is packed and delivered.

Corrugated board, when used correctly, enhances both the neatness and protection of the package. Some printers utilize cartons made from this board to pack and deliver their products.

The printed label is of the most interest, as it affords a spot of attraction and furnishes information needed in the delivery of packages. All labels should be planned with the wrapping paper as a background. A label may look well alone, yet when placed on the package may appear weak and uninteresting.

The printed label is the most important part because it grabs attention and provides the information needed for delivering packages. All labels should be designed to work with the wrapping paper as a background. A label might look good on its own, but when put on the package, it may seem weak and uninteresting.

In order to test this, two labels of contrasting treatment are pictured mounted on a sheet of conventional wrapping paper.

In order to test this, two labels with different treatments are shown attached to a sheet of regular wrapping paper.

It will be admitted that the stronger label is more striking and catches the attention. There are those who will prefer the weaker label because of its neatness and beauty, yet we must not lose sight of the fact that labels, unlike business cards and letterheads, are not usually seen at close range when on packages. A business card is examined a few inches from the eyes, while a label on a package is frequently viewed from a point several feet away.

It’s true that the bolder label is more eye-catching and grabs attention. Some people might favor the subtler label because of its neatness and beauty, but we shouldn’t forget that labels, unlike business cards and letterheads, aren’t typically viewed up close when they’re on packages. A business card is looked at just a few inches away, while a label on a package is often seen from several feet away.

124

EXAMPLE 327

Ruled lines for the address, in panel

EXAMPLE 327

Guided lines for the address, in panel

EXAMPLE 328

A mass of black lettering with contrasts

EXAMPLE 328

A large amount of black text with contrasting elements

EXAMPLE 329

Artistic quality and interest through typography

EXAMPLE 329

Artistic quality and interest through typography

There does not seem to be any standard size for labels. They vary from four, five and six inches wide to three, four and five inches high. When The American Printer conducted a label competition it specified the size as five by four inches, and this seems to be a good average size.

There doesn't seem to be a standard size for labels. They range from four, five, and six inches wide to three, four, and five inches tall. When The American Printer held a label competition, it set the size at five by four inches, which seems to be a decent average size.

The paper on which the label is printed should be stock that pastes easily. White is used to the greatest extent, altho a cream-tinted color such as comes in Japan vellum is preferred by some persons of good taste.

The paper that the label is printed on should be easy to paste. White is used the most, although some people with good taste prefer a cream-tinted color like what’s found in Japan vellum.

Example 323 (Insert).—As has been said, this label shows the effectiveness of heavy effects. A design such as this has advertising value. It can be seen and read at some distance, yet is not offensive in appearance. The red border is attractive, and merges the label with the wrapping background. The type-face has decorative quality. The combination of black, red and cream in strong contrasts is worthy of study. As will be noticed, all capitals have been used, and there is not much space between the lines or between border and type-face.

Sure, please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—As mentioned, this label demonstrates the impact of strong visuals. A design like this has marketing potential. It’s visible and readable from a distance, yet it looks appealing. The red border is eye-catching and blends well with the wrapping background. The font has a decorative touch. The mix of black, red, and cream in bold contrasts is worth analyzing. As you can see, all letters are in uppercase, and there isn’t much space between the lines or between the border and the text.

Example 324 (Insert).—For small packages and for a business that places emphasis on daintiness this label treatment would be just the thing. The classic simplicity of its design and the mere touch of color should appeal to many. The main line is set in fourteen-point capitals and the other three lines in twelve-point small capitals. Letterspacing adds decorative interest and merges the letters with the background by allowing the paper to show thru. The type-face is Goudy Oldstyle. The dots between the words are hyphens slightly cut. The border is arranged to suggest an architectural panel. This label and the preceding one have been composed merely to suggest possible effects. It would not be difficult to adapt most label copy to the styles shown.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. (Insert).—For small packages and a business that focuses on elegance, this label design would be perfect. Its classic simplicity and subtle pop of color should attract many. The main text is in fourteen-point capitals, while the other three lines are in twelve-point small capitals. The letterspacing adds a decorative touch and allows the background paper to show through. The typeface is Goudy Oldstyle. The dots between the words are slightly cut hyphens. The border is designed to resemble an architectural panel. This label and the previous one are purely examples to inspire possible designs. It would be easy to adapt most label text to the styles shown.

Example 325.—This and other hand-lettered labels included in this chapter are presented as studies for the typographer. Hand-lettered designs by good artists are usually arranged with much thought, and the details give many ideas to those who have trained themselves to grasp them. It will be noticed that the border of this label is composed of three lines, a heavy and light line close together and a light line a trifle removed. At the head are two lines of roman capitals and one of italic. Do not overlook the smaller capitals “M” and “O,” and the close spacing of the words in italic. The device is small and in color. The use of roman lower-case, capitals and small capitals and italic in the lower group should be examined carefully. While it is not possible to obtain exactly these same results with type, they can be approximated effectually. It is well, however, to emphasize at this point that in approximating the effects of any good piece of lettering it makes a difference what type-face is used. It will be noticed that the italic capitals in this specimen have a decorative quality. Such an effect can be imitated in a small way by the use of the swash letters that are furnished with some old-style italics.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This and other hand-lettered labels featured in this chapter serve as examples for typographers. Good artists carefully arrange hand-lettered designs, and the details offer many insights to those who have trained themselves to notice them. You'll see that the border of this label consists of three lines: a heavy and a light line close together, with a lighter line slightly apart. At the top, there are two lines of Roman capitals and one line of italics. Don't overlook the smaller capitals “M” and “O,” as well as the tight spacing of the italic words. The graphic is small and in color. The use of Roman lower-case, capitals, small capitals, and italics in the lower group should be examined closely. While it’s not possible to achieve the exact same effects with type, they can be effectively approximated. However, it’s important to note that the typeface used makes a significant difference when trying to mimic any good piece of lettering. You’ll notice that the italic capitals in this example have a decorative quality. This effect can be somewhat imitated by using swash letters available with certain old-style italics.

Example 326.—This is another lettered design that is rich in suggestion. No border is used, and the lettering is arranged close to the 125edges of the paper. Contrary to the treatment of the preceding example, the lettering is all slightly spaced. While it is well for the young compositor not to letterspace lower-case, such practice is allowable when the results are good. The effect here is one of antiquity, especially since the letters are not perfectly formed (note the “m” in the word “Amsden”). Caslon Oldstyle should be used in planning this style of work. An unusual feature is that a part of the copy is placed at the foot of the label so that the address is written between two groups of lettering. The same plan is found in the preceding example.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is another lettered design that is full of suggestion. There’s no border used, and the lettering is arranged close to the 125edges of the paper. Unlike the previous example, the lettering is all slightly spaced. While it’s generally not ideal for new typesetters to letterspace lower-case letters, it’s acceptable when the outcome looks good. The effect here feels a bit old-fashioned, especially since the letters aren’t perfectly shaped (check out the “m” in the word “Amsden”). Caslon Oldstyle should be used when planning this style of work. An interesting feature is that part of the text is placed at the bottom of the label so that the address is written between two groups of lettering. The same approach is seen in the previous example.

Example 327.—There is suggestion of Italian art in this label. Similar effects could be closely approximated with typefounders’ material. Attention is called to the manner in which the letters are treated so as to avoid an excess of blank space in such groups as the “ATA” in “catalogue.” Rule guide lines in a panel are provided for the address. This space is usually left blank on modern labels, altho conservative houses are inclined to retain the rules. In line with old ideas, the “M” is included in the address portion. This letter is usually omitted on labels for the same reason that it is left off of billheads.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—This label suggests Italian art. Similar effects could be easily achieved with typefounders’ materials. Note how the letters are arranged to minimize empty space in groups like “ATA” in “catalogue.” Guideline rules in a panel are included for the address. This area is usually left blank on modern labels, although traditional companies tend to keep the rules. Following old conventions, the “M” is included in the address section. This letter is typically left out on labels for the same reason it's omitted from billheads.

Example 328.—Closely spaced black-toned lettering is still liked by some persons, and there is no use denying that when it is well rendered the effect is pleasing. This example presents a mass of black lettering in three lines of equal length, the lines merging with one another to preserve the mass effect. The border, formed of a heavy and a lighter line, is drawn with human irregularity that is in keeping with the character of the design as a whole. The “For” in italic affords contrast in both form and color. Also note the treatment of “St.,” which is made small and placed in a position above the base of the other letters. This treatment is typical of antique typography.

Understood! Please provide the text that needs modernizing.—Some people still prefer closely spaced black lettering, and it’s undeniable that when done well, it looks great. This example shows a block of black letters in three lines of equal length, merging together to create a collective effect. The border, made up of a thick and a thin line, has a bit of a handmade feel that matches the overall style of the design. The italicized “For” provides contrast in both shape and color. Also, pay attention to the way “St.” is smaller and positioned above the bottom of the other letters. This style is typical of vintage typography.

Example 329.—That artistic quality and interest may be put in a label form by means of typography is proved by this example. The lacelike border, the spaced Kennerley types and the words and rule in red blend attractively. Advertising value is present, yet it is so merged with the general composition and the label that it is not offensive. In fact, it adds decorative qualities. This label form would look well clearly printed on a rough-finished paper of good quality—a hand-made paper if possible.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This example shows how artistic quality and interest can be captured in a label through typography. The lace-like border, the spaced Kennerley types, and the red words and rule come together nicely. While it has advertising value, it blends so well with the overall design and the label that it doesn’t feel intrusive. In fact, it enhances the decorative appeal. This label would look great printed clearly on high-quality rough-finished paper—handmade if possible.

Example 330.—Another typographic label of character, a study in black and white. The border (a combination of a heavy and a light rule) was made intensely black to contrast with the white background, an effect as of color. A type-face (Bodoni Bold) with similar strong contrasts was then selected, arranged with liberal margins in the upper part. A suitable ornament in dark tones added the picture element, and the words “Deliver to” were widely letterspaced, as they were used decoratively. This and the other typographic specimens indicate the possibilities that are present in the everyday tools of the printer and the material that is available. Many printers feel that they are not able to produce typographic work of real quality, assuming that special equipment is needed. The truth is that many are not able to produce good printing because their type equipment and decorative material have not been well selected. The fact that there is a lack of suitable type-faces usually reveals itself to them after they have learned that one type-face is not so good as another. In the finished work there is nothing seen of the presses, of the imposing stones, or of the composing frames, but the print of the type-face is on every sheet.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Another typographic label of character, exploring black and white. The border (a mix of bold and light lines) was made really dark to stand out against the white background, creating a color-like effect. A typeface (Bodoni Bold) with similar strong contrasts was chosen, placed with generous margins at the top. A fitting ornament in dark shades added a visual element, and the words “Deliver to” were spaced out widely for decorative purposes. This and other typographic samples show the possibilities available with everyday printing tools and materials. Many printers believe they can't create quality typographic work, thinking they need special equipment. The reality is that many struggle to produce good prints because their type equipment and decorative materials haven’t been carefully selected. Often, the lack of suitable typefaces becomes clear to them once they realize that one typeface isn’t better than another. In the final result, there's no indication of the presses, the composing stones, or the typesetting frames, but the impression of the typeface appears on every sheet.

EXAMPLE 330

A typographic study in black and white

EXAMPLE 330

A typography study in black and white

EXAMPLE 331

A Caslon specimen, with decorative interest

EXAMPLE 331

A Caslon sample, with decorative appeal

EXAMPLE 332

Harmony of border, decorative device and lettering

EXAMPLE 332

Balance of border, decorative element, and text

126

EXAMPLE 333

Possible of typographic improvement

Example 333

Potential for typography enhancement

EXAMPLE 334

Freedom of treatment that is distinctive

Unique treatment freedom

EXAMPLE 335

Label used for a special list

EXAMPLE 335

Tag used for a unique list

Example 331.—A specimen in Caslon, in which roman capitals and italic lower-case (the Aldine combination) make up an interesting label. The swash italic capitals add a specific decorative quality. The large lower-case “f” gives a graceful touch to the “for.” Dotted rule inside the black border is a change from the conventional continuous line. This form was printed on Japan vellum.

Got it! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A sample in Caslon, where Roman uppercase letters and italic lowercase letters (the Aldine combination) create an interesting label. The swash italic uppercase letters add a unique decorative touch. The large lowercase “f” gives an elegant flair to the “for.” The dotted line inside the black border is a departure from the usual solid line. This version was printed on Japan vellum.

Example 332.—This is another hand-drawn label with qualities that can be approximated in typography. Border, decorative device and lettering are in the same key, and the harmony is agreeable. There are those who thoughtlessly condemn black borders as funereal, a judgment that is based on prejudice and not on an understanding of their use. It is well, however, to caution the young compositor against abuse of the black border; it would be well if he were to use no black borders until he had developed taste in the practice of typography.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is another hand-drawn label with qualities that can be mimicked in typography. The border, decorative elements, and lettering all match, creating a pleasing harmony. Some people mindlessly dismiss black borders as mournful, a judgment rooted in bias rather than a true understanding of their purpose. Still, it's wise to advise young typesetters to be cautious with black borders; it might be better for them not to use any black borders until they've developed a good sense of taste in typography.

Example 333.—An unusual label design that could probably be improved with careful typography. The initials of the text lettering are not exactly harmonious, and the space between words in the lower group is excessive. Printers should practice on the improvement of the design.

Understood! Please provide the text to be modernized.—This label design is pretty unusual and could definitely benefit from better typography. The initials of the text don’t look very cohesive, and there’s too much space between the words in the lower section. Printers should work on enhancing the design.

Example 334.—A characteristic Goudy type arrangement, with a freedom of treatment that is distinctive. How many printers would give the prominence to “From” that it has here? This suggests the custom of printers of the sixteenth century in starting a title-page with a large size of type regardless of the importance of the word or words.

Understood. Please provide the text to modernize.—A classic Goudy type layout, featuring a relaxed style that stands out. How many printers today would highlight "From" as prominently as it is shown here? This reflects the practice of sixteenth-century printers who would begin a title page with a large type size, no matter the significance of the word or words.

Example 335.—This label was used in mailing to a special list some fine pieces of printing. The name of each addressee was printed in with type as shown by the reproduction, and, needless to state, attracted attention. The treatment of this label is uncommon in another respect—the modest inconspicuousness of the phrase, “From the Bartlett-Orr Press, New York.”

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This label was used when sending a curated selection of high-quality printed materials to a special list. Each recipient's name was printed in with the type as demonstrated in the reproduction, which, of course, caught people's attention. The approach to this label is unique in another way—the subtlety of the phrase, “From the Bartlett-Orr Press, New York.”

It would do no harm if printers also studied the stock labels manufactured by certain stationery houses. They will find much that is poor and commonplace and little that should be directly copied, but there are many suggestions in label making that could be adapted. The “reverse-plate” idea is one. The label is set in type and a proof sent to the photo-engraver, who makes a plate in which the letters show white and the background black. This plate can then be printed in color on gummed paper and the paper trimmed so as to “bleed” the edges of the printed background.

It wouldn't hurt for printers to take a look at the stock labels produced by some stationery companies. They'll discover a lot that is mediocre and ordinary, with not much that's worth directly copying, but there are several ideas in label design that they could adapt. One of these is the “reverse-plate” concept. The label is created in type and a proof is sent to the photo-engraver, who makes a plate where the letters appear white against a black background. This plate can then be printed in color on adhesive paper, and the paper can be trimmed to have the printed background “bleed” at the edges.

EXAMPLE 338

Forceful business-card treatment exemplified by band-lettering

EXAMPLE 338

Strong business card design shown through creative lettering

EXAMPLE 339

Gray-brown stock is suitable for unconventional effects of this kind

EXAMPLE 339

Gray-brown stock is great for unique effects like this.

EXAMPLE 340

The black monogram has much to do with this card’s attractiveness

EXAMPLE 340

The black monogram significantly contributes to the appeal of this card.

127

BUSINESS CARDS

Polite society requires that a visitor shall be announced by a card bearing his or her name, and the courtesies of business call for this same formality. The man called on unexpectedly is placed at a disadvantage if he has not understood the visitor’s name and has no idea of his business. A card that clearly tells both name and business prevents embarrassment and misunderstanding.

Polite society expects that a visitor should be announced with a card that has their name on it, and business etiquette requires the same formality. If a man is visited unexpectedly, he is at a disadvantage if he doesn't know the visitor's name and is unaware of their business. A card that clearly states both the name and the purpose of the visit helps avoid embarrassment and misunderstanding.

The card makes it unnecessary for the caller to explain who he is. Without the printed information he would likely need to introduce himself thus: “I am James Johnson. I am president of the Johnson Manufacturing Company. We manufacture machinery for the making of paints. Our office is at 320 Broadway. Our telephone number is Worth 4653.” But with all this neatly printed or engraved on a card, dignity is maintained and embarrassment avoided.

The card eliminates the need for the caller to explain their identity. Without the printed information, they would probably have to introduce themselves like this: “I’m James Johnson. I’m the president of the Johnson Manufacturing Company. We produce machinery for making paints. Our office is at 320 Broadway. Our phone number is Worth 4653.” But with all this neatly printed or engraved on a card, dignity is preserved, and awkwardness is avoided.

The sizes of business cards are far from being standardized. Examination of about one hundred business cards showed a range of sizes from 3 × 1½ to 4 × 2½ inches. The size of which there were most and which gave an indication of standardization was 3½ × 2 inches. Fully one-quarter of the cards were of that size. From this investigation it would seem logical for printers to use that size unless the customer orders otherwise.

The sizes of business cards are not standardized at all. An analysis of around one hundred business cards revealed sizes ranging from 3 × 1½ to 4 × 2½ inches. The most common size, which suggests a possible standard, was 3½ × 2 inches. In fact, a quarter of the cards were that size. Based on this study, it makes sense for printers to use this size unless the customer specifies something different.

White cards predominated in the lot examined, and this suggests that it is in good taste for the printer to use white stock on most of the business cards that he is called on to print.

White cards were the majority in the lot examined, which suggests that it’s considered good taste for printers to use white stock for most of the business cards they are asked to print.

EXAMPLE 336

The probable result of an attempt to standardize the contents and arrangement of a business card

EXAMPLE 336

The likely outcome of trying to standardize the content and layout of a business card

EXAMPLE 337

Dignified treatment for the card of a well-known house. The firm name and address are subordinated to the name of the person using the card. No business is mentioned, an omission open to discussion

EXAMPLE 337

Respectful presentation for the card of a prominent company. The business name and address take a backseat to the individual's name on the card. There's no mention of business, which could be a topic for debate.

Example 336.—If an effort were made to standardize the contents and arrangement of a business card, the plan presented by this example would probably result. The customer’s name is placed at the point of greatest prominence, a trifle above the center of the card. The words describing the business are second in position under the customer’s name. The street and number are taken care of on the next line, and under the street and number is the name of city or town. In the lower left corner is provision for the representative’s name. The telephone number, for which a business card is frequently preserved, finds place in the upper part of the card. A variant for the position of the street and number and the name of the city or town is in the lower right corner.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—If we tried to standardize the layout and content of a business card, the design shown in this example would likely be the result. The customer's name is positioned prominently, just a bit above the center of the card. The description of the business follows right beneath the customer's name. The street address and number are on the next line, with the city or town name below that. In the lower left corner, there’s space for the representative's name. The phone number, which is often included on business cards, is located at the top part of the card. An alternative layout places the street address and city or town name in the lower right corner.

Example 337.—Here is a card that is a model of dignity and of simple business-card treatment. A good word can be said in favor of using the individual’s name in the center of the card and the firm name in a less prominent position. When a card is handed to a business man, he looks at it first for the purpose of finding out who it is that wishes to see him. A card of this kind tells him instantly. In many cases the individual’s name alone would be sufficient. No business is mentioned, as it is one of those cases in which it is assumed that the name of the firm provides sufficient identity. In omitting mention of the business, one should make sure that the firm is as well known as he assumes it is. If the name is not familiar to the person receiving it, he will be perplexed, not knowing if the visitor desires to sell him books, insure his life, or buy a bill of goods. In the typographic treatment of this card Cloister Oldstyle, capitals, has been used for the smaller line and Cloister Bold, capitals, for the larger line. This slight contrast in the strength of lettering in many instances gives quality and legibility to steel-engraved and lithographed business cards and stationery. The printer by having a well-designed type-face in two strengths will be able to introduce similar good qualities in his work. The spacing between words on this card is closer than that usually allowed by compositors. Close spacing between words is a quality found in good lettering and in good typography.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Here’s a card that exemplifies dignity and a straightforward business-card style. It’s a good idea to feature the individual’s name prominently in the center of the card, with the company name in a less noticeable spot. When a business card is given to someone, the first thing they do is look at it to find out who wants to meet them. This type of card communicates that immediately. In many situations, just the person's name would be enough. No business is mentioned because it assumes the company name provides enough identification. However, if you leave out the business name, you should ensure that the firm is well-known as you think it is. If the recipient isn't familiar with the name, they might feel confused, unsure if the visitor wants to sell them books, offer life insurance, or sell them goods. For this card’s typography, Cloister Oldstyle in capitals was used for the smaller line and Cloister Bold in capitals for the larger line. This subtle contrast in the strength of the lettering enhances the quality and legibility of engraved and lithographed business cards and stationery. By using a well-designed typeface in two weights, the printer can incorporate similar quality into their work. The spacing between words on this card is tighter than what most compositors usually provide. Tight spacing between words is a characteristic of good lettering and typography.

Example 338 (Insert).—While 128the main purpose of this chapter is to encourage the use of typography on business cards, a specimen of hand-lettering is used to point out forceful treatment that, aided by good printing, liberal blank space and high-class card stock, may sometimes be effective for business-card purposes. The printer using a card of this kind would see to it that it was not presented to a prospective customer who had a dislike for anything unconventional.

Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—While 128the main goal of this chapter is to promote the use of typography on business cards, a sample of hand-lettering is included to highlight that bold designs, supported by quality printing, ample white space, and premium card stock, can sometimes be effective for business card purposes. The printer using this type of card would ensure that it wasn't shown to a potential customer who has an aversion to anything unconventional.

EXAMPLE 341

The monogram in color adds distinction

EXAMPLE 341

The colored monogram adds a unique touch.

Example 339 (Insert).—Conceding that a conventional arrangement on a white cardboard is best for most purposes, it cannot be denied that a design of the strength and interest of this one would often be received with pleasure by the man in the business office. It is not unlikely that the thought would occur to him that the printer who can produce a card of this kind is qualified to design and print publicity matter equally attractive for other purposes. Bewick Roman is the decorative type-face shown. The border and ornaments used are essential to the good results in this design. The card would not be as pleasing with the ornaments or the border taken off. This card, by the way, is one of the good things arranged by Will Bradley back in 1905.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like to modernize. (Insert).—While it's true that a standard layout on a white cardstock is ideal for most situations, it's clear that a design as strong and interesting as this one would often be appreciated by someone in a business office. It’s quite possible that they’d think the printer capable of creating such a card is also skilled enough to design and print equally appealing promotional materials for other needs. Bewick Roman is the decorative typeface featured here. The border and decorations used are crucial for the success of this design. The card wouldn’t be as attractive without the ornaments or the border. By the way, this card was one of the excellent pieces created by Will Bradley back in 1905.

EXAMPLE 343

High-hat-and-frock-coat treatment

Top hat and coat treatment

EXAMPLE 344

A business card in blocked capitals, with monogram of harmonious shape

EXAMPLE 344

A business card in all caps, featuring a well-designed monogram

Example 340 (Insert).—Quality is added by an attractive black monogram on a background of white supplemented by the gray formed by the type group. This is an interesting specimen of business-card typography, suggestive of architectural panel treatment. The lines (in Cloister Title) are graded in size according to their importance, the telephone line occupying an unusual position between the street address and the name of the city. Because of its position, it also adds a bit of legibility and prominence to both of these lines.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization. (Insert).—The design features a stylish black monogram on a white background, enhanced by the gray of the text group. This is an intriguing example of business card typography, reminiscent of architectural panel design. The lines (in Cloister Title) vary in size based on their significance, with the telephone number placed unusually between the street address and the city name. This positioning also improves readability and draws attention to both of these lines.

Example 341.—This treatment is similar to the preceding example, with the decorative device in color.

Understood! Please provide the short piece of text you would like me to modernize.—This treatment is just like the previous example, featuring the decorative element in color.

EXAMPLE 342

An uncommon typographic effect

EXAMPLE 342

A unique text style

Example 342.—This card is an interesting contrast to those that have just been considered.

Understood! Please provide the short piece of text for modernization.—This card offers a fascinating contrast to the ones we've just looked at.

Example 343.—Here is a card French in motive and of a style that emits exclusiveness. It almost pictures the high hat and frock coat of the man who would probably use it. All the formalities are observed, the abbreviation “Mr.” preceding the name. The man who uses a card of this kind would no more think of mentioning his business on a card than he would of putting a business sign on his residence. The open-face type is College Title and the italic is Caslon.

Understood! Please provide the phrases for modernization.—Here’s a card with a French design that gives off an exclusive vibe. It almost brings to mind the top hat and formal coat of the kind of guy who would likely use it. All the formalities are in place, with “Mr.” before the name. A man using a card like this wouldn’t even consider including his occupation on it, just as he wouldn’t think of putting a business sign on his home. The open-face type is College Title, and the italic font is Caslon.

Example 344.—An unusual arrangement in blocked Caslon capitals slightly letterspaced. Arrangements of this kind are difficult for the compositor and should not be attempted unless he is not hurried and can experiment with the details of the composition. The shape of the monogram lends itself to the general arrangement.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A unique setup in blocked Caslon capitals with some spacing between the letters. Layouts like this can be challenging for the typesetter and shouldn't be done if they're pressed for time; it’s important to take the time to experiment with the composition details. The design of the monogram fits well with the overall layout.

EXAMPLE 345

Arrangement as suggested in Example 336 with an underprinting decorative device

EXAMPLE 345

Arrangement as suggested in Example 336 with an underprinting decorative element

Example 345.—This is a compact arrangement built 129somewhat after the scheme outlined in Example 336. The decorative device in the original was printed in a tint so like the stock that it suggested a watermark.

Understood! Please provide the phrases you would like me to modernize.—This is a compact design that was created somewhat based on the plan described in Example 336. The decorative feature in the original was printed in a color that closely resembled the paper, giving it a watermark effect.

EXAMPLE 346

Roman capitals with italic lower-case

EXAMPLE 346

Roman capitals with italic lowercase

Example 346.—This card would better please the average person if italic capitals were substituted for the roman. However, there was a historical motive for treating it in this manner. When Aldus Manutius introduced the slanting style of type we know as italic, only lower-case letters were cast, and roman capitals were used with them.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—This card would appeal more to the average person if italic capitals replaced the roman ones. However, there was a historical reason for handling it this way. When Aldus Manutius introduced the slanted type style we now call italic, only lowercase letters were created, and roman capitals were used alongside them.

Example 347.—The Germans in the designing of business cards seem to have abolished conventionality, as they endeavor to have each card in its design possess distinct advertising value. This example is representative of such effects.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The Germans in designing business cards appear to have rejected conventional norms, as they strive to ensure each card has its own unique advertising appeal. This example illustrates such effects.

EXAMPLE 348

Decorative treatment suggested by the business

EXAMPLE 348

Decorative treatment recommended by the business

Example 348.—The designer of this business card took his cue from the word “decorators” and endeavored to form a card with decorative values. This was the reason for the selection of Bewick Roman for the type-face and the Italian ornament to occupy space that is usually left blank on business cards.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The designer of this business card got inspired by the word “decorators” and aimed to create a card with decorative qualities. This is why they chose Bewick Roman for the typeface and included Italian ornamentation to fill the space that is typically left blank on business cards.

EXAMPLE 349

Italic is pleasing on some cards

EXAMPLE 349

Italic looks nice on some cards

Example 349.—When dainty effects are desired, Caslon italic, as used on the greater portion of this card, almost always looks well.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like modernized.—When delicate effects are wanted, Caslon italic, as seen on most of this card, usually looks good.

Example 350.-A strong ornamental effect, such as appears on this card, is liked by some people, but the printer would make a mistake to use it unless he was sure that the customer would care for it. The typographic treatment is simple and compact and lacks nothing in legibility. The shape of the border corners fits into the space left by the contour of the type group.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.-A bold decorative look, like the one on this card, appeals to some people, but the printer would be wrong to use it unless he was confident that the customer would appreciate it. The typographic style is straightforward and concise and is fully legible. The shape of the border corners aligns perfectly with the space created by the typography.

EXAMPLE 347

Modern German business-card treatment

Modern business card design

Example 351.—An arrangement that has a suggestion of the classic. All lines are in one size and in capitals. This treatment should not be used excepting in special cases, as it would not meet the approval of most customers.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like modernized.—A design that has a hint of the classic. All lines are the same size and in uppercase. This style should only be used in special cases, as it likely wouldn't please most customers.

Example 352.—In the amount of matter it contains this card contrasts strongly with Example 343. Some small business men find it good advertising to give as much information on their cards as the size of the card will allow. This example shows how a great deal of copy was treated so that the general effect was not displeasing. In order to accommodate this amount of copy, it is usually necessary to enlarge the size of the card a trifle. Bodoni was used for all excepting two lines, the firm name and address, which were set in Bodoni Bold.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—In terms of the amount of information it holds, this card is quite different from Example 343. Some small business owners find it effective to include as much information on their cards as possible, given the card's size. This example demonstrates how a substantial amount of text was arranged in a way that still looked good overall. To fit this amount of text, it's often necessary to slightly increase the card's size. Bodoni was used for everything except two lines, the business name and address, which were printed in Bodoni Bold.

Example 353.—A decorative card that could be merged in color treatment with an antique-finished stock of some suitable tint.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—A decorative card that could be blended in color with an antique-finished stock of a matching shade.

EXAMPLE 350

A strong design for special purposes

EXAMPLE 350

A solid design for specific purposes

Example 354.—Horizontal lines crossing the face of a card are rarely successful because they usually separate 130connecting phrases, but in this instance the lines are a necessary part of the design and divide the type matter at a suitable place.

Understood, I'm ready to assist. Please provide the text you want modernized.—Horizontal lines crossing the face of a card usually don't work well because they often split connecting phrases. However, in this case, the lines are essential to the design and separate the text at an appropriate point. 130

EXAMPLE 351

Classic arrangement in one size of type

EXAMPLE 351

Traditional setup in a single font size

EXAMPLE 353

Highly decorative, with possibilities for harmonious color effects

EXAMPLE 353

Very decorative, with the potential for cohesive color combinations.

EXAMPLE 354

The horizontal lines are well employed

EXAMPLE 354

The horizontal lines are used effectively.

Example 355.—This card in Bodoni and Bodoni Bold capitals, letterspaced, with the use of a few rules, has distinction that could be successfully carried to other forms of stationery. The contrasting heavy and light rules blend with the heavy and light lines of the Bodoni Bold.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—This card in Bodoni and Bodoni Bold uppercase letters, with some letter spacing and a few lines, has a unique look that could easily be adapted for other types of stationery. The contrasting thick and thin lines work well together with the bold and lighter lines of the Bodoni Bold.

These specimens will convince both printer and user that there is more than “one right way” to design business cards. Typography is the interesting study that it is because, to paraphrase the words of Shakespeare, age cannot wither nor custom stale its infinite variety. Some style of typographic treatment is available to meet the likes and dislikes, preferences and prejudices, of every one using business cards. The strictly conventional person can be supplied with a strictly conventional card, proper in all details. The artistic person, he of the flowing tie, can obtain a card with sympathetic qualities. The noisy huckster can be supplied with a typographic effect that almost shouts the message it contains. In fact, character and personality can be expressed typographically on the business card, and the printer will find this matching of typography with human nature an interesting study.

These samples will show both the printer and the user that there isn't just “one right way” to design business cards. Typography is such a fascinating study because, to rephrase Shakespeare, time can't diminish nor convention stale its endless variety. There's a typographic style available to cater to the likes, dislikes, preferences, and biases of everyone using business cards. The strictly conventional person can get a traditional card that’s proper in every detail. The artistic individual, the one with the flowing tie, can find a card that reflects sympathetic qualities. The loud salesperson can have a typographic effect that almost shouts the message it carries. In fact, character and personality can be expressed through typography on a business card, and the printer will discover that aligning typography with human nature is an intriguing study.

A large city wholesale house cannot afford to circulate the cheap-looking, inharmonious cards that some owners of small shops on side streets seem pleased to use.

A big city wholesale business can't afford to distribute the cheap-looking, mismatched cards that some owners of small shops on side streets seem happy to use.

EXAMPLE 352

A business card with a large amount of copy

EXAMPLE 352

A business card with a lot of text

More than an ordinary amount of thought should be given to the physical construction of a business card. Because of the present great interest in all forms of advertising, more individuality is permissible than formerly. As typography can give distinction and attractiveness to business cards, printers should study the use of type on this class of printing, and give their customers the best possible service.

More thought should be put into the physical design of a business card. Given the current interest in all types of advertising, there is more room for individuality than in the past. Since typography can add uniqueness and appeal to business cards, printers should explore the use of type in this area of printing and provide their customers with the best possible service.

EXAMPLE 355

Distinctive treatment adaptable for general stationery

EXAMPLE 355

Unique treatment suitable for general stationery

Printers are producing cards in imitation of intaglio work to satisfy customers who do not consider that a truly typographic design “looks like a business card.” There is no use denying that copperplate engravers set the style for much of the business-card printing. Shops doing this imitation work should have samples of the best card work done by engravers, so that their imitations may be as accurate as possible, so far as concerns style, face and arrangement. There is little pleasure in being an imitator unless you are a good one, and here is opportunity to gain a reputation for the clever printing of imitation engraved work. Good stock, a dense-black ink and perfect types are means to this end. Pleasing results have also been obtained by using green-black ink or dull gray-black ink, which assists in conveying the soft, pleasing effects of lithography.

Printers are making cards that mimic intaglio work to please customers who think that a real typographic design “looks like a business card.” It’s undeniable that copperplate engravers influenced the style of much of the business card printing. Shops doing this imitation work should have samples of the best cards created by engravers so that their imitations can be as accurate as possible in terms of style, font, and layout. There's little satisfaction in being an imitator unless you do it well, and this is an opportunity to build a reputation for skillfully printing imitation engraved work. Using good paper, dense black ink, and perfect typefaces are essential for achieving this goal. Good results have also been achieved by using green-black or dull gray-black ink, which helps create the soft, pleasing effects found in lithography.

EXAMPLE 356

This size of blotter will cut twelve out of a sheet of standard blotting stock. The copy includes a calendar and is representative of the conventional copy usually supplied for blotters. The calendar is arranged without rules. The initial furnishes a spot of attraction, separates the two groups and carries the eye to the beginning of the message

EXAMPLE 356

This size of blotter will make twelve from a sheet of standard blotting paper. The design includes a calendar and is typical of the standard designs usually provided for blotters. The calendar is laid out without lines. The initial adds a visual element, separates the two sections, and draws attention to the start of the message.

131

THE BLOTTER

Blotters have a place in modern business which, while not so important as that of business cards, is fairly well established.

Blotters have a role in today's business scene that, while not as crucial as business cards, is still quite recognized.

Business cards are left with customers as reminders, and altho blotters are sent for the same purpose, they have the added quality of usefulness. The treatment of a blotter should be as well thought out as that of a business card. In a sense the blotter represents the business house sending it, and while it may show less restraint and dignity than the business card, coarseness should be avoided in the handling of both type and illustration.

Business cards are given to customers as reminders, and although blotters serve the same purpose, they also provide added usefulness. The design of a blotter should be as carefully considered as that of a business card. In a way, the blotter represents the business providing it, and while it may appear less formal and dignified than the business card, it's important to avoid any roughness in the choice of both text and images.

EXAMPLE 357

A modest amount of copy and neat treatment

EXAMPLE 357

A small amount of text and clean presentation

The blotter as a means of publicity much used by advertisers is no longer an experiment; it is a familiar form in the printshop.

The blotter, commonly used by advertisers as a promotional tool, is no longer just a trial; it's now a standard item in the print shop.

The advertising value of a blotter seems to lie in its ability to do one of two things—strongly and favorably to attract attention when received, or thru attractive simplicity to grow in favor during use. The former may be likened to a rocket which compels attention and pleases for a moment, and the latter to a star whose beauty attracts forever.

The advertising value of a blotter seems to come from its ability to do one of two things—grab attention strongly and favorably when it's received, or, through its simple design, become more appreciated over time while being used. The first is like a rocket that demands attention and brings a moment of delight, while the second is like a star whose beauty continues to attract endlessly.

In planning a blotter it is well to keep in mind its utilitarian character and make it as useful as possible.

In planning a blotter, it’s important to remember its practical purpose and make it as helpful as possible.

The size is determined by the sheet of stock out of which blotters are cut. As the stock measures 19 × 24 inches, most printers cut blotters a trifle less than 9½ × 4 inches, thus securing twelve blotters to a sheet of stock. There are others who prefer the blotters not so wide and make them 8 or 8½ inches.

The size is determined by the sheet of stock that blotters are cut from. Since the stock measures 19 × 24 inches, most printers cut blotters just under 9½ × 4 inches, resulting in twelve blotters from a sheet of stock. Some others prefer the blotters to be narrower and make them 8 or 8½ inches.

Another reason for the blotter size of a trifle less than 9½ × 4 inches is that it fits nicely in a standard No. 10 Government envelop, which measures 9½ × 4⅛ inches.

Another reason for the blotter size of just under 9½ × 4 inches is that it fits perfectly in a standard No. 10 Government envelope, which measures 9½ × 4⅛ inches.

A size of blotter that is also much used measures about 6 × 3¼, and fits in a No. 6¾ Government envelop, which measures 6½ × 3⅝. This size is most convenient for inclosing with everyday business mail, and it is possible that most of those actually using blotters prefer the smaller size.

A commonly used size of blotter is about 6 × 3¼ inches, which fits perfectly in a No. 6¾ Government envelope that measures 6½ × 3⅝ inches. This size is ideal for including with regular business mail, and it's likely that most people who actually use blotters prefer the smaller size.

The blotter with an enameled surface on one side is probably the best for use. A person naturally rubs his hand over the blotter to absorb the wet ink, and an enameled surface feels more pleasant to the touch. When not many blotters are on hand in a business office those with absorbent surfaces on both sides render the greater service, but usually advertisers keep offices well supplied.

The blotter with a glossy surface on one side is probably the best to use. People naturally rub their hands over the blotter to soak up the wet ink, and a glossy surface feels nicer to the touch. When there aren’t many blotters available in a business office, those with absorbent surfaces on both sides are more useful, but usually, advertisers keep their offices well stocked.

From a printing point of view the blotter stock with one side enamel-finished is better for illustrations or small type, while rough-finished stock is suited to typographic treatments that require antique effects.

From a printing perspective, the blotter stock with one side coated with enamel is better for illustrations or small text, while rough-finished stock works well for typographic styles that need vintage effects.

EXAMPLE 358

Blotter used in the writing room of a convention hall

EXAMPLE 358

Notepad used in the writing area of a convention center

Example 356 (Insert).—This blotter represents not only the size of a great many blotters but the contents, as it is customary to include a monthly calendar. Too frequently forms of this character are made inharmonious because stock calendar plates are utilized and are accompanied by type-faces of another design. This lack of harmony is seldom necessary, as the printer in his typography should match the style of type used for the stock calendar plate. Sometimes in addition to the calendar plate a stock illustration is also introduced, with consequent duplication of spots of attraction. Either the calendar plate or the illustration should be used; not both. The typographic arrangement of blotters oftentimes is of a poor kind because the copy is separated into numerous display parts. In so far as it is possible, the treatment should be simple, and in order to suggest such treatment this example has been prepared. It will be noticed that the entire blotter has been set in one design of type-face—all 132roman, and mostly lower-case. This manner of handling the typography will give good results in almost every instance in which it is tried. The message of the advertiser is presented in a plain, legible paragraph introduced by an initial in color. The blank space liberally distributed is restful, and the dark-printing qualities of the heavy-and-light-line border contrast with the blank background, the rubricated initial and the mass of gray in the type matter. No rule lines appear in the calendar section, and the result is an appearance of natural freedom.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. (Insert).—This blotter represents not just the size of many blotters but also their content, as it typically includes a monthly calendar. Too often, designs like this become unappealing because stock calendar templates are used alongside different typefaces. This mismatch is usually unnecessary, as printers can align the typography to match the style of the stock calendar plate. Sometimes a stock illustration is added to the calendar, creating redundant elements of interest. Either the calendar plate or the illustration should be used, but not both. The layout of blotters is often poorly done because the text is broken into too many display sections. Whenever possible, the design should be straightforward, and to illustrate this, this example has been created. You'll notice that the entire blotter uses one typeface style—all 132roman and mostly in lower-case. This approach to typography tends to yield good results in almost every case. The advertiser's message is presented in a clean, easy-to-read paragraph, highlighted by an initial in color. The generous use of blank space is soothing, and the contrasting dark and light lines of the border stand out against the blank background, the colorful initial, and the gray text. There are no lines in the calendar section, giving it a natural, open feel.

EXAMPLE 359

Simple typographic arrangement with strong but pleasing contrasts

EXAMPLE 359

Simple typography layout with bold yet appealing contrasts

Example 357.—Most blotters contain too much type matter. The business man would probably appreciate a modest little announcement and consider it a relief from the sledge-hammer advertising that too often forces itself on his attention in an unwelcome way. As one rubs over the average blotter he finds it almost necessary to close his eyes because of the strong character of the design or color treatment. The arrangement of this example is a suggestion for a little blotter that would doubtless be welcomed by many. It could be of a size that would fit in the personal checkbook. Because of the intimate character of its use the typography should be confined to a simple paragraph or to a group arrangement as shown. Both the message and the treatment here given are in good taste for such a purpose, and, as has been suggested, it is likely that similar treatment on a larger blotter would win approval.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Most blotters have way too much text. Business professionals would probably prefer a simple, small announcement and see it as a nice break from the overwhelming advertising that usually bombards them. When you look at the typical blotter, it often feels necessary to shut your eyes because of the intense design or color scheme. The layout of this example suggests a small blotter that many would surely appreciate. It could be sized to fit in a personal checkbook. Given its personal use, the typography should be limited to a brief paragraph or a simple grouping like what's shown. Both the message and the design featured here are tasteful for this purpose, and, as mentioned, a similar approach on a bigger blotter would likely be well-received.

Example 358.—This blotter was used in the writing room of a convention hall and was prepared for a state meeting of a church organization. It will be noticed that only the week of the convention is given in the calendar, and that it begins on Thursday and ends on Wednesday. Some of the factors that make this blotter pleasing are the liberal blank space, the black lines of the rules, and the ornament in color. Text type is used because of the religious character of the convention, and it is letterspaced. As a general rule it is well not to letterspace text type, but here in order to obtain a certain distinctive effect it has been done with good results.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This blotter was used in the writing room of a convention hall and was prepared for a state meeting of a church organization. You'll notice that only the week of the convention is shown in the calendar, starting on Thursday and ending on Wednesday. Some of the features that make this blotter attractive are the ample blank space, the black lines of the rules, and the colorful ornamentation. Text type is used because of the religious nature of the convention, and it has been letterspaced. Generally, it's best not to letterspace text type, but here it was done to achieve a distinctive effect, with good results.

Example 359.—Here is a suggestion for a simple typographic arrangement with strong but pleasing contrasts. The color of the rule border contrasts with the white of the background and the black of the illustration. The gray effect of the type group is a harmonizing factor that softens the contrasts. Only one face of type—Cloister Oldstyle—is used, and that of a size that makes it possible for the business man to read the message as he blots his 133signature. The treatment is masculine and will please a great many because of its style.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Here’s a suggestion for a simple typographic layout with strong yet pleasing contrasts. The color of the rule border contrasts with the white background and the black illustration. The gray tone of the type group helps balance out the contrasts. Only one typeface—Cloister Oldstyle—is used, and it’s sized so that the businessman can easily read the message while signing his 133signature. The design is masculine and will appeal to many because of its style.

EXAMPLE 360

A blotter arrangement suggestive of an architectural panel

EXAMPLE 360

A layout that resembles an architectural panel

143

EXAMPLE 361

Blotter treatment that survives the test of time

EXAMPLE 361

Blotter treatment that endures over time

EXAMPLE 362

Neat, refined arrangement of type matter and illustration

EXAMPLE 362

Clean, polished layout of text and images

EXAMPLE 363

In which the type matter fills the blotter

EXAMPLE 363

Where the type matter fills the blotter

EXAMPLE 364

A decorative blotter arranged the narrow way

EXAMPLE 364

A decorative blotter placed horizontally

Example 360.—This blotter has the character of an architectural panel, a motif that is adaptable to many forms of typography. The general gray effect of the Forum Title and the architectural border is satisfying, especially as the type group and border are separated by a liberal amount of blank space. The shape of the type group suggests a keystone. This is one of those blotters that the business man should find pleasure in using and looking at frequently. It will be noticed that the spacing between the words is less than the en-quad which the typographer would customarily use in capital lines. It would be a mistake to separate these Roman capitals with more space than that used here.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This blotter resembles an architectural panel, a design that works well with various styles of typography. The overall gray look of the Forum Title and the architectural border is pleasing, especially since the type group and border are set apart by a generous amount of white space. The shape of the type group resembles a keystone. This is the kind of blotter that a businessman would take pleasure in using and seeing frequently. You’ll notice that the spacing between the words is less than the en-quad that typographers usually use for capital lines. It would be a mistake to space these Roman capitals further apart than what's done here.

Example 361.—It has been said that two important factors in good typography are the material that is used and the material that is not used. Horace Carr has done many good things with the Caslon type-face, but none more pleasing than this blotter. It is a model of good taste in blotter typography and the sort of treatment that has proved to be good blotter advertising. This particular example was received by the author some years ago and was then reproduced. Testing it with careful examination after all this time, it looks as well as ever.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—It’s been said that two key factors in great typography are the materials used and those that are left out. Horace Carr has accomplished many impressive things with the Caslon typeface, but nothing more delightful than this blotter. It sets a standard for tasteful blotter typography and represents an effective approach to blotter advertising. The author received this specific example years ago and then reproduced it. After thorough examination over time, it still looks just as good as ever.

Example 362.—Here is suggested a neat, refined arrangement, in which type group and illustration are placed practically in the center of the blotter and surrounded with blank space that accentuates its neatness.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This suggests a clean, polished layout, where the text and image are positioned almost in the center of the blotter and surrounded by empty space that highlights its tidiness.

Example 363.—This blotter—one that was submitted several years ago in a blotter competition—shows treatment which calls for the use of large type that occupies almost the entire surface of the blotter. While an effect such as that of the previous example is preferable for most purposes, there are times when it is desirable to have the typography arranged on a large scale.

Understood. Please provide the text for me to modernize.—This blotter—submitted a few years back in a blotter competition—features a design that uses large type filling nearly the whole surface of the blotter. While the effect of the previous example is better for most uses, there are occasions when it's useful to have the typography laid out on a larger scale.

Example 364.—It is customary to design a blotter the broad way, but occasionally printers desire for the sake of novelty to arrange it the narrow way, as is done on this example. The blotter has decorative quality because of the use of the gray border and the lower-case of Kennerley Oldstyle. Lower-case properly used is usually attractive.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Typically, a blotter is designed to be wide, but sometimes printers choose to arrange it in a narrow format for a fresh look, like in this example. The blotter has an appealing design due to the gray border and the use of Kennerley Oldstyle in lowercase. When used correctly, lowercase can be quite attractive.

EXAMPLE 365

Appropriate trademark and harmonizing typography

EXAMPLE 365

Proper trademark and consistent typography

Example 365.—A touch of appropriateness is given to this blotter by the use of the scroll decorative piece, and the harmony is further carried out by the selection of Bodoni Book for the type portion.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This blotter is made suitable with the addition of the scroll decorative element, and the overall look is enhanced by choosing Bodoni Book for the text.

EXAMPLE 366

Typographic poster in Roman capitals by Frederic W. Goudy

EXAMPLE 366

Typography poster in capital letters by Frederic W. Goudy

135

POSTERS, CAR CARDS, WINDOW CARDS

Poster printing is a specialty in large cities, where plants are equipped for the economical and effective production of such work. However, consideration of the subject in this chapter will be confined to the interest it may have for the general commercial printer, he who is called upon at one hour to print a business card and at another to produce a window card, car card or other form of poster printing.

Poster printing is a specialty in big cities, where facilities are set up for the cost-effective and efficient production of such work. However, this chapter will focus on its relevance for the general commercial printer, the one who might be asked to print a business card one moment and then create a window card, car card, or another type of poster the next.

The type equipment of the poster specialist includes strong gothic and Clarendon faces, of a variety of widths that enable him to make a full line of almost any word or combination of words. When such strong-printing capital letters are used, most of the lines should be full, as the general effect should be one of compactness. A very little amount of spacing is sufficient. No extended reference will be made here to the conventional poster that carries these heavy types, as its arrangement is merely one that emphasizes in a plain manner the various important parts of the copy. Skill is necessary, but not the skill of an artist.

The equipment used by a poster specialist includes bold gothic and Clarendon typefaces in various widths, which allows them to create a complete line of almost any word or combination of words. When using these bold capital letters, most lines should be filled, as the overall look should be compact. A small amount of spacing is enough. There won't be any detailed discussion here about the traditional poster that uses these heavy types, as its layout simply highlights the important parts of the text in a straightforward way. Skill is required, but not the kind of skill an artist needs.

The wood-type equipment of the general commercial printer need not he elaborate, but it should be well selected. There should be a blending of styles in type-faces from the smallest size of metal type to the largest wood letter. The wood-type makers duplicate most of the standard job faces, so that harmony in this respect need be no idle dream.

The wood-type equipment for general commercial printing doesn't have to be fancy, but it should be carefully chosen. There should be a mix of styles in the typefaces, ranging from the smallest metal type to the largest wood letter. The wood-type manufacturers replicate most standard job faces, so achieving harmony in this area doesn't have to be just a wishful thought.

EXAMPLE 367

A lettered poster by Harvey Hopkins Dunn that should be studied by the typographer

EXAMPLE 367

A poster with text by Harvey Hopkins Dunn that typographers should analyze

Among poster printers a sheet 29 × 39 inches is taken as a unit and is known as a “one-sheet.” “Four-sheet,” “twelve-sheet,” etc., are terms designating the number of units or “one-sheets” in the whole display. On the other hand, the commercial printer’s “sheet” poster is generally the full 25 × 38-inch paper, a “half-sheet” being 19 × 25 inches and a “quarter-sheet” 12½ × 19 inches.

Among poster printers, a sheet that measures 29 × 39 inches is considered a unit and is called a “one-sheet.” Terms like “four-sheet,” “twelve-sheet,” etc., refer to the number of “one-sheets” in the entire display. In contrast, the commercial printer’s “sheet” poster typically uses the full 25 × 38-inch paper, with a “half-sheet” being 19 × 25 inches and a “quarter-sheet” measuring 12½ × 19 inches.

The size of car cards—the advertisements used in trolley, elevated and subway cars—is usually 11 × 21 inches.

The size of car cards—the ads used in trolleys, elevated trains, and subways—is generally 11 × 21 inches.

The most common sizes of window cards—advertisements placed in store windows by courtesy of the merchants—are quarter-sheets (11 × 14 inches) and half-sheets (14 × 22 inches), the unit of which is the standard sheet of cardboard (about 22 × 28 inches).

The most common sizes of window cards—ads placed in store windows by the merchants—are quarter-sheets (11 × 14 inches) and half-sheets (14 × 22 inches), with the standard sheet of cardboard being the unit (about 22 × 28 inches).

Posters in their most attractive form are designed in pleasing combinations of decorative illustration, lettering and harmonious coloring. The printer with type alone cannot give the picture element, but he can give color and lettering.

Posters at their best are created with appealing combinations of decorative illustrations, typography, and complementary colors. A printer who only uses type can't include the pictorial element, but they can provide color and text.

What a poster authority has said of the pictorial poster can to some extent be said of the typographic poster: “The poster should be simple, clever, attractive, perhaps sparkling, spontaneous, appropriate, sometimes humorous, but in good taste, and should tell the story at a glance. It should not be elaborate in detail or labored; the designer should know where to stop. The coloring should be brilliant, yet simple; when many colors are used most of them are wasted, as the eye does not see them all. As detail in a poster is lost at a distance, it is unnecessary. The best posters have no background and not much lettering, as small lettering cannot be seen across the street, which is the test.”

What a poster expert has said about pictorial posters can also apply to typographic posters: “A poster should be simple, clever, attractive, maybe even striking, spontaneous, appropriate, sometimes funny, but always in good taste, and it should convey the message at a glance. It shouldn't be overly detailed or forced; the designer should know when to stop. The colors should be vibrant yet straightforward; when lots of colors are used, most of them are wasted since the eye can’t pick them all out. As details in a poster are hard to see from a distance, they're unnecessary. The best posters have no background and minimal text because small text can't be read from across the street, which is the ultimate test.”

It is assumed that the typographic poster is viewed at closer range, as in its smaller sizes it is usually hung in stores and offices or posted in convenient locations that permit of easy reading; yet the printer who sets the work, as well as the man who writes the copy, should keep before him the manner in which the poster, car card or window card is to be used. A person sitting on the opposite side of the car should be able to read the 136car card, and the person passing a store window should find it possible to obtain the principal points of information from the window card. On store cards, such as used during special sales, the price should be prominently displayed.

It’s assumed that the typographic poster is viewed up close; since it’s often hung in stores and offices or posted in convenient spots for easy reading, it's usually in smaller sizes. However, the printer who sets the design and the person who writes the copy should keep in mind how the poster, car card, or window card will be used. A person sitting on the opposite side of the bus should be able to read the car card, and someone passing by a store window should be able to quickly grasp the main points of information from the window card. For store cards, such as those used during special sales, the price should be clearly visible.

EXAMPLE 368

A lettered arrangement that has suggestion

EXAMPLE 368

An organized setup that conveys a suggestion

EXAMPLE 369

A few words of copy and strong contrasts

EXAMPLE 369

A few words of text and bold contrasts

EXAMPLE 370

A typographic style unique among insurance advertising in cars

EXAMPLE 370

A typography style that stands out in car insurance advertising

EXAMPLE 371

Simplicity that is worthy of adaptation

EXAMPLE 371

A simplicity that's worth adapting

Example 366 (Insert).—The possibilities of typographic effects in poster printing are to be seen in this example, arranged by Frederic W. Goudy. Forum Title, designed by him, was selected as the type-face. In order to obtain the larger sizes, the type was set in a smaller size, a clear proof pulled and a photo-engraving made. This poster measures up to the qualities outlined by the poster authority previously quoted. It is “spontaneous, appropriate, simple, clever, attractive.”

Understood! Please provide the text you would like to modernize. (Insert).—The potential for typographic effects in poster printing is showcased in this example, arranged by Frederic W. Goudy. He chose Forum Title as the typeface. To achieve the larger sizes, the type was set in a smaller size, a clear proof was pulled, and a photo-engraving was made. This poster meets the qualities mentioned by the poster authority previously quoted. It is “spontaneous, appropriate, simple, clever, attractive.”

Example 367.—Altho this design is lettered, it should prove of great value to the typographer as a study of composition. In the production of this effective poster Mr. Dunn has given of his talent as an illustrator as well as of his skill as a letterer. The apportionment of blank space in the margins and at the head is pleasing, and it helps to make effective the black masses of lettering and the octagonal illustration. The border of thick and thin lines ties the design together.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Although this design includes text, it should be very useful for typographers as a study in composition. In creating this impactful poster, Mr. Dunn has showcased his talent as an illustrator along with his skills in lettering. The way he uses blank space in the margins and at the top is attractive and enhances the strong areas of lettering and the octagonal illustration. The border made up of thick and thin lines brings the design together.

Example 368.—Most cards in urban cars are made up greatly of design and illustration, but in this one we find the illustration taking a minor position. The lettering is the main feature, and it should suggest treatment with type that could be almost as effective.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Most cards in city cars rely heavily on design and illustration, but in this one, the illustration plays a small role. The lettering stands out as the main feature, and it should imply a treatment with type that could be just as impactful.

Example 369.—The strong contrast of black, red and white in this car card could be approximated with bold, well-designed wood type. The trade name is given most prominence, altho the remainder of the copy is also strongly presented. A suggestion of decoration is to be found in the ruled lines at the head and foot.

Understood! Please provide the text for modernization.—The strong contrast of black, red, and white in this car card could be matched with bold, well-designed wood type. The brand name stands out the most, although the rest of the text is also prominently displayed. There are decorative ruled lines at the top and bottom.

Example 370.—Seldom is copy such as this furnished for car cards, yet its conversational style probably caused it to be read more than other cards. As an advertisement it is an improvement over the common method of merely stating name and business. It presented opportunity to the printer to use types in a sane, simple manner, and he did so. A two-line initial letter starts the reading pleasantly, and the name in capitals has sufficient prominence.

Understood! Please provide the text you want to modernize.—You rarely see copy like this for advertising cards, but its conversational style likely made it more engaging than others. As an ad, it’s a step up from the usual approach of just listing a name and business. It gave the printer a chance to use fonts in a clear, straightforward way, and they nailed it. A two-line initial letter makes for a nice start, and the name in all caps stands out just enough.

Example 371.—At an exhibit of German modern-art posters the design that stood out most strongly was one which contained only a name lettered and an article illustrated. There was no detail to detract, and the effect was altogether pleasant. This shoe card is planned along similar lines, and the idea could well be put to further use.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—At an exhibit of German modern art posters, the design that stood out the most featured just a name in lettering and an illustrated article. There were no extra details to distract, and the overall effect was very pleasing. This shoe card is designed in a similar way, and the concept could easily be applied in other areas.

Example 372 (Insert).—This is a presentation of a three-sheet poster which attracted the attention of the writer a few years ago because of its simplicity. For such effects as this, which carry but little copy, lower-case letters are appropriate. It is seldom, however, that the commercial printer is provided with so few words for his posters. Lower-case display, to look well, requires plenty of surrounding blank space, while capitals accommodate themselves to close quarters.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—This is a presentation of a three-sheet poster that caught the writer's attention a few years ago because of its simplicity. For effects like this, which have very little text, lowercase letters work well. However, it’s rare for a commercial printer to have so few words for their posters. Lowercase display text, to look good, needs a lot of surrounding blank space, while capital letters fit better in tight spaces.

EXAMPLE 372

Refinement in theatrical printing. Was a large three-sheet poster

EXAMPLE 372

Improvement in theatrical printing. It was a large three-sheet poster.

EXAMPLE 373

A border such as this blends with gothic type-faces

EXAMPLE 373

A border like this works well with Gothic fonts.

137Example 373 (Insert).—The “Secession” style of border and ornament blends well with monotone type-faces without serifs, such as the type commonly known as gothic. As the wood-type equipment of most printshops very likely includes gothic faces, the style of treatment shown by this specimen may be produced successfully. A border such as this is easily procured, or can be made by the printer if he desires.

137Understood! Please provide the text you want modernized. (Insert).—The “Secession” style of border and decoration works really well with sans-serif typefaces, like the commonly referred to gothic type. Since most print shops probably have gothic type in their equipment, the way this example is designed can be easily replicated. A border like this is simple to find or can be created by the printer if they wish.

Example 374.—Printers seldom take advantage of the opportunities offered for unusual effects. This copy did not suggest anything to the compositor who first set it and the result was commonplace, with nothing to excite anything but ordinary interest. The fact that the birth of Franklin was to be celebrated should have been sufficient to suggest an arrangement such as is here presented, but it did not. Benjamin Franklin purchased his type in England, some of it at the old letter foundry of the Caslons; and what is more interesting than a poster announcement of a Franklin dinner set in the style of type-face that Franklin himself used? This has been done in the example under consideration. Roman, italic, capitals and lower-case have been blended in the interesting manner in which this was done in the eighteenth century. The long s (ſ) of Franklin’s time is also used, to carry along the interest; it appears, as will be noticed, in all cases excepting at the end of words. A Caslon ornamental band is at the head and foot.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Printers rarely take advantage of the opportunities for creating unique effects. This text didn’t inspire the typesetter who first set it, resulting in something ordinary that only piqued typical interest. The fact that Benjamin Franklin's birth was to be celebrated should have suggested a more creative arrangement, but it didn’t. Benjamin Franklin bought his type in England, some of it from the old Caslon letter foundry; what could be more interesting than a poster for a Franklin dinner designed in the typeface that Franklin himself used? That’s exactly what has been done in the example we're discussing. Roman, italic, uppercase, and lowercase letters have been blended in the engaging way that was common in the eighteenth century. The long s (ſ) from Franklin’s era is also included to enhance interest; it appears, as you’ll notice, in every case except at the end of words. An ornamental Caslon band is featured at the top and bottom.

Example 375.—This is another instance where the copy furnished a motif that could be developed typographically. Reproductions from the First Folio of Shakespeare’s works were available and from them an initial and two decorative bands were enlarged to the desired size. The typography of Shakespeare’s time was then studied and worked into the poster. The Caslon type-face is not exactly the same as that used in the seventeenth century, but there is sufficient similarity to make it suitable. Many persons of the present day will shy at the use of a single capital letter immediately following the initial, but that is the way it was done in the old days. Typographers should early begin to accumulate a library of books. They should frequent the second-hand bookstores, and occasionally purchase some old volume that shows the style of typography of fifty, one hundred or more years ago. The best printers do this.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is another example where the text provided a theme that could be visually developed. Reproductions from the First Folio of Shakespeare’s works were available, and from them, an initial and two decorative bands were enlarged to the desired size. The typography from Shakespeare’s time was then analyzed and integrated into the poster. The Caslon typeface isn’t exactly the same as what was used in the seventeenth century, but it’s close enough to be appropriate. Many people today might hesitate to use a single capital letter right after the initial, but that’s how it was done back then. Typographers should start building a library of books early on. They should visit second-hand bookstores and occasionally pick up an old book that showcases typography from fifty, one hundred, or more years ago. The best printers do this.

Example 376.—It should be an easy matter to produce attractive window cards or paper hangers in this style. Selections from the many artistic and odd cover papers obtainable, supported by harmonizing color combinations, make possible any number of attractive effects. Only one size of type should be used, and the border should be one that reflects the character of the type-face. Plain rules for border purposes are more successful in obtaining harmony than is decoration. As most letters contain two widths of line, a rule border matching the wider line, or both lines, is pleasing.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—It should be straightforward to create eye-catching window cards or paper hangers in this style. You can choose from a variety of artistic and unique cover papers available, paired with complementary color combinations, to achieve numerous appealing effects. Only one font size should be used, and the border should match the character of the typeface. Simple borders for decorative purposes tend to create better harmony than elaborate designs. Since most letters have two line widths, a border that matches either the wider line or both lines looks nice.

EXAMPLE 374

Type treatment that suggests Franklin’s time

EXAMPLE 374

Type treatment that reflects Franklin’s era

EXAMPLE 375

Poster in Shakespearean typography

Poster in modern typography

Example 377.—The Colonial style of type arrangement is here adapted to window-card purposes. The window card has the same advertising reason for its existence as the paper 138poster, and is printed on cardboard to enable it to stand upright. The treatment of this card is such that the word “Pinafore” and the decoration stand out most prominently, taking for granted that a person interested by the sight of this word will come close to the card and read it. Such an arrangement should not be attempted unless the copy is suitable. Forcing unsuitable copy in full-line Colonial arrangements results in illegibility and dissatisfaction.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The Colonial style of layout is now used for window cards. The window card has the same advertising purpose as the paper poster and is printed on cardboard to make it stand upright. The design of this card highlights the word “Pinafore” and the decoration prominently, assuming that someone intrigued by seeing this word will approach the card to read it. This type of arrangement should only be used if the text is appropriate. Trying to force unsuitable text into full-line Colonial layouts leads to unreadability and frustration.

EXAMPLE 376

A simple typographic treatment that offers possibilities for attractive posters or window cards

EXAMPLE 376

A straightforward typographic design that provides options for eye-catching posters or window displays.

Example 378.—Sunday-school excursions furnish copy for many window cards. The printer may appreciate this suggestion for an arrangement of such a job. It is sufficiently unconventional to attract attention, at the same time providing a simple way of arranging the matter that usually comes in with such orders. The arrangement has merit from an advertising point of view, the information being given concisely and legibly.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Sunday school outings provide material for many window displays. The printer might find this idea helpful for organizing such a project. It's unique enough to grab attention while also offering an easy way to lay out the information typically included in these orders. This setup has value from a marketing perspective, presenting the information clearly and concisely.

It is probably true that the majority of printers have given no thought whatever to the arrangement and treatment of posters. It is even likely that there are job printers who feel that poster composition is beneath their dignity. In view of these conditions, it is to be hoped that what has here been written regarding the poster will serve to create new interest in that line of work.

It’s likely that most printers haven’t put any thought into how posters are organized and designed. There are probably job printers who think that creating posters is not worth their time. Given these circumstances, I hope what’s been written here about posters will spark a new interest in that type of work.

Years ago the author knew an old printer who had the reputation of being the best sale-bill compositor in the county. His work was confined almost entirely to the setting of posters announcing sales of farm goods, yet he did it so carefully and efficiently that residents of the county traveled miles to place an order with the concern for which this man worked.

Years ago, the author knew an old printer who was known as the best sale-bill compositor in the county. His work mainly involved creating posters for farm goods sales, but he did it so meticulously and efficiently that people from all over the county would drive miles just to place an order with the company he worked for.

EXAMPLE 377

The Colonial style used on a window card

EXAMPLE 377

The Colonial style used on a window card

Poster printing should not be attempted unless the equipment is such that the work can be done profitably. Lack of sufficient wood type will result in poor printing and makeshift arrangements. However, absence of equipment did not worry a certain printer who did business some years ago. He had no wood type at all, yet he accepted orders for posters and, taking advantage of the craft courtesies of those days, borrowed all the type lines from a competitor. It frequently happened that when the competitor desired to set up a bill he found that the type was mostly in the possession of the borrowing printer.

Poster printing shouldn't be attempted unless you have the right equipment to make it profitable. Not having enough wood type results in poor prints and subpar setups. However, a certain printer from years ago wasn't concerned about the lack of equipment. He had no wood type at all, yet he took on orders for posters and, taking advantage of the professional courtesies of that time, borrowed all the type lines from a competitor. It often happened that when the competitor wanted to set up a bill, he found that most of the type was with the printer who borrowed it.

EXAMPLE 378

Suggestion for an excursion window card

EXAMPLE 378

Idea for a trip window card

The large two-sheet and three-sheet posters look very big indeed to the printer in the small shop whose product is confined to the output of his platen presses, yet poster printing is merely printing on a larger scale. The builder of the New York subways was once asked how he found it possible to put through such a large undertaking. He replied that he knew he could build a cellar, and a subway was merely a multiplication of cellars. The printer who learns how effectively to produce a small piece of printed advertising matter should be able, by developing and enlarging on his ideas, to produce good poster work.

The big two-sheet and three-sheet posters look really huge to the printer in the small shop, who only produces what his platen presses can handle. But poster printing is just printing on a larger scale. The builder of the New York subways was once asked how he managed such a massive project. He replied that he knew he could build a cellar, and a subway was just many cellars put together. A printer who learns how to create a small piece of printed advertising effectively should be able to produce great poster work by expanding on those ideas.

EXAMPLE 381

A city department-store advertisement of the good kind

EXAMPLE 381

An advertisement for a quality city department store

139

ADVERTISEMENTS

Not every business man can write an advertisement well. Not every printer can set an advertisement well.

Not every businessman can write a good advertisement. Not every printer can lay out an advertisement well.

Of the poor advertisements that mar newspapers and periodicals, fifty per cent of the ineffectiveness should be blamed on those who write them and fifty per cent on those who set them.

Of the bad ads that ruin newspapers and magazines, half of the ineffectiveness should be blamed on the writers and half on the designers.

EXAMPLE 379

Newspaper advertisement arranged without thought. See 380

EXAMPLE 379

Newspaper ad put together without any consideration. See 380

In this chapter we are interested not in writing the advertisement, but in properly treating it typographically after it has been written.

In this chapter, we're focused not on writing the advertisement, but on properly formatting it typographically after it's been created.

Some day advertising typography may become so standardized that a compositor can be told in a few words just how he shall arrange it. Meanwhile as there is more than one way to set type for advertisements, we must for the present depend on the study of good type work, the advice of those who have theories, and our own judgment.

Some day, advertising typography might become so standardized that a typesetter can be told in just a few words how to arrange it. In the meantime, since there are multiple ways to set type for advertisements, we must rely on studying good type work, following the advice of those with theories, and using our own judgment.

EXAMPLE 380

Easier to read and more pleasing to look at than 379

EXAMPLE 380

Easier to read and more visually appealing than 379

It is possible, however, to learn something about advertising typography by giving thought to the ways of the orator, who swayed human beings long before printing was invented. We have all listened to oratory in the church pulpit, the public square and the Chautauqua tents, and in halls on the occasion of political gatherings and organization conventions. Our most agreeable recollections are of those moments when we were so pleased and impressed with what the speaker was saying that we did not think of his manner of saying it. Probably the most successful printed matter is that which pleases and impresses without one’s being immediately aware of the cause.

It is possible, however, to learn something about advertising typography by considering the techniques of the orator, who influenced people long before printing was invented. We have all experienced powerful speeches in the church pulpit, the public square, Chautauqua tents, and at political rallies and organizational conventions. Our best memories come from those times when we were so taken with what the speaker was saying that we didn’t even notice how they were saying it. The most effective printed material is likely that which captivates and impresses without one being immediately aware of why.

A good speaker will enunciate clearly and speak in a moderate tone that can be heard.

A good speaker will articulate clearly and talk in a moderate tone that can be heard.

A good typographic advertisement will be set in a legible type-face and in a size that can be easily read.

A good typographic ad will use a clear typeface and a size that's easy to read.

Print can be too small or too large, too gray or too black.

Print can be too small or too large, too gray or too black.

If a speaker is addressing an exclusive group of persons, he lowers his voice and talks in polite diction.

If a speaker is talking to a selective group of people, he lowers his voice and uses polite language.

If he addresses a large crowd, many of whom are of less fastidious tastes, he raises his voice, perhaps using all his power, and most likely mixes with his English a little popular slang.

If he speaks to a large crowd, many of whom have less refined tastes, he raises his voice, probably using all his strength, and most likely spices his English with some popular slang.

Thus advertising printing of the exclusive kind would likely be set in type smaller and in design more classic than that used for publicity matter that has wide and promiscuous circulation.

Thus advertising printing of the exclusive kind would likely be set in smaller type and in a more classic design than that used for publicity material that has wide and random circulation.

The typographer must keep in mind that while bluntness and forcefulness are liked by some, they give offense to others.

The typographer should remember that while some people appreciate bluntness and forcefulness, others may find it offensive.

There are orators so eloquent and flowery that one is led away from the message by pleasure and admiration for qualities that should merely carry the message.

There are speakers who are so eloquent and flowery that you get distracted from the message by the pleasure and admiration for qualities that should just support the message.

There are advertisements so attractive in decorative beauty that one sometimes forgets to read them.

There are ads so visually appealing that sometimes you forget to actually read them.

And then there is the heavy-voiced orator who emphasizes every statement. He startles and he tires, and is as unsuccessful as the speaker who croons his audience to sleep with uninteresting monotones. How like such 140speakers are the excitable, over-displayed advertisement, and the large advertisement monotonously set without emphasis, in one size of type!

And then there's the loud speaker who stresses every point. He shocks and exhausts the audience, just like the speaker who puts them to sleep with dull, monotone speech. These speakers remind me of the flashy, overly dramatic advertisements, and the big ads that are just boringly set without any emphasis, using only one font size! 140

EXAMPLE 382

The conversational style of page advertisement

EXAMPLE 382

The casual style of page advertisement

The speaker who gracefully accentuates his talk at important points has the same good judgment as the typographer who neatly displays or emphasizes significant parts of his copy—not forgetting the orator who gets applause at the wrong time, and the printer who by carelessness in arrangement suggests the wrong thought.

The speaker who skillfully highlights key moments in his speech has the same good sense as the typographer who neatly showcases or emphasizes important sections of the text—not to mention the orator who receives applause at the wrong moment, and the printer who, through careless arrangement, conveys the wrong idea.

Many speakers use the same words that Shakespeare used, but “they phrase them differently,” just as printers arrange type differently.

Many speakers use the same words that Shakespeare used, but “they phrase them differently,” just like printers arrange type in different ways.

The orator has a message, and he tries to “get it over.” The advertiser has a message too, and he calls on the typographer to assist him in gaining customers. The problems are not unlike.

The speaker has a message, and he tries to “get it across.” The advertiser has a message as well, and he turns to the typographer for help in attracting customers. The challenges are pretty similar.

EXAMPLE 384

One word is thoroly advertised

EXAMPLE 384

One word is thoroughly advertised

Examples 379 and 380.—These two advertisements picture the difference between setting type with a stick and setting it with the head. It would be illogical to assume that any thought at all was given to the type composition of Example 370. It not only is unpleasant to look at, but is difficult to read, notwithstanding the size of type used for the text. Benjamin Sherbow, who has given much time to the training of type to act for the advertiser, took the same material the newspaper compositor had to work with, and at the crack of his whip the words assumed a new formation. Keep in mind that Mr. Sherbow was not attempting to improve the looks of the advertisement; he did improve the appearance, but what he started out to do was to make the message easy to read. He labored from the viewpoint of the reader and not from that of the advertiser or printer. The difficulty usually is that the merchant and typographer are too close to the details of their own daily occupations and fail to view the advertisement as does the prospective customer.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—These two ads show the difference between using a stick to set type and using the head. It wouldn’t make sense to think any consideration was given to the type layout of Example 370. Not only is it hard on the eyes, but it’s also hard to read, regardless of the size of the text. Benjamin Sherbow, who dedicated a lot of time training type to serve advertisers, took the same materials that the newspaper compositor had and, with a flick of his wrist, reformed the words. Keep in mind that Mr. Sherbow wasn’t just trying to make the ad look nicer; he did enhance its appearance, but his main goal was to make the message easy to read. He worked from the reader’s perspective, not that of the advertiser or printer. The challenge is often that merchants and typographers are too involved in their daily work to see the ad from the perspective of a potential customer.

The important first sentence was emphasized by subordinating the type below. The smaller type is nevertheless easier to read than the same words as originally arranged. The border serves to catch the reader’s attention, as in the newspaper this little advertisement dominated the page.

The key first sentence was highlighted by making the type smaller below. The smaller text is still easier to read than if the words were arranged the same way as before. The border grabs the reader’s attention, similar to how this small ad stood out on the newspaper page.

Example 381 (Insert).—The department-store advertisement as represented by this example is really a multiplication of small advertisements. It is necessary for the writer and printer to give attention in detail to each of the small paneled advertisements, but someone must assemble them into a harmonious whole. This is usually done by first making a layout in actual size. Such a layout as planned for the Lord & Taylor page under consideration probably looked just as this advertisement would look if everything but the panel borders, headlines and illustrations were removed. Each panel was numbered, and the copy in each instance contained a corresponding numeral.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—The department store ad shown in this example is actually a collection of smaller ads. It's important for the writer and designer to focus on each individual panel, but someone needs to put them together into a cohesive whole. This is usually done by creating a layout to scale. The layout planned for the Lord & Taylor page in question probably looked just like this ad would if you removed everything except the panel borders, headlines, and illustrations. Each panel was numbered, and the text in each case included a matching number.

EXAMPLE 383

The name and the trademark depended on to sell goods

EXAMPLE 383

The name and trademark relied upon to sell products

The style of lettering used for the firm name (Caslon italic) is a sort of trademark, as it is to be found on the store’s stationery, on its building and on its delivery cars. The ornamental border, especially the festoon effect at the head, 141is used in all the newspaper advertising. It will be noticed that two of the panels have been accentuated with stronger borders, larger headlines and with decorative illustrations. They are so placed in the general group as to balance pleasingly. Prices are emphasized, but not as they usually are by department stores that appeal more to the class of people who for economical reasons find it necessary to take advantage of bargains. The names of articles in the Lord & Taylor advertisement are set in a neat, bold type-face.

The lettering style used for the company name (Caslon italic) is a kind of trademark, as it's found on the store's stationery, on its building, and on its delivery vehicles. The decorative border, especially the festoon effect at the top, 141 is featured in all the newspaper ads. You'll notice that two of the panels have been highlighted with bolder borders, larger headlines, and decorative illustrations. They are arranged within the overall design to create a visually appealing balance. Prices stand out, but not in the usual way department stores do, which tend to target customers who need to shop for bargains due to budget constraints. The names of items in the Lord & Taylor ad are presented in a clean, bold typeface.

EXAMPLE 385

Interesting use of white space

EXAMPLE 385

Interesting use of white space

Example 382.—This is one of those easily read, conversational styles of advertisement set in Caslon Oldstyle. The first paragraph, in type a size larger than the rest, invites the attention of the reader. The ornament in the upper left corner adds attraction at the introductory point.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This is one of those easy-to-read, conversational styles of advertisement set in Caslon Oldstyle. The first paragraph, in a larger font size than the rest, grabs the reader's attention. The decoration in the upper left corner adds visual appeal at the beginning.

EXAMPLE 387

A study in advertising values

EXAMPLE 387

A study in advertising values

Example 383.—Like the house of Tiffany, the makers of Knox hats do not have much to say in their advertisements. The name and the trademark are depended on to sell the hats. Cloister Oldstyle, the type-face, surrounded by liberal blank space, is effective.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Similar to Tiffany's, the makers of Knox hats don’t say much in their ads. The brand name and logo are what sell the hats. Cloister Oldstyle, the typeface, set against plenty of white space, works really well.

Example 384.—The purpose of this advertisement is to popularize zinc, and for this reason that word stands out so prominently. The rule band at the head and foot attracts the attention, and the Caslon type-face makes the advertisement readable.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The aim of this ad is to promote zinc, which is why the word is so noticeable. The border at the top and bottom grabs attention, and the Caslon font makes the ad easy to read.

Example 385.—An easily read advertisement, due to the size and kind of type and the use of blank space. Hart, Schaffner & Marx appreciate the value of good typography. The two-line initial at the head guides the eye to the beginning of the message. The signature at the foot is so placed that it is not forced on the attention, yet it cannot be missed after the two large paragraphs have been read.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—A clear advertisement, thanks to the font size and style and the use of white space. Hart, Schaffner & Marx understand the importance of good typography. The two-line initial at the top directs the reader's eye to the start of the message. The signature at the bottom is positioned in a way that it doesn’t demand attention, yet it’s noticeable after reading the two large paragraphs.

EXAMPLE 386

A bordered advertisement

A framed ad

Example 386.—This arrangement of an advertisement shows a style liked by the Mellin’s Food Company. The decorative border confines the attention to the reading matter it contains, which is presented in Old-Style Antique, a dark-toned, interesting, 142legible type-face. The display lines are emphasized just enough to make them stand out from the main portion of the text.

Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This ad layout reflects the style preferred by the Mellin’s Food Company. The decorative border directs focus to the text inside, which is presented in Old-Style Antique, a dark and engaging typeface that is easy to read. The display lines are highlighted just enough to distinguish them from the main text. 142

EXAMPLE 388

This pictorial department-store advertisement attracted a great deal of attention in New York newspapers during the holidays

EXAMPLE 388

This flashy department store ad caught a lot of attention in New York newspapers during the holidays.

EXAMPLE 389

The store name does not appear in this large department-store advertisement published in the New York City newspapers

EXAMPLE 389

The store's name isn’t included in this big department store ad that was published in the New York City newspapers.

EXAMPLE 390

Four country-newspaper advertisements, showing slight variation in border treatment

EXAMPLE 390

Four rural newspaper ads, showing slight differences in border design.

Example 387.—The principal points in this advertisement are the name of the company (which is accentuated to catch the eyes of the many who know this house) and the three lines at the head (which are informative to those who may not know the Gorham company). This advertisement serves well as a study in advertising typography. Careless handling of it in the composing-room would have spoiled its effectiveness. The border has probably been used to attract attention, yet it does not interfere with the reading of the advertisement, as the typographer has maintained a liberal margin around the type matter.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The main points in this ad are the company name (which is highlighted to grab the attention of those familiar with this brand) and the three lines at the top (which provide information for those who might not know about the Gorham company). This ad serves as a great example of advertising typography. If it had been poorly handled in the printing process, its effectiveness would have been ruined. The border was probably added to draw attention, but it doesn't disrupt the readability of the ad since the typographer has kept a wide margin around the text.

Example 388.—This is one of the many clever advertisements that are inserted in newspapers by John Wanamaker, and is different from most others because it is a picture-story of the goods on sale. The type matter is secondary thruout excepting in the introductory panel at the head, which is displayed merely to call attention to the style of the advertisement and to the name of the advertiser.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This is one of the many smart ads placed in newspapers by John Wanamaker, and it stands out from most because it uses a visual narrative to showcase the products for sale. The text is mostly secondary throughout, except for the introductory panel at the top, which is just there to grab attention to the advertisement's style and the advertiser's name.

Example 389.—Few printers have seen a department-store advertisement just like this one. It does not contain the name of the advertiser, and there is practically no display. It looks more like a story in a general magazine. A few circular illustrations are so placed as to relieve the monotony of the columns of text, and a decorative piece is placed on both sides of the heading. The page is also made interesting by the use of space between paragraphs.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Few printers have come across a department-store ad like this one. It doesn't include the advertiser's name, and there's almost no display involved. It resembles an article in a general magazine. A few circular illustrations are positioned to break up the monotony of the text columns, and decorative pieces are added on either side of the heading. The page is also made engaging by using space between the paragraphs.

EXAMPLE 391

A good-looking page advertisement that was easily read

EXAMPLE 391

An attractive page ad that was easy to read

EXAMPLE 392

Typography and shape of this four-column advertisement suggested by the architecture of the tall building pictured

EXAMPLE 392

The typography and layout of this four-column ad are inspired by the architecture of the tall building shown.

Example 390 (Insert).—The most difficult copy to arrange well is probably that supplied country newspapers by their advertisers. There is seldom much to the copy, and it is almost always necessary to use display unsupported by the solid paragraphs of text that soften the contrast in advertisements that appear in city dailies. Here are four advertisements different in size and representative of small-town business. Some one has urged that fancy borders be not used in the small-town newspaper, and that the rules for borders be the same thruout. This advice is probably wrong, as it was tried in this instance and the effect was found to be monotonous and uninteresting. The same rule border is used around each advertisement, but to obtain contrast an additional rule has been added to the coal advertisement and a holiday border and another rule to the general-store advertisement. These slight variations in border treatment add a great deal of interest to the page. Each advertiser is entitled to an individual hearing, 144and this is only possible when there is some distinct feature found in his advertisement alone. In the city newspapers each department store usually has a distinctive type-face which appears in no other advertisement. In the small-town newspaper it may not be possible for the publisher to render such service, but an effort in the same direction can be made by varying the border treatment. The type-faces used in this example are Bodoni and Bodoni Bold. With the use of the Bold, emphasis is given at proper points in each of the four advertisements. In the largest one it is used for the name of the firm, in the smallest one it sets forth the name of the café, and in the other two advertisements it emphasizes the name of the business. There may be another way to arrange the names of the articles in the general-store advertisement, but it is doubtful if any other arrangement would make reading easier. Typographers who are inclined to treat lightly the problems of the small-town printer should attempt to improve these advertisements.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. (Insert).—The hardest ads to arrange well are probably those from advertisers in local newspapers. They usually don’t have much content, and it’s almost always necessary to use eye-catching display without the solid paragraphs of text that help soften the contrast in ads found in city newspapers. Here are four ads, varying in size and representing small-town businesses. Someone has suggested that fancy borders should be avoided in local newspapers, and that all borders should be consistent. However, this advice is likely off-base, as it was tested here and found to be dull and unappealing. The same border style is used around each ad, but to create some contrast, an extra rule has been added to the coal ad, along with a holiday border and another rule for the general-store ad. These small changes in border design add a lot of interest to the page. Each advertiser deserves their own unique presentation, which is only possible when there's a distinct feature in their ad. In city newspapers, each department store typically has a unique typeface that isn’t used by any other ad. In a local newspaper, it may not be feasible for the publisher to provide that service, but an effort can be made by varying the border designs. The typefaces used in this example are Bodoni and Bodoni Bold. The Bold style emphasizes key points in each of the four ads. In the largest ad, it's used for the business name, in the smallest one for the name of the coffee shop, and in the other two ads, it highlights the business names. There might be other ways to arrange the names of the products in the general-store ad, but it’s questionable if any other arrangement would make it easier to read. Typographers who tend to underestimate the challenges faced by small-town printers should try to improve these ads.

EXAMPLE 393

A page in which attractive typography was possible in spite of a long list of agents

EXAMPLE 393

A page where appealing typography was achievable despite a lengthy list of agents.

Example 391.—The style of treatment of this trade-journal advertisement is influenced to some extent by the article advertised, yet there is no reason why this treatment would not be suitable for many advertisements of another kind. The heavy-and-light-line rule border is of a darker tone than the type page and for this reason adds color and interest. There is sufficient blank space between the border and type matter to allow for the text being read without interference. The capitals in the headings are letterspaced, the letterspacing not only giving them character, but making them more legible. The text matter is introduced with an initial that extends upward from the first line instead of downward as most initials are placed. This advertisement is of the conversational style, arranged for easy reading.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—The way this trade journal advertisement is styled is partly influenced by the article it promotes, but there's no reason this approach wouldn't work for many other types of ads. The border with heavy and light lines is darker than the text area, which adds color and interest. There’s enough blank space between the border and the text so that the content can be read clearly. The headings use letterspacing, which not only gives them a unique look but also makes them easier to read. The text starts with an initial that extends upward from the first line instead of downward like most initials. This ad has a conversational style, arranged for easy reading.

Example 392.—Some one has decreed that text types shall not be used in advertisements, but fortunately those responsible for the planning of this advertisement paid no attention to the decree. The advertisement was inserted in newspapers for the purpose of calling attention to the new building in the Gothic style of architecture erected for the Hampton Shops. Any one who has studied the details of a Gothic structure such as this or the Woolworth Building has felt the influence of the long, narrow lines found in Gothic architecture. The shape of this advertisement and the thin, pointed character of the text type used are in splendid harmony with the general idea.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—Someone has decided that certain text types shouldn’t be used in ads, but luckily the people who planned this advertisement ignored that rule. The ad was placed in newspapers to draw attention to the new building designed in Gothic architecture for the Hampton Shops. Anyone who has looked at the details of a Gothic structure like this or the Woolworth Building has experienced the impact of the long, narrow lines typical of Gothic design. The shape of this advertisement and the sleek, pointed style of the text type used work perfectly together with the overall idea.

Example 393.—There was presented to the designer of this advertisement the problem of including in legible size a long list of cities and agents and yet reserving sufficient space in which to give due prominence to the text matter. The solution of the problem was the long, narrow panel at the left. While the entire advertisement is easily read, especially in its larger form, and probably has the approval of those who insist on legibility in advertising composition, there is yet something about it that will also interest those who maintain that typography should be built on art principles. The border, trademark and name of the article advertised blend in tone, while the remaining type matter shows a pleasing gray. Inserting the trademark in the space left by the shorter words of the heading makes the effect unusual.

Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—The designer of this advertisement faced the challenge of fitting a long list of cities and agents in a readable size while still leaving enough room to highlight the main text. The solution was the long, narrow panel on the left. Although the entire advertisement is easy to read, especially in its larger format, and likely satisfies those who prioritize legibility in advertising design, it also captivates those who believe typography should be based on artistic principles. The border, trademark, and the product name harmonize in tone, while the other text displays a nice gray. Placing the trademark in the space created by the shorter words in the heading gives it a unique effect.

EXAMPLE 394

An advertisement planned to sell high-priced cars

EXAMPLE 394

An ad designed to sell luxury cars

Example 394.—This is one of a series of newspaper advertisements prepared for the Locomobile Company by T. M. Cleland. Planned to sell automobiles costing five or six thousand dollars, it naturally is treated differently 145from an advertisement that would sell cheaper cars. The decorative crest is a factor in the effectiveness of this advertisement, and the italic with the swash capitals helps to give a touch of exclusiveness. It is an advertisement that will stand out on the average newspaper page.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This is one of a series of newspaper ads created for the Locomobile Company by T. M. Cleland. Since it's meant to sell cars priced at five or six thousand dollars, it's naturally approached differently than an ad for less expensive vehicles. The decorative crest plays a role in the ad's effectiveness, and the italicized text with swash capitals adds a sense of exclusivity. It’s an ad that will stand out on a typical newspaper page. 145

EXAMPLE 395

Roman lettering and Roman architecture

EXAMPLE 395

Roman letters and Roman buildings

Example 395.—This advertisement has qualities similar to those of Example 392, the typography of which was suggested by the architecture of a building. Here we have an illustration of a building in Roman architecture, hence it is suitable that the type should be Forum, which is based on Roman carved lettering, and that the border should contain lines that suggest an architectural panel. Of course, this matter of harmonizing the plan of an advertisement with the architecture of a building can be overdone. An advertisement is not necessarily a good advertisement because of such harmony, yet if an advertisement is readably presented, harmonious type selection and arrangement should add effectiveness.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—This advertisement shares qualities with Example 392, whose typography was inspired by a building's architecture. Here, we see an illustration of a building in Roman style, so it's fitting that the typeface is Forum, which is based on Roman carved lettering, and that the border features lines reminiscent of an architectural panel. Of course, trying too hard to match an advertisement's design with a building's architecture can go too far. An advertisement doesn't automatically become a good one just because of that harmony, but if it's presented clearly, a well-chosen and arranged type can enhance its effectiveness.

Example 396.—This advertisement in a way suggests Example 385, and in contrast with that example furnishes a study in the use of blank space. In the Hart, Schaffner & Marx advertisement the margin is equal on both sides, and monotony is avoided by having the margin at the foot of the type group more than on the sides. In this Kodak page the text group is courageously pushed to the extreme upper right corner, and all of the blank space is assembled at the left and at the foot. The use of so much space is probably for the purpose of attracting attention, which it undoubtedly does. Nevertheless, it is possible that the advertisement would look better if the text group were treated as in Example 385.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This ad kind of hints at Example 385, and compared to that example, it provides a look at how to use blank space effectively. In the Hart, Schaffner & Marx ad, the margins are equal on both sides, and it avoids monotony by making the bottom margin of the text group larger than the side margins. In this Kodak page, the text is boldly pushed to the top right corner, with all the blank space gathered on the left and at the bottom. The extensive use of space is probably meant to grab attention, which it definitely does. Still, the ad might look better if the text group were arranged like in Example 385.

EXAMPLE 396

Uncommon placing of blank space to attract attention

EXAMPLE 396

Unique use of blank space to grab attention

EXAMPLE 397

The modest display of a large magazine advertisement

EXAMPLE 397

The simple presentation of a big magazine ad

146Example 397.—This advertisement has been reduced considerably, as it originally occupied a large magazine page. For effectiveness the typographic treatment was depended on, and, as will be seen, it is unusually neat. The headline and the name of the company are the only suggestions of display on the page. The illustration, of course, is to catch the reader’s attention.

146Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.—This ad has been significantly downsized, as it used to fill a full magazine page. The success of the ad relies on its typography, which is notably clean. The headline and the company's name are the only elements meant to stand out on the page. The illustration is, of course, designed to grab the reader's attention.

EXAMPLE 398

The blank space emphasizes the illustration

EXAMPLE 398

The empty space highlights the illustration

Example 398.—Altho this is a lettered advertisement, it is a good example of blank space used to attract attention not only to the advertisement, but to the illustration, which here is really of the most importance. It should be noticed how the blank space in the upper right portion clears the way for a view of the automobile. Many advertisers are using a strip of white space in their advertisements, at the right or at the left.

Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.—Although this is a labeled advertisement, it serves as a great example of using blank space to draw attention not just to the ad, but also to the illustration, which here is actually the most important part. You can see how the blank space in the upper right section makes it easier to see the automobile. Many advertisers are incorporating a strip of white space in their ads, either on the right or the left.

Example 399.—The treatment of this advertisement proves that it is not absolutely necessary to have the typography of country-newspaper advertisements as formal as that presented in Example 390. For general newspaper use Bodoni modern might have preference over the more interesting Cloister Oldstyle, yet a newspaper treated entirely in old-style type-faces would be likable. If this advertisement were placed on the average newspaper advertising page, it would stand out strongly because of the blank space used around the type group, the restful and pleasing type-face and the dark-toned border.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—The way this ad is designed shows that it's not absolutely necessary to have the typography of country newspaper ads as formal as what’s shown in Example 390. For general newspaper use, Bodoni modern might be preferred over the more unique Cloister Oldstyle, but a newspaper entirely in old-style typefaces would still be appealing. If this ad were placed on an average newspaper advertising page, it would really stand out due to the blank space around the text, the calm and attractive typeface, and the dark-toned border.

Example 400.—The manner in which this page of advertisements is treated should have suggestion for newspaper and periodical publishers who wish to make their classified-advertising sections more interesting. This page, from a trade publication (The American Printer), was set in eight-point type instead of the six-point that some publications usually use. It is a mistake to use type smaller than eight-point for matter that is supposed to be read. The expense and the time necessary to put in initials at the beginning of each advertisement are avoided by capitalizing the first word and setting it flush with the end of the line. Instead of using the stereotyped “Help Wanted” and “Situations Wanted” headings, human interest was introduced by phrasing each heading as a question, as would likely be done on a larger advertisement.

Understood. Please provide the text for modernization.—The way this page of ads is designed should inspire newspaper and magazine publishers who want to make their classified sections more engaging. This page, taken from a trade magazine (The American Printer), was printed in eight-point type instead of the six-point type that some publications typically use. It's a mistake to use type smaller than eight-point for content meant to be read. The costs and time involved in putting initials at the start of each ad can be avoided by capitalizing the first word and aligning it with the end of the line. Instead of using the standard “Help Wanted” and “Situations Wanted” headings, a personal touch was added by phrasing each heading as a question, similar to what would be seen in larger ads.

EXAMPLE 399

A country-newspaper advertisement

A local newspaper ad

EXAMPLE 400

Suggested for treatment of classified ad. sections

EXAMPLE 400

Recommended for handling classified ad sections.

EXAMPLE 403

The neat typography and well-balanced make-up of a suburban newspaper

EXAMPLE 403

The clean layout and balanced design of a suburban newspaper

147

NEWSPAPERS

We are all familiar with the modeling clay with which children amuse themselves. They take a portion of gray clay, mold it into some shape, and decorate it with small portions of red, yellow and blue clay. After they tire of their production they knead it with their fingers and lo! the bright colors disappear and there remains only the neutral gray.

We all know the modeling clay that kids play with. They grab some gray clay, shape it into something, and then add little bits of red, yellow, and blue clay for decoration. When they get bored with their creation, they squish it with their fingers, and just like that, the bright colors vanish, leaving only the dull gray.

EXAMPLE 401

The first and only number of America’s first newspaper

EXAMPLE 401

The first and only issue of America's first newspaper

The only way the typographical appearance of the average newspaper can be improved is by first reducing the glaring headlines and heterogeneous assortment of type-faces to a neutral gray. Upon this drab background the details of suitable and harmonious typographic form can be built.

The only way to improve the look of the average newspaper is by first toning down the bold headlines and mixed typefaces to a neutral gray. On this plain background, we can create details of fitting and balanced typography.

However, it is easier to assert that the typography of newspapers can be improved than it is to improve it. In the early days of newspaper publishing the problem was a simple one, but today the newspapers of the large cities have hundreds of thousands of readers to serve, and much of the prevailing poor typography has resulted from efforts to present the news to these readers in a way that editors assume will please them best, without giving any thought to technical defects in the type work.

However, it's easier to say that the typography of newspapers can be improved than actually to improve it. In the early days of newspaper publishing, the problem was straightforward, but nowadays, the newspapers in major cities have hundreds of thousands of readers to cater to. Much of the ongoing bad typography has come from attempts to present the news in a way that editors think will please these readers the most, without considering the technical flaws in the type design.

EXAMPLE 402

First number of the first American newspaper issued regularly

EXAMPLE 402

The first issue of the first regular American newspaper

EXAMPLE 404

Front-page make-up of a Hearst newspaper on the occasion of a big story. All of the display headings are probably too large

EXAMPLE 404

Front-page layout of a Hearst newspaper for a big story. All of the display headings are likely too big.

EXAMPLE 405

The same news story, featured by the conservative “Times.” Headings are mostly well balanced. Note the use of panels

EXAMPLE 405

The same news story, highlighted by the conservative “Times.” The headings are mostly well balanced. Notice the use of panels.

148The ideal newspaper would probably be one in which the reader finds it easy to locate and read the articles in which he is interested, and in which the contents are presented in an orderly, good-looking, well-balanced and harmonious manner.

148The perfect newspaper would likely be one where readers can easily find and read the articles they're interested in, with content displayed in a clear, attractive, balanced, and harmonious way.

The Title.—The name of the newspaper at the head of the front page should be distinctive in design, and it would probably add interest if the style of the letters composing the title bore some relation to that used at the time the publication was founded. Unfortunately, on most newspapers the headings are altered every time a new type dress is adopted.

The Title.—The name of the newspaper at the top of the front page should have a unique design, and it would probably be more interesting if the style of the letters used for the title reflected the style that was popular when the publication started. Unfortunately, in most newspapers, the headings change whenever a new typeface is introduced.

For titles, most publishers of city newspapers seem to have a liking for English or German text letters. Such letters are doubtless good for the purpose, as they are different from any that appear elsewhere in newspapers. The New York Sun, as an instance, uses a black German text letter, altho on its first issue in 1833 the title head appeared in modern roman capitals.

For titles, most city newspaper publishers seem to prefer English or German text letters. These letters are definitely suitable for the purpose, as they stand out from any others in newspapers. The New York Sun, for example, uses a bold German text letter, although in its first issue in 1833, the title was presented in modern Roman capitals.

It has become a practice to make use of the blank space on both ends of the title line, and in such spaces will now be found weather forecasts, slogans such as “All the News That’s Fit to Print,” and edition names. (See Example 405.) It was the custom at one time, and is today to some extent, to print under the title a quotation which defined the newspaper’s editorial policy. (See Example 403.)

It has become common to use the blank space on both ends of the title line, and in those spaces you'll now find weather forecasts, slogans like “All the News That’s Fit to Print,” and edition names. (See Example 405.) It was once customary, and still is to some extent, to print a quotation under the title that defined the newspaper’s editorial policy. (See Example 403.)

A type line under the title separated by rules on both sides contains the name of the city, the date, the volume number, and information regarding the price. (See Example 403.) Usually the rules have a double line, altho some newspapers use single rules for this purpose.

A type line under the title, separated by lines on both sides, includes the name of the city, the date, the volume number, and pricing information. (See Example 403.) Typically, the lines are double, although some newspapers use single lines for this.

The Text.—The main desire of newspaper publishers, besides preparing the news, seems to be to have the matter set in the smallest size of type that can possibly be read. The large city dailies habitually use a seven-point type-face, which is the smallest that should appear on any newspaper. (See Example 406.) During the recent prevailing high cost of print paper some publishers began to use six-point in order to save paper, but they found that this move was a mistake. Newspapers are published to be read, and everything possible should be done to make the reader’s task an easy one. Experiments by an educational body in England resulted in determining that ten-point should be the minimum size of type used for educational purposes. From this it will be seen that the seven-point type used on newspapers is too small and a cause of eyestrain.

The Text.—The main goal of newspaper publishers, aside from reporting the news, appears to be getting the text printed in the smallest readable type size. The major city newspapers typically use a seven-point font, which is the smallest that should be used in any newspaper. (See Example 406.) Recently, due to the high cost of printing paper, some publishers started using six-point font to save paper, but they realized that this was a mistake. Newspapers are meant to be read, and everything possible should be done to make it easy for the reader. Research by an educational organization in England found that ten-point font should be the minimum size used for educational materials. This indicates that the seven-point font used in newspapers is too small and contributes to eyestrain.

The narrow width of the columns of newspapers—twelve and a half or thirteen picas—makes reading of the small type fairly easy, however. The eye has been tested scientifically and the discovery made that a person actually sees at a glance less than an inch of a line of type. Hence long lines require extreme side movements of the eyeballs or of the head. It is a mistake, as will be seen, to set editorials in a measure that extends over two columns, as is done on some publications.

The narrow width of newspaper columns—twelve and a half or thirteen picas—makes it relatively easy to read the small print. Studies have shown that a person can only see less than an inch of a line of text at a glance. As a result, longer lines force the eyes or head to move too much. It’s a mistake, as will be demonstrated, to layout editorials in a way that spans two columns, as some publications do.

Space between lines also helps the reader in locating the beginning of the next line, for which reason, and also to give them prominence, editorials are usually leaded. The beginning of an important article is sometimes leaded.

Space between lines also helps the reader find the start of the next line, which is why editorials are usually spaced out. The start of an important article is sometimes also spaced out.

Lengthy excerpts or quotations are usually set in the same size of type but indented one em at the right and left ends of the line. (See Example 405, third column.)

Lengthy excerpts or quotes are typically formatted in the same font size but indented one em on both the left and right sides of the line. (See Example 405, third column.)

The Headings.—The first newspaper continuously published in this country was a letter (see Example 402), and the items it contained were not set off with headings. As the quantity of news increased and newspapers became larger in size, headings were added. During the middle of the last century most of these were side headings joined to the first paragraph. When it became possible to print news promptly more attention was given to displaying the headings. As the Civil War developed, newspaper headlines grew, and with the Spanish War came front-page headings of poster proportions.

The Headings.—The first continuously published newspaper in this country was a letter (see Example 402), and the items it included weren't separated with headings. As the amount of news grew and newspapers expanded, headings were introduced. By the middle of the last century, most of these were side headings connected to the first paragraph. When it became possible to print news quickly, more attention was paid to how the headings were displayed. As the Civil War unfolded, newspaper headlines got bigger, and during the Spanish War, front-page headings reached poster-sized proportions.

Headlines not only advertise the contents of the text pages, but assist the reader quickly to absorb the news. As the reader cannot in these busy days read the entire paper, headings assist him in locating the items in which he is interested.

Headlines not only promote the contents of the text pages but also help the reader quickly absorb the news. Since readers can't read the entire paper in these busy times, headings help them find the items they're interested in.

The error of using thrilling scareheads for comparatively unimportant events was made evident when the European War started. Some of the publications had cried “Wolf!” so frequently that there was no emphasis left for a really big story.

The mistake of using sensational headlines for relatively minor events became clear when the European War began. Some publications had shouted "Wolf!" so often that there was no weight left for a truly major story.

EXAMPLE 406

Actual size of a well-treated four-deck Heading

EXAMPLE 406

Real size of a well-treated four-deck Heading

Head-letter type should not be intensely black, unless the reader is expected to read only the headlines. It is irritating to attempt to read the text matter in an article if strong black headlines continually glare at you. (See Example 404.) The head letter should be just a trifle darker in tone than the background of text type, or if liberal leading is possible a letter the same tone as the text is suitable.

Headlines shouldn't be too bold, unless the reader is only supposed to look at the titles. It's annoying to try to read the main text in an article when the strong, dark headlines keep catching your eye. (See Example 404.) The headline should be slightly darker than the main text background, or if there's enough spacing between lines, a headline the same color as the text is also okay.

Because of the narrowness of newspaper columns it is necessary that type for headlines shall be slightly condensed, especially for the large lines. As few type-faces are legible in a condensed form, it is a problem to select a type-face for this purpose. Probably the most successful type-face of this kind has proved to be Latin Antique Condensed, a letter that has been in such use for a number of years. (See Example 406.)

Because newspaper columns are narrow, it’s important to use slightly condensed type for headlines, especially for larger lines. Since not many typefaces are readable when condensed, choosing the right one can be challenging. The typeface that has worked best for this is Latin Antique Condensed, which has been in use for many years. (See Example 406.)

It is, of course, best to have all type-faces harmonious in design, but the requirements of the newspaper are so unusual that in order to secure contrast this rule must be 150violated. In Example 403 will be seen the neat and restful effect that is possible by using thruout type that is harmonious, yet there is a monotony to the page that could probably be overcome by substituting, say, italic for roman in several of the headings. On the page of the New York Times (Example 405) will be found headings in italic. Lower-case italic looks well used for the main lines of a double-column heading.

It’s definitely best to have all typefaces match in style, but the unique needs of newspapers are such that in order to create contrast, this guideline sometimes has to be broken. In Example 403, you can see the clean and calming effect achieved by using consistent type that is harmonious. However, the page can feel a bit monotonous, which could likely be improved by replacing some of the headings with italic instead of roman. On the page of the New York Times (Example 405), you’ll notice italic headings. Lower-case italic looks great when used for the main lines of a double-column heading.

EXAMPLE 407

The sporting page of the New York “Tribune,” showing interesting make-up

EXAMPLE 407

The sports section of the New York “Tribune,” featuring an engaging layout

It is well first to harmonize the newspaper page, as in Example 403, and then add needed contrast, as in most newspapers attempts at contrast are so frequent that the result is confusing.

It’s important to first balance the newspaper page, like in Example 403, and then add the necessary contrast. In many newspapers, attempts at contrast happen so often that it ends up being confusing.

Paneled headings also add variety; specimens of such headings will be found in Examples 404, 407 and 408.

Paneled headings also bring variety; examples of these headings can be found in Examples 404, 407 and 408.

Restraint in the use of display headings by the New York Times, as compared with the noisy scareheads of the New York American used in reporting the same news, will be seen by comparing Example 405 with Example 404.

Restraint in the use of display headings by the New York Times, compared to the loud, attention-grabbing headlines of the New York American reporting the same news, can be observed by comparing Example 405 with Example 404.

What is called a four-deck single-column heading, as used by the New York Times, is shown actual size in Example 406. Latin Antique Condensed is used for the first two lines and Newspaper Gothic for the other three decks. This heading as it stands is perhaps the most pleasing and legible of those used by metropolitan newspapers. A four-deck heading should present in the first deck the feature of the story; the first deck, and if possible every other deck in the heading, should contain a verb. The third deck is really the second in importance, and, like the first one, is usually set in capitals. The size of the lower-case used for the fourth deck is usually smaller than that used for the second. It would be a mistake to use capitals for the second and fourth decks, as the result would be monotonous and illegible. The small section of text matter accompanying the head also shows a seven-point face on an eight-point slug, as used by the Times.

What’s referred to as a four-deck single-column heading, like the one used by the New York Times, is displayed in actual size in Example 406. The first two lines are in Latin Antique Condensed, while the other three decks are in Newspaper Gothic. This heading is arguably the most attractive and readable among those used by major newspapers. A four-deck heading should highlight the feature of the story in the first deck; that deck, and ideally every other deck, should include a verb. The third deck is actually the second most important, and like the first, it’s typically in all caps. The lowercase text in the fourth deck is usually smaller than that in the second. Using all caps for the second and fourth decks would be a mistake, as it would make the text monotonous and hard to read. The small section of text accompanying the heading also features a seven-point font on an eight-point slug, similar to what the Times uses.

The Make-up.—In the make-up of a newspaper the sometimes derided “art tenets” should not be neglected. A good-looking newspaper has well-balanced headings, properly placed illustrations, and the various typographic details treated according to the requirements of good taste. Large display headings are usually alternated at the head of the page with small headings, which arrangement not only looks well, but enables the reader to peruse one heading without interference from another.

The Makeup.—In the layout of a newspaper, the often mocked “art principles” should not be overlooked. A visually appealing newspaper features well-balanced headlines, appropriately placed images, and various typography elements handled according to good taste standards. Large display headlines are typically alternated at the top of the page with smaller headlines, which not only looks good but also allows the reader to focus on one headline without distraction from another.

It is the practice of most good newspapers not to have advertisements appear on the front page, which is given over to the important news of the day. As will be seen by Examples 404 and 405, the article of most importance, no matter how large the heading given to it, appears in the furthermost right column, whence it is usually continued to the second page. Example 403 also shows how an important article can be featured in the center of the page.

It is common practice for most good newspapers to avoid placing advertisements on the front page, which is reserved for the day’s important news. As shown in Examples 404 and 405, the most significant article, regardless of the size of its headline, appears in the far-right column, where it typically continues onto the second page. Example 403 also illustrates how an important article can be showcased in the center of the page.

Interest and variety are also obtained by the use of a one-point rule around a portion of the news, as will be seen on Examples 404 and 405. The type matter on the inside is set close to, but not against, the rule panel.

Interest and variety are also achieved by using a one-point rule around a section of the news, as shown in Examples 404 and 405. The text inside is placed close to, but not touching, the rule panel.

The editorials on most newspapers are to be found on the sixth page, and on the same page letters to the editors are also placed. There is a movement, begun by the Hearst newspapers, to have the editorials appear on the last page so that they may be read without the necessity of locating them in the paper.

The editorials in most newspapers are found on the sixth page, and letters to the editor are also placed on that page. There's a push, started by the Hearst newspapers, to move the editorials to the last page so that they can be read without having to search for them in the paper.

The sporting page has also come to be an important feature of the newspaper. An attractively arranged sporting page is shown in Example 407.

The sports section has also become an important part of the newspaper. A well-organized sports page is shown in Example 407.

It is customary to build advertisements from the lower right corner of the page in a step or pyramid arrangement. (See Example 408.) This allows most of the text matter to appear at the left and in the upper portion of the page, and also makes it easy to give position next to reading matter as required by some advertisers.

It’s common to create ads starting from the lower right corner of the page in a step or pyramid format. (See Example 408.) This setup lets most of the text be located on the left and the upper part of the page, and it also makes it easy to position them next to the content, as requested by some advertisers.

EXAMPLE 408

So-called pyramid make-up of a newspaper’s advertisements. A “make-believe” newspaper

EXAMPLE 408

The pyramid structure of a newspaper’s ads. A “fake” newspaper

EXAMPLE 409

Church book decorative treatment by Will Bradley Featured on a Thanksgiving number of “Collier’s”

EXAMPLE 409

Decorative design for a church book by Will Bradley Featured in a Thanksgiving issue of “Collier’s”

151

PERIODICALS

The typography and the make-up of periodicals in the century last past were sedate and uninteresting to most Americans. As a consequence there came a change, and publishers endeavored to make their publications more attractive to readers. The letterer and the decorator were permitted to let their fancies run free over the magazine pages, and assuming that their readers had poor taste and weak eyesight the publishers of trade journals splattered their pages with ugly black circus poster type.

The design and layout of magazines from the last century were calm and often boring for most Americans. As a result, a shift occurred, and publishers worked to make their publications more appealing to readers. Designers and illustrators were allowed to unleash their creativity across magazine pages, and believing that their readers had bad taste and poor eyesight, the publishers of trade journals filled their pages with garish black circus-style fonts.

So long as there is poor printing (we read in the Good Book: “For ye have the poor always with you”) there will be periodicals typographically poor. Yet, thanks to those who have trained themselves as typographic advisors, many American periodicals are now good to look at and at the same time easy to read.

As long as there is poor printing (as it says in the Good Book: “For you will always have the poor with you”), there will be periodicals that are poorly designed. However, thanks to those who have trained as typography experts, many American periodicals are now visually appealing and easy to read.

EXAMPLE 410

Dignity in make-up and type treatment. By Walter Gilliss

EXAMPLE 410

Respect in makeup and style treatment. By Walter Gilliss

We will consider the dimensions of the publication, the front cover, number of columns, the margins, type-faces for the text and for the headings, make-up of the illustrations, arrangement of headings, the captions, the editorial pages, features, and the advertisements.

We will look at the size of the publication, the front cover, number of columns, margins, fonts for the text and headings, layout of the illustrations, placement of headings, captions, editorial pages, features, and advertisements.


The Dimensions.—Whim has much to do with the selection of sizes for periodicals, and precedent, or what the other fellow is using, has some influence also. Assembled and stood on end, several dozen periodicals gathered at random present the appearance of a platoon of “rookie” soldiers before they have been ranged according to hight.

The Dimensions.—Choosing sizes for magazines often depends on personal preference, and what others are using plays a role too. When a bunch of magazines is piled up and stood on end, they look like a group of rookie soldiers before they've been lined up by height.

Sixty-six business and technical publications were recently measured by the writer, and the dimensions of about half of them approximated 9 × 12 inches. The other half varied from 6 × 9 to 10 × 15 inches.

Sixty-six business and technical publications were recently measured by the writer, and about half of them were approximately 9 × 12 inches. The other half ranged from 6 × 9 to 10 × 15 inches.

EXAMPLE 411

Harmony of the type-faces used for heading and text

EXAMPLE 411

Consistency in the fonts used for headings and body text

Examination of about two score of magazines revealed three groups of dimensions: 7 × 10, 9 × 12 and 11 × 14 inches. These dimensions are approximate, few magazines measuring 152exactly the same, the variations amounting to half an inch in some instances and several inches in others.

An examination of about twenty magazines showed three sizes: 7 × 10, 9 × 12, and 11 × 14 inches. These dimensions are approximate, as few magazines measure 152 exactly the same, with variations of up to half an inch in some cases and several inches in others.

EXAMPLE 412

Advertising the story to the readers

EXAMPLE 412

Promoting the story to the readers

EXAMPLE 414

Style of make-up of these three pages suggested by Benjamin Sherbow

EXAMPLE 414

Makeup style for these three pages suggested by Benjamin Sherbow

EXAMPLE 413

Interesting heading treatment and inserted feature panel

EXAMPLE 413

Engaging header design and added feature panel

Scribner’s is a type of the magazine in the 7 × 10 class (the actual measurement being a trifle minus); the Independent, of the 9 × 12 class (actual measurement 8¾ × 12 inches); and the Saturday Evening Post, of the 11 × 14 class, measuring exactly that size.

Scribner’s is a magazine in the 7 × 10 size class (actually a bit smaller); the Independent is in the 9 × 12 size class (actually measuring 8¾ × 12 inches); and the Saturday Evening Post is in the 11 × 14 size class, measuring exactly that size.

There has been a movement among magazines away from the smaller dimensions toward the larger, for the purpose of better displaying features and of enabling reading matter to be placed alongside of advertisements.

There has been a trend among magazines moving from smaller sizes to larger ones, aimed at better showcasing features and allowing text to be placed next to advertisements.

To a similar extent the business and technical publications have experienced reductions from the very large sizes that originally were probably inspired by the bigness of newspapers.

To a similar extent, business and technical publications have seen decreases from the large sizes that were likely originally influenced by the size of newspapers.

There are also a few small pocket magazines of the Philistine size that Elbert Hubbard made popular.

There are also a few small pocket magazines of the Philistine size that Elbert Hubbard made popular.


The Front Cover.—Typography has little to do with the average cover of the general magazine in America. The foundation of the design is usually a painting, the subject being seasonable or otherwise appropriate. Lettering and decoration are added by an artist other than the one drawing the picture. In such cases the design is changed with every issue. Some magazines, the more conservative ones, use a design containing lettering and decoration only, and with each issue merely change such lettering as refers to editorial features.

The Cover.—Typography doesn't play a big role in the typical cover of general magazines in America. The design usually starts with a painting that fits the season or is otherwise relevant. An artist who isn't the one creating the illustration adds the lettering and decoration. In these instances, the design changes with every issue. Some magazines, particularly the more traditional ones, feature a design that includes only lettering and decoration, and with each issue, they simply update the lettering that pertains to the editorial features.

The European custom of printing a paid advertisement on the front cover of periodicals has extended to America, and, while such advertisements will not be found on the general magazines, some business and technical periodicals have succumbed to the temptation thus offered for increased revenue.

The European practice of printing a paid ad on the front cover of magazines has made its way to America, and while you won't see these ads in mainstream magazines, some business and technical publications have given in to the temptation for extra income.

When the front cover is sold, only an inch or so is retained for the title of the periodical. One publisher did stipulate that no color in the cover advertisement should come within two inches of the title; but even this rule is now disregarded on his periodicals. The time may yet come 153when the title of a publication will appear at the foot of the front cover in six-point.

When the front cover is sold, only about an inch is left for the magazine's title. One publisher did require that no color in the cover ad should be within two inches of the title, but even this rule is now ignored in his magazines. The time might come when the title of a publication will be printed in six-point at the bottom of the front cover. 153

EXAMPLE 415

Headings and text matter in the same face of type, Scotch Roman

EXAMPLE 415

Headings and text should be in the same typeface, Scotch Roman.

EXAMPLE 416

Type of medium strength and use of a small illustration in heading

EXAMPLE 416

Type of medium strength and use of a small illustration in the heading

154

EXAMPLE 410-A

Section of text matter from the “World’s Work”

(Monotype No. 22-E, 10-point on 11-point body, 10 set)

EXAMPLE 410-A

Section of text matter from the “World’s Work”

(Monotype No. 22-E, 10-point on 11-point body, 10 set)

A weekly technical periodical in every issue has some appropriate view made into halftone and uses it inside a large panel under the title, and a photographic journal prints a reproduction of an artistic photograph on the cover, changing the subject with each issue.

A weekly technical magazine features a relevant image in halftone in each issue, placed inside a large panel under the title, while a photography journal showcases a reproduction of an artistic photo on the cover, changing the subject with every issue.


Columns.—The number of columns to a page should be decided by the size of type used. Seven-point and eight-point type should be confined in columns twelve or thirteen picas wide. Ten-point, eleven-point and twelve-point type can be read even if the columns are sixteen or more picas wide. However, no column in a book or periodical should exceed twenty-four picas. Neither should a column be unreasonably narrow.

Columns.—The number of columns on a page should depend on the size of the type used. Seven-point and eight-point type should be limited to columns that are twelve or thirteen picas wide. Ten-point, eleven-point, and twelve-point type can be read even if the columns are sixteen or more picas wide. However, no column in a book or periodical should be wider than twenty-four picas. Also, a column shouldn’t be unreasonably narrow.

Scientific tests show that the eye is strained in the reading of wide columns. The column should be of such width that reading of the matter can be accomplished with only slight movements of the eyes to the right, after they have been focused at the beginning of the line to fit the size of type. When the column is too wide the head must be moved to the right and left with the reading of every line or the eyes may be injured from the strain and repeated change of focus.

Scientific research indicates that reading wide columns strains the eyes. The column should be wide enough that you can read the text with only slight eye movements to the right after you've focused at the start of the line to match the font size. When the column is too wide, you have to move your head left and right with each line, which can hurt your eyes from the strain and constant refocusing.

A look over the examples of periodical pages in this chapter will show practically an acceptance of these requirements—three columns in the periodicals of large size and two columns in those of smaller size. For pocket magazines one column is naturally sufficient. In several instances (Examples 417 and 418) three columns instead of two would have been advisable.

A look at the examples of periodical pages in this chapter will show that these requirements are generally accepted—three columns in larger periodicals and two columns in smaller ones. For pocket magazines, one column is usually enough. In several cases (Examples 417 and 418), using three columns instead of two would have been better.

Gutenberg, when he planned the pages of his famous Bible, arranged for two columns each about twenty picas wide, altho his type was large—about twenty points in size.

Gutenberg, when he designed the pages of his famous Bible, set them up with two columns, each about twenty picas wide, even though his type was large—about twenty points in size.

EXAMPLE 424-A

Section of text matter from the “Saturday Evening Post”

(Monotype No. 20-A, 8-point on 9-point body, 8¾ set)

EXAMPLE 424-A

Section of text matter from the “Saturday Evening Post”

(Monotype No. 20-A, 8-point on 9-point body, 8¾ set)

It is a great mistake to set, as some business publications do, six-point type in lines twenty-five or thirty picas wide. To require the reader’s eyes, after being focused on such small type, to travel back and forth that distance is almost an invitation not to read the matter.

It’s a huge mistake to use six-point font in lines that are twenty-five or thirty picas wide, like some business publications do. Making readers' eyes shift back and forth over that distance after focusing on such tiny text is pretty much asking them not to read it at all.


The Margins.—Blank space surrounding the printed pages in periodicals should be apportioned as it is in good books—the smallest margin at the binding side and increasing in amount in this order: Head, outer side, foot. Even when the total amount of margin is small it should be apportioned in this manner.

The Edges.—The blank space around the printed pages in magazines should be divided like it is in well-designed books—the smallest margin on the binding side, with the margins getting larger in this order: top, outer side, bottom. Even if the total margin is small, it should still be divided in this way.

The rule can be stated in another way: the largest margin at the foot, with the type page inclining toward the bound side.

The rule can be stated another way: the biggest margin at the bottom, with the text page leaning toward the bound side.

Periodical binderies do not always give the publisher good margins, even after he has planned for them. Unevenly cut paper, careless folding and inaccurate trimming will prevent the securing of desired results.

Periodical binderies don't always provide publishers with good margins, even when they've planned for them. Unevenly cut paper, careless folding, and inaccurate trimming can stop them from achieving the desired results.

In measuring margins the running headings should be ignored if they are small, but in any event the printed page should have the appearance of being a trifle high on the leaf.

In measuring margins, disregard the running headings if they are small, but in any case, the printed page should look slightly high on the leaf.


Type-Faces for the Text.—Type-faces for the text matter of most periodicals must be chosen for reasons different from those governing the selection of type-faces for other purposes, because of the small size, usually eight-point or nine-point.

Fonts for the Text.—The typefaces for the text in most periodicals need to be chosen for reasons that are different from those used for other purposes, mainly due to the small size, typically eight-point or nine-point.

EXAMPLE 422-A

Section of text matter from the “Independent”

(Monotype No. 20-A, 9-point on 10-point body, 9¾ set)

EXAMPLE 422-A

Section of text matter from the “Independent”

(Monotype No. 20-A, 9-point on 10-point body, 9¾ set)

Type-faces that are legible and good-looking in twelve-point may prove illegible and ill-looking in eight-point. This is to some extent true of Caslon Oldstyle when printed on calendered surfaces. Such illegibility may be due to the hairlines, which almost disappear in the small sizes.

Typefaces that look clear and nice in twelve-point can be hard to read and unattractive in eight-point. This is somewhat true for Caslon Oldstyle when printed on smooth surfaces. This lack of legibility may be because the thin lines nearly fade away in smaller sizes.

Commendable letters for periodicals that require small type-faces are the dark-printing kind represented by Century Expanded. Examples 422 and 424 are set in letters of this kind. (See also Examples 422-A and 424-A for type matter as actually used.)

Commendable letters for magazines that need small typefaces are the dark-printing kind shown by Century Expanded. Examples 422 and 424 are in this type of lettering. (See also Examples 422-A and 424-A for type matter as actually used.)

As these types have short descenders the text matter is made more legible by separating lines with one-point leads or, in machine composition, by casting a face on a body a point larger (as in Example 424-A, which shows an eight-point face cast on a nine-point body, and in Example 422-A, which shows nine-point on ten-point body).

As these types have short descenders, the text becomes easier to read by spacing the lines with one-point leads or, in machine composition, by using a font that’s one point larger (as shown in Example 424-A, which displays an eight-point font on a nine-point body, and in Example 422-A, which shows a nine-point font on a ten-point body).

French Oldstyle (especially Cadmus) is not only fairly legible in small sizes but good-looking. A representative of this style of type will be found in Examples 410 and 411, and is shown actual size in Example 410-A.

French Oldstyle (especially Cadmus) is not only quite readable in small sizes but also attractive. A sample of this type style can be seen in Examples 410 and 411, and it's displayed at actual size in Example 410-A.

Modern or old-style type-faces that are legible when printed on news paper or antique paper are sometimes not so when printed on calendered surfaces. A type-face such as Caslon Oldstyle was designed for printing on dampened paper of an unfinished surface, and it is no wonder that it does not appear at its best in small sizes on calendered paper.

Modern or old-style typefaces that are easy to read when printed on newspaper or antique paper might not look as good when printed on coated surfaces. For example, a typeface like Caslon Oldstyle was created for printing on dampened paper with a rough texture, so it’s not surprising that it doesn’t look its best in small sizes on coated paper.

155

EXAMPLE 417

Box headings are conspicuous on this editorial page

EXAMPLE 417

The box headings stand out on this editorial page.

EXAMPLE 419

Excellent typography of an editorial page

EXAMPLE 419

Great typography for an editorial page

EXAMPLE 418

Another way to feature the editorials

EXAMPLE 418

Another way to highlight the editorials

EXAMPLE 420

Novel use of rules on an editorial page. By Sherbow

EXAMPLE 420

New approach to rules on an editorial page. By Sherbow

156

EXAMPLE 421

News photograph on the front page

EXAMPLE 421

News photo on the front page

It is absolutely necessary that the text matter of a periodical be easily read, yet the type-face should not be selected for that reason alone. It should be well formed and pleasing to look at, and, if possible, be a face that makes feasible some harmony in design between text type and head letter.

It’s crucial that the content of a publication is easy to read, but the font shouldn’t be chosen for that reason alone. It should be well-designed and visually appealing, and, if possible, create a sense of harmony in the design between the body text and the headings.

In publications that have text matter in eleven-point or twelve-point a letter such as Caslon Oldstyle would doubtless be satisfactory, and on small publications Old-Style Antique or Cushing Oldstyle render excellent service.

In publications that use eleven-point or twelve-point font, a typeface like Caslon Oldstyle would definitely work well, and for smaller publications, Old-Style Antique or Cushing Oldstyle perform excellently.

Scotch Roman, notwithstanding the fact that it contains hairlines, gives fairly good results, provided the paper is not highly calendered.

Scotch Roman, even though it has hairlines, produces pretty good results as long as the paper isn't heavily calendered.

Letters with hairlines when printed on calendered paper lack the little legibility that they otherwise possess. Many letters could be made more legible, especially those composed on machines, by cutting the matrices so that the print of the thin lines is a trifle stronger.

Letters with hairlines printed on coated paper are less readable than they could be. Many letters could be made clearer, especially those created on machines, by adjusting the matrices so that the printing of the thin lines is slightly bolder.

The chapter on “Type-Faces” should be read in this connection.

The chapter on “Type-Faces” should be read in this context.


Type-Faces for the Headings.—An ideal condition in periodical make-up is one which makes possible the use for headings of the identical design of type that has been selected for the text matter, as in Examples 410 and 411, where a French Oldstyle has been used, and in Example 415, where Scotch Roman is the type-face.

Heading Fonts.—The best setup for a magazine layout allows for using the same font for headings as the one chosen for the body text, like in Examples 410 and 411, which use a French Oldstyle, and in Example 415, which features Scotch Roman as the font.

It is not possible always to use the very same design of type-face for both headings and text matter. After a text letter has been chosen for legibility or other reason, the identical type in larger sizes may prove to be too plain for the sort of periodical on which it is to appear. And there are sometimes special reasons, regrettable but unavoidable, an instance of which is this volume, wherein the text matter is in Scotch Roman (a modern letter with some relation to old-style) and the headings and captions in a type-face of old-style form. This combination is not ideal, and the explanation follows. In order that “The Art and Practice of Typography” could be published at a price that would enable it to be widely circulated, the chapters, as soon as each was prepared, were first printed in The American Printer. The type-face used for the text matter and headings in that publication was Scotch Roman, hence it was felt necessary to use Scotch Roman for the text of this volume. However, it was believed that a darker type-face of old-style formation would be more pleasing for the headings, and a Goudy letter was selected.

It’s not always possible to use the same typeface for both headings and body text. Once a readable font is chosen for the main text, using the same style in larger sizes may look too simple for the type of publication it appears in. Sometimes there are unfortunate but unavoidable reasons for this. For example, in this volume, the body text is in Scotch Roman (a modern font related to old-style) while the headings and captions use an old-style typeface. This combination isn’t ideal, and here’s why. To make “The Art and Practice of Typography” affordable for a wider audience, each chapter was printed in The American Printer as soon as it was ready. The typeface used for the body text and headings in that publication was Scotch Roman, so it made sense to use Scotch Roman for this volume's text. However, it was thought that a bolder old-style typeface would look better for the headings, so a Goudy font was chosen.

EXAMPLE 422

Fine specimen of typographic make-up

EXAMPLE 422

Great example of typography design

A modern type-face (Bodoni Bold) appears on the headings in Example 412, 413 and 414. Bodoni (not the bold) is also used for headings in Examples 416 and 427.

A modern font (Bodoni Bold) is used for the headings in Example 412, 413 and 414. Bodoni (not bold) is also used for the headings in Examples 416 and 427.

Caslon Oldstyle is to be found used for both headings and text in Examples 426 and 430. Old-Style Antique appears in Example 431.

Caslon Oldstyle is used for both headings and text in Examples 426 and 430. Old-Style Antique appears in Example 431.

The Saturday Evening Post for many years made use of an old-style letter for its headings that as a type-face was known as Post Oldstyle. The italic, outlined and filled in with gray-printing lines, is shown in Example 424.

The Saturday Evening Post for many years used an old-style font for its headings called Post Oldstyle. The italic version, outlined and filled with gray-printing lines, is shown in Example 424.

A Gothic decorative letter is not out of place on a Christmas number of Collier’s (Example 425), but is not recommended for general use on periodical pages.

A Gothic decorative letter fits perfectly on a Christmas edition of Collier’s (Example 425), but it's not suggested for regular use on magazine pages.

Large, bold, black type-faces for headings in periodicals should be avoided.

Large, bold, black fonts for headings in magazines should be avoided.

Interest can be added, in the treatment of department 157headings of technical publications, by using slightly decorative panels, but such decoration should be light or slight, and not the commonplace sort sometimes found in ill-treated job work.

Interest can be added in the handling of department headings in technical publications by using slightly decorative panels, but this decoration should be subtle and not the kind of overly common style sometimes seen in poorly done job work. 157

EXAMPLE 423

An attractive first text page. By Lester Douglas

EXAMPLE 423

An appealing first text page. By Lester Douglas

Editorial and title headings in typographic treatment should blend with other parts of the text pages and not look, as some do, like quarter-page advertisements inserted in reading matter. Example 429 shows good treatment.

Editorial and title headings in their typographic design should blend seamlessly with the rest of the text pages and not appear, as some do, like quarter-page ads stuck into the reading material. Example 429 shows good design.


Make-up of the Illustrations.—When planning to use illustrations on periodicals both facing pages should be before the person doing the planning. The text matter of the two pages forms a background of gray, and the problem is to place illustrations, headings and initials in positions that will not only be well balanced but so assembled that one will not interfere with another.

Illustration Layout.—When planning to use illustrations in magazines, both facing pages should be in front of the person doing the planning. The text on the two pages creates a gray background, and the challenge is to position illustrations, headings, and initials in a way that is not only well balanced but also ensures that one element doesn’t interfere with another.

Usually there should be some text matter between illustrations; they should be placed toward the outer side of the page (see Example 422). The center position is practicable when there are three columns and the illustration is but a single column in width, or when the expense of running around may be incurred (see Example 424).

Usually, there should be some text between illustrations; they should be placed toward the outer side of the page (see Example 422). The center position works when there are three columns and the illustration is only a single column wide, or when the cost of running around can be justified (see Example 424).

Illustrations frequently look better separated from the heading, as in Example 414, than when joined with the heading, as in Example 412.

Illustrations often look better when they're separated from the heading, like in Example 414, rather than when they're combined with the heading, as shown in Example 412.

The same style of illustration should, if possible, be used on facing pages. Make-up that shows a line plate on one page and a halftone on the adjoining page is inharmonious and not so pleasing as when all illustrations on facing pages are of the same character. They should be, say, either line like that in Example 414 or halftone like that in Example 412.

The same style of illustration should, if possible, be used on facing pages. Using a line drawing on one page and a halftone on the opposite page looks mismatched and isn't as appealing as when all illustrations on facing pages have the same style. They should be either line like in Example 414 or halftone like in Example 412.

EXAMPLE 424

Illustration placed in center, necessitating running around

EXAMPLE 424

Illustration centered, requiring movement around it

EXAMPLE 425

Feature page of a Christmas number

EXAMPLE 425

Feature page of a Christmas edition

When an illustration appears on a text page, initial letters 158should be plain and small, as in Example 414; but when no illustration appears the initial can be large, as in Example 411, or even decorative. For regular purposes initials as used on Examples 409 and 425 are inadvisable.

When an illustration shows up on a text page, the initial letters should be simple and small, like in Example 414; but when there’s no illustration, the initial can be big, like in Example 411, or even decorative. For standard uses, initials like those in Examples 409 and 425 aren’t recommended.

EXAMPLE 426

Convention feature page of a technical journal

EXAMPLE 426

Feature page of a technical journal

Pleasing use of a vignette style of illustration is to be seen in Example 430. It lends interest to the first text page and at the same time illustrates the leading article.

Pleasing use of a vignette style of illustration is to be seen in Example 430. It adds interest to the first text page and also illustrates the main article.

The illustration in Example 429 is also effectively placed.

The illustration in Example 429 is also well-placed.


Arrangement of Headings.—Headings, in a way, advertise or “sell” the contents of a periodical, and their arrangement depends on how far the editor or layout man wishes to go in advertising or “selling” the contents. The American people have so much reading matter available that it is probably necessary in most instances almost to force them to read the various articles in periodicals. Encyclopedias are read even if there are no display headings and the type is in six-point, and there are periodicals that are read without urging; but it may as well be conceded that articles are read more when they are well advertised.

Heading Arrangement.—Headings essentially promote or “sell” the content of a magazine, and their organization depends on how much the editor or layout designer wants to showcase or “sell” the contents. Since the American public has access to so much reading material, it’s often necessary to almost encourage them to read the various articles in magazines. Encyclopedias are read even without eye-catching headings and with tiny six-point type, and there are magazines that people pick up and read on their own; however, it's clear that articles tend to get more attention when they’re well promoted.

A well-advertised story will be found in Example 413. The title is brought out prominently in a large, bold type, as is the name of the author. The italic line above the title smacks of real advertising, as does the group of type inserted in the upper part of the text. The display in Example 412 is frankly advertising in its appearance.

A well-promoted story can be found in Example 413. The title stands out in a large, bold font, as does the author's name. The italicized line above the title has a strong advertising feel, just like the text inserted at the top of the page. The display in Example 412 is clearly advertising in its look.

The Saturday Evening Post heading (Example 424) is large, but there is no descriptive advertising, and there is little of the nervous fear of going unread so evident in Examples 412 and 413.

The Saturday Evening Post heading (Example 424) is big, but there’s no descriptive advertising, and there’s not much of the anxious fear of being overlooked that’s clearly seen in Examples 412 and 413.

Calm, yet pleasing, treatment of headings is to be found in Examples 411 and 423. It is well to give attention to the presentation of article headings, but sometimes in the place where the heading should go there is so much noise and so much talking that, as a means of resting the nerves, the leaf is quickly turned or the periodical laid aside.

Calm and enjoyable treatment of headings can be seen in Examples 411 and 423. It's important to pay attention to how article headings are presented, but often, where the heading should be, there's so much noise and chatter that, to give their nerves a break, people will quickly flip the page or set the magazine aside.

EXAMPLE 427

News headings and make-up

News headlines and makeup

Periodical titles, as they appear on the first text page of each issue, are variously treated. The small, neat effect of Example 423 is commendable. It is in Scotch Roman and harmonizes with the article heading and text type. Title headings on a larger scale will be found in Examples 410, 415 and 416. Special lettering is sometimes pleasing, as in Examples 421 and 430.

Periodical titles, as they show up on the first text page of each issue, have different treatments. The small, tidy look of Example 423 is praiseworthy. It's in Scotch Roman and matches well with the article heading and body text. Larger title headings can be seen in Examples 410, 415, and 416. Unique lettering can also be attractive, as demonstrated in Examples 421 and 430.

The news department of trade and business periodicals requires numerous headings. Example 427 is suggestive. There the news articles are in narrow columns and have a newspaper style of heading.

The news department of trade and business magazines needs a lot of headings. Example 427 is indicative. There, the news articles are in narrow columns and use a newspaper-style heading.

Caslon Oldstyle looks well on any class of publication. Roman capitals and lower-case and italic may be used in the same line, as on Example 429.

Caslon Oldstyle looks great on any type of publication. Roman capitals, lowercase, and italics can be used in the same line, as shown in Example 429.


The Captions.—It is customary to set captions centered under illustrations in a size smaller of the type-face used for the text matter and to arrange the caption in one or more lines no wider than the illustration.

The Subtitles.—It’s common practice to place captions centered below illustrations in a font size smaller than the text and to format the caption in one or more lines that are no wider than the illustration itself.

When the caption is in two parts the first part is usually set in capitals and the second part in lower-case, both centered. The lower-case is sometimes roman and sometimes italic.

When a caption has two parts, the first part is usually in all caps and the second part is in lowercase, both centered. The lowercase can be in regular font or italicized.

Seldom do captions receive the special decorative treatment that has been accorded them in Examples 412 and 414. Even two-line initial letters have been used with them.

Seldom do captions get the special decorative treatment that they've received in Examples 412 and 414. They've even used two-line initial letters with them.

The plain double caption in roman capitals and lower-case is to be found in Examples 421 and 422. A single caption 159in italic lower-case is shown inside a rule that surrounds the illustration in Example 424.

The simple double caption in uppercase and lowercase letters can be seen in Examples 421 and 422. A single caption 159 in italic lowercase is displayed inside a border that encircles the illustration in Example 424.

EXAMPLE 428

A conservative and readable editorial page

EXAMPLE 428

A straightforward and easy-to-read editorial page

Arrangement of captions in lines of the same length, making a block of type (as in this book) is liked by many. However, the caption is to be read and its shape is not of more importance than its legibility. It is a mistake to arrange a caption in several lines of capitals and then letterspace some of the words to obtain the block effect. Such letterspacing advertises the effort as unsuccessful and also disfigures the page.

Arrangement of captions in lines of equal length, creating a block of text (like in this book), is favored by many. However, the caption should be easy to read, and its layout is not more important than its readability. It’s a mistake to arrange a caption in multiple lines of all capitals and then space out some words to achieve the block effect. Such spacing makes the effort seem unsuccessful and also messes up the page.


The Editorial Pages.—In periodicals, editorial pages are treated variously. There is no standard style such as is found in most newspapers. All five editorial pages reproduced here, in make-up and typographic treatment, differ from one another.

The Opinion Section.—In magazines, editorial pages are handled in different ways. There isn't a standard style like what you find in most newspapers. The five editorial pages shown here vary in layout and typography.

The Ladies’ Home Journal (Example 417) has the title of each editorial in a small rule panel along with the publication’s trademark, and the matter is set in two wide columns. The first clause beginning each editorial is composed in capitals and small capitals. The page is surrounded by a double-line border.

The Ladies’ Home Journal (Example 417) features the title of each editorial in a small border, along with the magazine's trademark, and the content is organized into two wide columns. The opening line of each editorial is written in all caps and small caps. The page is bordered with a double line.

Collier’s (Example 418) begins each editorial with an initial letter, followed by several words in capitals, and the title in a dark-faced italic is set at the left end of the line. A decorative symbolic heading is placed above all.

Collier’s (Example 418) starts each editorial with an initial letter, followed by a few words in all caps, and the title in bold italic is aligned to the left. A decorative symbol heading is positioned above everything.

System (Example 419) has a neat, readable editorial page, arranged in an interesting manner. The name of the magazine, of the editor, and the month and volume are neatly placed at the top, and the blank space that follows, occupied solely by the small black decorative mark, gives pleasure. Each editorial is introduced by a heading in small capitals and by an initial, which is larger in the first article. The editorial page of Advertising and Selling (Example 420), by Sherbow, is unlike any of the others. Rules are used between columns, on both sides of headings, and above and below the page heading. The result is pleasing, and invites reading of the page.

System (Example 419) features a clean, easy-to-read editorial page that's laid out in an engaging way. The magazine's name, the editor's name, and the month and volume are neatly positioned at the top, and the blank space that follows, filled only by a small black decorative mark, is enjoyable to look at. Each editorial starts with a heading in small capitals and an initial letter that's larger in the first article. The editorial page of Advertising and Selling (Example 420), by Sherbow, stands out from the others. Lines are used between columns, beside the headings, and above and below the page title. The result is attractive and encourages readers to dive into the page.

EXAMPLE 429

Caslon headings and an old-style text type

EXAMPLE 429

Caslon headings and a classic text type

The style of make-up of The American Printer editorial page (Example 428) was purposely patterned after that of the conventional newspaper editorial page. The editorials of conservative metropolitan newspapers are probably read more regularly than any other part of the publications, and such reading has possibly been invited by the restful style of the typography. There is reason to believe that this somewhat old-fashioned treatment and its lack of affectation have really accomplished what was intended.

The design of the editorial page in The American Printer (Example 428) was intentionally modeled after the traditional newspaper editorial page. The editorials of conservative city newspapers are likely read more consistently than any other section of the publications, and this reading may be encouraged by the simple style of the typography. It seems that this somewhat outdated approach and its straightforwardness have actually achieved the intended effect.

The editorial page should be unlike the other pages of a periodical, and these examples should assist printers and editors in determining suitable typographic treatment.

The editorial page should stand out from the other pages of a magazine, and these examples should help printers and editors decide on the right typographic style.


Features.—Typography can have much to do with the playing up of features in periodical make-up. An instance is the page reproduced as Example 426, which consists of what would ordinarily be the notes of the convention. In this instance the notes were written in a style that suggests the quaint diction of Colonial days. Some of the words of the text were capitalized, as was done in those times. In the page heading a few of the letters were tilted to give an irregularity caused in old composition by defective typefounding. Even the brass rules were nicked (brass rule was seldom in good condition in the old days). A crude initial of ancient vintage and an illustration simulating an old woodcut added decorative interest. This page was a change from the routine style of the other pages.

Features.—Typography can significantly influence how features are highlighted in magazine layouts. For example, the page shown as Example 426 features what would typically be the notes from the convention. In this case, the notes were written in a style that evokes the charming language of Colonial times. Some words in the text were capitalized, just as was common back then. In the page header, a few letters were slanted to mimic the irregularities caused by imperfect typefounding in the past. Even the brass rules were damaged (brass rules were rarely in good shape in the old days). A rough initial from an earlier era and an illustration that resembles an old woodcut added decorative appeal. This page provided a refreshing change from the standard style of the other pages.

The page from Collier’s (Example 409, Insert) was 160one of the features of a Thanksgiving number. Its decorative border suggests the treatment found in Books of Common Prayer (see page 27).

The page from Collier’s (Example 409, Insert) was 160 one of the highlights of a Thanksgiving edition. Its decorative border resembles the style seen in Books of Common Prayer (see page 27).

EXAMPLE 430

Caslon typography on a magazine. By Will Bradley

EXAMPLE 430

Caslon font used in a magazine. By Will Bradley

Christmas feature treatment is also found in Example 425, also by Will Bradley. The text letter used in this example for initials and headings is hardly suitable for use generally in periodicals, but for occasional features it is not out of place.

Christmas feature treatment is also found in Example 425, also by Will Bradley. The typeface used in this example for initials and headings isn't really suitable for general use in magazines, but for special features, it's not inappropriate.

Verse when used will usually look more interesting set in italic, especially when the italic has a decorative quality. One of the important general magazines sets verse in Kennerley italic in a decorative panel broken into the text page at a suitable point.

Verse, when used, usually looks more interesting in italics, especially when the italics have a decorative quality. One of the important general magazines features verse in Kennerley italics in a decorative panel integrated into the text page at a suitable point.

Important parts of an article reprinted in an attractive panel on the same page would call attention to the article and invite reading.

Important sections of an article showcased in an appealing panel on the same page would grab attention and encourage readers to check it out.

A certain amount of restraint is necessary when planning typographic features for periodicals. Type-faces should be selected with knowledge and care, and seldom should large sizes be used. “Jobby” display effects are never in order on the text pages of periodicals.

A certain amount of restraint is necessary when planning typographic features for magazines. Typefaces should be chosen with knowledge and care, and large sizes should rarely be used. “Jobby” display effects are never appropriate on the text pages of magazines.


The Advertisements.—The typographic details of the editorial section of a national periodical in the field of advertising were recently revised and made more pleasing, yet when made up and printed the work that had been done was so overshadowed and counteracted by the bold types on the advertising pages that the general result was disappointing.

The Ads.—The typography of the editorial section of a national magazine focused on advertising was recently updated to look better, but when it was assembled and printed, the improvements were completely overshadowed and diminished by the large fonts used on the advertising pages, resulting in a disappointing overall effect.

It is useless to attempt good typography on periodicals so long as advertisements are inserted in text pages or occupy facing positions; that is, it is useless unless the periodicals set or reset the advertisements neatly in good taste as is done by the Curtis publications.

It’s pointless to try for good typography in magazines as long as ads are placed within the text or on opposite pages; in other words, it’s useless unless the magazines arrange the ads neatly and tastefully, like the Curtis publications do.

Advertisements should not be mingled with text matter. According to old-fashioned ideas, the reader buys a periodical for the text matter, and it is for him to determine whether or not he shall read the advertising pages. In some publications the text pages are yet to be found intact, altho preceded and followed by sold space; in others good resolves peter out as text meets advertisement toward the rear, and in others—a majority perhaps—advertisements dominate almost all of the text pages.

Advertisements shouldn't be mixed in with the content. According to old-school thinking, readers buy a magazine for the articles, and it's up to them to decide if they want to look at the ads. In some publications, the content pages are still untouched, even though they have ads on either side; in others, good intentions fade as the content comes up against ads toward the back, and in many—perhaps most—ads take over nearly all of the content pages.

Treatment of advertisements in periodicals need not necessarily be shy and timid; neither need it be blustering and noisy. Where advertisements are neatly treated and not unduly forced on the attention, readers are likely to give as much time to their perusal as to the text pages. A gentlemanly solicitor who talks clearly in low tones is more likely to sell goods than one who disturbs the entire office by his loud talk and boisterous demeanor. Apply this to the typography of the advertising pages.

Treatment of advertisements in magazines doesn't have to be shy or hesitant; it also doesn't need to be loud and overbearing. When advertisements are designed neatly and are not overly pushed onto the reader, people are likely to spend just as much time looking at them as they do the articles. A respectable lawyer who speaks calmly in soft tones is more likely to sell products than one who disrupts the whole office with his loud voice and rowdy behavior. Apply this to the design of the advertising pages.

Editorially, it is to be regretted that advertising must go “alongside of reading,” but it is to be deplored that in so many periodicals, especially of the business and technical class, reading matter is seemingly written and placed for the purpose of accommodating the advertising.

Editorially, it’s unfortunate that advertising has to go “alongside reading,” but it’s even more upsetting that in so many magazines, especially in the business and technical sectors, the content seems to be created and positioned just to make room for the advertising.

The successful publication of a periodical, as of a newspaper, depends on liberal patronage from advertisers; yet these advertisers are best served when the publication is planned with first consideration for the text features, and the advertisements are prepared to harmonize and not clash with the typography of the text matter.

The successful launch of a magazine or newspaper relies on generous support from advertisers; however, these advertisers benefit the most when the publication is designed with a primary focus on the content, and the ads are crafted to complement, not conflict with, the text's typography.

EXAMPLE 431

Good typography of a pocket magazine

EXAMPLE 431

Great typography for a pocket magazine

EXAMPLE 432.—A house-organ by Taylor, Nash & Taylor, San Francisco, that features typography

EXAMPLE 432.—A house-organ by Taylor, Nash & Taylor, San Francisco, that showcases typography

161

HOUSE-ORGANS

The house-organ is the little brother of the periodical and newspaper. It is published most frequently as a means of communication between a business house and buyers of that house’s product. Sometimes the publication is circulated only among the house salesmen or other employees.

The house organ is the little brother of the magazine and newspaper. It's usually published more often as a way to communicate between a business and the buyers of its products. Sometimes, the publication is shared only among the company's salespeople or other staff.

Examination of more than one hundred house-organs revealed a condition that prevails in every department of publishing—lack of standardization in dimensions. The smallest house-organ measured about 3 × 5 inches and the largest 9 × 12 inches. The dimensions grew, from the smallest to the largest, by quarter inches and half inches. There are many small pocket house-organs, some of which fit commercial envelops and others fit baronial envelops. If there is a favorite size for house-organs, it is 6 × 9, which dimensions are those of Examples 432, 436, 437, 441, 447 and 448, illustrated in this chapter. Another favorite size is 7 × 10 inches, which are the dimensions of Examples 444 and 449. House-organs planned in the style of newspapers and containing four or eight pages are usually 8 × 11 or 9 × 12 inches in size.

Examining more than one hundred house organs showed a common issue across all areas of publishing: a lack of standard sizes. The smallest house organ was about 3 × 5 inches, while the largest was 9 × 12 inches. The sizes ranged from the smallest to the largest in increments of a quarter inch and half inch. There are many compact pocket house organs, some of which fit standard envelopes, and others that fit larger envelopes. If there’s a preferred size for house organs, it’s 6 × 9 inches, which is the size of Examples 432, 436, 437, 441, 447 and 448, shown in this chapter. Another popular size is 7 × 10 inches, which is the size of Examples 444 and 449. House organs designed like newspapers, with four or eight pages, are usually 8 × 11 or 9 × 12 inches in size.

A different stock is frequently used for the covers of house-organs, but equally popular is the self-cover style—the first page of an eight- or sixteen-page form containing the cover design. The practices that govern the use of cover designs on periodicals apply to some extent to house-organs, although typographic covers are more often found on the last-mentioned kind of publication.

A different type of paper is often used for the covers of house-organs, but the self-cover style is also quite popular—where the first page of an eight- or sixteen-page issue features the cover design. The rules for using cover designs on magazines also somewhat apply to house-organs, although you more frequently see typographic covers in this type of publication.

Example 441 shows a typographic cover in which most of the page is given over to a table of contents—not a bad idea when the contents are abundant.

Example 441 shows a cover design where most of the page is dedicated to a table of contents—not a bad idea when there’s a lot to include.

Should a house-organ consist of only two or four leaves, it is unnecessary to give over the entire first page to a cover design, as the title could be treated as in Examples 436, 438, 439, 448 and 452. If the cover page is to be lettered, it is well to have it treated in a style that will harmonize with the typography of the inner pages. See Example 435.

Should a house-organ have only two or four pages, it’s not necessary to dedicate the entire first page to a cover design, as the title could be presented like in Examples 436, 438, 439, 448, and 452. If the cover page is going to have text, it’s a good idea to style it in a way that matches the typography of the inner pages. See Example 435.

Seldom is there any reason for a house-organ to contain more than four or eight pages. Few of the more ambitious house-organs survive the first one or two issues, or are profitable if they do. A house-organ to be effective should be published regularly. Too many instead of being periodicals are “spasmodicals.” There is more likelihood of a house-organ being published regularly if it be modest in plan and brief in contents. Printers err when they suggest elaborate and bulky house-organs to their customers. The smaller kind, neat and stylish in typography, attractive in make-up, good to look at and easy to read, are more desirable under average conditions.

Seldom does a company newsletter need to be more than four to eight pages long. Most of the ambitious newsletters don’t make it past the first couple of issues or aren’t profitable if they do. For a newsletter to be effective, it should be published regularly. Too many end up being “spasmodicals” instead of periodicals. A newsletter is more likely to be published regularly if it’s simple in design and concise in content. Printers make a mistake when they suggest complex and bulky newsletters to their clients. Smaller, neat, and stylish newsletters, which are attractive and easy to read, are generally more desirable.

EXAMPLE 433

EXAMPLE 433

EXAMPLE 434

EXAMPLE 434

EXAMPLE 435

Pages from a quaintly-treated house-organ, by the Seaver Howland Press, Boston. Both type and illustration suggest the “good old days”

EXAMPLE 435

Pages from a charmingly designed house publication, by the Seaver Howland Press, Boston. Both the text and illustrations evoke a sense of nostalgia for the “good old days.”

162

EXAMPLE 436

Distinctive lettering and typography

Unique fonts and typography

EXAMPLE 437

Interpolated paragraphs in italic

EXAMPLE 437

Italicized interpolated paragraphs

EXAMPLE 438

A house-organ in miniature

A mini house organ

EXAMPLE 439

Planned after the printer’s house-organ at the left

EXAMPLE 439

Designed after the printer's newsletter on the left

The titles of house-organs are not usually as conventional 163and dignified as those of magazines and other periodicals, although those who have a liking for the conventional select the word “Bulletin,” adding to it as part of the title a word which connects it with the business. Hence we have the “Linotype Bulletin,” the “Hampshire Service Bulletin” (Example 436) and the “Ad.-League Bulletin” (Example 440). Printers, for their house-organs, use a variety of titles that include “Typographica,” “Imprint” (Examples 432, 442, 445, 446, 450 and 451), “The Typographer” (Example 438), “Pica” (Example 448), “Type Talks” (Example 452), “Warde’s Words” (Example 447). In other lines are to be found “Drug Topics,” “Statler Salesmanship,” “The Constructive Banker,” “The Wallace” (Example 444), “Poor Richard’s New Almanack,” “Selling Sense” and “The Ambassador” (Example 455).

The titles of company newsletters aren't usually as traditional and formal as those of magazines and other publications. However, those who prefer the traditional often choose the word “Bulletin,” adding another word that connects it to the business. So, we have the “Linotype Bulletin,” the “Hampshire Service Bulletin” (Example 436) and the “Ad.-League Bulletin” (Example 440). Printers, for their newsletters, use a variety of titles that include “Typographica,” “Imprint” (Examples 432, 442, 445, 446, 450 and 451), “The Typographer” (Example 438), “Pica” (Example 448), “Type Talks” (Example 452), “Warde’s Words” (Example 447). In other fields, you can find titles like “Drug Topics,” “Statler Salesmanship,” “The Constructive Banker,” “The Wallace” (Example 444), “Poor Richard’s New Almanack,” “Selling Sense” and “The Ambassador” (Example 455).

EXAMPLE 440

Attractive rule treatment of headings

EXAMPLE 440

Appealing rule treatment of headings

EXAMPLE 442

Simple, effective typography

Clean, impactful typography

The number of columns that should be used in house-organs depends, of course, on the size of the page. One column is sufficient for the small pocket publication (Examples 433, 434, 435, 445, 446, 453, 458 and 459). The page should be made up in two columns when the size is about 6 × 9 (Examples 438, 439, 440, 444, 448, 449, 450 and 451). The purpose of more than one column is to make reading easier and not just to provide a narrow column. On some house-organs the columns are made so narrow that it is as difficult to read them as when they are very wide.

The number of columns to use in newsletters really depends on the page size. One column works well for smaller publications (Examples 433, 434, 435, 445, 446, 453, 458 and 459). If the page size is around 6 × 9, it’s better to set it in two columns (Examples 438, 439, 440, 444, 448, 449, 450 and 451). The idea behind using more than one column is to make it easier to read, not just to create a narrow column. In some newsletters, the columns are so narrow that they're just as hard to read as if they were very wide.

EXAMPLE 441

Contents outlined on the cover

EXAMPLE 441

Contents listed on the cover

The margins on the house-organs should be of the same proportions as on periodicals and booklets—the most margin at the foot, with the type-page inclining toward the head and binding side. In fact, such margins should be found on all printing in which there are two facing pages.

The margins on house organs should be the same proportions as those on magazines and booklets—the largest margin at the bottom, with the text leaning toward the top and the binding side. In fact, these margins should be used for all printed materials that have two facing pages.

The type-faces used on house-organs should be legible and at the same time good-looking. Caslon Oldstyle is suitable for house-organs as well as most other purposes. The Caslon style of type is used on Examples 433, 434, 436, 440, 441, 448, 450, 451, 453, and 455. Other faces used on the house-organs here reproduced are Kennerley Oldstyle (Examples 432, 445, 446), Old-Style Antique (Examples 442 and 447), Cloister Oldstyle (Example 452), Bodoni Book (Examples 164457 and 458). These and other good faces are available for house-organ purposes.

The typefaces used on house publications should be clear and visually appealing. Caslon Oldstyle works well for house publications and most other uses. The Caslon type style appears in Examples 433, 434, 436, 440, 441, 448, 450, 451, 453, and 455. Other typefaces used in the house publications shown here include Kennerley Oldstyle (Examples 432, 445, 446), Old-Style Antique (Examples 442 and 447), Cloister Oldstyle (Example 452), and Bodoni Book (Examples 164457 and 458). These and other quality typefaces are available for house publication purposes.

EXAMPLE 443

Dark-toned typography by Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston

EXAMPLE 443

Dark-colored typography by Griffith-Stillings Press, Boston

EXAMPLE 445

EXAMPLE 445

EXAMPLE 446

Rubricated typography by Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco

EXAMPLE 446

Highlighted typography by Taylor & Taylor, San Francisco

EXAMPLE 444

Suitable treatment for this silverware publication

EXAMPLE 444

Appropriate care for this silverware publication

What has been said in the chapter on “Periodicals” about the suitability of type for headings applies as well to house-organs. In most of the pages here reproduced it will be seen that the head letter is the same kind of type as the text letter or is harmoniously similar.

What was discussed in the chapter on “Periodicals” regarding the appropriateness of type for headings also applies to house-organs. In most of the pages shown here, you will notice that the header font is the same as the body text font or is harmoniously similar.

The treatment of display announcements or house advertising should be such as to carry out the purpose for which the house-organ is issued. If, as an instance, the publication is issued for the purpose of presenting the attractive wares of a stationery house, it would be well to devote half of the pages to illustrations, descriptions and prices of stationery supplies. Sometimes when the display announcements are as numerous as the text pages, an announcement is placed on the left page facing a text page at the right. When this is done, the typography should be neat in appearance; the type sizes should not be large, and the type itself not any blacker than, say, Caslon Oldstyle. Especially is it a mistake to use dark faces when illustrations of merchandise are a part of the page. Dark type-faces subordinate and render ineffective such illustrations.

The way we handle display announcements or house advertising should align with the purpose of the house-organ. For example, if the publication is meant to showcase the attractive products of a stationery store, it would be wise to dedicate half of the pages to illustrations, descriptions, and prices of stationery items. Sometimes, when there are as many display announcements as text pages, an announcement appears on the left page next to a text page on the right. When this happens, the typography should look neat; the font sizes shouldn’t be too big, and the type shouldn’t be darker than something like Caslon Oldstyle. It’s especially a mistake to use dark fonts when there are product illustrations on the page. Dark fonts can overpower and diminish the effectiveness of those illustrations.

A house-organ designed entirely—display announcements included—in the original Caslon Oldstyle by someone who knows how to get the best out of the type, would be ideal. The capitals, small capitals and lower-case of roman, and the capitals and 165lower-case of italic, can be manipulated so as to produce an abundance of typographic variety and interest.

A company newsletter designed entirely—including display announcements—in the original Caslon Oldstyle by someone who knows how to get the most out of the type would be perfect. The uppercase letters, small caps, and lowercase roman letters, along with the uppercase and lowercase italics, can be arranged to create plenty of typographic variety and interest.

EXAMPLE 447

Easily read and pleasingly illustrated. By the Warde Press, Pittsburgh

EXAMPLE 447

Easy to read and nicely illustrated. By the Warde Press, Pittsburgh

While house-organs should be edited with the purpose of presenting useful technical and business information to customers, there should be sufficient light matter and features to maintain interest. Not unimportant is the typography of such features. In the make-up of all house-organs are spaces at the end of articles that are available for feature purposes. Example 432 shows how one bit of blank space was made attractive by well-arranged small capitals, and in Example 450 similar use has been made of italic.

While company newsletters should be created to provide valuable technical and business information to customers, there should also be enough lighter content and features to keep their attention. The typography of these features is also important. In every company newsletter, there are spaces at the end of articles that can be used for features. Example 432 demonstrates how one blank space was made appealing with well-designed small capitals, and in Example 450 a similar approach using italics has been applied.

Articles of merchandise that are old-fashioned in their appeal furnish a motif for typographic treatment that can be made a feature. Examples 433 and 434 show Colonial typographic treatment, the use of italic and spaced small capitals, added to which is a feature page topped by an old-fashioned woodcut.

Articles of merchandise that have an old-school charm provide a theme for typography that can become a standout feature. Examples 433 and 434 display Colonial typography, using italics and spaced small capitals, complemented by a dedicated page featuring an old-fashioned woodcut at the top.

There is a suggestion of ancient rubricated books in the typographic handling of Example 445, appropriate for a printer who does typography especially well.

There’s a hint of old, decorated books in the way Example 445 is designed, fitting for a printer who excels at typography.

Borders around the text pages of house-organs can be made to act as features if they are designed with proper restraint, as was done in Examples 432 and 450.

Borders around the text pages of house organs can serve as features if they're designed with the right amount of restraint, as shown in Examples 432 and 450.

Rules and decorative borders, ornaments and initials are not out of place on house-organs when used as they are in Examples 440, 443, 444 and 445.

Rules and decorative borders, ornaments, and initials are perfectly fine on house-organs when used as shown in Examples 440, 443, 444, and 445.

When the house-organ is issued monthly an old-fashioned “almanack,” with appropriate matter interpolated, makes a good feature, as in Example 457.

When the company newsletter comes out each month, a traditional "almanac," with relevant content added in, makes a nice addition, as shown in Example 457.

EXAMPLE 448

A typographic house-organ

A company newsletter

EXAMPLE 449

An editorial page of typographic neatness

EXAMPLE 449

A clean and organized editorial page

166

EXAMPLE 450

Attractive use of rules and italic

EXAMPLE 450

Great use of rules and italics

EXAMPLE 452

A page in Cloister type

EXAMPLE 452

A page in Cloister font

EXAMPLE 451

An elaborate house-organ title-page

A fancy house-organ title page

EXAMPLE 453

Use of paragraph marks. From Cottrell’s Magazine

EXAMPLE 453

Using paragraph symbols. From Cottrell’s Magazine

As a novelty, house-organs have been printed on blotter stock. The general treatment for blotter house-organs is 167not different from that of other kinds. The appearance of a publication is maintained and the matter is merely adapted to the dimensions of the blotter.

As a new idea, house-organs have been printed on blotter paper. The overall approach for blotter house-organs is not different from that of other types. The look of the publication is preserved, and the content is just adjusted to fit the size of the blotter.

EXAMPLE 454

A good specimen of house-organ cover

EXAMPLE 454

A solid example of a house-organ cover

EXAMPLE 456

Cover of “The Philistine” issued about two months before Elbert Hubbard went down with the “Lusitania”

EXAMPLE 456

Cover of “The Philistine” released about two months before Elbert Hubbard went down with the “Lusitania”

House-organs are sometimes successful when laid out in newspaper style for four pages about 9 × 12 inches in size. The text matter is planned for three columns, the text type being eight- or nine-point, such as is customarily found on machines. Headings are graduated on the newspaper plan according to their importance. Illustrations are included at suitable points in such newspaper-like house-organs.

House-organs can be effective when designed like a newspaper, typically spanning four pages that are about 9 × 12 inches in size. The content is organized into three columns, using text that's eight or nine points in size, similar to what is commonly used on printing machines. Headlines are sized based on their significance, following a newspaper layout. Illustrations are incorporated at appropriate places in these newspaper-style house-organs.

EXAMPLE 455

Blank space used to good advantage. Text page from “The Ambassador”

EXAMPLE 455

Blank space effectively utilized. Text page from “The Ambassador”

There is suggestion for a novel house-organ treated in old-time newspaper style in the reproductions of the first two newspapers published in America. (See Examples 401 and 402 of the chapter on “Newspapers.”)

There is a suggestion for a new house-organ presented in an old-fashioned newspaper style in the reproductions of the first two newspapers published in America. (See Examples 401 and 402 of the chapter on “Newspapers.”)

A western printer, who has found the house-organ to be effective in his business, expressed himself in these words:

A western printer, who has found the company newsletter to be effective in his business, said:

Nowadays children are entertained as they are taught, and they learn unconsciously and much more readily than when study was made a task and a hardship. That is the principle we must embody in a house-organ—entertain and instruct simultaneously. Make your readers smile and enjoy themselves while they are learning the value of good printing, prompt service and square dealing. Create in them a desire to be as particular about their printing as they are about their company or the set of a collar, but keep them entertained and interested the while. Of course this can be overdone, so don’t make the mistake of having too much outside matter, but keep to your subject in a tactful way.

These days, kids are entertained while they learn, and they pick things up unconsciously and much more easily than when studying felt like a chore. That's the idea we need to capture in a house-organ—entertain and educate at the same time. Make your readers smile and have fun while they discover the importance of good printing, fast service, and honesty. Inspire them to care about their printing as much as they do about their friends or the style of a collar, but keep them engaged and interested throughout. Of course, this can be taken too far, so don't make the mistake of including too much unrelated content; stay on topic in a thoughtful way.

The day is past when business secrets can be kept from the buying public. During the past ten years magazine and general advertising policies have educated consumers along entirely new lines, and now they insist on knowing why they pay special prices for specific articles. They not only want to know why, but what it is, where it comes from, who makes and sells it, and how. The sooner we tell them these things, just that much sooner will confidence be established and buyers of printing acquire a knowledge that will enable them to buy intelligently, to distinguish between the economy in good service and the extravagance in poor service. In a house-organ there is unlimited opportunity for preaching the gospel of good service and for educating the public to the fact that that kind of service is the cheapest.

The time has passed when businesses can hide their secrets from consumers. Over the last ten years, magazine and general advertising strategies have educated buyers in entirely new ways, and now they demand to know why they're paying premium prices for certain products. They want to know not just the reason, but also what the product is, where it comes from, who makes and sells it, and how it’s made. The sooner we share this information, the faster we’ll build trust, and printing buyers will gain the knowledge to make informed decisions, so they can tell the difference between the cost-effectiveness of quality service and the wastefulness of poor service. A company newsletter offers endless opportunities to promote the importance of good service and to educate the public that this type of service is actually the most economical.

168

EXAMPLE 457

An “almanack” feature

An “almanac” feature

EXAMPLE 458

Bodoni typography

Bodoni font

EXAMPLE 459

Cover of a small house-organ

EXAMPLE 459

Cover of a small company newsletter

I consider the establishment of this confidence between the printer and customer one of the strongest pulling features of a house-organ. I do not mean by that that one should open his books to the public, but give enough information to let your readers know that you are in a business that requires capital for its conduct, that it is a dignified business, that you give efficient service, and that such efficiency costs you proportionately as much as it costs him. Having let your readers into this much of your business secrets, keep hammering away on your service and efficiency, but do it in a tactful way. Don’t bore him. Entertain him. Remember the old proverb, “He who tries to prove too much proves nothing.” So give it in homeopathic doses, but mighty regular ones.

I think building trust between the printer and customer is one of the strongest advantages of a house-organ. I’m not saying you should show your financial records to everyone, but you should provide enough information so that your readers understand you run a business that needs capital, it's a respectable operation, you offer quality service, and that maintaining that quality is just as costly for you as it is for them. Once you've shared this part of your business with your readers, keep emphasizing your service and efficiency, but do it in a thoughtful way. Don’t make it tedious. Make it engaging. Remember the saying, “He who tries to prove too much proves nothing.” So, share it in small, but consistent doses.

A feature of the house-organ as issued by a printer should be specimens of actual work. Small cover designs and pages from booklets and other specimens can be saved and collected from overruns and presented in the house-organ. It would be better to use but one or two specimens in each issue than to overload the publication. Only creditable work should be included in this manner. If, say, a bit of four-color process work is produced, it should not be used as an exhibit merely because there is color in it, but it should be tested by answering these questions: Is it a good drawing? Are the colors properly blended, or is there an unpleasant predominance of red and yellow? Are the plates in good condition? Have they been properly printed? Unless the answer is affirmative, it would be better to include neat, modest black-and-white specimens.

A feature of the house publication printed by a printer should showcase actual work. Small cover designs and pages from booklets and other examples can be collected from extras and included in the house publication. It’s better to use just one or two examples in each issue than to clutter the publication. Only quality work should be included this way. If, for instance, a piece of four-color process work is created, it shouldn’t be included just because it has color; it should be evaluated by asking these questions: Is it well-drawn? Are the colors blended well, or is there an overwhelming amount of red and yellow? Are the plates in good shape? Have they been printed correctly? If the answers aren’t positive, it’s better to feature clean, simple black-and-white examples.

Many house-organs are made ineffective by the anxiety of the business house issuing it to include everything possible. A number of issues should be planned and each should contain a limited amount of text matter and illustration. Many of those to whom the house-organ is sent also receive dozens of others, and examination and reading of the publication should not be discouraged. When there is too much of an abundance, the house-organ is either thrown in the waste basket or laid aside and never looked at again.

Many company newsletters become ineffective because the business feels the need to include everything possible. Each issue should be carefully planned and contain a limited amount of text and illustrations. Many of the recipients also get dozens of other newsletters, so it’s important to encourage them to examine and read the publication. When there’s too much content, the newsletter is either tossed in the trash or set aside and never looked at again.

Loose inclosures should not be numerous. Attention is frequently taken away from the house-organ itself by the variety of envelop slips, calendars and blotters that are included in the mailing. There should be nothing but a return post card, and this should be clipped to the inside of the rear cover and not tucked in on top of the title-page, as is too often done. Several return cards are reproduced (Examples 460, 461 and 462). When these post cards are planned the postal regulations governing their use should be investigated. It may be well to quote from the United States Postal Guide:

Loose enclosures shouldn't be too many. The variety of envelope slips, calendars, and blotters included in the mailing often distracts from the main content of the house-organ itself. There should only be a return postcard, and it should be securely attached to the inside of the back cover rather than just placed on top of the title page, which is a common mistake. Several return cards are shown (Examples 460, 461, and 462). When planning these postcards, it's important to check the postal regulations regarding their use. It could be useful to quote from the United States Postal Guide:

Post cards manufactured by private persons, consisting of an unfolded piece of cardboard in quality and weight substantially like the Government postal card, not exceeding in size 3916 by 5916 inches, nor less than 2¾ by 4 inches, bearing either written or printed messages, are transmissible without cover in the domestic mails (including the possessions of the United States), and to Canada, Cuba, Mexico, Republic of Panama, and city of Shanghai (China), at the postage rate of 1 cent each, and in the foreign mails at the rate of 2 cents each, to be paid by stamps affixed.

Postcards made by private individuals, consisting of a flat piece of cardboard similar in quality and weight to the Government postal card, measuring no more than 3916 by 5916 inches, and no smaller than 2¾ by 4 inches, with either handwritten or printed messages, can be sent without an envelope in the domestic mail (including U.S. territories) and to Canada, Cuba, Mexico, the Republic of Panama, and the city of Shanghai (China) for a postage rate of 1 cent each, and in foreign mail at a rate of 2 cents each, to be paid with affixed stamps.

Advertisements and illustrations may appear on the back of the card and on the left half of the face. The right half of the face must be reserved for the address, postage stamps, postmark, etc.

Advertisements and illustrations can be on the back of the card and on the left side of the front. The right side of the front must be kept for the address, postage stamps, postmark, etc.

EXAMPLE 460

EXAMPLE 460

EXAMPLE 461

EXAMPLE 461

EXAMPLE 462

Suggestions for treatment of the return post cards that usually accompany house-organs

EXAMPLE 462

Ideas for handling the return postcards that usually come with house-organs

EXAMPLE 463

Comparison of the same type forms printed on a hard-finished paper, and also on a soft-finished paper. The good qualities of these type-faces (Caslon Oldstyle, Baskerville Roman, Kennerley Oldstyle and Bodoni Book) are more evident and the print of the types more legible on the soft-finished paper

EXAMPLE 463

Comparison of the same typefaces printed on a glossy paper and also on a matte paper. The strengths of these typefaces (Caslon Oldstyle, Baskerville Roman, Kennerley Oldstyle, and Bodoni Book) are more noticeable and the text is easier to read on the matte paper.

169

TYPE-FACES

TYPE-FACES, at first acquaintance, are no more easily remembered than the faces of people we meet. Many persons look alike and many type-faces look alike, until we get to know them intimately and are able to distinguish their characteristics. The average man or woman is unable to identify Caslon Oldstyle, Scotch Roman, Bodoni Modern, or any specific letter used in printing, altho there are those who have a vague idea of the existence of types known as “old-style” or “modern.”

TYPE-FACES, at first glance, are just as hard to remember as the faces of people we meet. Many people look similar, and many type-faces do too, until we get to know them well enough to recognize their unique traits. Most men and women can't tell apart Caslon Oldstyle, Scotch Roman, Bodoni Modern, or any specific font used in printing, although some have a faint awareness of types called “old-style” or “modern.”

EXAMPLE 464-A

Roman alphabet from the inscription on the base of the Trajan column, Rome, about A. D. 114. From Johnston

EXAMPLE 464-A

Roman alphabet from the inscription on the base of the Trajan column, Rome, around A.D. 114. From Johnston

The fact that there are thousands of type-faces on the market adds to the difficulty of recognizing and naming them, and the situation is further involved by the practice of composing-machine makers in using only numbers to designate type-faces and by various typefounders giving different names to the same design of type. The special type-faces of private presses are usually given the name of the work on which they are first used.

The fact that there are thousands of typefaces available makes it harder to identify and name them. This challenge is made worse by the practice of typesetting machine manufacturers using only numbers to label typefaces, along with different typefounders using different names for the same type design. The unique typefaces used by private presses are usually named after the work they were first used in.

Six Standard Roman Type-Faces

Believing that such a service would be appreciated by printers and users of typography, the author made a study of the thousands of Roman type-faces on the market, with the purpose of selecting a half-dozen representative standard faces. It was felt that these type-faces should be legible and good-looking, and possess character; that their merits should be acknowledged by authorities, and that the types should be capable of wide serviceability on both book and job work.

Believing that this service would be valued by printers and typography users, the author researched the thousands of Roman typefaces available, aiming to select a handful of representative standard options. It was important that these typefaces be legible and visually appealing, with distinct character; their quality should be recognized by experts, and they should be versatile enough for both book and job printing.

EXAMPLE 464-B

Proportions of Roman capitals as found in the Trajan alphabet, and a few additional letters

EXAMPLE 464-B

The proportions of Roman capitals seen in the Trajan alphabet, along with a few extra letters

170

EXAMPLE 465

Evolution of Roman lower-case type-faces. (A) Pen-made Roman capitals. (B) Development into Minuscules or lower-case thru rapid lettering. (C) Black Letter or German Text developed from Roman Uncials. (D) White Letter, the open, legible Caroline Minuscules, on which Jenson based his Roman type-face of 1470. (E) A recent type-face closely modeled on Jenson’s Roman types. (F) Joseph Moxon’s letters of 1676. (G) Caslon’s type-face of 1722

EXAMPLE 465

Evolution of Roman lower-case typefaces. (A) Handwritten Roman capitals. (B) Development into minuscules or lower-case through rapid writing. (C) Black Letter or German Text evolved from Roman Uncials. (D) White Letter, the clear, readable Caroline minuscules, which Jenson used to create his Roman typeface in 1470. (E) A modern typeface closely modeled on Jenson’s Roman types. (F) Joseph Moxon’s letters from 1676. (G) Caslon’s typeface from 1722.

The face first selected—and without hesitation—was Caslon Oldstyle as originally designed. Scotch Roman was the second selection, Cheltenham Oldstyle the third, Cloister Oldstyle the fourth, Bodoni Book the fifth, and French Oldstyle the sixth. (All shown in Example 467.)

The first font chosen—without any hesitation—was Caslon Oldstyle as it was originally designed. The second choice was Scotch Roman, the third was Cheltenham Oldstyle, the fourth was Cloister Oldstyle, the fifth was Bodoni Book, and the sixth was French Oldstyle. (All shown in Example 467.)

Type-faces designed and cut for private use were not considered in making these selections, as it was believed best to adhere to type-faces that are procurable from most foundries and that are available for machine composition. It may be well to inject here a warning that most so-called Caslon Oldstyles are not as good as the one selected (Example 467-B); that Jenson Oldstyle is inferior to Cloister Oldstyle (Example 467-A) as a representative of the original Jenson type. However, good representatives of Scotch Roman (Example 467-D) are obtainable under the name of Wayside, of National Roman, etc.

Typefaces designed and created for personal use were not considered in these selections because it was deemed better to stick to typefaces that can be sourced from most foundries and that are available for machine typesetting. It’s important to note that most so-called Caslon Oldstyles are not as good as the one chosen (Example 467-B); that Jenson Oldstyle is not as good as Cloister Oldstyle (Example 467-A) as a true representation of the original Jenson type. However, good versions of Scotch Roman (Example 467-D) can be found under names like Wayside, National Roman, etc.

EXAMPLE 466

Two standard type-faces that rate high in legibility, but that are colorless in the mass and lacking in the pleasing irregularities of form that characterized Roman type-faces before the nineteenth century. The various qualities of legibility found in Modernized Oldstyle have been converted to narrower letter shapes and more “modern” form in Century Expanded

EXAMPLE 466

Two standard typefaces that rank high in legibility, but are dull in appearance and lack the appealing irregularities of form that defined Roman typefaces before the nineteenth century. The different aspects of legibility found in Modernized Oldstyle have been transformed into narrower letter shapes and a more “modern” form in Century Expanded.

171

EXAMPLE 467

Six standard representative Roman type-faces, approved by authorities for both beauty and legibility, and selected by the author from the thousands of type-faces available for hand and machine composition

EXAMPLE 467

Six standard representative Roman typefaces, approved by experts for their beauty and readability, and chosen by the author from the thousands of typefaces available for hand and machine composition.

Selection of these faces was also made just as a person makes a wise selection of records for a Victrola—for permanency and investment. As standard records can be selected which will “wear” for a long time, so standard type-faces can be selected which will look well for many years. Good type-faces are like good music.

Selection of these typefaces was also done just like someone wisely picks records for a Victrola—thinking about durability and value. Just as you can choose standard records that will last a long time, you can select standard typefaces that will look good for many years. Good typefaces are like good music.

We will discuss these six faces.

We will talk about these six aspects.


Cloister Oldstyle.—Use in American printing of a standard type-face based on the Roman letter cut by Nicholas Jenson about 1470 has been retarded by the fact that typefounders in this country some years ago used as a model Morris’s interpretation of the Jenson face instead of going direct to the original letter. Jenson’s face had been copied by Bruce Rogers, T. J. Cobden-Sanderson, Frederic W. Goudy and others, and the fonts used privately, but for general use it was not until 1914 that a creditable copy of the face was made available by the good judgment displayed by the American Type Founders Company in bringing out Cloister Oldstyle. This is probably the best rendition of the spirit of an old Roman type-face that a modern type foundry has made. If there is a fault, it is that the lower-case letters set a trifle too close.

Cloister Oldstyle.—In American printing, the adoption of a standard typeface based on the Roman letter designed by Nicholas Jenson around 1470 has been slow due to typefounders in this country, years ago, choosing Morris’s version of the Jenson type instead of using the original. Jenson’s typeface had been replicated by Bruce Rogers, T. J. Cobden-Sanderson, Frederic W. Goudy, and others for private use, but it wasn’t until 1914 that a decent copy became available thanks to the American Type Founders Company, which released Cloister Oldstyle. This is likely the best representation of an old Roman typeface that a modern type foundry has produced. If there’s a drawback, it’s that the lowercase letters are set a bit too close together.

172

EXAMPLE 468

Type-face used in Italy by Sweinheim and Pannartz in 1465. From De Vinne

EXAMPLE 468

Typeface used in Italy by Sweinheim and Pannartz in 1465. From De Vinne

EXAMPLE 469

The Roman types of John and Wendelin of Spires, Venice, 1469. Greek letters were to be written in the line now half blank. From the original in Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City, N. J.

EXAMPLE 469

The Roman types of John and Wendelin of Spires, Venice, 1469. Greek letters were to be written in the line that is now half empty. From the original in Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City, N. J.

173

EXAMPLE 470

The beautiful “White Letter” Roman type-face of Nicholas Jenson, 1470, from “Eusebius,” the first book printed by him at Venice. The dot over the “i,” small and slightly to the right, is found, also, in the manuscript specimen here inserted. From the original in the Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City, N. J.

EXAMPLE 470

The elegant “White Letter” Roman typeface by Nicholas Jenson, 1470, from “Eusebius,” the first book he printed in Venice. The dot over the “i,” small and slightly to the right, is also present in the manuscript sample included here. From the original at the Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City, N. J.

EXAMPLE 471

Section of manuscript of the fifteenth century, in the Charlemagne “White Letter” on which Jenson may have modeled his Roman type-face. From Humphrey

EXAMPLE 471

Section of a 15th-century manuscript, in the Charlemagne “White Letter” that Jenson may have used as a model for his Roman typeface. From Humphrey

Jenson’s face was not the first Roman type made, as is 174sometimes supposed; others had previously been used (Example 469), but it was the first Roman type to meet the approval of those who preferred the Italian White Letter to the Gothic Black Letter.

Jenson's face wasn't the first Roman type created, as is sometimes thought; others had been used before it (Example 469), but it was the first Roman type that gained approval from those who favored the Italian White Letter over the Gothic Black Letter.

EXAMPLE 472

Type-face used by Paul Manutius at Venice in 1566

EXAMPLE 472

Font used by Paul Manutius in Venice in 1566

Sweinheim and Pannartz were German printers who, in 1465, began to print near Rome. Until this time the black Text letter such as Gutenberg had printed with ten years before was the only one used in typography, but book buyers in Italy wanted Italian lettering. The German printers attempted to cut an Italian face, but in appearance they did not advance far from Gothic lettering (Example 468).

Sweinheim and Pannartz were German printers who, in 1465, started printing near Rome. Until then, the blackletter type used by Gutenberg ten years earlier was the only style in typography, but book buyers in Italy wanted an Italian font. The German printers tried to create an Italian style, but their efforts didn’t stray much from Gothic lettering. (Example 468).

EXAMPLE 473

Cloister Oldstyle set in imitation of the Jenson title on page 14. Printed and zinc-etched, as was the original

EXAMPLE 473

Cloister Oldstyle set to mimic the Jenson title on page 14. Printed and zinc-etched, just like the original.

EXAMPLE 474

Type-face cut in 1693, now used by the National Printing Office, Paris. Notice slight projection on lower-case “l,” a decorative feature used by Gutenberg in his types

EXAMPLE 474

Typeface created in 1693, now used by the National Printing Office in Paris. Notice the slight projection on the lowercase “l,” a decorative detail used by Gutenberg in his types.

EXAMPLE 475

The first line is set in Cloister Oldstyle; second reproduced from Elzevir page opposite; third set in Cadmus; fourth in Caslon Oldstyle. These lines are zinc-etched

EXAMPLE 475

The first line is in Cloister Oldstyle; the second is taken from the Elzevir page opposite; the third is in Cadmus; and the fourth is in Caslon Oldstyle. These lines are zinc-etched.

John and Wendelin of Spires, Germans, began to print at Venice in 1469 with a type-face that was more Italian in character, yet it had Gothic characteristics. Nicholas Jenson, a Frenchman, who began to print in 1470 at Venice, was more successful, and he gave to the world the fine Roman type-face that he used on his first book, shown, together with a sample of contemporary lettering of similar design, as Example 470. More facts about Jenson will be found on page 14.

John and Wendelin of Spires, Germans, started printing in Venice in 1469 using a typeface that was more Italian in style, although it still had Gothic features. Nicholas Jenson, a Frenchman, began printing in Venice in 1470 and was more successful. He introduced the beautiful Roman typeface used in his first book, displayed alongside a sample of contemporary lettering with a similar design as Example 470. More information about Jenson can be found on page 14.

EXAMPLE 476

Cheltenham Oldstyle, with the capitals a size smaller, set in imitation of the Plantin typography on page 16

EXAMPLE 476

Cheltenham Oldstyle, with the capitals one size smaller, designed to mimic the Plantin typography on page 16

175

EXAMPLE 477

Type-faces used by Daniel Elzevir at Amsterdam in 1675. From “The American Printer” library

EXAMPLE 477

Fonts used by Daniel Elzevir in Amsterdam in 1675. From “The American Printer” library

EXAMPLE 478

The Roman types of Fournier, the French founder, taken from his type book of 1766

EXAMPLE 478

The Roman typefaces created by Fournier, the French type designer, featured in his type book from 1766

176

EXAMPLE 479

A capital alphabet drawn by Joseph Moxon (1676) to a scale of forty-two small squares

EXAMPLE 479

A capital alphabet created by Joseph Moxon (1676) using a scale of forty-two small squares

EXAMPLE 481

Earliest known specimen sheet of printing types, issued by William Caslon in 1734

EXAMPLE 481

The earliest known specimen sheet of printing types, released by William Caslon in 1734.

As time went on, printers and typefounders made changes in the Jenson design, but these alterations were not numerous (the cross stroke in the lower-case e was one, Example 495), and fairly close resemblance to the Jenson types is found in the Roman types of Paul Manutius, 1566 (Example 472), Daniel Elzevir, 1675 (Example 477), and Fournier, 1766 (Example 478).

As time passed, printers and type founders made some changes to the Jenson design, but these modifications were not many (the cross stroke in the lowercase e was one, Example 495), and a close resemblance to Jenson types is seen in the Roman types of Paul Manutius, 1566 (Example 472), Daniel Elzevir, 1675 (Example 477), and Fournier, 1766 (Example 478).

EXAMPLE 480

Moxon’s lower-case alphabet, which he says was patterned after the letters of a Dutch punch cutter

EXAMPLE 480

Moxon’s lowercase alphabet, which he claims was inspired by the letters of a Dutch punch cutter

In selecting a page from Jenson’s book, “Eusebius,” to be photographed, the writer had great difficulty in finding one of sufficient evenness and clearness of print. It may be that Jenson, in his endeavor to enhance the “White Letter” effect of his types, used a minimum of ink, and, under these circumstances it was perhaps more difficult for him to maintain consistent page color than it was for Gutenberg to do so with his “Black Letter” pages. Bruce Rogers’s printing of his Jenson-like pages of typography would be a revelation to the old-time Venetian printer.

In choosing a page from Jenson’s book, “Eusebius,” to be photographed, the writer struggled to find one with evenness and clarity of print. It’s possible that Jenson, in his attempt to enhance the “White Letter” effect of his types, used minimal ink, making it harder for him to maintain a consistent page color compared to Gutenberg with his “Black Letter” pages. Bruce Rogers’s printing of his Jenson-like typography would be a revelation to the traditional Venetian printer.

Jenson made his Roman letter in only one size, and that fairly large (about sixteen-point), so that the open design of the characters would admit white light from the paper background. When, some years later, he was required to print cheap devotional books, he cut and used a compact Black Letter Text type for the purpose.

Jenson created his Roman letter in just one size, which was quite large (about sixteen-point), allowing the open design of the characters to let in white light from the paper background. A few years later, when he needed to print inexpensive devotional books, he designed and used a compact Black Letter Text type for that purpose.

There is now a movement away from the mechanical style of type-face, restricted in design by arbitrary craft rules, in the direction of the graceful, interesting yet legible faces represented by Cloister Oldstyle.

There is now a shift away from the mechanical style of typeface, limited in design by arbitrary craft rules, towards the elegant, engaging yet readable typefaces like Cloister Oldstyle.

This type will be found in use in Examples 171, 240, 256, 266, 286, 316, 337, 340, 341, 345, 357, 359, 372, 383, 399 and 452.

This type will be found in use in Examples 171, 240, 256, 266, 286, 316, 337, 340, 341, 345, 357, 359, 372, 383, 399 and 452.

The Italic that accompanies Cloister Oldstyle is based on the Italic of Aldus Manutius.

The Italic that goes with Cloister Oldstyle is based on the Italic of Aldus Manutius.


Caslon Oldstyle.—This is a historic American type-face. It was used by that renowned American printer, Benjamin Franklin; it appears on eighteenth-century school books, and even our paper money was printed with it. It was the type-face used by John Dunlap, the Philadelphia printer, in setting up and printing the first published 177copies of the Declaration of Independence, a few hours after it had been passed by Congress, July 4, 1776. (See facsimile that appears as a frontispiece to this book). It was one of these copies that was read to the Continental Army.

Caslon Oldstyle.—This is a historic American typeface. It was used by the famous American printer, Benjamin Franklin; it appears on 18th-century school books, and even our paper money was printed with it. It was the typeface used by John Dunlap, the Philadelphia printer, to set up and print the first published 177 copies of the Declaration of Independence, just a few hours after Congress passed it on July 4, 1776. (See the facsimile that appears as a frontispiece to this book). It was one of these copies that was read to the Continental Army.

EXAMPLES 479-A and 480-A

The Moxon alphabets inked in and reproduced in a smaller size

EXAMPLES 479-A and 480-A

The Moxon alphabets drawn in and resized to be smaller.

Today, nearly two hundred years after the first font was cut, Caslon Oldstyle has the approval of the good printers of America, who regard it, in its original form, as the best and most useful Roman type-face available, as it is one of the few old faces the punches and matrices of which have been preserved and placed at the disposal of all printers.

Today, almost two hundred years after the first font was created, Caslon Oldstyle is favored by the skilled printers of America, who see it, in its original form, as the best and most practical Roman typeface out there, since it is one of the few old styles whose punches and matrices have been preserved and are available for all printers to use.

The Caslon foundry in England now casts the original letter as “Caslon Old-face.” In this country, all typefounders make some sort of Caslon, and it may be procured practically in its original form, with long descenders, kerned f and j, old special characters, decorated Italic capitals and all, from the American Type Founders Company, which has named it “Caslon Oldstyle 471” (Example 517).

The Caslon foundry in England now produces the original typeface known as “Caslon Old-face.” In the U.S., every typefounder offers some version of Caslon, and you can get it almost exactly as it was, featuring long descenders, kerned f and j, vintage special characters, embellished Italic capitals, and everything else, from the American Type Founders Company, which has branded it as “Caslon Oldstyle 471” (Example 517).

Other foundries are preparing to furnish the letter more in its original form, and composing-machine makers are doing likewise. The monotype company, after cutting several faces in imitation of imitations of Caslon’s type, finally copied the original fairly successfully, and this, as now obtainable, is known as Caslon Oldstyle No. 337. The linotype company is recutting its Caslons and is making a sincere effort to reproduce the original letter as closely as possible. Mechanical difficulties prevent an exact duplication in every detail of the Caslon type in machine composition, yet the companies that are attempting it show a spirit that augurs well for the future quality of printing in America.

Other foundries are getting ready to provide the letter more in its original form, and makers of composing machines are doing the same. The monotype company, after trying out several versions that imitated Caslon’s type, eventually managed to successfully replicate the original, which is now available as Caslon Oldstyle No. 337. The linotype company is reworking its Caslons and making a genuine effort to closely reproduce the original letter. Mechanical challenges prevent an exact match in every detail of the Caslon type in machine composition, but the companies that are making the effort reflect a positive outlook for the future quality of printing in America.

Caslon Oldstyle is not at its best printed on a smooth, highly-calendered surface.

Caslon Oldstyle doesn't look great when printed on a smooth, highly-polished surface.

When properly composed and printed, it presents as a page a dark-gray tone, formed of a pleasant mixture of black ink and white paper; its letters show more of a contrast in thick and thin strokes than do the Roman types of Nicholas Jenson, and have more color and interest than the modernized old-styles of the nineteenth century. In the sizes above ten-point it measures up in legibility and beauty to the requirements of the best printers and other students of typography.

When properly designed and printed, it appears as a dark-gray page, created from a nice blend of black ink and white paper; its letters have more contrast in thick and thin strokes than the Roman types of Nicholas Jenson, and have more depth and interest than the updated old styles from the nineteenth century. In sizes larger than ten-point, it meets the standards for legibility and beauty demanded by top printers and other typography enthusiasts.

Caslon did not create an entirely new Roman letter, but with the elements that had already been provided by Jenson and the type designers of Holland he did, with good taste and skill, build a type-face that is distinctive, legible and beautiful. The illustration of the evolution of Roman lower-case in Example 465 furnishes opportunity for study of this point.

Caslon didn't create a completely new Roman typeface, but by using the elements that Jenson and the Dutch type designers had already provided, he skillfully built a typeface that is distinctive, readable, and beautiful. The illustration of the evolution of Roman lower-case in Example 465 offers a chance to study this aspect.

The story of the designing of Caslon Oldstyle has been often told, yet a few brief facts may be of interest here.

The story of designing Caslon Oldstyle has been told many times, but a few quick facts might be interesting here.

EXAMPLE 482

There were two slightly different faces to many of the Caslon fonts. From the specimen pages in Luckombe’s “History of Printing,” published in 1770

EXAMPLE 482

Many of the Caslon fonts had two slightly different versions. This can be seen in the sample pages from Luckombe’s “History of Printing,” published in 1770.

Typefounding and printing had deteriorated in England, and the product of the printing press was pathetically poor (the author was surprised, in examining important volumes printed in England about 1700, at the consistently poor work of typefounder, compositor and pressman), when, in 1720, William Caslon, an engraver on metal, was called upon to cut a font of Arabic characters, to be used in printing a New Testament for the poor Christians in Palestine and Arabia. At the same time, for use at the foot of the proofs of his Arabic types, he cut his own name in Roman, pica size. (This was at the time when Benjamin Franklin was working as a journeyman at Watt’s printing office.)

Typefounding and printing had declined in England, and the output from the printing press was really subpar (the author was surprised, while examining significant volumes printed in England around 1700, at the consistently bad work of the typefounder, compositor, and pressman). In 1720, William Caslon, a metal engraver, was asked to create a font of Arabic characters to be used for printing a New Testament for impoverished Christians in Palestine and Arabia. At the same time, he also carved his own name in Roman, pica size, for use at the bottom of the proofs of his Arabic types. (This was during the time when Benjamin Franklin was working as a journeyman at Watt’s printing office.)

The pica size, however, was not cast immediately. So far as is known, the size of Roman first to be cast by Caslon was that called “English” (about fourteen-point), which he cut in 1722. Additional sizes followed, and at about the period of his death, in 1766, there were at least thirty fonts of Roman (pearl to five-line pica), nineteen fonts of Italic, ten fonts of Black Text, and various fonts of Greek, Hebrew and other alphabets, together with more than a half-hundred fonts of flowers and bands.

The pica size, however, wasn't created right away. As far as we know, the first size of Roman type to be made by Caslon was called “English” (around fourteen-point), which he designed in 1722. More sizes came after that, and by the time of his death in 1766, there were at least thirty fonts of Roman (ranging from pearl to five-line pica), nineteen fonts of Italic, ten fonts of Black Text, and various fonts of Greek, Hebrew, and other alphabets, along with over fifty fonts of decorative flowers and bands.

The fonts that have been preserved to us, and that are purchasable, do not include all. There were Nos. 1 and 2 faces in nonpareil, brevier, bourgeois, long-primer, small-pica, pica, english and double-pica (two-line small-pica). The No. 1 face in each case was a trifle larger than that of No. 2, and a third face, still larger, was made in bourgeois and long-primer.

The fonts that are still available to us for purchase don't include all types. There were No. 1 and No. 2 sizes in nonpareil, brevier, bourgeois, long-primer, small-pica, pica, English, and double-pica (two-line small-pica). The No. 1 size in each case was slightly larger than No. 2, and a third size, which was even larger, was made in bourgeois and long-primer.

178These faces were all shown, in honor of the memory of William Caslon and as a tribute to the merit of the type, in Luckombe’s “History of Printing,” published by Adlard & Browne, London, in 1770 (Example 482).

178These typefaces were all displayed to honor the memory of William Caslon and to pay tribute to the quality of the type in Luckombe’s “History of Printing,” published by Adlard & Browne, London, in 1770 (Example 482).

It is probably the smaller and lighter No. 2 faces that have been preserved to us in the ten-point (long-primer) sizes and under. The lighter, more open eighteen-point (great-primer) Italic (Example 517), so different from the Italic of the other sizes, is as Caslon made it. In some respects it is better than the Italic of other sizes.

It’s likely that the smaller and lighter No. 2 typefaces have been kept in the ten-point (long-primer) sizes and smaller. The lighter, more open eighteen-point (great-primer) Italic (Example 517), which is quite distinct from the Italic of the other sizes, is made just as Caslon intended. In some ways, it’s better than the Italic in other sizes.

While the general appearance of all sizes of the Roman is the same (and of the Italic also, with the exception noted), there are slight differences in details of design in the various sizes. For this reason, when Caslon Oldstyle is compared with the original letters, the comparison should be with the same size in each instance.

While the overall look of all sizes of the Roman typeface is the same (and also the Italic, except for the noted differences), there are minor variations in design details among the different sizes. Therefore, when comparing Caslon Oldstyle to the original letters, it’s important to compare the same size in each case.

De Vinne, perhaps influenced by the prejudices and practices of nineteenth-century typefounders, in one of his books points out as defects in the original Caslon types features that typefounders and composing-machine makers are today restoring to the face as used in America. The “defects” were supposed to be: “Too long a beak to the f and j; unnecessary narrowness in the s and a, and in some capitals; too great width of the c, o and v.”

De Vinne, possibly influenced by the biases and practices of nineteenth-century typefounders, points out in one of his books features in the original Caslon types that today's typefounders and composing-machine makers are actually restoring in American usage. The "flaws" he mentioned were: "Too long a beak on the f and j; unnecessary slimness in the s and a, and in some capital letters; and too much width in the c, o, and v.”

Typefounders and composing-machine makers have filled the type cases of the printers of this country with Caslons that have been improved (!), recut, modified, adjusted to “lining” systems, made bold, disfigured, sawed-off and ill-treated generally; and as they bring out good copies of the original letter, it is to be hoped that, so far as possible, sale of the defective and offending type-faces and matrices will be discontinued.

Typefounders and makers of typesetting machines have stocked the type cases of printers in this country with Caslons that have been improved (!), recut, modified, adjusted to “lining” systems, made bolder, distorted, shortened, and generally mistreated; and since they produce decent copies of the original type, we can hope that the sale of the flawed and problematic typefaces and matrices will come to an end.

William Caslon died in 1766, and the business was continued by William Caslon the second, and then by William Caslon the third. Mrs. Henry Caslon conducted the business in 1796, when was brought out the modernized Caslon (Example 484-B) that was probably the model for the type we know as Scotch Roman. This modernization was a concession to the demand for types in the new style that had been designed by Giambattista Bodoni, an Italian typefounder.

William Caslon died in 1766, and the business was carried on by William Caslon the second, and then by William Caslon the third. Mrs. Henry Caslon managed the business in 1796, when the modernized Caslon (Example 484-B) was introduced, which likely served as the model for the type we now know as Scotch Roman. This update was a response to the demand for types in the new style that had been created by Giambattista Bodoni, an Italian typefounder.

The influence of Bodoni’s ideas in type design was such that Caslon Oldstyle was not included in the 1805 specimen book of the Caslon foundry, and did not again appear therein until 1860, a year after the face had been reintroduced to America by a Philadelphia foundry.

The impact of Bodoni's ideas in type design was so significant that Caslon Oldstyle was not featured in the 1805 specimen book of the Caslon foundry and didn't show up again there until 1860, a year after it was reintroduced to America by a Philadelphia foundry.

The story of the revival of Caslon Oldstyle in England has been told in these words:

The story of the revival of Caslon Oldstyle in England has been told in these words:

In the year 1843, Mr. Whittingham, of the Chiswick Press, waited on Mr. Caslon to ask his aid in carrying out the then new idea of printing, in appropriate type, “The Diary of Lady Willoughby,” a work of fiction, the period and diction of which were supposed to be of the reign of Charles I. The original matrices of the first William Caslon having been fortunately preserved, Mr. Caslon undertook to supply a small font of great-primer. So well was Mr. Whittingham satisfied with the result of his experiment that he determined on printing other volumes in the same style, and eventually he was supplied with a complete series of all the old fonts.

In 1843, Mr. Whittingham from the Chiswick Press approached Mr. Caslon to seek his help in implementing a new idea for printing “The Diary of Lady Willoughby” in suitable type. This fictional work was meant to reflect the style and language of the era of Charles I. Fortunately, the original matrices of the first William Caslon were still preserved, so Mr. Caslon agreed to provide a small set of great-primer type. Mr. Whittingham was so pleased with the outcome of his project that he decided to print additional volumes in the same style, ultimately receiving a complete set of all the old fonts.

America took part early in the revival of Caslon’s old-style types, for in 1858 matrices were brought to the United States by the Johnson Type Foundry, afterward MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, now the Philadelphia branch of the American Type Founders Company.

America got involved early in the revival of Caslon’s traditional typefaces, as in 1858, matrices were brought to the United States by the Johnson Type Foundry, which later became MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, now the Philadelphia branch of the American Type Founders Company.

The first size made in this country was brevier, which was announced in the “Typographic Advertiser,” the company’s house-organ, of January, 1859. Six months later thirteen sizes were shown, and in 1865 Caslon Oldstyle was made in sizes from pearl to six-line pica.

The first type size created in this country was brevier, which was announced in the "Typographic Advertiser," the company's magazine, in January 1859. Six months later, thirteen sizes were introduced, and in 1865, Caslon Oldstyle was produced in sizes ranging from pearl to six-line pica.

The decorative Italic types, known as Swash letters, were not until 1916 included in the American fonts, but these, redrawn by T. M. Cleland, are now procurable.

The decorative Italic types, known as Swash letters, weren’t included in American fonts until 1916, but these, redrawn by T. M. Cleland, are now available.

Selection of Caslon Oldstyle, in 1892, for the text and advertisements of Vogue, the use of the letter by Will Bradley at the Wayside Press, in 1896, and the general old-style revival, influenced by the work of William Morris, of the Kelmscott Press, in England, were causes that led to the present popularity of Caslon Oldstyle.

Selection of Caslon Oldstyle in 1892 for the text and ads of Vogue, the way Will Bradley used the font at the Wayside Press in 1896, and the overall old-style revival influenced by William Morris's work at the Kelmscott Press in England all contributed to the current popularity of Caslon Oldstyle.

This Caslon style of type-face is one of the few standard letters that has practically unlimited usefulness. Properly treated, it looks well on any class of printing, from a business card to the text and advertising pages of periodicals. It may be seen in action in this book by referring to Examples 18, 34, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 81, 82, 86, 96, 119, 121, 126, 127, 132, 133, 134, 135, 138, 150, 151, 167, 168, 169, 172, 178, 180, 188, 190, 191, 195, 203, 215, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 228, 230, 231, 232, 236, 239, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 260, 262, 268, 274, 282, 284, 287, 289, 290, 292, 294, 296, 297, 300, 374, 375, 382, 384, 385, 393, 394, 396, 426, 429, 430, 433, 434, 436, 438, 439, 440, 441, 448, 450, 451, 453, 455, 459, 460 and 461; the frontispiece; upper specimen, page 21; reproductions, page 23; insert opposite page 32; upper specimen, page 33.

This Caslon typeface is one of the few standard fonts that has virtually unlimited usefulness. When used correctly, it looks great for any type of printing, from business cards to text and ads in magazines. You can see it in action in this book by checking out Examples 18, 34, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 81, 82, 86, 96, 119, 121, 126, 127, 132, 133, 134, 135, 138, 150, 151, 167, 168, 169, 172, 178, 180, 188, 190, 191, 195, 203, 215, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 228, 230, 231, 232, 236, 239, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 260, 262, 268, 274, 282, 284, 287, 289, 290, 292, 294, 296, 297, 300, 374, 375, 382, 384, 385, 393, 394, 396, 426, 429, 430, 433, 434, 436, 438, 439, 440, 441, 448, 450, 451, 453, 455, 459, 460 and 461; the frontispiece; upper specimen, page 21; reproductions, page 23; insert opposite page 32; upper specimen, page 33.

EXAMPLE 483

On the left is a reduced reproduction (from Reed) of Baskerville’s types used in a book of 1758, and on the right, for comparison, is the same matter set in Baskerville Roman, twelve-point size, introduced to America in 1917

EXAMPLE 483

On the left is a smaller version (from Reed) of Baskerville’s typeface used in a book from 1758, and on the right, for comparison, is the same text set in Baskerville Roman, twelve-point size, which was introduced to America in 1917.

179

EXAMPLE 484

The possible descent of Scotch Roman. (A) Baskerville Roman, based on Baskerville’s letter of 1758. (B) Mrs. Caslon’s “modern” Roman of 1796. (C) Scotch Roman, as we know it today

EXAMPLE 484

The potential origin of Scotch Roman. (A) Baskerville Roman, inspired by Baskerville’s font from 1758. (B) Mrs. Caslon’s “modern” Roman from 1796. (C) Scotch Roman, as we recognize it today.

Bodoni Book.—When a representative of the Bodoni type family was selected for a place in the group of standard faces, Bodoni Book was chosen for its refinement and legibility. In its lower-case, especially when printed on other than gloss-surfaced paper, it seems to have more of the qualities of the best types of the Parma printer than does Bodoni, the first series brought out by the American Type Founders Company. Scientific tests have demonstrated that in the small sizes usually used for text purposes, type-faces with considerable contrast of hairlines and heavy strokes strain the eyes. The contrast found in Bodoni Book is moderate.

Bodoni Book.—When a representative of the Bodoni type family was chosen for inclusion in the group of standard fonts, Bodoni Book was selected for its elegance and readability. In its lowercase, especially when printed on paper that isn't gloss-coated, it seems to possess more of the characteristics of the best types by the Parma printer than Bodoni, the first series released by the American Type Founders Company. Scientific tests have shown that in the smaller sizes typically used for text, typefaces with a significant contrast between thin and thick strokes can be hard on the eyes. The contrast found in Bodoni Book is moderate.

John Baptist Bodoni was born in Italy twenty years after William Caslon cut his first font of Roman letter. Bodoni’s subsequent career as a printer and typefounder doubtless resulted from his entrance, when eighteen years old, to the printing house of the Propaganda, in Rome. He began his important work in Parma in 1768.

John Baptist Bodoni was born in Italy twenty years after William Caslon created his first Roman font. Bodoni’s later career as a printer and type founder likely stemmed from his start at the Propaganda printing house in Rome when he was eighteen. He began his significant work in Parma in 1768.

The print of his books is remarkable for clearness, and in both type-cutting and printing he was skilful to a high degree. His types are not quite so regular in design as the recent Bodonis, and were given additional character by being impressed firmly in paper that did not have the enameled surface so much in use in our day.

The print of his books is notable for its clarity, and he was highly skilled in both type-cutting and printing. His types aren’t as uniform in design as the recent Bodonis but gained extra character by being pressed firmly into paper that lacked the glossy finish commonly used today.

His type-faces were a change from those previously used—different from the type-faces of Jenson, the Elzevirs and Caslon. The change was principally in the serifs, which were straight, thin strokes; and the general character of the letters was also distinctive. He used a few fonts in which the straight serifs were rounded by being filled in slightly at the corners, and these fonts probably suggested to Scotch, English and American founders the style known as “modern,” as compared with the “old-style” faces in use before Bodoni’s time.

His typefaces were different from those previously used—unlike the typefaces of Jenson, the Elzevirs, and Caslon. The main difference was in the serifs, which were straight, thin strokes; and the overall look of the letters was also unique. He used a few fonts where the straight serifs were rounded slightly at the corners, and these fonts likely inspired Scotch, English, and American founders to create the style known as “modern,” in contrast to the “old-style” faces that were used before Bodoni’s time.

The reader can compare for himself the resemblance of Bodoni Book to one of the text types of Bodoni as used in 1789. In order that the comparison could be fairly made, the Bodoni Book (Example 486) was printed on antique paper and etched on zinc, as the original Bodoni page had been (see page 26). This type is not only lighter, but other details are different from a 1790 type of Bodoni (Example 487-A), which may have served as a model for the present-day type-face called Bodoni. Compare the capital Rs, and notice that the cross stroke on the lower-case t in the 1783 alphabet is low and distinct, while on the 1789 page it is high and joined with the upper end of the vertical stroke. The latter treatment prevails on many of Bodoni’s types, as it does on practically all type-faces. Excepting for the straight serifs, many of Bodoni’s types have some general resemblance to other Roman types of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.

The reader can compare for themselves the resemblance of Bodoni Book to one of the text styles of Bodoni from 1789. To ensure a fair comparison, the Bodoni Book (Example 486) was printed on antique paper and etched on zinc, just like the original Bodoni page (see page 26). This type is not only lighter, but also has different details compared to a 1790 Bodoni type (Example 487-A), which may have influenced the modern typeface called Bodoni. Compare the capital Rs, and note that the cross stroke on the lower-case t in the 1783 alphabet is low and distinct, while on the 1789 page it is high and connected to the upper part of the vertical stroke. This latter treatment is common in many of Bodoni’s types, as it is in almost all typefaces. Aside from the straight serifs, many of Bodoni’s types bear a general resemblance to other Roman types from the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.

In designing the present-day Bodoni, the typefounders gave it much of the “finish” in design that was given type-faces by Scotch and American founders during the nineteenth century. Typefounders seldom succeed in faithfully reproducing old type-faces, for the reason that they “correct the faults” of the old faces, and in doing so lose much of the humanistic spirit of the original. Were it not that the punches of some of William Caslon’s types were preserved, we would not have the true rendering of this old-style that we now possess. Modernized Oldstyle represents the Caslon face corrected and improved as the typefounders of the nineteenth century thought it should be. Some American founders, however, are making excellent progress in reproducing the spirit of old type-faces, and it is possible that we may yet have a satisfactory copy of the famous “silver” types of the Elzevirs.

In creating the modern Bodoni, the type founders incorporated much of the design polish that Scottish and American founders applied to typefaces in the 1800s. Type founders rarely manage to accurately replicate old typefaces because they tend to "fix the flaws" of the originals, which results in losing much of the original's humanistic character. If it weren't for the preservation of some of William Caslon’s type punches, we wouldn’t have the authentic version of this old-style type that we have today. Modernized Oldstyle represents a corrected and improved version of the Caslon face, as envisioned by the type founders of the 1800s. However, some American founders are making significant strides in capturing the essence of old typefaces, and it’s possible that we may eventually see a successful reproduction of the renowned "silver" types from the Elzevirs.

Bodoni types are shown in use on page 26, and in Examples 26, 36, 48, 175, 176, 194, 278, 310, 322, 330, 352, 355, 365, 387, 390, 412, 413, 414, 416, 428, 437 and 458.

Bodoni types can be seen in use on page 26, and in Examples 26, 36, 48, 175, 176, 194, 278, 310, 322, 330, 352, 355, 365, 387, 390, 412, 413, 414, 416, 428, 437, and 458.


Scotch Roman.—During the nineteenth century English, Scotch and American typefounders took Bodoni’s type-faces, redesigned them more along mechanical lines, filled in the corners of his straight serifs so as slightly to round them, and gave to the English-speaking world what are best known to printers as the modern Romans.

Scotch Roman.—In the nineteenth century, English, Scotch, and American typefounders took Bodoni's typefaces, redesigned them to be more mechanical, rounded off the corners of his straight serifs, and provided the English-speaking world with what printers know as modern Romans.

Looking over the specimen books of the type foundries of the last century—those of Bruce, MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, and others—one marvels at the wonderful skill in the cutting of the hairlines and the general mechanical excellence of the modern Romans.

Looking through the specimen books of the type foundries from the last century—like those of Bruce, MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan, and others—it's amazing to see the incredible skill in the fine details and the overall mechanical quality of the modern Roman typefaces.

Because of their continued use on newspapers and in books of reference, these letters are in wide use today, altho there is a movement away from them.

Because they are still used in newspapers and reference books, these letters are commonly used today, although there is a shift away from them.

The most generally used type-face on small city newspapers in America is the linotype company’s Modern Roman No. 2 (Example 489). In the hand-set days this broad, open-faced letter was so made for the reason that it would stereotype easier than would the narrower letters. It was adopted by the ready-print and plate houses, and when the newspapers installed linotypes they naturally 180selected the same face, so that the type matter thruout the publication would match. The larger city dailies give more attention to the details of the faces they use for body purposes. If No. 2 is selected, or the leaner No. 1, modifications are frequently made in some of the letters or figures. The No. 1 Modern Roman is used by the New York Times (Example 406).

The most commonly used typeface in small city newspapers across America is the linotype company’s Modern Roman No. 2 (Example 489). Back when typesetting was done by hand, this broad, open-faced letter was designed to be easier to stereotype than the narrower letters. It was adopted by ready-print and plate houses, and when newspapers switched to linotypes, they naturally chose the same typeface to ensure consistency throughout the publication. Larger city dailies pay more attention to the details of the typefaces they use for body text. Whether No. 2 is chosen or the slimmer No. 1, modifications are often made to some letters or numbers. The No. 1 Modern Roman is used by the New York Times (Example 406).

However, instead of the selection of a severe letter, such as the so-called Scotch-cut Modern Roman as a representative type-face in the group of six standard Roman letters, the more interesting Scotch Roman won the place. This type-face was first made in America by A. D. Farmer & Son, and the eight-point and ten-point sizes were used as body type by The American Printer first in April, 1902. In September of that year there appeared in that publication showings of the eight-point, ten-point, eleven-point, twelve-point and fourteen-point sizes, with the statement that other sizes were in preparation. The name, “Scotch Roman,” probably comes from the fact that Miller & Richard, the Edinburgh typefounders, made a similar letter in sizes from eight-point to twelve-point. However, they call it “Old Roman.”

However, instead of choosing a strict typeface like the so-called Scotch-cut Modern Roman to represent the group of six standard Roman letters, the more interesting Scotch Roman took the spot. This typeface was first created in America by A. D. Farmer & Son, and the eight-point and ten-point sizes were used as body type by The American Printer starting in April 1902. In September of that year, that publication showcased the eight-point, ten-point, eleven-point, twelve-point, and fourteen-point sizes, mentioning that other sizes were in the works. The name “Scotch Roman” likely comes from the fact that Miller & Richard, the Edinburgh typefounders, produced a similar letter in sizes ranging from eight-point to twelve-point. However, they refer to it as “Old Roman.”

Scotch Roman is the link that connects the graceful old-style and the severe modern Roman. Compare it with the letter (Example 484-B) made at the foundry owned by Mrs. Henry Caslon in 1796, and notice the resemblance. (As a further study, there is added an alphabet of Baskerville Roman, recently introduced to America.) Scotch Roman is also procurable under the names of Wayside Roman and National Roman.

Scotch Roman is the bridge between the elegant old-style and the stark modern Roman. Look at the letter (Example 484-B) produced at the foundry run by Mrs. Henry Caslon in 1796, and notice the similarities. (For further study, there’s also an alphabet of Baskerville Roman, which was recently introduced in America.) Scotch Roman is also available under the names Wayside Roman and National Roman.

Scotch Roman has been used in Examples 38, 39, 77, 78, 85, 143, 152, 153, 154, 185, 186, 238, 271, 317, 400, 420, 423, 427, 428 and 444.

Scotch Roman has been used in Examples 38, 39, 77, 78, 85, 143, 152, 153, 154, 185, 186, 238, 271, 317, 400, 420, 423, 427, 428 and 444.


French Oldstyle.—This is the title by which is known among printers a style of type-face made, under the name of “Elzevier,” by the Gustave Mayeur foundry of Paris in 1878. Its design, M. Mayeur tells us, was suggested by types used in a book printed in Leyden by the Elzevirs in 1634.

French Oldstyle.—This is the name that printers use for a typeface created, under the name “Elzevier,” by the Gustave Mayeur foundry in Paris in 1878. Its design, M. Mayeur tells us, was inspired by types used in a book printed in Leyden by the Elzevirs in 1634.

In 1889, Farmer, Little & Co. of New York procured drives of five sizes from France and began making the letter in America, naming it “Cadmus.” The type foundry of Phelps, Dalton & Co. of Boston had as early as 1884 made a similar and rather pleasing letter in capitals only, which it called French Oldstyle.

In 1889, Farmer, Little & Co. of New York imported drives of five sizes from France and started producing the letter in America, naming it “Cadmus.” The type foundry Phelps, Dalton & Co. of Boston had already created a similar and quite appealing letter in all capitals back in 1884, which it named French Oldstyle.

Theodore L. De Vinne was the first to use the Mayeur French Oldstyle in America. It was a favorite with Walter Gilliss, who adopted it in remodeling the catalogs and other printed matter used by the Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York.

Theodore L. De Vinne was the first to use the Mayeur French Oldstyle in America. It was a favorite of Walter Gilliss, who used it when redesigning the catalogs and other printed materials for the Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York.

EXAMPLE 485

A study of the French Oldstyle design of Roman capitals

EXAMPLE 485

An analysis of the French Oldstyle design of Roman capitals

The capitals of French Oldstyle are especially pleasing, and when this letter is employed they should be used in display with frequency. The Mayeur letter would be even more attractive if the proportions of its capitals were nearer those of early Roman lettering (Example 464-B), as are some other French Oldstyles.

The capitals of French Oldstyle are particularly beautiful, and when this letter is used, they should be displayed often. The Mayeur letter would be even more appealing if the proportions of its capitals were closer to those of early Roman lettering (Example 464-B), like some other French Oldstyles.

French Oldstyle is tall and formed with liberal space between the strokes of the lower-case letters. It should always be leaded, as its open character and large lower-case demand that it shall not be crowded. Like Cheltenham, it is best suited for pages that are narrow and long, such as the 12mos issued in the seventeenth century by the Elzevirs.

French Oldstyle is tall and has plenty of space between the strokes of the lowercase letters. It should always have leading because its open design and large lowercase letters require it to not be cramped. Like Cheltenham, it works best on pages that are narrow and long, such as the 12mos published in the seventeenth century by the Elzevirs.

The Mayeur French Oldstyle has a slight resemblance to the type-faces found in the Elzevir seventeenth-century books (Example 475), but is a rather free rendering of those types. The capitals of the Elzevirs are more in the proportions of Jenson’s (see Cloister Oldstyle, Example 467-A), and the small letters (o) of the lower-case are not so large in comparison with the tall letters (l) as they are in French Oldstyle. The Mayeur letter also contains the shortened descenders and short-kerned f of the nineteenth-century typefounders. In fact, both ascending and descending strokes have been shortened.

The Mayeur French Oldstyle looks a bit like the typefaces used in Elzevir books from the seventeenth century (Example 475), but it's a more relaxed interpretation of those styles. The capital letters in Elzevirs are more similar in proportion to Jenson’s (see Cloister Oldstyle, Example 467-A), while the small letters (o) in the lower-case aren’t as large compared to the tall letters (l) as they are in French Oldstyle. The Mayeur font also features shorter descenders and a compact f from the designs of nineteenth-century typefounders. In fact, both the ascenders and descenders have been shortened.

Examples 45, 183, 184, 217, 410, 411, and the Jacobi specimen on page 33 show French Oldstyle in use.

Examples 45, 183, 184, 217, 410, 411, and the Jacobi specimen on page 33 show French Oldstyle in action.


Cheltenham Oldstyle.—This extremely popular type-face was designed in America and here developed into the most numerous family known to typefounding—at least thirty series. A pamphlet issued in 1905 by the Mergenthaler Linotype Company tells the story of its origin. Ingalls Kimball, director of the Cheltenham Press, New York, was commissioned to suggest and supervise the making of a letter that would have both beauty and legibility. Cheltenham Oldstyle resulted, the drawings of which were made by Bertram G. Goodhue.

Cheltenham Oldstyle.—This very popular typeface was designed in the U.S. and developed into the largest family known in type foundry—at least thirty variations. A pamphlet released in 1905 by the Mergenthaler Linotype Company shares the story of its creation. Ingalls Kimball, director of the Cheltenham Press in New York, was tasked with suggesting and overseeing the creation of a font that combined beauty with readability. Cheltenham Oldstyle was the outcome, with the drawings done by Bertram G. Goodhue.

It was realized by the designers of this type-face that space between lines increases legibility, and experiments seem to show that the upper half of lower-case letters are easier to read than the lower half. For this reason the lower-case was then designed with long ascending strokes and short descending strokes. While the theory regarding the superior legibility of the upper half was announced as a new one, it had been put forth about 1882 by Dr. Émile Javal, a Parisian oculist. (See the demonstration in Example 508-G.)

The designers of this typeface recognized that spacing between lines improves readability, and studies indicate that the upper half of lowercase letters is easier to read than the lower half. Because of this, the lowercase letters were designed with long ascenders and short descenders. Although the idea about the better readability of the upper half was presented as a new concept, it was actually proposed around 1882 by Dr. Émile Javal, a Parisian eye doctor. (See the demonstration in Example 508-G.)

The first announcement by the American Type Founders Company of Cheltenham Oldstyle in The American Printer, January, 1903, showed eleven sizes—eight-point to forty-eight-point. Claim was made that it was a “compact and legible book type,” and that it would become the most popular job type.

The first announcement by the American Type Founders Company of Cheltenham Oldstyle in The American Printer, January 1903, showcased eleven sizes—ranging from eight-point to forty-eight-point. They claimed it was a “compact and legible book type,” and that it would become the most popular type for jobs.

Because of its lean formation and close set it has been frequently used for narrow booklets.

Because of its slim design and compact layout, it has often been used for narrow booklets.

A Roman type-face entirely new in design would be a freak and unreadable in the mass. As a completed design, Cheltenham Oldstyle was different from others in use in 1903, yet it is made up of features of Roman type design in vogue between the designing of Jenson’s letter and Caslon’s types. Study Examples 470, 472, 476, 477 and 478. Compare with the Portuguese capitals, especially G, P, W, in Example 485.

A Roman typeface that was completely new in design would be bizarre and hard to read in bulk. As a finished design, Cheltenham Oldstyle was different from the other typefaces available in 1903, but it incorporates features of Roman type design that were popular between the creation of Jenson’s letter and Caslon’s types. Study Examples 470, 472, 476, 477 and 478. Compare it with the Portuguese capitals, especially G, P, W, in Example 485.

Cheltenham Oldstyle has strength, readability, and a certain amount of beauty. Its capitals are awkwardly large in comparison with its lower-case. It is shown in use with smaller capitals in Example 476.

Cheltenham Oldstyle has strength, readability, and a certain beauty. Its capital letters are excessively large compared to its lowercase. It is demonstrated in use with smaller capitals in Example 476.

Because of the smallness of most of the lower-case and the close set of the letters, very little space is needed between words; yet, as used by printers generally, much of the legibility the type-face possesses is lost by wide spacing between words, especially on machines.

Because most of the lower-case letters are small and closely spaced, only a little space is needed between words; however, when used by printers in general, a lot of the legibility that the typeface has is lost due to wide spacing between words, especially on machines.

Because the eye, as a rule, gives less attention to the lower part of a line of reading matter, the descenders 181were cut off almost entirely in the designing of Cheltenham. It would be as reasonable, because the eye usually sees only the upper part of a man, to amputate his legs. This amputation of the legs of type-faces by modern founders has maimed many other letters, notably Caslon Oldstyle as we most frequently see it.

Because the eye typically pays less attention to the bottom part of a line of text, the descenders 181 were almost entirely removed in the design of Cheltenham. It would make just as much sense, since the eye usually sees only the upper part of a person, to cut off their legs. This cutting off of the legs of typefaces by modern designers has distorted many other letters, especially Caslon Oldstyle as we most commonly see it.

The serif, which is supposed to distinguish modern types from old-style, is very small in Cheltenham Oldstyle, and is more like the serif found in modern types. The general character of Cheltenham, however, is extremely old-style.

The serif, meant to differentiate modern typefaces from old-school ones, is very small in Cheltenham Oldstyle and resembles the serif seen in modern types. However, the overall character of Cheltenham is definitely very old-style.

This letter has been used in the composition of Examples 35, 40, 47, 106, 122, 125, 209, 267, 273 and 350.

This letter has been used to create Examples 35, 40, 47, 106, 122, 125, 209, 267, 273 and 350.

Evolution of the Roman Typeface

In the beginning, Roman letters were in capitals only (Example 464-A), and, carved on stone, were at their best about the beginning of the Christian era. The present so-called Roman, Italic and Text types are descended from them.

In the beginning, Roman letters were only in capitals (Example 464-A), and when carved on stone, they were at their best around the start of the Christian era. The current styles known as Roman, Italic, and Text types have evolved from them.

EXAMPLE 486

Resetting in Bodoni Book of the 1789 Bodoni specimen on page 26. Like the original, this specimen was printed and then zinc-etched

EXAMPLE 486

Resetting in Bodoni Book of the 1789 Bodoni specimen on page 26. Like the original, this specimen was printed and then zinc-etched

Use of the pen and brush in lettering and the tendency to letter rapidly finally gave us the lower-case type of today. The evolution is pictured in Example 465. “A” shows the Roman capital alphabet as made with the pen (compare with the chiseled letters of Example 464-A). In “B” we have the result (known as uncials) of hurried writing of the Roman capitals, and one can see how the lower-case letters were forming. At about this point in the development, the minuscules, or lower-case letters, took two separate growths—one in the direction of the “Black Letter” or German Text types of today, and the other toward the “White Letter” of the Caroline Minuscules, which, as Roman lower-case, are now used almost exclusively in America, England, France and other countries in North and South America and Europe, the notable exception being Germany.

The use of pen and brush in lettering, along with the tendency to write quickly, ultimately led to the creation of the lower-case type we use today. This evolution is illustrated in Example 465. “A” shows the Roman capital alphabet made with a pen (compare it with the chiseled letters in Example 464-A). In “B,” we can see the outcome (known as uncials) of hurried writing of the Roman capitals, and it’s clear how the lower-case letters began to take shape. Around this time in the development, the minuscules, or lower-case letters, branched off in two directions—one towards the “Black Letter” or German Text types we have today, and the other leaning towards the “White Letter” of the Caroline Minuscules, which, as Roman lower-case, are now almost exclusively used in America, England, France, and other countries in North and South America and Europe, with the notable exception of Germany.

EXAMPLE 487

Comparison of one of Bodoni’s alphabets with a new type-face. Both are rough, having been zinc-etched

EXAMPLE 487

Comparison of one of Bodoni’s fonts with a new typeface. Both are rough, having been zinc-etched

When Gutenberg began to print he used a black Text type designed after the bold lettering of the German manuscript books, and when Germans went to Italy to print they had difficulty in rendering into types the character of Italian lettering. Example 468 shows the efforts in this direction by Sweinheim and Pannartz in 1465, and in Example 469, types by John and Wendelin of Spires, an improvement is noticed.

When Gutenberg started printing, he used a bold black text style inspired by the strong lettering of German handwritten books. When Germans traveled to Italy to print, they struggled to replicate the style of Italian letters in their typefaces. Example 468 illustrates the attempts made by Sweinheim and Pannartz in 1465, and in Example 469, you can see improvements in the typefaces created by John and Wendelin of Spires.

It remained, however, for the Frenchman, Jenson, to design and cut a letter that is the alpha of Roman type-faces (Example 470). Jenson was fortunate in the selection of a model, and it is interesting to include in the corner for comparison a section of an Italian manuscript of the same century. Development of the Roman letter into the beautiful and legible form known as “Caroline Minuscules” was due to the encouragement of Charlemagne. Why it is called “White Letter” in contradistinction to “Black Letter” may be seen by comparing the light-gray tone of the Jenson page (Example 470) with the missal specimen opposite page 14. It may be well to explain that the seeming disfigurement of the capitals in the Jenson page is due to the custom that book decorators had of placing a stroke of vermilion over the capitals. In the reproduction these strokes came out black. Both the Spires and the Jenson specimens were reproduced from the original volumes in the Typographic Library and Museum at Jersey City.

It was left to the Frenchman, Jenson, to design and cut a letter that is the beginning of Roman typefaces (Example 470). Jenson was lucky in his choice of a model, and it's interesting to include a section of an Italian manuscript from the same century for comparison. The development of the Roman letter into the beautiful and readable form known as “Caroline Minuscules” was encouraged by Charlemagne. The term “White Letter,” in contrast to “Black Letter,” can be understood by comparing the light-gray tone of the Jenson page (Example 470) with the missal specimen on the opposite page 14. It’s worth explaining that the apparent distortion of the capitals in the Jenson page is because decorators used to place a stroke of vermilion over the capitals. In the reproduction, these strokes turned out black. Both the Spires and the Jenson specimens were reproduced from the original volumes in the Typographic Library and Museum at Jersey City.

Example 465 also shows, for comparison with the style of lettering known as the Caroline Minuscules, a type-face based on Jenson’s letter of 1470, following which are Moxon’s and Caslon’s lower-case alphabets.

Example 465 also shows, for comparison with the style of lettering known as Caroline Minuscules, a typeface based on Jenson’s letter from 1470, followed by Moxon’s and Caslon’s lowercase alphabets.

The faithfulness with which Jenson’s type-face was followed in the designing of Cloister Oldstyle may be seen by comparing the Cloister alphabet (Example 467-A) with the Jenson letters as they are found in Example 470. A very interesting comparison can also be made of Jenson’s capitals, on page 14, and Cloister Oldstyle, in Example 473. If a comparison of present-day type-faces with very old faces is to have any value, the present-day type-faces should be printed on antique-finished paper dampened if possible. And if the old face is reproduced by zinc etching from an old book the other type-face should also be zinc-etched. Printing and zinc etching were resorted to in the case of this example and in other instances in this chapter.

The accuracy with which Jenson’s typeface was recreated in Cloister Oldstyle can be seen by comparing the Cloister alphabet (Example 467-A) with the Jenson letters found in Example 470. A fascinating comparison can also be made between Jenson’s capitals on page 14 and Cloister Oldstyle in Example 473. If we want comparisons of modern typefaces with very old ones to be meaningful, the modern typefaces should be printed on antique-finished paper and, if possible, dampened. Also, if the old face is reproduced using zinc etching from an old book, the other typeface should also be zinc-etched. Printing and zinc etching were used in this example and in other cases in this chapter.

In some works reproductions of type-faces are valueless and misleading, for the reason that they have been retouched by an artist, redrawn, or cut in wood.

In some works, reproductions of typefaces are worthless and misleading because they have been touched up by an artist, redrawn, or engraved in wood.

182

EXAMPLE 488

Modern Romans of the nineteenth century in three tones

EXAMPLE 488

Modern Romans of the 19th century in three styles

The influence of the Jenson style of Roman was seen for some years, but in 1566 (Example 472) we find a change of form. The type is more condensed, and instead of a diagonal stroke on the lower-case e there is a horizontal stroke close to the top of the letter. This style, as used by Paul Manutius in 1566, seems to have been maintained with little alteration in the work of Daniel Elzevir a hundred years later (Example 477) and two hundred years later in the types of Fournier, the French founder (Example 478). This style of letter was also used by Plantin, the Antwerp printer, in 1569, and for the interest there may be in it the reproduction of a bit of his work (see page 16) should be compared with Example 476. This last-mentioned example has been set in Cheltenham Oldstyle. However, ten-point capitals have been used with twelve-point lower-case. It may be that the appearance of most reading matter would be improved if the capitals were a trifle lower in hight than the ascending strokes of the lower-case letters b, d, f, h, k, l.

The influence of the Jenson style of Roman lasted for several years, but in 1566 (Example 472) we see a shift in form. The type is more compact, and instead of a diagonal stroke on the lower-case e, there is a horizontal stroke near the top of the letter. This style, as used by Paul Manutius in 1566, appears to have been retained with minimal changes in the work of Daniel Elzevir a hundred years later (Example 477) and two hundred years later in the types of Fournier, the French founder (Example 478). Plantin, the Antwerp printer, also utilized this letter style in 1569, and for added interest, a reproduction of some of his work (see page 16) should be compared with Example 476. The latter example has been set in Cheltenham Oldstyle. However, ten-point capitals were used along with twelve-point lower-case. It might be that the overall look of most reading material would be enhanced if the capitals were slightly shorter than the ascending strokes of the lower-case letters b, d, f, h, k, l.

EXAMPLE 489

Modern Roman as it is used on many American newspapers. Six-point, seven-point and eight-point Linotype Roman No. 2. A readable but not a handsome type-face

EXAMPLE 489

Modern Roman as used in many American newspapers. Six-point, seven-point, and eight-point Linotype Roman No. 2. It's a readable typeface but not particularly attractive.

The National Printing Office at Paris is using on some of its productions a type-face designed in 1693 by Grandjean. While it is greatly like other letters of that period, it has peculiarities, one of which is a slight dot on the left center of the lower-case l, a feature also present in the Black Letter of Gutenberg, and in the types of Fust and Schœffer (see inserts opposite pages 7 and 12).

The National Printing Office in Paris is using a typeface designed in 1693 by Grandjean for some of its productions. While it closely resembles other letters from that time, it has unique features, one of which is a small dot on the left center of the lowercase l, a characteristic also found in Gutenberg's Black Letter and in the types of Fust and Schœffer (see inserts opposite pages 7 and 12).

We have a key to the formation of the Roman types of the seventeenth century in the alphabets drawn by Joseph Moxon, an English typefounder, and published in 1676 (Examples 479 and 480). These are here reproduced from Moxon’s “Mechanick Exercises,” as reprinted, under the supervision of Theodore Low De Vinne, by the New York Typothetæ in 1896. Moxon says these letters are copied from the letters of Christopher van Dijk, a punch cutter of Holland. As will be seen by the scale in the upper left corner of Example 479, he attempted to show how the shapes of letters were “compounded of geometric figures, and mostly made by rule and compass.” Each letter was to be plotted on a framework of small squares, forty-two squares in hight and of a proportionate width. Passing up this idea as impractical, De Vinne said:

We have a key to understanding the Roman types of the seventeenth century in the alphabets created by Joseph Moxon, an English type founder, and published in 1676 (Examples 479 and 480). These are reproduced here from Moxon’s “Mechanick Exercises,” as reprinted under the supervision of Theodore Low De Vinne by the New York Typothetæ in 1896. Moxon states that these letters are based on the letters designed by Christopher van Dijk, a punch cutter from Holland. As shown by the scale in the upper left corner of Example 479, he tried to illustrate how the shapes of the letters were “composed of geometric figures, and mostly made by rule and compass.” Each letter was supposed to be plotted on a grid of small squares, forty-two squares high and with a proportionate width. Dismissing this idea as impractical, De Vinne said:

It is admitted that the characters are rudely drawn, and many have faults of disproportion; but it must not be forgotten that they were designed to meet the most important requirement of a reader—to be read, and read easily. Here are the broad hair line, the stubby serif on the lower-case and the bracketed serif on the capitals, the thick stem, the strong and low crown on letters like m and n, with other peculiarities now commended in old-style faces and often erroneously regarded as the original devices of the first Caslon.

It’s acknowledged that the characters are roughly designed and many have issues with proportion; however, it’s important to remember that they were created to fulfill the most essential need of a reader—to be read, and to be read easily. Here are the broad hairline, the blunt serif on the lowercase letters, and the bracketed serif on the uppercase letters, the thick stem, the strong and low crown on letters like m and n, along with other traits that are now praised in old-style typefaces and often mistakenly thought to be the original features of the first Caslon.

The writer was curious to see how these letters of Moxon’s made up into type, and for this purpose had the outlined alphabets inked in and reproduced in smaller size (Examples 479-A and 480-A).

The writer was eager to see how Moxon's letters looked in print, so they had the outlined alphabets filled in with ink and reproduced in a smaller size (Examples 479-A and 480-A).

When William Caslon, in 1720, cut his first Roman letter he may have had Moxon’s Roman alphabet before him. There are some resemblances, but that he did not slavishly follow the Moxon letters may be seen by comparing both type-faces (Examples 465-F and 465-G).

When William Caslon cut his first Roman letter in 1720, he might have had Moxon’s Roman alphabet in front of him. There are some similarities, but he clearly didn’t just mimic the Moxon letters, as you can see by comparing both typefaces (Examples 465-F and 465-G).

We could be more familiar with the types of Baskerville than we are, but now that the typefounders are reproducing them (Example 483) we shall come to a realization that they rival the letters of Caslon in beauty and readability. John Baskerville, the English typefounder and printer, spent six years and thirty thousand dollars in designing and cutting his first font of type. In 1758 he had cut eight fonts of Roman, but other printers would not buy his types, preferring those of Caslon. Two years later he attempted to sell his types and retire from the printing business. After his death, in 1775, his widow sold all his type and type-making material and they were removed to Kehl, near Strassburg. There is a legend that the types finally reached France and were melted into bullets for the French Revolution. It is a pity that Baskerville’s original punches are not available, like those of Caslon, so that printers of today could make use of the splendid type-faces that were unappreciated in his lifetime. However, Baskerville Roman is a satisfactory reproduction of the types of John Baskerville.

We could be more familiar with Baskerville typefaces than we are, but now that typefounders are reproducing them (Example 483) we’ll realize they rival Caslon letters in beauty and readability. John Baskerville, the English typefounder and printer, spent six years and thirty thousand dollars designing and cutting his first font. By 1758, he had created eight Roman fonts, but other printers wouldn’t buy his types, choosing Caslon instead. Two years later, he tried to sell his types and retire from printing. After his death in 1775, his widow sold all his type and type-making materials, which were moved to Kehl, near Strassburg. There’s a legend that the types eventually made it to France and were melted down for bullets during the French Revolution. It’s unfortunate that Baskerville’s original punches aren’t available like Caslon's, so today's printers can't use the amazing typefaces that went unappreciated in his lifetime. However, Baskerville Roman is a good reproduction of John Baskerville's types.

Like Caslon Oldstyle, however, it should be printed on other than gloss-surfaced paper (Example 463), as then, especially in the smaller sizes, the good qualities of the letter are brought out and it is made more legible.

Like Caslon Oldstyle, it should be printed on paper that isn’t gloss-surfaced (Example 463), as this enhances the good qualities of the letter, especially in the smaller sizes, making it more readable.

When Mrs. Henry Caslon, in 1796, “Bodoni-ized” the types of William Caslon the first, she was probably influenced as much by the types of Baskerville as by those of Bodoni. This is borne out by the comparisons in Example 484. In “A” is shown an alphabet of Baskerville Roman as now made in America, and in “B” Mrs. Caslon’s Modern Roman. The third type-face (C) is Scotch Roman, one of the six selected representative type-faces (Example 467-D).

When Mrs. Henry Caslon, in 1796, modernized the fonts of William Caslon the First, she was likely influenced as much by the fonts of Baskerville as by those of Bodoni. This is supported by the comparisons in Example 484. In “A,” you can see an alphabet of Baskerville Roman as it’s currently made in America, and in “B,” Mrs. Caslon’s Modern Roman. The third typeface (C) is Scotch Roman, one of the six selected representative typefaces (Example 467-D).

John Baptist Bodoni made some very good type-faces, but it is not difficult to lay at his door the responsibility for throwing typography out of gear for almost a century. Thru his influence and the desire of Scotch typefounders to improve on his work, the nineteenth century was inflicted with those stiff “Modern Romans” (Example 488) that in all their inhuman “perfection” yet abide with us and are still liked by Victorian persons of staid tastes. Many of our school children are being brought up on them, and in lighter form (Example 489) they are being fed to millions of Americans thru the homely typography of most newspapers. This double influence works for a lowering of typographic taste among printers and buyers of printing that for many years will keep the general standard of printing below what it should be.

John Baptist Bodoni created some really great typefaces, but it's not hard to see that he's mainly responsible for throwing typography off track for nearly a century. Through his influence and the ambition of Scottish typefounders to improve on his designs, the nineteenth century was marked by those rigid "Modern Romans" (Example 488) that, despite their cold "perfection," remain with us and are still favored by Victorian people with conservative tastes. Many of our school kids are growing up with them, and in a simpler form (Example 489), they are being introduced to millions of Americans through the everyday typography of most newspapers. This combined influence leads to a decline in typographic taste among printers and buyers of printing that will keep the overall standard of printing below where it should be for many years.

To return to Bodoni. This Italian typefounder’s types, as a rule, were not so faultlessly finished as are the 183recent types that bear the name. There may be seen in Example 487 the alphabet of a type-face cut by Bodoni in 1790, together with an alphabet recently cut in America. The Bodoni type of the American foundry is a clever copy of the original, yet there is in the copy much of the modernization of the Scotch founders of the nineteenth century. Bodoni Book is a better-looking and more readable type-face.

To go back to Bodoni. This Italian type founder’s fonts were generally not as perfectly finished as the recent ones that carry his name. You can look at Example 487 to see the alphabet of a typeface created by Bodoni in 1790, alongside an alphabet recently made in America. The Bodoni type from the American foundry is a smart imitation of the original, but it has a lot of the modern touches from the Scottish founders of the nineteenth century. Bodoni Book is a more attractive and easier-to-read typeface.

EXAMPLE 491

(A) Optical changes caused by adding Vs at end of strokes. (B) Appearance of vertical stroke altered by adding small horizontal strokes, or serifs, and by joining both with curved line. (C) Cross strokes or serifs added to E

EXAMPLE 491

(A) Optical changes caused by adding Vs at the ends of strokes. (B) The look of the vertical stroke is changed by adding small horizontal strokes, or serifs, and by connecting both with a curved line. (C) Cross strokes or serifs added to E

EXAMPLE 495

(A) The diagonal stroke of the first Roman type-faces. (B) The lower cross stroke or serif extended to right on the Roman type-face of Jenson

EXAMPLE 495

(A) The diagonal line of the first Roman typefaces. (B) The lower cross line or serif extended to the right on Jenson's Roman typeface.

The Scotch typefounders also attempted to improve the types of William Caslon, and the result of their labors is known as Modernized Oldstyle (Example 466-A). This kind of type was first made about 1852 for Miller & Richard of Edinburgh, Scotland. With Caslon Oldstyle unknown, Modernized Oldstyle would be a rather satisfactory letter, but with Caslon Oldstyle procurable there seems to be no need of the Scotch letter. There was brought out in 1884 by the MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan Company a decorative Modernized Oldstyle under the name of Ronaldson Oldstyle.

The Scottish typefounders also tried to enhance the types of William Caslon, and their work is known as Modernized Oldstyle (Example 466-A). This type was first created around 1852 for Miller & Richard of Edinburgh, Scotland. While Modernized Oldstyle would be a quite satisfactory typeface if Caslon Oldstyle didn't exist, since Caslon Oldstyle is available, the Scottish version seems unnecessary. In 1884, the MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan Company introduced a decorative version of Modernized Oldstyle called Ronaldson Oldstyle.

Features of Roman Typefaces

The Serif.—The serif is that portion of a type-face indicated by the small black sections in Example 492. It has a powerful influence in determining the character and style of a face of type.

The Serif.—The serif is the part of a typeface represented by the small black sections in Example 492. It significantly impacts the character and style of the typeface.

As an experiment, we will make three vertical lines exactly the same length (Example 491-A), leaving one as it was first drawn, but on the other two adding V-shaped marks, because of which the character of the line is changed and the length seemingly affected.

As an experiment, we will create three vertical lines that are all the same length (Example 491-A). One will remain as it was initially drawn, while the other two will have V-shaped marks added, which will change the appearance of the line and seemingly affect its length.

However, the serif, when properly used, has a decorative quality and is to type what the capital is to the column and the cornice to the building in architecture.

However, when used correctly, the serif has a decorative quality and is to type what the capital is to the column and the cornice is to the building in architecture.

EXAMPLE 493

By altering the serifs, “old-style” type is changed into “modern.” From Bullen

EXAMPLE 493

By changing the serifs, "old-style" type is transformed into "modern." From Bullen

After further experimenting with three vertical lines that we will now identify as capital Is (Example 491-b), there can be no doubt that the serif is necessary as a finishing stroke. The serifless I suggests a man in the public streets without hat or shoes. The crudest manner of adding a serif is to place a small horizontal stroke at the head and foot of the long vertical line, but the sharp angles thus formed can be softened and one stroke joined to another by a curve, with the corner filled in, as is shown. These two illustrations of the serif are merely for the purpose of introducing the novice to the subject. The fact that there are so many different faces of type is due somewhat to the manipulation of the serif—changes of length, thickness, direction and curve.

After trying out three vertical lines that we’re now going to call capital Is (Example 491-b), it’s clear that the serif is essential as a finishing touch. The serif-less I looks like a person on the street without a hat or shoes. The simplest way to add a serif is by placing a small horizontal stroke at the top and bottom of the long vertical line, but the sharp angles created can be smoothed out, and one stroke can flow into another using a curve, with the corner filled in, as demonstrated. These two examples of the serif are just to introduce beginners to the topic. The reason there are so many different typefaces is partly because of the way the serif is adjusted—varying in length, thickness, direction, and curve.

EXAMPLE 492

The black sections indicate the serifs, and show the differences in serif construction on several well-known type-faces. From Bullen

EXAMPLE 492

The black parts represent the serifs and highlight the differences in how serifs are constructed in various popular typefaces. From Bullen

It is by the serif that in most cases old-style types are distinguished from the so-called modern Romans. An interesting demonstration of this was made by Henry L. Bullen with Century Expanded, a modern Roman (Example 494). The first line shows the letter unchanged. As the serifs in most old-style faces project diagonally, he, in the second line, altered the modern serifs to conform to this idea. The third line shows Century Oldstyle as it actually appears in type.

It’s the serifs that usually set old-style typefaces apart from modern Romans. Henry L. Bullen demonstrated this well using Century Expanded, a modern Roman (Example 494). The first line displays the letter as it is. Since the serifs in most old-style fonts extend diagonally, he adjusted the modern serifs in the second line to match this style. The third line shows Century Oldstyle as it really looks in print.

There is, of course, more to a true old-style face than mere change of serifs, and in the actual cutting of the types other minor alterations were made, as will be seen by study of the third line.

There’s definitely more to a classic old-style typeface than just changing the serifs, and when it comes to cutting the type, other minor adjustments were made, as you can see by examining the third line.

EXAMPLE 494

By altering the serifs “modern” type is changed into “old-style.” From Bullen

EXAMPLE 494

By changing the serifs, “modern” type becomes “old-style.” From Bullen

184

EXAMPLE 496

In most Roman alphabets all vertical strokes are thick, excepting in M, N, U. Horizontal strokes are thin. Diagonal strokes running down from left to right are thick and from right to left are thin, excepting Z, z.

EXAMPLE 496

In most Roman alphabets, all vertical strokes are thick, except for M, N, and U. Horizontal strokes are thin. Diagonal strokes that go down from left to right are thick, while those going down from right to left are thin, except for Z and z.

This process was reversed by Mr. Bullen, and in Example 493 certain serifs of Caslon Oldstyle are in the letters i, n, k, p, h made horizontal, and in the letters E, L, s made vertical. Modernized in this manner, Caslon Oldstyle resembles Scotch Roman (Example 484-C).

This process was reversed by Mr. Bullen, and in Example 493 certain serifs of Caslon Oldstyle are horizontal in the letters i, n, k, p, h and vertical in the letters E, L, s. When modernized this way, Caslon Oldstyle looks similar to Scotch Roman (Example 484-C).


Thick and Thin Strokes.—The inbred good taste and instinct for beauty possessed by the Roman calligrapher which directed him to add the serif to his lettering also impelled him to vary the width of the strokes (Example 464-A).

Thick and Thin Strokes.—The inherent good taste and sense of beauty that the Roman calligrapher had led him to add serifs to his lettering and also motivated him to change the width of the strokes (Example 464-A).

EXAMPLE 497

(A) No serifs or stroke contrast. (B) Serifs added. (C) With serifs and thick and thin strokes

EXAMPLE 497

(A) No serifs or contrast in stroke thickness. (B) Serifs added. (C) With serifs and varying stroke thickness.

EXAMPLE 498

Vertical thick strokes were made with pen held straight

EXAMPLE 498

Thick vertical lines were drawn with the pen held upright.

EXAMPLE 499

Diagonal thick strokes were made with pen held at a slant

EXAMPLE 499

Thick diagonal lines were drawn with the pen held at an angle.

The most uninteresting kind of lettering is that which is not only serifless but without contrast in the width of its strokes—lettering that is known to the printer as Block, or Gothic (Example 497-A). Dignity and something of good looks are given to it by adding serifs (Example 497-b), yet it is not eligible for admission to the select society of pure Roman type-faces until the various strokes show, properly proportioned, a difference in thickness (Example 497-C). The difference should be at least as two to one. It is about that in Cloister Oldstyle, but in Baskerville Roman (Example 496) it is as six to one. When the difference in thick and thin lines is exaggerated, as was done in the nineteenth century, the result is a caricature and type that is almost impossible to read, even in large sizes.

The most boring type of lettering is the kind that’s not only sans serif but also lacks contrast in stroke width—this type is referred to by printers as Block or Gothic (Example 497-A). Adding serifs gives it some dignity and a bit of style (Example 497-b), but it can’t be considered part of the exclusive group of true Roman typefaces until its strokes exhibit a proper proportion of thickness difference (Example 497-C). This difference should be at least two to one. Cloister Oldstyle achieves that ratio, while Baskerville Roman (Example 496) is more like six to one. When the contrast between thick and thin lines is taken to extremes, as it was in the nineteenth century, the result is a caricature that’s almost impossible to read, even at large sizes.

EXAMPLE 500

Heavy strokes in the lower left and upper right part of curves

EXAMPLE 500

Bold lines in the lower left and upper right sections of curves

EXAMPLE 501

Heavy strokes in vertical positions

EXAMPLE 501

Bold strokes in vertical positions

Generally the distribution of thick and thin lines in Roman letters, as shown in Example 496, is as follows: All vertical strokes are thick (excepting in M, N, U). Horizontal strokes are thin. Diagonal strokes running down from left to right are thick, and from right to left are thin (excepting Z, z).

Generally, the distribution of thick and thin lines in Roman letters, as shown in Example 496, is as follows: All vertical strokes are thick (except in M, N, U). Horizontal strokes are thin. Diagonal strokes that go down from left to right are thick, and those from right to left are thin (except in Z, z).

When this rule is reversed, as was actually done by a nineteenth-century typefounder in a weird attempt at novelty, there is begotten a monstrosity. Good typography requires that basic principles be adhered to.

When this rule is reversed, as was actually done by a nineteenth-century typefounder in a strange attempt at novelty, it creates a monstrosity. Good typography demands adherence to basic principles.

In the recent recutting of the Roman type-face of Nicholas Jenson, the founders went all the way back to his type for their models, and did not content themselves, as they did near the end of the last century, with copying Morris’s type or the faces of other foundries. As Jenson based the design of his types closely on Italian manuscripts, we have in such a face as Cloister Oldstyle many of the characteristics of the pen-made letters, one of which is the position of the thick strokes on round letters. The thick strokes on the O, as an instance, instead of being vertical, are diagonal. This is due to the manner of holding the pen when lettering. When held to write vertically and horizontally, the pen makes lines as in Example 498; when held at a slant, the pen makes thick lines diagonally as in Example 499. The Caroline Minuscules, upon which the lower-case types of Jenson were based, were written with a slanted pen.

In the recent redesign of the Roman typeface by Nicholas Jenson, the founders went back to his original type for their models, rather than just replicating Morris’s type or that of other foundries like they did towards the end of the last century. Since Jenson's type design was closely inspired by Italian manuscripts, we can see many features of pen-made letters in a typeface like Cloister Oldstyle, one example being the angle of the thick strokes on rounded letters. For instance, the thick strokes on the O are diagonal instead of vertical. This results from the way the pen is held when writing. When the pen is held upright or straight, it produces lines like in Example 498; when held at an angle, the pen creates thick diagonal lines as shown in Example 499. The Caroline Minuscules, which served as the foundation for Jenson's lowercase types, were written with a slanted pen.

In Example 500 are to be seen two well-known type-faces on which the slanted-pen thick strokes are used. In Example 501 are two faces that could be made by writing vertically. It was Mr. Goudy who reintroduced into type forms a characteristic of Jenson’s Roman—that of having the lower serifs extend more to the right than to the left, as shown by Example 495-B.

In Example 500, you can see two well-known typefaces that use thick strokes made with a slanted pen. In Example 501, there are two typefaces that could be created by writing vertically. Mr. Goudy was the one who brought back a feature of Jenson’s Roman into type designs—specifically, having the lower serifs extend more to the right than to the left, as shown in Example 495-B.


Ascenders and Descenders.—Not a little of the beauty of Roman type-faces lies in the ascending and descending strokes, and one reason why our types are becoming more beautiful is that we are going thru a period of restoration—the long-missing ascenders and descenders are being given back to us, after an absence of many years.

Ascenders and Descenders.—A significant part of the beauty of Roman typefaces comes from the ascending and descending strokes. One reason our type is becoming more attractive is that we're experiencing a period of restoration—the long-missing ascenders and descenders are being restored to us after many years of absence.

What should be the length of these strokes? Edward Johnston, in “Writing and Illuminating and Lettering,” illustrates this point (Example 503), and says: “The lines in massed writing are kept as close together as is compatible with legibility. The usual distance apart of the writing lines is about three times the hight of the letter o. The descending strokes of the upper line must clear the ascending strokes of the lower line.”

What should be the length of these strokes? Edward Johnston, in “Writing and Illuminating and Lettering,” illustrates this point (Example 503), and says: “The lines in dense writing are kept as close together as possible while still being readable. The typical distance between writing lines is about three times the height of the letter o. The downward strokes of the upper line must clear the upward strokes of the lower line.”

Bodoni, the Italian typefounder, had a system of measurement for the proportions of his lower-case letters: “Divide the body of the type into seven parts and let two at the top and two at the bottom be for the ascenders and descenders and the three in the middle for the other letters.”

Bodoni, the Italian type designer, had a way to measure the proportions of his lowercase letters: “Divide the body of the type into seven parts and use two at the top and two at the bottom for the ascenders and descenders, leaving the three in the middle for the other letters.”

The ascenders and descenders, as found in Cloister Oldstyle and in the original Caslon Oldstyle, approximate the proportions given by Bodoni.

The ascenders and descenders, as seen in Cloister Oldstyle and in the original Caslon Oldstyle, are similar to the proportions provided by Bodoni.

Half the letters of the lower-case alphabet—thirteen—are 185of the hight of the o, and we will call them the small letters. The letters with ascending strokes number eight, with descending strokes five (Example 502). Because the descending letters are only five in number, they are most frequently picked out for mutilation. This sawing off of a portion of the descending strokes cripples the letters just as the sawing off of a portion of a man’s legs cripples his body. Not only is typography made imperfect by missing descenders, but, generally, the practice has worked toward the degeneration of type print, making it less easy to read, as the lines set too close together. When the descenders are of proper length they maintain a strip of blank space between lines, but when they are cut off the printer must add leads to recover the space—which he seldom does.

Half of the lowercase letters of the alphabet—thirteen—are 185the height of the o, and we'll refer to them as the small letters. The letters with ascending strokes total eight, while those with descending strokes are five (Example 502). Since there are only five descending letters, they are often the ones chosen for alteration. Trimming a part of the descending strokes damages the letters just like shortening a person’s legs affects their ability to walk. Not only does missing descenders make typography look incomplete, but overall, this practice has contributed to the decline of typeface quality, making it harder to read because the lines are set too close together. When the descenders are the right length, they create a gap between lines, but when they get shortened, the printer usually has to add extra spacing, which rarely happens.

The printer and user of typography have been using false logic in favoring type-faces that have descenders cut off. They think they are getting more for their money when they obtain a normal twelve-point type-face on an eleven-point body, but as the one-point linear space must be restored by leading, there is nothing gained. Scientists, in the study of eye hygiene, have ascertained that a certain amount of space between lines is necessary to save eyestrain, and the descenders are essential in furnishing some of this needed space.

The printer and typography user have been using faulty reasoning by favoring typefaces with cut-off descenders. They believe they’re getting more value when they choose a standard twelve-point typeface on an eleven-point body, but since the one-point linear space needs to be compensated for with leading, there’s no actual benefit. Researchers studying eye health have determined that a certain amount of space between lines is necessary to prevent eyestrain, and the descenders play a crucial role in providing some of this essential space.

EXAMPLE 502

Of the twenty-six letters of the alphabet, eight have ascending strokes, five have descending strokes, and thirteen have neither

EXAMPLE 502

Out of the twenty-six letters in the alphabet, eight have upward strokes, five have downward strokes, and thirteen have neither.

The descending curves of the lower-case g are a thing of beauty when allowed freedom (Example 504-A), but on the shortened plan they resemble a man cramped with rheumatism, in need of crutches.

The curved descents of the lowercase g are beautiful when given the freedom to flow (Example 504-A), but on the shortened design, they look like a man struggling with arthritis who needs crutches.


Proportion of Letters.—One of the elements in the beauty of the ancient Roman stone-carved alphabet is the proportion of its letters. Goudy, drawing lettering and designing type-faces modeled after the inscription capitals of the Romans, has had a large influence in reviving good proportion in type. Cloister Oldstyle (Example 467-A), designed by L. M. Benton after Jenson’s letter, is an excellent study of the old proportions introduced in present-day type-faces. However, there is no type that has the beauty of proportion to be found in the Roman capitals (Example 464-A) reproduced from an inscription on the Trajan column at Rome. The author has endeavored, in plain lines, to trace these capitals and show their proportions on a background of squares. It will be seen that the width of the letters B, E, F, L, P, S is less than half their hight, and about half the width of O, M, Q, C, G and D. It is this contrast in width as well as in shape that makes the alphabet as a whole so pleasing.

Proportion of Letters.—One of the key aspects of the beauty of the ancient Roman stone-carved alphabet is the proportion of its letters. Goudy, who creates lettering and designs typefaces inspired by the Roman inscription capitals, has significantly influenced the revival of good proportion in typography. Cloister Oldstyle (Example 467-A), designed by L. M. Benton after Jenson’s letter, is a great example of the old proportions used in modern typefaces. However, there is no type that matches the beautiful proportions found in the Roman capitals (Example 464-A) taken from an inscription on the Trajan column in Rome. The author has attempted, in simple lines, to outline these capitals and demonstrate their proportions against a background of squares. It will be clear that the width of the letters B, E, F, L, P, S is less than half their height, and about half the width of O, M, Q, C, G, and D. It is this contrast in width as well as in shape that makes the entire alphabet so visually appealing.

Comparison of the capitals of the six standard faces in Example 467 will show that “old-style” faces tend toward the old Roman proportions and that “modern” types, such as Bodoni Book and Century Expanded (Example 466-B), reveal an effort to make the capitals as uniform in size as possible. Typewriter types are an example of what happens when this idea of uniformity is carried to its logical end. It is really not necessary to throw Beauty out of the back door as Utility is admitted at the front. Both can live happily under the same roof.

Comparison of the capitals of the six standard faces in Example 467 will show that "old-style" faces lean towards the classic Roman proportions, while "modern" types like Bodoni Book and Century Expanded (Example 466-B) show an attempt to make the capitals as uniform in size as possible. Typewriter fonts illustrate what happens when this idea of uniformity is taken to its extreme. It’s not necessary to dismiss Beauty when welcoming Utility; both can coexist harmoniously.

As will be seen by Example 507, the lower-case letters are made up of a variety of curved lines, and vertical, horizontal and diagonal strokes, the purpose being the same as that of having capitals of different widths, to make them when joined together in words readable and pleasant to look at. The word “minimum” is an example of unpleasant monotony in the repetition of similar forms.

As shown in Example 507, the lowercase letters consist of different curved lines, as well as vertical, horizontal, and diagonal strokes. The goal is the same as having capital letters of various widths: to make words formed by joining them readable and visually appealing. The word “minimum” illustrates an unappealing monotony due to the repetition of similar shapes.

EXAMPLE 503

In good lettering, the descending strokes are as long as the ascending strokes. From Johnston

EXAMPLE 503

In good lettering, the downward strokes are as long as the upward strokes. From Johnston

EXAMPLE 504

(A) How descenders are frequently cramped. (B) Compression of upper or lower ends of letters as found in “improved” Caslon Oldstyle

EXAMPLE 504

(A) How descenders are often squished. (B) Narrowing of the top or bottom ends of letters as seen in “enhanced” Caslon Oldstyle

Font Legibility

Type matter should be easy to read, and this end is attained not only in the designing of type-faces but in the manner of their use.

Type should be easy to read, and this goal is achieved not only through the design of typefaces but also in how they are used.

Many tests for legibility have been made in this country and in Europe, but none of them, so far as the writer knows, has considered the manner of printing the types and the character of the paper surface as factors in legibility, altho glossy paper has been condemned because of its reflection of light, and cream-white paper preferred to blue-white. There is shown as Example 463 a test made in the printing of the same type-faces on a hard-finished paper and on a soft-finished paper. The Caslon and Bodoni types are not only more legible on the soft-finished stock, but the character of the designs is brought out. The results of this demonstration should not be wondered at, as the original Caslon and Bodoni types were intended to be printed on soft-finished stock, and not on highly calendered coated paper.

Many tests for legibility have been conducted in this country and in Europe, but none, as far as the author knows, have looked at how the printing process and the type of paper surface affect legibility. However, glossy paper has been criticized for its light reflection, while cream-white paper is preferred over blue-white. Example 463 shows a test using the same typefaces printed on hard-finished paper and soft-finished paper. The Caslon and Bodoni typefaces are not only easier to read on the soft-finished paper, but the design features are also better highlighted. This outcome is not surprising since the original Caslon and Bodoni types were designed for soft-finished paper, not for highly calendered coated paper.

Studies in legibility are presented in Example 508. As there are many details that count in the production of good-looking typography, so there are seeming trifles which go to make typography easily read. In “A” there are groups set in Cheltenham Oldstyle and Cloister Oldstyle. As Cheltenham is narrower in form and closely set, it is more suitable for long, narrow pages or columns. Cloister, on the other hand, conforms better to wider pages and columns. In lighter types (B) Bodoni Book and Caslon Oldstyle are similarly compared. For further illustrations of this point see Examples 509 and 510.

Studies in legibility are shown in Example 508. Just as there are many factors that contribute to attractive typography, there are also small details that make typography easy to read. In “A,” there are groups set in Cheltenham Oldstyle and Cloister Oldstyle. Since Cheltenham is narrower in shape and tightly spaced, it works better for long, narrow pages or columns. Cloister, on the other hand, suits wider pages and columns better. In the lighter types (B), Bodoni Book and Caslon Oldstyle are compared in the same way. For more examples of this point, see Examples 509 and 510.

One of the tests previously referred to proved Gothic (C) the most legible type-face. This unshaded, serifless type, which has long been popular on sales bills and for advertisements in some newspapers and trade publications, is not approved by those who believe there should also be character in type-faces, as it lacks the two essentials of typographic beauty—serifs and contrasting thickness of strokes. Then, again, it is not as legible in the mass as in single lines.

One of the tests mentioned earlier showed that Gothic (C) is the easiest typeface to read. This unshaded, sans-serif type has been popular for sales posters and advertisements in certain newspapers and trade magazines, but it’s not favored by those who think typefaces should also have character, as it misses two key elements of typographic beauty—serifs and varying stroke thickness. Moreover, it’s not as readable when used in large blocks of text compared to single lines.

EXAMPLE 505

In the old-style Arabic numerals, five figures descended, two ascended and three did neither. The modern style is to have them of one hight

EXAMPLE 505

In the traditional Arabic numerals, five numbers went down, two went up and three did neither. The modern approach is to have them all at the same height.

While bold-face types, especially those with decided 186contrasts in thickness of strokes, are legible when used in groups of two to a half-dozen words, they greatly tire the eye when used for entire pages of text. For this reason Bodoni Book is to be preferred over Bodoni for text purposes (D). The writer came to this conclusion when, during the reading of a book set in Bodoni, he found it necessary frequently to stop because of eye fatigue produced by the sharp contrasts and bewildering medley of light and shade.

While bold fonts, especially those with noticeable differences in stroke thickness, are easy to read when used in short phrases of two to six words, they can really strain the eyes when used for whole pages of text. For this reason, Bodoni Book is a better choice than Bodoni for body text (D). The author reached this conclusion after frequently having to take breaks while reading a book set in Bodoni, as he experienced eye fatigue from the harsh contrasts and confusing mix of light and dark.

It is generally conceded by authorities that lower-case types in the same size of letter are more legible than capitals (E) and should be used for headings and for display lines in advertising matter, where easy reading is essential.

It is generally accepted by experts that lower-case letters in the same size are easier to read than capital letters (E) and should be used for headings and display lines in advertisements, where readability is important.

Assuming that the largest possible face on the smallest possible type body results in legibility and allows more matter on a page, both users and makers of type have in many fonts caused the descending and ascending strokes to be shortened. The lower-case letters g, j, p, q and y have been the principal sufferers, as they are the only ones with descending strokes. The ascending strokes of letters b, d, f, h, k and l have been treated with more respect, and their principal ancestor, the Caroline Minuscule, would not have so much difficulty in recognizing them.

Assuming that the largest possible font used on the smallest possible type body leads to better readability and allows more content on a page, both users and creators of type have made the descending and ascending strokes shorter in many fonts. The lowercase letters g, j, p, q, and y have suffered the most since they're the only ones with descending strokes. The ascending strokes of the letters b, d, f, h, k, and l have been given more consideration, and their main ancestor, the Caroline Minuscule, would have little trouble recognizing them.

The left portion of section F of Example 508 shows what this practice has done to Caslon Oldstyle. It has also affected legibility by lessening the space between lines (see also Example 509), and reading, already difficult, is made still more so by the excess space that careless hand compositors and “speedy” machine operators place between words.

The left side of section F of Example 508 illustrates what this practice has done to Caslon Oldstyle. It has also impacted readability by reducing the space between lines (see also Example 509), and reading, which is already challenging, becomes even harder due to the extra space that careless hand typesetters and “speedy” machine operators leave between words.


EXAMPLE 506

The space between words in good lettering, according to Johnston, is less than the width of letter “o” (lower-case)

EXAMPLE 506

In good lettering, the space between words should be narrower than the width of a lower-case "o," according to Johnston.

EXAMPLE 507

The lower-case letters grouped according to formation. As generally mixed in various combinations, distinctive word groups are formed. The word “minimum” is an exception

EXAMPLE 507

The lowercase letters are grouped based on their formation. Generally mixed in different combinations, they create distinct word groups. The word “minimum” is an exception.

Space Between Words.—The eyes can, in the same space of time, read many more words if the words are narrowly spaced than if they are widely spaced. The early printers knew this and set type accordingly. When lower-case letters are widely spaced one letter must be read at a time (508-I). When words are widely spaced one word must be read at a time. A person accustomed to reading reads by thoughts—groups of words or sentences. Even in the schools they are discarding the long-used method of teaching the A-B-Cs, and instead of at first learning each letter separately, the child learns to know words by their formation and to read by word groups.

Space Between Words.—The eyes can read many more words in the same amount of time if the words are closely spaced rather than widely spaced. Early printers understood this and arranged the type accordingly. When lower-case letters are spaced out, each letter has to be read individually (508-I). When words are spaced out, each word has to be read one at a time. A person who is used to reading processes thoughts—groups of words or sentences. Even in schools, they are moving away from the traditional method of teaching the A-B-Cs, so instead of learning each letter separately, children now learn to recognize words by their structure and read by grouping words together.

The present prevalence of wide spacing in the composition of books, catalogs, pamphlets, periodicals and newspapers is a legacy from the ante-machine period.

The current trend of wide spacing in books, catalogs, pamphlets, magazines, and newspapers comes from the pre-machine era.

In hand-set days, job and book compositors, when they were called on to set so-called straight matter, were required to use great care in spacing. In the spacing out of a line the conscientious compositor would remove thick spaces and insert thin spaces rather than add much extra space between the words. The newspaper compositor, on the other hand—he usually being a piece worker—seldom thin-spaced, but liberally added space between words, especially on occasions when his “take” was to “meet” that of another compositor. When machine composition was introduced the spacing practices of the news-room hand compositor were passed along to the machine, with the result that today a page of machine matter set in the average careless way shows open spaces running irregularly down the page, resembling a trench map of a modern battlefield.

In the days of hand typesetting, job and book typesetters, when tasked with setting what was referred to as straight matter, had to be very careful with spacing. A diligent typesetter would remove thick spaces and add thin spaces instead of cramming in extra space between words. Conversely, the newspaper typesetter—who was usually paid by the piece—rarely used thin spacing but generously added space between words, especially when he had to match the work of another typesetter. When machine typesetting came into play, the spacing habits of the newspaper typesetter were carried over to the machines, resulting in pages of machine-set text that often had uneven spaces running haphazardly down the page, akin to a trench map from a modern battlefield.

Close spacing and the resultant neat and readable appearance of the page are possible in machine composition, as many users of these machines are obtaining such results; but the general standard, due not a little to the demand for rapidity and somewhat to ignorance of the fundamentals of good typography, is humiliatingly low.

Close spacing and the resulting clean and readable look of the page are achievable in machine composition, as many users of these machines are getting such results. However, the overall standard, partly due to the demand for speed and somewhat to a lack of understanding of the basics of good typography, is frustratingly low.

The design and form of the type-face, of course, determine the amount of space between words. Johnston tells letterers that “the average space between two words is less than the width of the letter o.” Example 506 is illustrative.

The design and shape of the font, of course, determine the amount of space between words. Johnston tells letterers that “the average space between two words is less than the width of the letter o.” Example 506 is illustrative.

A newspaper editor some years ago asked the hand compositors to thin-space, as there was a great deal of copy that day, whereupon the printers all laughed in ridicule of the lay notion that such a procedure would be of much use. That the request was not such an impractical one was recently borne out by an experience of a periodical publisher, who, on the machines in his own shop, produced close-spaced matter. In an emergency an outside machine-composition house was called on to set a part of the copy. When the work of making up was completed, it was found that there were several galleys of matter that could not be used, altho there was no more copy than usual. By again referring to Example 508-F it will be seen that in the left group spacing between words is lavish, while in the right group there is no waste of such spacing. Altho there is more space between the lines of the right group, it contains three more words than the left group.

A newspaper editor a few years ago asked the typesetters to use thinner spacing because there was a lot of material to print that day, which made the printers laugh at the idea that it would actually help. However, a recent experience of a magazine publisher proved that the request wasn't so impractical. He produced closely spaced text on the machines in his own shop. In an emergency, he had to call in an outside typesetting company to handle part of the text. When the typesetting was done, it turned out there were several galleys of text that couldn’t be used, even though the amount of text was the same as usual. By looking back at Example 508-F, you'll see that the spacing between words in the left group is generous, while in the right group, there’s no extra spacing. Although there’s more space between the lines in the right group, it includes three more words than the left group.

In the lower part of Example 508 is the word “Typography” set in small six-point, and near the word is the lone letter a, same size. It is difficult for a person without excellent eyesight to identify the small six-point “a,” but he can more easily and as quickly read the word made in the same size from ten letters. When the letters of the word “Typography” are widely spaced (even in larger size, as shown) they must be read one letter at a time, but when closely assembled they can be seen at a glance and read ten times as rapidly.

In the lower part of Example 508 is the word “Typography” in small six-point font, and next to it is the lone letter a, in the same size. It's hard for someone without great eyesight to spot the tiny six-point “a,” but they can read the word made up of ten letters much easier and faster. When the letters of the word “Typography” are spaced out (even in a larger size, as shown), they need to be read one letter at a time, but when they're tightly packed together, they can be taken in at a glance and read ten times quicker.

An experienced proofreader does not read a galley letter by letter, but recognizes a wrong type because the natural formation of the word has been broken.

An experienced proofreader doesn’t go through a galley letter by letter, but spots an incorrect type because the natural shape of the word has been disrupted.

Carrying the experiment further, place in “open formation” the words “Art and Practice of Typography,” and they must be read slowly one word at a time, but group the words closely, as has been done in the lower left of the same Example 508, and the entire group of words can be read practically at a glance. Just as an illiterate person laboriously reads letter by letter, a young child beginning to read will see only one word at a time. While on rudimentary primers the words should be isolated, there is no necessity for wide spacing between words in text matter intended for adults.

Carrying the experiment further, arrange the words “Art and Practice of Typography” in “open formation,” and they should be read slowly, one word at a time. However, group the words closely, as shown in the lower left of the same Example 508, and the entire group can be read almost at a glance. Just like an illiterate person struggles to read letter by letter, a young child starting to read will focus on one word at a time. While basic primers should keep the words separate, there's no need for wide spacing between words in text meant for adults.

187

EXAMPLE 508

Legibility and other qualities illustrated

EXAMPLE 508

Clarity and other features demonstrated

Length of Lines.—This leads to consideration of the effect length of lines has on reading.

Length of Lines.—This brings up the impact that line length has on reading.

The Board of Education of the city of New York disqualifies textbooks in which the length of line is more than 100 millimeters (about twenty-four picas, or four inches). The maximum length of line recommended by the British Association for the Advancement of Science in 1912 is about the same. Professor Huey, in “The Psychology and Pedagogy of Reading” (1907), says: “There is a general consensus in favor of the shorter as against the longer lines, with a tendency to favor 90 millimeters as a maximum, some placing the maximum at 100 millimeters.” Dr. Javal, the French oculist, who thirty-five years ago made tests in typography, believes the maximum should be considerably below 90 millimeters (about 21 picas).

The New York City Board of Education disqualifies textbooks with line lengths over 100 millimeters (about twenty-four picas or four inches). The maximum line length recommended by the British Association for the Advancement of Science in 1912 is roughly the same. Professor Huey, in “The Psychology and Pedagogy of Reading” (1907), states: “There is a general consensus in favor of shorter lines compared to longer ones, with a tendency to prefer 90 millimeters as the maximum, and some recommend a maximum of 100 millimeters.” Dr. Javal, the French eye specialist, who conducted typography tests thirty-five years ago, believes the maximum should be significantly below 90 millimeters (about 21 picas).

It would be well, in order to arrive somewhere in determining 188the proper length of line, to consider the size and kind of type that makes up the line.

It would be useful, to make progress in figuring out the right length of a line, to think about the size and type of font that forms the line. 188

The author asks consideration of Examples 509 and 510. The length of line is limited by authorities because the eye finds it difficult to read a long line of comparatively small type. Isn’t it true that healthy eyes can read a line of type twelve inches long set in fifty-four-point Caslon Oldstyle, say, with the same ease as a line four inches long set in eighteen-point Caslon Oldstyle?

The author requests you to consider Examples 509 and 510. The length of a line is restricted by experts because it's hard for the eye to read a long line of relatively small text. Isn’t it true that healthy eyes can read a line of text that’s twelve inches long in fifty-four-point Caslon Oldstyle just as easily as a line that’s four inches long in eighteen-point Caslon Oldstyle?

By the same reasoning, the line of twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle set three inches wide (Example 509) is as easily read, after the eyes are focused on it, as the line of eighteen-point Caslon set four inches wide.

By the same logic, a line of twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle set three inches wide (Example 509) is just as easy to read, once your eyes are focused on it, as a line of eighteen-point Caslon set four inches wide.

The author suggests, then, that the proper length of type lines be ascertained by measuring one-and-a-half alphabets of the lower-case of the desired type, as is demonstrated in Example 510.

The author suggests that the ideal length of type lines should be determined by measuring one-and-a-half alphabets of the lowercase letters in the desired type, as shown in Example 510.

Let us try out the top group—Caslon Oldstyle. (This type-face seems smaller, according to body sizes, than Scotch Roman, for the reason that its descending strokes have not been cut off, while those of the Scotch Roman group have been shortened; but of this more later.)

Let’s check out the top group—Caslon Oldstyle. (This typeface appears smaller, in terms of body sizes, than Scotch Roman, because its descending strokes haven’t been cut off, while those in the Scotch Roman group have been shortened; but more on that later.)

A lower-case alphabet-and-a-half of twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle (with long descenders) measures 17½ picas in length, as will be seen in Example 510. How it appears set in words in two lines of the same measure is to be seen in the upper part of Example 509. According to the working out of the plan, 17½ picas is the ideal length of line for books using this twelve-point type. By referring back to Example 127 in the chapter on “Books,” the theory will be found borne out in practical use on a model book page.

A lowercase alphabet-and-a-half of twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle (with long descenders) measures 17½ picas in length, as shown in Example 510. You can see how it looks set in words across two lines of the same measure in the upper part of Example 509. According to the plan, 17½ picas is the ideal line length for books using this twelve-point type. If you refer back to Example 127 in the chapter on “Books,” you’ll find the theory confirmed in practical use on a model book page.

Testing the length of lines by reading (Example 509), it will be found, if the distance between the eyes and book is lengthened as the sizes grow larger, that the line is short enough not to necessitate a hunt for the beginning of the second line after the first is read.

Testing the length of lines by reading (Example 509), you'll notice that if you increase the distance between your eyes and the book as the sizes get bigger, the line is short enough that you won't need to search for the start of the second line after reading the first.

The optical disadvantage of using in one piece of printing type-faces of any great contrast in sizes may be proved by focusing the eyes so as easily to read the eighteen-point size and then changing quickly to the eight-point size, attempting to read the latter without again focusing the eyes to fit the smaller type.

The visual challenge of using a single piece of printed text that has typefaces with significantly different sizes can be demonstrated by focusing your eyes to easily read the eighteen-point size and then quickly switching to the eight-point size, trying to read it without refocusing your eyes for the smaller type.

There is a technical as well as an optical reason for determining the length of line by measurement of the types themselves. It will be seen by Example 509 that the copy adjusts itself to the various lengths of lines, or, in the vernacular of the printer, “works out line for line.” If fourteen-point type, instead of twelve-point type, were set in lines measuring fifteen picas in length, the compositor would have more difficulty in adjusting the spaces between words, as these spacing points would number two less. This difficulty is usually solved by regrettable wide spacing between words or more regrettable spacing between letters.

There are both technical and visual reasons for measuring the length of a line by evaluating the types themselves. It will be illustrated in Example 509 that the text accommodates different line lengths, or in printer's terms, “works out line for line.” If fourteen-point type, instead of twelve-point type, is used in lines that are fifteen picas long, the typesetter will find it harder to adjust the spaces between words, as there will be two fewer spacing points. This challenge usually leads to excessively wide spacing between words or, even worse, spacing issues between letters.

Testing types used on newspapers, selecting for the purpose the most used newspaper linotype face (see lower part of Example 510), we find that the length of line for six-point should be thirteen picas and for seven-point fourteen picas. As actually used in newspapers, the length of line is usually twelve and a half or thirteen picas.

Testing types used in newspapers, choosing the most commonly used newspaper linotype face (see lower part of Example 510), we find that the line length for six-point should be thirteen picas and for seven-point it should be fourteen picas. In practice, the line length in newspapers is typically twelve and a half or thirteen picas.


Approved Type Sizes and Space Between Lines.—The type in the upper part of Example 509 also illustrates the sizes of type and the amount of space between type lines that investigators have determined are minimum for use on schoolbooks.

Approved Type Sizes and Space Between Lines.—The type in the upper part of Example 509 also shows the size of the type and the spacing between lines that researchers have found to be the minimum required for use in schoolbooks.

Dr. Cohn, whose findings in these matters have been practically indorsed by educational boards and writers on school hygiene, stipulates that for first-year school children the vertical measurement of the lower-case o should be at least 2.6 millimeters, with space between lines (measuring vertically between a lower-case o in one line and a lower-case o in the line above or below) of 4.5 millimeters. Twenty-two-point Caslon Oldstyle, with long descenders (not shown here), conforms to these measurements.

Dr. Cohn, whose findings in these areas have been largely supported by educational boards and experts in school hygiene, specifies that for first-grade students, the height of the lowercase o should be at least 2.6 millimeters, with a line spacing (measured vertically between a lowercase o in one line and a lowercase o in the line above or below) of 4.5 millimeters. Twenty-two-point Caslon Oldstyle, with long descenders (not shown here), meets these specifications.

For the second and third years, the measurement of the o should be at least 2 millimeters, with space between lines of 4 millimeters. Eighteen-point Caslon Oldstyle, with long descenders (as shown in Example 509), conforms to these measurements.

For the second and third years, the measurement of the o should be at least 2 millimeters, with a space between lines of 4 millimeters. Eighteen-point Caslon Oldstyle, with long descenders (as shown in Example 509), meets these measurements.

The fourteen-point size meets the requirements for the fourth school year—at least 1.8 millimeters, with space between lines of 3.6 millimeters.

The fourteen-point size meets the requirements for the fourth grade—at least 1.8 millimeters, with a line spacing of 3.6 millimeters.

After the fourth school year the type should measure not less than 1.6 millimeters, with space between lines of 3 millimeters, to which twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle, with long descenders, conforms.

After the fourth school year, the type should measure at least 1.6 millimeters, with a line spacing of 3 millimeters, which is what twelve-point Caslon Oldstyle with long descenders meets.

The descending strokes are sufficiently long in the eighteen-point size to maintain between the lines of type the amount of spacing stipulated by Dr. Cohn, but in the fourteen-point size it was necessary to add a two-point lead and in the twelve-point size a one-point lead.

The descending strokes are long enough in the eighteen-point size to keep the spacing between the lines of type as recommended by Dr. Cohn, but in the fourteen-point size, a two-point lead was needed, and in the twelve-point size, a one-point lead was necessary.

In comparing one font of type with another, it is not accurate to compare, say, eleven-point with eleven-point. Not infrequently one type-face has been pronounced more readable than another, when the preferred type-face was really a twelve-point face on an eleven-point body, with the descending strokes mutilated to allow for such an arrangement. The faces should be compared by the Cohn method given above.

In comparing different fonts, it’s not accurate to simply compare, for example, eleven-point with eleven-point. Often, one typeface is considered more readable than another when what’s actually preferred is a twelve-point font on an eleven-point base, with the descending strokes adjusted to fit this setup. The fonts should be compared using the Cohn method mentioned earlier.

The panel inserted in Example 509 is illustrative.

The panel shown in Example 509 is illustrative.

The three letters (Hdp) at the left are twenty-four-point “lining” Caslon; the three letters (Hdp) at the right are thirty-point Caslon Oldstyle No. 471. The economical printer too often prefers the “lining” fonts, as he does not need to buy waste (?) metal. It is the same sort of reasoning that sees in the park spaces of the cities real-estate waste.

The three letters (Hdp) on the left are twenty-four-point “lining” Caslon; the three letters (Hdp) on the right are thirty-point Caslon Oldstyle No. 471. The cost-conscious printer often favors the “lining” fonts because he doesn’t need to buy excess metal. It’s the same kind of thinking that views park spaces in cities as a waste of real estate.

The laws of compensation in good typography require, where one point or two points or more are unwisely removed by shortening descenders, that these points shall be restored by leading. So where is the gain by mutilation?

The rules of good typography state that if one point or two points or more are carelessly taken away by shortening descenders, those points should be compensated by increasing the leading. So what's the advantage of this cutback?

Italic Fonts

Italic, the graceful, inclined, feminine type that is now mated with most Roman types, was not known by Jenson or his contemporaries. It made its appearance for the first time in 1501 on a book printed and published at Venice, Italy, by Aldus Manutius. In that volume, an edition of Virgil, Aldus gave credit for the cutting of the face to “Francia of Bologna,” who has since been identified as the great painter and contemporary of Leonardo da Vinci.

Italic, the elegant, slanted, feminine style that is now combined with most Roman types, wasn’t known to Jenson or his peers. It first appeared in 1501 in a book printed and published in Venice, Italy, by Aldus Manutius. In that edition of Virgil, Aldus credited the design of the font to “Francia of Bologna,” who has since been recognized as the great painter and contemporary of Leonardo da Vinci.

The legend has been passed along for many years that Italic was fashioned after the handwriting of the Italian poet Petrarch, but specimens of his handwriting do not bear the proper resemblance, and there are now those who scoff at the story.

The legend has been around for many years that Italic was inspired by the handwriting of the Italian poet Petrarch, but examples of his handwriting don’t actually look similar, and now some people mock the story.

However, the Aldus Italic is not, as one writer declares, merely an inclined Roman. As it has been recut by the American Type Founders Company and mated with Cloister, the recut Roman letter of Jenson, there is opportunity to compare Italic and Roman lower-case, which is done in Example 515. It will be seen that, while there is a family resemblance, there are many differences other than that of mere inclination. Italic capitals, however, are inclined Roman letters, but it should be remembered that Aldus and Francia did not make or use Italic capitals, but that with the slanting lower-case letters Aldus used small Roman capitals. Example 513 shows how this was done, and this example, by the way, is a resetting in 189Cloister Italic and Roman small capitals of the Aldus page, reproduced on page 15 of the chapter on “The Spread of Typography.” In that chapter are included further facts about this famous printer.

However, the Aldus Italic isn't just a slanted Roman font, as one writer suggests. With the adjustments made by the American Type Founders Company and its pairing with Cloister, the revised Roman letter of Jenson, there's a chance to compare Italic and Roman lower-case, as shown in Example 515. You'll notice that, while there's a familial similarity, there are many differences beyond just the slant. Italic capitals, on the other hand, are slanted Roman letters, but it's important to remember that Aldus and Francia didn’t create or use Italic capitals. Instead, Aldus paired the slanted lower-case letters with small Roman capitals. Example 513 illustrates this, and just so you know, this example is a reset in 189Cloister Italic and Roman small capitals from the Aldus page, which can be found on page 15 of the chapter titled “The Spread of Typography.” That chapter includes more details about this renowned printer.

EXAMPLE 509

The various sizes of type set to lengths determined by measuring as in Example 510. Also showing the space between lines needed for easy reading. The size of type-face and space between lines of the eighteen-point, fourteen-point and twelve-point of the Caslon group have been authoritatively recommended for schoolbook printing (Read page 188)

EXAMPLE 509

The different type sizes are adjusted to lengths measured as shown in Example 510. This also illustrates the line spacing needed for comfortable reading. The typeface sizes and line spacing for eighteen-point, fourteen-point, and twelve-point in the Caslon group have been officially recommended for printing schoolbooks (Read page 188)

EXAMPLE 510

Ascertaining the proper optical length of line by measuring a lower-case alphabet-and-a-half of each size and style of type. This method furnishes a practical rule for determining lengths of line. (Read pages 187 and 188.) The accompanying scales may be used for measurements

EXAMPLE 510

Determining the correct optical length of a line by measuring one and a half lowercase alphabets for each size and style of type. This method provides a practical guideline for figuring out line lengths. (Read pages 187 and 188.) The scales provided can be used for measurements.

EXAMPLE 511

Moxon’s Italic capitals of 1676

EXAMPLE 511

Moxon’s Italic capitals from 1676

Examples 511, 512 and 514 are reproductions of Moxon’s drawings (1676) of the Italic types of a Dutch punch cutter. They show the character of Italic used in the seventeenth century. The long s of that time is included in Example 512, and Example 514 shows the decorated Italic capitals that we know as “Swash letters.”

Examples 511, 512 and 514 are reproductions of Moxon’s drawings (1676) of the Italic types created by a Dutch punch cutter. They illustrate the style of Italic used in the seventeenth century. The long s from that era is featured in Example 512, and Example 514 displays the decorated Italic capitals that are commonly known as “Swash letters.”

EXAMPLE 513

Resetting in Cloister types of an example on page 15 of this book of the original Italic types of Aldus and Francia

EXAMPLE 513

Resetting in Cloister styles of an example on page 15 of this book of the original Italic types of Aldus and Francia

Swash Italic capitals and the old-style long s are to be had with Caslon Oldstyle. See Example 517. The Italic mates of a few of the present-day Romans are shown in Example 516.

Swash Italic capitals and the traditional long s can be found in Caslon Oldstyle. See Example 517. The Italic counterparts of some of today's Romans are shown in Example 516.

EXAMPLE 512

The Italic lower-case of Moxon, with long “s” (ſ)

EXAMPLE 512

The italic lowercase of Moxon, featuring a long “s” (ſ)

EXAMPLE 514

Decorated capitals, or Swash letters, as drawn by Moxon from Dutch sources

EXAMPLE 514

Decorated capitals, or Swash letters, as illustrated by Moxon from Dutch sources

190

EXAMPLE 515

The first Italic was not made merely by inclining the Roman lower-case letters. Cloister Oldstyle (upper line) is modeled after one of the first Roman types, that of Jenson, cut in 1470. Cloister Italic is modeled after the first Italic type of Aldus and Francia, 1501

EXAMPLE 515

The first Italic wasn’t just created by slanting the Roman lowercase letters. Cloister Oldstyle (upper line) is based on one of the earliest Roman types, which was designed by Jenson in 1470. Cloister Italic is inspired by the first Italic type from Aldus and Francia, released in 1501.

Italic types, besides the instances previously mentioned, may be seen in use on pages 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 32, and in Examples 45, 98, 100, 128, 138, 139, 144, 152, 158, 168, 169, 170, 171, 180, 185, 191, 215, 222, 223, 224, 232, 240, 245, 246, 250, 262, 282, 292, 294, 297, 299, 310, 311, 313, 314, 315, 316, 325, 326, 329, 331, 332, 336, 342, 343, 345, 346, 349, 363, 372, 374, 375, 384, 387, 390, 394, 396, 398, 399, 401, 402, 404, 405, 406, 412, 413, 414, 418, 420, 423, 424, 426, 428, 429, 472, 477, 481 and 483.

Italic types, in addition to the previously mentioned examples, can be found on pages 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 32, and in Examples 45, 98, 100, 128, 138, 139, 144, 152, 158, 168, 169, 170, 171, 180, 185, 191, 215, 222, 223, 224, 232, 240, 245, 246, 250, 262, 282, 292, 294, 297, 299, 310, 311, 313, 314, 315, 316, 325, 326, 329, 331, 332, 336, 342, 343, 345, 346, 349, 363, 372, 374, 375, 384, 387, 390, 394, 396, 398, 399, 401, 402, 404, 405, 406, 412, 413, 414, 418, 420, 423, 424, 426, 428, 429, 472, 477, 481 and 483.

EXAMPLE 516

A few Italic type-faces

A few italic fonts

Text Formats

Gutenberg and other German printers who followed him fashioned their type-faces after Black Letter, the formal writing of the German scribes, as Jenson fashioned his type-face after White Letter, the formal writing of the Italian scribes. The White Letter of Jenson grew into the Roman types that today are used almost exclusively in France, England and Italy and in our own country, while Black Letter developed into the German types that are almost exclusively used in the German Empire. As this is being written, the Great War is being fought. America has just entered it, and it is a coincidence that the countries favoring White Letter are on one side in the struggle and the countries favoring Black Letter on the other side. The years that follow the war may see, so far as general reading purposes are concerned, the gradual elimination of the letter we know as Text and the largely increased use of Roman characters in the books and newspapers of all races. The Germans are already favoring a Roman half Text in character (Example 521).

Gutenberg and other German printers who came after him designed their typefaces based on Black Letter, the formal script of German scribes, while Jenson based his typeface on White Letter, the formal script of Italian scribes. Jenson's White Letter evolved into the Roman types that are now mainly used in France, England, Italy, and in our own country, whereas Black Letter became the German types that are predominantly used in the German Empire. As this is being written, the Great War is ongoing. America has just joined the conflict, and coincidentally, the countries that prefer White Letter are on one side of the fight, while those that favor Black Letter are on the other. The years following the war may bring about the gradual phase-out of the letter we know as Text for general reading, with a significant increase in the use of Roman characters in books and newspapers across various cultures. Germans are already leaning towards a Roman half Text style (Example 521).

EXAMPLE 517

Complete Roman and Italic alphabets of Caslon Oldstyle with “Swash letters” and long “s” (ſ)

EXAMPLE 517

Complete Roman and Italic alphabets of Caslon Oldstyle with “Swash letters” and long “s” (ſ)

Text type, besides being known as Black Letter, is also called Gothic and Old English; Gothic because of its preference by Gothic or German peoples, and Old English because of its use by Wynkyn de Worde and other early printers of England.

Text type, also known as Black Letter, is sometimes referred to as Gothic and Old English. It's called Gothic due to its popularity among Gothic or Germanic peoples, and Old English because of its use by Wynkyn de Worde and other early printers in England.

Moxon, in 1676, drew an alphabet of Text letter in both capitals and lower-case (Examples 518 and 519), and Caslon, in the eighteenth century, cut a Text letter similar but somewhat thinner in form. Alteration in capitals works great changes in Text type.

Moxon, in 1676, created an alphabet of Text letters in both uppercase and lowercase (Examples 518 and 519), and Caslon, in the eighteenth century, designed a Text letter that was similar but slightly thinner. Changes in uppercase letters make a big difference in Text type.

Text letter in a variety of designs is used in America for special purposes—sometimes as headings of newspapers or for a line on stationery, but because it is generally considered illegible it seldom is given place, except in German-language newspapers, on body portions of printed work.

Text in various designs is used in America for specific purposes—sometimes as newspaper headlines or for a line on stationery, but because it’s often seen as hard to read, it rarely appears outside of German-language newspapers or on the main text of printed materials.

The story of the evolution of Text type from Roman capitals has already been told on pages 5 and 6 of the chapter, “When Books Were Written,” and under the 191head, “Development of the Roman Type-Face,” in this chapter. It is illustrated in Example 465.

The story of how Text type evolved from Roman capitals has already been discussed on pages 5 and 6 of the chapter, “When Books Were Written,” and under the 191 heading, “Development of the Roman Type-Face,” in this chapter. You can see it illustrated in Example 465.

EXAMPLE 518

EXAMPLE 518

EXAMPLE 519

Text capitals and Text lower-case letters as drawn by Moxon in 1676

EXAMPLE 519

Text uppercase and lowercase letters as illustrated by Moxon in 1676

EXAMPLE 520

Two standard German type-faces, the Fractur and the Schwabacher

EXAMPLE 520

Two standard German typefaces, the Fractur and the Schwabacher

EXAMPLE 521

The half-Gothic and half-Roman type-face now favored in Germany as the nearest approach to the Roman allowed by national prejudice of readers

EXAMPLE 521

The mixed Gothic and Roman typeface that's currently popular in Germany is the closest option to Roman that's acceptable to the national biases of readers.

Text type may be seen in use, even to a small extent, on pages 5, 7 (insert), 8, 9, 12, 13 (insert), 14 (insert), 16, 17, 18, 27 (insert), 31, and in Examples 19, 27, 32, 37, 75, 76, 107, 115, 117, 118, 137, 143, 145, 146, 147, 157, 158, 159, 200, 201, 202, 204, 206, 216, 219, 220, 221, 227, 228, 232, 233, 237, 241, 243, 244, 257, 277, 285, 287, 301, 307, 319, 333, 336, 347, 353, 354, 358, 361, 392, 404, 405, 421 and 425.

Text type can be seen in use, even to a small extent, on pages 5, 7 (insert), 8, 9, 12, 13 (insert), 14 (insert), 16, 17, 18, 27 (insert), 31, and in Examples 19, 27, 32, 37, 75, 76, 107, 115, 117, 118, 137, 143, 145, 146, 147, 157, 158, 159, 200, 201, 202, 204, 206, 216, 219, 220, 221, 227, 228, 232, 233, 237, 241, 243, 244, 257, 277, 285, 287, 301, 307, 319, 333, 336, 347, 353, 354, 358, 361, 392, 404, 405, 421 and 425.

EXAMPLE 522

Several representative Text types

Different types of texts

Block Types

The style of letter known as “Block,” because of its plain, square appearance, is more in use than it should be 192(Example 523). It serves a purpose for very small sizes of lettering on lithographed stationery and on blank work, its capitals being more legible than regular Roman capitals in diminutive form; but its use on periodical and newspaper advertising, books and general job work is deplorable.

The style of letter known as “Block,” because of its plain, square look, is used more than it should be 192(Example 523). It works well for very small lettering on lithographed stationery and blank work, as its capitals are more readable than regular Roman capitals at tiny sizes; however, its application in magazines, newspaper ads, books, and general job work is unfortunate.

It is an unfinished Roman letter, as shown by Example 497. It is really not admissible to the company of the educated and informed until serifs have been added and a difference in thickness of strokes is visible.

It is an unfinished Roman letter, as shown by Example 497. It really doesn't belong in the company of the educated and informed until serifs are added and a difference in stroke thickness is visible.

Some American typefounder many years ago called this style of face “Gothic,” and under that name this rather questionable type is widely known, probably better known than many worthier faces. It is possible, also regrettable, that it is the “best seller” of the type foundries’ product. Over in Scotland and England the type is called “Sans-Serif” and “Grotesque”; in Germany it is known as “Block”; in France and Spain as “Antique.” Examples showing use of “Block” type or “Gothic”: 263, 276, 291, 305, 318, 320, 321, 373, 404, 405, 406.

Some American typefounder many years ago labeled this style of type “Gothic,” and under that name this rather questionable type is widely recognized, probably more so than many more deserving types. It’s possible, and also unfortunate, that it is the “best seller” among the type foundries’ offerings. In Scotland and England, this type is referred to as “Sans-Serif” and “Grotesque”; in Germany, it's known as “Block”; and in France and Spain, it’s called “Antique.” Examples showing the use of “Block” type or “Gothic”: 263, 276, 291, 305, 318, 320, 321, 373, 404, 405, 406.

Poster artists of Germany and Austria have developed the “Block” type into a very strong letter of wide strokes, which, when printed in color, show forth color values attractively (Example 235, chapter on “Announcements”). This style of letter has been brought out in type form in Germany and in America. Alphabets of the American type (Publicity Gothic and Advertisers’ Gothic) are shown in Example 524. As indicated by the titles, these types serve a special purpose.

Poster artists from Germany and Austria have created a bold "Block" type with wide strokes that, when printed in color, display vibrant color contrasts attractively (Example 235, chapter on “Announcements”). This letter style has been produced in type form in both Germany and America. The American type alphabets (Publicity Gothic and Advertisers’ Gothic) are shown in Example 524. As the names suggest, these types are designed for specific purposes.

Bold Fonts

There is a legitimate use for bold type-faces, especially in small sizes, on books of reference, schoolbooks, catalogs, and similar printed work, but it is safe to wager that half the bold types in use, and almost all of the large sizes, could well be dispensed with. When used to a great extent, the printed work on which it appears is unattractive. Bold type is to typography what the bass drum is to music: it fits in nicely for purposes of accentuation and emphasis; but who likes a bass drum solo?

There’s a valid use for bold fonts, especially in smaller sizes, in reference books, textbooks, catalogs, and similar printed materials, but I’d bet that half of the bold text we see—and nearly all of the large fonts—could easily be eliminated. When overused, the print becomes unappealing. Bold type in typography is like the bass drum in music: it works well for emphasis and accent, but who enjoys a bass drum solo?

However, a slight strengthening of lines sometimes serves special purposes well. Daniel Elzevir used a letter with slightly deepened strokes for the main line in Example 477.

However, a slight thickening of lines can sometimes serve specific purposes effectively. Daniel Elzevir used a font with slightly bolder strokes for the main line in Example 477.

Old-Style Antique has long been popular with good printers for typography requiring a darker tone than is given by Caslon Oldstyle; the so-called Caslon Bold will never really take its place.

Old-Style Antique has been a favorite among skilled printers for typography that needs a bolder tone than what Caslon Oldstyle provides; the so-called Caslon Bold will never truly replace it.

Most of the standard type-faces referred to in this chapter are procurable in bold form. Cloister Bold, Caslon Bold, Bodoni Bold and Cheltenham Bold are included with a few other faces in Example 526.

Most of the standard typefaces mentioned in this chapter are available in bold form. Cloister Bold, Caslon Bold, Bodoni Bold, and Cheltenham Bold are included along with a few other fonts in Example 526.

Decorative Types

Typography has its periods of abstention and fasting, which usually follow periods of revelry in decorative types in which good taste and dignity are not infrequently sinned against. After the typefounders of the nineteenth century had twisted, distorted, decorated, shaded and otherwise disguised the Roman alphabet until Jenson, Aldus, the Elzevirs, Caslon and Franklin would no longer recognize it, the users of printing, the printers and the typefounders became sobered and realized what they had done.

Typography goes through phases of restraint and simplicity, which typically come after times of indulgence in decorative fonts where good taste and dignity are often overlooked. After the typefounders of the nineteenth century had twisted, distorted, decorated, shaded, and otherwise altered the Roman alphabet to the point where Jenson, Aldus, the Elzevirs, Caslon, and Franklin would no longer recognize it, the users of printing—the printers and typefounders—became more aware of their actions and the consequences.

A period of fasting set in, but, recollections of the old typographic carousal wearing off, ornamental letters again began to appear. They were on different models, however—some of them very good—and were acceptable for informal typography (Example 527-C).

A period of fasting began, but as memories of the old typographic excitement faded, decorative letters started to show up again. They came in various styles, some of them really nice—and they worked well for casual typography (Example 527-C).

Some ornamental types of historic origin are based on the eighteenth-century letters of Fournier, the French typefounder, and on those of English founders (Examples 527-A and 527-B).

Some decorative types from history come from the eighteenth-century letters created by Fournier, the French type founder, as well as those from English founders (Examples 527-A and 527-B).

EXAMPLE 523

Block types, serifless and of one thickness of stroke

EXAMPLE 523

Block styles, sans serif and with a uniform stroke thickness

EXAMPLE 524

Modern-art poster type; the upper alphabet being known as Publicity Gothic, and the lower one as Advertisers’ Gothic

EXAMPLE 524

Modern art poster style; the uppercase letters are referred to as Publicity Gothic, and the lowercase letters as Advertisers’ Gothic

EXAMPLE 525

McFarland (lower line), based upon the French Oldstyle (upper line), the strokes having been made bolder

EXAMPLE 525

McFarland (lower line), based on the French Oldstyle (upper line), with the strokes made bolder

EXAMPLE 526

A few representative bold-face types

EXAMPLE 526

A few examples of boldface types

Special Purpose Types

There are numerous other faces, many of them admirable, which for lack of space cannot be shown or described 194here. There are type-faces for special purposes, such as the imitation copperplate-engraving faces, made in English and French Scripts, Romans, Texts and Gothics; imitation typewriter faces, gray-printing “halftone” faces, such as were used for many years as a head-letter on the Ladies’ Home Journal.

There are many other faces, a lot of which are impressive, that can’t be shown or described here due to space limitations. There are typefaces for specific uses, like imitation copperplate-engraving styles, created in English and French scripts, Romans, texts, and Gothics; imitation typewriter styles, gray-printing “halftone” styles, like those used for years as a header on the Ladies’ Home Journal. 194

EXAMPLE 527-A

The eighteenth-century ornamental types of Fournier, the French founder

EXAMPLE 527-A

The ornamental typefaces from the eighteenth century created by Fournier, the French type designer

EXAMPLE 527-B

Early nineteenth-century ornamental types of English founders

EXAMPLE 527-B

Ornamental typefaces from English founders in the early 1800s

A dozen pages, were they available, could well be given over to exhibits of the privately designed types of the Riverside Press, Merrymount Press, University Press, Village Press and other notable printing offices.

A dozen pages, if they were available, could easily be dedicated to showcasing the unique typefaces from Riverside Press, Merrymount Press, University Press, Village Press, and other notable printing companies.

The Impact of Goudy

A liberal showing would be worth while of the various fonts designed by Frederic W. Goudy, who has done much in influencing type design during recent years, but it will be necessary to be content with the exhibit of Kennerley, in Example 463, and other faces by Mr. Goudy in use in preceding chapters. Kennerley, the best known and most characteristic of the Goudy letters (1911), is shown in Examples 187, 313, 329, 364, 395, 432, 445 and 446. Forum, made in capitals only, is to be found in Examples 20, 229, 334, 360, 366 and 395. Goudy Oldstyle is used in Examples 324 and 391. Camelot, which was Mr. Goudy’s first effort at type designing (1896), appears in Examples 44 and 124. Pabst, another early effort of Mr. Goudy, but not so good in design as his later types, will be found in Examples 30, 100 and 214, and also used in this book for headlines, captions, title-page and cover labels.

A comprehensive showcase of the various typefaces created by Frederic W. Goudy would be worthwhile, as he has significantly influenced type design in recent years. However, we will need to settle for the Kennerley typeface shown in Example 463, along with other styles from Mr. Goudy that have appeared in previous chapters. Kennerley, the most recognized and characteristic of Goudy's fonts (1911), is illustrated in Examples 187, 313, 329, 364, 395, 432, 445 and 446. The Forum typeface, which comes in capital letters only, can be found in Examples 20, 229, 334, 360, 366 and 395. Goudy Oldstyle is featured in Examples 324 and 391. Camelot, which was Mr. Goudy’s first attempt at type design (1896), appears in Examples 44 and 124. Pabst, another early work of Mr. Goudy that isn't as well-designed as his later fonts, can be found in Examples 30, 100 and 214, and it is also utilized in this book for headlines, captions, title pages, and cover labels.

EXAMPLE 527-C

Type-faces of the ornamental kind

Stylish fonts

Frederic W. Goudy is wielding a large influence over art work and typography in America. His style of lettering, decoration and type designing is now to be found on much of the good printing produced in our country. His type-faces are original; in their completed form they are not just like any one type-face previously used, but they revive details in letter forms that for many years had been considered obsolete by typefounders. Mr. Goudy is a humanist; he believes that type-faces should be more expressive of the art of the letterer than the skill of the typefounder. He is speaking:

Frederic W. Goudy is significantly influencing art and typography in America. His style of lettering, decoration, and type design can be found in much of the quality printing produced in our country. His typefaces are original; in their final form, they don't resemble any previous typeface but instead revive details in letter forms that have been considered outdated by typefounders for many years. Mr. Goudy is a humanist; he believes that typefaces should express the art of the letterer more than the skill of the typefounder. He is speaking:

Type must be finely and boldly designed to be beautiful. In the majority of cases where these points are claimed for a type, it will be found that the claims rest on their perfect finish, exact lining or ranging, perfection of curve, precise angles, straightness of stem, or sharpness of serif and hair line. None of these points give beauty or legibility, altho they may be present in a type both beautiful and legible. Finish in the design of a letter is a merit only when it improves, but if made at the expense of design it constitutes a defect.

Type must be designed with both elegance and boldness to be considered beautiful. In most cases where such qualities are attributed to a type, it's evident that these claims rely on its perfect finish, accurate alignment, flawless curves, precise angles, straight stems, or sharp serifs and hairlines. None of these aspects alone contribute to beauty or legibility, even though they may appear in a type that is both beautiful and legible. The finish in a letter's design is only a strength when it enhances the overall design; if it comes at the cost of good design, it becomes a flaw.

Ruskin’s universal law, that “neither architecture nor any other noble work of man can be good unless it be imperfect,” applies no less to our type designs. Types are made to use, and when spontaneous in design, the natural irregularities and deficiencies are signs of life and sources of beauty, giving credit to the designer for careful craftsmanship according to his ability. The demand for perfection is evidence of a misunderstanding of the true ends of art.

Ruskin’s universal law, that “neither architecture nor any other great work of man can be good unless it is imperfect,” applies just as much to our type designs. Types are meant to be used, and when they are designed spontaneously, the natural irregularities and flaws show vitality and enhance beauty, reflecting the designer's careful craftsmanship according to their skill. The demand for perfection shows a misunderstanding of the true purposes of art.

EXAMPLE 528-A

The first “imprint,” as found on Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter of 1457 From De Vinne

EXAMPLE 528-A

The first “imprint,” as seen in Fust and Schœffer’s Psalter from 1457 From De Vinne

EXAMPLE 528-B

Colophon and imprint by Peter Schœffer, 1476 From the original in the Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City

EXAMPLE 528-B

Colophon and imprint by Peter Schœffer, 1476 From the original in the Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City

195

IMPRINTS

The printer’s name or device should, with all regard to good taste, be placed on every well-executed piece of work produced by him. That this is not more often done is due to neglect of advertising opportunities and to fear of the customer’s objection. Why should not the printer mark his product as other craftsmen and manufacturers do? Each piece of clothing he wears, from hat to shoes, probably carries the name or trademark of its maker, as do automobiles, pianos, watches, silverware and many other articles he owns. The maker’s name and trademark are a guarantee of a certain quality of product; in fact, they are absent only on cheap or imitative articles. If the printer is doing careless work and giving no thought to quality, he had better hide his identity, but if he is really producing good printing, as a duty to the craft of which he is a member he should “let his light shine before men.”

The printer's name or device should, with all respect to good taste, be included on every well-done piece of work he produces. The fact that this doesn't happen more often is due to missed advertising opportunities and fear of the customer's disapproval. Why shouldn't the printer label his product like other craftsmen and manufacturers do? Each piece of clothing he wears, from his hat to his shoes, likely carries the name or trademark of its maker, just like cars, pianos, watches, silverware, and many other items he owns. The maker's name and trademark guarantee a certain level of quality; in fact, they’re usually missing only on cheap or imitation products. If the printer is doing careless work and not thinking about quality, he might as well hide his identity. But if he is truly producing good printing, he has a duty to his craft to “let his light shine before men.”

EXAMPLE 529

The first imprint-device, and three marks based on it

EXAMPLE 529

The first printing device, and three marks derived from it

EXAMPLE 530

Aldus’s anchor-and-dolphin device, and adaptations by modern printers

EXAMPLE 530

Aldus’s anchor-and-dolphin logo, and updates by contemporary printers

If a commercial printer has not been in the habit of placing an imprint on his product, and he decides to do so, customers should tactfully be made acquainted with the innovation. They probably stand ready to be convinced of its reasonableness. It may be an excellent plan for the printer to mail his customers an announcement to this effect: “The standard of quality attained by the Smith Printshop is such that it is due our customers and ourselves so to mark each piece of printing produced by us as to identify it as a product of the Smith Printshop. This we will do hereafter.”

If a commercial printer hasn't been putting a label on their products and decides to start, customers should be gently informed about this change. They’re likely open to understanding why it’s a good idea. It might be a smart move for the printer to send out a letter to their customers saying: “The quality we achieve at Smith Printshop is so high that we owe it to our customers and ourselves to label every piece of printing we make to identify it as a product of Smith Printshop. We will do this going forward.”

As a further precaution, all proofs receiving the O. K. of the customer should contain the imprint just as it is to be used, and on important large orders, where there is any doubt, permission should be obtained. There are instances where customers have refused to accept printed work for the reason that an imprint was placed on it.

As an extra precaution, all proofs that get the customer's approval should include the imprint exactly as it will be used. For significant large orders, if there's any uncertainty, permission should be requested. There have been cases where customers have declined to accept printed work because an imprint was added.

It is only necessary to have printing-office patrons become accustomed to the new order of things.

It’s just important for printing office patrons to get used to the new way of doing things.

John Dunlap, who printed the Declaration of Independence for Congress, placed his imprint on it (see frontispiece of this volume). If some friend had suggested to John Gutenberg that he imprint his name on his work, the discussion that has since arisen as to whether or not he printed the “Bible of Forty-two Lines” would not have taken place.

John Dunlap, who printed the Declaration of Independence for Congress, put his name on it (see the frontispiece of this volume). If a friend had suggested to John Gutenberg to put his name on his work, the debate that has happened since about whether or not he printed the “Bible of Forty-two Lines” would not have occurred.

The commercial printer’s imprint should be unassuming and placed inconspicuously. Decorative imprints could be used on booklet and catalog work, and in addition the decorative device should find place on every piece of the printer’s own stationery and advertising matter, even on the office door.

The commercial printer's imprint should be simple and placed in a low-key manner. Decorative imprints can be used on booklets and catalogs, and the decorative element should also be included on all of the printer's own stationery and advertising materials, even on the office door.


The use by printers of decorative devices dates back to one of the first printed books, the famous Psalter of 1457. For a great many hundred years previous, pictures and devices in various forms had been relied upon to convey information and to act as distinguishing marks for various purposes. Figures such as the white horse and the red lion, hung as signs in front of taverns and public houses during the last two centuries, were outgrowths of the coats-of-arms of titled folk who in ancient times hung the family device in front of their estates as emblems of hospitality to the weary traveler.

The use of decorative devices by printers goes back to one of the first printed books, the famous Psalter of 1457. For many hundreds of years before that, images and symbols in various forms were used to share information and serve as identifying marks for different purposes. Symbols like the white horse and the red lion, displayed outside taverns and pubs over the last two centuries, originated from the coats of arms of noble families who, in ancient times, hung their family emblems outside their estates as symbols of hospitality for weary travelers.

196

EXAMPLE 531

The most popular imprint-device as early used by printers, and modern interpretations

EXAMPLE 531

The most popular printing device used by printers in the past, and modern versions

Emblems and devices seem always to have had place in human history. The sign of the Cross in the eleventh century led the Crusaders against the followers of the Crescent. The cross of St. George (+) furnished inspiration for the English in their warfare with the Scots, who rallied around the cross of St. Andrew (❌), and the combined crosses of St. George, St. Andrew and St. Patrick now inspire the patriotic Britisher.

Emblems and symbols have always played a role in human history. The sign of the Cross in the eleventh century led the Crusaders against the followers of the Crescent. The cross of St. George (I'm ready for the text. Please provide it so I can assist with modernizing.) inspired the English in their battles with the Scots, who rallied around the cross of St. Andrew (❌). The combined crosses of St. George, St. Andrew, and St. Patrick now inspire patriotic Brits.

It would seem that printers could do better work if they were to select some device which would represent an ideal, and then attempt to live up to it.

It seems that printers could produce better work if they chose a standard to aim for and then worked to meet that standard.

While the Gutenberg Bible of Forty-two Lines, generally accepted as the first book printed with separate metal types, contained neither device nor printer’s name, the Book of Psalms, or Psalter, of 1457, not only has the names of Fust and Schœffer and the date, but an imprint device which has the distinction of being the first ever used on a book typographically printed. This famous Psalter was the product of Johann Fust and Peter Schœffer, who succeeded to Gutenberg’s printing office. At the end of the book, printed in red ink, is the colophon of the printers (Example 528-A), a translation of which follows: “This book of Psalms, decorated with antique initials, and sufficiently emphasized with rubricated letters, has been thus made by the masterly invention of printing and also of type-making, without the writing of a pen, and is consummated to the service of God, thru the industry of Johann Fust, citizen of Mainz, and Peter Schœffer of Gernszheim, in the year of our Lord 1457, on the eve of the Assumption.”

While the Gutenberg Bible of Forty-two Lines is generally recognized as the first book printed with separate metal types, it didn't include any logo or the printer's name. In contrast, the Book of Psalms, or Psalter, from 1457 not only features the names of Fust and Schœffer and the date but also a printing device that is notable for being the first ever used on a typographically printed book. This renowned Psalter was created by Johann Fust and Peter Schœffer, who took over Gutenberg’s printing business. At the end of the book, printed in red ink, is the printers' colophon (Example 528-A), a translation of which reads: “This book of Psalms, adorned with antique initials and highlighted with red letters, has been made through the masterful invention of printing and type-making, without the use of a pen, and is dedicated to the service of God, through the efforts of Johann Fust, a citizen of Mainz, and Peter Schœffer of Gernszheim, in the year of our Lord 1457, on the eve of the Assumption.”

The colophon contains a typographic error, perhaps the first to be made by a typesetter, the second word showing “spalm-” for “psalm-.” On several of the Psalters still in existence (one is without it) the colophon is accompanied by the decorative device shown in Example 529, consisting of a pair of shields suspended from the limb of a tree. The significance of the characters on the shields is not definitely known. Humphreys, in his “History,” asserts that the shields contain the arms of Fust and those of Schœffer. It is conceded that the shield on the left is Fust’s and the shield on the right Schœffer’s. In Rietstap it is found that one branch of the old German family of Faust bore a coat-of-arms containing on a shield two crampons in saltire (crossed). Bullen claims the character in the Fust shield is the Greek letter Chi (Χ) and that in Schœffer’s shield the Greek letter Lambda (Λ), and that they had some connection with secret societies to which Fust and his son-in-law Schœffer belonged.

The colophon has a typo, possibly the first mistake made by a typesetter, with the second word showing “spalm-” instead of “psalm-.” In several of the surviving Psalters (one is missing it), the colophon features the decorative design seen in Example 529, which consists of a pair of shields hanging from a tree limb. The meaning of the symbols on the shields isn't clearly known. Humphreys, in his “History,” claims that the shields display the arms of Fust and Schœffer. It's generally accepted that the left shield belongs to Fust and the right one to Schœffer. According to Rietstap, one branch of the old German family of Faust had a coat-of-arms that featured two crossed crampons on a shield. Bullen argues that the symbol on the Fust shield is the Greek letter Chi (Χ) and that on Schœffer’s shield is the Greek letter Lambda (Λ), suggesting they had ties to secret societies that Fust and his son-in-law Schœffer were part of.

EXAMPLE 532

Arms supposedly granted the Typothetæ, a society of master printers, by Frederick III

EXAMPLE 532

Supposedly, Frederick III granted arms to the Typothetæ, a society of master printers.

Schœffer’s device was used for many years by his descendants, Example 529 showing its use as late as 1747 by Peter Schœffer, of Bois-le-Duc, in the Netherlands.

Schœffer’s device was used for many years by his descendants, Example 529 showing its use as late as 1747 by Peter Schœffer, of Bois-le-Duc, in the Netherlands.

EXAMPLE 533

The imprint-device of England’s first printer, its probable derivation, and two notable devices evolved from it

EXAMPLE 533

The printing device of England’s first printer, its likely origin, and two significant devices that developed from it

197This device of Fust and Schœffer furnished inspiration to several printers of the same century, chief among whom were Michael Furter and Nicolas Kessler, whose devices are shown in Example 529. Furter, who printed at Basel, Switzerland, in 1490, was once credited with being the inventor of printing, thru an error in a book, the date of which was made to read 1444 (M.CCCC.XLIIII), instead of 1494 (M.CCCC.XCIIII).

197This invention by Fust and Schœffer inspired several printers in the same century, especially Michael Furter and Nicolas Kessler, whose logos are shown in Example 529. Furter, who printed in Basel, Switzerland, in 1490, was mistakenly credited as the inventor of printing due to an error in a book, which mistakenly dated it as 1444 (M.CCCC.XLIIII) instead of 1494 (M.CCCC.XCIIII).

EXAMPLE 534

Two modern designs with ancient motifs

EXAMPLE 534

Two contemporary designs featuring ancient patterns

What is considered to be the most classic of all imprint-devices (Example 530) is that used by Aldus Manutius, the great Venetian printer, who introduced the italic face of type. The device, an anchor, around which is twisted a dolphin, is said to be symbolic of the proverb “Hasten slowly.” The anchor represents stability and the dolphin swiftness. The mark was taken by him from a book he had printed, “Reveries of Polyphilus,” and was used as the Aldus device for the first time in an edition of Dante of 1502.

What is considered the most classic of all imprint devices (Example 530) is the one used by Aldus Manutius, the famous Venetian printer, who introduced italic typeface. The device, featuring an anchor twisted with a dolphin, is believed to symbolize the proverb “Hasten slowly.” The anchor represents stability, while the dolphin signifies swiftness. He adopted this mark from a book he printed, “Reveries of Polyphilus,” and it was first used as the Aldus device in an edition of Dante in 1502.

In a spirit of affection and regard for the famous Venetian, the device of Aldus has been adopted or adapted by several well-known printers. There is a nice sentiment connected with the use of this mark by William Pickering, the noted English publisher. In place of the “AL-DVS” of the original, Pickering’s adaptation contained a motto in which he announced himself as the English disciple of Aldus. The reproduction of the Pickering device shown is from a book published by Pickering and printed by Whittingham in 1840.

In a spirit of affection and respect for the famous Venetian, several well-known printers have adopted or adapted Aldus's device. There's a nice sentiment behind its use by William Pickering, the notable English publisher. Instead of the “AL-DVS” from the original, Pickering’s version included a motto where he identified himself as Aldus's English disciple. The reproduction of the Pickering device shown is from a book published by Pickering and printed by Whittingham in 1840.

By 1892 we find a lion added to this device, as used by the Chiswick Press.

By 1892, a lion was added to this design, as used by the Chiswick Press.

The McClure Publications of New York have a conventionalized interpretation which shows the dolphin and anchor in white upon a black circular background (Example 530).

The McClure Publications of New York have a standard interpretation that displays the dolphin and anchor in white on a black circular background (Example 530).

Bruce Rogers, at the Riverside Press, has most interestingly adapted the Aldus device. It seems that he always had a fondness for the thistle, the national flower of Scotland, and when seeking a motif for his mark, naturally turned to it. When the time came for putting it into use, the first requirement happened to be for an Aldine page, so it was cast in a form that would distinctly suggest the Aldus anchor and dolphin. (Compare the two designs in Example 530.) While on the subject of Bruce Rogers’s device it may be interesting to relate that later, when he desired to use it on a book modeled on French sixteenth-century work, he reshaped it as shown in Example 540, which carries a suggestion of one of Robert Estienne’s marks shown with it. Rogers redrew his personal device, or that of the Riverside Press, to blend with the motif of the book on which it was to be used, a practice that embodies the highest use of the printer’s mark.

Bruce Rogers, at the Riverside Press, has interestingly adapted the Aldus device. He seems to have always had a fondness for the thistle, Scotland's national flower, so when he needed a motif for his mark, he naturally chose it. When it was time to use it, the first requirement happened to be for an Aldine page, so it was designed in a way that would clearly suggest the Aldus anchor and dolphin. (Compare the two designs in Example 530.) While discussing Bruce Rogers’s device, it's worth noting that later, when he wanted to use it for a book inspired by French sixteenth-century work, he reshaped it as shown in Example 540, which hints at one of Robert Estienne’s marks shown alongside it. Rogers redrew his personal device, or that of the Riverside Press, to match the motif of the book it was intended for, a practice that represents the highest use of the printer’s mark.

EXAMPLE 535

The pun, as found in two printers’ marks

EXAMPLE 535

The joke, as seen in two printers’ marks


One of the most famous imprint-devices is that adopted by the Society of Printers of Venice in 1481 (Example 531), about the time of the death of Nicholas Jenson, who is supposed to have originated the design. Various explanations have been given of the significance of this device, the most reasonable being that the globe and cross refers to the millennium, when, according to prophecy, God shall reign upon earth. The globe-and-cross symbol was frequently embellished with supplementary characters having other religious significance. The mark of Androw Myllar (Example 535) contains a figure 4, which denoted the Supreme Being. People of antiquity frequently composed the name of the Deity in four letters. The globe in the Venetian device probably represented the earth, altho the fact that the earth was round was not common knowledge in the early days. The theory, however, was accepted by the educated priest and layman long before Columbus sailed, as he thought, for India.

One of the most famous imprint devices is the one adopted by the Society of Printers of Venice in 1481 (Example 531), around the time of Nicholas Jenson's death, who is believed to have come up with the design. Various interpretations of the significance of this device have been suggested, with the most plausible being that the globe and cross represent the millennium, when, according to prophecy, God will reign on earth. The globe-and-cross symbol was often decorated with additional characters that had other religious meanings. The mark of Androw Myllar (Example 535) includes a figure 4, which symbolized the Supreme Being. People in ancient times often wrote the name of the Deity with four letters. The globe in the Venetian device likely represented the earth, although the idea that the earth is round wasn't widely known back then. However, educated priests and laypeople accepted this theory long before Columbus set sail, thinking he was heading for India.

The double-cross in the Roman church today is associated with the authority of an archbishop, and as a decorative form of the cross, extends back many centuries. The ornamental double-cross pictured in this connection was once the property of St. Waudru of Belgium, who died 198in 670. The double cross or Lorraine cross was used by Geofroy Tory as a small mark on his wood engravings (see lower left corner of the Tory mark in Example 536).

The double cross in the Roman church today is linked to the authority of an archbishop and, as a decorative version of the cross, has a history that goes back many centuries. The decorative double cross mentioned here was once owned by St. Waudru of Belgium, who passed away 198 in 670. The double cross, or Lorraine cross, was used by Geofroy Tory as a small mark on his wood engravings (see the lower left corner of the Tory mark in Example 536).

EXAMPLE 536

Devices used by notable printers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries

EXAMPLE 536

Tools used by famous printers in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries

EXAMPLE 537

A colophon-imprint by D. B. Updike, from “Petrarch and His Masters,” 1907

EXAMPLE 537

A colophon imprint by D. B. Updike, from “Petrarch and His Masters,” 1907

EXAMPLE 538

The Lion of St. Mark appropriately adapted by Bruce Rogers to a book on Venetian life

EXAMPLE 538

The Lion of St. Mark, skillfully reimagined by Bruce Rogers for a book about life in Venice

EXAMPLE 539-A

The Lion of St. Mark as a printshop device

EXAMPLE 539-A

The Lion of St. Mark as a print shop logo

EXAMPLE 539-B

The Oswald Press mark designed by T. M. Cleland

EXAMPLE 539-B

The Oswald Press logo designed by T. M. Cleland

In further consideration of the cross-and-globe device it may be well to mention that an astronomical sign consisting of a circle with a cross above it (♁) was used by the Egyptians many years before the Christian era. Such a sign is yet used astronomically and also to indicate the male in botany. Another astronomical sign bearing on the subject is that of a cross within a circle (⨁), by which the earth is indicated.

In looking more closely at the cross-and-globe symbol, it's important to note that an astronomical sign made up of a circle with a cross above it (♁) was used by the Egyptians long before the Christian era. This symbol is still used in astronomy today and also to represent the male gender in botany. Another astronomical sign related to this topic is a cross within a circle (⨁), which represents the earth.

EXAMPLE 540

Robert Estienne’s mark, and Bruce Rogers’s adaptation of it

EXAMPLE 540

Robert Estienne’s mark and Bruce Rogers’s version of it

EXAMPLE 541

An appropriate mark for a printer to adopt

EXAMPLE 541

A suitable symbol for a printer to use

The cross-and-globe device of the Venetian Society of Printers has proved the most popular of any of the old imprints. When Elbert Hubbard established the Roycroft Shop at East Aurora, N. Y., in 1896, he adopted it as a work-mark, placing an “R” in the lower half of the circle in place of the dot. Fra Elbertus’s interpretation of the device established the circle as “the emblem of the perfect (the complete), and the lines puncturing the circle the attempt to make a perfect article, to do perfect work.”

The cross-and-globe symbol of the Venetian Society of Printers has become the most popular among all the old imprints. When Elbert Hubbard founded the Roycroft Shop in East Aurora, NY, in 1896, he used it as a trademark, substituting an “R” in the lower half of the circle for the dot. Fra Elbertus’s interpretation of the symbol defined the circle as “the emblem of the perfect (the complete), and the lines crossing the circle as the effort to create a perfect product, to do perfect work.”

When the advertising manager of the National Biscuit Company was looking about for a trademark this old device of the Lorraine cross and circle must have appealed to him strongly, and such is the power of advertising that printers may some day be accused of copying the design from this biscuit house.

When the advertising manager of the National Biscuit Company was searching for a trademark, the old design of the Lorraine cross and circle must have caught his attention. The influence of advertising is so strong that printers may one day be blamed for copying the design from this biscuit company.

The remarkable adaptability of the device is also demonstrated by the Griffith-Stillings imprint, in which it forms a part of a clever modern decorative design (Example 547).

The impressive versatility of the device is also shown by the Griffith-Stillings imprint, where it is incorporated into a smart contemporary decorative design (Example 547).

Frederic W. Goudy incorporated the Venetian printers’ device most interestingly in the decorative mark of the Village Press (Example 531).

Frederic W. Goudy creatively included the Venetian printers' symbol in the decorative mark of the Village Press (Example 531).

The imprint-device of the Gould Press (Example 543) may have originated with the Venetian printers’ design. It is an interesting variant.

The imprint device of the Gould Press (Example 543) may have been inspired by the design of Venetian printers. It’s a fascinating variation.

These numerous uses by printers and others of the old circle-and-cross design suggest a paraphrase of an ancient proverb: “A good device lives forever.”

These various uses by printers and others of the old circle-and-cross design hint at a modern take on an old saying: “A good design lasts forever.”


William Caxton, England’s first printer, used an imprint-device (Example 533) that in appearance resembles a rug, which it may have been intended to represent, as Caxton is supposed to have used this mark when he was a merchant at Bruges in Belgium. The characters contained in the design have caused much discussion. The “W” on the left and the “C” on the right are generally accepted as the initials of Caxton. The center characters have been claimed by some to be the figures “74,” but the most reasonable explanation is that they form a trade device used by the merchants of Bruges. This explanation is seemingly confirmed by the discovery of a memorial plate to one John Felde, containing his trademark as a merchant, which trademark is very similar to the characters in the center of Caxton’s imprint-device. The reproduction of the Felde design shows that if the top stroke were taken away and a loop added the result would be Caxton’s characters.

William Caxton, England’s first printer, used a print mark (Example 533) that looks like a rug, which it may have been meant to represent, as Caxton is believed to have used this mark when he was a merchant in Bruges, Belgium. The elements in the design have sparked a lot of debate. The “W” on the left and the “C” on the right are generally recognized as Caxton's initials. Some have claimed that the center elements represent the numbers “74,” but the most sensible explanation is that they form a trade mark used by the merchants of Bruges. This explanation is seemingly backed up by the discovery of a memorial plate for one John Felde, which features his merchant trademark that closely resembles the characters in the center of Caxton’s print mark. The reproduction of the Felde design shows that if the top stroke were removed and a loop added, it would produce Caxton’s characters.

199Wynkyn de Worde, when he succeeded Caxton as England’s printer, adopted Caxton’s characters (probably a sentimental act) and in the device shown added his own name at the foot.

199 When Wynkyn de Worde took over from Caxton as England’s printer, he used the same typefaces that Caxton had (likely as a sentimental gesture) and included his own name at the bottom of the emblem shown.

William Morris, in planning an imprint-device for the Kelmscott Press, evidently made a study of de Worde’s design, for there is resemblance in shape and in the placing of the name at the foot.

William Morris, while designing a printing press for the Kelmscott Press, clearly looked into de Worde’s design, as there is a similarity in shape and in the positioning of the name at the bottom.

T. C. Hansard, on the title-page of his “Typographia” (1825), uses a device which tradition tells us was granted by Emperor Frederick III of Germany to a corporation of master printers known as the Typothetæ. (See Example 532.) References by writers to the origin of this design are generally contradictory. The United Typothetæ and Franklin Clubs of America, an association of employing printers, has adopted the device and uses it in the conventionalized form shown. The design in its original form tends to heraldic elaborateness. There is represented an eagle holding a copy guide in one claw and a composing stick in the other. Surmounting the design is a griffin (eagle-lion) grasping two ink balls. The Winthrop Press mark (Example 543) and other printers’ devices have been inspired by this emblem, as the griffin copyholder and ink balls are familiar decorative forms.

T. C. Hansard, on the title page of his “Typographia” (1825), uses a design that tradition claims was granted by Emperor Frederick III of Germany to a group of master printers known as the Typothetæ. (See Example 532.) References from writers about the origin of this design are often conflicting. The United Typothetæ and Franklin Clubs of America, a group of employed printers, have adopted the design and use it in the conventional form shown. The original design tends to be quite elaborate in a heraldic style. It features an eagle holding a copy guide in one claw and a composing stick in the other. At the top of the design is a griffin (eagle-lion) holding two ink balls. The Winthrop Press mark (Example 543) and other printers’ designs have been inspired by this emblem, as the griffin copyholder and ink balls are well-known decorative elements.


In Great Britain the printer whose name would allow a pun has always been considered fortunate. John Daye, a London printer of 1560, had an elaborate device, paneled, in the center of which is a picture of a reclining man being aroused by a figure which, pointing to the sun, says, “Arise, for it is day.” (Example 535.)

In Great Britain, printers with names that lend themselves to puns have always been seen as lucky. John Daye, a London printer from 1560, had a detailed emblem featuring a picture of a man reclining, being awakened by another figure who, pointing to the sun, says, “Get up, because it’s day.” (Example 535.)

Androw Myllar, who printed in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1510, used a device which portrayed a miller climbing to his mill (Example 535). The arrangement of his name in the lower part of the design suggests de Worde’s, and the characters in the shields have meanings that may be determined by a study of the religious symbolism of the Middle Ages.

Androw Myllar, who printed in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1510, used a design that showed a miller climbing to his mill (Example 535). The way his name is arranged at the bottom of the design is similar to de Worde’s, and the symbols in the shields have meanings that can be understood through the study of the religious symbolism of the Middle Ages.

EXAMPLE 536-A

The printer’s device and imprint here occupies two-thirds of the title-page. From a book by Robert Estienne, Paris, France, 1544

EXAMPLE 536-A

The printer's mark and imprint here take up two-thirds of the title page. From a book by Robert Estienne, Paris, France, 1544

The imprints of some of the notable printers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries are interesting. The first mark in Example 536 shows one of the devices of Geofroy Tory of Paris from his “Champ Fleury” of 1529. It consists of a broken pot filled with instruments and the Latin phrase Non plus (nothing more). The Lorraine cross in the lower left corner is interesting in connection with the use made of it by the Venetian Society of Printers (Example 531). Tory, an accomplished scholar and noted wood engraver and printer, was, according to an epitaph written by a compatriot, “the first man to discuss seriously the art of printing,” and “taught Garamond, chief of engravers.” His work on the derivation and formation of Latin characters had considerable renown. He claimed, according to Fournier, that all the letters are 200formed of I and O. Proportions are arrived at by dividing a square into ten lines, perpendicular and horizontal, forming one hundred squares completely filled with circles, the whole giving form and figure to the letters.

The imprints of some of the notable printers from the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries are intriguing. The first mark in Example 536 displays one of the symbols used by Geofroy Tory of Paris from his “Champ Fleury” published in 1529. It features a broken pot filled with tools and the Latin phrase Not anymore (nothing more). The Lorraine cross in the lower left corner is noteworthy in relation to its use by the Venetian Society of Printers (Example 531). Tory, a skilled scholar and renowned wood engraver and printer, was, as noted in an epitaph by a contemporary, “the first man to seriously discuss the art of printing,” and “taught Garamond, chief of engravers.” His work on the derivation and formation of Latin characters gained significant recognition. He claimed, according to Fournier, that all the letters are 200 made up of I and O. The proportions are achieved by dividing a square into ten lines, both vertical and horizontal, creating one hundred squares completely filled with circles, which collectively shape and define the letters.

EXAMPLE 542

Use of the oval shape in the designing of printers’ marks

EXAMPLE 542

Using the oval shape in designing printers’ marks

EXAMPLE 543

Modern imprints suggested by ancient forms

EXAMPLE 543

Current designs inspired by ancient styles

The troublous times of the Reformation, during which John Bebel was imprisoned, may have had some influence on his selection of a device. It consisted of a tree, in the branches of which was a prostrate man, and over him was a large flat thing representing the platen of a printing press (Example 536). On the platen were words meaning “Do not press poor me to death.”

The troubled times of the Reformation, when John Bebel was imprisoned, may have influenced his choice of design. It featured a tree, with a prostrate man in its branches, and above him was a large flat object representing the platen of a printing press (Example 536). On the platen were words meaning “Don’t press poor me to death.”

Christopher Plantin, printer and publisher of Antwerp, Belgium, whose famous printing office, preserved as a museum, was one of the shrines of worshiping printer-pilgrims up to the beginning of the European war, employed a device which is emblematic of the saying of Jesus, “I am the vine.”

Christopher Plantin, a printer and publisher from Antwerp, Belgium, had a famous printing office that is now a museum. It was a place where printer-pilgrims came to pay their respects until the start of the European war. He used a symbol that reflects the saying of Jesus, “I am the vine.”

A device used by the Elzevirs at Leyden, Holland, in 1620, shows a tree with spreading branches. On one side of the trunk is the figure of a man and on the other a scroll with the words Non solus (not alone).

A device used by the Elzevirs in Leiden, Holland, in 1620, displays a tree with wide branches. On one side of the trunk is the figure of a man, and on the other side is a scroll with the words Not alone (not alone).

Robert Estienne had a similar device in 1544 (Example 536-A). This device as shown is slightly reduced from the original, while those previously mentioned are greatly reduced in size.

Robert Estienne had a similar device in 1544 (Example 536-A). This device, as shown, is a bit smaller than the original, while the ones mentioned earlier are much smaller in size.

John Froben of Basel, Switzerland, who was a close friend of Erasmus, the philosopher and patron of learning, in 1520 used a device containing a staff surmounted by a dove and entwined by two serpents. (Example 542.) The legend, “Be ye wise as serpents and harmless as doves,” occasionally accompanied the design.

John Froben of Basel, Switzerland, who was a close friend of Erasmus, the philosopher and supporter of education, in 1520 used a device featuring a staff topped by a dove and wrapped around by two snakes. (Example 542.) The phrase, “Be wise as snakes and innocent as doves,” sometimes accompanied the design.

Sometimes these printers’ marks were so large as to leave little room for the title-page proper, in contrast to which is the extreme modesty of Ulrich Zell of Cologne, Prussia, whose works are numerous and who is credited with starting the story of the invention of printing by Coster. Zell scarcely ever placed even his name on a book, yet his work may easily be identified.

Sometimes these printer's marks were so big that they left little space for the actual title page. In contrast, Ulrich Zell from Cologne, Prussia, was very modest. He produced many works and is credited with beginning the tale of the invention of printing by Coster. Zell almost never included even his name on a book, but his work is easy to recognize.


The Heintzemann Press device in Example 534 has an antique appearance and its designer evidently received inspiration for his anchor, foliage and scroll from such devices as those of Aldus and Plantin. The Rogers-Riverside Press mark, too, has ancient motifs. The anchor-shaped thistle, as already stated, is based upon Aldus’s device, and the frame suggests old designs in metal.

The Heintzemann Press device in Example 534 looks old-fashioned, and its designer clearly drew inspiration for the anchor, foliage, and scroll from devices like those of Aldus and Plantin. The Rogers-Riverside Press mark also features classic elements. As mentioned earlier, the anchor-shaped thistle is modeled after Aldus’s device, and the frame resembles vintage metal designs.

EXAMPLE 545

A mark that has to do with mythology

EXAMPLE 545

A symbol related to mythology

There is a suggestion of the pot device of Tory in the decorative portion of the Merrymount Press imprint shown as Example 537. This appeared at the end of the book as a colophon, the style in which the imprint is written fitting it for that position. It will be remembered that the printers of Italy usually had the beginning and ending set in capitals to differentiate them from the body of the book. Elbert Hubbard used the idea commercially on his advertising booklets, as in Example 550.

There’s a hint of the Tory pot device in the decorative part of the Merrymount Press imprint shown as Example 537. This appeared at the end of the book as a colophon, and the style in which the imprint is written makes it suitable for that position. It’s worth noting that Italian printers often set the beginning and ending in capitals to distinguish them from the rest of the book. Elbert Hubbard used this concept commercially in his advertising booklets, as seen in Example 550.

Perhaps the device shown as Example 541 is a bit too suggestive for practical use by printers of the present day. Stephen Dolet’s name, in its literal meaning, has something to do with an ax, hewing and cutting. Dolet was a scholarly printer of the sixteenth century who suffered martyrdom at the stake in 1546.

Perhaps the device shown as Example 541 is a bit too suggestive for practical use by today’s printers. Stephen Dolet’s name, in its literal meaning, relates to an ax, hewing, and cutting. Dolet was a scholarly printer in the sixteenth century who was martyred at the stake in 1546.

The oval shape for imprint designs is not unpleasant, as will be seen by Example 542.

The oval shape for imprint designs isn't bad, as will be shown in Example 542.

The Fezandat device was designed by Tory. The pheasant is a pun on the printer’s name. The device as a whole is pleasing.

The Fezandat device was created by Tory. The pheasant is a play on the printer’s name. The device overall is appealing.

The Riverside Press device is classically Greek in motif. Pan and his pipes appear on many of the marks of this press in various designs. The one shown is from “Pan’s Pipes,” a Riverside Press publication.

The Riverside Press logo has a classic Greek theme. Pan and his pipes show up on many of the marks of this press in different designs. The one displayed is from “Pan’s Pipes,” a Riverside Press publication.

EXAMPLE 544

Printers’ marks based on architectural motifs

EXAMPLE 544

Printer logos inspired by architectural designs

The winged ball, torch and other symbolic decorative devices are blended pleasingly on the mark (Example 542), which appeared on the title-pages of the famous Eliot six-foot shelf of books, “The Harvard Classics,” 1909.

The winged ball, torch, and other symbolic decorative elements are nicely combined on the mark (Example 542), which showed up on the title pages of the famous Eliot six-foot shelf of books, “The Harvard Classics,” 1909.


EXAMPLE 546

The monogram is an attractive form for printers’ devices

EXAMPLE 546

The monogram is a stylish design for printers’ logos.

EXAMPLE 547

Representative of the large variety of devices in use by American printers and publishers

EXAMPLE 547

Showcasing the wide range of devices used by American printers and publishers

An interesting feature of some early Venetian books is the use by printers of decorative devices designed upon the winged Lion of St. Mark. Recent adaptations of this device are the Oswald Press imprints (Examples 539-A and 539-B) and the ornament on a title by Bruce Rogers (Example 538). The Lion of St. Mark is interesting in its significance. Tradition has it that long ago, when John Mark, the missionary companion of Paul, was traveling by way of Aquileia (Roman Secunda) for the purpose of 201preaching the gospel of Jesus, he found himself, after a violent storm, on one of the Rialto Islands that now form the city of Venice. In a dream an angel appeared saluting him (Pax tibi Marce Evangelista meus) and announcing that on those islands his bones would some day find peace. In fulfilment of this prophecy, in the year 829, several Venetians went to Alexandria, where the body of Mark had been buried, removed it surreptitiously, and took it to Venice. Such was the enthusiasm caused by this event that St. Mark supplanted St. Theodore as the patron saint of the city. “Viva San Marco” was heard as the battle cry of the Venetians, and the winged lion, symbolic of St. Mark, became the glorious sign of the republic. In Venice today there are numerous statuary reproductions of the winged Lion of St. Mark, holding with one claw a book of the gospels. The exposed pages of the book usually contain the salutation of the angel. The story of St. Mark’s vision and of the bringing of the body to Venice is pictured in mosaic work in St. Mark’s Church, Venice, where his bones rest.

An interesting feature of some early Venetian books is the use by printers of decorative devices designed around the winged Lion of St. Mark. Recent adaptations of this device include the Oswald Press imprints (Examples 539-A and 539-B) and the ornament on a title by Bruce Rogers (Example 538). The Lion of St. Mark is significant for its meaning. According to tradition, long ago, when John Mark, the missionary companion of Paul, was traveling through Aquileia (Roman Secunda) to preach the gospel of Jesus, he found himself on one of the Rialto Islands that now make up the city of Venice after a violent storm. In a dream, an angel appeared to him, greeting him with (Peace be with you, my Evangelist Mark) and announcing that one day his bones would rest peacefully on those islands. In fulfillment of this prophecy, in the year 829, several Venetians traveled to Alexandria, where Mark's body had been buried, secretly removed it, and brought it to Venice. This event caused such excitement that St. Mark replaced St. Theodore as the city's patron saint. “Viva San Marco” became the battle cry of the Venetians, and the winged lion, symbolizing St. Mark, became the glorious emblem of the republic. Today in Venice, there are numerous statues depicting the winged Lion of St. Mark, holding a book of the gospels with one claw. The open pages of the book typically feature the angel's salutation. The story of St. Mark’s vision and the transport of his body to Venice is illustrated in mosaic work in St. Mark’s Church, where his bones are laid to rest.

The four-winged beasts mentioned in the fourth chapter of Revelations are accepted as symbolic of the four evangelists, the winged lion typifying St. Mark.

The four-winged creatures described in the fourth chapter of Revelation symbolize the four evangelists, with the winged lion representing St. Mark.


Example 543 shows four designs with motifs taken from ancient sources. The Matthews-Northrup device of the mythical phœnix rising from the fire is emblematic of immortality; the torch probably signifies the intellectual light resulting from the invention of printing. The Winthrop Press imprint has already been mentioned as having relation to the ancient Typothetæ arms. The Binner-Wells design suggests that of Froben, by the shape and lettering between lines. The possible derivation of the Gould Press device from the Venetian master printers’ emblem has been suggested.

Example 543 shows four designs featuring motifs from ancient sources. The Matthews-Northrup depiction of the mythical phoenix rising from the fire symbolizes immortality; the torch likely represents the intellectual enlightenment brought about by the invention of printing. The Winthrop Press imprint has already been noted as being related to the ancient Typothetæ arms. The Binner-Wells design is reminiscent of Froben, evident in the shape and lettering between lines. There's been speculation that the Gould Press device may have originated from the emblem of Venetian master printers.

The unique mark of the De Vinne Press (Example 545) probably pictures a page from a manuscript book. The legend connected with the Greek lettering is mythical and has to do with one Prometheus, who, while chained to a rock, tells of the benefits he conferred on mankind. A literal translation of the Greek at this point reveals the appropriateness of the quotation as used: “And further, I discovered for them numeration, most striking of inventions; and composition, nurse of the arts, producer of the record of all things.”

The unique symbol of the De Vinne Press (Example 545) likely depicts a page from a manuscript book. The story associated with the Greek lettering is mythical and involves Prometheus, who, while tied to a rock, speaks about the gifts he gave to humanity. A direct translation of the Greek here shows how fitting the quote is: “And also, I discovered for them numbering, the most remarkable of inventions; and writing, the supporter of the arts, creator of the record of everything.”

Three imprint-devices, based upon architectural motifs, are shown in Example 544. In the Rogers design the architectural panel is surmounted by a silhouetted heraldic figure that adds much to the attractiveness of the device. A Colonial architectural panel frames the title of the Bartlett-Orr Press. The Egyptian winged ball, asps and open book are well blended with the monogram circle that fits the Roman arch in the Trow imprint.

Three imprint devices, based on architectural designs, are shown in Example 544. In the Rogers design, the architectural panel is topped with a silhouetted heraldic figure that enhances the overall appeal of the device. A Colonial-style architectural panel surrounds the title of the Bartlett-Orr Press. The Egyptian winged ball, asps, and open book are well integrated with the monogram circle that fits into the Roman arch in the Trow imprint.

EXAMPLE 548

Decorative imprints constructed with typefounders’ ornaments and suitable type-faces

EXAMPLE 548

Decorative prints made with typefounders’ ornaments and appropriate typefaces

Initials in monogram form are frequently adopted by printers, and three such devices are shown in Example 546. Reversing one of the initials is a favorite method when the nature of the letter allows it, as in the Patteson Press device. Fitting the initials to a general shape calls 202for clever work, as in the shield shape of the Corday & Gross design.

Initials in monogram form are often used by printers, and three examples are shown in Example 546. Reversing one of the initials is a popular technique when the design permits it, like in the Patteson Press logo. Adapting the initials to a specific shape requires skill, as seen in the shield shape of the Corday & Gross design. 202

EXAMPLE 549

Type imprints, and the various interesting effects possible with them

EXAMPLE 549

Type imprints and the different interesting effects you can create with them

Of the large variety of devices in use by other publishers and printers, those shown in Example 547 are representative.

Of the wide range of devices used by other publishers and printers, the ones shown in Example 547 are typical.

The Griffith-Stillings device, as has already been mentioned, includes elements of the mark of the Society of Printers of Venice.

The Griffith-Stillings device, as mentioned earlier, includes elements of the emblem of the Society of Printers of Venice.

The American Printer mark shows an American eagle standing on books, and the initials A. P. used decoratively in the upper right corner. The dimensions of this oblong and the background are borrowed from the Venetian mark.

The American Printer logo features an American eagle perched on books, with the initials A. P. used artistically in the upper right corner. The shape of this rectangle and its background are inspired by the Venetian logo.

Unusual in shape and in wording is the Stillson device, which develops attractiveness when printed in several colors and embossed.

Unusual in shape and wording, the Stillson device becomes more appealing when printed in multiple colors and embossed.

EXAMPLE 550

Quaint book-ending, or colophon, as used by Elbert Hubbard

EXAMPLE 550

Charming book-ending, or colophon, as used by Elbert Hubbard

Notwithstanding the cumbersome size of the acorn, the Sparrell Print device is not unattractive.

Despite the bulky size of the acorn, the Sparrell Print device is actually quite appealing.

With a decorative quality that suggests the sixteenth century, the Ginn device is appropriate in its use of the horn book, an old-time teaching help.

With a decorative style reminiscent of the sixteenth century, the Ginn device effectively uses the horn book, a traditional teaching tool.

Rather clever is the manner in which Goudy has hung the ampersand decoratively on the double-T monogram that is part of the Taylor & Taylor mark.

Rather clever is the way Goudy has styled the ampersand decoratively on the double-T monogram that is part of the Taylor & Taylor brand.

The diamond-shaped Wright & Joys device, with its conventionalized tree, is also interesting.

The diamond-shaped Wright & Joys device, featuring its stylized tree, is also noteworthy.


It is possible to construct really creditable decorative imprints with typefounders’ ornaments and suitable type-faces. Example 548 presents several such designs as demonstrations of what can be done in this respect. In building these imprints the author has kept in mind the rules that govern combinations of type and ornament, as explained in the chapters relating to harmony, appropriateness, tone, contrast and ornamentation. In the Church Press design the border is made in outline to reflect the ornament. The types used in the Smith-Brown, Willis Works and Gothic Shop imprints harmonize with the ornamentation in both tone and shape. Italic type and the fleur-de-lis are French in motif. The Caslon type-face and the old-style parentheses go well together. The block, or gothic, type-face in its plainness of stroke suggests early Greek letters, and blends with the plain illustration. The money-bag ornament is an attempt at a pun, in the Stuff imprint. The pleasing gray tone of the Horner & Wilburn device is due to harmony of ornament and type-face.

It’s possible to create really impressive decorative prints using typefounders’ ornaments and matching typefaces. Example 548 shows several designs that demonstrate what can be achieved in this area. While creating these prints, the author kept in mind the rules for combining type and ornament, as discussed in the chapters about harmony, appropriateness, tone, contrast, and ornamentation. In the Church Press design, the border is outlined to reflect the ornament. The types used in the Smith-Brown, Willis Works, and Gothic Shop prints work well with the decoration in both tone and shape. Italic type and the fleur-de-lis have a French influence. The Caslon typeface pairs nicely with the old-style parentheses. The block, or gothic, typeface’s simple strokes evoke early Greek letters and blend with the straightforward illustration. The money-bag ornament is a play on words in the Stuff print. The pleasing gray tone of the Horner & Wilburn device results from the harmony between the ornament and typeface.


The printer will more often be called on to use a small, inconspicuous type-imprint than the prominent decorative device, and it is just as desirable to have distinction in these small type lines as in the elaborate devices. There are grouped in Example 549, a variety of effects suggested for this purpose. The type used in an imprint should harmonize and blend with the typography of the work on which it is used. An imprint in old-style type would not blend with a page set in modern type. It was the custom at one time to electrotype imprint lines so that they could be easily handled, but now the linotype furnishes a convenient method of casting them. It is well, tho, to strengthen the face by having the slugs copper-faced, which work is done by electrotypers.

The printer will frequently need to use a small, subtle type imprint rather than a large decorative element, and it’s just as important to have distinction in these small type lines as in the more elaborate designs. A variety of suggested effects for this purpose are grouped in Example 549. The type used in an imprint should match and blend with the typography of the overall work. An imprint in old-style type wouldn’t blend well with a page set in modern type. It was once common to electrotype imprint lines for easier handling, but now linotype provides a convenient way to cast them. However, it’s a good idea to enhance the appearance by having the slugs copper-faced, which is done by electrotypers.

APPENDIX
Holiday Wishes

Holiday Greetings furnish opportunity for expression of the art of printing. The more than one hundred specimens reproduced in miniature in this section (received by the editors of “The American Printer” from friends) contain many suggestions of typographic interest

Holiday Wishes provide a chance to showcase the art of printing. The over one hundred samples displayed in miniature in this section (sent to the editors of “The American Printer” by friends) include numerous ideas of typographic interest

“Everybody in our house
wishes everybody in your house
a Merry Christmas
and a Happy New Year”

“Everyone in our house
wishes everyone in your house
a Merry Christmas
and a Happy New Year”

“Volumes of good wishes
to friends of ours
from friends of yours”

“Lots of good wishes
to our friends
from your friends”

Christmas:

A time for giving and for getting
and forgiving and forgetting”

Christmas:

A time for giving and receiving
and forgiving and moving on

“May all that thou wishest
and all that thou lovest
come smiling around
thy sunny way”

“May everything you wish for
and everything you love
come smiling your way
along your bright path”

“At Christmas be merry
  And thankful withal,
And feast thy poor neighbors,
  The great with the small”

“At Christmas, be joyful
  And grateful too,
And share a meal with your neighbors,
  Both the rich and the poor.”

“GLORIA IN EXCELSIS
DEO
ET IN TERRA PAX
HOMINIBUS BONAE
VOLUNTATIS”

"GLORY TO GOD IN THE HIGHEST
AND ON EARTH PEACE
TO PEOPLE OF GOOD WILL"

“Ule! Ule!
Three puddings in a pule—
Crack nuts and cry Ule!”

“Ule! Ule!
Three puddings in a bowl—
Crack nuts and shout Ule!”


TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES

  1. Many illustrations may appear to be out of order. The book was in two columns of text. The text read top to bottom then left to right as normal. However, the illustrations were usually numbered left to right then top to bottom. The illustrations were inserted as close as possible in the normal flow of the text. Some illustrations were out of order, e.g. Example 16.
  2. The illustrations are displayed in direct proportion to their size in the original.
  3. Added ‘the’ between ‘of’ and ‘customer’ on p. 119.
  4. Silently corrected typographical errors.
  5. Retained anachronistic and non-standard spellings as printed.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!